Full text of "The Annals and magazine of natural history; zoology, botany, and geology"

See other formats

OG OM
~ ard tint De Oe Pant Sas ~ : re
oS Ria earn ae fo : oes
¢

rene
Tab ee

a te
pe. - Saree

Som $ my - ore Rerereeitiess : ; pane : ‘
peeve ~ Pr cae th . " oiedascaes t oaiye
Se ies

vane es aise = : re

Le
pte ete
ee ae “e Ar "
“e nanos re cate ae APO TOON, ° ° we a f :
et wae Seana ; a v : AN
pee pep Aa ~ s =F PP : Papi
eer aie ted

Sie c f ape me ~ Spa Dade ebob oe Pet Sete pn O-b Bae

ater

THE ANNALS

AND

MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY,

INCLUDING

ZOOLOGY, BOTANY, ann GEOLOGY.

(BEING A CONTINUATION OF THE ‘ANNALS’ COMBINED WITH LOUDON AND
CHARLESWORTH’S ‘ MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY.’)

CONDUCTED BY

ALBERT C. L. G. GUNTHER, M.A., M.D., Ph.D., F.B.S.,
WILLIAM S. DALLAS, F.LS.,
WILLIAM CARRUTHERS, F.RB.S., F.LS., F.G.S.,

AND

WILLIAM FRANCIS, Ph.D., F.L.S.

Lag"
L4AL\OS
\ ational

| Mi useuse 7
LONDON:
PRINTED AND PUBLISHED BY TAYLOR AND FRANCIS.

SOLD BY LONGMANS, GREEN, READER, AND DYER; SIMPKIN, MARSHALL,
AND CO.; KENT AND CO.; WHITTAKER AND CO.: BAILLIERE, PARIS:
MACLACHLAN AND STEWART, EDINBURGH :

HODGES, FOSTER, AND CO., DUBLIN: AND ASHER, BERLIN.

1881.

“ Omnes res create sunt divine sapientiz et potenti testes, divitiz felicitatis
humans :—ex harum usu Jonitas Creatoris; ex pulchritudine sapientia Domini;
ex ceconomia in conservatione, proportione, renovatione, potentia majestatis
elucet. Earum itaque indagatio ab hominibus sibi relictis semper estimata ;
a veré eruditis et sapientibus semper exculta; malé doctis et barbaris semper
inimiea fuit.”—Linnavs.

“Quel que soit le principe de la vie animale, il ne faut qu’ouvrir les yeux pour
voir qu'elle est le chef-d’ceuvre de la Toute-puissance, et le but auquel se rappor-
tent toutes ses opérations.”—Bruckyer, Théorie du Systéme Animal, Leyden,
1767.

Se oaa ona ooo 9 Wi eher joo ens
Obey our summons; from their deepest dells
The Dryads come, and throw their garlands wild
And odorous branches at our feet; the Nymphs
That press with nimble step the mountain-thyme
And purple heath-flower come not empty-handed,
But scatter round ten thousand forms minute
Of velvet moss or lichen, torn from rock
Or rifted oak or cavern deep: the Naiads too
Quit their loved native stream, from whose smooth face
They crop the lily, and each sedge and rush
That drinks the rippling tide: the frozen poles,
Where peril waits the bold adventurer’s tread,
The burning sands of Borneo and Cayenne,
All, all to us unlock their secret stores
And pay their cheerful tribute.
J. Taytor, Norwich, 1818,

CONTENTS OF VOL. VIL.

[FIFTH SERIES. |

NUMBER XXXVILI.

I, Spolia Atlantica: Contributions to the Knowledge of the
Changes of Form in Fishes during their Growth and Development,
especially in the Pelagic Fishes of the Atlantic. By Dr. C. F.
LUTKEN

II. On some new or imperfectly-known Species of Corals from the
Devonian Rocks of France. By H. ALLEYNE NicHotson, M.D., D.Sce.,
F.R.S.E. (Plate 1.)

II. Description of a new Species of Mus from Southern India.
By OLpFIELD Tuomas, F.Z.S., British Museum

oor e err eee ee ee ee eee

IV. Descriptions of certain peculiar Bodies which may be the
Opercula of small Gasteropoda, discovered by Mr. James Bennie in
the Carboniferous Limestone of Law Quarry, near Dalry, Ayrshire,
with Notes on some Silurian Opercula. By R. Eruerines, Jun.
(GPLE CE IIL) © A Cae oI Ini deer Sane ese Maan Melman ich cian i

V. Descriptions of new Species of Lepidoptera in the Collection of
the British Museum. By Artuur G. Bururr, F.L.S., F.Z.S., &e.
Cee ic) mn Gib -o:0 bo NID I DORTORIEIE ol SISO anno RIE Diicinic iy oho

VI. New Neotropical Curculionidee.—Part IV. By Francis P.
ARCO Tp Sal cceart ne eteinae sioteraie ae Wis oie. ciate siento’ e/erreiasieye aguas
VI. On asmall Collection of Crustacea and Pyenogonida from
Franz-Josef Land, collected by B. Leigh Smith, Esq. By EKpwarp
J. Miers, F.L.S., F.Z.S., Assistant in the Zoological Department,
Bertisnt user,» CP bate: VAs yee octet ait slave «ey acevata tars cleretetae miatetete

VIII. Descriptions of new Species of Heteropterous Hemiptera
collected in the Hawaiian Islands by the Rev. T. Blackburn.—No. 3.
By DUCHANAN. WITH, MODS sR TS. acta bo sc ectetetnttete elon erstyt

New Books:—A Treatise on Comparative Embryology. By Francts
M. Batrour, M.A., F.R.S. Vol. 1—Memoirs of the Science
Department, University of Tokio, Japan, Vol.I. Part 1. Shell-

Page

bo
oO

lv CONTENTS.

Page
Mounds of Omori. By Epwarp S. Morssr, &c.—An Intro-
duction to the Study of Fishes. By Axsert C. L. G.
EUNICE Y agera i Siaisi ares ols 6 © ewig emia lero ien ls a4 eine ou ln ataree eis 59—63

On a new Species of Papilio from South India, with Remarks on the
Species allied thereto, by J. Wood-Mason; On a highly organ-
ized Reptile from the Permian Formation, by M. A. Gaudry;
A new Genus of Rodents from Algeria; Researches on the Com-
parative Anatomy of the Nervous System in the different Orders
of the Class of Insects, by M. E. Brandt; Habits of a Fish of

NUMBER XXXVIII.

IX. History and Classification of the known Species of Spongiila.
byl, J. Canter, RS, &e, (lates V.& V1.) 5. s.een anes 77

X. Spolia Atlantica: Contributions to the Knowledge of the
Changes of Form in Fishes during their Growth and Development,
especially in the Pelagic Fishes of the Atlantic. By Dr. ©. F.
LUTKEN .......... Sp soni ie ic as Peabo des Sedna hice 107

XI. Notices of British Fungi. By the Rev. M. J. Berxetry,
F-R:s., and C, E, Brooms, Hsq., FL.S. (Plate IlL.).......55.5. 1238

XII. Ona Collection of Butterflies from Nikko, Central Japan.
Pveee rE Gr, BULLER) BH L35., Bi ZiSs, Gee. «oi cain vee nade. 132

XIII. Note on the Occurrence of Sponge-spicules in Chert from
the Carboniferous Limestone of Ireland. By Prof. W. J. Souuas,
MEAS EE RASH; R06. os eis soe sims mistaisi nels otelearerorh, set erctonie alone aie ae 141

XIV. Recent Dredging by the United-States Fish Commission
off the South Coast of New England, with some Notice of the Crus-
CARER VOPERANECs LSY ji.) dNy SOMITE: ope: oya'evehele sfele a tocsls,apanettiesoielnisce dete . 148

XV. Contributions towards a General History of the Marine
Polyzoa. By the Rev. Toomas Hincxs, B.A., F.R.S. (Plates VIL,

FORO, PRGA) al sarc soteyhn's = lnyotein wrole ser sie loiett Mania a Aes eyes nies se ae 147
XVI. Note on a Central-Asiatic Field-Mouse (Mus arianus), By
WVU, BUAMRO RD, EBs OCCe. caio.s ois. c:ayeists alin oiled Gre» chs Se 162

XVII. On the Origin and Formation of the Flints of the Upper or
White Chalk; with Observations upon Prof. Sollas’s Paper in the
‘Annals and Magazine of Natural History’ for December 1880. By
Surgeon-Major WatLicH, M.D. (Plate XI.) ...........-.0000- ab.

New Book :—A Monograph of the Silurian Fossils of the Girvan
District in Ayrshire. By H. A. Nicuoxson, M.D. &c., and R.
BTEEBIMGE, Jun., Esq, F.G.S.! “Fascienlus su aie. 0.5 be 205

On the Existence of a Reptile of the Ophidian Type in the Beds with
Osirea columba, of the Charente, by M. H. E.Sauvage ; On some
Arctic Holothurida, by MM. D. C. Danielssen and J. Koren, 205, 206

CONTENTS. Vv
NUMBER XXXIX.
Page
XVIII. On some new or little-known Infusoria. By C. MErEscu-
HOVE HeVie ay Clo Letts CMGI soy oy 5. «cl ofa. sense etopstMiatal tere oleh ckotawatel sv clench 209
XIX. On Synaxes, a new Genus of Crustacea. By C. SPENCE
Pe See Se OCC (CL IALOL NEV): o.xcen whe coli sgtieye teadia ni afobe aleeeekals 220
XX. On the first Part of a Memoir by Mons. Charles Oberthiir
on the Lepidoptera of the Isle of Askold. By Anruur G. BuTLER,
sree aM se any OUCs, Aerial ahora dct ot Clo) sbavenalet oh tah tr hhian a at paeeet oat ats eae oe 228
XXI. Contribution to the Knowledge of the Family Tintinnodea.
By Hermann For, Professor in the University of Geneva.
Gila NET ofipias UE, Fahy Sols fotaiel dais te ai aiacciate mace vebe ot okece mre woneve 237
XXII. On Vigquesnelia atlantica, Morelet & Drouet. By Fran-
escomARRupA FourTano, (Plate XU) 15.05 i .jc cis wags depres 250
XXIII. Relation of Devonian Insects to Later and Existing Types.
By SAGMOE EL. SCUDDER. chee .yors cide aps broil sole lela pisielekaiaileterla 55
XXIV. On Siliceous Sponge-growth in the Cretaceous Ocean.
Byesurseon- Major WALLICH, MID. aacsse-s serare ctcheterststersia tla cote nak 261
XXV. On Spongilla cinerea. By H. J. Canter, F.RS. &e. .... 268
XXVI. Further Note on Anomorhynchus (or Colossendeis) Smithit.
yeh waremreds Wires, ESTE S55) BLS 2. oo xpeayerm winnie 0:01 0 on mere) as ab Si sievil 264
Proceedings of the Geological Society ..... 0 se eeusseceeenss 266, 267
New Books :—¥Fossil Sponge-Spicules from the Upper Chalk, found
in the Interior of a Single Flintstone from Horstead, Norfolk.
By G. J. Hing, F.G.8.—Fossil Foraminifera of the Carboni-
ferous Limestone: 1. The Spirally-coiled Foraminifera of the
Carboniferous Limestone of Russia. 2. The Foraminifera of
the Carboniferous Limestone of Russia. By Vatertan Von
Mo.uER, Professor at the Mining Institute——Aid to the Identi-
fication of Insects. Hdited by C. O. WaTErHovuss. Litho-
prrapbis: DyiBis, WW EUSON aarp s ei. coe 0%e ks ih e/a vs slaheye) ls eels 268—272 ~

On the Starfishes dredged in the deeper Regions of the Gulf of
Mexico and the West-Indian Sea by the American Ship ‘ Blake,’
by M. E. Perrier; On the Guliga of Borneo, by A. Hart Everett ;
On the Histology of the Pedicellariz and of the Muscles of
Echinus sphera, Forbes, by MM. P. Geddes and F. E. Beddard ;
On the Formation of the Blastoderm in the Araneida, by M. A.
Sabatier; Actneta dibdalteria, a new Species of Marine Infu-

sorian from the Gulf of Genoa, by Dr. Conrad Parona.... 272—279

vi CONTENTS.

NUMBER XL.

XXVII. Contributions to the Study of the British Paleeozoic Cri-
noids.—No. I. On Allagecrinus, the Representative of a new Family
from the Carboniferous Limestone Series of Scotiand. By P. Hmr-
BERT CARPENTER, M.A., Assistant Master at Kton College, and R.
ErHerGs, Jun., of the Museum of Natural History. (Plates XV.
& XVI.)

XXVIII. Description of a new Longicorn Beetle from Java. By
Beeler ESTUSINIE © a 5. ois.0s: ovatatnaphel ete em iageione atolls atteton ele ure tec ie tat to

XXIX. New Neotropical Curculionidee.—Part V. By Francis
P. Pascoz, F.L.S. &c.

XXX. On the Kunker Formation of the Alluvium in India com-

pared with the Flint Formation in the Chalk of England. By H. J.
CarteER, F.R.S. &e.

XXXI. General Considerations upon the Carcinological Fauna of

great Depths in the Caribbean Sea and Gulf of Mexico. By At-
PHONSE MILNE-EDWARDS

bi iei fe lalfaliabsite) ein a) 6 0).w 6l.e (0 @ 9 tel ei.0 she ete) ews min a, (bi ie) eils\ (ety tage saree) im) Teltelte, ore

2 a0 #0).8.6) 6 8)/8'e\ (sv a, 0110p». »| 00 ee \e |e) #6 @ Mie@) 6). 5\ aN in Pi!
0.0.6: \6: 0). 8, 2.8 (8 @ 16.0 es, 0 ee 0a ee), @ 1 ip ere 6)rete ree, vl le ee sne Lele

XXXII. On a Collection of Nocturnal Lepidoptera from the
Hawaiian Islands. By Artuur G. Butter, F.L.S., F.Z8., &e. ..

XXXIII. Description of Parantirrhea Marshalli, the Type of a
new Genus and Species of Rhopalocerous Lepidoptera from South

India. By J. Woop-Mason, Deputy Superintendent, Indian Mu-
seum, Calcutta

ORF 6, 9, 0s als ee ke (0 che eae wee\e) Mm ollelale isie 6c lu;\a a «ss (9\ © (6 ole te s)\s 0

Proceedings of the Geological Society 33

Aer CL OAT RRR OLER YD Dae RCRCR RRR 336—

GIN aeotajeie« cs 338 —

Proceedings of the Dublin Microscopical Club

New Books :—A History of the Birds of Ceylon. By Capt. W.
VincENT Leaae, h.A.—A Monograph of the Free and Semi-
parasitic Copepoda of the British Islands. By Grorer
SIEWARDSON BRADY, VLDL Wi elwintan amie gate eke 344,

Notes upon the Food of Predaceous Beetles, by F. M. Webster;
Giant Squid (Architeuthis) abundant in 1875 at the Grand
Banks, by A. E. Verrill; On the Histolysis of the Muscles of
the Larva during the Postembryoniec Development of the
Diptera, by M. H. Viallanes; On a new Form of Segmental
Organ in the Trematodes, by M. E. Macé; On the Circulation

281

298

299

508

308

345

and Respiration of the Ophiwride, by M. N. Apostolidés... 848—855

NUMBER XLI.
XXXIV. Seventh Contribution to the Knowledge of the Fauna

of Madagascar. By Dr. ALBERT Ginruer, F.R.S. (Plate XIX.). 3

lated
vv/

XXXYV. Description of a new Species of Frog from Madagascar.
By GA, BOULENGER 25 Gon he xe pe ee eee

XXXVI. Supplementary Report on Specimens dredged up from
the Gulf of Manaar, together with others from the Sea in the
Vicinity of the Basse Rocks and from Bass’s Straits respectively,
presented to the Liverpool Free Museum by Capt. H. Cawne
Warren. By H. J. Carrer, F.R.S. &c. (Plate xviii)

a als (ete ere‘

CONTENTS. Vil

Page
XXXVII. Note on Papilio nebulosus, Butler. By Ltonet pDE
URES PU eth as ote plan oh uc nsyeqel A cw fle ss eaath cies btvmUabe gpa ree nGoeveeS arnt 385

XXXVIII. The Male Eels compared with the Females. By C.
TC OE TIN 90 st Wen ie CACORE 2 Ree | mM eA 386

XXXIX. On a Collection of Nocturnal Lepidoptera from the
Hawaiian Islands. By Arruur G. Butter, F.LS., F.Z.S., &c. .. 392

XL. Descriptions of two new Longicorn Coleoptera and a new
Genus of Dynastidee. By Cuartes O. WATERHOUSE............ 408

XLI. Description of a new Species of the Coleopterous Genus
Dryops from Pekin (Family Parnide). By Cuartes O. WaTER-
TTR orci ere pee ed ae AIS Cae errand i ocin cient cc Eee cabrio 410

XLII. Description of a new Cornuted Species of Cetoniidee from
North-eastern India. By J. Woop-Mason, Deputy Superintendent,

Indian Museum, Calcutta. (Plate XVII. figs. A, B, C.).......... 411
New Book:—Manual of the New-Zealand Coleoptera. By Capt.
SECM ESPOUIN, Gre, 4-516. 5 Gieutanererat oi 8 eal eiacexesal-ahentrert « locales ep aren oe 412
Proceedings of the Royal Institution of Great Britain:—Dr. A.
Wilson on the Origin of Colonial Organisms ...............- 413
Proceedings of the Dublin Microscopical Club.............. 417—423

On the Organs of Taste in the Osseous Fishes, by M. E. Jourdan;
On the Prerochde, by Modest Bogdanow ; Investigation of
certain Points in the Anatomy of Sternaspis scutata, by M.
Max. Rietsch; The Bears of the Cavern of Lherm, by M. H.
TILT] RE Ss ae ecm dele PS ie ls SRA a eee ts car Soe OMA 423—428

NUMBER XLII.

XLII. On Palospinax priscus, Egerton. By James W. Davis,
AEUNGhe fort Bice EASEC NE Nic Jina a slaiei alt a.2 tye'ayejn otafnlein’s Wueieia) os eysiat ais ehsiohe 429

XLIV. On the originally Bilateral Character of the Renal Organ
of Prosobranchia, and on the Homologies of the Yelk-sac of Cepha-
lopoda. By E. Ray Lanxesrer, M.A., F.RS., &e., Jodrell Pro-
fessor of Zoology in University College, London...........6++00- 432

XLV. The Structure and Affinities of Euphoberia, Meek and
Worthen, a Genus of Carboniferous Myriopoda. By Samuxt H.
Ree CRINEPIEEE tl co, oA Sie oe om ee IRAP ele se « c's nio)s iv hal nike oie cual ote anae 437

XLVI. Polyzoa, Coelenterata, and Sponges of Franz-Joseph Land.
By Sruarr O. Ripuey, B.A., F.L.S., Assistant in the Zoological
Department, British Museum. (Plate XXL.) ......-........5.. 442

XLVIL. On some Indian Coleoptera, chiefly from Travancore.
By CHares O. WATERHOUSE. .. 21+. 66sec recente eee e eee ens 457

XLVIII. On some Buprestide from Australia. By CHariEs O.
VAT NTOUSHS ooicccse sc s0 vas dei ceb Qexleainateieisle taaielely cosa uteih g 462

vill CONTENTS.

Page
XLIX. Mr. Butler on Butterflies from Japan. By H. J. Ewes,
Oe gis is ace ots soe ose Veh Mew at eeEEe DO eee 464
L. Description of a new Species of Mole from China. By Onp-
Reo: THomas, F'.Z.8., British Museums oi gecc ceca e dite wns e sions 469
LI. Remarks on a Pathogenic Schizophyte. By Prof. H. J.
DEYMERS «1.61. ee eect eee rere eee n ence tent eee eenseeenas 471
Proceedings of the Geological Society .........ceeseeueees 481—484

New Book ;—A Memoir on the Echinodermata of the Arctic Sea to
the West of Greenland. By P. Martin Duncan, M.B. (Lond.),
F.R.S8., &c., and W. Percy SuapEn, F.G8., F.L.S., &....... 485

Discovery of a Fossil Bird in the Jurassic of Wyoming, by O. C.
Marsh ; Regeneration of lost Parts in the Squid (Loligo Pealet),
by A. KE. Verrill; Note on Wardichthys cyclosoma, Traq., by
Thomas Stock, Natural-History Department, Museum of Science
and Art, Edinburgh ; On the Anatomy of Pyrosoma, by M. L.
Joliet; Investigation of certain Points in the Anatomy of Ster-
naspis scutata (Second Note), by M. Max. Rietsch ...... 488—493

1 Gao E>). dee PR are CO EA AL en pees ot eae a's rp ule «aml SME os 496

PLATES IN VOL. VIL.

Prater I. New Corals from the Devonian Rocks of France.
II. Fossil Opercula (?) of small Gasteropoda.
III. New British Fungi.
IV. New Asiatic Butterflies.

us New Species of Spongilla.

VI
VU. Crustacea and Pyenogonida from Franz-Josef Land.
‘VIL.
| New Polyzoa,
a

XI. Formation of Flints.
XII. New Infusoria.
XIII. Anatomy of Viquesnelia atlantica.
XIV. Synaxes hybridica.
XV.
XVI.
XVII. New Species of Tintinnus—Mycteristes microphyllus,
XVIII. New Spongida from the Gulf of Manaar.
XIX. Chameleon O’Shaughnessii.
XX. Palsospinax priscus.
XXI. Polyzoa and Sponges from Franz-Josef Land.

Structure of Allagecrinus.

THE ANNALS

AND

MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY.

[FIFTH SERIES.]

Ut eScagbangsccaSntce per litora spargite muscum,
Naiades, et circitm vitreos considite fontes:
Pollice virgineo teneros hic carpite flores:
Floribus et pictum, dive, replete canistrum.
At vos, o Nymphee Craterides, ite sub undas ;
Ite, recurvato variata corallia trunco
Vellite muscosis e rupibus, et mihi conchas
Ferte, De pelagi, et pingui conchylia succo.””

NV. Parthenti Giannettasti Ecl. 1.

No. 37. JANUARY 1881.

I.—Spolia Atlantica: Contributions to the Knowledge of
the Changes of Form in Fishes during their Growth and
Development, especially in the Pelagic Fishes of the At-
lantic. By Dr. C. F. LtrTKen*.

In this memoir I furnish a series of contributions to the know-
ledge of the ichthyological fauna of the high seas, principally
of the Atlantic, as also to that of the hemimetamorphoses
of various sea-fishes, and especially of the pelagic fishes. The
changes of form and of other characters which many fishes
present during their growth and development are still but
little known, and have never been described in a connected
manner, although in many cases they are so great and so
strongly marked that they have given rise to the establish-
ment of a considerable number of species and genera, which,
as a matter of course, will disappear from the system so soon
as their true relationships have been recognized. ‘This me-
moir is, at the same time, to be regarded as an attempt on
the part of the author to employ scientifically a portion of the
abundant materials, consisting of small fishes and young

* Translated by W. S. Dallas, F.L.S., from a copy sent by the author
of the French summary of Dr. Liitken’s memoir, read before the Academy

of Sciences of Copenhagen.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. vii. 1

2 Dr. C. F. Liitken on the Changes of Form in Fishes

forms, especially pelagic, which, during a long series of years
and by means of well-directed and persevering efforts, have
been collected by Danish naturalists and by officers of the
Danish royal and commercial navies. Of course, whenever
I have thought it necessary for completing my investigations
and making comparisons with analogous cases, I have also
studied the changes produced by age in non-pelagic fishes ;
and equally, of course, the criticism of the genera and species
to which this study has given rise has led to discussions and
digressions of various nature, as also to the creation of some
new species and genera. It follows that, while this memoir
is especially a contribution to the knowledge of the pelagic
ichthyological fauna, particularly of the intertropical Atlantic,
it is also indirectly a contribution to that of the ichthyology
of the deeper strata of the high seas; for the inhabitants of
these depths, in the first phases of their development, very
frequently ascend, especially during the night, into the
warmer strata of the surface; and they are then taken in the
net ; or, when they are a little older, we meet with them in the
stomachs of dolphins, or of voracious fishes such as the dora-
dos, bonitos, albacores, barracoutas, sharks, &c. But the
principal object of this memoir is to call attention to what I
eall the hemimetamorphoses of fishes, a phenomenon of which
the pelagic fishes in particular present so many remarkable
examples... In adopting this expression it is not, however,
my intention to introduce into science a new notion or a new
term; I employ it solely to characterize briefly the changes
which are produced during growth and development, which
in many eases are so considerable that they have led to the
complete misunderstanding of the genus, nay, often even of
the tamily to which the young individuals belong. I hope
by this means to profit science by a series of rectifications
consisting in great part in the reduction of genera and species
which are based only upon young, transitory forms. In many
cases I shall thus be led simply to confirm or extend the ob-
servations of my predecessors, in other cases to reject or
rectify conjectures or combinations whieh are destitute of
foundation. One of the consequences of a work of this
nature may perhaps also be that, in future, we shall proceed
with more circumspection and critical judgment in esta-
blishing new species and genera, considering the possibility
that the differences which may be recognized are due solely
to differences of age. The mistake has only too often been
made of regarding the latter as specific or generic differences ;
and this, in general, has rendered the estimation of the true
distinctive characters all the more difficult.

during their Growth and Development. 3

In the following summary of the principal facts and results
which are set forth in my memoir, I have followed the order
of the chapters in the Danish text.

1. DACTYLOPTERUS and CEPHALACANTHUS.

As is well known, M. Canestrini has endeavoured to prove
that Cephalacanthus spinarella (Pungitius pusillus) is the
young form of Dactylopterus. ‘This opinion was apparently
well founded ; but it has been contested by M. Steindachner,
principally with the argument that we may meet with Dacty-
dopter? a little smaller than the largest of those which still pre-
sent the characters of Cephalacanthus. Having had at my
disposal, on the one hand, a series of twenty-five specimens of
Dactylopterus volitans of all sizes, from 380 to 47 millims.
in length, the last with the wings still short, and, on the other
hand, almost as many of Cephalacanthus spinarella (twenty-
three), also of all sizes, from 49 to 8 millims. long, I have
studied in these two series all the characters subject to modi-
fications arising from differences of age, in order to discover
whether the changes which the Cephalacanthi had undergone
enabled us to ascend to the Dactyloptert, and reciprocally
those of the latter to descend to the Cephalacanthi, or whether
these fishes constituted two series of forms independent of
each other. The result of these comparisons (for the details
of which I must refer the reader to the Danish memoir) has
been, so far as I am concerned, an absolute confirmation of
M. Canestrini’s hypothesis. We may certainly find Cepha-
lacanthi a little larger than the smallest Dactylopteri; but
this is easily explained by the fact that the metamorphosis
properly so called, which no doubt takes place comparatively
quickly, does not always occur precisely when the young fish
has attained a definitive length (about 50 millims.), but may,
according to circumstances, occur ina given individual a little
sooner or a little later. It may be added that the localities
(latitude and longitude) where our young Dactylopteri or so-
called Cephalacantht were taken seem to prove that this
genus possesses the character of a semipelagic genus in a
greater degree than has hitherto been supposed. It appears
also, from the investigation that I have made of its develop-
ment, that the small anterior part of the pectoral fins in
Dactylopterus is, properly speaking, the superior and not the
inferior part, as has hitherto generally been stated.

2. RHYNCHICHTHYS, RHINOBERYX, and RHAMPHOBERYX ;
HOLocENTRUM and MyRIpRIsrTIS.

The hypothesis has already been advanced that Rhynchich-
1*

4 Dr. C. F. Liitken on the Changes of Form in Fishes

thys pelamidis, ©. & V., and other species of Rhynchichthys
subsequently established are young Holocentra (or Myri-
pristes) ; and the correctness of this view is now confirmed by
the circumstance that it has been possible to refer several small
examples of “ Rhynchichthys” and “ Rhinoberyx” of diffe-
rent ages, fished in the western part of the intertropical
Atlantic, to a definite species of Holocentrum, the H. maria-
num of the Antilles, which, however, has hitherto been very
imperfectly described. We are acquainted with it now in all
the phases of its development :—asthe true Holocentrum, young
and adult; as ‘“ Rhinoberyx,” a phase intermediate between
the Holocentrum and the ‘ Rhynchichthys ;” and, finally, in
this last and very young state.

In the Danish memoir I have described in much detail the
characters of the species in each of these phases, comparing
them both among themselves and with the corresponding
states of Holocentrum sogho, another common West-Indian
species, of which we possess an almost equally complete series
of forms. The “ Lhamphoberyx” is probably the corre-
sponding young form of Myripristis. These three genera
(Rhynchichthys, Rhinoberyx, and Rhamphoberyx) must there-
fore be suppressed, with the species belonging to them ; and
we may say the same of certain species such as Holocentrum
platyrhinum, which are also young forms of which the trans-
formation is not completed, but which, instead of being referred
to separate genera, have only been placed in a special group
of the genus Holocentrum.

But at the same time I have been able to recognize a phase
of development anterior to that which serves as the basis of
the genus Rhynchichthys. A small fish, 7 millims. long, which
is undoubtedly the young form of a West-Indian Holocentrum,
perhaps even of H. marianum, is distinguished from the true
“ Rhynchichthyes” by a forked beak, the comparatively great
length of which is equal to twice the diameter of the eye, and
by the occipital spine, which is very strongly developed, as
well as those of the preeoperculum, which last extend much
beyond the ventral fins, as far as the middle of the anal. Our
museum possesses very young larve of Berycide (that is to
say Lthynchichthyes) from the Indian Ocean, which much re-
semble the preceding form; but in others, which otherwise
have an analogous structure, the beak, which is sometimes
comparatively short and sometimes extremely elongated, does
not present the remarkable division in the form of a fork.
Considering the numerous representatives of this family in the
Indian seas, it is impossible at present to determine these
young forms more exactly.

during their Growth and Development. 5

The primordial but transitory characters which distinguish
the young Holocentra and Myripristes are therefore :—1. The
more or less excessive prolongation of the bones of the snout
in the form of a pointed beak, entire or cleft in two, with
denticulated edges, and comparatively as large as the sword
of the swordfish; and 2. The colossal development of the
occipital and preeopercular spines, as also, in part, of those of
the operculum. ‘These spines, however, soon disappear or
become reduced to more modest proportions, or to perfectly
insignificant rudiments.

3. TETRAGONURUS.

This very characteristic genus, which is thoroughly pelagic
and probably bathyphilous, inhabits the Atlantic, where it is
frequently found in the stomachs of large voracious fishes or

‘dolphins ; and young individuals are often taken by the net.
Tetragonurus atlanticus, Lowe, is certainly specifically iden-
tical with ZT. Cuviert, K. The differences they present are
in part purely individual, in part differences arising from age.
Young individuals (82-62 millims.), leaving out of considera-
tion certain modifications in the relative proportions of the
parts of the body, which are mentioned in detail in the Danish
memoir, are distinguished (1) by the spinous or denticulate
opercular and preeopercular bones, and (2) by the different
character of the seales, which much resemble those of the
young swordfish, and have only a single sharp keel (the scales
of the lateral line, however, have two), which terminates in
two or three spines recurved backward, giving the young
Tetragonurus a rough or villous aspect. ‘The youngest ex-
amples (16 millims.) have neither scales nor spines on the
skin; and their ventral fins are extremely sbort, nay, even
rudimentary. I have also discussed the question of the place
to be assigned to Tetragonurus in the true natural system.
We shall seek in vain for indications of relationship with
Mugil or Atherina ; the proposition of Lowe and Swainson
to refer it to the Scomberoids is perhaps that which is most
in accordance with nature.

4, X1PHIAS and HistiopHorus (TETRAPTURUS).

The young forms of the Xiphioids are already so well
known, thanks especially to Dr. Giinther’s communications,
that the series of small individuals of the two types that I
have had at my disposal do not enable me to add much that
is new; nevertheless I have been able to carry the evolution
of the two groups a little further, to a phase which must be
very near the exclusion from the egg. The two principal

6 Dr. C. F. Liitken on the Changes of Form in Fishes

types (Xtphias and Histiophorus) differ from each other quite
as much in their youth as at a later period in the external
characters and the structure of the skeleton. I have already
shown elsewhere (Vidensk. Medd. f. d. naturh. For. 1875)
that of these two types the Histiophori represent the typical
group properly so called, or the central group, whilst the
Xiphie must be regarded as a divergent branch or ‘ aber-
rant type,” and that the species, so far as one can form an
opinion upon this point from the data furnished by the litera-
ture, seem to be few in number, less numerous, in fact, than
has hitherto been supposed, but that they are almost cosmo-
politan in their geographical distribution. Probably we know
only five in all—namely, two Tetrapturt, two Histiophort,
and one Xiphias. Machera, C. & V., is in every respect a
true Histiophorus without ventral fins ; and we cannot help sus-
pecting that the asserted absence of the latter is founded upon
an error or due to the preparer. The small species of Histéo-
phorus which have been established, H. immaculatus, Riipp.,
and H. pulchellus, C. & V., are evidently only young forms
(they measure respectively 18 and 4 inches), of no true specific
value; and H. pulchellus particularly closely approaches the
young Histiophori of 53 to 60 millims. length, examined by
Dr. Giinther and by myself. For these last I refer the reader
to the Danish text, the most important facts relating to them
being already known; but some remarks upon the young
Xiphie, and upon the characteristic differences which distin-
guish them from the voung Histiophort, will be necessary.
Thus, one of our young swordfish (Xiphias) 190 millims.
long, found in the stomach of an albacore, and consequently
imperfectly preserved, has a very slender form ; the mandible
is only 12 millims. shorter than the rostrum, which is convex
above and flat beneath, like that of a Tetrapturus, and twice
as broad as high; the branchiz present nothing remarkable,
and consequently have not yet acquired the character which
distinguishes those of the Xiphioids. The two jaws are well
armed with comparatively strong teeth. All the body (inclu-
ding the head and the rostrum) 1s clothed with non-imbricated
scales, which are keeled and ciliated—that is to say, furnished
with spines or teeth upon the keel. ‘Two rows of these scales,
which strike one by their size, extend along the back on each
side of the dorsal fin, and two others along the belly on each
side of the anal fin. ‘The scales are still very distinct in the
young Aiphias gladius 700 millims. long, in which one may
even easily recognize and trace the rows of large scales above
mentioned; on the other hand, this covering, at least as re-
gards the teeth of the scales, occurs even in the youngest

during their Growth and Development. 7

Xiphias observed, 10 millims. in length. In contrast to this,
all the young Mistéophort, from 54 to 100 millims., are com-
pletely naked and destitute of scales. Thus we cannot com-
pare with the scales of the young Xiphie those of the adult
fistiophort and Tetraptur?, which are perfectly homologous
with those of the Thynnoids. The young examples of X.
gladius, from 37 to 57 millims., are adorned with transverse
bands, like many other small Scomberoids; the frontal mar-
gins and the preoperculum are denticulated ; and the latter is
also, in the youngest individuals, furnished with a group of
spines, as in many other young Scomberoids. We never find
in them any traces of ventral fins, whilst these are never
wanting in the Histiophor?, and always occur, in a rudimentary
state, even in the youngest. Then, in the youngest Xiphias,
the head is flat without presenting the sudden depression of
the forehead which characterizes the Histiophor?, the rostrum
is short, and broad at the base, and the mandible as long as
the upper jaw. Finally, the X¢phie, in all their successive
stages, present nothing comparable to the occipital and pre-
opercular spines, so enormously developed in the young His-
tiophori, and which resemble those of the Dactylopter?.

It would be far from natural to exclude the Xiphioids from
the great family Scomberoidei, in which they tind their most
strongly marked affinity in the genus Acanthocybium (vide
infra, p. 12). The more detailed classification of the
Scomberoidei has still to be settled. As to ranging them
with Cottoidei (‘‘ Cotto-Scombriformes ”’) I have never been
able to convince myself that there was any thing just and
natural in that classification.

5. TRICHIURUS and GEMPYLUS.

Under the denomination of Trichiuride Dr. Giinther has
united two tribes which are certainly related in a certain
degree, but which nevertheless are clearly distinguished from
each other. These are the true Trichiuride (Zrichiurus,
Lepidopus, Aphanopus, and Huoxymetopon) and the Gempy-
lide or Thyrsitides (Gempylus, Prometheus, Epinnula, Nesi-
archus, Nealotus, and Thyrsites). 'The latter must be united
with the Thynnide, but may nevertheless form a secondary
group among them.

With regard to the genus Trichiurus I will, in the first
place, remark that the species that it includes at present do
not all appear to me capable of being maintained; but I shall
not pronounce a definite opinion upon this point, as the mate-
rials at my command are insufficient. It is evident that the
two types represented by 7. lepturus and T. muticus differ

8 Dr. C. F. Liitken on the Changcs of Form in Fishes

in a whole series of well-marked characters, but that the
generic separation between the Lepturt (Trichiurus lepturus
and the allied species) and the Hupleurogrammi (T. muticus)
proposed by Gill is unnecessary, and therefore to be rejected.
The specific difference between 7. lepturus of the Atlantic
and 7’. haumela of the Indian Ocean seems to me not to
repose upon a very solid basis; and how far the latter is
really a species distinct from 7. savala is a question which |
shall also leave undecided. But there are two points which
merit attention, namely :—1, that 7. muticus also occurs in
the Atlantic, where it had not hitherto been indicated (I have
before me a specimen from Cuba which I am unable to dis-
tinguish from those from Tranquebar); and 2, that in a
Trichiurus (haumela?) 52 millims. long, from Java, | have
found, in the place of the ventrals, which are usually deficient,
two denticulated spines 2 millims. in length (just as, for
example, in the young Prometheus atlanticus). ‘These spines,
which evidently represent the ventrals, probably exist in all
the young Trichiurd; but they persist only in 7. muticus, in
the shape of small rudiments in the form of scales, and disap-
pear entirely in the other species.

The Gempylides and the Thyrsitides present an osteological
peculiarity which has generally passed unnoticed ; I refer to
a system of dermal ribs, or subcutaneous accessory ribs, com-
posed of delicate bony filaments, placed pretty close together,
which are directed backwards, and both upwards and down-
wards, and start from the median line on both sides of the
body, forming acute angles with each other. I have observed
them in Thyrsites atun (chilensis), in Nealotus tripes, and in
both large and small examples (down to a total length of
78 millims.) of Gempylus serpens. I have been able to study
the last-named species, which is essentially pelagic and rare
in museums, in all the phases of its development, from a
length of about 1 metre down to a total length of only
9 millims., a phase which must have almost immediately
succeeded the hatching of the egg. The species established,
namely G. coluber (genus Zyphothyca of Swainson) and G.
or Prometheus (Nealotus) ophidianus, Poey, do not differ
specifically from G. serpens; but the characters of this genus
are not correctly indicated, even in the most recent works.
Thus the skin is not entirely destitute of scales: we find in
it a rudiment of the “ corselet,” not only behind the eyes, but
also at the root of the tail; and from this point the clothing
of scales continues in part for a small extent along the infe-
rior lateral line, in part for a greater extent along the back,
forming a band which is limited inferiorly by the superior

during their Growth and Development. 9

lateral line, which in the anterior part of the body unites
with the inferior, at a point situated beneath the first dorsal
spine. The palatine bones in their posterior part are armed
each with three or four small teeth; and the ventrals are
formed by one spinous and four soft rays. In the earliest
phases of their development the Gempyli have so different a
physiognomy that it would be difficult or impossible to recog-
nize them for what they are if one did not know the interme-
diate stages. The body is short and thick-set; the first
dorsal attains its greatest elevation in front, and then decreases
rapidly ; we find two free spines in front of the anal fin; the
denticulated spines of the ventrals are comparatively very
long, as long as (and even longer than) the spines of the dorsal;
there are neither scales nor lateral line; nor are the finlets
distinguishable ; the operculum and preoperculum are spi-
nous. For what relates to the course of the development
and transformation I refer the reader to the figures on pl. ii.
fof the Danish memoir]. I have also described and figured
some very analogous stages of development in a fish of the
Thyrsites tribe, perhaps Nealotus tripes. Dicrotus armatus,
Giinther, is certainly an analogous transitory form, probably
of Prometheus atlanticus.

6. TuHynnus; OrcyNnus; PeLAmMys; CyzBium and
ACANTHOCYBIUM.

In the group Thynnide I distinguish the following genera: —
Orcynus, Thynnus, Auaxis, Orcynopsis, Pelamys, Cybium, and
Acanthocybium. I must leave on one side certain other genera
which have been established, because I do not know them—
tor example the genera Grammatorcynus, Gill (Thynnus bi-
lineatus), Lepidocybium and Apodontis, Benn.; the separation
of these two last genera from Cybiwm seems to me, however,
to be not well founded. Gymnosarda Gill (Pelamys nuda)
will no doubt prove to be a synonym of Orcynopsis, G. (Pela-
mys unicolor = Thynnus peregrinus, Coll.*); even the specific
ditferences which serve as the basis of these two genera are
rather uncertain, and will need to be confirmed, although one
of the two species is a native of the Mediterranean (it has been
once found in the North Sea) and the other of the Red Sea.

I retain the name of Zhynnus} for “the small tunnies,”

* M. Giglioli has recently proposed for this genus the name of Pela-
michthys, which, however, must yield priority to that proposed by Mr.
Gill. ;

+ M.Giglioli designates this generic division by the name of Thynnich-
thys, a very happy denomination, but one which has already been
employed for a genus of Cyprinoids,

10 Dr. C. F. Liitken on the Changes of Form in Fishes

the bonito (7. pelamys) and T. thunnina, a species from
which 7. affinis probably does not differ; and I reserve that
of Orcynus for “the large tunnies ’”—that is to say, the true
tunny (O. thynnus) and the “germon” or albacore of our
sailors (0. germo), a species which is rendered recognizable
by the long pectorals and the prolongation in a sabre-like
form, in the adult, of the second dorsal and the anal. These
four species are all extremely cosmopolitan in their geogra-
phical distribution (which also seems to be the case, although
in a less degree, with Ausis); those of the whole group
which have the pelagic character most strongly marked are
Orcynus germo and Thynnus pelamys. A critical revision of
the species described under other names, a revision founded
on the comparison of individuals of different sizes belonging
to several of the four principal types above mentioned, has
convinced me, or at least rendered it very probable, that
most of these species must be eliminated, as resting only upon
quite secondary differences, to a great extent arising from age.
Thus 7. brachypterus is without the least doubt nothing
but a young form of Oreynus thynnus, and T. brevipennis a
still younger form of the same, or rather a corresponding form
of 7. thunnina. I must here remark that the want of the
swimming-bladder, which is generally attributed to the true
tunny, is apparently founded on a mistake; it is described
in detail by M. Malm in his ‘ Fauna of Bohuslin.’ Further,
I have no hesitation in identifying Thynnus secundodorsalis,
Storer, and H. orientalis from Japan with O. thynnus ; Thyn-
nus coretta is a form intermediate between Orcynus thynnus
and 7. brachypterus, and may consequently also be struck
out of the catalogue. With Oreynus germo ( pacificus), again,
I identity 7. alalonga, albacora, argentivittatus, balteatus,
sibi, and macropterus, which inhabit different parts of the
great ocean; but I hesitate about including in this suppression
of species O. subulatus, Poey, of Cuba, and O. pacificus, Cooper,
of California,—the former on account of its pectorals, which
are singularly short for an albacore; the latter, on the con-
trary, on account of extraordinary prolongation of these same
fins. At any rate the characters ascribed to these two forms of
albacores require confirmation in this respect. As to the generic
separation of the albacores, with long pectorals, from the true
tunnies, with shorter pectorals, there seems at present no
reason for making it. rom these forms, which I unite under
the generic denomination of Orcynus, the “small tunnies”
(Thynnus s. str. m.) differ:—1, by the absence of teeth on
the vomer, a character which has hitherto passed entirely un-
noticed, but to which, in the group of the ‘Thynnide, generic

—3

during their Growth and Development. 11

value has generally been accorded; 2, by the complete absence
of scales outside the corselet, whilst in the Orcynz of the same
size the skin is already clothed with small scales, the conse-
quence of which is that the limits of the “corselet” in the
adult tunny and albacore are somewhat cbscure, so that,
properly speaking, we cannot say there is a distinct corselet
in those species ; 3, by an important osteological character,
namely the special development, in the form of a net or trellis,
of a portion of the abdominal part of the vertebral column
between the vertebra properly so called and the hemapo-
physes, a development which has already been described by
Cuvier. This organization is common to Z. thunnina and
T. pelamys, and occurs in a modified form in Auzxis, while
in this respect Orcynus germo presents essentially the same
character as O. thynnus and the species belonging to the
genera Cybium and Pelamys. Whether this is or is not the
case in Urcynopsis (unicolor) is unknown; but there is reason
to suppose that it presents some of the characters belonging to
Auais and to Thynnus (m.).

Pelamys chilensis and P. orientalis are certainly not dif-
ferent species, any more than Thyrsites chilensis and T. atun.
It is by error also that a corselet of scales has been denied to
the genus Cybium; this is already distinct in very young
individuals, and extends, in the usual way, round the base of
the pectorals and ventrals, along the dorsals, &c.; but, it is
true, it is less apparent than in the other Thynnoids. ‘The
species included in ‘the genus Cybiwm differ in general by
rather insignificant characters, which, however, seem to be
more constant than might have been expected. ‘There is
therefore no reason for reducing them in the same proportion
as the species of the Thynnus-Orcynus group ; moreover it
would appear that they are far from being so pelagic as the
species belonging to the latter group. Among the species of
Cybium proper inhabiting the Atlantic, | have been able to
distinguish without difficulty C. caballa (of which C. imma-
culatum is no doubt the young form), C. regale, and C. macu-
latum; C. acervum is a young C. regale, and has nothing to
do with C. caballa.

There is, however, a species of Cybcwm which must be
generically separated from the rest, namely the large truly
pelagic and rather rare Thynnoid, attaining a length of more
than seven feet, which our sailors call the “ barracotta,” and
of which they have sometimes brought us the head and caudal
fin; it is met with in the Atlantic north and south of the
equator, in the Mediterranean, and in the Pacific Ocean, but
much more rarely than the bonitos and albacores. It is the

12 Dr. C. F. Liitken on the Changes of Form in Fishes

Cybium Solandri, C. & V.,C. petus, Poey, the type of the genus
Acanthocybium, Gill, and recently described by M. Doderlein
under the name of C. Verany. ‘This genus is clearly distin-
guished from the true Cybtwm :—1, by the long and pointed
torm of the head, in which the mandible is longer than the
upper jaw, the cleft of the mouth reaches only to beneath the
eye, and the posterior part of the maxillary is not visible but
concealed by the suborbital plate ; the jaws are armed with a
close series of cutting-teeth lancet-shaped and finely crenu-
lated; 2, by the branchiz, which exactly resemble those of
Xiphias, their leaves being soldered together in the form of a
network ; 3, by the distance between the points of the caudal
fin, which scarcely exceeds the length of the head, &c. That
Acanthocybium is the Thynnoid form most nearly approaching
the swordfish is shown by the peculiar modification of the
branchiz and the prolongation of the intermaxillaries, which,
if more developed, would become the short rostrum of Tetrap-
turus belone. 'This genus thus acquires peculiar importance
from a systematic point of view ; and a detailed investigation
of the still unknown structure of its skeleton would be espe-
cially desirable.

I have regarded as belonging to Orcynus germo some small
Thynnoids of 8-17 millims. long, fished in the open sea.
The corselet and the keels of the tail are wanting; the finlets
are only just indicated in the largest specimen, and are not
distinct ; there is no trace of them in the others, which
are distinctly heterocercal and perfectly colourless, with the
exception of the eyes and the first dorsal, which are black.
The preeoperculum is armed with spines in all.

7. CORYPHANA EQUISETIS, L., C. HIPPURUS, L., and
C. FASCIOLATA, Pall.

The genus Coryphena (the ‘ dolphins,” as our sailors call

them) is one of those which have the pelagic character most
strongly marked ; at the same time it furnishes an example
instar omnium of the extreme confusion that has resulted from
the circumstance that a really very limited number of exist-
ing species has been broken up into a great number of nominal
species which are based only upon differences of age and sex,
upon individual peculiarities, different geographical localities,
incorrect drawings, imperfect descriptions, &c., a confusion
for which, however, George Cuvier has been wrongly made
personally responsible. ‘The error committed in dividing the
species into two genera, Coryphena and Lampugus, has
already been rectified by a competent authority ; and the
number of species reputed well established has, at the same

during their Growth and Development. 13

time, been reduced from nineteen to six. I have no doubt,
however, that this number is still too great, and that it must
be limited to two or, at the most, to three—the two old
Linnean species, “the great dorado” (C. hippurus), which
attains a length of nearly 2 metres, and “ the little dorado ”
(C. equisetis), the size of which does not exceed 2? feet. In
the Danish text | have given comparative characters of the
two species, taking into account especially the changes which
they undergo with age during their growth, as well as those
which, at least in C. equisetis, are a consequence of sex, and
I have illustrated by figures the modifications which are pro-
duced in the two species in the form of the head. Most of the
species described and figured by authors may, without much ~
difficulty, be referred to the two cosmopolitan species in
question, which our sailors have frequently brought us, and
which are the only ones that they have been able to present
tous. J must, however, speak with some little reserve of
the C. pelagica (azorica, sicula) of the Mediterranean, which
has been adopted by most of the authors who have paid
attention to the ichthyology of that sea, but which, neverthe-
less, probably does not differ specifically from C. hippurus,
L.; at least [ was obliged to regard as a young individual of
the latter species a small ‘‘ C. pelagica” from the Mediter-
ranean which was kindly submitted to my examination under
the above name by an Italian museum. In support of my
opinion, that in reality there exist only two species of Cory-
phena, 1 will cite two other circumstances :—one that Dr.
Giinther (although he formally recognizes more) really re-
fers allthe specimens at his disposal to these two species, and
thus in fact only recognizes these; the other, that I have
been able without difficulty to arrange the numerous exam-
ples of young Coryphenw from 18 to 62 millims. long, cap-
tured by our mariners, in two series representing two species,
and to refer these series to the two species in question and to
no others—namely, the more numerous one to C. eguisetis, and
the less numerous to C.héppurus. Further, the young Cory-

hene have so little resemblance to the adults in the matter
of habit, that they may easily give rise to mistakes; it is
thus that a young C. hippurus was described by Pallas under
the name of C. fasciolata. I have given comparative descrip-
tions of young individuals of the two species in their successive
stages and in their relations to the adults; and I shall here
contine myself to referring to the figures on my pl. i., only
remarking that the greater length of the ventrals in C. hip-
purus, and especially their attachment beneath the pectorals,
more forward than in C. equisetis, furnish one of the best

14 Dr. H. A. Nicholson on some new or

means of separating from each other the young individuals of
the two species, and agree with one of the hest distinctive
characters of the adults. The very small examples of both
species not only have the preoperculum furnished with spines,
but they have also a scapular spine and a postsupraorbital
spine on each side. The larger specimens have a rather elon-
gate form, but are at the same time pretty thick, and not
compressed as at a later period; the dorsal, which is compara-
tively rather low, originates, in the adult C. equisetis, at a
point not far distant from the posterior margin of the eye,
in young individuals above the posterior margin of the pree-
operculum, in still younger individuals between the latter
and the gill-cleft, in the adult C. hippurus above the posterior
margin of the pupil, in the youngest individuals above the
gill-cleft, &e. The system of coloration which distinguishes
the different ages of these two species will be easily under-
stood by the aid of the figures.

[To be continued. |

II.—On some new or imperfectly-known Species of Corals
from the Devonian Rocks of France. By U. ALLEYNE
Nicuoxson, M.D., D.Se., F.R.S.E.

[Plate I. }

Some little time ago M. Daniel Céhlert, the able Curator of
the Museum of Natural History in Laval, was good enough
to send me for examination and determination a number of
corals from the inferior Devonian deposits of the neighbour-
hood of Laval, the stratigraphical and _ paleontological
relations of these deposits having been made by him a subject
of special study. Among the specimens contained in the
collection submitted to me were some entirely new forms, as
well as some which have not yet been fully worked out; and
I propose on the present occasion, in accordance with M.
(Ehlert’s wish, to give a brief description of the more im-
portant and striking of these.

Endophyllum Chlerti, Nich.

Spec. char. Corallum composed of subcylindrical coral-
lites, which are either not in contact at all or, at most, touch
each other only at limited portions of their circumference.
The diameter of the corallites along their longest axis is from
20 to 25 millims. Each corallite is enveloped in a distinct

imperfectly-known Species of Corals. 15

epitheca, which, though not thick, is provided with irregular,
somewhat sharp- edged, closely-set annulations, and is marked
with faint longitudinal or costal ridges. The exterior zone
of the corallum for a width of trom 3 to 4 millims. is made up

Thin sections of Endophyllum Céhlerti, Nich., enlarged rather more
than twice. A. Transverse section of a corallite, showing the outer
vesicular zone and the inner tabulate area, the latter intersected by the
septa. B. Vertical section of the same, showing the same two areas:
the bending upwards of the tabulz in the outer part of the inner area is
here well shown, and the cut edges of a number of the septa, in the form
of longitudinal lines, are also exhibited, owing to the fact that the section
is slightly excentric ; on the left-hand corner of the figure a part of the
exterior vesicular zone has been restored.

of large-sized, irregularly-shaped lenticular vesicles, which in
vertical sections (fig. B) are seen to be directed with their
longest axes passing obliquely downwards from the circum-
ference towards the internal wall. Their greatest length
varies from 1 to 5 or 6 millims. The inner mural invest-
ment is well marked, and encloses a space of from 14 to 15

16 Dr. H. A. Nicholson on some new or

millims. in its greatest length, which is subdivided by a series
of well-developed septa. ‘The septa are alternately long and
short, about thirty-six of each series existing in a corallite of
25 millims. width, flexuous, the longer ones extending to near
the centre of the visceral chamber. ‘Traces of vertical lamelle
also exist in the exterior vesicular zone, these representing
the imperfect outward prolongation of the septa from the inner
area. Dissepiments (which are really only the cut edges of
the ascending tabule) are developed in the outer portion of
the central tabulate area. The tabule are well developed in
the central portion of the corallites, where bounded by the inner
mural circle, being close-set and nearly horizontal in the
middle of this region, but becoming sharply bent up towards
its margins.

Obs. I have founded this species upon a single well-pre-
served specimen in the possession of M. Cihlert.

The specimen in question exhibits four corallites, of- which
two are quite separate from the others, standing at a distance
respectively of 2 and 11 millims. apart from them, while the
remaining two are in contact for a distance of nearly 2 centims.,
the one being indented by the pressure of its neighbour.
Even in this case, however, the contiguity is not attended by
any real union or amalgamation, the two corallites being each
provided with its own distinct epitheca, and being quite
readily separable from one another. The basal portions of
the corallites are enveloped in the matrix; and their precise
mode of origin is therefore uncertain.

As regards the internal structure, the points most worthy of
notice will be readily recognized by reference to the preceding
description and by the accompanying drawings of the trans-
verse and vertical sections of one of the corallites (figs. A and
B).
There can be no doubt that the present species is a true
FEindophyllum, in spite of the fact that the corallites possess a
distinct epithecal investment, and that this structure is stated
by Milne-Edwards and Haime to be wanting in this genus.
In all the points of its internal structure, however, it entirely
agrees with the other recorded species of the genus; and the
development of the epitheca must therefore be taken to be a
variable character. In point of fact L. abditum, HK. & H.,
does possess well-developed walls to the corallites, and the
absence of an epitheca is probably only due to the coalescent
condition of the corallites.

From &. abditum, EK. & H., the present species is at once
distinguished by the disjunct condition of the corallites and
their much smaller size.

amperfectly-known Species of Corals. 17

From 2. Bowerbanki, EK. & T1., the present species is sepa-
rated by the fact that each of the corallites possesses a well-
developed external investment, while the corallum is not
astreeiform.

Florizon and Locality. Inferior Devonian, Montjean,

Gallois (coll. Uthlert).

Striatopora pachystoma, Nich. *
(Pl. I. figs. 1-1 6.)

Spec. char. Corallum ramose, composed of cylindrical or
subcylindrical branches, which ‘have a diameter of from 5 to
10 millims. The corallites are primitively polygonal, with
exceedingly distinct walls, but having the visceral chambers
greatly contracted by a secondary deposit of light-coloured
sclerenchyma deposited in concentric lamelle, the amount of
this thickening being greatly increased as the mouths of the
tubes are approached (Pl. I. fig. 1a). The size of the coral-
lites is very variable, the largest ones having a long diameter
of about 3 millims. (from wall to wall), while the smallest
ones may not be much over a millimetre in width when sim1-
larly measured. The preservation of the calices im all
specimens I have seen is poor; but they are not surrounded
by thin and sharp margins, and tangential sections show that
the diameter of the visceral chambers near their mouths varies
from a millimetre and a half in the largest tubes to about half
a millimetre in the smallest corallites. No septal teeth, or but
very rudimentary ridges, are developed on the neck of the
tubes. No traces of tabulz are recognizable in long sections
(Pl. I. fig. 16), but the walls of the tubes are seen to be
perforated by a few remote and irregularly-distributed mural
pores.

Obs. This species is most nearly allied to the Striatopora
Linneana, Billings, of the Devonian rocks of Canada (see
Nicholson, Tabulate Cor. of the Pal. Period, p. 100, pl. v.
figs. 2-2 d), which it much resembles in its general aspect.
It is, however, in general a coarser and more stoutly-built
form, and it differs structurally from S. Linneana, Bill., in its
want of tabule and in the fact that the calices are not sur-
rounded by a thin polygonal rim. Though the external
preservation of the specimens is not good, this much can be
made out with certainty—the calices being always bounded by
thick walls (Pl. I. fig. 1), and being in the best-preserved
examples surrounded by thickened and raised circular borders,
whereas in S. Linneana the calices have sharp-edged poly-
gonal borders surrounding the cup-shaped apertures of the
tubes. Moreover the present species appears to want the

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. vii. 2

18 Dr. H. A. Nicholson on some new or

marked septal ridges which surround the throat of the visceral
chambers in S. Linneana; and its large corallites are deci-
dedly larger than is the case in the latter form.

Horizon and Locality. Inferior Devonian, La Baconnitre,
Laval, Mayenne (coll. Ghlert).

A very nearly allied if not identical form occurs in the
Eifel; but I have not yet fully examined this.

Pachypora Chlerti, Nich.
(Pl. I. figs, 2-2 c.)

Spec. char. Corallum forming flat or slightly undulated
expansions, the under surface of which was doubtless originally
covered by an epitheca, though this is no longer recognizable,
and which vary in thickness from 2 millims. up to a centi-
metre. The upper surface exhibits the apertures of the calices
(Pl. I. fig. 2 a)—which are very irregular in shape, but usually
exhibit two strong septal teeth, one on each side. Sometimes
there is only a single well-marked projection of this nature ;
sometimes there are three such; but in any case the actual
mouths of the corallites are never regularly polygonal or
circular, or even crescentic, but are always to some extent
encroached upon by well-marked inward prolongations of the
wall, and their most general form is perhaps rudely quadran-
gular. Very commonly two or more of the calices run into
one another, and the calicine apertures thus become vermicu-
lar. The actual diameter of the tubes of the corallites varies
from one third to two thirds of a millimetre measured alon
their greatest lengths; but to that must be added the thickness
of the walls, so that in general about four calices are found in ~
a space of from 2 to 3 millims. The walls of the tubes, as
seen in tangential sections (Pl. I. fig. 25), are very much
thickened; but no lines of demarcation between adjoining
corallites can be made out. In thin vertical sections (Pl. I.
fig. 2c) the same thickened condition of the walls and the
absence of any proper boundary between adjoining tubes can
be observed. ‘Tabule complete, but few in number and
irregularly developed. Mural pores not observed with cer-
tainty.

Obs. This well-marked form seems to be a Pachypora of
the general type of P. Mischeri, Bill., and P. frondosa, Nich.,
though it possesses marked peculiarities of its own. Its
characters, in fact, increase the probability that it may be
ultimately necessary to still further subdivide the genus Pachy-
pora, Lindst., retaining this name for forms like P. lamelli-
cornis, Lindst., P. ischert, Bill., and their allies, and creating
a new genus, or subgenus, for such more natural and normal
types as P. cervicornis, Blainy., and P. cristata, HE. & H.

emperfectly-known Species of Corals. 19

Favosites punctatus, Boullier.

(Pl. I. figs. 8-3 c.)
Favosites punctata, Boullier, Annales Linnéennes, 1826.

Spec. char. Corallum massive, attaining a large size, and
composed of regularly prismatic corallites, which radiate very
gently outwards as the periphery of the colony is approached.
Corallites basaltiform, angular, and thin-walled, the average
tubes having a diameter of about one millimetre and a half,
but having a considerable number of smaller corallites wedged
in amongst them at their angles of junction. The walls of
the corallites retain their primitively duplex character. Well-
marked but irregularly-developed septal spines of a blunt form
and upward direction can be detected in parts of the corallum.
The tabule (Pl. I. fig. 8c) are complete, numerous, hori-
zontal, flexuous or slightly curved, separated by interspaces
of from one third to one half ofa millimetre. The mural pores
are numerous, closely approximated, round or oval in shape,
without a raised margin, four or five being generally present
in the space of 2 millims. meacured vertically ; their arrange-
ment is either uniserial, or they are disposed in two subalter-
nating rows, according to the width of the prismatic faces of
the corallites.

Obs. This species scems to have been overlooked by
Milne-Edwards and Haime in their great work on fossil
corals (‘ Polypiers fossiles,’ 1851) ; and 1 am not aware that it.
has been in any way noticed by subsequent zoophytologists.
It was, however, described and figured in a perfectly recog-
nizable manner in the year 1826 by M. E. Boullier (“Mémoire
sur une espéce de Polypier fossile rapportée au genre Favosite
de Lamarck,” extrait des Annales Linnéennes pour 1826). I
am greatly indebted to Mons. Cthlert for having furnished
me with an accurate transcript of the text and figures of this
rare paper; and I can unhesitatingly support the validity of
M. Boullier’s determination.

The two species of Favosites to which the present form is
most closely related are /. basalticus, Goldf., and F. twrbinatus,
Bill. The large corallites in F’. basalticus are much larger than
in F, punctatus; its tabule are in general wider apart; its mural
pores are almost always uniserial (Hdwards and Haime, Pol.
foss. p. 236); and the breadth of the corallum is proportion-
ally greater than the height. On the other hand, in #.
punctatus, Boullier, the corallum is higher than broad, the
diameter of the largest corallites is rarely above a millimetre
and a half, the tabule are closely set, and the mural pores

are at least as commonly biserial as uniserial. From /. tur-
Q%

20 Dr. H. A. Nicholson on some new or

binatus, Billings, the present form is distinguished by its not
assuming the remarkable shape of the former and by the want
of its peculiar epitheca, as well as by the commonly biserial
condition of the pores and the more closely set tabule.
Horizon and Locality. Abundant and well preserved in the
inferior Devonian deposits of La Baconniere, Mayenne. .

Favosties ? tnosculans, Nich.
(Pl. I. figs. 4, 4a).

Spec. char. Corallum forming a large mass of unknown
dimensions, the single specimen examined being 12 centims.
in length by 7 in width, and 4 in height. The coral-
lites are very minute, averaging half a millimetre in dia-
meter, and radiating gently from the base. Very commonly,
in fact in a large proportion of the corallites, the walls are
partially deficient ; so that two, three, or four adjoining tubes
may run into one another laterally in a vermiculate manner
(Pl. I. fig. 4), the boundaries between the different ele-
ments of such a common tube being indicated by short mar-
ginal and opposed ridges. ‘The line of demarcation between
the sclerenchyma of any one tube and that of its neighbours
is in general recognizable by the presence of a clear linear
space representing the primitive wall. The tabule are nume-
rous, complete, and approximately horizontal. Septal spines
not observed. ‘The mural pores are numerous, very large,
closely approximated, oval or rounded in shape, and arranged
in a single series on each face of a tube, six or eight pores, or
more, being present in a vertical space of 2 millimetres.

Obs. In general shape and aspect this singular species is
very like a-massive Alveoliies or Chatetes. Its corallites,
however, show nothing of the compressed and often crescentic
or lunate character of those of Alveolites, and it clearly cannot
be referred to this genus. On the other hand, it presents a
curious resemblance to Chetetes in the imperfect condition of
the walls of the corallites, and the resulting presence of blunt
processes or ridges extending into the visceral chambers
(Pl. I. fig. 4). In Cheetetes, however, this appearance is
due to the partial division of the old tubes, preparatory to
their complete fission, whereas in the present case the adult
tubes simply communicate with one another by a deficiency
of their parietes. That the present species is not a true
Chetetes is also conclusively shown by the fact that the
duplex character of the walls of the tubes can be clearly re-
cognized, as well as by the presence of numerous large mural
pores. This last character proves it to belong to the Favo-
sitide, though its reference to Mavosttes proper is rendered

umperfectly-known Species of Corals. 21
somewhat doubtful by the unusual thickening of the walls, as
well as by the free intercommunication between adjoining
corallites.

The single specimen of L. ? cnosculans that I have examined
does not exhibit any part of either the upper or lower surface
in its original condition; and the preservation of the corallum
in a remarkably soft and splintery rock (dolomite ?) renders
its microscopic examination peculiarly difficult. At the same
time its minute structure 1s quite characteristic, and suftici-
ently separates it from any allied type with which I am ac-
quainted.

Horizon and Locality. Inferior Devonian, Chalonnes.

SPECIES OF CORALS ASSOCIATED WITH THE PRECEDING.

It may be of advantage if I append the following brief
notes upon some of the remaining corals which were contained
in the collection submitted to me by Mons. Céhlert, and
which are associated with the new forms previously described.

1. Favosites, sp. A form like &. gothlandicus, Lam., in
general shape, having a massive corallum composed of regu-
larly prismatic corallites of tolerably uniform diameter, their
ordinary width being about 2 millims., or rather less. As
seen in tangential sections the walls are moderately thin, and
no septa can be detected; but in long sections the walls are
sharply undulated, or show well-marked spiniform and in-
wardly directed processes. The mural pores are of consider-
able size, sometimes uniserial, sometimes in two alternating
rows on each prismatic face of a corallite. Tabule well
developed, mostly half a millimetre or less apart.— Horizon and
Locality. Inferior Devonian, St. Malo.

2. Havosites gothlandicus, Lam. Two specimens, which
differ little from the ordinary Devonian examples of this
species.

3. Favosites Forbest, E. & H., var. (?). Corallum small,
rounded, subhemispherical or spheroidal, mostly about an inch
in diameter. Corallites of very unequal sizes, the larger ones
averaging about 2 millims. in diameter, their walls being thick
and their shape cylindrical. The smaller corallites are nume-
rous, from rather more than a millimetre to half a millimetre
in diameter, very variably shaped, but almost always angular.
The tabule are strong, remote, and approximately horizontal,
No traces of septa or septal spines detected. External surface
of the tubes marked with numerous fine, slightly-curved
strie. Mural pores of large size, sometimes uniserial, some-
times in two subalternate rows on each prismatic face.

This may be provisionally regarded as a variety of F.

22 Dr. H A. Nicholson on some new or

Forbesi, KE. & H., from which it differs in the comparatively
large number and small size of the smaller corallites. It is
most like . Forbest, var. tuberosa, Rom.; but the corallum
never attains any great dimensions, and there are no traces of
the characteristic epithecal or opercular investment of the latter.
From F. Forbest, var. eifelensis, Nich., it differs in the great
number of the small tubes and the apparent absence of septal
spines; and from Lf. Forbest, var. waldronensis, Nich., it is
separated by the smaller size of the large corallites as well as
by their proportionately smaller number.—Horizon and
Locality. Inferior Devonian, Saint Jean sur Mayenne and La
Baconniére. :

4. Pachypora cervicornis, De Blainv. Numerous speci-
mens of this form, the branches varying in diameter from 5
millims. to over 2 centims., are represented in M. Cthlert’s
collection. Their internal and external characters are pre-
cisely similar to those of specimens from the Hifel.— Horizon
and Locality. Inferior Devonian, Saint Jean sur Mayenne ;
Mont Jean, Gallois.

5. Pachypora, sp. A single fragment of limestone contain-
ing numerous stems of a small Pachypora imbedded init. In
structure and general character this form is like P. cervicornis,
Blainv.; but the stems are all small (5 millims. or less in
diameter), and the tubes are more minute and more delicate
than in the latter. It is more nearly related to P. meridio-
nalis, Nich. & Eth. jun., from the Devonian rocks of Queens-
land ; but more extended material would very probably show
it to be a distinct species.—Horizon and Locality. Inferior
Devonian, La Baconniére.

6. Heliolites porosus, Goldf.—Horizon and Locality. Inferior
Devonian, Chalonnes, La Baconniére, and Gallois.

7. Heliolites,sp. A form resembling H.interstinctus, Wahl.,
but with larger tubes and with some less conspicuous peculi-
arities.—Horizon and Locality. Inferior Devonian, Mont Jean,
Gallois.

8. Monticulipora Winteri, Nich. Several specimens (from
the Inferior Devonian of La Baconniére), which, both in ex-
ternal characters and in microscopic structure, precisely agree
with the examples of the Eifel. Dr. Steinmann, for whose
opinion | entertain the highest respect, has suggested recently
(N. Jahrb. fiir Min. Geol. und Pal. 1880, p. 438) that this
species is really the Favosttes fibroglobosus of Quenstedt, de-
scribed from the same locality (Gees, near Gerolstein). I do
not feel at present able to accept this conclusion, for two reasons.
In the first place, I have made a careful examination of nume-
rous specimens, both German and French, of the form which

imperfectly-known Species of Corals. 23

I call Monticulipora Winter?, both externally and by means of
microscopic sections, and J have totally failed to detect any
traces of mural pores. In the second place, my own limited
collections are sufficient to show me the impossibility of pro-
nouncing positively upon the structure and affinities of any
individual specimens, even of a known and marked external
figure, and from a known locality, unless a microscopic exa-
mination has been instituted ; and the form now under discus-
sion is an excellent example of what I now say. I find,
namely, that I possess in the collection which I personally
made at Gees three quite distinct forms, all of which so closely
resemble each other externally that, until I had made thin
sections of them, I had placed them together in the same
tray, as indubitably belonging to the same species. One of
these three forms is the type which I have described under
the name of Monticulipora Winter; another is a true Fistuli-
pora, as defined by M‘Coy; and the third is a genuine Alve-
olites, and is provided with numerous and well-marked mural
pores. The form described by Quenstedt under the name of
Favosites fibroglobosus (Petrefact. Deutschlands, Bd. vi. 8. 15,
Taf. 143) is one with which I am unfortunately unacquainted ;
but it might, so far as external form is concerned, easily be
any one of the three forms which I have just enumerated ; or
it might be a fourth, quite distinct form. In any case, the
facts [ have mentioned are quite sufficient to prove that the
occurrence of a fossil at a particular locality and its possession
of a well-marked external form cannot be allowed to count
for any thing (so far as the more delicately constructed species
of corals are concerned) when we come to determine generic
or specific relations and affinities.

9. Associated with the preceding were species of Aulopora,
Cyathophyllum, Zaphrentis, and Cystiphyllum, which my
leisure would not permit me to specifically determine. M.
(Ehlert’s collection also contained some interesting Stromato-
poroids, which I may take the opportunity of describing on
some future occasion.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE I.

Fig. 1. A fragment of Striatopora pachystoma, Nich., of the natural size.

Fig. 1a. Portion of a tangential section of the same, enlarged seven
times.

Fig. 1b. Part of a vertical section of the same, enlarged seven times,
showing the thickened walls anda few mural pores.

Fig. 2. A fragment of Pachypora Ushlerti, Nich., of the natural size.

Fig. 2a. A small portion of the surface of the same, enlarged eighteen
times, showing the form of the calices. 4

Fig. 2b. Portion of a tangential section of the same, enlarged eighteen

24 Mr. Oldfield Thomas on a new Species of Mus.

times, showing the thickened walls and the septal (?) teeth of
the corallites.

Fig. 2c. Vertical section of the same, enlarged eighteen times, showing
the thickened walls and the remote tabule.

Fig. 3. A small fragment of Favosites punctatus, Boullier.

Fig. 3a. Three tubes of the same, enlarged three times.

Fig. 3b. Tangential section of the same, enlarged seven times.

Fig. 5c. Vertical section of the same, enlarged seven times, showing the
mural pores and tabulze.

Fig. 4. Tangential section of Favosites (?) inosculans, Nich., showing the
free communication between many of the corallites, enlarged
eighteen times.

Fig. 4a. Vertical section of the same, enlarged eighteen times, showing
the large mural pores and the tabule.

Ill.—Description of a new Species of Mus from Southern
India. By Ou_prietp THomas, F.Z.8., British Museum.

THE specimen here described was obtained at Kadapa, Madras,
by Colonel R. H. Beddome, and has been presented to the
British Museum, together with a large series of other Indian
Muride, by Mr. W. T. Blanford, atter whom I propose to

name it

Mus Blanfordi, sp. 1.

Fur above slate-colour, tipped with fawn; hairs rather long
and soft. Belly white, sharply defined. Tail longer than
head and body ; basal half dark, distal half above and below
white; distal third covered with soft, white, shining hairs
about a quarter of an inch long, forming a pencil at the tip.
Tarsus rather long. Five front and six hind foot-pads.
Ears long, oval, nearly naked. Mamme six, one pectoral and
two inguinal pairs.

The skull differs from those of all other Indian rats by
the front edge of the external wall of the infraorbital fora-
men being strongly slanting instead of perpendicular. The
interparietal also is much more elongated transversely than
usual.

Measurements of the type, an adult female:—Head and
body (about) 4:1 inches; tail 6:1; himd foot, without claws,
1:2; forearm and hand 1°3 ; ear-conch, length from external
base ‘70, breadth °54; skull 1°42.

Mr. R. Etheridge, Jun., on Carboniferous Opercula? 25

IV.—Descriptions of certain peculiar Bodies which may be
the Opercula of small Gasteropoda, discovered by Mr. James
Bennie in the Carboniferous Limestone of Law Quarry, near
Dalry, Ayrshire, with notes on some Silurian Opercula. By
R. ETHeriDGE, Jun.

[ Plate I. ]

Intrropuction.—The object of the present communication is
to briefly describe several small bodies which Mr. Bennie and
myself are mutually agreed in regarding as the opercula of
minute Gasteropoda, and which were discovered by the former
some time ago in a bed of highly fossiliferous and siliceous
limestone near Dalry. The interest attached to these remains
lies in the fact that occasionally small entire shells are found
in the same stratum with one form of the opercula about to be
described za satu, thus affording a very good demonstration of
their true affinity. The description of a large Natécopsis with
the operculum én situ and several examples of Huomphalus
sculptus from the Wenlock Limestone, all contained in the
British-Museum collection, will complete the account.
Mr. Bennie has kindly furnished me with the following notes
on the bed of limestone from which the fossils were obtained.

Law Quarry is situated on the Cubeside farm, about two
miles north-west of Dalry, and only a few hundred feet from
the edge of the great mass of bedded traps which stretch from
Dalry to Largs. The band of limestone forms a subsidiary
bed (probably the lowest) in the Howrat Limestone (=the
Hurlet or Main Limestone), the lowest bed of the Lower Car-
boniferous Limestone group of Scotland. It may be 12 feet
or so in thickness, and is very hard and compact where solid
and unweathered. The bed is highly charged with siliceous
matter, asa large percentage of the contained fossils have been
changed into some form of silica. A bed of Lithostrotion is
present, every polypite of which is completely silicified. The
percentage of silica is so high that the limestone is only
wrought for manure by the neighbouring agriculturists.

The fossils are obtained by washing the disintegrated
material found on ledges of the quarry-face and in fissures and
pockets made by the natural jointing of the rock.

Interest will be added to the matter if the descriptions are
prefaced by a brief epitome of the structure of the Gasteropod
operculum, and a similar account of the number of genera in
which this organ has been found in position in Palozoic shells,
a by no means frequent occurrence.

The operculum of the Gasteropoda consists of a layer more or

26 Mr. R. Etheridge, Jun., on some Glasteropod

less composed of horny material, strengthened by the addition
of calcareous matter. The inner surface carries a muscular
scar; and the point from which the operculum commences is
termed the nucleus. It may fit the mouth of the shell with
accuracy ; or the entrance may be only partially closed by it;
and, again, in some genera it is quite wanting. ‘The operculum
may be said to be concentric when it increases equally all
round and the nucleus is central or subcentral—imbricated or
lamellar when growing on one side only and with a marginal
nucleus—unguiculate or claw-shaped, with the nucleus apical
or in front. ‘The operculum is said to be spiral when it grows
only on one edge, revolving as it grows, and is always sinis-
tral in dextral shells; when few-whirled the operculum is
said to be paucispiral, or subspiral when the turns are little
marked ; on the contrary, when the whirls are very nume-
rous it is said to be multispiral. One side has sometimes a
projection, in which condition the word “ articulated” is used
to express the form. The operculum is present in some species
of a genus, absent in others ; and it is also indifferently horny
or shelly (Woodward)*.

The description of opercula in the Gasteropoda of the older
rocks has not been of frequent occurrence, although a few
instances have been observed both amongst Silurian and Car-
boniferous representatives of the class.

Amongst Silurian univalves we meet with the peculiar
genus Maclurea, in which the operculum is thick, solid, and
sinistrally subspiral, with two internal projections, one of
them beneath the nucleus, very thick and rugoset. Mr. Salter
has given excellent figures of the operculum of both MZ. Logant,
Salter}, and J. Peachii, Salter§, from the Durness Lime-
stone of the northern Highlands.

In addition to those of Maclurea, the operculum of Huom-
phalus has been noticed by the late Dr. S. P. Woodward||,
who describes it as shelly, round, and multispiral.

Mr. F. Smithe, LL.D.§], has described and figured the
operculum of Huomphalus sculptus, Sow. He states that it
is shelly, ovate, concave within, plane without, thin, and with
a bevelled edge. The spiral consists of twelve whirls.

Passing to rocks of the Carboniferous period, we find that
the operculum has been observed chiefly in the genus Nati-

* Man. Mollusca, pp. 101, 102.

+ Ibid. p. 202.

t Murchison’s ‘Siluria,’ 4th ed. p. 197, foss. 40. fig. la; and dee. i.
Geol. Survey Canada, t. i.

§ Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. xv. p. 378, t. 18. figs. 1b, 3-5.

|| Man. Moll. p. 145. {| Proc. Cotteswold Nat. Field-Club.

Opercula(?) in Carboniferous Limestone. 27

copsis. In 1844 Prof. M‘Coy noticed that of N. Phillipsti
(M‘Coy) *, and figured this structure entirely filling-in the
mouth of the shell}. Later on the same author stated that
the operculum of Naticopsis differed from that of any of the
Naticide: in being concentric and not spiralf. The most com-
plete description of the operculum of Naticopsis yet given is
that by Messrs. Meek and Worthen. These authors describe it
as thick and shelly, oval or subcircular in form, with a lateral
or submarginal nucleus, with an entire absence of a spiral or
subspiral structure, and no articulating projection. The inner
side presents a distinct reniform scar of attachment, whilst
the fine and concentric lines of growth are visible on the
outside §.

Finally, in the British Museum is a fine example of Nat?-
copsis Phillipsti, M‘Coy (?=N. elliptica, Phill.), with the
operculum zn situ, which will be described hereafter; it is

the shell referred to by Prof. M‘Coy||.

1. CARBONIFEROUS FORMS.

It is quite open to argument whether some of these bodies
may not be the otoliths of fishes. Bearing this in mind, I
consulted my colleague, Mr. W. Davies, F.G.S., who was
kind enough to examine the specimens with me. The result
of the inquiry was that, although some bore a striking resem-
blance to otoliths, others, on the contrary, appeared to afford
evidence of the operculum view. ‘The question even presented
itself as to how large a proportion of the bodies found in
rocks of a younger age than the Carboniferous, and usually
regarded as otoliths, may be the opercula of Gasteropoda of
those beds.

The first form is more or less circular in outline, rounded
and thin-edged on one margin, thickened on the other, and
produced into a blunted denticulation or two. The centre of
one side is somewhat raised above the sharp margin, leaving
a flattened zone, and sometimes traversed by a groove or two.
This is acommon type, and is frequently much worn, when
the characters become obliterated. ‘The opposite side is smooth
and convex. Lower Carboniferous Limestone group, Law
Quarry, near Dalry (PI. II. fig. 1).

The second variety is small and oval, with a central rounded
nucleus, and a notch in the margin opposite, to which the

* Synop. Carb. Limest. Foss. Iveland, 1844, p. 33.

+ Ibid. t. 3. fig. 9. { Brit. Pal. Foss. 1853, fase. iii. p. 548.
§ Illinois Geol. Survey Report, iii. p. 366.

|| Brit. Pal. Foss. p. 548.

28 Mz. R. Etheridge, Jun., on some Gasteropod

nucleus is nearest. The reverse side of the operculum is
plain except for a slight convexity in the centre. As before,
Law Quarry (PI. II. fig. 2).

Another condition consists of elongated pinna-shaped bodies,
flat or very slightly concave on one surface, and without
visible marks or ornament. The other aspect is convex,
particularly on one side, where it is thickened and gradually
thins away to the edge. One end is rounded, the other
bluntly pomted. As before, Law Quarry (PI. II. fig. 3).

The fourth type consists of thin auriform bodies, a little
thicker on one of the longer margins than on the other,
concave on one side, more or less flattened on the opposite.
The latter carries a minute central depression or umbilical
spot, round which the surface is concentrically striated, and a
direct groove passing to the acuminated end. On the concave
side of these opercula there is a scar which may be generally
described as horsehoof-shaped, and a groove bounding the
raised portion. As before, Law Quarry, and on a similar
horizon at Inverteil Quarry near Kirkcaldy (Pl. II. fig. 4).

The fifth and last form is that of a small, thin, round oper-
culum, concave on one side, more or less convex on the
other. ‘The concave side shows a doubly impressed scar,
having the appearance of a dumb-bell. As before, Law
Quarry (PI. II. fig. 5).

The deposit yielding the opercula occasionally furnishes
examples of Gasteropoda with them in situ. I give two
illustrations of this, one with the operculum entire, the other
with it only partially preserved. In both cases the opercula
fit the mouths of the shells completely. In the former of
these there is a central depression, and the thickened side of
the operculum is placed against the pillar-hp of the shell, the
sharp edge being outward, resting against the outer lip. There
are faint signs of concentric striee ; and the centre is depressed.
In all probability these are minute species of Naticopsis (Pl. II.
figs. 6 & 7).

The sum of the information deducible from the study of
these little objects appears to be, that, in the first place, certain
Carboniferous Gasteropods possessed thick bony opercula, of
a more or less oval form, speaking generally, and of variable
size.

In the second place, on the contrary, others were provided
with thin, round, or irregularly oval doors to their aper-
tures, and when any structure is visible it appears to be con-
centric.

Again, a form of an entirely different shape is foreshadowed
by the elongated variety described as the preceding third type.

Opercula (2) in Carboniferous Limestone. 29

We do not possess as yet any evidence to show the pre-
sence in our Carboniferous rocks of the ¢mbricated, unguiculate,
paucispiral, multispiral, and other forms into which the oper-
cula of Gasteropoda have been grouped.

In our Silurian rocks, on the other hand, we have the spiral
operculum in Huomphalus.

The Naticopsis in the British-Museum collection is unfor-
tunately, except in the region of the mouth, imperfect. In all
probability it is N. Phillipsii, M‘Coy. The operculum is
oval, somewhat pointed in its upper part, and concave exter-
nally, the most depressed point answering to the internal
muscular scar. It bears the closest resemblance to those
opercula im situ from Law Quarry described in a preceding
paragraph. The concentric striz are very close and regular. It
fits the aperture of the shell exactly, and is more or less
thickened where it abuts against the pillar-lip (Pl. II. fig. 8).

2. SILURIAN FORMS.

The British-Museum collection contains two peculiar bodies
from the Upper Silurian beds of the island of Gothland, stated on
the labels forwarded with the specimens to be the opercula of
Euomphalus (Pl. II. fig. 9). They are bluntly conical in form,
rising from a flattened or somewhat concave base. The smaller
is 83 lines high, by nearly 6 wide; the larger one is 7 lines
in height, by a little more than 6 lines in diameter. Both are
marked by close-set concentric raised lines of laminz, subim-
bricating upwards. About half the distance from the base
to the blunt apex the sides are somewhat constricted, and the
upper part is thus partially separated from the lower. The
flatly concave base is bounded by a marginal rim, and the centre
is occupied by a somewhat sunken coiled nucleus. These
bodies have a very peculiar appearance, and, if really opercula,
must have belonged to a strong massive shell. ‘lhe upper
third or apical portion appears to be devoid of concentric lines
or ridges.

The collection is also enriched by several specimens of a
Euomphalus with the operculum in place, from the Wenlock
Limestone, and by an operculum lying on the weathered sur-
face of the limestone, separated from the shell. The opercula
of these shells correspond generally with the description given
by Mr. Smithe, but differ in one or two minor particulars.

The marginal outline is quite circular or round; but as the
centre is approached the spiral rings become decidedly oval
(Pl. II. fig. 13). The number of these rings in the best-pre-
served of our specimens is seventeen, and there were evidently
afew more. ‘There is, however, no trace of a nodose or bead-

30 Mr. R. Etheridge, Jun., on some Silurian Opercula?

like character, so far as my examination of these specimens
has gone. The rings are concentric and ridge-like, each sepa-
rate from the other, with well-marked interspaces between
them, the interspaces being quite double the width of the
ridges, if not a little more (Pl. II. fig. 13).

Three of the British-Museum specimens with the operculum
in place have the latter presented with the spiral whirls out-
wards ; and this surface is decidedly (although not very) con-
cave (PI. II. figs. 10 & 11).

This is shown in a somewhat exaggerated form in the free
example, but heightened by fracture and compression from
above. On the other hand, in a fourth example, also with the
spiral side of the operculum exposed in place, the latter is
quite depressed conical (PI. II. fig. 12).

Lastly, in a fifth specimen the circular form of the oper-
culum is well exhibited, and a somewhat different appearance
visible (Pl. IL. fig. 14). The operculum is depressed a little
immediately within the margin, and then rises at the centre
into a low spiral prominence. The surface is shining and
smooth, except near the margin, where there are a few very
fine spiral thread-like lines. This aspect is rather difficult of
explanation ; but I believe it to represent either the interior
of the plate or a cast of the interior, and to be reversed in
position.

The five specimens here noticed are what is usually called
Euomphalus sculptus, J. de C. Sow.*, which was briefly de-
scribed as having the “surface ornamented with concentric
furrows and elevated lines.” ‘This description must have
been taken from a very much worn example; for even in
indifferent specimens the close, transverse, undulating frills
of growth which cross these “ elevated lines” are quite
visible.

The characters of a well-preserved example of ZH. sculptus
are quite those assigned to another species, H. funatus, J. de
C. Sow.t, viz., ‘ Conical, very short ; ornamented with many
spiral threads, united by more numerous transverse lines ;
umbilicus rather small.”

It will be noticed that no mention is made of the number
of concentric ridges, or any approach thereto, in the respec-
tive species. On comparing the figures, however, it will be
seen that those on the body-whorl of L. funatus are much wider
apart and less numerous than those on a corresponding portion
of the shell of H. sculptus.

* Murchison’s ‘Silurian System,’ p.

+ Min. Conch. 1824, v. p. 71, t. 450,
tea Te120.

626, t. 12. f.. 17.
f.1&2; ‘Silurian System,’ p. 626,

Mr. A. G. Butler on new Species of Lepidoptera. 31

Without asserting the identity of these two forms, it
becomes necessary to point out the very close relation existing
between them ; and it may be that they are only the old and
young conditions of one species. The concentric ridges on
the body-whorl of . sculptus become wider apart as the
suture is approached, when they often assume very much the
appearance given in the figures of EH. funatus referred to.
The apparent similarity between these shells should be indi-
cated, in case any difference may be detected in their oper-

cula. That of H. funatus has not been described, so far as I
know.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE IL.

Fig. 1. A small circular operculum (?) produced into a blunted denti-
culation. Law Quarry.

Fig. 2. A small oval operculum, with a central globular nucleus. Law
Quarry.

Fig. 3. 75 arpated pinna-shaped body, probably an operculum. Law

uarry.

Fig. 4. A ii, sain had auriform body of the same nature. Inverteil
Quarry, near Kirkcaldy, Fife.

Fig. 5. A small, thin, round operculum. Law Quarry.

Figs. 6 & 7. Two small shells, probably species of Naticopsis, with the
opercula in situ. Law Quarry.

Fig. 8. Naticopsis Phillips, M‘Coy, with the operculum in place, but
partially abraded on one side. Collection, British Museum.

Fig. 9. A supposed operculum, conical and with imbricating ridges.
Upper Silurian, island of Gothland. Collection, British
Museum. xX 2.

Figs. 10 & 11. Euomphalus sculptus, Sow., with the operculum in place.
Wenlock Limestone. Collection, British Museum.

Fig. 12. Another specimen, but with the outer side of the operculum
somewhat conical. Collection, British Museum.

Fig. 13. The operculum of £. sculptus free. Collection, British Museum.

Fig. 14. Euomphalus sculptus? with a shining scarcely spiral operculum.
Collection, British Museum.

(N.B. The originals of figs. 1-7 are in the cabinet of Mr. James
Bennie. )

V.—Descriptions of new Species of Lepidoptera in_ the
Collection of the British Museum. By Artuur G. BUTLER,
TAS., ZS, &e.

[Plate IV. ]

THE species described in the present paper are chiefly from
India and China, all, with one exception, being Asiatic, and
the latter being the first African species in a hitherto purely
Asiatic genus.

32. Mr. A.G. Butler on new Species of Lepidoptera.

Nymphalide.
1. Argynnis gemmata, sp.n. (Pl. IV. fig. 1.)

Fuivous, with the body and basal third of the wings shining
coppery brown : wings with three transverse series of black
spots, the first biangulated, in zigzag fashion, on the pri-

maries, and simply angulated on the secondaries ; ; this series
is placed just beyond the middle of the wings; the second and
third series united at their costal extremities near the apex ;
a nearly marginal interrupted black line: primaries with
thick black discoidal markings, much as in A. cashmirensis ;
a subcostal, ill-defined, blackish, triangular spot between the
first and second series. Primaries below paler than above,
with smaller black spots, the basal area not brown, as above,
but uniform with the rest of the ground-colour, the costa
ochreous towards apex, and the outer margin and fringe spot-
ted with the same colour ; an oblique apical chestnut-red stripe,
margined internally by a conspicuous spot and a minute dot
of silver, and bounded externally by an abbreviated submar-
ginal series of six oval silver spots, which decrease in size at
both extremities of the series; the first two visible spots of
the second series of the upper surface greyish green: secon-
daries somewhat like those of A. myrina (but altogether
brighter and prettier, with the central silver spot more as in
A, lathonia), bright ferruginous varied with patches of ochreous,
the basal half occupied by about fifteen silver spots and
streaks of various sizes and shapes, the two central ones
united and passing through a postmedian arched series of
sagittate silver spots; a marginal series of large triangular
spots, abdominal margin, and “the base of the costal margin
silver; all these markings are slenderly edged with black ;
a discal series of dull green rounded spots with silver pupils ; ;
fringe bright ochreous spotted with ferruginous: body below
ochraceous. Expanse of wings 1 inch 11 ‘lines.

Darjiling (Lidderdale) ; between N epal and Tibet (Charl-
ton).

The two examples taken by Major Charlton have been in
the Museum collection since 1852; but, probably owing to
the fact that they belong to a dificult genus, nobody appears
to have ventured to describe them. I find them labelled
“ Tibet ;”” but our register says ‘‘ between Nepal and Tibet,”
and the fact that Dr. Lidderdale labels his specimen as taken
at ‘ Darjiling”’ renders it extremely likely that Major Charl-
ton’s were also taken on the Nepal side of the Himalayas.

The position of this species seems to be next to A. myrina.

My. A. G. Butler on new Species of Lepidoptera. 33

Papilionide.
2. Papilio nebulosus, sp.n. (PI. IV. fig. 3.)

In some respects nearest to P. antiphates, in others to P.
euphrates, but the primaries dull greyish black, crossed at the
base by two broad pale belts ; the costal half of the wing also
crossed by four abbreviated white bands, united below the
median vein so as to form two large U-shaped markings, and
.crossed by black veins; submarginal tapering band as in
P. euphrates, white; a large roundish diffused patch of white
on the internal area near the exterior angle: secondaries as in
P. antiphates, excepting that they appear greyish through
their showing the markings of the under surface, and that the
submarginal liture are continued upwards above the third
median branch. Wings below blackish ; the base and the
interno-median area of the secondaries sordid white or brown,
shading into white; subbasal band of primaries scarcely trace-
able; other markings as above, but sordid: secondaries with
the abdominal margin and fringe white, bounded inter-
nally by a black stripe along the submedian vein ; a central
elbowed series of six sordid-white elongated spots, bounded
on both sides by ill-defined black spots, the third or central
spot pyriform and enclosing a smaller black spot; a discal
angulated series of six more or less pentagonal ochreous
patches, their two outer sides slightly sinuated and black-
edged ; a submarginal series of five almost confluent, oblong,
sordid-white patches placed corner to corner ; outer margin
and tail black: body below white, spotted at the sides with
black ; anus pale flesh-coloured. Expanse of wings 3 inches
3 lines.

Darjiling (Lidderdale).

But for the fact that this species is, in some of its most
important characters, nearer to P. ewphrates of the Philippines,
I should have thought it possible that it might be an extra-
ordinary melanistic variety of P. antiphates.

3. Papilio Mariesti, sp.n. (Pl. IV. fig. 4.)

Allied to P. alebion, from which it differs in the absence of
the submarginal black band on the primaries, the narrower
discal belt of secondaries, which is greyish externally and
becomes obsolete towards the costa, the slightly larger white
spots above the blue-centred marginal black spots of the
secondaries, and the slightly larger and deeper-coloured orange
subanal patch: on the under surface the primaries differ as
above, the outer discal line of the secondaries is obsolete, and

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. vii. 3

34 Mr. A. G. Butler on new Species of Lepidoptera.

the marginal black stripe encloses a much smaller spot of the
ground-colour at apex. Expanse of wings 2 inches 10 lines.
Lu-Shan mountains, province of Kiukiang, China.
One specimen of this species was taken by Mr. Charles
Maries.

4, Thecla betulotdes (Blanchard in litt.). (PI. IV. fig. 2.)

Above chocolate-brown, shot with purple, excepting on the
outer border: primaries with a large patch of bright orange on
the disk immediately beyond the cell: secondaries with an’
orange patch at the anal angle. Under surface grey; the cells
closed by a short brownish fasciole with darker marginal lines
edged externally with white; an oblique discal band and a
second band nearer and parallel to the outer margin of the
same colours; a submarginal dusky stripe, followed in the
secondaries by a white marginal line; base of fringe occupied
by a black line: secondaries with an orange anal patch en-
closing a black dot on the first median interspace ; a subanal
W-shaped blackish line joining the inferior extremity of the
inner discal band, its inner edge bordered with orange and its
outer edge with white; anal lobe and tail black; pectus
white, venter testaceous. Expanse of wings 1 inch 4-6 lines.

Three specimens. Kiukiang, China (Maries).

Although quoted in the Supplement to Mr. Kirby’s ‘ Cata-
logue,’ this species cannot be regarded as described by Blan-
chard ; that author simply remarks, “ In the neighbourhood
of Pekin an allied species exists which is distinguished by
several characters ;”’ and in a footnote he says “ This species
(Thecla betuloides, Lucas) has the wings tinted with blue
above and grey below.” From the vague resemblance which
the species bears to 7’. betule, and from the fact that the
underside is grey and the upperside shot with purple (not blue),
IT have little doubt that the species here described is that men-
tioned by Blanchard ; and therefore I have adopted for it the
name which he has proposed; but nobody can be certain of
any thing from his casual hints as to the insect.

5. Thecla tyrianthina, sp.n. (PI. IV. fig. 5.)

Above brown, shot with purplish blue in the male and
with purple in the female. Under surface of wings pale greyish
brown, darker towards the base; a brown fasciole, traversed
by a pale line, at the end of the cell; a broad, slightly taper-
ing discal brown belt from the costal margin of each wing; a
submarginal brown stripe and a marginal brown border:

secondaries with an orange patch enclosing a square of four

Mr, A. G. Butler on new Species of Lepidoptera, 35

black spots, bounded above by an incomplete w-shaped black
line, and below by an alternately white and black fringe; a
black-edged whitish oblique band near the anal angle across
the abdominal border, bounded internally by a brown band,
and externally by an orange marginal border; anal lobe and
tail black tipped with white: pectus greyish, palpi white
po venter testaceous. Hxpanse of wings 1 inch 3-4
ines.
Kaukiang, China (Maries).

Allied to 7. arata.
6. Thecla stygiana, sp.n. (PI. IV. fig. 6.)

Above smoky brown, without markings. Wings below
ereyish brown, with an indistinct externo-discal series of
blackish spots bounded outwardly with yellowish: primaries
with an indistinctly whitish-bordered black spot at external
angle: secondaries with a very indistinct submarginal series
of dusky spots ; a patch of orange at external angle enclosing
a black spot above the tail, which is also black ; anal angle
black: pectus bluish white; venter sulphur-yellow. Ex-
panse of wings 1 inch 7 lines.

Nikko, Central Japan (Maries).

7. Milleria pontioides, sp. n.

Creamy white: primaries with the veins brown; external
two fifths brown, enclosing a small white spot at the inferior
angle of the cell, and crossed by a disco-submarginal series
of abbreviated whitish dashes upon the veins: secondaries
with the outer half greyish ; a broad external brown border
from costa to first median branch, interrupted by five longi-
tudinal whitish dashes on the veins: antenne black. Prima-
ries below nearly as above, but the external area blackish,
and the spots upon it white: secondaries sulphur-yellow,
excepting towards the costa, the outer half black-brown, with
the end of the cell and five streaks on the veins white. Hx-
panse of wings 1 inch 9 lines.

Sarawak (Low).

Somewhat like Pontéa pactolica, Butl., in pattern and colo-
ration.
Lithosiide.

8. Camptoloma binotatum, sp. n.

Nearly allied to C. ¢nterioratum (C. erythropygum, Felder,
Nov. tab. xciii. fig. 7) from China and Japan, but with the

primaries ochreous, nearly as dark as the secondaries ; the
3%

36 =©Mr. A. G. Butler on new Species of Lepidoptera.

oblique lines from near the base of the costal margin not
united to one another, consequent upon the abbreviation of the
inferior or basal one; the upper line, on the contrary, continued
(by means of a terminal elbow) through the red streaks, and
uniting with the oblique line immediately beyond the cell ;
the fourth or subapical discal line longer, slightly waved or
bisinuated instead of regularly concave; the submarginal
line longer and much more slender; only two instead of three
large black spots on the fringe at external angle. Body
bright ochreous, the thorax scarcely perceptibly paler than
the abdomen; anus lake-red. LExpanse of wings 1 inch
7 lines.

Two specimens. Shillong (Assam).

I have examined a fair series of the Japanese species, and
therefore am in a position to state positively that it is not a
variable insect.

Liparide.

‘EFRISULOIDES, gen. nov.

Trisule affine genus ; differt alis anticis minus productis; posticis
magis rotundatis ; capite retracto, breviore; palpis brevioribus ;
signaturis supra generis Chrysorithri vel Catocale.

9. Trisuloides sericea, sp. n.

Smoky brown; sericeous, especially the primaries; these
wings above transversely irregularly banded with sandy
brown, the bands being bordered and intersected by blackish
lines; a more or less defined, nearly semicircular, pale patch
from the costa to the first median branch and slightly im-
pinging upon the discoidal cell; outer border sandy brown,
very irregular along its inner margin, which is edged with
black; its outer margin is pale, limited by a submarginal
series of dusky spots; a double black spot, bordered internally
with snow-white, just touching the external border near the
external angle; fringe whity brown, spotted with blackish :
secondaries pale towards the costa; a large central ochreous
patch ; a squamose marginal streak near the anal angle;
fringe white or whitish varied with quadrate black spots :
head, front of thorax, and posterior margins of the abdominal
segments greyish ; abdomen with four dorsal tufts. Wings
below sericeous, pale, the outer borders dull silvery white ;
veins blackish; a nearly central, angulated, dusky band, fol-
lowed by a testaceous band bounded externally by an angular
dusky line, immediately beyond which is a curved externally

Mr. A. G. Butler on new Species of Lepidoptera. 37

dentated dusky stripe; marginal line blackish ; fringe white,
spotted with black : primaries with ochreous basal area: body
below blackish, pectus more or less clothed with greyish hairs;
tarsi more or less distinctly banded with grey. Expanse of
wings 2 inches 6 lines.

Shillong, Assam, and Darjiling.

On the upper surface this species much resembles Chryso-
rithrum, Allotria, and Catocala, the primaries especially re-
minding one of Walker’s “ Catocala” albifascia, a species
apparently referable to the genus Zalissa; in structure and
the pattern of the under surface it agrees far better with
Trisula.

Acontiide.
10. Apsarasa lturata, sp. n.

Primaries above sulphur-yellow, costal margin white ; all
the borders crossed by black-edged metallic blue-green lituree
as follows—two near the base of the costal border, two at
basal fourth, one running obliquely from just before the middle
of the costa to the end of the cell, where it unites with an
irregularly v-shaped line of the same colour interrupted by a
shining rose-red discoidal dash, three curved lines on the costal
border beyond the cell, the first very short, a dot followed by
a zigzag line just before apex, and an oblique V-shaped
marking at apex; markings of the outer border becoming
brown upon the fringe, the first and third being short dashes,
the second formed of two dashes united by a <-shaped
marking, the fourth and fifth long dashes, nearly united inter-
nally by a metallic green lunule; on the internal border two
<-shaped markings before the middle, an oblique line beyond
the middle, and three reversed oblique lines close to external
angle; at the base of the median area is a large S-shaped
marking, partly metallic green and partly rose-red, and on
the second median interspace two rose-red transverse spots,
dotted at each end with metallic blue-black: secondaries
semitransparent sericeous white, with sulphur-yellow borders
and veins : head, collar, front of thorax and of tegulz sulphur-
yellow, transversely striped and spotted with bluish and pur-
plish black, remainder of body white. Under surface cream-
colour, sericeous. Expanse of wings 1 inch 7 lines.

3, Camaroons; ? , Old Calabar.

Evidently congeneric with A. radiata and A. figurata, but
more beautiful in colouring.

38 Mr. F. P. Pascoe on new Neotropical Curculionide.

VI.—New Neotropical Curculionide.—Part IV.
By Francis P. Pascoz, F.L.S. &e.

BRACHYDERIN#. Emmeria, n. ¢.
Pandeletius naupactoides. ee
Phanasora, n. g.

plumbea. OTIORHYNCHINA.
Naupactus simplex. Exorides, n. g

chloropleurus. carinatus.

serenus.

imbutus. Case

sulphurifer. ;

magicus. Cholus luctuosus.
Megalostylus expansus. meestus.

Pandeletius naupactoides.

P. ovatus, fulvus, squamulis subsilaceis tectus; capite, prothorace
femoribusque anticis fuscis, squamulis viridibus sparse adspersis.
Long. 24 lin.

Hab. Brazil.

Ovate, fulvous, covered with small whitish-yellow scales ;
head, prothorax, and anterior femora brown, with scattered
greenish scales, but denser and brighter on the latter; rostrum
rather longer than broad, slightly suleate at the base, the
lower half covered with bright green scales ; antenne testa-
ceous, scape not extending beyond the middle of the eye ;
funicle with the first joint stout, much longer than the second,
the rest transverse, club short ; prothorax well rounded at the
sides, coarsely granulate-punctate, an impressed line in the
middle; scutellum punctiform; elytra rounded at the shoul-
ders, coarsely punctate-striate; body beneath covered with
bright green scales, except the last two segments of the abdo-
men; fore legs much longer than the others, their femora
very stout, their tibie denticulate on the mner margin, all,
except the anterior femora, testaceous.

In the rounded sides of the prothorax this species agrees
with the North-American P. Aclaris (Hbst.), but differs in
coloration, in the relative size of the basal joints of the funicle,
and in the larger fore legs.

PHANASORA.

Rostrum subangustum, sulco angulato basi a capite separatum.
Antenne mediocres, subterminales; scapus oculum superans ;
funiculus articulis duobus basalibus longitudine equalibus. Pro-
thorax subcylindricus. lytra basi prothorace latiora. Pedes
subequales ; femora clavata, omnia infra dente acuto armata ;

Mr. F. P. Pascoe on new Neotropical Curculionide. 39

thie intus bisinuate, apice mucronate; corbulis apertis; tarsi

articulo ultimo ampliato ; wngues liberi. Abdomen normale.

One of my specimens has the MS. name of Pandeletius
ceruleus, Buq., attached to it; but from Pandeletius and
allied genera it differs in the angular groove at the base of
the rostrum, and in all the femora being toothed beneath.

Phanasora plumbea.

P. ovata, squamulis ceruleis approximatis tecta ; tibiis anticis intus
denticulatis. Long. 23 lin.

fab. Bogota.

Ovate, black, covered by approximate pale blue scales
(hence the colour as a whole appears to be dull leaden) ; ros-
trum longer than the head, flattened above, and rather sharply
angled on each side; antenne black, last five joints of the
funicle somewhat turbinate; eyes lateral, rounded; prothorax
slightly rounded at the sides, granulate above, the base trun-
cate ; scutellum punctiform ; elytra moderately convex, nearly
twice as broad as the prothorax at the base, punctate-striate,
punctures approximate ; teeth of the femora slender, curved.

Naupactus simplex.

NV. obovatus, brunneus, squamulis pallidioribus subapproximatis
tectus; rostro antice excavato; antennis elongatis; tibiis anticis
intus denticulatis. Long. 33 lin.

Hab. Brazil.

Obovate, everywhere reddish brown, covered with small
paler subapproximate scales; rostrum broadly excavated
between the insertions of the antenne, the median impressed
line or canal extending to the back of the head; eyes promi-
nent ; antenne ferruginous, slender, elongate ; scape extending
to behind the eye; second joint of the funicle nearly twice as
long as the first; prothorax above equal in length and breadth;
scutellum triangular; elytra convex, seriate-punctate, punc-
tures distinct, sabapproximate ; intercoxal process broad, sub-
truncate.

Allied to N. durius (Sttona durius, Germ.), but with a
much longer prothorax and a less delicate punctuation of
the elytra.

Naupactus chloropleurus.

N. niger, indumento brunneo tenuiter vestitus, lateribus lete argen-
teo-viridibus, supra setulis minutis adspersus ; rostrum curvatum,
postice capiteque profunde suleatis. Long. 6 lin.

Hab. Bahia.

40 Mr. F. P. Pascoe on new Neotropical Curculionide.

Black, loosely covered with a light-brown indumentum,
the sides of the prothorax and elytra covered with bright
silvery green overlapping scales, and everywhere, especially
the legs, furnished with very minute scattered setule ; ros-
trum curved, a deep groove from the middle to between the
eyes; antenne slender; scape passing behind the eye;
funicle elongate, second joint more than twice the length of
the first, the fourth shorter than the third or fifth; club ellip-
tic; prothorax transverse, rounded at the sides, subgranulate ;
scutellum cordate; elytra seriate-punctate, each rounded at
the apex, green stripe broad, irregularly indented, at one
point behind the middle continued to the outer margin; body
beneath with silvery green scales on each side and on the coxe.

In coloration this species resembles to a certain extent N.
stauropterus (Leptocerus stauropterus, Germ.) ; but, inter alia,
the stripe on the elytra is continuous, not interrupted so as to
give the black central portion the figure of a cross as in the
latter.

Naupactus serenus.

NV. niger, squamulis cupreis dense tectus, elytris singulatim vittis
ger, squamulis cup » tectus, elytris sing
duabus metallice viridibus ornatis. Long. 6 lin.

Hab. Parana.

Oblong-obovate, black, covered with cupreous scales, each
elytron with narrow metallic green stripes; rostrum slightly
concave above; antenne ferruginous; scape scarcely extend-
ing behind the eye; funicle with all the joints elongate, the
second three times as long as the first; club slender, not
longer than the two preceding joints together; prothorax
transverse, rounded at the sides, not canaliculate ; scutellum
round, covered with golden-green scales; elytra moderately
convex, obliquely truncate at the shoulders, the apex nar-
rowly rounded, irregularly seriate-punctate, the punctures
minute, outer green stripe nearly the length of the elytron,
the inner shorter; body beneath covered with silvery green
scales; fore legs moderately robust.

This species appears to have N. decorus (Fab.) for its
nearest ally; but the latter has a rugose prothorax and is
differently coloured.

The males in this genus have the elytra much narrower
than the females, and the prothorax often considerably larger
or even globose.

Naupactus imbutus.

NV. nitide fuscus, squamulis minutis sparse indutus; elytris vittis
duabus interruptis marginibusque flavidis. Long. 8 lin.

Hab. Macas.

Mr. F. P. Pascoe on new Neotropical Curculionide. 41

Glossy brown, sparingly furnished with minute scales, each
elytron with a reddish-yellow or luteous stripe interrupted i in
the middle, the side broadly margined with the like colour ;
rostrum slightly angular on each side, the central canal not
extending beyond “the middle ; antenne piceous, slender ;
funicle with all the joints very ‘long, the second three times
as long as the first; club not so long as the two preceding
together ; eyes very. prominent ; prothorax very transverse,
finely punctured, canaliculate ; scutellum triangular ; elytra
convex, shoulders somewhat angular, the apex produced and
narrowly rounded, scutellar border elevated, striate-punctate,
punctures transverse, interstices narrow ; body beneath pitchy
brown ; fore legs robust, their coxee not contiguous.

This species belongs to Schénherr’s first Stirps ; but I have
not seen any thing which can be called an ally.

Naupactus sulphurifer.

JV. fuscus, indumento griseo sparse leviter indutus, lateribus pro-
thoraceque vittis duabus, basi fascia transversa connexis, lete
sulphureis. Long. 63-7 lin.

Hab. Uruguay.

Brown, inclining to pitchy, with a thin eveyish indumen-
tum and a few black sete: ; the sides of the prothorax and
elytra, the anterior margin of the former, and a stripe on each of
the latter (connected by a cross band at the base with its
fellow) a rich sulphur-yellow ; rostrum rather narrow, concave
above ; antennz slender, second joint of the funicle twice as
long as the first, the third shorter than the fourth, the seventh
as broad at the apex as the ciub, the latter slender, acumi-
nate; prothorax transverse, the sides rounded, finely granu-
late above ; scutellum scutiform ; elytra (¢) scarcely broader
than the prothorax at the base, narrowly rounded at the apex,
irregularly and finely punctate- striate ; body beneath with a
sulphur-yellow pubescence ; legs ferruginous, the anterior
robust, with their tibie and tarsi pitchy.

The sulphur markings are composed of a compact mass of
indumentum mixed with hairs. I believe this species is
N. bivittatus of Dejean’s Catalogue.

Naupactus magicus.
N. niger nitidus, squamulis isabellinis in vittas longitudinales
digestis ; antennis brevibus. Long. 6 lin,
Hab. Brazil.
Glossy black with longitudinal stripes of whitish ap-
proximate scales; rostrum narrow, deeply concave above ;

42 Mr. F. P. Pascoe on new Neotropical Curculionide.

antenne short, ferruginous, the funicle scarcely longer than
the scape, second joint of the former nearly twice as long as
the first; club stout, a pale stripe over the eye continuous
with a broader one on the prothorax, the latter slightly trans-
verse, posteriorly a broad groove, which is corrugated on each
side ; scutellum small ; elytra striate-punctate, inflected poste-
riorly, the outer margin thickened, and towards the apex
bluntly denticulate, near the suture a narrow stripe, on the
shoulder a double stripe united before the middle and behind
the middle interrupted by a round spot; body beneath and
legs glossy black, clothed with a few greyish hairs.

An isolated species, somewhat resembling Hilipus bipunc-
tatus, Boh., in general appearance.

Megalostylus expansus.

M. oblongus, obscure fuscus, squamulis albis tectus; prothorace
transversim triangulari, angulis posticis basin elytrorum superan-
tibus. Long. 4 lin.

Hab. Mexico.

Oblong, dull brown or pitchy, more or less covered with small
white approximate scales ; rostrum scarcely narrower than the
head, concave in front; antenne stoutish, black ; prothorax
broadly triangular, the posterior angles acute, extending be-
yond the elytra at the base ; scutellum very small, triangular ;
elytra moderately convex, gradually rounded from the base to
the apex, finely striate-punctate, the punctures almost obso-
lete ; body beneath and legs pitchy brown with scattered white
setulee.

The head is more constricted behind than in M. rhodopus,
Boh., with which structurally it pretty nearly agrees; but it
is at once differentiated by the form of the prothorax.

EXMMERIA.

Rostrum breve, robustum, supra canaliculatum, apice triangula-
riter excisum; scrobes curvate, infra oculos desinentes. An-
tenne tenues, breviuscule, in medio rostri inserte. Oculi sub-
oblongi. Prothoraw transversus, basi bisinuatus. lytra basi
producta, humeris obsoletis. Pedes breviusculi ; femora incras-
sata, haud petiolata ; t¢bzw anticze curvate, omnes intus denticu-
late; corbulis cayernosis; tarsi breviusculi, sequales ; ungues
liberi. Processus intercoxalis angustus. Abdomen segmentis
tertio quartoque brevibus.

With the general appearance of Lustales this genus has
the broad rostrum of Cyphus, but without the prominent
shoulders of the latter. Lacordaire gives “ corbeilles glabres ”’

Mr. F. P. Pascoe on new Neotropical Curculionide. 43

as one of the characters of Mustales ; in all that I have exa-
mined they are scaly.

Emmeria marginata.

LE. subelliptica, squamulis leete argenteis dense tecta, lateribus vitta
splendide cxrulea ornatis. Long. 43-5 lin.

Hab. Paréa.

Subelliptic, closely covered with rich silvery scales, the
sides of the head, prothorax, and elytra with a brilliantly
sparkling blue or green stripe (depending partly on the light),
the apex of the Tatter dull brownish or blackish; rostrum
slightly narrower than the head, the excised portion ciliated
on each side; antenne pitchy, pubescent, first joint of the
funicle shorter than the second, equal in length to the third ;
club as long as the last four joints together; prothorax equal
in length and breadth, slightly rounded at the sides, a lightly
impressed median line; scutellum oblong; elytra moderately
convex, seriate- -punctate, punctures small, , apex of each elytron
ending i in a small mucro; body beneath black, with oblong
imbedded bluish or greenish scales; legs ferruginous, with
subapproximate whitish and brownish scales.

E.XORIDES.

Rostrum breviusculum, canaliculatum, apice excavatum; scrobes
recta, ad oculos desinentes. Antenne graciles, subterminales ;
scapus oculum superanus. Oculi rotundati. Prothorax normalis.
Elytra connata, basi prothorace haud latiora, ad latera abrupte
declivia. Pedes mediocres ; femora integra ; tibie subrectee, apice
mucronate ; corbulis cavernosis ; tars¢ equales; wngues liberi.
Abdomen segmento primo inter coxas angusto, antice rotundato.

A somewhat anomalous genus. It would seem to be some-
where near Naupactus; but the straight scrobes show that its
true place is with the Otiorhynchine. With its cavernous
corbels and free claws it would be referred, according to
Lacordaire’s arrangement, to his “ Celeuthétides.” None of
the species of that group are American; and, moreover, the
broad truncate intercoxal process is a character which this
genus does not possess; so that for the present we must con-

sider its affinities drake

Exorides carinatus.

E. ellipticus, niger, squamulis griseis, aliis orchraceis, tectus ; pro-
thorace elytrisque carinis duabus instructis, his postice nodosis.
Long. 7 lin.

Hab. Macas.

44 Mr. F. P. Pascoe on new Neotropical Curculionide.

Elliptic, somewhat narrow and compressed, covered above
with pale greyish scales alternating above with ochraceous ;
head and rostrum black, with scattered very minute scales,
apex of the latter with a broad deep excavation between the
insertions of the antenns; scrobe expanding in front of the
eye, the upper boundary slightly curved; antenne black,
second joint of the funicle longer than the first, the rest gradu-
ally shorter, club with a silvery pubescence ; prothorax rather
broader than long, sides rounded, two curved black carine
on the disk, the interval concave and canaliculate ; scutellum
small, triangular; elytra seriate-punctate, a strongly raised
earina on the third interstice, terminating in a prominent
nodosity, another carina on the seventh interstice, the apex
narrow and compressed, ending in two short diverging points ;
body beneath and legs black, furnished with pale scattered
setule.

Cholus luctuosus.

C. ovatus, aterrimus, squamulis suberectis concoloribus tectus,
fasciis pallide flavis ornatus; corpore infra dense albido-squa-
moso. Long. 6 lin.

Hab. Sarayacu.

Ovate, intensely black, with small semierect scales of the
same colour, and with bands of pale yellowish overlapping
scales on the prothorax and elytra; rostrum rather long,
dilated and finely punctured at the apex; antenne pitchy,
the two basal joints of the funicle equal in length, club
elliptic ; prothorax transverse, contracted anteriorly, the
apical margin and large spot at the sides pale yellowish ;
scutellum oblong; elytra scarcely broader than the prothorax
at the base, the shoulders nearly obsolete, the apex broadly
rounded, entire, a pale yellow basal band not extending be-
yond the shoulders, another behind the middle, but inter-
rupted at the suture, and a large spot on each side between
the two bands pale yellowish ; body beneath covered with
minute whitish scales ; legs with longer hair-like setule ; an-
terior coxee approximate.

This species is not unlike Amerhinus Bohemanni, Mann.,
in coloration ; but Cholus differs generically in its longer legs.
Polyderces, Schinh., is another genus with the feeblest of
characters, and only adopted by Lacordaire with hesitation as
distinct from his Archarias, which he separates from Cholus
by the absence of the serrated apex of the elytra and the
truncated (not angulated) intermediate segments of the abdo-
men; but if united with Polyderces, it would lead to such an
alteration of nomenclature that I have thought it better to

Mr. E. J. Miers on Crustacea and Pycnogonida. 45

keep them all in Cholus, especially as, throughout the whole
of the group, structural characters are not correlated with
the general appearance.

Cholus mestus.

C. oblongo-ovatus, depressus, subnitide niger, denudatus, elytris
macula basali utrinque fasciaque pone medium, ad suturam in-
terrupta, ex squamulis pallide flavis confertis ornatis. Long.
Glin’.

Hab. Sarayacu.

Oblong-ovate, depressed, black, slightly glossy, glabrous,
a spot at the base near the shoulder and a slightly oblique
narrow band, not meeting its fellow at the suture, composed
of pale yellowish minute scales; rostrum glossy black, elon-
gate, dilated and finely punctured towards the apex; antenne
terruginous, basal jomt of the funicle twice as long as the
two next together, the rest cylindrical; prothorax transverse,
very minutely punctured, a few small glossy spots dotting
the duller black; scutellum suboblong, smooth; elytra slightly
broader than the shoulders at the base, abruptly contracted
near the apex, seriate-punctate, punctures small, distinct ;
body beneath and legs with small scattered setulee and round
imbedded scales, the legs ferruginous ; femora slender.

A glabrous, depressed, and somewhat isolated species; the
elytra abruptly contracted towards the apex cause a gibbosity
above the contracted portion, which is very marked, although
noticeable in many species.

VII.—On a small Collection of Crustacea and Pycnogonida
from Franz-Josef Land, collected by B. Leigh Smith, Esq.
By Epwarp J. Miers, F.L.S., F.Z.8., Assistant in the
Zoological Department, British Museum.

[Plate VII.}

THE Crustacea which form the subject of the present memoir
were all collected by Mr. Leigh Smith in a single locality a
little to the south of Franz-Josef Land, in lat. 79° 55’ N.,
long. about 51° E., during his recent expedition to the Arctic
seas in his yacht ‘ Hira,’ and have been generously presented
by him, with other animals collected in the same cruise, to
the British Museum. Mr. W. Grant, who accompanied him
as naturalist, undertook the care and preservation of the
specimens.

The collection, although not numerous in species, is of con-
siderable interest, in that it contains two Amphipoda which
are apparently new to science, and a Pycnogonid which is

46 Mr. E. J. Miers on Pranz-Josef-Land

not only remarkable on account of its very large size (in
which it is only exceeded by the gigantic Antarctic species
mentioned by Dr. v. Willem6es-Suhm as having been ob-
tained by the ‘ Challenger’ expedition), but also as consti-
tuting the type of an apparently new genus allied to, but
distinct from, Pasithoé and Rhopalorhynchus*.

The precise locality is, moreover, one hitherto unexplored
by the naturalist.

Dr. Camil Heller, in hisaccount of the Crustacea collected by
the late Austrian expedition to the North Pole (Denkschr. der
Akad. der Wissensch. Wien, xxxv. p. 25, 1878), enumerates
twenty-four species of Crustacea and three of Pycnogonida,
most of these, unfortunately, without precise indication of
locality ; and Mr. W. 8. M. D’Urban has recently given an
account of the Crustacea with other Invertebrata collected by
Mr. W. J. A. Grant in the Barents Sea during two expedi-
tions of the Dutch vessel ‘ Willem Barents,’ in 1878 and
1879. Nineteen Crustacea and five Pycnogonida were ob-
tained in these two expeditions. ‘They were determined by
the Rev. A. M. Norman and Prof. J. O. Westwood; and all
seem to have been collected in latitudes considerably to the
south of Franz-Josef Land. (See Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist.
1880, vol. vi. p. 262).

DECAPODA.
Crangon (Cheraphilus) boreas (Phipps).

An adult male, length 3 inches 3 lines.

Hippolyte Phippst, Kroyer.

Four specimens of the female form (described by Kréyer as
H. turgida) are in the collection ; length of the largest 1 inch
8 lines. There is also a specimen which is probably to be
referred to the male form of this species, in which all the dorsal
teeth of the rostrum except the three nearest to the apical
spine are obsolete. ‘There are three teeth on the lower margin.
The second supraocular spine is distinctly developed. Length
about 1 inch 5 lines.

Hippolyte polaris (Sabine).
Six females are in the collection. The length of the largest

is not less than 2 inches 5 lines. The rostrum in this series

is 5—,-toothed. With these specimens is one that is very

* I regret to have been unable to consult an important memoir by
Prof. G. O. Sars, on the new Crustacea and Pycnogonida collected
during the Norwegian Expedition in 1877-78, and published at Chris-
tiania during the present year (1880).

Crustacea and Pycnogonida. 47

probably to be referred to the male or borealis form of H.
polaris, in which the rostrum is entirely devoid of teeth on
its upper margin, and possesses but a single small tooth on the
lower margin. The larger flagellum of the antennules is con-
siderably thickened. ‘The anterior margin of the carapace is
armed with a supraocular and infraocular spine. Prof. S. I.
Smith, it may be observed, has noted that in extreme varie-
ties of HZ. polaris the rostrum is wholly edentulous.

AMPHIPODA.
Anonyx nugax (Phipps).

Numerous specimens of this, perhaps the commonest Arctic
Amphipod, were collected.

Acanthonotozoma inflatum (Kroyer).

A single female was obtained. This specimen agrees very
well with Goés’s figure of the species; but the anterior margin
of the coxa of the fourth thoracic limb is regularly rounded,
whereas in Goés’s figure it is represented as somewhat angu-
lated. The dorsal carina, which is described by Boeck as
very high (aléissima), on the first three postabdominal seg-
ments, in Goés’s figure and in our specimen is distinct, but
not much elevated.

Acanthostepheia pulchra, sp. n.

(Pl. VIL. figs. 1, 2.)

Body robust. Head, as in A. Malmgrent, armed with a
long dorsally, inferiorly, and laterally carinated rostrum, which
is somewhat curved downward toward the apex, and is pro-
longed beyond the distal end of the first exposed joint of the
superior antenne ; posteriorly the dorsal keel of the rostrum
is prolonged backward between the eyes to the posterior margin
of the head. Hach of the segments of the body present, indi-
cations of a median dorsal carina, which is elevated in the
form of a single obtuse somewhat triangular lobe on the fifth
and sixth segments, and forms two lobes on the seventh seg-
ment; two similar lobes exist on each of the first four seg-
ments of the postabdomen; but the lobes, although acute, are
not so greatly produced backward, and on the fourth segment
a much greater interval exists between the first and second
of the dorsal lobes in A. pulchrathan in A. Malmgrent. The
postero-lateral angles of the sixth and seventh segments of the
body and of the first three segments of the postabdomen are
regularly rounded—not, as in A. Malmgreni, produced into
spines. The superior antenne are relatively shorter than in

48 Mr. E. J. Miers on Franz-Josef~Land

A, Malmgreni, the last joint of the peduncle being less deve-
loped than in Goés’s figure of that species. The penultimate
joints or palms of the first and second legs in A. pulchra are
regularly ovate, without indications of teeth on the inferior
margins as in Goés’s representation of A. Malmgrent. The
coxal joints of the legs (particularly of the fourth and sixth
pairs) appear to be more developed. As in A. Malmgreni, the
seventh thoracic legs are greatly elongated. The uropoda
and terminal segment do not present any very marked dis-
tinctive characters. Length of the largest specimen to tip of
rostrum about 1 inch 5 lines.

Three females were collected.

The absence of spines at the postero-lateral angles of the
posterior thoracic and postabdominal segments would suffi-
ciently characterize this species, independently of the other dis-
tinctions enumerated in the above diagnosis.

The outer maxillipedes are very similar to those of A.
Malmgreni as figured by Goés. The outer lamina reaches
very nearly to the middle of the dilated antepenultimate joint
of the palpus.

Halirages fulvocinctus (Sars).

A good series of specimens (females) are in the collection,
which agree very well with Goés’s figure of the species, and
with the specimens collected by the late British Arctic expe-
dition.

Amathillopsis affinis, sp. n.
(Pl. VII. figs. 3-5.)

The head is produced anteriorly into a short, convex, subacute
rostrum, which does not reach nearly to the distal end of the first
joint of the superior antennze, and has a small antero-lateral lobe
on each side between the superior and inferior antenne. As
in Amathillopsis spinigera, Heller, the dorsal surface of each
of the thoracic segments and of the first three postabdominal
seoments bears a long acute dorsal lobe or spine; and, as in
that species, the spines become successively longer, the last
excepted, which is very small. As in A. spinigera, the lateral
margins of the first three postabdominal segments are sinu-
ated and terminate in a spine at their postero-lateral angles.
The terminal segment is less dilated at its distal end, which
is very slightly emarginate. The superior antenne terminate
in very long and slender flagella, and are nearly twice as long
as the inferior antenne ; the terminal joint of the peduncle
is relatively shorter than in A. spinigera, and the accessory
flagellum so minute as to be undistinguishable except under

Crustacea and Pycnogonida. 49

the microscope. The first and second legs (gnathopoda) are
slender and feeble, the first rather the smaller; the merus is
produced distally beneath the carpus, which is about as long
as the palm or propus, and is very narrow at its proximal end ;
the palm in both is about twice as long as broad, of a more
oblong form than in A. spinigera, obliquely truncated at its
distal end, against which the slender arcuate dactyl impinges.
The coxal joints of the legs are not so distinctly emarginate
at their distal ends ; those of the fourth legs are much more
developed than in A. spinigera. The legs are very imperfect
in the single specimen examined ; but the basal (2nd) joints
of all the legs are oblong-oval and more dilated than in A.
spinigera as figured by Heller.

The single specimen (which it was necessary to decapitate
to examine the mouth-organs) is a female.

This species is easily distinguished from its congener by the
form of the telson, the greater length of the superior antenne,
the form of the first and second legs, the carpi of which are
not so produced at their infero-distal angles, the coxal joints
of the third and fourth legs, &c.

In the mouth-organs, so far as could be ascertained from
the dissection of the unique example, the following differences
are observable: the apex and accessory process of the man-
dible is broader, truncated; the exterior lobe of the outer
maxillipede does not reach to the middle of the antepenul-
mate joint of the palpus. The two forms, however, bear a
very close external resemblance to one another, and I cannot
regard them as generically distinct ; moreover the examination
of additional specimens is needed in the case of A. affinis.

Eustrus cuspidatus, Kroyer.
Three specimens (females) are in the collection. Length
of the largest 1 inch 7 lines.

Tritropis aculeata (Lepechin).

A single female example of this common arctic species
occurs in Mr. Grant’s collection.

PYCNOGONIDA.
Nymphon hirtum, Fabr.

I refer a single example in the collection to this species.
The pubescence covering the body is rather short and dense.

Nymphon gracile, Leach.
Five examples are in the collection which appear to be

referable to this species. L
Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. vii. 4

50 Mr. E. J. Miers on Franz-Josef-Land

ANOMORHYNCHUS, gen. nov.

Body robust, with the segments coalescent and the leg-
bearing processes nearly in contact with one another. Ros-
trum greatly developed, constricted at the proximal end, and
hence flask-shaped—that is, provided with a distinct neck.
First pair of appendages (antenne or mandibles) wanting ;
second pair 9-jointed, with the second and fourth joints
elongated; third pair (the so-called ovigerous legs) 10-
jointed, the fourth and sixth joints elongated, the tenth joint
bearing a small terminal claw. Claws of the legs simple.
Abdomen about half as long as the body, very slender, uni-
articulate.

This new genus must be placed in the family Pyenogonidee
as characterized by Dr. Semper in his arrangement of the
group (Verh. physik.-medicin. Gesellschaft Wiirzburg, vil.
p- 274, 1874) ; but it is not to be confounded with any of the
genera therein enumerated. Structurally it is most nearly
allied to the Rhopalorhynchus Kréyert of Wood-Mason
(Journ. Asiat. Soc. Bengal, 1873, xlii. pt. 2, p. 172, pl. xiii.
figs. 1-5, and Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. 1873, ser. 4, xu.
p- 342), from the Andamans; but in this genus the neck
and distinctly-segmented body are very slender, the leg-
bearing processes being separated by wide intervals, and the
abdomen is rudimentary.

From Pasithoé, Goodsir (Hndeis, Philippi), with which
Oiceobathes, Hesse, is perhaps identical, this genus is distin-
guished by the more numerous articulations of the appen-
dages, the great development and basal constriction of the
rostrum, and the simple claws.

Anomorhynchus Smithii, sp. n.

(Pl. VIL. figs. 6-8.)

The body and its appendages are robust and apparently
naked, but clothed with very minute, stiff, sparse hairs,
which render the surface scabrous to the touch. ‘The head is
very robust, in the larger specimen nearly once and a half
the length of the body with the abdomen; its constricted
proximal portion or neck widens somewhat suddenly, and is
about one fourth the length of the head, which is nearly
cylindrical; the oral aperture large and triangulate. The
segments of the body are coalescent, and scarcely any traces of
them distinguishable. The abdomen is very slender, much
narrower than, and half as long as, the body ; the ophthalmic
process elevated, conical, and acute. The first and second

Crustacea and Pyenogonida, 51

pairs of appendages are closely approximated ; the first pair is
articulated with a very short process of the thorax; its basal
joint is also very short, the second joint considerably elon-
gated, the third very short, the fourth rather more than half
as long as the second; of the remaining joints the sixth is
longest, but shorter than the fourth. he second pair of
appendages is articulated with a short thoracic process ; and
its first three joints are short, the fourth and sixth joints
greatly elongated, the seventh to tenth short, subequal, and
fringed with short spines on their under surfaces. ‘The first
three joints of the legs, and the processes of the thorax with
which they are articulated, are short, the fourth to sixth joints
considerably elongated, the seventh little shorterthan theeighth,
both together not as long as the sixth, the terminal claw styli-
form and acute. ‘Total length of the largest example 2 inches
2 lines, of the head and neck rather more than 1 inch 3 lines,
of the abdomen nearly 4 lines (4 inch); greatest width
between tips of legs (when expanded) rather more than 84
inches. ‘I'wo specimens were collected.

The four terminal joints of the third (ovigerous) pair of
appendages are short and capable of being coiled together so
as to form a prehensile organ, as observed by Prof. J. Wood-
Mason in Rhopalorhynchus Kréyert, a peculiarity observable
also in some other Pycnogonida.

I have much pleasure in associating with this fine species
the name of its distinguished discoverer, Mr. Leigh Smith.

Besides the above Crustacea, certain species were collected
by Mr. Smith in the seas to the north of Spitzbergen, about
which no detailed observations need be offered. They are
Hippolyte turgida, a Schizopodous crustacean in too mutilated
condition for determination, Gammarus locusta, Onesimus
litoralis, and Themisto libellula (in considerable numbers).

EXPLANATION OF PLATE VIL.

Fig. 1. Acanthostepheia pulchra, sp. n. (nat. size), lateral view.

Fig. 2. Second leg of the same (magnified). ; ‘

Fig. 3. Outer maxillipedes of Amathillopsis affins, sp. 0. (magnified).

Fig. 4. Second leg of the same, showing the form of the hand (magnified).

Fig. 5. Terminal segment of the same (magnified).

Fig. 6. Anomorhynchus Smithit, gen. and sp. n. (slightly reduced).

Fig. 7. Lateral view of the body of A. Snuthi, showing the form of the
oculigerous tubercle and cephalic appendages (nat. size).

Fig. 8. Front view of the rostrum of the same, showing the form of the
mouth (nat. size).

52 Dr. F. B. White on new Species

VIII.— Descriptions of new Species of Heteropterous Hemiptera
collected in the Hawatian Islands by the Rev. T. Blackburn.
—No.3. By F. Bucnanan Wuire, M.D., F.L.S.

Scutelleridzx.

28. Coleotichus Blackburnie, n. sp.

(. elongato-obovatus, coccineus, puncturis aureo-viridibus et cyaneis
confertim ornatus, marginibus lineaque centrali impunctatis ;
capite supra levissime, subtus forte convexo, apice obtuse rotun-
dato, lateribus (postico excepto), tylo et linea centrali obtuse
elevatis; antennis articulis primo secundoque subzequilongis,
tertio, quarto quintoque longioribus et inter se subsquilongis ;
rostro coxas intermedias attingente ; pronoto marginibus latera-
libus et ad angulos anticos subdepresso, his subincrassatis rectis,
angulis lateralibus prominulis obtusiusculis; scutello abdomine
subangustiore, linea centrali subelevata; prosterni lobis pro-
stethioque postico subimpunctatis; ventris segmentis pone spi-
racula macula distinctius punctata destitutis, angulis apicalibus
segmentorum secundi usque sexti distincte dentato-productis ;
segmento anali maris a basi sensim producto, medio transversim
haud profunde depresso, apice subtruncato. Capite confertissime
punctato, marginibus (postico inter ocellos excepto), linea centrali,
et linea tenuiore utrinque prope basin et cum linea centrali
parallela, necnon tylo levigatis; pronoto intra margines anticum
lateralesque subtilius et crebrius, disco rude et irregulariter
punctato, marginibus maculis irregularibus prope marginem
anticum et linea centrali impunctatis; scutello limbo per-
angusto et linea centrali levigatis; elytris inter venas conferte
punctatis, area magna triangulari ante membranam levigata.

3. Long. 163, lat. 8 m. m.

Of this fine species (which I have dedicated to Mrs. Black-
burn) I am sorry that I cannot give a better description as
regards the colour. JI have described it as being scarlet on
the authority of Mr. Blackburn, who has met with three
specimens. ‘l'he one sent to meis (perhaps from having been
in alcohol) ochraceous brown in colour, thickly punctured
with golden green and dark blue, and only showing a trace of
the red ground-colour on the scutellum. Under these circum-
stances I have said as little as possible regarding the colour,
reserving a description of that till I have seen other specimens.
Mr. Blackburn remarks that this is one of the rarest of the
Hawaiian Hemiptera, only three specimens having been taken,
and these at long intervals. It occurs on flowers near
Honolulu.

The occurrence of a species of the genus Coleotichus in the
Hawaiian Islands is rather interesting, as the genus has hitherto

of Heteropterous Hemiptera. 53

been confined to Australia or its more immediate vicinity.
Of the five species previously described, two belong to Austra-
lia, one to New Caledonia and Woodlark, one to the Fiji
Islands, and one to Amboina and Ceram. The Hawaiian
Islands seem to have derived the progenitors of their Hemi-
pterous fauna from all quarters; but our knowledge is yet too
incomplete to allow of any speculation as to the direction
whence the immigration has been strongest.

This species is intermediate between the sections ‘a’ and
“aa” (having some of the characters of both), into which Stal
divided the genus in the ‘ Enumeratio.’

Lygeide.
29. Nysius Blackburni, n. sp.

JN. oblongo-obovatus, niger, subnitidus, capite maculis oblongis
maguis 3 inter oculos, tylo linea longitudinali, pronoto macula
parva ad marginem anticum et disco postico pro magna parte,
clayo maculis parvis, corio maculis majusculis precipue prope
marginem costalem sitis, necnon femoribus apicibus plus minus
rufo-testaceis, membrana albida fusco-maculata. Capite pilosulo
subtiliter punctulato; antennis rostro brevioribus, articulo
secundo quam tertius multo longiore ; rostro coxas posticas attin-
gente, articulo primo bucculis subsequilongo ; gula basin capitis
subattingente ; bucculis gula paullo brevioribus, subparallelis,
retrorsum sensim humilioribus; pronoto rude punctato, rugis sub-
eleyatis (una centrali longitudinali, altera transversa et ante
medium sita) subimpunctatis, angulis posticis elevatis levigatis,
longitudine latitudine postica + minore, lateribus ad medium paullo
sinuatis; scutello triradiatim calloso-rugoso punctato (ruga ad
medium excepta); hemelytris pilosulis haud profunde punctato-
rugulosis, corii marginis costalis parte quarta basali recta, deinde
sensim rotundato-ampliatis; pedibus mediocribus ; mesosterno
sulcato, prostethio antice punctato; ventre capillis adpressis
pallidis vestito.

©. Long. 4, lat. 13 m. m.

Taken by sweeping ferns near the “ Lake of Fire” on
Mauna Loa, Hawaii, at an elevation of 4000 feet.

30. Nystus nitedus, n. sp.

N. elongatus, nitidus, glaber, pallide olivaceo-brunneus, subtus cum
pedibus dilutior, capite capillis adpressis aureis vestito, brunneo,
tylo, linea longitudinal, orbitulis et tuberculis antenniferis ochra-
ceis, antennis et rostro apice brunneis, his articulo primo (macula
interiore excepta), articulis secundo tertioque ochraceis, articulis
secundo tertioque ad medium brunnescenti-annulatis ; pronoto
puncturis, angulis posticis et macula ad medium marginis postici,

54 Dr. F. B. White on new Species

scutello basi puncturisque, hemelytris venis, corio angulo apicali
lato, femoribus maculis, tibiis ad basin apicemque, tarsorum arti-
culis apicibus, pectore puncturis, gula, linea inter pedes, mesosterno
macula media, ventre ad basin neenon maculis connexivi plus
minus brunneis vel piceo-brunneis; membrana subhyalina. Capite
paullo elongato, ruguloso; antennis gracilibus rostro brevioribus,
articulo secundo tertio subsequilongo ; rostro coxas posticas supe-
rante, articulo primo basin capitis attingente ; gula basin capitis
haud attingente ; bucculis antice altis cito retrorsum humilioribus,
plure quam dimidio postico maxime depresso et subseque alto,
postice appropinquantibus; pronoto parce et rude punctato,
disco longitudinaliter et transversim depresso, rugis longitudinali
transversaque elevatis et angulis posticis elevatis levigatis, longi-
tudine latitudine postica } minore, lateribus subsinuatis ; scutello
fortiter triradiatim calloso-rugoso, ad latera punctato ; hemelytris
(margine costali corti excepto) subtilius punctatis, sutura clayi
biseriatim punctata, margine costali corii ad basin recto, deinde
sensim rotundato et subampliato; pedibus mediocribus; meso-
sterno sulcato, margine postico paullo elevato.
Q. Long. 5, lat. 12 m. m.

At an Tees of 4000 feet, on Haleakala, Maui.

51. Nysius nemorivagus, n. sp.

JV. oblongus, nigro-fuscus, rufescenti- ochraceo variegatus, subopa-
cus, parce pallide pilosulus, capite vitta longitudinali interrupta
et maculis 2 inter oculos, tuberculis antenniferis apice, antennis
articulo primo basi apiceque, articulis secundo tertioque apice,
pronoto macula media antica, disco postico (puncturis, ruga longi-
tudinali antice, et maculis 4 irregularibus ad marginem ‘posticum
exceptis), scutello apice, clavo maculis nonnullis parvis, corio
maculis majusculis (presertim in disco antico sitis) et margine
costali dilatato (limbo angustissimo excepto), pectore ventreque
maculis, femoribus (maculis permultis exceptis), tibiis (basi pro
parte et apice exceptis), tarsis (articulo ultimo excepto) plus minus
rufescenti-ochraceis vel ochraceis; membrana hyalina plus minus
fusco variegata. Capite rude punctato; antennis rostro subsequi-
longis, articulo secundo tertio longiore ; rostro coxas posticas sub-
attingente, articulo primo bucculis equilongo; gula capitis basin
attingente; bucculis gula brevioribus antice subaltis, in medio
sensim retrorsum humilioribus, postice citius humilioribus et ante
apicem gule evanescentibus ; pronoto rude punctato, ruga longitu-
dinali preecipue postice, ruga transversa et angulis posticis elevatis
levigatis, lateribus subsinuatis, longitudine latitudine postica
minore; scutello rude punctato, ruga longitudinali impunctata ;
hemelytris vix et tenuissime punctulatis, corio margine costali ad
basin recto, deinde sensim rotundato-ampliato ; pedibus mediocri-
bus ; mesosterno sulcato, postice submarginato ; ventre segmento
quarto postice truncato.

9. Long. 5, lat. 13 m. m.

of Heteropterous Hemiptera. a)

Mauna Kea, Hawaii, and Haleakala, Maui, at an elevation
of 5000-6000 feet. |
In the specimen described above the membrane is almost
unicolorous; in others it is more or less variegated with
fuscous.
52. Nystus rubescens, n. sp.

NV. oblongus, ochraceo-rufescens, capillis adpressis pallidis vestitus,
capite macula magna utrinque oculum includente et ad apicem
jugee percurrente, pronoto vitta lata transversa ante lobum posti-
cum sita et puncturis, scutello basi puncturisque, hemelytris
maculis parvis, corio limbo antico angustissimo necnon maculis 3
majusculis ad marginem apicalem fusco-nigris ; antennis, rostro
pedibusque lutescentibus, antennarum articulo ultimo, rostri arti-
culis tertio quartoque, et tarsorum apicibus brunneis vel piceo-brun-
neis, hemelytris dilutioribus, margine costali dilatato innotato,
scutello apice, bucculis, coxis atris ad apicem et acetabulis secundis
tertiisque ochraceis, pectore ventreque nigris capillis albidis
vestitis, prostethio marginibus, ventre segmentis quarto, quinto
sextoque ad medium, et segmentis genitalibus pro parte
rufescentibus, membrana albido-hyalina pallide fusco-nebu-
losa. Capite punctato; antennis rostro paullo brevioribus,
articulo secundo quam tertius multo longiore ; rostro coxas posticas
superante, articulo primo et gula basin capitis attingentibus ; buc-
culis gula paullo brevioribus, retrorsum sensim humilioribus et
evanescentibus ; pronoto rude punctato, ruga transversa in medio
interrupta, macula ante medium marginis postici, margine et
angulis elevatis posticis levigatis, ruga longitudinali obsoleta,
longitudine latitudine postica minore, lateribus fere rectis;
scutello rude punctato, ruga longitudinali levigata ; corii margine
costali ad basin recto, deinde sensim rotundato-ampliato ; pedibus
mediocribus ; mesosterno sulcato, postice marginato.

@. Long. 5, lat. 12 m. m.

On ferns near the “ Lake of Fire”? on Mauna Loa, Hawaii,
at an elevation of 4000 feet.
33. Nysius pteridicola, n. sp.

N. ovato-oblongus, brunneo-ochraceus, brunneo yariegatus, glaber
subnitidus, capite, antennis articulis secundo tertioque ad basin
angustissime, rostro articulo ultimo, pronoto ruga transversa
puncturisque, scutello, hemelytris puncturis, corlo limbo costali
angustissimo et angulo apicali, tarsis apicibus necnon corpore
subtus plus minus brunneis vel piceo-brunneis ; antennis, rostro,
pedibus et prostethii margine postico rufo-brunneis; pronoto
ruga longitudinali postice et angulis posticis, scutello apice necnon
hemelytris venis plus minus pallide ochraceis ; membrana albido-
hyalina, Capite rugoso; antennis rostro multo brevioribus,
articulo secundo tertio longiore; rostro coxas posticas superante,
articulo primo basin capitis superante ; gule longitudine capitis

56 Dr. F. B. White on new Species

3 minore; bucculis gule fere equilongis, antice altis, retror-
sum cito humilioribus, pone gulam concurrentibus ; pronoto rude
et dense punctato, ruga transversa et ruga longitudinali fere
obsoleta subimpunctatis, angulis posticis levigatis, longitudine
latitudine postica + minore, lateribus fere rectis ; scutello dense
et rude punctato fortiter triradiatim rugoso-calloso, ruga longi-
tudinali laevigata; hemelytris dense subtilius rugoso-punctulatis,
sutura clayi biseriatim punctata, margine costali fere a basi sen-
sim rotundato et subampliato; pedibus crassis; mesosterno sul-
cato, postice marginato ; ventre segmento quarto postice truncato,
segmento quinto obtuse emarginato longitudine media longitu-
dinis lateralis parti quarte squilonga.
do et 9. Long. 43-6, lat. 13-2 m. m.

Near the “ Lake of Fire” on Mauna Loa, Hawaii, at an
altitude of 4000 feet.

34. Nystus vulcan, n. sp.

iV. precedenti (Nysio pteridicole) persimilis, differre videtur pronoto
remotius punctato, margine costali dilatato corii_paullo ampliore,
bucculis magis abrupte et minus sensim retrorsum humilioribus,
antennarum articulo secundo tertio vix longiore, et precipue
ventris segmento quarto postice angulariter sinuato haud trun-
cato.

sé. Long. 5}, lat. 13 m. m.

Mauna Loa, Hawaii.

Very like Nysius pteridicola (no. 33) in coloration and
general appearance ; but the different form of the fourth ven-
tral segment, as well as the other points noted, will serve to
separate them. ‘The coloration of the underside differs in a
few particulars; but having seen one specimen only, I cannot
be sure whether this will afford a constant character.

The Hawaiian Islands seem to be very rich in species of
Nysius, no less than ten species (all peculiar) having been
found there ; and of these Mr. Blackburn has discovered nine.
When there is reason to believe that the total number of
species occurring in the islands is (comparatively) completely
known, it will be desirable to give an analytical table of
them; in the meantime [ have been obliged to describe each
at some length, as the species of this genus are often very
similar in general appearance.

Nysius must, from its wide distribution, and especially from
the occurrence of species in many oceanic islands, be a genus
of great antiquity.

35. Cymus calvus, n. sp.

C. niger opacus, tylo apice, tuberculis antenniferis, collo loboque
postico pronoti, scutello apice, oculis ocellisque, prostethio margi-

of Heteropterous Hemiptera. oT

nibus antico et postico, metastethio margine postico necnon aceta-
bulis rufo-brunneis ; antennis, pedibus hemelytrisque pallide
brunneo-flavescentibus ; antennis basi et articulo ultimo, coxis,
trochanteribus et femoribus ad basin, clayi commissura, pronoto
ad marginem posticum, hemelytrorum puncturis et corii angulo
apicali plus minus pallide vel saturate brunneis ; abdomine ferru-
gineo-testaceo, ad basin fusco, incisuris pallidioribus, capillis
sericeis tenuissimis vestito ; pedibus rostroque brunneo-ochraceis,
illo apice piceo-brunneo ; membrana albida. Capite cum oculis
latiore quam longiore, subtiliter punctato, jugis subpromi-
nulis et acutiusculis ; antennarum articulo primo capitis apicem
superante, secundo tertio tertioque quarto longiore; rostro
mesosterni medium attingente, articulo primo medium prosterni
haud superante; pronoto capillis tenuissimis parcissime vestito,
sat rude punctato, anterius rotundato-angustato et hoc modo collo
lato instructo, ad medium leviter constricto et transversim impresso,
quam margo posticus paullo longiore, margine postico sinuato,
ruga centrali longitudinali obsoleta, marginibus antico posticoque,
area utrinque lobi anterioris necnon vitta longitudinali ad angu-
lum posticum -levigatis ; scutello rude punctato (rugis distinctis
longitudinah et transversa exceptis); clavo rude punctato; corio
ad margines interiorem et apicalem serie punctorum instructo,
disco rude punctato, margine lato costali et area intima a basi ad
marginem apicalem extensa levigatis ; pectore punctato, meso-
sterno obsolete longitudinaliter sulcato; abdomine apicem corii
longe superante.
©. Long. 5, lat. pronoti posterioris 14 m. m.

Very rare. Understones on the mountains near Honolulu,
at an elevation of about 2000 feet.

Though I have placed this and the following species in the
genus Cymus, they seem to differ from it in some particulars,
as, for example, in the shorter rostrum, in which point they
approach the genus Arphnus of Stal, from which, however,
the tylus not or scarcely exceeding the buccule appears to
exclude them. Consequently I have described the species at
greater length than I would otherwise have done. The genus
Cymus, though a small one, is widely distributed, having re-
presentatives in the Palearctic, Oriental, Nearctic, Neotro-

ical, and Australian Regions, and a closely-allied genus in
the Ethiopian Region.

It may be noticed that the specimen described above has
the second and third joints of the right antenna fused into one,
a not uncommon malformation in the Lygeide.

36. Cymus criniger, n. sp.

C. griseo-flavescens, capillis crassiusculis pallidis sat bene vestitus ;
capite, pronoti lobo antico vitta transversa lata, scutello basi,
corii clavique angulis apicalibus necnon corpore subtus atris ;

58 On new Species of Heteropterous Hemiptera.

antennis pallide rufo-brunneis, articulo ultimo precipue ad
apicem, tuberculis antenniferis, tylo apice, scutello, prostethii mar-
gine antico, acetabulis externe, sternorum abdominisque inci-
suris saturatioribus ; rostro pedibusque brunneo-testaceis, illo ad
apicem fusco, horum coxis, trochanteribus et femoribus ad basin
fusco-ferrugineis, femoribus subtus fusco maculatis; membrana
albida. Capite cum oculis latiore quam longiore, jugis subpromi-
nulis et acutiusculis, antennis articulo primo apicem capitis
superante, secundo tertio et tertio quarto longiore; rostro
coxas anticas vix superante, articulo primo marginem anticum
prostethii paullo superante ; pronoto punctato, anterius in collum
subangustato, lateribus leviter sinuatis, ruga longitudinali obso-
leta, disco anterius utrinque, marginibus angustis antico posti-
coque et linea brevi subelevata ad angulos posticos elevatos leevi-
gatis ; scutello (ruga longitudinali excepta) punctato; hemely-
tris rude punctatis, margine costali dilatatoimpunctato; mesosterno
distincte longitudinaliter sulcato; abdomine apicem corii longe
superante.
9. Long. 5, lat. pronoti posterioris 1} m. m.
Very rare. Under stones on Haleakala, Maui, at an ele-
vation of 5000 feet.
Though in stature and general appearance resembling the
preceding species, this is very distinct from it. It is rather
stouter and also broader behind.

Anthocoride.

87. Dilasia (?) denigrata, Buchanan White.
Dilasia (?) denigrata, Buchanan White, E. M. M. xvi. 146. 11.
On trees, at an elevation of about 3000 feet, on Mauna

Kea, Hawaii.
38. Dilasia(?) decolor, Buchanan White,

Dilasia (?) decolor, Buchanan White, E. M. M. xvi. 147. 12.
On trees in mountain forests near Honolulu.

39. Lilia dilecta, Buchanan White.

Lilia dilecta, Buchanan White, E. M. M. xvi. 147. 18.

On trees at an altitude of about 5000 feet, on Haleakala,
Maui. ,

The genus Lilia was constituted for the reception of this
species, which, with nos. 37 and 88, has been found in the
Hawaiian Islands only.

Emeside.

PLOIARIODES, n. g.
Caput antice convexiusculum, postice globoso-reflexum. Thorax

Bibliographical Notices. 59

trapezoidalis, pronoto marginibus rotundatis, disco ante marginem
posticum tuberculo elevato armato. Hemelytra apicem abdo-
minis paullo superantia, corio clayoque angustissimis. Pedes
antici corporis dimidio vix longiores, femoribus ad basin biseriatim
setuloso-dentatis, trochanteribus haud dentatis, tarsis triarticu-
latis. Abdomen elongato-obovatum, marginibus reflexis.

Very like Ploiaria, Scop., differmg only in the unreflexed
side margins and tuberculate hind margin of the pronotum.

40. Ploiariodes Whitet, Bln., n. sp.

P. pallide ochraceo-brunnea, antennis, pedibus hemelytrisque dilu-
tioribus, his fusco-brunneo maculatis, illis fusco-brunneo annu-
latis; pedibus subtilissime pilosis; antennis ¢ parce longi-
pulosis.

3 et Q. Long. 64, lat. pronoti 1, lat. corp. postici 12 m. m.

Beaten from dead branches of trees at an elevation of about
4500 feet, on Mauna Loa, Hawaii.

BIBLIOGRAPHICAL NOTICES.

A Treatise on Comparative Embryology. By Francis M. Batrorur,
M.A., F.R.S. Vol. I. 8vo. London: Macmillan, 1880.

Amone the numerous benefits for which zoologists must own their in-
debtedness to Mr. Darwin, one of the greatestisundoubtedly theimpulse
given, by the enunciation of his theory of the origin of species, to the
study of the embryology of animals. Of course there were embryolo-
gists in pre-Darwinian times, and many of the facts revealed by them
were among the most interesting offered for the contemplation of
naturalists ; but the doctrine of the origin of species by descent
with modification immediately invested these facts with a new
interest. There seemed to be at once a confirmation and a key given
to that reproduction in developmental forms of the higher animals of
the characteristics of more lowly organisms, which was long since, if
somewhat vaguely, recognized. It was only natural to conclude that,
if the different living types were genetically related, some trace of
the line of descent ought to be found in the phases which they
passed through between the first appearance of the embryo and its
assumption of the adult form ; and observation showed that in fact in
many cases the ontogeny of the individual might fairly be regarded
as furnishing an abridged sketch of the ancestral development
or phylogeny of the species. Of course those naturalists who ob-
jected to the doctrine of the genetic evolution of organisms were
free also to object to the phrases in which such conclusions as these
are couched ; but at the same time it must be admitted that the

60 Bibliographical Notices.

phenomena of the geographical distribution of animals and their
succession in geological time, whatever theory of their production
we may adopt, are generally in accordance with the results of a
theoretical genetic relationship. With the prevalence of such ideas
a new significance was given to the phases through which animals
pass in their progress to their perfect form ; and it is hardly to be
wondered at that the study of embryology, taken in its broadest
sense, began to be followed with a zeal and energy of which we had
no previous conception. The zoological laboratories which have been
established in several favourable situations offered every facility for
carrying on the most minute and elaborate investigations ; individual
students of course under such circumstances experienced an increased
stimulus to exertion ; and the result during the last fifteen years has
been a perfect deluge of memoirs, of greater or less merit, treating
of the developmental history of animals.

It is to the sifting and summarizing of this vast mass of material,
aided by his own investigations, that Mr. Balfour has devoted an
enormous amount of labour, the outcome of which is the volume
whose title stands at the head of the present article, and for which
all zoologists certainly owe him a deep debt of gratitude. The
introduction of new ideas in connexion with embryonic development
has resulted in such a multiplication of technical terms that many
naturalists who have not made embryology their study must often
find it difficult to understand the precise nature of the statements
made and the arguments used in the discussion even of questions of
systematic zoology ; and to these Mr. Balfour’s book will be an in-
expressible boon. But this is the lowest point of view from which
we can estimate its usefulness. As a philosophical ‘summary of the
results of embryological investigation it must be quite as highly
appreciated.

Mr. Balfour commences with an Introduction, in which, after
indicating the general purpose and scope of his work, he briefly
describes the phenomena of reproduction and its different modes.
He then proceeds to describe the nature and development of the
ovum and spermatozoon, the maturation of the former and its im-
pregnation, and the subsequent changes produced by segmentation
&e. up to the period of the formation of the germinal layers. The
general statements are illustrated by references to the pheno-
mena presented by certain groups; and the whole constitutes an
admirable sketch of the process of ovular development in the animal
kingdom.

These chapters are followed by the section which constitutes the
body of the work, systematic embryology, in which the author, after
describing the general phenomena resulting in the formation of the
germinal layers, and the broad differences in the mode in which this
result is brought about, proceeds to describe seriatim the character-
istics of embryonic development in all the great groups of the animal
kingdom. Criticism of such work would be out of place; we can
only say that, so far as we can see, all the most recent literature of

Bibliographical Notices. 61

the subject has been laid under contribution, and the materials thus
obtained worked up into a connected whole with great care and
in the clearest and most intelligible manner. Mr. Balfour has ap-
pended to each section and subsection of his work a bibliography of
the memoirs cited in it; and as these are cited throughout by con-
secutive numbers, he has reprinted all the separate bibliographies
in a connected list at the end of the volume. This is exceedingly
convenient for reference. ‘The book is also freely illustrated with
woodcuts, most of which are very good, and many of them beauti-
fully executed.

In this first volume only the Invertebrata are treated of; the
second, which we hope will not be long in making its appearance,
will deal with the Vertebrate animals from the same phylogenetic
point of view which is adopted in the present volume, and will also
treat of another special department of the general subject, namely
the evolution of organs. When completed, the book will certainly
constitute one of the most important of recent contributions to the
literature of zoology ; and whether the author’s fear that his attempt
at a systematic exposition of the facts of embryology may be re-
garded in some quarters as ‘‘ premature” proves to be well founded
or not, we are quite sure that the gratitude of those to whom his
book will be a perfect godsend will far outweigh any cavils that
may be raised against it.

Memoirs of the Science Department, University of Tokio, Japan.
Vol. I. Part 1. Shell-Mounds of Omori. By Epwarp 8. Morsz,
&e. 4to. 36 pp., with 18 plates. Published by the University,
Tokio, Japan. Nisshuska Printing-office. 2539 (1879).

Tae Japanese have taken up the study of Archeology with warmth
and earnestness. A native Archeological Society flourishes at
Tokio, the Government interdicts the exportation of the antiqui-
ties of the country ; and it is hoped that the ancient temples, monu-
ments, gateways, idols, and tombs of Japan will be officially pro-
tected. Both from its many antiquities and the fidelity of its very
ancient records of civilization and history (for nearly, if not quite,
two thousand years), Japan is eminently favourable to the study of
archeology. The enthusiastic pursuit of science in modern Japan,
the institution of the University of Tokio, the advent of many first-
class teachers of philosophy and science, and the cultivation of
observing and thinking minds among the many willing native
students, have given a high standing to all those connected with
this state of progress among our scientific brethren in the North
Pacific.

The Professor of Zoology at the University of Tokio, Mr. E. §,
Morse, had ardently studied prehistoric shell-heaps in Maine and
Massachusetts, U.S., for several years in company with Profs. Jeffries
Wyman and F. W. Putnam ; and he was not long in discovering a
large sheli-mound on the Yokohama railway at Omori, about six

62 Bibliographical Notices.

miles from Tokio. With the ready and sympathetic aid of his
friends and colleagues, the officials, professors, and students of the
University, a very extensive collection of pottery, ornaments, tablets,
implements (horn, bone, and stone), bones, and shells was made
and arranged; and with the careful and obliging cooperation of
Japanese scholars, artists (draughtsmen and lithographers), and
printers Prof. Morse has been enabled to produce this excellent
fasciculus. It is neatly printed, profusely illustrated, and published
altogether in a highly creditable form by the Japanese. The paper
being of native manufacture, we may note that, from the composi-
tion (by printers unacquainted with English) to the binding, the
mechanical production is entirely Japanese.

Excepting the Japanese “imprimatur” and Japanese titles and
numerals on the plates (to allow of their being used in a native
translation of the work), there is nothing but European appearances
about it.

The length of the prehistoric shell-deposit exposed by the railway-
cutting is about 89 metres, with a thickness of 4 metres in one
place. Another exposure occurs about 95 metres off; and culti-
vated fields to the south bear evidence of similar deposits. The
mound or mounds are nearly half a mile from the shores of
Yedo Bay. In some places the sea has receded about six miles in
this bay. The former contiguity of these and other shell-mounds
to river-banks or sea-coasts, and, in the latter case, the frequent
proofs of the local retreat of the sea, are carefully insisted upon.

Objects (implements) found at Omori are :—Eurthen: cooking-
vessels, hand-vessels, ornamental jars, ornamental bead, tablets,
spindle-whorl (?), and disk, shaped from the bottom of broken
vessel. Stone (lava, slate, schist, and jasper): hammers, celts, rollers,
skin-dresser (?), and mortar. Horn: awls, handle, prongs of deers’
antlers, and implements of unknown use. Bone: fish-spine needles,
bird-bone with two lateral holes, cube from deer’s metatarsal, and
deer’s os calcis, probably used as a handle. Miscellaneous: arrow-
point from boar’s canine, and shells used as paint-cups.

Objects (implements) found in other kitchen-middings, but not
found at Omori: flint or obsidian implements, arrow-heads, spear-
points, scrapers, skinning-knives, mortars and pestles (?), drilling-
stones, ornamental stones, stone net-sinkers, pipes, worked shell,
wampum, stone beads.

Of bones found at Omori there are remnants of those of man,
ape (?), monkey, deer, boar, wolf, and dog, also of a large cetacean
and a large tortoise, and of small mammals, of birds, and of fishes.
The human bones bear evidence of having been subjected to canni-
balism. A fragment of one platycnemic tibia was discovered at
Omori; but several were subsequently found in an immense shell-
mound at Onomura, in the province of Higo, Island of Kiushiu.
Prehistoric shell-deposits are also known at Otaru, on the western
coast of Yezo, Hakodate; several also within the city limits of
Tokio. These will be described subsequently ; but, as far as com-

Bibliographical Notices. 63

parisons have been made of their contents, they appear much to
resemble those of Omori, and, like it, are of very remote antiquity.

In one case, however, the removal of part of a canal-bank, made
230 years ago, exposed a shell-heap composed of species still ewtant,
without any ancient pottery ; hence the extinction of the old species
found in the mounds of Omori and elsewhere, and the changes of
sea-level, were certainly before, probably long before, that date.

The comparison of the Omori pottery with that found in other
parts of the world, and the comparison of the ancient with the
modern fauna of Omori, are full of interest, and have been worked
out with the acumen and experience of a well-trained naturalist and
antiquary.

The following is the list of Gasteropods found at Omori :—

Fusus inconstans, Lischke. Potamides, sp.

Rapana bezoar, Linné. Lampania, sp.

Hemifusus tuba, Gmelin. Natica Lamarckiana, Duclos.
Purpura luteostoma, Chemnitz. Turbo granulatus, Gmelin.
Eburna japonica, Lischke. Rotella globosa, Gmelin.
Nassa, sp.

Of the Lamellibranchs in the old mounds there are :—

Area subcrenata, Lischke. Cytherea meretrix, Linné.
inflata, Reeve. Tapes, sp.
eranosa, Linné. Solen strictus, Gould.
Dosinia Troscheli, Lischke, Lutraria Nuttali, Conrad.
Cyclina chinensis, Chemnitz. Ostrea denslamellosa, Lischke.
Mactra veneriformis, Deshayes. ——, sp.

Mya arenaria, Linné.

The absence (in the old mounds) of edible species now existing in
the neighbouring sea shows that, in all probability, a new or modi-
fied fauna has come in since the period of these kitchen-middings.
So also the relatively large and luxuriant growth (for the most part)
of both the shells of mollusks and the bones of mammals found in
these mounds have reference to long-past time, previous to the
introduction of stages of degeneracy due to changed conditions
either of nature or civilization.

An Introduction to the Study of Fishes. By Atsert C. L. G.
Ginter. S8yvo. Edinburgh: A. and C. Black, 1880.

Ow1ne to the author’s connexion with this journal, we must abstain
from giving an ordinary notice of the present volume. ~We think it
due to our readers, however, to call their attention to its appearance,
and to indicate its nature in very general terms.

Dr. Giinther’s work is founded on the notes and other materials
got together by him for the preparation of the article “ Ichthyology ”
in the new edition of the ‘ Encyclopedia Britannica,’ and may there-
fore be regarded to some extent as an expansion of that article. He
commences with a history of ichthyological research, which is followed

64 Miscellaneous.

by a general description of the structure of fishes and its modifica-
tions in the various groups, leading up to a notice of the reproductive
phenomena presented by animals of this class, and their growth and
variation during development. Other chapters are devoted to the
distribution of fishes in time and space, the latter subject treated at
very considerable length, and the whole winding up with a notice of
those deep-sea fishes our knowledge of which is mainly due to the
dredging-operations of the last few years. The remainder of the
volume (more than half) is devoted to systematic ichthyology, and
gives the characters of the orders and families and of the principal
genera, with notes on the more important points in their natural
history. The volume is very freely illustrated.

MISCELLANEOUS.

On a new Species of Papilio from South India, with Remarks
on the Species allied thereto. By J. Woop-Mason.

In December last the Indian Museum received from Mr. F. W.
Bourdillon, of Trevandrum, a small collection of diurnal Lepido-
ptera, amongst which was a much-worn and tattered example of a
female insect, evidently closely allied to the North-Indian P, Castor
and to the Burmese P. Mahadeva, with the same sex of the latter
of which it turned out on examination to agree in having the discal
markings of the hind wing confined to the median region of the
organ, where they form a transverse band of lanceolate spots,
instead of being diffused over the whole disk and extending into the
cell, as in the former.

About a month ago a few species of butterflies were received
from Mr. G. H. Kearney, of the Berkodee Coffee-Kstate, Koppa
Anche, Mysore ; and amongst them is a fine specimen of the male,
which proves that the species is, as the above-mentioned female
specimen had already indicated, more nearly related to P. Mahadeva
than to P. Castor, and enables me to describe it.

Papilio Dravidarum*, n. sp.

Allied to P. Castor and to P. Mahadeva, but more closely so to
the latter, with which it agrees in the form of the wings in both
sexes.

Sexes alike, having not only the same form of wings, but also the
same general type of coloration as the female of the two described
species, the male differing from the female only in the darker and
richer tints of its upper surface.

do. Upperside rich fuscous, of a much lighter shade than in

* Dravide -arum; from Dravida=common name of South-Indian

peoples.
Tt Moore, P. Z.8. 1878, p. 840, pl. li. fig. 1.

Miscellaneous. 65

P. Castor or even than in P. Mahadeva, and more densely powdered
with fulvyous scales than in either. Anterior wing with the basal
area of a richer and darker shade of brown than the rest of the
organ; with four distinct longitudinal lines of fulvous scales in the
cell, at the extremity of which is a minute but distinct cream-
coloured speck; with the outer portion beyond the cell very densely
covered with fulvous scales between the veins; with a marginal
row of ochraceous white spots placed at the incisures; and with a
submarginal series of nine conical or sublanceolate ochraceous ones,
each series decreasing at either end and paling towards the costal
margin. Posterior wing with the anterior third of its surface devoid
of fulvous scaies; with the incisures of the outer margin very nar-
rowly edged with ochraceous white; with a submarginal series of
seven strongly and angularly-curved lunules or arrow-shaped spots,
the four posterior of which are ochraceous white, and the three
apical ones cream-coloured ; and with a discal band of seven exter-
nally-dentate lanceolate cream-coloured spots, all irrorated with
fuscous scales except the anterior two; with the cell and the parts
of the wing-membrane external and internal to it tolerably thickly
sprinkled with fulvous scales. The wing-membrane, being in both
wings devoid of fulvous scales in the intervals between the submar-
ginal and incisural markings, presents the appearance of having a
submarginal row of dark blotches. Underside less richly and deeply
coloured, with the markings, especially the spot at the end of the
cell, all slightly larger and white, with the exception of the discal
series of the hind wing, which are tinged with cream-colour at their
inner points ; and with the fulvous scales similarly though not qnite
so thickly distributed over the fore wing, but evenly sprinkled over
the whole of the hind wing. Body lghter-coloured than in P.
Castor, but marked in identically the same manner.

Length of fore wing 2-2 inches, whence expanse= 4-5 inches.

Hab. Koppa Anche, Kadur district, Mysore, South India, at
about 2500 feet elevation. Obtained by Mr. G. H. Kearney.

9. Marked above and below, spot for spot, as in the male, but
lighter and less richly coloured, with the spot at the end of cell
larger and apparently more distinctly visible on the upperside, and
with all the markings (except the submarginal series of the under-
side of the hind wing, which are white) straw-coloured.

Length of fore wing 2°3 inches, whence expanse=4-7 inches,

Hab. Trevandrum. Obtained by Mr. F. W. Bourdillon.

In the male of P. Dravidarum there are visible upon the upper
surface of the fore wing aspot at the end of the cell, a submarginal
row of conical or sublanceolate spots, and a marginal row of inci-
sural spots; and upon that of the hind wing a discal row of lanceo-
late spots, a submarginal series of lunules, and incisural spots as in
the fore wing.

In the male of the darker-coloured P. Mahadeva the incisural
spots of the fore wing alone remain ; but the hind wing retains its
three series of spots, which, however, are all smaller and apparently
less clouded with dark scales than in the preceding species.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. vii. a

G6 | Miscellaneous.

In the fuscous-black male of P. Castor the fore wing may be said
to be uniform black, the incisural spots, which alone remain, being
so reduced in size as to be barely visible, being, in fact, mere specks
confined to the fringe; the hind wing has lost all but the incisural
specks (which are similarly confined to the fringe) and the first three
or four spots of the discal series, which together form a large and
conspicuous cream-coloured blotch divided by the veins. P. Castor
may, in fact, be described asa rich dead-black insect with a con-
spicuous cream-coloured blotch near the outer angle of each hind
wing.

In P. Castor, then, the sexes are, as regards colour and markings,
as strongly differentiated from one another as in any species with
which I am acquainted; they also differ to some extent in form,
the male having the fore wing narrower, with the external margin
obviously emarginate, and the hind wing also narrower and pro-
duced, with the same margin more deeply incised and lobed than in
the female, both pairs of whose wings in form more or less closely *
resemble those of both sexes in the other two species.

In P. Mahadeva the sexes are also tolerably well, though not so
conspicuously, differentiated in point of colour and markings as in
P. Castor, but not at all in form, the wings being of the same shape
in both sexes.

In P. Dravidarum the sexes agree perfectly both in form of wings
and markings, differing very slightly in colour only; so that but
little sexual differentiation has here taken place.

The female of P. Dravidarum is scarcely distinguishable, as far as
one can tell from a description alone, from that of P. Mahadeva, the
only differences that I can make out being that in the latter “the
fore wings have very small and less distinct submarginal white
spots, and no spot at the end of the cell.” From that of P. Castor, how-
ever, it is readily distinguished by haying, as I have already pointed
out, the discal markings of the hind wing in the form of a transverse
band of short lanceolate spots.

At the meeting of the Linnean Society of London held on the
18th March last, a paper by Prof. Westwood on a supposed poly-
morphic butterfly from India was read. In this memoir the follow-
ing conclusions are said (vide abstract in ‘ Nature,’ vol. xxi. p. 531,
April 1st, 1880) to have been arrived at by the author :—*‘(1)
That Papilio Castor is the male of a species whose females have not
yet been discovered ; (2) that the typical P. Pollux are females, of
which the males (with rounded hind wings having a diffused row of
markings) have yet to be discovered ; and (3) that the coloured figures
given by the author represent the two sexes of a dimorphic form of
the species.”

With regard to. the last of these conclusions [ cannot speak, be-
cause neither the paintings nor the specimens in question are acces-

* The females present an inconspicuous dimorphism, some having
retained the primordial form of hind wing, while others have the outer
margin of this wing toothed as in the male (vde infra).

Miscellaneous. 67

sible to me; but, having spoken above as if the opposite sex of P.
Castor were perfectly well known to naturalists, while, according
to Prof. Westwood, it is still undiscovered, I ought perhaps to say a
few words about the material on which my remarks are based.
Papilio Castor is restricted in its distribution to the slopes and
valleys of the hill-ranges of North-Eastern India and to the parts
of the plains in immediate contiguity to them, its place being
taken elsewhere, as in Southern India, by the new species described
in the preceding pages, and in Burmah by P. Mahadeva. The
Indian Museum possesses specimens from the southern slopes of the
Khasi hills (Silhet), from the Sikkim hills (Darjiling), Cherra Punji
in the Khasi hills, and the Naga hills; and three males were taken
by Lieut.-Colonel Godwin-Austen during the Dafla expedition ; in
these last, in a large male from Cherra Punji, and in two specimens
of the same sex from the Naga hills, the upper surface is dark brown,
of a much lighter tint than in nine males recently received from
Sikkim (two) and Silhet (seven), which are all brown-black of so
dark a shade as to appear quite black except when a strong light
falls upon them, when their colour appears brownish ; in fact the
brown of the former is to that of the latter series of specimens what
dark green is to the colour known as “invisible green.” In the
large Cherra-Punji specimen the short tooth, or rudimentary tail,
into which the third branch of the median vein of the hind wing is
usnally produced, does not extend beyond the line of the other lobes
of the outer margin; and one of the three dwarfed winter speci-
mens* captured by Colonel Austen approaches it in this respect ;
moreover one of the Silhet specimens has this tooth smaller in one
wing than in the other; so that this, like secondary sexual charac-
ters in general, is subject to variation. It is possibly to difference
of station, but probably to long exposure to the vicissitudes of the
Calcutta climate, and to the application of benzine and other noxi-
ous substances to which they were subjected before I took over the
charge of the collection of Lepidoptera, that these brown specimens
owe their lighter coloration. However this may be, it may confi-
dently be asserted that it would be impossible for the most invete-
rate species-maker to discover any character by which to separate
them as a distinct species or race from the fresh and consequently
dark Sikkim and Silhet specimens. So much for the males.
Of the nine females in the collection referred by me to P. Castor,
seven, being perfect, can readily be divided into two sets, according
to the form of the outer margin of the hind wing :—three (one from
Assam, one from Cherra Punjit, and a large one from Silhet)

* The insect figured by Westwood (Arcana Entom. vol. ii, pl. 80,
fig. 2) seems to have been a similarly dwarfed and faded individual.

+ There is another specimen from Cherra Punji (the largest of all in
the collection), with the outer margins of its hind wings so ragged that it
is impossible to be quite sure to which form it belongs, though, from its
close agreement in other respects with Westwood’s figure in the ‘ Arcana,’
as well as with the other insect from the same locality, I should say it
is a typical P. Pollux.

68 Miscellaneous.

having the third branch of the median vein not produced, and the
outer margin of the wing consequently “‘ rounder,” being in fact
typical P. Polluw; and four (two from Silhet* and two from
Sikkim +) having that veinlet produced into a small tooth, as in the
male. I consider that these two different forms are both females
of P. Castor, and that the slight differences they present are ex-
plained on the supposition, warranted by numerous analogous facts
in nature, that the secondary sexual characters acquired by the
male have been partially transmitted to some females, but not to
others (P. Pollux), which have retained the primordial rounded
form of wing.

The fact that the discoidal markings of the hind wing in the two
Silhet females with toothed wings are lighter and more distinctly
cream-coloured than in any of the females with rounded wings,
that the malformed specimen from the same locality (which cer-
tainly belongs to the form with toothed hind wings) has these
markings in the fourth, fifth, and sixth interspaces (those, that is
to say, corresponding to the ones forming the principal part of the
blotch in the male) of almost as rich and pure a colour as in that
sex, and that one of the two former has the spot at the end of the
cell and the submarginal markings of both fore wings obsolete and
is thus still further approximated to the male, do certainly seem to
me to tell rather for than against the above supposition.

The Helenus group of Papilios, to which Papilio Castor and its
allies unquestionably belong, taken as a whole, presents us with a
remarkable series of gradations in the amount of difference between
the sexes, comprising, as it does:—one species (P. Dravidarum) in
which the sexes closely resemble one another in the form of the
wings and in colour and markings, and there is only an incipient

* There is a third specimen from Silhet in the collection, taken at the
same time and place as the other two; but it unfortunately has the hind
wings symmetrically malformed at their outer margins, the third lobule
on each side being short and angulated, and the fourth being somewhat
longer than usual and also angulated. This malformation is interesting
as showing in the same specimen the instability of this character, the
strong tendency to the assumption of the male form of wing exhibited in
the lengthening of the lobule next in order, and the unmistakable “ re-
version” to the rounded form of wing in the suppression of the rudi-
mentary tail.

It should be mentioned that a gynandromorphous example of the form
of female described by Prof. Westwood as P. Pollux has been figured
and described as P. Castor by G. Semper in Wien. entom. Monatschr.
1863, Band vii. p. 281, Taf. 19. In this specimen both the wings of the
left side are truly female; but on the opposite side the posterior portion
of the fore wing from the first discoidal veinlet to the inner margin on
the upperside only, and the anterior portion of the hind wing from the
costal margin to the second branch of the subcostal on both sides, ex-
hibit the masculine livery. not unmingled with female characters (conf.
Westwood in Thes. Ent. Oxon. p. 187).

+ The two Sikkim specimens have the tooth less developed and the
discal markings of the hind wings exactly like those of the other form
(P. Pollux).

Miscellaneous. 69

sexual differentiation; another (P. Mahadeva) in which, while
agreeing in structure, they differ to a considerable extent in mark-
ings and colour, and the secondary sexual characters of the male
are much more pronounced; another (P. Castor) in which they
differ from one another to such a remarkable extent, that no
less an authority than Prof. Westwood originally described them
under different names, and still maintains their distinctness, and
Mr. Wallace* placed them in different groups of the genus—the
male having acquired the most pronounced secondary sexual cha-
racters (including rudimentary tails), which have been partially
transmitted to some females but not to others, and the two forms
of female having retained, one of them the form of wings, and both
the general style of colouring, characteristic of both sexes in the
first-named species; and, finally, others (P. Helenus, P. Chaon, &c.)
in which the male has perfectly transmitted to the opposite sex all
the secondary sexual characters (including the long tails) that he
had acquired, the female only differing from him in such trifling
points as the lighter coloration of the outer half of both wings and
the dingier shade of the upper surface generally.

From these and other facts, we are, | think, entitled to infer the
probable descent of all the members of this group from an ancestor
with tailless, rounded wings in both sexes, closely resembling P.
Dravidarum, but with diffused discal markings in the hind wings,
and probably also in the fore wings—the conspicuous wing-blotches
of P. Helenus, P. Castor, &c. having apparently resulted from the
concentration, so to speak, of such diffused colouring in the direction
of the breadth of the wing, just as have the discal bands of short
spots in P. Dravidarum and P. Mahadeva from a similar process of
modification in the opposite direction.

If his conclusions are correctly reported, Prof. Westwood’s draw-
ings must represent a species different from either of those alluded
to herein; and I look forward with much interest to the appearance
of his paper.—Proc. As. Soc. Beng. 1880, No. 3.

On a highly organized Reptile from the Permian Formation.
By M. A. Gauvpry.

M. Roche, director of the Ironworks of Igornay, to whom we are
already indebted for several discoveries of curious fossils, has just
found, in the Permian, a new genus of reptile, which he has pre-
sented to the Museum of Paris. The Igornay animal is the most
perfect of those which have hitherto been met with in the Pri-
mary formations of France. I propose to name it Stereorachis
dominans.

In Stereorachis the vertebre present a striking contrast to those
of the reptiles of the same deposits. While in Actinodon and

* Tn his well-known memoir “On the Phenomena of Variation and
Geographical Distribution as illustrated by the Papilionide of the
Malayan Region,” in Trans. Linn. Soc. Lond. vol. xxv. pp. 38, 54.

70 Miscellaneous.

Euchyrosaurus the centra are composed of a median part, or hypo-
centrum, and two pleurocentra not soldered together, in Stereorachis
the centra are in a single piece, which adheres to the neural arch ;
the vertebral column has therefore acquired much more solidity,
which has led me to invent the name Stereorachis. It must, how-
ever, be noted that the centra of the vertebre were still extremely
hollow; their anterior and posterior faces were so concave that they
formed two cones united end to end; I would not even assert that
there was not a perforation establishing the continuity of the
notochord. This is a condition analogous to that of many
fishes.

The new genus found by M. Roche presented another mark of
superiority over the Reptiles that lived with it. Its humerus had a
neuro-arterial canal in its distal part. I had already called atten-
tion, in Euchyrosaurus, to the rudiments of the arch indicating a
tendency to the formation of this canal; in Stereorachis the forma-
tion was completed. When we find that, besides the neuro-arterial
canal, the humerus had its epitrochlea and its epicondyle widened
as in those animals in which the supinator and pronator muscles,
or the extensor and flexor muscles, are greatly developed, we are led
to think that the old quadruped of Igornay had arms more perfec-
tionated than those of existing reptiles.

Stereorachis must have been a carnivorous animal of considerable
size; one of its mandibles, although a little broken, measures 18
centims. The upper and lower jaws are armed with conical teeth,
deeply immersed in the sockets; their section is nearly circular ;
they are smooth externally, with a radiate structure in the interior ;
the front ones are stronger than the rest; an inferior tooth has a
crown 32 millims. high ; a superior tooth, the point of which un-
fortunately is broken, must have been at least 40 millims. There
is an entosternum which recalls that of the Labyrinthodonts ; it is
very broad in its anterior third, and narrowed behind; its length
is 15 centims. Beside it there is a large nearly quadrilateral bony
plate, 14 centims. long and 5 centims. broad ; I suppose this to be
the homologue of the coracoid and scapula. There is also a curved
bone which I believe to be the homologue of the great bone in fishes
regarded by Mr. Kitchen Parker as a clavicle (episternum of the
Ganocephalous reptiles). I must also notice long arched ribs,
formed of two pieces united end to end; a large coprolite; bones of
the head with a rugose surface ; and hard, brilliant, very fine, long,
aciculate scales, as in Archegosaurus and Actinodon.

In some respects Stereorachis shows affinities with the Gano-
cephala and Labyrinthodonts. In other respects it shows tenden-
cies towards certain genera of the Permian of Russia and the Trias
of South Africa, upon which Prof. Richard Owen has made admi-
rable investigations, and for which he has proposed the name of
Theriodonts. Perhaps it still more nearly approaches some North-
American animals, such as Empedocles, Clepsydrops, and Dimetro-
don, ranged by Prof. Cope in his group of Pelycosauria ; but at

Miscellaneous. 71

present I know no genus with which it could be identified. It is
a curious thing to find such numerous and varied reptiles in the
Primary formations, which for a long time seemed to palontolo-
gists to be almost destitute of them. The discovery in the Permian
of a highly organized reptile like Stereorachis, or those lately
indicated inNorth America by Prof. Cope, leads us to expect others ;
these animals are so far from the initial state of reptiles to lead us
to suppose that before them there were many generations of ances-
tors, and that some day, no doubt, we shall meet with their remains
even in the Devonian.—Comptes Rendus, Oct. 18, 1880, p. 669.

A new Genus of Rodents from Algeria.

M. Ferdinand Lataste has recently described a remarkable Rodent,
which he obtained in the Algerian Sahara, as the type of a new
genus of Muridee, which he names Pachyuromys. It belongs to the
subfamily Gerbilline ; and its most striking external character is its
tail, which is short, claviform, greatly swollen, and apparently
naked, its minute annulations and fine white hairs not concealing
the rosy tint of the skin in the living animal. Still more remarkable
is the structure of its skull, in which the auditory bulle are so
greatly developed behind that they are only separated by a groove,
about 5 millims. in depth, at the bottom of which lies the foramen
magnum. Mr. Alston informs M. Lataste that such a development
of the bulle, both in their tympanic and more especially in their
mastoid portions, is not met with in any genus of Muride with which
he is acquainted, and that a parallel can only be found in the Geo-
myide, in the North-American genus Dipodomys.

Pachyuromys Duprasi, of which M. Lataste possesses several
living specimens, is a small animal, measuring about 100 millims.
in length of head and body, and 40 millims. in that of the tail ;
the upper parts are fawn-colour, the lower pure white. Its dis-
coverer promises a more detailed description, with figures of the
animal and its skull and observations on its habits.—‘ La Natura-
liste,’ i. pp. 8313-315 (Nov. 15, 1880).

Researches on the Comparative Anatomy of the Nervous System in
the different Orders of the Class of Insects. By M. EK. Branopr.

In 1879 I had the honour of bringing before the Academy my
investigations upon the nervous system of insects*, The present
note contains the principal results of my comparative researches
upon the nervous system in the different orders of the class Insecta.

The nervous system of the Coleoptera has been studied in a great
many representatives of various families by M. KE. Blanchard‘.
This naturalist is the only one who has studied it as a whole; and

* Comptes Rendus, tome Ixxxix. pp. 475-477.
+ Ann. Sci. Nat. 3° sér. tome v. (1846).

792 Miscellaneous.

his profound investigations enriched science with most important
facts, now well known in the scientific world. My investigations
upon the nervous system of the Coleoptera were made upon 235
species in the perfect state, and upon 36 species in the state of larve.
The following are the conclusions:—1. Some Coleoptera (Ihizo-
trogus solstitialis) have the subcesophageal ganglion confounded with
the thoracic ganglion. The cerebroid ganglia always have convolu-
tions. 2. There are from one to three thoracic gangha; if there
are two or three, it is only the last that is composite. 3. The
number of abdominal ganglia is very variable, from one to
eight; sometimes there are no separate abdominal ganglia, but
they are confounded with the thoracic part (Curculionide, La-
mellicornia); sometimes the males have more separate ganglia
than the females of the same species (in Dictyopterus sanguineus the
male has eight and the female seven).

My principal results on the nervous system of the Hymenoptera
were published in 1875 *.

The nervous system of the Lepidoptera had been very little
studiedt. I have examined it in 118 adult species, and in 48 species
in the caterpillar state. 1. All Lepidoptera have two cephalic
ganglia; the supracesophageal ganglion is furnished with convolu-
tions. 2. In most cases there are two distinct thoracic ganglionic
masses (Rhopalocera, Crepuscularia, and most of the other groups) ;
the first is simple, while the second is composite. Some have their
thoracic ganglia sometimes very close together (Cossus ligniperda,
Pygera bucephala), sometimes distant (Zygena, Sesia, Hepialus) ;
an intermediate form also occurs (Orgyia, Notodonta, &c.), which
possesses two thoracic ganglia, the second having a strongly-marked
constriction. 3. There are always four abdominal ganglia ; Hepi-
alus humuli alone presents five.

The nervous system of the Diptera was studied in several families
by M. Léon Dufour ¢; but in most cases his descriptions are incor-
rect. My investigations on the nervous system of the Diptera were
made upon sixty-five adult species and twenty-nine species of larvee §$.
1. The Diptera have always two cephalic ganglia, well separated
from each other by short commissures; and the supracesophageal
ganglion always has convolutions. 2. There is sometimes a single
thoracic ganglion (Muscide, Conopsidee, Syrphide, Stratiomyde),
sometimes two (Therevide, Dolichopodide, Xylophagide, Bibio-
nidee) ; some have three thoracic ganglia (Fungicole, Culiciformia,
Pulicida). When there are two thoracic ganglia, both are compo-

* Comptes Rendus, tome lxxxiii. pp. 612-614.

+ M. Léon Dufour is the only naturalist who has investigated repre-
sentatives of the different families (Comptes Rendus, tome xxxiv.).

{ ‘Recherches anatomiques et physiologiques sur les Diptéres.’

§ The principal results of my researches upon the nervous system of
the Diptera were read in October 1877 before the Russian Entomological
Society.

Miscellaneous. 73

site; if there are three, it is the last alone that is composite.
3. The number of abdominal ganglia varies from one to eight; and
the Muscid Calypterze have no separated abdominal ganglia, these
being confounded with the central nervous part in the thorax.
Sometimes the number of abdominal ganglia varies in the same
species, according to the sex: according to Landois, Pulew canis has
eight and seven; according to my own researches this is the case
also in P. felis and P. irritans. I have also found that in the male
Leptis the last ganglion has a constriction, whilst in the female it is
compact. 4. The Diptera have a frontal ganglion and two pairs of
small pharyngeal ganglia ; but they have not the abdominal part of
the sympathetic system distinct.

The nervous system of the Hemiptera has been very little investi-
gated, and comparative studies are wanting. My researches on the
nervous system of the Hemiptera extend to seventy species.
1. Some Hemiptera have no separate subcesophageal ganglion, the
latter being amalgamated with the medullary part of the thorax.
2. In some (Pseudophanus) it is separate, and placed, not in the
head, but in the thorax. The convolutions of the cerebroid lobes are
never wanting. 3. In some Hemiptera which have two ganglia in
the thorax, the first results from the fusion of the first thoracic gan-
glion with the subeesophageal ganglion. 4. The number of thoracic
ganglia varies from one to three: thus Hydrometra, Acanthia, and
Nepa have one; two occur in Pentatoma, Lygeus, &c.; there are
three thoracic ganglia in Pediculus, but, having no commissures,
they are in contact. Notonecta presents an intermediate form,
having only a single true thoracic ganglion, which, however, pos-
sesses a very strongly-marked constriction. 5. The Hemiptera
never have separated abdominal ganglia, they being amalgamated
with the thoracic part of the nervous system.—Comptes Rendus,
December 6, 1880, pp. 935-937.

Habits of a Fish of the Family Siluridee (Callichthys fasciatus, Cwv.).
By M. Carponnier.

I have in my possession several individuals of the species called
Callichthys fasciatus, Cuy., coming from the river Plate. This
species is characterized by two barbels at each angle of the upper
lip, two rows of broad and strong scaly plates, which cover the flanks
and intercept the lateral line, and two dorsal fins, of which the
second (adipose) is furnished like the first with an osseous ray.
These fishes, as I have ascertained, come frequently to take in a
provision of air at the surface of the water; but their most inter-
esting peculiarity consists in their mode of copulation and repro-
duction.

At the moment of fecundation the female brings together her
ventral fins, after the fashion of two open fans united by their
edges, and thus forms a sort of cul-de-sac, at the bottom of which

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. vii. 6

74 Miscellaneous.

the aperture of the ovaries opens. The fecundating elements of the
male are imprisoned in this sort of membranous sac ; and when, a
few moments afterwards, the eggs arrive in the same place, they
will find themselves bathed in a liquid very rich in spermato-
zoids.

Each laying consists of five or six eggs, which the female retains
fer a few minutes in the pouch above described ; then she quits the
bottom to go in search of a favourable spot for their evolution. Her
choice leads her in preference to a well-illuminated part, such as
the glass wall of the aquarium, or a stone that emerges from the
water; with her mouth she cleans a place situated at least 10-15
centims. below the level of the water, then, applying her abdomen
to this place, she opens her sac and attaches the eggs, which adhere
by means of the viscosity with which they are endued.

All the eggs being deposited, contact with the male recommences ;
and the ovipositions thus follow one another forty or fifty times in
the course of the day. I estimate the total number of eggs emitted
at about two hundred and fifty*.

At the moment of deposition the eggs, arranged in groups of
from three to five, are of a milky white, and but slightly transpa-
rent; they afterwards become yellowish, and at the moment of ex-
clusion, 7. ¢. from the eighth to the tenth day of incubation, they
become blackish: this coloration is due to the pigment spots which
cover the body of the embryo.

At the moment of its birth the embryo is globular. At first one
can only distinguish the four barbels; the umbilical vesicle, which
is semitransparent, is not very voluminous; the embryo holds itself
in the normal position, and not lying upon its side, like most embryos
of other fishes. Speedily the tail and the other fins appear. These
latter developments last on the average three days, during which
time these fishes lead an independent and isolated life. When this
period is past, 2. e. from twelve to thirteen days after deposition, all
these young fishes collect together and move about the bottom of the
aquarium.

The growth of this fish is not very rapid; it does not become
adult until two years after its birth.

An interesting fact is the change of the period of reproduction
presented by our Callichthys. At La Plata it isin the months of
October and November that it breeds. After arriving in Europe
it passed a year without producing young. In 1878 oviposition
took place in August and September. The produce of this genera-
tion oviposited this year in the month of June. Evidently there
has been an adaptation to our climate, the temperatures of which
are the reverse of those of South America.—Comptes Rendus, Dec. 6,
1880, p. 940.

* The layings observed by me always commenced between 9 and 10
o'clock a.M., and terminated about 2 P.M.

Miscellaneous. 75

On a new Form of Vesicular Worm with Exogenous Budding.
By M. A. Vitor.

The curious larva of a Tzeniid, which I now propose to make known
under the name of Urocystis prolifera*, is, like the Staphylocystest, a
parasite of Glomeris limbatus ; but it presents the peculiarity that it
lives in the same host in various degrees of development—namely, in
the vesicular state properly so called, free in the visceral cavity, and
in the state of scolex, encysted in the adipose body.

Urocystis prolifera, in the vesicular state properly so called, pre-
sents for our consideration three very distinct parts—a head, a body,
and a caudal vesicle. These three parts, which are in perfect con-
tinuity of tissue, are invaginated one within the other, the head in
the body, and the body in the caudal vesicle.

The head is oval, more or less inflated laterally, truncate in front,
and narrowed behind. It bears four sucking-disks and a very long
rostellum. The latter deserves to be described in detail. It is
invaginated in the head by its posterior extremity, and upon itself
by its anterior extremity. From this it results that the head of the
worm terminates by a sort of funnel of invagination, having perfectly
the aspect of a frontal sucking-cup. ‘The inner wall of this infun-
dibulum presents numerous transverse folds, formed by the contrac-
tion of the elastic fibres of which it consists, and is armed with a
circlet of hooks so small that it is impossible to count them. These
hooks are packed very closely together ; and to distinguish them it is
necessary to employ a magnifying-power of 600—900 diameters ; with
lower powers we only see a chitinous ring of a brilliant yellow colour.

The body (receptaculum capitis) is united by the neck to the pos-
terior part of the head. It is formed by a very delicate membrane,
so closely pressed against the inner wall of the caudal vesicle that it
is difficult to distinguish it therefrom. We only remark beneath
the neck a sort of pad, formed of embryonic cells, like the paren-
chyma of the head. The peduncle which unites the body to the
caudal vesicle can only be detected with difficulty, in consequence
of the transparency and contractility of the tissues and the narrow-
ness of the orifice of Invagination.

The caudal vesicle is oval, slightly acuminate in front, obtuse
posteriorly. It is formed, as usual, of anatomical elements of two
kinds—an outer layer of interlaced elastic fibres, and an inner layer of
connective tissue. Its contractility, which is very marked, enables
the animal to move in all directions. The scolex occupies only two
thirds of its cavity ; and there is in the posterior region a very con-
siderable vacancy.

The dimensions of the different parts of the worm are as follows:—
hooks 0-001 millim.; diameter of the trunk in the invaginated state
0-03; diameter of the sucking-disks 0°02; length of the scolex in
the invaginated state 0°07 ; length of the caudal vesicle 0°09 ; breadth

* Incorrectly called Urocystis prolifer by M. Villot.
+ See ‘ Annals,’ ser. 5, vol. i. p. 258.

76 | Miscellaneous.

of the caudal vesicle 0:06. From these measurements one may judge
of the minuteness of our parasite, and the difficulties presented by its
study. Its bulk does not exceed that of an Infusorian; and it is
evident that it would escape the researches of any observer who
does not avail himself of the lens and the microscope.

As indicated by its name, Urocystis prolifera is essentially charac-
terized by its mode of multiplication. Its buds are successively
developed, and become detached as soon as they have arrived at
maturity. Thus its colonies are usually composed only of two indi-
viduals placed one behind the other—a completely-developed vesicle
in front, and a bud in the form of a caudal appendage. The bud is
represented at first only by a small spherical vesicle containing
cellular elements in course of proliferation. It is sessile, and in
continuity of tissue by its anterior extremity with the individual
that preceded it (perfect vesicle or bud); but during development
it acquires an oval form, and tends gradually to become isolated.
At the moment when the first traces of the scolex make their ap-
pearance the two individuals are no longer united to each other
except by a thin cord. When it becomes detached, the vesicular
bud has acquired its full development, and contains a perfectly-
formed scolex. The latter speedily frees itself from its caudal
vesicle to go and encyst itself in the adipose body of its host; but
the scolex, while abandoning its caudal vesicle, remains encysted in
its ‘receptaculum capitis and does not evaginate its trunk. The
escape of the scolex may be effected either by degenerescence of the
caudal vesicle or by rupture of the pedicle which attaches the scolex
to the vesicle. The latter mode, which I have frequently observed,
appears to me the more natural.

The scolex, in becoming encysted in the adipose body of its host,
does not undergo any great modification. There is nothing more
than a change of external form and a thickening of the integuments.
It becomes spherical; and the embryonic elements which constitute
the wall of the receptaculum capitis pass to the state of elastic fibres,
to replace the caudal vesicle as a protective organ.

No doubt, independently of its habitat, Urocystis prolifera has
many relations to Staphylocystis; but it differs from the latter
by important characters which fully justify the establishment of a
genus. In Staphylocystis the individuals which constitute the colony
are developed simultaneously, and do not separate from each other
at maturity. The scolex does not issue from the caudal vesicle,
and has not its trunk invaginated upon itself.

The other states of this new form of worm are unknown to me,
and probably have not yet been described; but we know now that
the scolex which must figure at the head of the strobile possesses a
long trunk and a simple circlet of very small hooks. As to the
definitive host, whether mammal or bird, it certainly belongs to
the Alpine fauna. The Glomerts which furnished me with Urocystis
prolifera was captured in the woods of the Grande-Chartreuse.—
Comptes Rendus, December 6, 1880, p. 938.

THE ANNALS

AND

MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY.

[FIFTH SERIES.]

No. 38. FEBRUARY 1881.

IX.— History and Classification of the known Species of
Spongilla. By H. J. Carrer, F.R.S. &e.

[Plates V. & VI. |

THE freshwater sponge has been known from a very early
period, although perhaps only first publicly noticed in 1696,
by Leonard Plukenet, in the following way, viz. ‘ Spongia
fluviatilis anfractuosa perfragilis ramosissima ”’ (apud Pallas,
No. 4*). Linneus, in 1745 (No. 2), described two species

* Publications to which reference is made in the following communi-
cation :—

1.—1696. PiuxreNnEeT, Lzonarp. (Brit. Bot.) Almagestum, p. 356,
tab. 112. f. 3, “Spongia fluviatilis anfractuosa perfragilis ramo-
sissima.”

2.—1745. Linnawus. Flora Suecica, Spec. Pl., ed.1, sp. 11. Spongia
fluviatilis ; ib. sp. 10. Spongia lacustris.

3.—1758. Linnzus. Systema Nature, ed. x.

4.—1766. Patias. Elench. Zoophytorum, Spongia fluviatilis, No. 231,

. 384,

5.1816. Lamarck. Anim.sans Vertébres, t. ii. p. 98.

6.—1826. Grant, Ropertr. “On the Structure and Nature of the
Spongilla friabilis,” Edin. Phil. Journ. vol. xiv. p. 270.

7.—1835. Gervais, P. “Les Eponges d’eau douce,” Ann. des Se.
Naturelles, n. s. t. iv. p. 254.

8.—1839. Mryen, F.J.F. “ Beitrage zur nahern Kenntniss unseres
Siisswasserschwammes,” Miiller’s Archiv, 1839, S. 83, apud Lieber-

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. vii. 7

78 Mr. H. J. Carter on the

under the names respectively of ‘‘ Spongia lacustris”? and
“ §. fluviatilis” (apud Pallas), observing in his ‘ Systema
Nature’ of 1766, ed. xii. p. 1299, that “ Autumnali tempore in
hujus poris sparsis globulos cerulescentes magnitudine semi-
num thymi &c. observavit C. Blom, M.D. ;”’ so that Linneus
then was not only acquainted with the existence of the fresh-
water sponge, but also with the presence of the little globular
bodies (globulc) in it, to which our attention will be more
particularly given by-and-by, under the term of “ statoblasts ;”
while Pallas, also, in 1766, in his diagnosis of ‘ Spongilla
fluviatilis,” stated, “‘ Masse interdum aut cruste informes
in stagnantibus aquis; in fluentis forma ramosissima”’ (No. 4,
p- 384). Thus the two species of the present day were fore-
shadowed both in character and nomenclature.

Subsequently much was written on the subject by various
authors, and the name “ Spongia” more than once changed
(see ‘ Literature” apud Johnston, No 10) ; but that of ‘ Spon-

kiihn (No. 14, p. 7) ; Microscopic Journ. vol. i. p. 42, 1841 (No. 10,
p- 154); Valentin’s ‘Repertorium,’ 1840 (No. 21, vol. ii.
. 341).

9.1840. Hoae, J. “Observations on the Spongilla fluviatilis,’ Linn.
Soc. Trans. vol. xviii. pt. 5.

10.—1842. Jounston, G. History of British Sponges &c. Spongilla,
pp. 149-163.

11.—1848. Carter, H. J. “Notes on the Species, Structure, and
Animality of the Freshwater Sponges in the Island of Bombay,”
Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 2, vol. i. p. 303.

12,1849. Carrer, H. J. “A Descriptive Account of the Fresh-
water Sponges in the Island of Bombay, with Observations on
their Structure and Development,” ibid. vol. iv. p. 81, pls. 111., iv.,
and v.

13.—1854. Carter, H. J. “ Zoosperms in Spongilla,’ ibid. yol. xiv.

. 304, pl. xi.

14.—1856. LizBERKUAN, N. ‘ Beitrage zur Entwickelungsgeschichte
der Spongillen,” Archiv f. Anat. u. Physiologie, Heft i. u. ii.
pp: 1-19 (Jan.).

15.—1856. LizrpgrKtun, N. “ Beitriige” &c. (Nachtrag), ibid. Heft iv.
pp. 899-414, Taf. xv. (May).

16.—1856, Lizperkiun, N. Id. ibid. Heft v. pp. 496-514, Taf. xviii.
figs. 8, 9.

17.1887, Carter, H. J. “On the Ultimate Structure of Spongilla
&c.,” Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 2, vol. xx. p. 21, pl. i.

18.—1859. Carter, H.J. “On the Fecundation of the Volvoces, &c.
(Spongilla),” Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 3, vol. iii. pp. 12-15, pl. i.
figs. 12-14 (Jan.).

19.—1859. Carter, H. J. “On the Identity in Structure and Compo-
sition of the so-called ‘Seed-like Body’ of Spongilla with the
Winter-egg of the Bryozoa; and the Presence of Starch-granules
in each,” ibid. vol. ii. p. 331, pl. viii. (May).

20.—1863. BowErBANK, J. ‘ Monograph on the Spongillide,” Proc.
Zool. Soc. London, Nov. 24, pl. xxxviii.

known Species of Spongilla. 79

gilla,” instituted for the genus by Lamarck in 1816 (No. 5),
has taken precedence of all the rest, whereby we now have
Spongilla fluviatilis and S. lacustris.

It was not, however, until the improvements of the micro-
scope ushered in an era of minuter observation that Spongilla
was more particularly examined, when Dr. Grant (my kind
friend and able teacher) published his “ Observations’? in
1826 (No. 6). After this, Meyen, in 1839, pointed out that
the crust of the spherula or seed-like body (statoblast) was
composed of vertically placed spicula 1-250th to 1-200th of
a millim. broad, at whose extremities, near the circumference,
more or less toothed little disks are formed (PI. VI. fig.
11, a,b), and further that, ‘ besides the larger siliceous spicula
within the substance of the sponge, there exist more delicate
ones of 1-16th to 1-10th of a millim. long, having upon
their surface little points which elongate as their age in-
creases’’ (apud Johnston, No.j10, p. 154, footnote). Here

21.—1866. BowErBank, J. Monograph of the British Spongiada,
vol. ii. pp. 339-344, Spongilla fluviatilis and S. lacustris; ib. vol. i.
p. 262, spicula of the ovaries of Spongilla; pl. ix. figs. 201-
227, pls. xxii. and xxiil. figs. 217-822 (figures of the “ ovaries’).

22.1867. Gray, J. E. ‘Notes on the Arrangement of Sponges,”
Proc. Zool. Soc. London, May 9, p. 550, &c. (Potamospongia,
classification of).

23.—1867. James-CiarK, H. J. “‘ Sponge ciliate as Infusoria flagel-
lata,” Journ. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist. vol. i. pt. 3, pls. ix. and x.

24,1868. Carter, H. J. “Ona Variety of Spongilla Meyeni from
the River Exe, Devonshire,’ Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 4,
vol. i. p. 247.

25.—1870. BowErBank, J. Monograph of the British Spongiada,
vol. iii. pls. lix. and lx.

26.—1874. Cartrer, H. J. “On the Nature of the Seed-like Body of
Spongilla, &c,” Ann, & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 4, vol. xiv. p. 97.

27.—1875. Carter, H. J. “Notes Introductory to the Study and
Classification of the Spongida,” ibid. vol. xvi. p. 1, &c.: Potamo-
spongida (pp. 187, 190, and 199).

28.—1877. DyBowsxK1, W. “Ueber Spongillen der Ostsee-Provinzen,”
Sitzungsber d. Naturf. Gesellsch. zu Dorpat, Bd. iv. Heft 2,
1876, p. 258, Heft 3, 1877, p. 527.

29,—1878. ScuutzE, F. E. “ Untersuchungen tiber den Bau und die
Entwicklung der Spongien. Die Gattung Halsarca,” Zeitschrift
f. wiss. Zoologie, Bd. xxviii.

30.—1879. MetscunikorfT, E. “Spongiologische Studien,” ibid. Bd. xxxii.
p. 349, Taf. xx.—xxiil.

81—1879. Carter, H. J. ‘ On the Nutritive and Reproductive Pro-
cesses of Sponges,” Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 5, vol. iv. p. 374.

82.—1880. Dynowsk1, W. “ Studien iiber die Spongien des Russischen
Reiches mit besonderer Beriicksichtigung der Spongien-Fauna des
Baikal-Sees,” Mém. Acad. Imp. d. Sc. de St. Pétersbourg, 7°
série, t. xxvil. no. 6.

80 Mr. H. J. Carter on the

evidently the minute spicules with “ toothed little disks ” and
“little points’ respectively belonged to Spongilla fluvi-
atilis and S. lacustris. Meyen also stated that the seed-like
bodies or spherule of Spongilla are “ essentially distinct
from the sporangia of Alge, and are similar to what are de-
nominated the winter-eggs of polypes ” (No. 10, l.c.), which
having endeavoured myself to illustrate and confirm in 1859
(No. 19), I finally adopted the term “statoblast”’ (No. 19,
p- 840). Lastly, Mr. John Hogg, in 1840, demonstrated
beyond question that these ‘‘ seed-like bodies,”’ or statoblasts,
germinaied in water, and thus reproduced the Spongilla
{No. 9).

In 1842, Johnston published his work on the British
Sponges (No. 10), from which the ‘ Monograph on the
British Spongiade’ of Dr. Bowerbank is chiefly compiled ;
and in Johnston’s work an epitome of all that had been made
known up to the time was given, not only of Spongilla, but
of every other species of the British sponges that had been
noticed, together with descriptions and illustrations from
actual observation, not only of these but of many others which
he added to them ; so that this book is a sine gud non to the
student.

A few years after this, brings us to a period in which, be-
sides the reproduction of Spongilla through the ‘ seed-like
body,” one through seawal elements was also sought for and dis-
covered. Thus, in 1856, Lieberkiihn discovered and figured
the ovum of Spongilla, together with the spermatozoa (Nos. 14,
15, and 16), which, as regards the ovum, Grant had done in
the marine sponges in 1826 (Edin. New Phil. Journ. vol. ii.
p- 133, pl. 1. figs. 27-29), and, as regards the spermato-
zoa, F. Ei. Schulze confirmed, in 1878, in thé marine species
Halisarca lobularis (No. 29). I take no account of my own
observation of “ zoosperms in Spongilla”’ in 1854 (No. 13),
although the absence of the so-called “ ear-like appendages ”
&e. in the figures of them &c. now seems to indicate that
they were such, although in the interval I have doubted this,
because the fact was not substantiated after the satisfactory
manner in which it was subsequently demonstrated by the
sagacious Lieberkiihn.

Thus, then, in addition to the “ seed-like body” in Spon-
gilla, it was shown that the freshwater sponges could be propa-
gated by elements of sexual reproduction like those of the
marine sponges.

Shortly after this, my own observations (Nos. 17 and 18),
coupled with those of James-Clark in 1867 (No. 23), esta-
blished the ‘ animality”’ of Spongilla, together with the form

known Species of Spongilla. 81

of the animal itself, for which, in 1872, I proposed the name
“ spongozoon”’ (‘ Annals,’ vol. x. p. 45).

Finally Lieberkiihn, observing what had been pointed out
by Meyen in 1839, viz. that the seed-like body of Spongilla
was partly composed of “ little toothed’’ amphidisks, and that
besides these there were others with “little points” or spines
on their surface (‘‘ rauhen etwas gekriimmten”’), made these
the distinctive characters of Spongilla fluviatilis and S. lacus-
tris respectively (No. 16, pp. 510, 511). This was confirmed
by Bowerbank in 1863 (No. 20, p. 7, pl. xxxviii. fig. 1, 6, ¢,
and p. 24, dd. fig. 14, c); and good representations of these
sponges were given by him in 1870 (No. 25, pls. lix. and Ix.) ;
but unfortunately the amphidisk or birotulate is omitted in the
former, viz. that illustrating S. fuvdatilis. Descriptions of the
two species, as well as illustrations of the seed-like bodies
and their spicuies respectively, were also published by Dr.
Bowerbank in 1866 (No. 21).

Thus the two species of Spongilla, hitherto doubtfully
distinguished from ignorance of these more decided differences,
were firmly established.

Having premised all the circumstances connected with the
history of the freshwater sponge (Spongillu) that are neces-
sary for the present occasion, we find that they are quite as
much advanced physiologically as those of the marine species ;
and although the latter must ever be by far the most numerous,
from the great extent of area producing them, yet, when we
remember how few known species of Spongilla there are com-
pared with the comparatively large area of freshwater which
they may be inferred to inhabit, while the localities of the
area in which they have been found are, with the exception
of Europe, “‘ few and far between,” and as yet from Africa
none at all have been described, it may also be inferred that
hereafter a great many more species will be added to those
with which we are at present acquainted, while the latter are
already sufficiently numerous and diversified to render a
classification of them desirable for further advancement.

This classification should, of course, be based on some
peculiar and persistent characters which may yet admit of
modified addition; and as we have seen that until Meyen
had pointed out the form and presence of spicules in the seed-
like body, no reliable distinction existed between Spongilla
fluviatilis and S. lacustris, so we may assume that this may
be anticipated throughout the family. And such is the fact ;
hence the classification which I am about to propose will be
based chiefly on the spicules of the statoblast.

82 Mr. H. J. Carter on the

Up to the present time no species of marine sponge has
been found to present a statoblast; while those of the fresh-
water sponge, although specimens are often without any (like
the mycelium of “dry rot,” Merulius lachrymans, which
may destroy the woodwork of a whole mansion without putting
forth its fructification in more than half a dozen places), might
be assumed to be capable of producing them in every instance.
So here we possess a sharp line of demarcation between the
marine and freshwater sponges; for I have examined the
type specimen (now in the British Musenm) supposed by Dr.
Bowerbank to show the existence of the seed-like body in his
marine genus Diplodemia (No. 25, pl. lxx. fig. 12 and No. 21,
vol. i. pl. xxi. fig. 234, and vol. 11. p. 357), and find that
this is nothing more than an insignificant portion of egg-
bearing Jsodictya adherent to the valve of a Pecten.

As already stated, Meyen considered the ‘‘ seed-like body ”
of Spongilla to be equivalent to the “ winter egg” of the
polyp (Polyzoa) ; and, as before stated, I have endeavoured to
confirm this view by parallel description and illustration
(No. 19); while Prof. Allman having proposed the name
“statoblast ” for the winter egg of the freshwater Polyzoa
(Monograph, Ray Society, 1856), must be my reason for
calling the seed-like body the ‘ statoblast ” of Spongilla.

Describing the statoblast generally, it may be said to be
in size about as big as a pin’s head, varying in this respect,
not only with the species but in the individual. For the
most part it can be seen with the naked eye, and there-
fore does not differ much in size from the ova and embryos
(swarmspores) of both the freshwater and marine sponges.
In form it is more or less globular or elliptical (Pl. V. figs. 1
and 4), and of a whitish colour when fully developed, with a
hole either lateral or terminal on the surface, generally at
the bottom of an infundibular depression which leads to the
interior (fig. 1, A, and 4, e, &c.). If we now make a vertical
section through the hole or aperture of one of these bodies
when dry (for this is the best time) with a sharp thin knife,
we may observe that it consists of an internal, globular, axial
cavity filled with a soft waxy substance of a yellowish colour,
like that of dried yelk of egg (fig. 1, a, &c.) ; which substance,
on microscopic examination, when swollen out in water, will
be found to be composed of a great number of extremely thin,
transparent, spherical sacs, filled respectively with minute
germinal matter consisting of transparent germs or cellule of
different sizes ; the whole enclosed by a delicate, globular,
transparent, investing membrane (fig. 1, 6) slightly protru-
ding at the aperture (fig. 1, 7), and presenting a reticulated

known Species of Spongilla. 83

appearance likethat of vegetable cell-structure when compressed
minus any granules (fig.12,f). (For further detail respecting
these parts, see Nos. 12, 17, and 19.) Outside this follows a
comparatively thick, translucent, homogeneous membrane, seem-
ingly composed of chitine, whose amber colour being reflected
through the “‘ axial” substance gives the latter in the section
a deeper tint than it 1s found to possess when separate ; this
will be called the ‘‘ chitinous coat” (fig. 1, c). ‘Then comes
another kind of coat, composed, in two instances, of cell-struc-
ture, which is almost evident under a doublet (fig. 3, dand 7), as
will be seen hereafter, but in the rest of a white granular
substance (fig. 2, a) that will presently be more particularly
described, which can only be resolved into such by a very
high compound power; and this will be called the “ crust ”
(fig. 1, d) ; it appears to afford a floating property (like cork)
to the statoblast, but varies very much in thickness, not only
according to the amount of its development, but according to
the species. The “crust,” again, is charged with, or accom-
panied by, minute spicules of different forms, variously ar-
ranged according to the species, which will be found by-and-
by, as before stated, to yield the chief characters of our classi-
fication (fig. 1, g, and fig. 2,6, c). At the “ aperture,” of
course, these two coats are deficient, while the interior or chiti-
nous one is prolonged into it by a tubular extension, generally
in proportion to the thickness of the ‘‘ crust” (fig. 1, A).
Meyen thought that the substance of the ‘crust’? was
composed of ‘‘ carbonate of lime having a cellular structure ”
(No. 10, p. 154); but in no instance have I found it to effer-
vesce with acids, while, on the contrary, after boiling it for
some time in strong nitric acid it leaves a floccular residue,
which may be assumed to be a colloid form of silica, unless
it be undissolved tissue. As before stated, in some in-
stances the cell-structure, being comparatively large, is_per-
fectly evident, while in others it is only resolvable under a
very high magnifying-power (at least 450 diameters), when
it may be termed “ microcell-structure,”’ presenting under
ordinary circumstances a white granular appearance, which,
filling up the intervals between the spicules, imparts to the
fully developed statoblast the light colour before mentioned.
It floats in water, and is very much like ‘ pith,” without
apparent cell-structure, is unaffected by liquor potassee, and
untinged by iodine, while before the blowpipe it burns off
without leaving any perceptible residue. ‘lhe floating-power
of this substance is very considerable ; for it keeps on the
surface the whole of the internal contents, which swell out
and sink to the bottom the moment they are liberated by sec-

84 Mr. H. J. Carter on the

tion in water, while the remnants of the crust themselves
continue to float with the greatest pertinacity. Still, although
in most instances where the statoblast is fully developed it
forms a thick coat, yet in others it can hardly be traced even
under the microscope after the fully developed statoblast has
been mounted in balsam ; while it must not be forgotten that,
as its development is progressive, it may be as untraceable at
an early period in one as in the other.

Lastly, there is often a distinct layer of spicules which are
more like those of the skeleton than those of the statoblast, but
sufficiently differentiated by their peculiarities from both to
show that they do not belong to either (Pl. VI. fig. 8, J, n) ;
and these form avery distinct capsular covering to the stato-
blast, in which probably it was originally developed, and thus
separated from its neighbours.

Generally the statoblasts are situated towards the base or
first-formed portions of the Spongilla, either fixed to the object
on which the sponge may be growing, or more or less scat-
tered throughout its structure. ‘The details of their development
may be found in the papers to which I have last alluded; while,
as this is also progressive, they often present themselves in a
collapsed hemispherical state, without the crust, when the chiti-
nous coat, being uncovered, gives them an amber colour, and
thus their appearance generally is that of a different kind; but, as
before stated, the statoblast when fully developed is, especially in
the fresh state, globular, and, in proportion to the thickness of
the crust, more or less white in colour. Yet there is a crustless
spherical form, wherein too the aperture may be multiplicate—
that is, double, triple, or even quintuple (PI. V.fig. 5,c ¢ ¢ cc)
—as first noticed in another species by Gervais (No. 7) ; with
which also there appear to have been statoblasts that contained
two or three others of the same kind presenting the same
structure, the same composition, and the same yellowish colour
(apud Johnston, No. 10, p. 154); so that, as before stated, the
statoblast, although generally globular or elliptical, may have
these forms modified in a variety of ways, as indeed may be
seen in those which I have figured in Plates V. and VI.

Now, as the statoblast has so far been found in nearly all
the freshwater sponges that have been described, and never in
the marie ones, while the form of the skeleton-spicule is not
only always acerate but almost always more or less alike in all, it
follows trom the latter being of little or no specific value that
the statoblast, which is different in all, at least in the form of
its spicules, must become the basis of the most reliable classi-
fication ; and therefore I shall use its characters for what in
this respect I may hereafter have to propose.

known Species of Spongilla. 85

No attempt to classify the freshwater sponges had been
made up to the publication of the late Dr. J. E. Gray’s “ Notes”’
in 1867 (No. 22, p. 491), when my dear old friend (alas! now
only dear to memory) made them the seventh order in his
“‘ proposed ” arrangement of the Spongida generally, under the
terms ‘‘ Potamospongia,”’ family “ Spongillade,’’ with the
following genera, viz.:—l. Hphydatia; 2. Dosilia; 3. Me-
tania; 4. Acalle; 5. Drulia; 6. Eunapius ; and 7. Spongilla ;
adding Dr. Bowerbank’s marine species Diplodemia as an
eighth genus—an incongruity arising from the misconception
of Dr. Bowerbank to which I have already alluded. If
Dr. Gray’s “ Notes””’ had been based on direct knowledge of
the species of Spongilla themselves, and not on Dr. Bower-
bank’s ‘* Monograph” (No. 20), it might have been unneces-
sary now to propose a different arrangement. It is enough to
state of this “‘ Monograph ”’ that Dr. Bowerbank therein calls
the statoblasts ‘ ovaries,’ and in speaking of them in Spon-
gilla gregaria (No. 20, p. 15) thus expresses himself—‘ The
gregarious habit of these ovaries,’ &c.—to show the fallacies
that might arise from such loose phraseology. But setting
aside this and the like (for there is much to redeem it), I have
had before me, in addition to the publications under reference,
the actual specimens, while going through the late Dr. Bower-
bank’s collections for the British Museum (where they now
are); and it has been from examination of these type speci-
mens, together with my own from the island of Bombay,
which were described, illustrated, and published long before
Dr. Bowerbank’s ‘ Monograph of the Spongillide,” that I
have been induced to propose the following classification.

As may have been observed, in my “ Notes introductory to
the Study and Classification of the Spongida,” in 1875 (No.
27), I found it necessary to make the freshwater sponges the
fifth family of my sixth order of the Spongida generally,
under the name of ‘‘ Potamospongida,” with a single group, at
present named ‘‘ Spongillina.’”? Hence so far they will stand
thus:—

Class SPONGIDA.

Order VI. HOLORHAPHIDOTA.

Char, Possessing a skeleton whose fibre is entirely com-
posed of proper spicules bound together by a minimum of
sarcode. Form of spicule variable.

86 Mr. H. J. Carter on the

Family 5. Potamospongida.
Freshwater Sponges.

Group 19. Srowerzxra.

Char. Bearing seed-like reproductive organs called “ sta-
toblasts.”’

Genera: 1. Spongilla; 2. Meyenia; 3. Tubella ;
4, Parmula; 5. Uruguaya.

SPONGILLA.

Gen. char. Skeleton-spicule acerate, smooth, curved, fusi-
form, pointed, sometimes more or less spined or more or less
inflated in the centre; sometimes accompanied by flesh-
spicules. Statoblast globular, crust thick, thin, or absent
altogether, accompanied by or charged with minute acerates
(Pl. V. fig. 5, 64, d, &c.), smooth or spined according to the

species, arranged tangentially.

* Minute acerates smooth.

1. Spongilla Cartert, Bk.
Spongilla Carteri, Bk., No. 20, p. 31, pl. xxviii. fig. 20; provisionally
S. friabilis, Lam., No. 12, p. 88, pl. iii. fig. 3.

Massive, sessile. Colour greenish or faint whitish yellow.
Structure fragile, crumbling. Skeleton-spicule smooth, fusi-
form, curved, gradually + sharp-pointed. Statoblast globular ;
aperture infundibular ; crust composed of pyramidal columns
ot dodecahedral or polyhedral cells, hexagonal in the section,
regularly arranged one above another, in juxtaposition, per-
pendicularly to the outside of the chitinous coat on which they
rest ; surrounded by a layer of minute, fusiform, curved, and
gradually sharp-pointed, smooth acerates (No. 19, pl. viii.
figs. 1-3).

Loc. Bombay.

2. Spongilla paupercula, Bk.
Spongilla paupercula, Bk., No. 20, p. 82, pl. xxxviil. fig. 21.
Coating and branching. Skeleton-spicule curved, fusiform,

+ “Gradually,” in contradistinction to “abruptly” sharp-pointed
(See Pl. VI. figs. 14 and 16 respectively).

known Species of Spongilla. 87

sharp-pointed, smooth. Statoblast globular; spicules curved,
fusiform, gradually sharp-pointed, smooth.

Loc. Water-pipes of Boston &c., U.S.

Obs. Mr. Thomas H. Higgin, F.L.S., of Liverpool, kindly
sent me a specimen from the same locality, viz. the water-
pipes of Boston, which, when examined, proved to have a
similar skeleton-spicule, among which there are a number of
minute, curved, fusiform, sharp-pointed acerates so like the
flesh-spicules of Spongilla lacustris that, in the absence of
statoblasts, I am led to consider it the same species; and if I
am right, then the spicules of the statoblast should be spined,
while those of S. paupercula were of the “‘same form as those
of the skeleton, but not more than half their size ;”’ so these
would be more like statoblast-spicules of S. Cartert. My
description of S. paupercula, Bk., is an abbreviated one of
that given by Dr. Bowerbank himself (J. c.).

3. Spongilla navicella, Carter, n. sp.
(PL. V. fig. 4, a-g.)

Sponge unknown. Skeleton-spicule curved, fusiform,
smooth, gradually sharp-pointed. Statoblast adherent to the
twig on which the sponge had grown; globoelliptical (fig. 4) ;
aperture terminal, infundibular (fig. 4, e); no apparent crust ;
chitinous coat (fig. 4, c) encased with a dense layer of minute,
stout, short, thick, more or less curved, fusiform, smooth ace-
rates, variable in size, becoming so short internally (that is,
where they are in immediate contact with the chitinous coat)
as to be trapezoidal, or like a little boat or “cocked hat,”
according to the direction in which they are viewed; arranged
tangentially, crossing each other (fig. 4, d and g).

Loc. River Amazons.

Obs. A few of the statoblasts were found on a small twig
in company with S. reticulata, Bk., and S. paupercula, Bk.,
in the Bowerbank collection. They bear evidence of the
existence in the river Amazons of a species of Spongilla whose
entirety is as yet unknown; and it is very probable that a
further search there would find many such.

** Minute acerates spined.

4, Spongilla lacustris, Linn.

Spongilla lacustris, Bk., No. 20, p. 24, pl. xxviii. fig. 14; also No. 21,
vol. ii. U. ¢. and vol. i. p. 842; also No. 25, pl. lx. and No. 16, pp. 510,
511.

S. lacustris auctt.

Branched ; branches long, round, and sharp-pointed. Colour

88 Mr. H. J. Carter on the

dark brown. Structure fibrous. Skeleton-spicule (PI. VI.
fig. 14) curved, fusiform, gradually sharp-pointed, smooth,
sometimes more or less spiniferous. T'lesh-spicule thin,
curved, fusiform, gradually sharp-pointed, spined throughout.
Statoblast when fully developed globular; aperture infundi-
bular; crust composed of granular cell-structure, charged
with more or less curved, minute, stout, fusiform, sharp-
pointed acerates covered with stout recurved spines, arranged
tangentially or centrifugally, like the lines of a so-called
“ engine-turned ”’ watch-case.

Loc. England and Europe generally; North America ;

Asia, Lake Baikal (Dybowsk:).
5. Spongilla alba, Carter.
Spongilla alba, Carter, No. 12, p. 83, pl. iii. fig. 4; also No. 20, p. 26,
pl. xxxviii. fig. 15.

Massive, spreading, subbranched. Structure fragile, to-
mentose. Colour whitish. Skeleton-spicule curved, fusiform,
gradually sharp-pointed, smooth. Flesh-spicule thin, curved,
fusiform, covered with spines, longest in the centre, where
they are vertical and obtuse. Statoblast globular; aperture
infundibular ; crust thick, white, composed of granular cell-
structure charged with minute, thick acerates, which are
curved, cylindrical, round at the ends, covered with spines
(especially about the extremities, where they are longest and
much recurved), arranged tangentially, intercrossing each other
like the lines of an engine-turned watch-case.

Loc. Bombay.

Obs. The spicules of the statoblast here, as well as in
Spongilla lacustris, are considerably stouter, more curved,
cylindrical, and more coarsely spined than the flesh-spicules
of the sponge generally.

6. Spongilla cerebellata, Bk.

Spongilla cerebellata, No. 20, p. 27, pl. xxxviii. fig. 16.

This Spongilla, which appears to me to be only a variety
of the foregoing species, differs from it chiefly in the absence
of the “ flesh-spicule,” in addition to what Dr. Bowerbank has

mentioned (J. c.).
Loc. Central India, Aurungabad.

7. Spongilla multiforis *, Carter, n. sp.
(Pl. V. fig. 5, a—-d.) |
Massive, incrusting. Colour dark brown. Structure fra-

* muitiforis, with many doors or openings (in allusion to the plurality
of the “ apertures”).

known Species of Spongilla. 89

gile, fibrous, like that of S. lacustris. Skeleton-spicule
curved, fusiform, gradually sharp-pointed, smooth, often
inflated in the centre. Statoblast spherical (fig. 5) ; apertures
in plurality (one to five) (fig. 5, ccccc), on a level with the
chitinous coat (fig. 5, a), as there is no apparent crust; sur-
rounded by a layer of minute, curved, fusiform, sharp-pointed,
spinous acerates, which are in contact with the chitinous coat,
arranged tangentially (fig. 5, 6 and d).

Loe. Chiluk-weyuk Lake, British Columbia, lat. 49° 10' N.,
long. 121° 22! W.

Type specimen in the British Museum, presented by
Dr. Lyall. Register no. 64. 8. 11. 1-10; running no. 289.

Obs. As the statoblasts, although very numerous, are all
empty, itis probable that the germinal matter has passed out
of them, and therefore that they are only the effete remains of
this organ, although still covered by the statoblast-spicules, as
represented in the illustration.

8. Spongilla Lordi, Bk.
(Pl. VI. fig. 13, a—f)

Spongilla Lordu, Bk., No. 20, p. 28, pl. xxxviii. fig. 17.

Sessile, incrusting reeds (fig. 13, f); surfaceeven. Struc-
ture fragile, crumbling. Colour light brown. Skeleton-spicule
curved, fusiform, gradually sharp-pointed, smooth, often inflated
in the centre. Statoblast hemispheroidal, flat bottle-shaped,
forming a single layer in juxtaposition round the reed, under-
neath the sponge, with the aperture upwards (figs. 13 and 13 f);
chitinous coat hemispheroidal (fig. 13, a) ; aperture prolonged
from the summit by a short tubular extension (fig. 13, 4, c);
colour dark amber, followed by a thin granular crust charged
with small curved, fusiform, spined acerates, round at the
extremities, arranged tangentially (fig. 13, d and e).

Loc. Lake Osogoos, Cascade Mountains, British Columbia.

Type specimen in the British Museum. Register no. 68. 8.
17. 1-7; running no. 211. Presented by J. K. Lord, Esq.

9. Spongilla nitens, Carter, n. sp.
(Pl. V. fig. 38, a-k, and Pl. VI. fig. 18.)

Form of sponge unknown to me. Structure reticulate;
fibre rigid, composed of bundles of spicules united by trans-
parent colourless sarcode, which in the dried state gives
it a hardness and vitreous appearance like that of Spongilla
corallioides, Bk. Skeleton-spicule curved, cylindrical, smooth,
sometimes very slightly inflated in the centre and at the ex-
tremities, which are round (PI. VI. fig. 18). Statoblast glo-

90 Mr. H. J. Carter on the

bnlar (fig. 3); aperture infundibular (fig. 3, g) ; crust com-
posed of pyramidal columns of dodecahedral or polygonal cells,
hexagonal in the section, regularly arranged one above
another, in juxtaposition (fig. 38, d and 7), perpendicularly to
the outside of the chitinous coat (fig. 38, c), on which, by the
intervention of a layer of the statoblast-spicules (fig. 3, e),
they rest, surrounded by a layer of minute, fusiform, curved
acerates thickly spined, especially over the ends, where the
spines are longest and recurved (fig. 3, &), arranged tangen-
tially (fig. 3, 7); the same kind of layer immediately round
the chitinous coat, where the spicules appear to be intermixed
with the lower cells of the crust, leaving the latter free between
the two (fig. 3, e).

Loc. Unknown.

Obs. Of this species I can state nothing more than that a
small fragment appeared in the Bowerbank collection labelled
“ Snongilla, new species, from the Jardin des Plantes.” While
it affords another instance of the crust of the statoblast being
composed of apparently hexagonal cell-structure like that of
Spongilla Carteri, the rigidity and vitreous appearance of
the skeletal structure, if not the form of the spicule also, allies
it to Spongilla corallioides, Bk., which will be seen hereafter
to come from Uruguay. Finally, as this peculiar rigidity of
the skeletal structure has in addition only been found in two
species of Spongilla (viz. S. Batesit and S. reticulata, Bk.)
from the river Amazons, it may be assumed that S. nitens also
comes from South America. ‘The presence of a layer of sta-
toblast-spicules on the inside as well as on the outside of the
crust will be seen by-and-by to occur also in the statoblast of
Parmula (Spongilla) Batesiz.

MEYENIA*.

Gen. Char. Skeleton-spicule acerate, curved, fusiform,
sharp-pointed, smooth, sometimes more or less spined, or
more or less inflated in the centre. Statoblast globular or
elliptical ; crust composed of the granular structure mentioned,
charged with birotulate spicules, 7. e. spicular bodies which
consist of a straight shaft terminated at each end by a disk,
even or denticulated at the margin (Pl. V. fig. 6, h, &c.),
arranged perpendicularly around the chitinous coat, so that
one disk is applied to the latter, while the other forms part of
the surface of the statoblast (fig. 6, e).

* « Meyenia,” after Meyen, who first pointed out that the statoblast
was partly composed of birotulate or amphidiscal spicules (/. c.).

known Species of Spongilla. 91

* Margin of disks even.
1. Meyenia erinaceus.
Spongilla ervnaceus, Ehr. apud Lieberkiihn, No. 15, p. 509.

Of this species Lieberkiihn says, “‘ Zeichnet sich durch
Nadeln aus, welche auf ihrer Oberfliiche mit kleinen Stacheln
versehen sind ;” but the spinous character of this spicule here
does not appear to be such a valuable character, in a specific
point of view, as the disks of the birotulate spicule of the
statoblast, which Lieberkiihn describes in the following page
to be without denticulation, and represents as umbonate with
even circular margin and short shaft (No. 15, Taf. xv.
fig. 31).

Loc. River Spree, Berlin.

Obs. This sponge appears otherwise, ¢. e. in structure and
spiculation, to be like Meyenia fluviatilis. I do not know
where Khrenberg has described it.

2. Meyenia Letdit.
Spongilla Leidit, Bk., No. 20, p.7, pl. xxxviil. fig. 2.

Thin, sessile, coating. Surface tuberculated, minutely
hispid. Structure friable, crumbling. Skeleton-spicule curved,
fusiform, abruptly sharp-pointed, sparsely spiniferous, becom-
ing much smaller and more spined round the statoblasts.
Statoblast globular, aperture infundibular ; crust composed o1
granular substance charged with birotulate spicules possessing
very short shafts and evenly margined smooth umbonate disks,
both of which have the margins more or less everted or turned
outwards (that is, from the statoblast), arranged perpendi-
cularly on the chitinous coat.

Loc. Schuylkill river, Pennsylvania.

3. Meyenta gregaria.

Spongilla gregaria, Bk., No. 20, p. 14, pl. xxxviii. fig. 7.

Sponge unknown. Skeleton-spicule cylindrical, stout and
rather short. Form of statoblast not mentioned; crust charged
with birotulate spicules composed of a short thick shaft termi-
nated at each end by a simple umbonate disk with even circu-
lar margin, arranged perpendicularly to the chitinous coat.
Spicules in the immediate neighbourhood of the statoblast
cylindrical, slightly curved, and abundantly spiniferous, vary-
ing considerably in size.

Loc. River Amazons.

Obs. Having no specimen of this species to refer to, I got
Mr. Stuart Ridley, F'.L.S., of the British Museum, to examine
the mounted specimens of Spongilla gregaria and S. reticulata,

92 Mr. H. J. Carter on the

Bk., for me, since, although I have taken my diagnosis from
Dr. Bowerbank’s descriptions and illustrations (J. c.), still, as
the skeletal spiculation of the former is almost precisely that
of the latter, which covered the twig on which the stato-
blasts alone of S. gregaria were found, to the extent of “ five
inches,” it seemed to be by no means impossible that the
spiculation of the two species might have been confounded.
Mr. Ridley’s drawings are confirmatory of this possibility; and
thus the skeletal spiculation given by Dr. Bowerbank to 8S.
gregaria becomes nearly identical with that of the foregoing
species, viz. S. Letdit, Bk.; but while the ends of the spicules
are abruptly pointed in the latter, they are equally round in
S. reticulata and those stated by Dr. Bowerbank to charac-
terize the skeletal spicule of S. gregaria.

Undoubtedly we have the same sparsely spined skeleton-
spicule becoming smaller and thickly spined in the imme-
diate neighbourhood of the statoblasts in S. Letdit, S. gre-
garta, and S. reticulata, together with absolutely smooth
skeleton-spicules in all three, if those assigned to S. gregaria
by Dr. Bowerbank be the right ones. Thus the skeletal
spicules and the spicules of the statoblasts in S. Levdit tending
to the characters of those assigned to S. gregaria, in spite of
the roundness of the ends of the skeletal spicules in the latter,
seems to point out that the spinous element existed in both,
and that generally they are closely allied; but, after all, it
doesnot satisfy our doubt as to whether the round-ended spicules
did not belong to S. reticulata. Further observation is re-
quired to decide this.

** Margin of disks denticulated.
4. Meyenia fluviatilis.
Spongilla fluviatilis, Bk., No. 20, p. 7, pl. xxxviil. fig. 1; also No. 21,
vol. ii. p. 389; vol.i. pl. xxii. figs. 317-819; and No. 25, vol. iii.
ix:

Buona Jhwvatilis auctt.

Massive, lobate. Structure friable, crumbling. Colour light
yellow-brown. Skeleton-spicule curved, fusiform, gradually
sharp-pointed, smooth, often spined and often centrally inflated,
Statoblast globular; aperture infundibular; crust thick,
composed of the granular or microcell-substance, charged
with birotulates whose umbonate disks are deeply and irregu-
larly denticulated (Pl. VI. fig. 11, a, 6), arranged parallel to
each other and perpendicular to the chitinous coat.

Loc. England and Europe generally.

Obs. Here, as elsewhere, in proportion to the thickness of
the crust is the length of the infundibular aperture, which is
partly lined by a tubular extension of the chitinous coat.

known Species of Spongilla. 93

Spongilla Meyent, Carter.

Spongilla Meyeni, Carter, No. 12, p. 84; and No. 20, p. 10, pl. xxxviii.
fig. 4.

Loc. Bombay.

Spongilla fluviatilis, var. Parfittc, Carter.

Spongilla friatils, var. Parfitti, Carter, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. 1868,
vol. i. I 247 ; and Bowerbank, 1870, No. 25, p. 298, pl. Ixxxvi.
figs. 5-14.

Loc. River Exe, Devonshire.

Obs. Having specimens of all three of these sponges now
before me, I cannot help thinking that the occasional diffe-
rences of spiculation in one may be seen in the other, and »
therefore that S. Meyend and S. fluviatilis, var. Parfitti are mere
varieties of S. fluviatilis = Meyenia fluviatilis, nobis. Of the
two specimens of S. fluviatilis, var. Parfitti, that [have mounted,
nearly all the skeleton-spicules in one are smooth, and nearly
all those in the other are spiniferous, which shows what an
admixture of these two kinds of spicules may exist in Meyenia
fluviatilis. It is convenient here to allude to

Spongilla sceptrifera, Bk.

Spongilla sceptifera, Bk., No. 25, p. 300, pl. Ixxxvi. figs. 15-17.

Loc. Reservoir, Exeter.

Obs. This pretended new species is no “new species” at
all, but probably S. fluviatilis, as the statoblast would have
proved if any had been present ; for S. fluviatilis grows abun-
dantly in the same locality, and the characteristic spicule re-
presented by Dr. Bowerbank (/. c. fig. 17) is nothing more
than a detached frustule of the diatom Asterionella, like A.
formosa (Pritchard’s Infusoria, ed. 1861, pl. iv. fig. 17),
which, in its entirety (that is, with the frustules arranged in a
radiated ring) as well as separated, abounds on the surface
of the type specimen (which was kindly given to me by Mr.
K. Parfitt, of Exeter), but not in the interior. It at once ap-
peared to me that such a form of spicule could not belong to
any species of Spongilla; and, indeed, I have never seen any
thing identifiable with it either in the freshwater or marine
sponges. Mr. Parfitt found the specimen, and sent part of it
to Dr. Bowerbank, who immediately seized upon it as a new
species of Spongilla.

5. Meyenia Capewelli.

Spongilla Capewelli, Bk., No. 20, p. 9, pl. xxxviii. fig. 3.

Massive, sessile. Surface even, lobular. Structure friable, °
Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. vii. 8

94 Mr. H. J. Carter on the

crumbling. Skeleton-spicule curved, fusiform, abruptly sharp-
pointed, smooth, sometimes inflated in the centre. Statoblast
globular; aperture infundibular; crust thick, composed of
granular microcell-substance charged with birotulate spicules
consisting of a straight shaft somewhat inflated in the centre,
terminated at each end by an umbonate disk of equal size,
whose margin is irregularly crenulo-denticulate, and whose
surface is granulated towards the circumference often in lines
running towards the centre, mixed with faint radiating lines
generally coming from that point, arranged perpendicularly,
with one disk resting on the chitinous coat and the other
forming part of the surface of the statoblast.

Loc. Lake Hindmarsh, Victoria, Australia, lat. 35° 30'S.,
long. 141° 40! E.

6. Meyenia plumosa. (PI. V. fig. 6, a-k.)

eed plumosa, Carter, No. 12, p. 85; No. 20, p. 11, pl. xxxviii.
g. 5.

Massive, lobate. Structure feathery, fibrous, friable. Colour
greenish or light brown. Skeleton-spicule curved, fusiform,
gradually sharp-pointed, smooth. Flesh-spicule stelliform,
consisting of a variable number of arms of various lengths
radiating from a large, smooth, globular body; arms spined
throughout ; spines longest at the ends, so as to present a capi-
tate appearance, and recurved generally (fig. 6, £); the whole
varying from a simple, spinous, linear spicule to the stellate
form first mentioned, thus modified by the size and presence
of the globular inflation and number of arms developed from
the centre of the former ; abundant in all parts of the structure,
but especially in the neighbourhood of the statoblasts. Stato-
blast ellipsoidal (fig.6) ; aperture lateral, infundibular (fig.6,/);
crust, which is thick and composed of granular microcell-
substance (fig. 6, d), charged with birotulate spicules (fig. 6, e)
consisting of a long, straight, sparsely spiniferous shaft whose
spines are large, conical, and perpendicular, terminated at each
end by an umbonate disk of equal size, whose margin is irre-
gularly denticulated, with the processes’ more or less turned
inwards (fig.6,,7), arranged perpendicularly, with one disk
resting on the chitinous coat and the other forming part of the
surface of the crust (fig. 6, e).

Loc. Bombay.

Obs. The variety in the minute spiculation generally of
this species renders it perhaps the most beautiful in this re-
spect that has yet been discovered.

known Species of Spongilla. 95

7. Meyenia Bailey.
Spongilla Baileyi, Bk., No. 20, p. 13, pl. xxxviii. fig. 6.

Coating, surface smooth. Structure friable, crumbling.
Skeleton-spicule curved, subfusiform, gradually sharp-pointed,
smooth. Flesh-spicule minute, curved, fusiform, gradually
sharp-pointed, covered with erect obtuse spines throughout,
extremely small towards the extremities, and extremely long and
perpendicular about the centre of theshaft. Statoblast globular;
aperture infundibular ; crust, which is thick and composed of
granular cell-substance, charged with birotulate spicules consist-
ing of a long, straight, sparsely spiniferous shaft whose spines
are large, irregular in length, conical and perpendicular, termi-
nated at each end by an umbonate disk of equal size deeply
but regularly denticulated, whose processes are claw-like and
turned inwards, arranged perpendicularly, with one disk rest-
ing on the chitinous coat and the other forming part of the
surface of the statoblast.

Loc. New York. In a stream on the Canterbury Road,
West Point.

Obs. This seems to be the North-American representative
of the Bombay species, viz. Meyenia plumosa, but with globu-
lar, not elliptical, statoblast.

8. Meyenia anonyma, Carter, n. sp.
(Pl. VI. fig. 12, a—f)

Sponge unknown. Statoblast flask-shaped (fig. 12) ; aper-
ture terminal (fig. 12, c) ; composed of a membranous coat
striated longitudinally (fig. 12, a), supporting a reticulation
(fig. 12, 5) consisting of extremely minute, erect, conical
processes with their sharp ends inwards, and presenting in the
centre of each interstice, especially towards the fundus, a short,
thick, somewhat hourglass-shaped spicule whose outer end is
more or less denticulated, and whose inner one is inserted into
the striated coat (fig. 12, d, e). Investing membrane of the
germinal matter transparent, presenting the usual polygonal
reticulation without granules, like compressed cell-structure
(fig. 12, f).

Loc. River Amazons.

Obs. Of this statoblast, which is indicative of an undescribed
species of Spongilla, I can state nothing more than that its
presence appeared to me to be an accidental occurrence on the
surface of another species which had grown over the surface
of a leaf sent to me by Dr. Dickie.

96 Mr. H. J. Carter on the

TUBELLA*.
Gen. char. Skeleton-spicule curved, fusiform, sharp-pointed
or rounded at the extremities, smooth or spined. Statoblast

globular or elliptical; aperture lateral or terminal; crust
composed of the granular microcell-substance mentioned,
charged with inzequibirotulate spicules—that is, alittle trumpet-
shaped spicule having a straight shaft which is smooth, spined
or inflated, or both, terminated by a large disk at one, and a
small one or an umbonous, circular, marginally spined head
at the other end (Pl. V. fig. 7,2); the former applied to the
chitinous coat, and the latter forming part of the surface of the
statoblast.

1. Tubella paulula. (Pl. VI. fig. 10, ac.)
Spongilla paulula, Bk., No. 20, p. 15, pl. xxxviii. fig. 8.

Thin, incrusting. Surface even. Structure fragile, crum-
bling. Colour now brown. Skeleton-spicule curved, fusi-
form, abruptly sharp-pointed, spiniferous or smooth. Stato-
blast globular; aperture sunken, infundibular; crust com-
posed of granular microcell-structure charged with two kinds
of inequibirotulates, one form of which is much stouter than
the other, and consists of a straight shaft passing by trumpet-
like expansion into the large disk, which often has radiating
lines, and abruptly terminating in the other, which is only one
fourth of the diameter of the former (Pl. VI. fig. 10, a, 6); the
other form similarly constructed, but more delicate, with the
shaft inflated towards the large disk, and the smaller one much
less in proportion than in the larger form (fig. 10, c) ; the forms
not mixed but confined to their statoblasts respectively ; ar-
ranged perpendicularly, with the large disk resting on the
chitinous coat, and the smaller one forming part of the surface
of the statoblast.

Obs. Although the skeleton-spicule in Dr. Bowerbank’s
illustration is smooth, it is stated in his diagnosis (p. 16, /. c.)
to be “entirely spined,” which is the case generally, but not
always; so that the artist must have taken for the illustration
one of the smooth ones.

2. Tubella spinata, Carter, n. sp.
(Pl. VI. fig. 9, a—-m.)

Thin, coating, spreading. Structure fragile, crumbling.
Colour light brown. Skeleton-spicule curved, fusiform, gra-
dually sharp-pointed, smooth or spiniferous. Flesh-spicule
minute, curved, fusiform, thin, gradually sharp-pointed,

* Tubella, a little straight trumpet.

kenoW hr, Spectesof Snongilla. 97

covered with perpendicular spines, which are longest about
the centre (fig. 9,m). Statoblast elliptical, flask-shaped ;
aperture terminal (fig. 9,/); crust thick, composed of granu-
lar microcell-substance (fig. 9, d) charged with ineequibirotu-
late spicules (fig. 9, e) consisting of a straight shaft, inflated
near the small end, and passing by trumpet-like expansion
into the large disk, sparsely spined (fig. 9,4) ; disk circular,
smooth, with even margin (fig. 9, 7), small end consisting of
a circular convex head, regularly denticulated on the margin
with eight or more conical processes, which are slightly in-
clined towards the shaft (fig. 9, &, 7); arranged perpendicularly,
so that the disk rests on the chitinous coat and the head forms
part of the surface of the statoblast (fig. 9, e).

Loc. River Amazons. On a leaf sent to me by Dr. Dickie
in 1878.

3. Tubella reticulata. (Pl. VI. fig. 8 a—n, and fig. 16.)

Spongilla reticulata, Bk., No. 20, p. 17, pl. xxxviii. fig. 9.

Elliptical, or fusiform when growing round the immersed
small branches of trees. Structure extremely rigid, reticulate,
terminating in thorn-like processes on the surface. Colour
light sea-green when growing in clear water. Skeleton-spicules
curved or bent, cylindrical or subfusiform, rounded at the
ends, absolutely smooth or sparsely spiniferous (Pl. VI. fig. 8,m,
and fig. 16), becoming more so towards the statoblasts, where
they are not more than half the size, thickly spined, and in
this shape form a distinct capsular layer around each of those
organs (fig. 8, 7, n). Statoblast elliptical, ovoid (fig. 8) ;
aperture terminal (fig. 8, f); crust composed of granular
microcell-substance (fig. 8,d@) charged with ineequibirotulate
spicules (fig. 8, e) consisting of a straight shaft passing by
trumpet-like expansion into the large disk, with two or more
spines about the centre, and furnished with a ring-like inflation
towards the disk (fig. 8, 2); disk circular, smooth, with even
margin, which is somewhat recurved (fig. 8, 7), small end
consisting of a circular umbonate head regularly denticulated
on the margin with 6-8 conical processes, which are slightly
inclined inwards or towards the shaft (fig. 8,4); arranged
perpendicularly, so that the disk rests on the chitinous coat,
and the head or small end forms part of the surface of the
statoblast (fig. 8, e).

Loc. River Amazons.

Obs. The skeletal structure of this species, although of the
same rigid nature and general character as that of Parmula
Batesti and P. Brownii, to be hereafter mentioned, is more
reticulated and not nearly so coarse as in the latter.

98 Mr. H. J.) _.cr on the

4. Tubella recurvata. (Pl. V. fig. 7, a-l.)
Spongilla recurvata, Bk., No. 20, p. 18, pl. xxxviii. fig. 10.

Sessile, coating. Surface even. Structure fragile, crum-
bling. Colour brownish. Skeleton-spicule curved, fusiform,
abruptly sharp-pointed, smooth or spiniferous. Statoblast
globular (Pl. V. fig. 7); aperture infundibular (fig. 7, g) 5 crust
thick, composed of granular microcell-substance (fig. 7, d),
charged with inequibirotulate spicules (fig. 7, e) consisting
of a delicate, straight, smooth shaft passing by trumpet-like
expansion into the large disk, which is circular, smooth, saucer-
shaped, inverted, with even margin, curved towards the
shaft, and abruptly terminating in the other, which is only
one eighth of the diameter of the disk (fig. 7, 7), arranged
perpendicularly with the large disk resting on the chitinous
coat, and the small one somewhat within the surface of the
crust (fig. 7, e); surrounded by a capsule of short thick
spicules (fig. 7,7), consisting of a straight smooth shaft,
slightly inflated in the centre, and terminated at each end by an
equal-sized head, which is prominently umbonate, with cir-
cular margin regularly divided into eight conical teeth slightly
incurved (fig. 7, &, /), arranged perpendicularly around the
statoblast, with one end free and the other adherent to the
surface of the crust (fig. 7,f).

Loc. River Amazons.

Obs. This kind of capsular covering is, so far, unique, and
renders the whole structure of the statoblast as remarkable as
it is beautiful under microscopic observation.

PARMULA*.

Gen. char. Globular or elliptical, fusiform when growing
round the small immersed branches of trees. Structure coarsely
reticulate, extremely hard and rigid, rising into thorn-like
processes on the surface. Colour light green. Skeleton-
spicule acerate, curved, fusiform, abruptly sharp-pointed,
smooth. Statoblast globular, large, more or less tubercular
on the surface; aperture infundibular; crust composed of
granular microcell-substance (Pl. V. fig. 2, a), charged with
and surrounded by minute, spinous, acerate spicules (fig. 1, g,
and 2, d), limited by a layer of parmuliform spicules (fig. 2, d, c)
both internally and externally, the former in contact with the
chitinous coat (fig. 1, e), and the latter on the surface of the
erusty} (ig. 1,7).

* Parmula, a little round shield.
+ As these characters are taken from the only species yet known, they
may hereafter have to undergo alteration.

known Species of Spongilla. 99

1. Parmula Batesit.

(Pl. V. fig. 1, a-c, and fig. 2, a-c, also Pl. VI. fig. 15.)
Spongilla Batesii, Bk., No. 20, p. 21, pl. xxxviii. fig. 12.

More or less globular when growing round the small im-
mersed branches of trees one inch or more in thickness. Struc-
ture coarsely reticulate, extremely hard and rigid, rising into
thorn-like processes on the surface. Colour light sea-green.
Skeleton-spicule curved, fusiform, abruptly sharp-pointed,
smooth (PI. VI. fig. 15), forming, when bundled together with
the hard transparent sarcode, the rigid structure above men-
tioned, charged throughout with statoblasts. Statoblast large,
globular, more or less uniformly tuberculated (Pl. V. fig. 1).
Aperture infundibular (fig. 1,4). Crust very thick, composed
of granular microcell-structure of a white colour, which, grow-
ing out through the interstices of the reticular arrangement of
skeleton-spicules, reduced in size, which form a capsular
covering to the statoblast, gives it the tuberculated cha-
racter mentioned (fig. 1, d), charged with and surrounded by
minute, thin, curved, fusiform, gradually sharp-pointed,
spinous acerates irregularly dispersed throughout its substance
(fig. 1, g, and 2, d), limited, both inside and outside, by a layer
of parmuliform spicules, the former in contact with the chitinous
coat (fig. 1, e), and the latter on the free surface of the crust,
giving it a light brown colour (fig. 1, 7). Parmuliform spicule
circular, flat, infundibuliform, terminating in a point, like a
little round shield turned up at the margin, which is even
(fig. 2, 6, c), arranged both internally and externally in juxta-
position, more or less overlapping each other, with the funnel-
shaped process outwards in both instances, so that the surface
of the crust is covered with little points (fig. 1, /).

Loc. River Amazons.

Obs. The double layer of statoblast-spicules, viz. one on
the inner and the other on the outer side of the crust, is seen
also in Spongilla nitens.

2. Parmula Brownt.
Spongilla Brownii, Bk., No. 20, p. 19, pl. xxviii. fig. 11.

Globular, four or more inches in diameter, appended to a
small twig rather than embracing it. Structure and colour
the same as in the foregoing species. Skeleton-spicules the
same, but diminished to half their size round the statoblasts,
to which they afford a distinct capsule. Statoblast globular ;
aperture slightly infundibular ; crust thin, composed of micro-
scopically minute spherical cells, irregularly agglomerated
together, so as to produce small lacinuliform processes, which

100 Mr. H. J. Carter on the

project into the interspaces between the capsular spicules; un-
accompanied by the spinous spicule, which is present in the
foregoing species, and without a continuous layer of the parmu-
liform spicule over the surface, but presenting one in contact
with the chitinous coat, where it is overlain by an extremely
thin development of the microcellular crust, from which the
lacinuliform processes above mentioned are projected.

Loc. British Guiana (Schomburgk). British Museum,
general collection. Running no. 527.

Obs. The most remarkable part about this species is the
cell-structure of the crust, which is just a transition in size
from that of Spongilla Cartert and S. nitens to the minute
granular form of Parmula Batesii &c., thus showing that the
latter is also composed of minute cells, which, as before stated,
require a power of 450 diameters to be resolved. ‘Thus with
Tubella reticulata and Parmula Batesit we possess three of
those species with extremely rigid reticulated structure which
as yet have only been found in the river Amazons, but to which
the provisional genus ‘‘Uruguaya,” as will presently be seen,
also appears to be allied.

URvGuAYA, n. gen. prov.

1. Uruguaya corallioides. (Pl. VI. fig. 17.)
Spongilla corallioides, Bk., No. 20, p. 22, pl. xxxviii. fig. 13.

Irregularly digitate; rising into a polychotomous and
anastomosing mass of cylindrical branches, which may attain
several inches (7 or more) in all directions. Colour faint
whitish yellow or cark leaden on the surface, internally
white or colourless. Surface even, vitreous in appearance,
extremely hard, smooth, and compact, interrupted by small
raised vents more or less uniformly distributed at short and
unequal distances from each other. Internal structure com-
posed of short densely reticulated fibre, formed of the skeleton-
spicules of the sponge in bundles firmly united together by
colourless sarcode, which, together with the spicules, in a
dried state simulates, from its hardness and vitreous appear-
ance, an entirely silicified mass. Skeleton-spicule very
robust, much curved, cylindrical, rounded at both ends, smooth
or microspined, about six times longer than it is broad.
(PI. VI. fig. 17). Statoblast unknown.

Loc. ‘‘ Rapids” of the river Uruguay, above the town of
Salto, Uruguay.

Obs. 'This is a most interesting species in almost every
particular. 1st. Some of the specimens of it that have been

known Species of Spongilla. 101

sent to England are very large. 2nd. That sent by Mr. George
Higgin to his brother, Mr. Thomas H. Higgin, F.L.8., of
Liverpool, the former took from the “rapids” of the river
Uruguay, above the town of Salto, ‘ 200 or 300 miles” from
the sea in the delta of the Parana; in which “rapids” the
amount of water is subject to such great alteration in quantity
that, when Mr. Higgin found it, the stream was confined to
the “ cracks in the rock,” while when he returned to the spot
again it was ‘40 feet deep.” The specimen sent to Liver-
pool is still adherent to the piece of rock on which it grew ;
and all the other specimens of the sponge that Mr. Higgin
saw at this spot were of the same kind. 3rd. In none of the
specimens sent to England has the statoblast been seen, or
any other trace of reproductive organs, although the size of
the specimens evidences full growth, and the circumstances
connected with them, viz. their presence in a river subject to
great alteration in the size of the stream, and at a great dis-
tance from salt water, supply all that is required for a
genuine freshwater sponge. “4th. The characters of the
sponge above given are unique, although the hardness and
rigidity of the skeletal structure seems to find a kinship with
that of Tubella reticulata and Parmula Batesti &c., from the
river Amazons, as before intimated, if not also with Spongilla
nitens, whose locality is at present unknown.

With reference to the “ leaden”’ colour of the surface, it is
worthy of remark that this is not only confined to the surface,
fading off into the white structure of the interior a little below
it, but in the same branch may abruptly meet the faint
whitish-yellow colour which the whole sponge may present on
other occasions. The cause of this diversity in colour must
be explained by future observation.

Of the specimens of this sponge known to me, one is in the
Museum of the Royal College of Surgeons, which Dr. Bower-
bank states is labelled “near Salto Grande, above Paysandu,”
presented by Mr. W. Bragge (No. 20, p. 23); but when
Dr. Bowerbank adds that this place is on a tributary of the
upper part of the river Amazons, it is evidently a mistake ; for
Salto and Paysandu are on the river Uruguay. Another
specimen is in the British Museum, labelled “ Freshwater
sponge from Paraguay. Presented by R. McAndrew. Register
no. 72. 11. 138.1; running no. 622.” A third isin the Liver-
pool Free Museum, viz. that sent to his brother by Mr. George
Higgin, to which I have alluded; and a fourth is part of a
specimen sent by Dr. Garland of Dublin to the same museum,
which differs from all the rest in being of a faint yellow-white
colour throughout, with an accumulation of minute brown

102 Mr. H. J. Carter on the

bodies here and there on the surface towards the base, which
are the capsules of one or two undescribed species of the vorti-
cellate infusorian “ Freda,” that cannot be confounded with
the statoblasts (for they would be large enough to be seen
with the naked eye, and situated in the interior).

Fulfilling all the other characters of a freshwater sponge, I
cannot help thinking that a specimen will be found sooner or
later in which the presence of the statoblast will complete
them. At the same time, if we are right in identifying the
statoblast with the winter-egg of the freshwater Polyzoon,
that flustraceous Indian species which I have long since
described and illustrated under the name of Hislopia lacustris
(‘ Annals,’ 1858, vol. i. p. 169, pl. vii.) has not, to my know-
ledge, been found to possess them ; so it is not impossible that
this may be the case with Uruguaya corallioides, of which I
therefore make “ provisionally’ a new genus. The speci-
mens mentioned have been carefully examined by different
people over and over again; but in no instance has a trace of
a statoblast been found, with the exception of that noticed by
Dr. Bowerbank (No. 20, p. 23), which, I think, admits of
much doubt, not so much of the existence of the “ fragment ”’
as of its belonging to Uruquaya corallioides.

Observations.

Although my classification is chiefly based upon the form
of the spicules of the statoblast, yet it is not to be assumed
that I have included all the species of the Spongillina that
have been discovered, but those only in which this means of
classification has been obtained, as will be seen by the follow-
ing short summary of Dr. W. Dybowski’s elaborate account
of freshwater sponges from Lake Baikal, in Central Asia
(No. 32).

The specimens were obtained by his brother Dr. Benedict
Dybowski and Herr W. Godleuski while in Siberia, and
have been divided into four species, with their varieties re-
spectively, under the generic name of “Lubomirskia,” after
Prince Wladislau Lubomirski, thus—L. batcalensis, Pallas,
sp., L. bacillifera, n. sp., L. papyracea, n. sp., and L. inter-
media, n. sp.3 in all of which the statoblast (gemmula) was
absent ; so that, whatever arrangement is made of them here-
after, the present one must rest upon their general form and
that of their skeleton-spicule respectively, which places them
much in the same position as the two original species (viz.
S. fluviatilis and S. lacustris) before the spicules of their
statoblasts were discovered.

known Species of Spongilla. 103

Lubomirskia baicalensis.

Lubomirskia baicalensis, Pallas (apud Dybowski, No. 32, p. 11, Taf. i.
fig. 1), with four varieties, viz. a, 8, y, 5.

One learns from the figure of this species (op. cit. Taf. i.
fig. 1), which is half the natural size, that it consisted of long
digital processes, about 14 inches by } an inch in their greatest
diameters, more or less uniformly inflated at short intervals
(that is, bullate), but solid throughout. Structure elastic, but
not crumbling between the fingers. Colour dark grey or olive-
green. Skeleton-spicule curved, fusiform, gradually sharp-
pointed, spiniferous generally, but especially towards the ends,
particularly in the variety y, where the rest of the shaft is
smooth (Pl. VI. fig. 19).

Loc. Lake Baikal.

Largest skeleton-spicule 0°222 by 0:021 millim. “ Paren-
chyma-spicule” (?early form of the foregoing) 0°159 by
0006 millim., a smooth thin acerate (fig. 19, a).

Lubomirskia bacillifera.
Lubomirskia bacilifera, n. sp. (No. 52, p. 22, Taf. i. figs. 2, 4, 5, and 6,
&c.), with three varieties, viz. a, 8, y.

Massive, more or less lobed. Structure much the same as
that of the foregoing species, but finer and softer. Colour
grass-green. Skeleton-spicule curved, cylindrical, sometimes
fusiform (as in the variety 8), round at the ends, and spinife-
rous generally, but more particularly over the ends, sometimes
(asin the varieties) smooth over the rest or middle of the shaft
(PL. VIL. die. 20).

Loc. Lake Baikal.

Largest skeleton-spicule 0°270 by 0:024 millim. Paren-
chyma-spicule a small, thin, smooth acerate. No measure-
ment.

Lubomirskia intermedia.
LIubomirskia intermedia, n. sp. (No. 82, p. 28, Taf. iv. fig. 8, A, spicule
only), with one variety, viz. a.

Flat, spreading. Structure like that of L. batcalensis, but
more tender. Colour yellowish or olive-green. Skeleton-
spicule curved, fusiform, gradually sharp-pointed, spiniferous
generally (Pl. VI. fig. 21).

Loc. Lake Baikal.

Largest skeleton-spicule 0-222 by 0:018 millim. Paren-
chyma-spicule a large smooth acerate. No measurement
given.

104 Mr. H. J. Carter on the

Lubomirskia papyracea.
Lubomirskia papyracea, n. sp. (No. 32, p. 33, taf. i. fig. 7 &e.).

Papyraceous in thinness, with smooth shining surface.
Structure very soft. Colour white. Skeleton-spicule thick
(seven times longer than broad), curved, cylindrical, round at
the ends, thickly spiniferous throughout (Pl. VI. fig. 22).

Loc. Lake Baikal.

Largest skeleton-spicule 0°144 by 0°018 millim. Paren-
chyma-spicule a very small smooth acerate.

Obs. The “ parenchyma-spicule ” appears to be the same in
each of these species, and therefore is probably merely an early
form of the skeleton-spicule, and not a “ flesh-spicule,” which
it is hardly to be supposed would be the same in all four.

Observations.

Besides the new species of freshwater sponges in Lake
Baikal, Dr. Dybowski mentions the occurrence of Spongilla
lacustris ina small lake at its western end, called the ‘‘ Pacha-
bicha See,” together with a new species, viz. S. s¢birica (No.
32, p. 66), which is not described; also the occurrence of
Spongilla lacustris in the Goktscha See in ‘Transcaucasia, in
the Dnieper, Minsk, Livonia, and about Warsaw and Charkow ;
also Ephydatia (Spongilla) fluviatilis in Livonia, Warsaw,
and Charkow; besides Trachyspongilla erinaceus (No. 28 and
No. 32, Taf. 4. fig. 13 a), Spongilla erinaceus (No. 32, p. 33),
? Spongilla erinaceus, Khr.

‘Thus it is evident from what has been above stated that
freshwater sponges have been found in many parts of Europe,
in Asia, and in the two Americas; but, to my knowledge, no
notice has been made public of their occurrence in Africa;
still it may be fairly inferred that new species will be dis-
covered there as well as elsewhere; and a yet further infe-
rence may be drawn, viz. that we are only on the threshold of
our knowledge of the extent and varieties of the Potamo- |
spongida generally, so vast are the freshwater areas that have
not been explored for this purpose.

Ehrenberg in his ‘ Mikrogeologie,’ 1855, Taf. 1-12, repre-
sents many amphidisks (birotulates) which he found in
“freshwater deposits” of various parts of the world, several
of which are quite different in torm from those with which we
are acquainted.

Lastly, I would observe that, although I have endeavoured
to make the above communication immediately useful, it is
by no means intended to supply what can only be obtained by
a careful perusal at leisure ot all that has been written on the
subject, especially that to which I have referred.

known Species of Spongilla. 105

EXPLANATION OF THE PLATES.

N.B.—1. All the figures of the statoblasts are drawn to the same scale,
viz. 1-24th to 1-1800th inch, in order that their constituent parts may
appear under the same magnifying-power. They, however, are to a
certain extent diagrammatic for the sake of clearness, inasmuch as all the
coats are of course im contact naturally; the chitinous coat, which is re-
presented by the dark line, is not quite so thick and the spicules are not
quite so scanty as they are represented ; but, generally speaking, the whole
may be considered relatively magnitied on the scale above mentioned.

2, All the “ more magnified” parts or spicules are drawn to the scale
of 1-12th to 1-6000th inch.

3. The skeleton-spicules, viz. figs. 14-18, are drawn to the scale of
1-12th to 1-1800th inch, and the rest, viz. 19-22, on much the same scale,
having been traced off those done with Hartnack’s no. 4, prism and objec-
tive (No. 382, p. 69).

4, Fig. 13, f, is only magnified three diameters.

5. It should be remembered that all sponge-measurements, both general
and elementary, can only be considered approximative ; for what is fixed
upon asa standard at one time may be upset by the measurements of
another, chiefly on account of the objects appearing under different
degrees of development in different specimens. Still there is an average
largest size and shape of the spicule which can easily be recognized: but
this too is subject to differences; for it may be thick or thin, although
fully developed, while the former is the shortest and the latter the longest.
Thus varieties are numerous; but the great point is to give the average
shape and size of the fully-developed object, and to avoid as much as
possible the variations ; for the latter confuse, while a very slight acquain-
tance with sponge-structure points out that their existence may be in-
ferred in all cases.

Puate V.

Fig. 1. Parmula Batesii. Perpendicular section of the statoblast through
the aperture, showing :—a, cavity filled with germinal matter ;
b, coat enclosing the same ; ¢c, chitinous coat; d, crust; e, inter-
nal layer of parmuliform spicules; f, external layer of the same;
g, minute spinous acerate spicules; A, aperture; 7, nipple-like
prolongation of b.

Fig. 2. The same. More magnified view of fragment of crust bearing
two parmuliform spicules: a, crust, to show granular appear-
ance of microcellular structure; 6, parmuliform spicule, end
view; ¢, the same, lateral view; d, more magnified view of
spinous acerate spicule.

Fig. 3. Spongilla mitens, n. sp. Perpendicular section of the statoblast
through the aperture: a, cavity filled with germinal matter; 5,
coat enclosing the same; c, chitinous coat; d, crust composed of
columns of hexagonal cells in the section, in juxtaposition ;
e, inner layer of spinous acerates ; f, external layer of the same ;
g, aperture ; h, nipple-like prolongation of 6; 7, more magnified
view of cell-structure of crust ; k, the same of spinous acerate.

Fig. 4. 8. navicella, n. sp. Perpendicular section of the statoblast
through the aperture: a, cavity filled with germinal matter ;
b, coat enclosing the same; c¢, chitinous coat; d, layer or
capsule composed of minute navicelliform acerates (no ap-
pearance of crust-substance); e, aperture ; f, nipple-like pro-
longation of 6; g, more magnified view of navicelliform spicule.

106 Mr. H. uv. Carter on the known Species of Spongilla.

Fig. 5. 8S. multiforis, n. sp. External view of entire statoblast: a, chiti-
nous coat; bb, layer of minute spinous acerate spicules (crust
almost obsolete); ¢c¢ecc, apertures; d, more magnified view of
spinous acerate.

Fig.6, Meyenia plumosa. Perpendicular section of the statoblast through
the aperture: a, cavity filled with germinal matter; 6, coat
enclosing the same; c, chitinous coat; d, crust; e, birotulate
spicules zm situ; f, aperture; g, nipple-like prolongation of 0;
h, birotulate spicule, more magnified ; 7, disk, end view; 4, stel-
late form of flesh-spicule.

Fig. 7. Tubella recurvata, Perpendicular section of the statoblast through
the aperture: a, cavity filled with germinal matter; 6, coat
enclosing the same; ¢, chitinous coat; d, crust; e, tubelliform
or trumpet-like spicules 7 situ; f, capsule of equal-ended denti-
capitate spicules in situ; g, aperture ; h, nipple-like prolongation
of 6; 7, more magnified view of tubelliform spicule; %, the same
of equal-ended denticapitate spicule ; 7, still more magnified end
view of head of same.

PuateE VI.

Fig. 8. Tubella reticulata, Perpendicular section of the statoblast through
the aperture: a, cavity filled with germinal matter; b, coat
enclosing the same; ¢, chitinous coat; d, crust; e, trumpet-like
spicules in situ; f, aperture; g, nipple-like prolongation of 0;
h, more magnified view of trumpet-like spicule ; 7, the same of
large disk, end view; %, the same of small disk, end view; J,
small spinous skeleton-spicule forming a capsular layer to the
statoblast ; m, skeleton-spicule smooth or sparsely spined ; x,
more magnified view of /.

Fig. 9. T. spinata, nu. sp. Perpendicular section of statoblast through
the aperture: a, cavity filled with germinal matter; 6, coat
enclosing the same; ¢, chitinous coat; d, crust; e, trumpet-
shaped spicules in situ; f, aperture ; g, nipple-like prolongation
of 6; h, more magnified view of trumpet-shaped spicule with
spinous shaft; 2, large disk; 4, small disk, denticulated, end
view ; /, the same, still more magnified, lateral view; m, flesh-
spicule, spinous acerate.

Fig. 10. T. paula: a, trumpet-shaped spicule, lateral view; 8, large
disk, end view; ¢, another form of the trumpet-like spicule.
Seale 1-12th to 1-6000th inch.

Fig. 11. Meyenia fluviatilis : a, birotulate spicule, lateral view; 0b, denti-
culated disk, end view. Same scale.

Fig. 12. Tubella anonyma,n.sp. External view of statoblast of unknown
sponge: a, striated coat; 6, reticulated structure resting on the
same; c, aperture; d, reticulated structure, more magnified, to
show that it is composed of minute, erect, conical bodies in
relief on the striated coat, having a spicule in the middle of
the interstice; e, more magnified lateral view of spicule; /f,
fragment of coat of germinal matter, showing polygonal reticu-
lation.

Fig. 18. Spongilla Lordi. Lateral view of entire statoblast: a, body or
chitinous coat; 6, neck, ending in c, aperture; d, coating of
acerate spicules; e, more magnified view of spicule ; f, group of
statoblasts zm situ, magnified three diameters.

Fig. 14. S. lacustris. Skeleton-spicule, to show the “ gradually-pointed ”
form.

On the Changes of Form in Fishes. 107

Fig. 15. Parmula Batesii. Skeleton-spicule, to show the “abruptly-
pointed ” form.

Fig. 16. Tubelia reticulata. Skeleton-spicule, to show “ rounded end.”

Fig. 17. Uruguaya corallioides. Skeleton-spicule, to show micropuncta-
tion and “ rounded ” ends.

Fig. 18. Spongilia nitens. Skeleton-spicule, to compare with foregoing
form.

Characteristic skeleton-spicules of freshwater sponges from

Lake Baikal, after Dr. W. Dybowski ; traced off the figures in Taf.
iv. (No. 32), drawn with Hartnack’s prism and no. 4 objective.

Fig. 19. Lubomirskia baicalensis, Pallas: a, ‘ parenchyma-spicule,” after
Dybowski.

Fig. 20. L. bacillifera, n. sp.

Fig. 21. L. termedia, n. sp.

Fig. 22. L. papyracea, n. sp., two forms.

X.—Spolia Atlantica: Contributions to the Knowledge of
the Changes of Form in Fishes during their Growth and
Development, especially in the Pelagic Fishes of the At-
lantic. By Dr. C. F. Litrxen.

[Continued from p. 14.]
8. BramMA, TARACTES, PTERYCOMBUS, PTERACLIS.

With regard to Brama, it is to be remarked, in the first
place, that it has been ascertained that B. Raji is not an
almost exclusively Mediterranean species, but a bathyphilous
and very cosmopolitan species, which is spread from the
Fiirées to the Cape, and represented at Chili, New Zealand,
and Japan by very nearly allied, if not identical forms (B.
japonica, Hilg., appears to be a distinct species), but has not
yet been found among the Antilles or on the eastern coast of
America. Leaving out of consideration some young forms
(B. Oreint, B. Dussumiert) which cannot pretend to the
rank of distinct species, a series of species from the Antilles,
Madeira, &c, have subsequently been described, some with
smooth scales, others, as in Pteraclis and Pterycombus, with a
large spine upon the anterior margin of the visible part of
each scale, and a corresponding notch in the posterior margin
of the immediately preceding scale. It is a singular thing
that it has not hitherto been observed that B. Raj’, when
young but yet about half-grown (290 millims.), has the scales
armed with the same spines, which do not disappear until the
fish approaches its full development. We are therefore not
justified in forming a separate genus ( Taractes) for the species
of Brama with spines, nor in determining the young individuals
furnished with spines (Zaractes asper, Brama Orcint and

108 Dr. C. F. Liitken on the Changes of Form in Fishes

Dussumiert) as the young of species which retain the spinous
character of the scales all their lives; for they may just as
well belong to species which, like B. Raj, become completely
smooth as they advance in age. ‘The small Brame with
spines, from 11-47 millims. long, that I have examined, which
in general agree with the young forms above mentioned and
formerly described, present no peculiarity which prevents our
referring them to b. Raji; and consequently we may very
well provisionally range these nominal species among the
synonyms of the type species in question. It is probable,
however, that the young individuals belonging to the different
species of Brama will closely resemble one another, and be
extremely difficult to distinguish; in those which I have at
my disposal, some of which (the largest) were found in the
stomach of large voracious fishes, and others (the smaller ones)
fished at the surface of the Atlantic, I have been able to
recognize only the elements of a single continuous series, and
not the representatives of several species. One of the oldest
and one of the youngest individuals of this series referred to
B. Raji are represented in pl. iv. (of the Danish memoir) ;
and I refer the reader for their differences and for their com-
parison with the adult fish to figs. 1 and 2.

With the young Brame which we have just been discussing
there was also a Pterycombus, perhaps a young P. brama, an
arctic species inhabiting deep water, hitherto known only
from specimens derived from the coasts of Finmark and Nor-
way; this specific determination, if correct, will furnish a
fresh proof of the conformity presented in general by the
faunas of great depths in the tropical and arctic seas. In the
stomach of the same albacore which contained these inter-
esting young Bramide there was also a young fish belonging
to the arctic genus Himantolophus, perhaps H. Reinhardtt.
Fig. 4, pl. iv. (of the Danish memoir), placed near that of the
adult Brama, will elucidate the very considerable changes
that the young Pterycombi undergo diene their growth and
development.

, A pelagic genus allied to Brama and Pterycombus is the
genus Pteraclis, the still little-known species of which per-
haps need to undergo some reduction. Our sailors have also
found it in the stomachs of albacores ; and they have moreover
captured in the nets very small examples of 7-15 millims. long.
Their physiognomy greatly resembles that of the young
Brame and Pterycombi; and they differ as much as these and
the young dorados from fully developed fish. The body is
short, thick, and pyriform; the scales are high and hexagonal,
each armed with a spine directed backward; the praoper-

during their Growth and Development. 109

culum is very spinous; the dorsal and anal are low and
almost completely retractile within their scaly sheaths ; as in
the young Ooryphene and Pterycombi, the dorsal does not
commence so far forward as at a later period, and it is placed
further back in proportion as the fish is younger ; the ventrals
are composed of a few very fine rays &c.

9. NaucraTES, NAUCLERUS, and XystropHORuUS ; NOMEUS,
PorTHMEUS, LicH1A, and CHORINEMUS; PAROPSIS.

Mr. Gill and myself, some years ago, showed that the
Naucleri are young forms of Naucrates ; and the synonyms of
the celebrated pilotfish (N. ductor) have consequently been
augmented by the other probably merely nominal species of
Naucrates, by all those of the genus Nauclerus, and by two
species referred to the genus Seriola. But it has not hitherto
been noticed that Xystrophorus, Rich., is nothing but the
youngest form of Naucrates ; moreover, among the first stages
of Sertola there are also some which present, in part, the
characters of Xystrophorus. The very young Naucrates are
among the small fishes which are often met with among the
arms, tentacles, &c. of the Physalie, pretty frequently asso-
ciated with Nomeus Gronovit, which is not less pelagic than
Naucrates. These little fishes, as well as the young of Seriola,
Coryphena, &c., are also met with in the floating masses of
seaweeds. The young of Naucrates and Nomeus constitute
the most frequent Sick of net-fishing in the open sea; and
we thus possess numerous examples of them, which bear
witness in favour of their wide geographical distribution. In
Nomeus the changes arising from age and development are
comparatively insignificant, but, perhaps, only because they
occur so early that they have not hitherto attracted attention.

Porthmeus argenteus, of which our museum possesses an
example 74 millims. long, from the coast of Guinea, is not, as
has been supposed, a young form of Chorinemus, but of Lichia
amia. As this species must be referred to a different genus
from Lichia glaucus, we may very well leave to the latter the
name of Lichia, and in future designate L. améa under that
of Porthmeus amia (Lac.). On the other hand, Lichia calcar,
Bl., of which [ have before me a specimen 25 millims. long, is
a young form of some Chorinemus of the Atlantic with four
dorsal spines, perhaps Chorinemus saliens. The museum has
received a corresponding series of a Chorinemus from the
Indian Ocean 25-34 millims. long, with seven spinous dorsal
rays, including successive stages up to the perfectly deve-
loped although still very young form. For the subdivision
of this genus it would be best to employ a difference hitherto

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. vii. 9

110 Dr. C. F. Liitken on the Changes of Form in Fishes

unnoticed (see the fig. on p. 512 of the Danish memoir),
namely the existence or absence of teeth on the pterygoids
side by side with those of the palatines and vomer, in accor-
dance with the following scheme, the divisions of which must,
however, only be estimated as sections or subgenera, and not
as true genera :—

A. 4-5 (6) dorsal spines; scales linear; no teeth on the
pterygoids. C. occidentalis, saliens, palometa (Oligo-
plites, Gill).

B. 7 dorsal spines, and teeth on the pterygoids.

1. Scales linear: C. tol (C. moadetta, Klz., perhaps the
young form of C. tol).

2. Scales short and broad: C. dyson, sancti Petri, and a
new species from Singapore which greatly resem-
bles C. altus of the western coast of Central
America.

In some species the teeth of the upper jaw are uniserial,
and in others bi- or pluriserial; but those of the mandible are
always biserial, although here a remarkable difference due to
age makes its appearance; the older individuals are homodont,
and the young heterodont. In other words, in the young
Chorinemt, until they are about half-grown, the outer row in
the mandible consists of very small, numerous, setiform teeth
placed very close together (almost as in the Cheetodonts),
which are very different from the strong, conical, recurved
teeth, separated by distinct intervals, and consequently much
less numerous, of the inner row. During the growth of the
fish these outer teeth are replaced by a new row of teeth,
which, according to the species, are identical with, or more or
less similar to those of the inner row. A somewhat super-
ficial observation of these important modifications of the
dental system, which depend upon the age of the individual,
might easily lead to the establishment of unfounded specific
distinctions. The pterygoidian teeth, mentioned above,
likewise exist in the genus Paropsis; and this genus presents
another peculiarity not previously mentioned, namely the
ramification of the lateral line, which, however, seems to be-
come less marked with increasing age.

10. PsENES, CuBiceps, and NAVARCHUS.

It is already known that Navarchus is generically identical
with Atiémostoma and Trachelocirrus, as also that this genus
falls into that of Cubiceps. But in the present state of science
it is equally difficult to separate the genera Psenes and Cubr-
ceps. Under these two names a series of species have been
described which are for the most part young forms still un-

during their Growth and Development. BAT

known in the adult state, and which will no doubt have to
undergo reduction. Among the rather numerous small pelagic
individuals of the genus Psenes possessed by our museum, I
have been able to distinguish five or six species; but I have
only partially succeeded in referring them to those which have
been described. I regard as new a high, short, and very com-
pressed form, nearly colourless and semitransparent, from the
Straits of Surabaya, P. pellucidus, sp. n. (figured p. 516 of
the Danish memoir), which, I suppose, could not very well
represent the juvenile form of a Navarchus. Another form
very widely distributed in the Atlantic is represented in pl. v.
fig. 2 (of the Danish memoir) ; I have made it provisionally
a new species under the name of P. maculatus, but strongly
suspect that it may be a young form of Navarchus sulcatus
(Cubiceps gracilis), or of Atimostoma capense (species which
are perhaps identical), or of some analogous form. We shall
hardly deceive ourselves if we regard these three types (P.
maculatus, N. sulcatus, and A. capense) as three successive
stages of a single species, or, at any rate, of several very
nearly allied species, which only appear rarely at the surface
of the sea in their developed state, and which, in consequence,
are still but little known to naturalists; perhaps, indeed, it is
not precisely my Psenes maculaius, but another nearly allied
form, which I have met with more rarely, and which is dis-
tinguished by a smaller number of rays in the vertical fins,
that is really the young form of Navarchus sulcatus and Ati-
mostoma capense. ‘The group Psenes-Cubiceps is, in point of
fact, one of the pelagic groups of which we know least, and
with regard to which we have scarcely begun to lift a little
corner of the veil which hides the rich ichthyological fauna of
the great depths. In none of these young or more advanced
forms of Psenes have I found a spinous preoperculum as in,
so many other young Scomberoids, and as is the case in the
adult state with the preoperculum and interoperculum of a
fish which appears to be very nearly related to Psenes, namely
Palinurichthys (Pammelas) perciformis; there is nothing
which seems to indicate that any of the forms of Psenes that
have been described, or that I have examined, can be derived
from that species, which is only known from specimens from
the eastern coast of North America.

11. Srromateus, APoLECTUS; SCHEDOPHILUS ; TRACHY-
NoTUS ; MICROPTERYX; SERIOLA.

The conjecture has already been put forward that the
“ Rhombus crenulatus,’ Cuv., 1s a young form of Stromateus

alepidotus (Gardenit, longipinnis). Dr. Giinther has also
o*

112 Dr. C. F. Liitken on the Changes of Form in Fishes

shown that Stromateus securifer is only a young S. argenteus
(candidus); and the subordination on the same ground of
Apolectus stromateus to S. paru is confirmed by the descrip-
tion of a little fish (18 millims.) from the Straits of Riouw,
with large ventrals and the margin of the preeoperculum den-
ticulated, in which I have recognized a still younger form of
the Apolectus and of S.paru. In consequence of these analo-
gies, and depending in part upon the materials at my disposal,
and in part on what I have found in the literature of the sub-
ject, it seems to me more than probable that S. (Seserimus)
microchirus, with more or less rudimentary ventrals, is a young
form of S. fiatola; but as this question, when once raised, may
easily be elucidated by the ichthyologists of the Mediterranean
coasts, I shall leave to them the task of solving it, and shall
not discuss it further. With regard to the genus Stromateus
I shall further remark that the separation effected by M.
Bleeker of the three species S. argenteus, cinerea, and
sinensis (atous, albus) as forming a distinct genus, Stroma-
teovdes, must be sustained. This genus is chiefly character-
ized by its short branchial clefts; young examples of Stroma-
teoides sinensis also confirm the proposition, already advanced
by M. Bleeker, that the ventrals, in this genus, disappear
earlier than in the true Stromate?, if indeed they are not com-
pletely deficient. iS. medius, Pet., is a true Stromateus, and
not a Stromateoides.

The genus Schedophilus, which belongs to the true pelagic
fishes, counts several (4) species; I shall abstain from dis-
cussing whether it may not be necessary to make them
undergo some reduction. The pretty numerous specimens,
chiefly young, that our Museum possesses must all be re-
ferred to S. medusophagus. ‘The differences of age manifested
in the proportions of the parts of the body, the system of
coloration, &c. might certainly, if we examine them isolatedly,
give rise to the establishment of illegitimate species ; but they
have no great importance from a general point of view.

The great differences arising from age, which, in the genus
Trachynotus, have caused a series of false species, and even
genera (Doliodon, Bathrolemus) to be established, have already
been dealt with by MM. Giinther and Gill, and I have nothing
essential to add. I shall only remark that 7. rhomboides of
the West Indies already has its rhomboidal physiognomy and
its much prolonged sickle-shaped fins at an age when these
prolongations of the fins are still rather short in the 7. ovatus
of the Indian seas, and that I am of opinion (with Mr. Gill)
that these two species must be regarded, at least provision-
ally, as distinct. On the other hand, Micropteryx (Chloro-

during their Growth and Development. 113

scombus) chrysurus is not one of the forms in which the
changes due to age can give rise to the establishment of de-
ceptive species. Nevertheless the scapular and preopercular
spines, which are characteristic of so many Scomberoids in
the first phases of their development, are not wanting in the
youngest individuals (10-25 millims.) of the series that I
have examined.

The division indicated by G. Cuvier, and effected by Mr.
Gill, of the genus Serola into two distinct genera, Zonichthys,
Swainson, and Halatractus, Gill, seems to be very natural.
(S. gigas is the type of a third genus, Naucratops?s, Gill; and
S. Dussumiert and succincta are young forms of Naucrates
ductor). To the genus Zonichthys belongs S. nigrofasciata
(with which S. cntermedia is no doubt to be united) ; the genus
Halatractus, or Sertola proper, includes 8. Dumerilii, Risso
(with which I identify not only S. purpurascens, Schl., but
also S. Solandr?,C. & V.), S. quinqueradiata, Schl., S. zonata,
Mitch. (carolinensis, Holbr.), and S. rivoliana (8. Boscit, fal-
cata, and bonariensis perhaps do not differ from this last
species). iS. tapetnometopon (an example 73 millims. long
from the Indian Ocean) is no doubt only a young form of
S. Dumerilii, with the transverse bands which are character-
istic of so large a number of young Scomberoids. Young
Seriole are tolerably frequent in our pelagic collections; the
entire group may therefore no doubt be regarded as subpelagic,
and certain forms (such as S. rivoliana) as completely pelagic.
Besides several more or less juvenile forms of S. Dumerilit
and S. rivoliana, our museum possesses very young forms
(19-26 millims.) with the head armed with very large spines,
and greatly resembling the so-called Xystrophorus phase of
Naucrates; I have referred them to S. zonata (carolinensis) ;
lastly, young spinous forms of S. nigrofasciata and S. quin-
gueradiata, with regard to which I refer to the figures (pl. iv.
figs. 7-11 of the Danish memoir) for the greater or less diffe-
rences in physiognomy, the system of coloration &c. which dis-
tinguish them from the adults. I think also that we must refer
to the subpelagic forms the Seriolichthys bipinnulatus (the pre-
operculum of which, notwithstanding what has been said, is
not denticulated), as having been observed not only in the
Indian Ocean, but also in the Mediterranean and the West .
Indies. The Serioledle having been identified with the Nep-
toment by Dr. Giinther, we must suppose that the armature
of spines indicated in them likewise does not constitute a per-
manent character.

114 Dr. C. F. Liitken on the Changes of Form in Fishes

12. Caranx, CARANGICHTHYS ; GALLICHTHYS; SELENE
(ARGYREIOSUS, VOMER).

In the Caranx group too many and too few genera have
been established. Following the principles adopted by certain
authors, we might establish still more of them; for several un-
described species represented in our museum must furnish
types for new divisions; on the other hand, we cannot approve
of suppressing them all. A critical revision allows us to
retain the six following genera :—

1. Trachurus, Cuv. (Gthr.). The lateral line is cuirassed
throughout its whole length. The species of this genus have
erroneously been united into a single one; I am able to dis-
tinguish the following :—7. Linnet, Malm, the form from
the Northern seas, which, however, is also met with in the
Mediterranean ; 7. mediterraneus (Steind.), which also pro-
bably occurs in the Northern seas, where, however, it is cer-
tainly rare; 7. Cuviert, Lowe (Madeira, West Indies, west
coast of South America) ; 7. japonicus, Blkr. (China, Aus-
tralia). The relative proportions between the two parts of
the lateral line, its more or less sudden or oblique inflexion,
and the height of the plates in proportion to their breadth,
furnish good specific characters.

2. Megalaspis, Blkr. With 8-9 finlets separated from the
dorsal and anal.

3. Decapterus, Blkr. A single finlet (the last ray of the
fin) separated from the dorsal and anal.

4, Caranx, Cuv. Lateral line incompletely euirassed as in
2 and 3; no isolated finlets. Carangichthys is only a young
Caranz with the preoperculum denticulated. ‘This genus has
been divided into a great number of subgenera, which it would
be superfluous to enumerate, and which ought all to be sup-
pressed.

5. Gallichthys, Cuv. Naked, or nearly sealeless; the first
dorsal is rudimentary in young individuals, and altogether
wanting in the adults. Blepharis, Scyris, Hynnis, &c. are
founded upon differences arising from age, and must conse-
quently be eliminated. i

6. Selene, Lac. (Vomer, Argyreiosus, &c.).

The young of Caranz and Trachurus, down to a length of
10-14 millims. for the smallest, are often brought by the sailors,
and we thus possess a great number of them ; but it is not pos-
sible to determine their species with exactitude except when
they occur in more complete series, which enable us to recognize
the characters of the adult. In my memoir [ indicate the diffe-
rences arising from age that I have observed in certain species,

during their Growth and Development. 115

especially from the West Indies; and these, considering the
difficulty of distinguishing from each other the species be-
longing to these genera, merit some attention. The youngest
individuals with no scales or lateral line, and with a spinous
preoperculum, certainly do not present any character which
enables us to decide whether they are Trachuri or Caranges.
The species in which I have observed the greatest changes
during growth and development is C. ar matus : but they are
already i in great part well known, and I shall not here examine
them in more detail. These changes are, however, very in-
ferior to those observed in the Gallichthyes, which have been
divided into more genera than there are species in reality,
because the successive stages which recur in an analogous
manner in the different species have been interpreted as con-
stituting so many separate generic types—the result of which
has naturally been that the diagnoses of the species have be-
come as incorrect as possible, and that systematic confusion
has attained its final limits. Hach of the three or four exist-
ing species passes through a phase of Blepharis (Gallichthys),
one of Scyris, and one of Hynnis. Hynnis goreensis is thus
the adult form of Gallichthys egyptiacus and of Scyris alex-
andrinus ; the forms described by Poey under the names of
Scyris analis and H; ynnis cubensis correspond in the same way
to G. (Blepharis) crinitus. The Scyris phase belonging to
G. ciliaris has not been before described. It may be asked
(but, owing to the want of sufficient materials, I cannot decide
the question) whether G. ciliaris of the Indian Ocean
differs specifically from the American G. crinitus. If these
two forms, comparatively rare in the adult state, are, as I
suppose, fishes which inhabit tolerably deep water, we can
understand that the same species might occur in seas far dis-
tant from each other. The general rule which finds its ex-
pression in the changes of form produced in this genus may
be summed up as follows :—Greater and greater elongation
of the body, so that its original proportions are completely
altered ; reduction of the number of spinous rays in the dorsal
and anal fins, as also of the filamentous prolongations of the
ventrals, and, later on, likewise of those of the dorsal and
anal.

Exactly similar changes occur in the genus Selene, Lac.
(p. p-) (= Argyreiosus, Vomer, Platysomus) ; and in conse-
quence “analogy” and “ aftinity ” have been until very
lately confounded in them as in Gallichthys; nay, more,
after Dr. Giinther had elucidated the filiatior. of the forms in
the essential points, the justice of his views was contested,
and the error again maintained with a certain emphasis.

116 Dr. C. F. Liitken on the Changes of Form in Fishes

Leaving out of consideration Argyretosus dorsalis, with regard
to which I will not attempt to decide whether it is a variety of
Selene setipinnis or a distinct species, it seems to me evident,
from all that I know in nature and from literature, that in-
stead of four species there are only two on the east coast of
America, namely Selene (Argyreiosus) vomer, Linn., and S.
setipinnis, Mitch. (Vomer Brownii). I have illustrated by
two series of figures (pp. 543 and 547 of the Danish memoir)
the development of these two species and the changes they
undergo withage. The young form of S. setipinnis has been
described under the name of Argyretosus unimaculatus; if
_ consistency had been desired it might have been set up as a
distinct genus; the very old form of the same species is Platy-
somus micropteryx of Swainson. Argyreiosus vomer, L., Zeus
rostratus and Argyreiosus capillaris of Mitchill, A. Sprxie,
Cast., triacanthus and Maurice?, Sw., and senegalensis, Guich.,
are all one and the same species, Selene vomer (L.), which,
in its complete development, is represented by the Selene
argentea, Lac., described by Brevoort. The two species
attain nearly the same size (2 feet), and follow a very parallel
course in their evolution—with this reservation, however, that
the successive stages present greater differences among them-
selves in S. vomer than in S. set¢pinnis, and that the principal
changes are earlier accomplished in this latter species. As
will be seen from the figures, the young forms of the two
species have the body very short and thickset ; the first dorsal
and the ventrals are well developed, and have filamentous
prolongations in S. vomer; with age the body extends more
or less in length, and the ventrals as well as the first dorsal
are reduced to a minimum, while the pectorals become elon-
gated, and the first ray of the anal and that of the second dorsal
acquire an enormous length, in S. vomer. ‘Thus, in propor-
tion as the form of the body is modified, the prolongations of
the fins which in the young perform the office of instruments
of movement or of balancement, are replaced in the adults
by prolongations of the same nature, but developed elsewhere.
Both species occur on the west coast of Africa, and they have
also been met with on the west coast of America. 1 must,
however, remark that the species from Nicaragua possessed
by our museum, and which there represents S. vomer, is a
distinct species (8. Oerstedii, m.), distinguished by a peculiar
profile and by the number of itsrays (D. 8.1.18; A. 1.15).

13. Zeus; ZeNopsis (LAMPRIS; MENE).

A critical comparison of the materials in the possession of
our museum, in the form of fishes from St. Pierre, in the

during their Growth and Development. 117

Mediterranean, combined with the statements contained in
literature, has led to a fresh examination of a question which
has also been raised elsewhere—namely, whether Zeus faber
and Z. pungio must really be considered distinct species, or
only varieties with a more or less local character. It is
clear that the differences which have been appealed to are not
characters relating to sex or age; but at the same time it re-
sults, from the examination that I have made, that Z. pungio
can, at the utmost and even with difficulty, be regarded only as
a variety of Z. faber, and by no means as a distinct species—
an opinion which seems to be shared by the greater number
of the Italian ichthyologists. The only somewhat constant
character is the form and size of certain scutes at the base of
the second dorsal. On the other hand, I must maintain that
Z. australis, Rich. (Australia), is a perfectly different species
from Z. faber, but perhaps identical with Z. japonicus ;
whether Z. capensis is a third species, or to be combined also
with 4. australis, is a question still to’ be solved ; in any case
it will belong to a species distinct from Z. faber. It is no
doubt with good reason that Mr. Gill has established the
genus Zenopsis for the species more exclusively inhabiting
the deep waters (which can hardly be said of the true species
of Zeus), such as Z. conchifer (Madeira, with Z. ocellatus of
North America) and Z. nebulosus (Japan); but the right of
these species to be considered distinct still needs revision,
which is the more necessary as the characters indicated are of
rather doubtful value, and as we have here to do with species
inhabiting the great depths of the oceans, and the geogra-
phical distribution is often very extensive in the fish of this
category. I shall refer finally to the note by Dr. Giinther on
a supposed juvenile form of Mene maculata, a note which is, so
to speak, the harbinger of the interesting particulars which
the future will no doubt bring us as to the hitherto unknown
metamorphoses of the genera Zews and Lampris.

14. PseTrus; ZANCLUS and GNATHOCENTRUM ; PLATAX.

Dr. Giinther has already demonstrated that Gnathocentrum,
Guich. (Zanclus canescens, L.), is only a young form of
Zanclus cornutus ; nevertheless the late M. Bleeker, in his
‘ Atlas Ichthyologique,’ still separates them as distinct species.
I have therefore thought it right to state that for me also it is
an established fact that the genus Gnathocentrum and Z. canes-
cens are respectively only the young stages of the genus
Zanclus and of Z. cornutus.

Other authors have already pointed out that it is an error
to deny palatine teeth to the genus Psettus. The four species

118 Dr. C. F. Liitken on the Changes of Form in Fishes

which constitute it are all armed with five very considerable
groups of card-like teeth on the vomer, the palatines, and
the pterygoids. These four species are :—the true P. rhombeus
of Forskal from the Red Sea and the Mauritius (figured in the
illustrated edition of Cuvier’s ‘ Régne Animal,’ pl. xli. fig. 2),
which authors, except the late Sir John Richardson, have
erroneously confounded with P. argenteus, Linn., from the
East Indies, Australia, and China (see ‘ Voyage of the Kre-
bus and Terror,’ pl. xxxv. fig. 1); P. falciformis, Lac.,
from the East Indies, and P. seb, C. & V., from the west coast
of Africa.

. The species of the genus Platax are subject during their
growth and development to such considerable changes, both
im physiognomy and in the form of the body and the colora-
tion, that great confusion and the establishment of a number
of nominal species could not but result from them. Never-
theless more light has by degrees been thrown’ upon this
question; and in this respect I may refer especially to M.
Bleeker’s text and the very instructive plates of his great
‘ Atlas Ichthyologique.’ But (and this is a singular fact) he
has neglected a character of which M. Klunzinger first indi-
cated the importance, and without which we shall never
arrive at a certain determination of the species. In some
species (P. tetra, Forsk.) the three points of the teeth of the
outer row are of the same size; in others (P. vespertilio, BL,
=orbicularis) the middle point is very distinctly larger; in
others, again (P. batavianus and P. pinnatus (L.), Blk.), it is
much larger than the others and completely predominant. It
would not appear that we know more than these four species ;
M. Blecker’s fifth species (P. melanosoma) is only known
from a very young specimen; and the author (whose recent
loss is so much deplored) himself regarded it as doubtful.

15. SCOMBERESOX SAURUS.

Dr. Giinther having already indicated, although very briefly,
the metamorphoses of this fish in their principal features, I
may here contine myself to referring to the figures on p. 567
(of the Danish memoir), which represent the different phases
of the evolution of the rostrum, as also the physiognomy of
the entire fish in one of its youngest stages; and as they are
accompanied by a corresponding series of figures representing
the very well-known evolution of the same parts in the com-
mon Garfish (Belone vulgaris), the analogies and differences
between the development and transformation of these two
nearly allied fishes will strike the eye at once without need of
further explanation. I will only add that Scomberesox saurus.

during their Growth and Development. 119

is in the highest degree a pelagic fish, the young of which,
easily recognized and impossible to confound with any others,
are captured everywhere between the tropics, and even beyond
them, especially the youngest forms. It is therefore not diffi-
cult to obtain a series of all the successive stages of this genus.
Nevertheless, in this great accumulation of more or less juve-
nile forms derived from very widely separated parts of the
great seas of the globe, I have been unable to distinguish more
than one species, and have come to the conclusion that,
properly speaking, we only know a single species belonging
to this genus, namely the pelagic and essentially cosmopolitan
species known under the name of S. sawrus or S. Campert.
I must, however, make an exception in favour of S, brevi-
rostris of California, a very distinct species described by
M. Peters, which is distinguished by an excessive abridge-
ment of the two jaws, a peculiarity to which we find an ana-
logue in the young of S. sawrus ina certain stageof evolution. A
critical examination of the characters indicated for the other
species of Scomberesox also seems to show that they do not
rest upon a very solid basis ; but [ must leave it to the ichthyo-
logists of the shores of the Mediterranean to elucidate
from this point of view the case of S. Rondeletii and its
relationship to S. sawrus of the Atlantic. The anatomical
character upon which its separation as a distinct species is
founded has not, so far as I know, been verified since it was
established by M. Valenciennes ; hence it does not appear to
have any real foundation; and the Scomberesoces from the
Mediterranean that I have examined possessed a swim-bladder
like those of the ocean.

Another eminently pelagic form of this group is Hulepto-
rhamphus longirostris. ‘here is therefore a certain proba-
bility in favour of the opinion that all the different species
which have been established in this genus from individuals
fished in the two great oceans at points very distant from one
another are only representatives of a single pelagic and cos-
mopolitan species; but for the more satisfactory verification
of this supposition it would be necessary to have at command
more considerable materials than any museum at present
possesses.

16. Pomacantuus; HoLacanruus; CH2&Topon ;
THOLICHTHYS; EPHIPPUS.

On the shores of the Antilles there live two species of
Pomacanthus which are certainly distinguished at all ages by
positive and non-equivocal characters, but which in habit,

120. Dr. C. F. Liitken on the Changes of Form in Fishes

coloration, pattern, squamification, &c. undergo changes so
profound and so analogous that we cannot be surprised if
ichthyologists on the one hand have created a great number
of nominal species, and on the other have not succeeded in
separating from each other the very analogous young forms
belonging to the two species. The natural consequence of
this has been that the connexion between the young and older
forms being incapable of being overlooked by those who had
sufficient material at their command, authors have fallen into
the extreme opposite mistake, and united the two species,
including all the phases of their development, under a single
species including a whole series of varieties. The consider-
able materials contained in our two zoological museums now
combined (the Royal Museum and that of the University)
have enabled me to study the distinctive characters of P. paru,
BL, and P. aureus, Bl., at all ages, and to confirm, with some
modifications, the correctness of the views put forward on this
question by MM. Bleeker and Poey.

Holacanthus ciliaris is subject to analogous changes; and
H. formosus of Castelnau is evidently only a young form of
this species. On the contrary, the changes due to age are
comparatively insignificant in H. tricolor; the young indi-
vidual represented in pl. v. fig. 6 (of the Danish memoir) has
the same large ocellated spot which distinguishes many young
Cheetodonts. As to the secondary squamification, Holacanthus
ciliards stands in the same relation to //. tricolor as Pomacan-
thus aureus to P. paru. Neither of these genera, so far as we
know, passes through the so-called ‘‘ Tholichthys” phase; and
it is hardly probable that this case occurs in them.

On the other hand, this phase occurs in so great a number
of true Cheetodonts, that there can be no doubt it is common
to them all. Among the larvee of Cheetodonts or “ Tholich-
thyes”” that I have had before me I will mention two. One
of them (pl. v. fig. 8 of the Danish memoir) represents, in my
opinion, one of the stages of C. sedentarius, Poey (gracilis,
Gth.), or of some little-known nearly allied species: the other
(fig. 10) I have referred to Parachetodon ocellatus (C. & V.) ;
and it would then represent that species in a still younger stage
than those at present known, distinguished, among other
things, by this peculiarity, that the supraorbital margin termi-
nates in a spine directed obliquely sideways and backwards.
Like the Chetodonts, the species of the genera Ephippus
(Scatophagus), Harpochirus, and Chelmo, atter having com-
pletely passed through the “Zholichthys” phase, so far as
such a phase exists, undergo modifications, in the form of the
body, the coloration, &c., which merit attention, because they

during their Growth and Development. 121

are always sufficiently great to give rise to the establishment
of false species when one has not sufficient materials at com-
mand, phippus argus appears to me, however, to include
three species : —the Chinese form, with a small number (20-30) °
of large spots; the East-Indian type species, with many spots
of moderate size; and a form from the Sunda Islands with
numerous small spots, a pattern which, in young individuals,
changes into transverse bands (H. ornatus). Strictly speaking
we cannot characterize our youngest Hphippus as a “ Tholich-
thys ;”” but nevertheless it has so many points in common
with this phase of Chetodon that we may describe it as being in
a “holichthyoid” phase. It somewhat resembles a Chromis
or a Pomacentrum: the body is short, squat, and much com-
pressed, the profile of the head nearly vertical, the skin rough
and without scales; the fins are naked; the pattern consists
of dark transverse bands; the forehead is broad, convex, and
protected by two thick, rounded, triangular shields, which
meet in the median line, but which, posteriorly, embrace
between them the apex of a parietal boss; there is also on
each side a temporal boss accompanied by astout spine, which
is the inferior extremity of a triangular suprascapular tubercle;
the prolongation of the operculum (¢. e. of the preeoperculum
and interoperculum) is divided by a notch into two short
rounded parts, of which the superior is directed backwards,
and the inferior inwards and downwards.

17. AcantHurus, Naseus; Acronurus, KEris.

We now know that Kerzs and Acronurus are respectively
only the young forms of Naseus and <Acanthurus. With
regard to the development of the Kerddes and their transfor-
mation into Naseus I may refer to the illustrations which
accompany the magnificent work that Dr. Giinther is publish-
ing under the title of ‘ Fische der Siidsee. There are nume-
rous analogies between the young individuals of the two
genera—the form of the body, which is short, with strongly
arched contours, the streaking and partial metallic lustre of
the skin, the greater length of the anterior dorsal and anal
spines, the different position of the ventrals relatively to the
pectorals, &c. My own contributions to the history of the
metamorphoses of the genus Acanthurus consist in the indi-
cation of the so-called ‘Acronurus”’ form of the two West-
Indian species, Acanthurus chirurgus (phlebotomus) and A.
ceruleus, and of the still more curious form under which the
so-called ‘“‘Acronurus ” shows itself in its first phase. In fact
I regard as a young example of A. ceruleus, Schn., the very
marked form of Acronurus represented in pl. v. fig. 4 (of the

122 On Changes of Form in Fishes.

Danish memoir), which was captured in the western part of
the Atlantic in the neighbourhood of Brazil; it is 34-37
millims. long, discoid, nearly orbicular, colourless, with a
silvery band, &c. The most serious objection that could be
raised to this interpretation is the presence of a very different
young form (pl. v. fig. 3), not larger, and sometimes even
smaller, which, however, notwithstanding its small size, is
already in a comparatively more advanced stage, transitional
between Acronurus and Acanthurus, and which must with
absolute certainty be referred to A. cwruleus. Whether this
apparent contradiction arises from the circumstance that we
have to do here with different though nearly allied species, or
is due to the fact that the metamorphosis may take place a
little earlier or a little later, is a question which I shall leave
undecided for the present. Another, younger specimen of the
same form, perhaps of the same species, but captured N.N.E.
of the Bermudas, and characterized especially by the compa-
ratively enormous development of the anterior (strictly the
second) spine of the dorsal and anal, which gives these little
nearly rhomboidal fishes a very peculiar aspect, makes known
to us the “‘Acronurus”’ phase at a period still less advanced,
and which cannot be very far distant from the time of exclu-
sion from the ege.

As a contribution to the evolution of the Acanthuri I must
also cite the change which the dental apparatus undergoes in
A. strigosus (ctenodon). The adult fish presents this peculi-
arity—the teeth are pectinated only on one side; the young
individuals still in the ‘“Acronurus” phase have them pecti-
nated on both sides. As these little fishes pass from the stage
of Acronurus to that of Acanthurus the teeth with unilateral
pectination make their appearance and predominate over those
with double pectination.

18. FISTULARIA VILLOSA ; CENTRISCUS VELITARIS and
BREVISPINIS; CENTRISCOPS and ORTHICHTHYS.

Fistularia villosa of Klunzinger is only a young form of
Ff. serrata, Cuvier. The small close-set spines which clothe
its skin occur also in young examples of F’. tabacaria. It is
not easy to differentiate these two species (of the east and
west) in consequence of the modifications which their propor-
tions undergo during growth &c. ; but it is still more difficult
to distinguish the two forms of Awlostomus, the specific value
of which seems to me very doubtful.

Centriscus gracilis, Lowe, of which our Museum possesses
several young examples from the Atlantic, south and north of
the equator, must almost be regarded as a pelagic species.

Messrs. Berkeley and Broome on British Fungi. 123

The young individuals differ considerably from the adults by
the shorter form of the body, their shorter tubiform muzzle,
and by the well-marked development of the teeth, of the scutes
of the skin, and of the hooked spines of the scales. There is
no doubt that “CO. velitaris,” Pallas, is a nearly adult form,
and C. brevispinis, Kn., Steind., a very young form of C. gra-
cil’s, and that these two specific names must disappear, as well
as the genus Orthichthys of Mr. Gill. His genus Centriscops
(type C. humerosus, Rich.) is better founded as regards the
physiognomy, but is not based upon any important character or
any special peculiarity of organization.

Finally, in a postscript, I refer to the considerable changes
which occur in some groups of marine fishes which I have not
had the opportunity of examining in this memoir, but which
have been elucidated by other authors, or will be so, I hope,
hereafter by myself. I may cite, for example, the metamor-
phoses (1) of the Pleuronectide, which have especially been
elucidated by MM. Jap. Steenstrup and Alex. Agassiz; (2)
of certain Gadoids; the Couchie, notwithstanding what may
have been said, are the young of various species of Motella,
and Hypsiptera argentea the young form of a Phycid; (3) of
the Macrurt, Ophidia, and Trachyptert, which have been
elucidated by Mr. Emery; (4) of the Sunfish (Mola rotunda
and Ranzania truncata), of which I hope soon to be able to
give an explanation conjointly with M. Steenstrup; and,
lastly, (5) of Ansonia Cuvier’, Risso (Luvarus imperialis) , ot
which M. Giglioli has demonstrated that Diana semilunata,
Risso (Astrodermus coryphenoides), is the young form. This
last is certainly one of the most remarkable of the transforma-
tions presented by the family of the Scomberoids, otherwise
so rich in examples of this kind, to the knowledge of which I
have also made some contributions in this memotr.

X1.—Notices of British Fungi. By the Rev. M. J.
BERKELEY, F'.R.S., and C. E. Broome, Esq., F.L.S.

[Continued from ser. 5, vol. ili. p. 212.]
[Plate IIT. }
1833. Agaricus (Amanita) nitidus, Fr.
Mattishall, Rev. J. M. Duport.

Several specimens have been forwarded, some exactly agree-

124 Messrs. Berkeley and Broome on British Fung?.

ing with the definition of Fries in the thick indurated angular
warts, while others approach so near to A. mappa that it is
difficult to distinguish them.

1834. A. (Lepiota) granulosus, Batsch, var. rufescens.

A curious form was found near Bristol by Mr. Bucknall,
quite pure white at first, then partially turning red, and in
drying acquiring everywhere a rufous tint.

1835. A. (Lepiota) seminudus, Lasch.

Clifton, Mr. Bucknall. Coed Coch, 1880.

1836. A. (Lepiota) Bucknalli, B. & Br. Olidus, pileo e
campanulato convexo, albo, stipiteque deorsum pulvere lila-
cino conspersis, lamellis albis marginem yvix attingentibus.

Pileus nearly 1 inch across; stem 3 inches high, dilated at
the base. A doubt has been suggested whether this may not
be Quélet’s var. lilacinus of A. seminudus; but as he does
not mention the strong gas-tar smell, they cannot be the same.
The spores in this species are much longer, ‘00027 by -0001,
in A. seminudus *00015 by :00007 inch.

1837. A. (Armillaria) focalis, Fr.

On bare ground under old laurel trees. Coed Coch.

Pileus 4 inches across, pale fawn-coloured, darker above,
slightly virgate, extreme margin involute ; stem 5 inches high,
14 inch thick at base, variously lacerated ; mycelium white,
fibrillose, ring very broad (to which the specific name alludes),
superior ; odour farinaceous ; substance tender. Almost agree-
ing in dimension with the var. ‘* Goliath,” and certainly one
of the finest British species.

1838. A. (Tricholoma) stans, Fr.

This species was formerly called by Fries A. pessundatus,
and was found of large size at Coed Coch. The figure in
the ‘Icones’ marked “ pesswndatus”’ is now referred to A. stans.
The true A. pessundatus was sent by Mr. Renny from Lu-
cerne.

1839. A. (Tricholoma) guttatus, Scheff.

This curious species was found at Downton by Mr. Howse,
ie brought an excellent drawing to the meeting at Coed

och.

1840. A. (Tricholoma) tumidus, P.

Coed Coch. Exactly according with Krombholz’s figure.

*A. (Tricholoma) Livivius, Fr.

There is no doubt that Sowerby’s A. compressus is this
species.

1841. A. (Clitocybe) hirneolus, Fr.

Coed Coch, Oct. 1877.

1842. A. (Clitocybe) amarus, Fr.

Holm Lacy, Mr. Perceval, 1878.

Messrs. Berkeley and Broome on British Fungi. 125

1843. A. (Clitocybe) pithyophilus, Fr.

Coed Coch, 1880.

1844. A. (Clitocybe) eryptarum, Letellier. Dense cespi-
tosus, pileis subconicis depresso-flocculentis brunneis maculatis ;
stipitibus albis substriatis virgatis sursum attenuatis plus
minus compressis anguste fistulosis ; lamellis angustis arcuatis
subdecurrentibus albis.

Coed Coch. On sawdust. Habit that of A. tumulosus.
Pilei varying much in size, according to the denseness of the
clusters. Inodorous, insipid; stem mottled within.

1845. A. (Clitocybe) decastes, Ir.

Coed Coch. On sawdust. Agreeing closely with the
figure of Fries in the ‘ Icones ;’ but we are doubtful whether
what we find is not an advanced stage of A. cryptarum—a
matter which requires future observation.

1846. A. (Clitocybe) Trogii, Fr. (A. suaveolens, Trog).

Coed Coch. The colour approaching that of A. metachrous.

1847. A. (Clitocybe) sendlis, Fr.

Coed Coch, 1880.

1848. A. (Collybia) macdlentus, Fr.

Coed Coch, 1880.

1848 dis. A. (Collybia) stolonifer, Jungh.

Perth, Dr. Buchanan White.

1849. A. (Mycena) adonis, Bull.

Garthewin, Mr. Brownlow Wynne. The scarlet form.

1850. A. (Omphalia) hydrogrammus, Fr.

Coed Coch, 1880.

1851. A. (Omphalia) infumatus, B. & Br. Pileo obtuso
nec membranaceo e viridi infumato; stipite tenui, luteo ;
lamellis paucis latis decurrentibus distantibus luteis.

On bark. Amongst moss. Garthewin, Mr. Brownlow
Wynne. Pileus 2 lines across; stem 1 inch high, not a line
thick, dilated at the base, tomentose, especially below ; gills
about twelve, with smaller intermediate. Allied to A. wmbel-
liferus, but quite distinct from all its varieties.

1852. A. (Omphalia) offuciatus, Fr.

Coed Coch, 1880.

1853. A. (Omphalia) abhorrens, B. & Br. Odor stercora-
rius; pileo umbilicato brunneo; stipite gracili concolori ;
lamellis decurrentibus.

Coed Coch. On lawn with A. retostus.

*A, (Pleurotus) ulmarius, Bull.

A specimen was found in the Coed-Coch forage, agreeing
with A. tessulatus, Bull. The spots arising from the presence
of a species of Fusisporium; the same appearance, arising
from the same cause, occurred in Agaricus orcella.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. vii. 10

126 Messrs. Berkeley and Broome on British Fungi.

1854. A. (Pleurotus) lawrocerast, B. & Br. Ostrezeformis,
pileo sulcato brunneo, cute tenuissima; stipite obsoleto,
lamellis venoso-connexis 3 sporis ovatis.

On the naked trunk of a laurel. Coed Coch, Oct. 14,
1879.

Pileus rather more than an inch across; the cuticle is ex-
tremely thin, and gives way at the furrows so as to expose
the substance of the pileus. Spores ‘0008 millim. long.

1855. A. (Pleurotus) palmatus, Bull.

The spores of this species are pale ochre-coloured, :0004 inch
in diameter; it has the same right to be placed in Pleurotus
as the rosy-spored A. ewosmus.

1856. A. (Pluteus) splopus, B. & Br. Nanus, pileo brun-
neo ruguloso ; stipite flexuoso atro-punctato; sporis globosis
leevibus.

C. E. Broome. Allied to A. nanus.

1857. A. (Leptonia) ethiops, Fr.

Coed Coch, 1880.

1858. A. (Eccilia) atrides, Fr.

Hereford. This is not the plant figured by Quélet.

1859. A. acetabulosus, Sow.

This curious species has never been satisfactorily eluci-
dated. The occurrence of an allied form from Swan River
necessitates the proposition of a new section (Acetabularia)
analogous to Volvaria and Chitonia. The spores in the
original specimen of Sowerby, now (with the drawing) in the
British Museum, are clay-coloured.

1860. A. (Pholiota) erebcus, Fr.

This is clearly the same species with A. denigritus, the
spores of which are brown.

1861. A. (Pholiota) ombrophilus, Fr.

Coed Coch, in great abundance. It has also been sent
to Mr. Phillips.

1862. A. (Pholiota) subsquarrosus, Fr.

Found in Herefordshire by Mr. Howse, who brought speci-
mens and a drawing to Coed Coch.

1863. A. (Pholiota) tuberculosus, Fr.

On Sawdust, Coed Coch (and therefore not rooting into
wood as in the typical form), together with the ringless form
figured by Scheeffer.

1864. A. (Pholiota) curvipes, Fr.

On sawdust. Coed Coch, 1879-1880.

1865. A. (Inocybe) muticus, Fr.

Coed Coch. In great abundance, 1880.

1866. A. (Inocybe) destrictus, Fr.

Coed Coch, 1880.

Messrs. Berkeley and Broome on British Fungt. 127

1867. A. (Hebeloma) mesopheus, Fr.

Coed Coch, 1880.

1868. A. (Hebeloma) nudipes, Fr.

Coed Coch, 1880. M. Cornu also found specimens exactly
agreeing with Kalchbrenner’s figure.

1869. A. (Hebeloma) firmus, P.

Coed Coch, 1880.

1870. A. (Naucoria) hamadryas, Fr.

Specimens gathered by Mr. Plowright at Brandon appear
to belong to this species, but have the fishy odour of one or
two Nolaneas.

1871. A. (Naucoria) abstrusus, Fr.

On sawdust. Coed Coch, 1880.

1872. A. (Naucoria) tenax, Fr.

On a grassy walk. Coed Coch, 1879. Spores ovate,
even.

1873. A. (Naucoria) rubricatus, B. & Br. Czespitosus; ex
albo rubricatus ; pileis pusillis demum planiusculis, stipitibus
gracilibus.

On decayed twigs or petioles. Hereford, Miss Ruth Berke-
ley, 1878.

1874. A. (Psalliota) comptulus, Fr.

Coed Coch, 1880. In several places.

1875. A. (Stropharia) ¢nunctus, Fr.

A pale form occurred at Sibbertoft, which we should have
been inclined to refer rather to A. albocyaneus; but the cuticle
peeled off with the greatest ease, and after a heavy rain it
dripped with gelatinous matter. It resembled greatly Fries’s
figure of A. torpens, var.

1876. A. (Hypholoma) appendiculatus, Bull., var. lanatus.

A curious form occurred in a hollow apple-tree at Sibbertoft,
densely woolly when young, traces of the woolly coat remain-
ing at the apex when the pileus is fully expanded.

1877. Coprinus narcoticus, Batsch.

Shewsbury, W. Phillips. Smell highly disagreeable.

1878. Cortinarius (Myxacium) salor, Fr.

Coed Coch. In considerable abundance, but rather decayed.
The base of the stem was strangely swollen, showing the
original universal veil halfway up the swelling, which ends
abruptly. The head still covered with the bluish slime.

1879. C. (Myxacium) dlibatus, Fr.

Coed Coch. A single specimen only.

*C, (Dermocybe) myrtillinus, Fr.

Coed Coch. At first sight resembling A. nudus, but known
by the colour of the spores and the veil. tr

128 Messrs. Berkeley and Broome on British Fungt.

1880. C. (Telamonia) impennis, Fr.

Amongst dead leaves. Bomere, W. Phillips. Mr. Hough-
ton sent from Tibberton Firs a species exactly intermediate
between this and the common C. torvus.

1881. C. (Telamonia) flabellum, Fr.

Coed Coch, 1880. A single specimen.

1882. C. (Telamonia) paleaceus, Fr.

Coed Coch, Hereford, &c. Apparently a very variable
species.

1883. C. (Hydrocybe) jubarinus, Fr.

Coed Coch. Abundant early in 1879.

1884. C. (Hydrocybe) fasctatus, Fr.

Coed Coch. Umbo very acute.

1885. Hygrophorus sciophanus, Fr.

Coed Coch. Small specimens. Gigantic specimens of
this occur near Geneva, as found by Mr. Renny, with a
darker form, of both of which we have excellent drawings.

1886. H. subradiatus, Schun.

Salop, W. Phillips, Esq.

1887. Lactarius intermedius, Krombh.

Norfolk, the Rev. J. M. Du Port and Mr. Plowright.

The specimens agree with Krombholz’s plant, except that
when fresh and dried they are more or less zoned as in L.
insulsus.

1888. Russula Queletii, Fr.

Very common, confounded probably with RB. rubra.

1889. Marasmius urens, Fr.

A curious form with the pileus becoming very dark when fully
grown, and exceedingly acrid, occurred in a hothouse at Coed
Coch in profusion for,many weeks in September and October,
with the white form of A. cepestipes and A. meleagris.

* Lentinus fimbriatus, Curr.

Onastump. Edenbridge, J. Renny, Aug. 1879.

1890. Polyporus (Resupinati) wmbrinus, Fr.

Knowle Park, Burchell.

1891. P. (Resupinati) reticulatus, P.

Hereford, 1878.

1892. Dedalea aurea, Fr.

Hereford. Imbricated, the veins for the most part straight
and radiating.

* Hydnum rufescens, Fr.

Dolgelley, Miss Ruth Berkeley. Differing from H. repan-
dum in having the pileus distinctly tomentose, in this case
studded with little villous warts.

1893. H. acre, Quélet.

Forres, Rev. J. Keith, 1878.

Messrs. Berkeley and Broome on British Pungt. 129

* Thelephora intybacea, P.

Glamis, Rev. J. Stevenson.

1894. Cyphella Bloxami, B. & Phill. Alba floccoso-mem-
branacea, disco flavescente crenato-lobato; floccis levibus ;
sporophoris turbinatis.

On Ulex, Twycross, Rev. A. Bloxam.

Spores *0003--0004 inch. Spores terminating slightly
branched threads.

1895. Clavaria canaliculata, Quélet.

Coed Coch. In several places; the same species was sent
by Mr. Renny from Lucerne.

* Geaster limbatus, Fr.

Garthewin, Denbighshire, Mr. Brownlow Wynne.

1896. Myxosporium dracenicola, B. & Br. Aurantium,
sporis ovatis.

On leaves of Dracene, spores 00035 inch long, :0002
wide. On the same leaves, scattered in the form of minute
black specks, was a Diplodia with oblong uniseptate spores,
slightly constricted in the middle, colourless, and probably
immature, ‘O006—-0007 long. These are doubtless states of
more perfect fungi, but are mentioned here because they are
connected with a disease which seems fatal to Dracene.

1897. Gleosporium cytisi, B. & Br. Maculis albis quan-
doque rubro-cinctis, peritheciis minutis, sporis minutis ellipticis.

n Oytisus laburnum. Glamis, Rev. J. Stevenson.

1898. Protomyces melanodes, B. & Br.

On leaves and inflorescence of Phlow (Gard. Chron. Sept.
1879).

1899. Cryptosporium turgidum, B. & Br. Peritheciis glo-
bosis prominulis obtusis; sporis curvis utrinque acutis, obscure
triseptatis.

On ash, Rev. A. Bloxam. Spores -0008 long.

1900. Sporonema phacidioides, Desm.

On leaves of Medicago maculata, Wimbledon.

1901. Leptothyrium asterinum, B. & Br. Maculeforme
incrassatum margine rubro, sporis oblongis curvatis binucleatis,
001-0015 long.

Puate III. fig. 1. Spores and flocci, highly magnified.

On Aster tripolium. Fleetwood, Rev. A. Bloxam.

1902. Septoria viole, Rab.

On leaves of Viola canina, Fergusson.

1903. Gymnosportum lateritium, B. & Br. Effusum, late-
ritium, sporis obovatis breviter pedicellatis.

On wych elm. St. Catherines, C. E. Broome. Looks
like a stratum of finely powdered brickdust. Spores -0003
long.

130 Messrs. Berkeley and Broome on British Fungi.

1904. Selenosporium tubercularioides, Cd.

On raspberry. Orton Wood, Rev. A. Bloxam.

1905. Uredo plantaginis, B. & Br. Maculis pallidis, pus-
tulis minutis apice tantum ruptis; sporis ellipticis luteis.

On Plantago, Woodnewton. On P. lanceolata, Dolgelley,
Ralfs.
* 1906. Isaria floccosa, Fr.

On a caterpillar. Milton, Norths., Mr. J. Henderson.

1907. Fusarium equiseti, Desm.

Oswestry. Spores at first ‘0002 long, at length -0015.

Puarte III, fig. 2. a, flocci with young spores; b, spores, young and
old.

1908. T. salicinum, Cd.

On willow. Twycross, Rev. A. Bloxam.

1909. Monotospora elliptica, B. & Br. Punctiformis,
sporis ellipticis binucleatis quandoque uniseptatis.

On herbaceous stems.

Puate III. fig. 5. Flocci with spores, highly magnified.

1910. Helminthosporium molle, B. & C., Notices of new
Am. Fungi, p. 113.

On Ilex. Powerscourt.

1911. Chalara longipes, Strauss.

On old walnuts &c., Dr. Buchanan White. We cannot
identify this with any of the species figured by Saccardo.

1912. Aspergillus griseus, Lk.

Kings Cliff. On various decaying substances.

1913. Penicillium saponis, B.& Br. Nigrum, monilibus e
cellulis 2-3 oriundis ; sporis globosis.

On soap, Rev. J. Hort.

Puate ITI. fig. 8. Plant, highly magnified.

1914. P. abnorme, B. & Br. Candidum,. floccis tenuibus
in corpus turbiniforme desinentibus, sporis minutissimis.

On leaves of Trientalis europea.

Puate III. fig. 4. Flocci with their receptacles and spores, highly
magnified.

1915. Zygodesmus terrestris, B.& Br. Fuscus, sporis sub-
ellipticis vel citriformibus, primum levibus, demum asperulis.

On bare chalk. Crundall, Kent. We have also had the
same from Dr. Montagne, marked Haddous. Forming a thin
brown stratum.

1916. Peronospora dipsact, Tul.

On Dipsacus sylvestris.

1917. Ramularia veronice, B. & Br. Tota alba, floccis
brevibus, sporis oblongis angustis deorsum leviter attenuatis.

On Veronica agrestis, Sibbertoft. This and Peronospora

Messrs. Berkeley and Broome on British Fungi. 131

obliqua, Cooke, clearly belong to the genus Ramularia as
revived by Saccardo.
Puate III. fig. 7. Flocci and spores, highly magnified.

1918. Coccotrichum brevius, B. & Br. Cespitulis subglo-
bosis rufis, floccis parce ramosis articulatis, articulis brevibus,
sporis ellipticis granulatis.

Leigh Wood, on bark, C. E. Broome.

Of a rich red-brown; when placed in water it tinges it
with the same colour. When young the tufts are distinct ;
they afterwards become confluent. When dry they assume a
buff or ferruginous tint.

Puate IIL. fig. 8. a, plant, natural size; 66, flocci with heads of
spores, magnified ; ce, spores, highly magnified.

1919. Polyactis capitata, B. & Br. Tota alba, floccis ex
articulis tumidis basi sitis oriundis trifidis bifidisque, sporis
obovatis.

On Chetranthus, Sibbertoft. Spores :001 long.

1920. Stachylidium trabeum, B. & Br. Pallidum, floccis
parce ramosis, apicibus 3-4fidis, sporis globosis.

On an old beam. Kings Cliff, Nov. 15, 1864.

Puarte III. fig. 6. Flocci with spores, highly magnified.

1921. Helvella Klotschet, Cooke.

A single specimen in the Fernery, Coed Coch, Mrs. Lloyd
Wynne, which was submitted to Dr. Cooke for identification.

* Verpa digitatiformis, P.

With Morchella gigas, M., and the following. In some of the
specimens the head is minutely reticulated, as it has also
occurred to Mr. Broome.

1922. V. speciosa, Vittadini.

Coed Coch. Agreeing in size and colour with Vittadini’s
figure ; but the sporidia are not oblong, so that there is some
doubt about the species.

1923. Dermatea cinnamomea, DC.

On maple. Leigh Wood, Dec. 1878.

Sporidia -0015--00045 long, finely granulated.

1924. Cenangium Rubi, Dub.

Glamis, Rev. J. Stevenson.

1925. Hurotium lateritium, Lk.

Dolgelley, J. Ralfs.

1926. Spheria Stevensoni, B. & Br. Nigra, fragilis,
sparsa, subglobosa, glabra; sporidiis oblongis, 2—3-septatis.

On dead wood. Glamis, Rev. J. Stevenson. Sporidia
‘0002 long. Under the lens it splits with pressure into
several fragments.

132 Mr. A. G. Butler on Butterflies

XII.—On a Collection of Butterflies from Nikko, Central
Japan. By Artuur G. BUTLER, F.L.S., F.Z.8., &e.

Tue following is an account of a large series of Butterflies
collected by Mr. Charles Maries in Nippon (or Niphon) Island,
and certainly one of the richest of any collection which has
hitherto come to England, since it contains no less than 118
species.

Mr. Maries also collected in the island of Yesso, where he
obtained the Satyrus Schrenckii of Ménétriés and other rare
species, and again in the province of Kiukiang, China, where
he captured a good series of Papilio alebion, a new species
allied to the latter, a pair of Luchdorfia puziloi, and other
rarities, all of which are now in the collection of the British
Museum.

List of Species obtained in Nikko.

1. Danais tytia, Gray. 55. Vanessa xanthomelas, Denis.
2. Melanitis ismene, Cram. 36. io, Linn.
3. Satyrus bipunctatus, Motsch. 37. antiopa, Linn.
4, Neope Gaschkevitchii, Mén. 38. glauconia, Motsch.
5. niphonica, sp. n. 39, Argynnis sagana, Dol.
6. —— callipteris, Buti. 40. paphioides, sp. n.
7. Pararge deidamia, Eversm. 4]. anadyomene, Feld.
8. —— achinoides, Buti. 42, —— lysippe, Jans.
9. Lethe diana, Buti. 43 japonica, Mén.
10. Whitelyi, Buti. 44, —— pallescens, Butl.
i consanguis, sp. n. 45, locuples, sp. n.
12. sicelis, Hew. 46. nerippe, Feld,
Ils¥ Maackii, Brem. 47. fortuna, Jans,
14. Erebia niphonica, Jans. 48, —— niphe, Linn.
15. Mycalesis perdiccas, few. 49, Libythea lepita, Moore.
16. —— gotama, Moore. 50. Curetis acuta, Moore.
17. Ypthima evanescens, sp. n. 51. Lampides bellotia, Mén.
18. argus, Butl. 52. Lyceena Pryeri, Murr.
19, Apatura substituta, Bud. 53 ladonides, De Ul Orza,
20. Dichorragia nesimachus, Fabr. (kasmira ?, Moore).
21. Hestina japonica, Feld. 54. argia, Mén.
22 charonda, Hew. 50. argus, Denis.
23. Limenitis sibilla, Ochs. 56. euphemus, Herbst.
24. Neptis ludmilla, H.-Sch. 57. Scolitantides hamada, Drwce.
25 Pryeri, Butl. (arboreto- 58. Niphanda fusca, Brem.

rum, Oberth.).

. Chrysophanus timzeus, Cram.

26 alwina, Brem. 60. Thecla seepestriata, Hew.
27. intermedia, Pryer. 61. lutea, Hew.

28. Araschnia fallax, Jans. 62. japonica, Murr.

29. burejana, Brem. 63. fasciata, Jans.

30. Pyrameis cardui, Linn. 64, —— taxila, Brem.

31 indica, Herbst. 65. —— stygiana, Butl.

32. Vanessa angelica, Cram. _ 66. —— mera, Jans.

35 Pryeri, Jans. 67. —— attilia, Brem.

34 hamigera, Buti. 68. —— enthea, Jans.

from Nikko, Central Japan. 133

69, Thecla arata, Brem. 94. Papilio nicconicolens, sp. n.

70. Amblypodia asinarus, Feld. 95. Maackii, Brem,
(japonica, Murr.). 96. Dehaanii, Feld.

ral turbata, sp. n. 97. japonica, Butl.

72. Colias paleeno, Linn. 98, -—— macilentus, Jans. (scie-

73. oliographus, Motsch. vola, Oberth.).

74, —— Elwesii, sp. n. 99. tractipennis, sp. n.

765. simoda, De I’ Orza. 100, demetrius, Cram.

76. pallens, Buti. 101. spathatus, sp. n.

FU subaurata, sp. n. 102. Thunbergii, Sted.

78. Terias Jeegeri, Mén. 103. Hesperia japonica, Murr.

79. betheseba, Jans. 104. Pamphila pellucida, Murr.

80. —— Mariesii, Butl. 105, euttata, Brem.

81 anemone, Feld. : 106. rikuchina, Buti.

82 mandarina, De U’ Orza. 107. ochracea, Brem.

83. Gonepteryx aspasia, Mén. 108. sylvatica, Brem.

84. nipalensis, Gray. 109. herculea, sp. n.

85. Synchloe melete, Mén. 110. flava, Murr.

86. megamera, Butl. 111. Pyrgus sinicus, Buti.

87. cruciyora, Boisd. 112. maculatus, Brem.

88. Euchloe scolymus, Butt. 113. Daimio tethys, Murr.

89. Parnassius glacialis, Buti. 114. Felderi, sp. n.

90, Papilio teredon, Feld. 115. Astictopterus ornatus, Brem.

91] asiaticus, Mén. 116. Thanaos montana, Brem,

92 hippocrates, Feld, 117. rusticanus, But,

93. —— xuthus, Linn. 118. Antigonus vasava, Moore.

Descriptions of the new Species.
Neope niphonica, sp. n.

Allied to N. Gaschkevitchti, rather smaller and shorter in
wing; above considerably darker, with orange, instead of
white fringe, Primaries below yellower, all the markings
thicker and darker, the discoidal markings more uniform, the
third being less zigzag or S-shaped: secondaries with the
discal ocelli smaller and far more uniform in size ; the base,
abdominal area, subbasal spots, central belt, and external area
filled in with blackish olivaceous; the external area washed
with lilac; the pale band just in front of the ocelli spotted
with brown and tinted with lilacine below the angle. Ex-
panse of wings 2 inches 7-8 lines.

The natural position for this species is between N. Gasch-
kevitchii and N. agrestis. We have eight males and one
female, which I have compared with twelve N. Gaschkevitchit,
and find the differences constant.

Lethe consanguis, sp. na.

Allied to L. Whitelyz, similar on the upper surface, but
differing below in the outer edge of the broad central belt of
primaries being more transverse, obliquely excised on the
costa, very slightly zigzag on the second median interspace,

134 Mr. A. G. Butler on Butterflies

bordered externally with white as usual; three decreasing
ocelli in a lilac nebula towards apex, as in typical L. diana:
secondaries with the zones of the ocelli and the submarginal
band silvery (or steel) blue instead of lilac, the third ocellus
reduced to a mere point. Expanse of wings 2 inches 4 lines.

It is possible that this may prove to be a beautiful variety
of L. Whitelyi; but it differs conspicuously from our examples
of that species, particularly in the vivid coloration of the
ocellus-zones and submarginal band below.

Ypthi
pthima evanescens, sp. 0.

Above like Y. lisandra, below more like Y. zodia: wings
below white, densely striated with short brown lines and crossed,
before the middle by two subparallel yellowish stripes, the
outer one angulated on the secondaries ; external border also
regularly yellowish, but paler than the stripes: primaries with
a large subapical yellow-zoned black ocellus with two silver
pupils ; secondaries with six very minute yellow-zoned black
ocelli with single silver pupils; these ocelli are arranged as
in Y. stellera. Expanse of wings 1 inch 5 lines.

One example.
Argynnis paphioides, sp. n.

Near to A. paphia of Europe, but considerably larger, the
primaries more produced, the female always greenish above
(but not so dark as the variety A. valezina), under surface
with the silver bands and border of secondaries much more
metallic. LExpanse of wings, gj 3 inches, ? 3 inches 4 lines.

A long series of specimens.

Argynnis locuples, sp. n.

d@. Size of A. vorax, pattern and coloration of the upper
surface similar, excepting that the spots of the discal series
are more elongated, and the submarginal connected lunate
spots of the secondaries are rather broader. Primaries below
with silvery apical submarginal spots, as in A. jatnadeva, the
darker markings on the apical area cupreous brown with
olivaceous margins, the discoidal markings smaller, otherwise
as in A. vorax: secondaries below similar in pattern to A.
pallescens, but the ground-colour more golden in tint, and
the submarginal silver spots less sharply defined; the disk,
between the series of ferruginous ocelloid spots and the green-
bordered silver submarginal series, is clear buff-colour. Ex-
panse of wings 2 inches 10 lines.

?. Larger than the male, duller and greener above, with
all the black spots larger. Below with eight additional sub-

Srom Nikko, Central Japan. 135

apical silver spots on the primaries, five of them forming a
decreasing submarginal series, the ground-colour duller and
more uniform in tint: secondaries with all the silver spots con-
siderably larger, the third series well defined and continued to
the submedian vein, so that there are five complete series ; the
submarginal series formed of broad black-bordered arched
spots; the ground-colour rather deeper, the ocelloid ferruginous
spots frequently larger than in the male, but always darker.
Expanse of wings 2 inches 10 lines to 3 inches 3 lines.

A long series of specimens.

The natural position of this species will be between A.
voraz and A. pallescens ; it appears to represent A. chloradippe
in Japan.

Colias Elwesii, sp. nu.

3g. Above lemon-yellow, the basal three sevenths and costal
border of primaries densely irrorated with greenish grey ;
basal fourth of costal margin ferruginous; apical area (from
apical two fifths of costa to external third of third median
branch) and a broad external border, sinuated in second
median interspace and at external angle, black ; a subapical
series of irregular yellow spots, a large broad lunate spot on the
border in the first median interspace and a small spot below it
yellow ; a large black discocellular spot: secondaries irrorated
with grey; asubmarginal series of large subconfluent sulphur-
yellow spots, bounded internally towards the costa by a few
blackish scales; apical border and three large spots at the
extremities of the radial and second and third median branches
black ; fringe varied with rose-colour; a large bright orange
spot at the end of the cell: body normal. Under surface
lemon-yellow, the characters of the upper surface indistinctly
traceable through the texture of the wing, costal margins and
fringes rose-coloured : primaries with a diamond-shaped silver-
centred black discocellular spot; three squamose blackish
spots parallel to the outer margin on the median and interno-
median interspaces: secondaries with an ochreous-bordered
purple-edged silver spot at the end of the cell; a discal
arched series of purplish-red dots commencing with an angular
spot of the same colour upon the costa: body whitish, legs
rosy. Expanse of wings 2 inches 8 lines.

9. Above like the male, excepting that all the submarginal
lemon-yellow spots of the secondaries are bounded internally
by blackish scales, which, however, get less distinct towards
the abdominal area; below with rather brighter primaries,
the three discal spots larger, brown, and the series continued
by two smaller brown spots or dots on the radial interspaces

136 Mr. A. G. Butler on Butterflies

and two costal spots, the secondaries with a small additional
silver-centred spot above the one at the end of the cell; other-
wise exactly like the male. Expanse of wings 2 inches
54 lines.

Albino ¢. Above creamy white, the basal area and costal
border of primaries and the secondaries bluish grey ; the spots
on the border smaller than in the male, the discocellular spot
larger ; the marginal spots of secondaries diffused and sub-
confluent, the first being confluent with the apical border ; the
submarginal spots only slightly paler than the ground-colour,
smaller than in the ordinary form, the first two bounded inter-
nally by large black lunate spots, the others by a few blackish
scales; orange spot very pale. Primaries below white, with
greyish basal area, the discal series of spots completed, begin-
ning in the interno-median and median interspaces with three
decreasing triangular black spots, after which they are small
and red-brown; apical area greenish sulphur-yellow, brighter
at outer margin ; costal margin and fringe rose-red : secondaries
green, washed with yellow towards the base, fringe rose-red ;
markings as in the ordinary female. Expanse of wings
2 inches 8 lines.

This is a tolerably common species, allied to C. simoda, but
differing constantly from that form in the greater length of
the costal margin of the primaries, the larger pale submarginal
spots, with less-defined internal limiting spots on the secon-
daries, the maculated character of the border on these wings,
the noticeably paler colour of the under surface, the imcreased
number of the discal spots on the under surface of the females,
and the greater size of the albino females.

I have come to the conclusion that this species is constant
(so far as Colias ever is so) to the characters above laid down,
after examining nearly 200 specimens of the Hyale group
from various parts of Japan. Mr. Elwes says (Trans. Ent.
Soc. 1880, p. 144) “it would be most unlikely that in such a
genus* four species of one group should exist in Japan alone,
or, rather, in that very small part of Japan from which collec-
tions have come.” Can Mr. Elwes be speaking seriously
when he makes this statement? Is it a fact that the collec-
tions received were obtained from so limited an area that it is
‘unlikely’? that distinct allied species should come to hand ?
Are Hakodaté, Yokohama, Nikko, and Nagasaki localities so
close together and so identical in their conditions of life that
it is absurd to look for allied but distinct species in collections
from these localities ?

* Mr. Elwes does not explain this expression; and I fail to comprehend
its meaning.

from Nikko, Central Japan. 137

It appears to me that there must be sufficient variation of
conditions in 260,000 square miles of insulated land, divided
into three larger islands by intervening straits, and exhibiting
considerable degrees of elevation, to render the existence of
different species in the same group less a probability than a
certainty.

That it does ‘require special training to appreciate” spe-
cific differences is a truism which no entomologist who has
specially studied any branch of his science will be inclined to
dispute; for that very reason it is unwise for any natura-
list, when taking up the study of a branch of science com-
paratively new to him, to plunge at once into the most difficult
genus in that branch, and criticise the work of all previous
labourers in the same field.

Whilst referring to the paper by Mr. Elwes, it will save
further trouble to call attention now to some observations of
his on p. 141. Mr. Elwes says that I have ‘ described no
less than four supposed species and varieties nearly allied to
this,” meaning C. erate; and, as though to confirm this sur-
prising statement, he inserts in brackets ‘see P. Z. 8. 1880.”
Although not aware that I had described any species allied to
C. erate from Candahar, either supposed species or variety,
I took the trouble to look through the ‘ Proceedings of the
Zoological Society of London’ for 1880; but I could not find
any descriptions of Colias by myself. It is a pity that Mr.
Elves did not give a reference to the page, as it might have
tended to explain his meaning. Mr. Elwes then proceeds to
say that he entdrely fails to follow my distinctions, and goes
on to prove it by declaring that what I call C. erate is like the
specimens of that species from South Russia and the Punjaub,
that what I call C. helictha differs from C. hyale just as Le-
derer says it does *, that what I call C. sareptensis is identical
with the form of Hyale found all over Asia, from the Hima-
layas to Japan (specifying, however, three forms which have
hitherto come only from Japan), and, lastly, that what I call
C. pallida is just what Staudinger says it is, a white variety
of C. erate 2.

I need say no more respecting this paper on Colias; it
possibly may not seriously affect the study of the genus, since
most Lepidopterists will probably hold the same opinions now
as before its publication; the only cause for regret is that
Mr. Elwes did not pause before publishing that in haste of
which it is possible he may, after more profound study, repent
at leisure.

* Mi. Elwes repeats the obviously erroneous suggestion that C. helictha
is a hybrid between two species not occurring in the same country.

138 Mr. A. G. Butler on Butterflies

Colias subaurata, sp. n.

3. Above very similar in coloration and pattern to the
preceding species, but with distinct depressed marginal trian-
gular yellow spots, and the wings less irrorated with grey ;
the secondaries also without paler submarginal spots, but
with a zigzag black line on and between the veins towards
the apex ; no distinct apical border, but six large marginal
black spots. Below the wings are bright golden orange or very
bright ochreous yellow, with the inner border of the primaries
lemon-yellow ; three large black discal spots (as in the prece-
ding species), two blackish dots on the radial interspaces, and
two brownish dots on the costa; a black discocellular spot,
with a yellow pupil; costal margin and fringe rose-red:
secondaries with costal margin and fringe as in the primaries ;
a discal arched series of indistinct plum-coloured dots, be-
ginning on the costa with a spot of this colour; a silver spot
at the end of the cell with plum-coloured margin and orange
zone, and above it a similar but very minute and fusiform
spot; venter somewhat whitish, legs rosy. Hxpanse of wings
2 inches 2 lines.

9. Larger than the male; the basal area more densely
irrorated with greenish grey: secondaries densely irrorated
with greenish grey, the orange spot very large and dark;
marginal black spots diffused inwardly, the first two con-
fluent ; a submarginal series of irregular yellow spots bounded
internally by an arched series of heavy black lunules. Under
surface exactly as in the male. Expanse of wings 2 inches
8 lines.

Albino 2. Above with the ground-colour creamy white,
the primaries bluish grey towards the base; marginal spots
obsolete, otherwise as in the ordinary form: secondaries
densely irrorated with grey, hardly greenish, the marginal
black spots united into a border, the submarginal spots fairly
regular, internally bounded by blackish spots, but only very
distinctly towards the costa; orange spot rather paler than in
the ordinary female. Primaries below with only the apical
area and a suffusion over the discoidal area of the same
golden ochreous colour as in the male; the rest of the pri-
maries creamy white, but with the usual markings ; costal
margin and fringe red: secondaries as in the ordinary form,
excepting that the discal dots are larger. Expanse of wings
2 inches 5 lines.

This is a fairly common species, which may be readily dis-
tinguished by the deep coloration of the under surface.

from Nikko, Central Japan. 139

Papilio nicconicolens, sp. n.

Very near to P. helenus, but constantly differing in the
creamy-yellow patch of secondaries being carried below the
radial vein in the form of a large squamose spot, and in the
submarginal lunules on the under surface of the same wings
being far more arcuate. Expanse of wings 5 inches 3 lines.

Papilio tractipennis, sp. n.

¢. Intermediate in size between P. macilentus and P. de-
metrius; similar to the latter, from which it differs in its
greater size, its more elongated wings, longer and broader
tails, also in the greyer tints of the primaries, upon which the
black outer border appears more prominently ; below the pri-
maries are distinctly paler and greyer, the markings upon the
secondaries are brighter in colour, redder, and there is an
abbreviated additional red fasciole, bounded below by an
arcuate streak of blue scales, across the first median interspace.
Expanse of wings 5 inches 2 lines.

?. This is the P. demetrius of Gray (nec Cramer) ; but
when fresh this sex is nearly as dark as the male, although
browner in tint, and with two ocellated and several submar-
ginal lunate red markings on the upper surface of the secon-
daries: as usual, it is broader in wing than the male, and the
tails are shorter. LExpanse of wings 5 inches.

A tolerably common form, which may possibly prove to
be a seasonal variety of P. macilentus; but until this species
can be reared, it must necessarily be separated as a distinct
species. The examples of P. macilentus taken by Mr. Maries
are much worn.

Papilio spathatus, sp. n.

Possibly a seasonal form of P. ale‘nous; the latter species,
however, was not obtained in Niphon by Mr. Maries; he
obtained shattered males and a single fine female in Yesso;
it is therefore more probable that this is a local representative
of P. alcinous. It differs in its considerably greater size,
much longer and more spatulate tails, in the heavier black
borders and veins on the female, in the much obscured red
submarginal lunules on the upper surface of the male secon-
daries, and the broader and dingier submarginal curved spots
on the female secondaries. Expanse of wings, ¢ 4 inches
1 line, ¢ 4 inches 10 lines.

This is a commoner species than P. aleinous, which (owing
to the fact that Klug erroneously figures its female as that sex
of his species) it generally represents in collections. P. alei-
nous @ agrees with the male in size and form.

140 Mr. A. G. Butler on Butterflies from Japan.

In Yesso Mr. Maries caught the female of a species which
in 1862 we received the male of from Hakodaté. It is allied
to P. mencius of Felder (males of which Mr. Maries obtained
at Kiukiang, China); but the wings are darker, the tails on
the secondaries are more slender, the submarginal lunules are
absent from the upper surface of the male secondaries, and are
less arcuate and smaller upon the upper surface of the female.
To this species I give the name of P. hematostictus.

Pamphila herculea, sp. n.

Allied to P. sylvanus, considerably larger ; the male of a
clearer, more ochraceous colour above, and on the under surface
of a more uniformly tawny colour; the secondaries not yel-
lowish, asin P. sylvanus; pattern similar. Expanse of wings
1 inch 7 lines.

¢. Above bronzy brown or chocolate-brown, with cupreous
reflections : primaries with a yellow dot just above the basal
third of submedian vein; a cuneiform spot filling the base of
the first median interspace; a bifid spot at the end of the cell;
a series of five quadrate spots, excised in front, crossing the
disk obliquely from submedian to upper radial vein, and a
trifid spot across the subcostal branches, halfway between the
cell and the apex, buff: secondaries with an angular discal
series of five ochreous spots. Wings below with the markings
paler than above, the spots creamy whitish or pale bone-yel-
low ; disk of primaries round the borders of the oblique series
of spots olive-brown; external angle and outer border whity
brown: secondaries bronzy olive-brown, the discal series con-
sisting of six spots; anal angle broadly ochreous; outer border
tinted with ochraceous ; palpi white; body below bluish grey.
Expanse of wings 1 inch 73 lines.

One pair only was obtained.

Daimio Felderi, sp. n.

Dark brown, with white markings: primaries exactly as in
D. tethys: secondaries crossed by a white belt, which passes
through a nearly complete circular series of black spots; anal
three fourths of fringe and four marginal spots white: poste-
rior margins of abdominal segments white. Base of secondaries
and body below bluish grey. Expanse of wings 1 inch 6 lines.

A tolerably common species; its position is between D.
tethys and D. sinica of Felder; it appears to represent the
latter in Japan, and differs from it in the smaller spots on the
primaries, and in the black spots being visible upon the white
belt of the secondaries.

Prof. W. J. Sollas on Sponge-spicules in Chert. 141

XIII.—Note on the Occurrence of Sponge-spicules in Chert
from the Carboniferous Limestone of Ireland. By Prof.
W. J. Souias, M.A., F.R.S.E., &e.

On studying the beautiful microphotographs of sections of
chert figured in Prof. Hull’s valuable paper ‘‘ on the Nature
and Origin of the Beds of Chert in the Upper Carboniferous
Limestone of Ireland” *, it appeared to me that in some of
these photographs traces of sponge-spicules could be seen. On
communicating my opinion to Prof. Hull, he most obligingly
sent me five of his mounted sections of chert for microscopical
examination. For this act of kindness I now offer him my
best thanks.

The results of my examination of the slices were, in the
first place, to completely confirm his clear descriptions of the
appearances presented by them, and, next, to establish the

Fig. 1.

O c a

Sections of sponge-spicules in Carboniferous chert: a, transverse ; 5, longi-
tudinal ; c, transverse, showing axial canal; d, showing radiately
crystalline structure. (Magnified 50 diameters.)

truth of my supposed detection of sponge-spicules. The slides
are numbered C 22 (fig. 4 in Prof. Hull’s memoir), C 23, C 24,
C 25 (fig. 1 in the memoir), and C. 41. In the first four a
number of clear spaces with detinite circular outlines (fig. 1, a)
0-003 inch in diam. were clearly visible, and also a number of
long, straight, parallel-sided bands (b) of the same breadth as
the diameter of the circles. The bands are longitudinal, the
circles transverse, sections of sponge-spicules, and are exactly
similar to those with which | am from long acquaintance
familiar in the flint and chert of other localities.

The transverse sections frequently show a central dark spot
(c), the remains of the axial canal; and in both directions
of section a radiate crystalline structure (d), such as I have
often observed and recently described in loose fossil spicules,
is apparent with polarized light.

* Sci. Trans. Roy. Dublin Soe. vol. i. n. s., p. 71, pl. iii.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. vii. 11

142 = Prof. W. J. Sollas on Sponge-spicules in Chert.
Of slices C 22 and C 23 it may be safely said that the

chief determinable constituents are sponge-spicules ; they make
up the larger part of the chert.

Rhombohedra of dolomite, precisely similar to those de-
scribed by Prof. Renard in his paper on the Carboniferous
Phthanites*, are also to be seen in most of the sections. The
presence of these crystals can readily be explained in accord-
ance with the theory of the formation of flint lately advocated
by me. It is well known that most limestones contain a trace
of magnesian carbonate, probably in the form of dolomite.
This is very much less soluble in acids than calcite, so that it
is left as a residue on dissolving limestone in dilute hydro-
chlorie acid. ‘The silicic acid which dissolved and replaced
the calcic carbonate would therefore act with greater difficulty
on the dolomite, and, indeed, would in all probability have no
action upon it at all; and so, while the mass of the limestone
underwent silicification, the rhombohedra of dolomite would
remain unaltered in the midst of the chert, just as we now
find them.

That the formation of the chert continued, if it did not com-
mence, some time subsequent to the formation of the limestone
is proved by a curious fact observable in the section of coral
shown in the centre of the section represented in fig. 1 of
Prof. Hull’s plate. Some of the vesicular spaces at the edge
of this are completely lined by crystals of calcite (dog-tooth
spar) which has not undergone silicification, while the interior
of the spaces is occupied by crystalline grains of quartz
(fig. 2).

Fig. 2.

ee TMI TTT en ee
x Sees SRA) ANA Si
So. e : \ | ZS ~

—
\

Part of section of coral from chert (fig. 1, pl. iii. Hull’s paper): Qe, ex-
ternal wall, consisting of radiating crystalline fibres of quartz; S,
septum; C, calcite lining marginal vesicle; Q2, quartz within the
vesicle. (x 60 diam.)

It is clear that the coral had been dead and exposed to the
* Bull. de l’Acad. roy. Belg. 2° sér. t. xlvi.

On Dredging off the South Coast of New England. 143

action of surrounding waters long enough for a deposit of
calcite to be formed within the marginal vesicles before the
infiltration of silica occurred.

Of the section of chert labelled C 41 I could make but

little ; it appeared to contain clastic granules of quartz.

XIV.—Recent Dredging by the United-States Fish Com-
mission off the South Coast of New England, with some
Notice of the Crustacea obtained. . By 8. 1. SMITH.

Tue United-States Commission of Fish and Fisheries, under
the direction of the Commissioner, Professor Baird, with
headquarters at Newport, Rhode Island, has had increased
facilities for scientific work the past season, and has added
even more than in past years to the knowledge of our marine
fauna. The new steamer ‘ Fish Hawk,’ of 480 tons, built for
the work of the Commission, and under the command of Lieut.
Tanner, U.S.N., is specially fitted for scientific work, and was
employed a large part of the season in trawling, dredging, and
in making temperature observations. The investigation of
the invertebrate fauna, as in previous years, was carried on by
a party under the general direction of Professor Verrill, of
Yale College. Large collections were made in the shallower
waters along the coast and also on the shores; but the most
interesting results were obtained from a series of trawlings
and dredgings made in September and the first week in
October, on three trips 75 to 100 miles off the coast, in the
region known as the Block Island Soundings. A general
account of these trips is given by Prof. Verrill in the ‘ Ame-
rican Journal of Science’ for November (vol. xx. pp. 390—
403), and need not be repeated here, further than that the
region examined is in north lat. 39° 46’ to 40° 06’, west long.
70° 22! to 71° 10’, that on each trip the dredging and trawling
occupied less than a day’s time, and that twenty-two hauls of
the dredge and trawl were made from depths varying from
64 to about 500 fathoms. Wire rope was very advantageously
employed in all the dredging and trawling. At one station,
86 fathoms, the bottom was covered with shells and sponges ;
but at all the other stations it was composed of fine sand and
mud.

The collections have not been fully examined ; and this is
specially true of the collections from the deepest water which
were made on the last trip. But the wonderful richness of
the fauna in mollusks and echinoderms has been shown by
Professor Verrill in the paper already referred to; and it is

144 Mr. S. I. Smith on Dredging off

certainly not less remarkable as regards the crustaceans. The
richness of the fauna in both species and individuals would
never have been suspected by one accustomed only to the
meagre fauna of the shallow waters of the south coast of New
England.

In regard to the mollusks and echinoderms, it is here
sufficient to quote afew sentences from Professor Verrill’s
article. He says:—“ Of Mollusca about 175 species were
taken. Of these, 120 species were not before known to occur
on the southern coast of New England; about 65 are addi-
tions to the American fauna ; of these about 30 are apparently
undescribed. ‘The known species now added to our fauna have
mostly been described by G. O. Sars, Jeffreys, and others
from the deep waters of the European coast and the Mediter-
ranean.” ‘The Starfishes and Ophiurans were exceedingly
abundant and beautiful at all the stations; and many species
not known previously on our coast were taken, several of
which appear to be undescribed, while others were known
only from Northern Europe or from the deep waters off
Florida. Many of the species have only recently been
obtained from the northern fishing-banks off Nova Scotia.
One new species of Archaster (A. americanus) was particu-
larly abundant, several thousands of specimens having been
taken; but the two largest and most beautiful species of this
genus were Archaster Agassizi (new) and A. Klore. Of
Odontaster hispidus over 100 were taken.” ‘There are
thirty-two species in the partial list of echinoderms given,
four of which are described as new.

A preliminary notice of the Crustacea obtained from this
interesting region is now in type for the ‘ Proceedings of the
National Museum’ for 1880 (pp. 413-452) ; and I here give
only a very brief statement of the most interesting results
there brought out, with full descriptions of the new forms.

Among the Brachyura were Hyas coarctata, Cancer borea-
lis, and Geryon quinquedens, which were known from further
north; but with these there were Collodes depressus, Hupro-
gnatha rastellifera, Bathynectes longispina, and Acanthocarpus
Alexandri, species previously known only from the Straits
of Florida. There were also new species of Hthusa and
Lambrus, genera quite new to our waters. The Huprognatha
occurred in the greatest abundance at nearly every station,
a thousands of specimens often being taken at a single
naul.

Among the Anomura occurred Homola barbata and Latreit-
lia elegans (which represent families heretofore unknown on
this side of the Atlantic), a beautiful species of Lyretdus, De

the South Coast of New England. 145

Haan (a genus before known only from the North Pacific), and
a species of Munida. These were associated with Eupagurus
bernhardus, EH. Kréyert, and the remarkable Parapagurus
pilosimanus, which were before known from the north. But
the most interesting Anomura were two species of a new
genus (Hemipagurus), allied to the little-known genus Spiro-
pagurus, Stimpson, but differing conspicuously in the form
and position of the single sexual appendage of the last thoracic
somite of the male, which arises from the coxa of the right
side, while in Spdropagurus it arises from the left side. Both
the species of Hemipagurus inhabit cases formed by a colony
of Epizoanthus or by an individual of a species of Adamsia.

The unsymmetrical development of the external sexual
organs of the males of this genus is accompanied by a most
remarkable difference in the corresponding internal organs.
The abdominal viscera are not sufficiently well preserved in
the ordinary alcoholic specimens for a full anatomical and
histological investigation; but the following observations,
though incomplete, are so novel and interesting that I insert
them here. The right testis and vas deferens are much larger
than the left. The lower part of the right vas deferens, in
all the adults examined, is much more dilated than the left,
and is filled (as is also the external part of the duct) with very
large spermatophores of peculiar form. ‘The left vas deferens
is slender, much as in Hupagurus bernhardus, terminates in a
small opening in the left coxa of the last thoracic somite, as
in ordinary Paguroids, and contains spermatophores some-
what similar in form and size to those of Hupagurus bern-
hardus. In alcoholic specimens of the larger and more
abundant of the two species, the spermatophores from the
left vas deferens are approximately 0°16 millim. long and
0°035 millim. broad, with a slender neck about a third of the
entire length, and a very thin and delicate lamella for a base.
The spermatophores from the right vas deferens are over
2 millims. in total length ; the body itself is oval, approxi-
mately 0°40 millim. long and a third as broad ; at one end it
terminates in a very long and slender process, two or three
times as long as the body ; at the other end there is a similar
but slightly stouter process, a little longer than the body, and
expanding at its tip into a broad and very delicate lamella,
approximately 0°35 millim. long by 0°20 millim. broad. The
contents of the two kinds of ‘spermatophores are, of course,
not in a condition to show the structure of the spermatozoa ; :
but they present a similar appearance in each case, and are
apparently of about the same size.

The most interesting of the Macrura is, perhaps, a new

146 On Dredging off the South Coast of New England.

species of Nephropsis, very closely allied to N. Stewarte,
Wood-Mason, heretofore the only known species, which was
described from a single specimen dredged in the Bay of Bengal
and wanting the great claws. These claws, in our speci-
mens, are clothed with very long soft hair, and are very
different from the great claws of Nephrops, though the genus
is very closely allied to Nephrops, as pointed out by Wood-
Mason. The number and arrangement of the branchie, not
noticed in the description of N. Stewarti, are the same as in
Nephrops. There were also new species of Arctus, Awius,
Pontophilus, Bythocaris, Pandalus, and Peneus, and with these
the following arctic species—Pontophilus norvegicus, Pan-
dalus propinquus, Hippolyte securifrons, and Sergestes arcticus,
the last species being common in 300 to 500 fathoms.

Among the Schizopoda were three arctic species, Thysa-
nopoda norvegica, Pseudomma roseum, and Boreomysis arctica,
the last heretofore known to America only from Greenland.

The only Stomatopod was a new species of Lysiosquilla,
which appears to be closely allied to L. spinosa, from the
Indian Ocean and New Zealand, or at least much more closely
allied to this than to any other species described in Mr. Miers’s
recent review of the Squillide.

Few species of Amphipoda were found; but the arctic
species, Stegocephalus ampulla, Haploops setosa, and Epimeria
loricata, G. O. Sars, occurred, the last in abundance.

Among the Isopoda there were four species previously
known only from further north on our coast, and Mounopsis
typica, a deep-water species known from our northern coast,
Greenland, and Northern Europe. There were besides
several species not determined.

Fifty species of Malacostraca are enumerated in the prelimi-
nary notice above referred to; and of these fourteen are de-
scribed as new and three others are indicated as probably new,
forty-three are first recorded as belonging to the New-England
fauna south of Cape Cod, twenty-eight are new to the whole
fauna from Cape Hatteras to Northern Labrador, and twenty-
one are new to America including Greenland. Of the forty-
three species new to the Southern New-England fauna, fifteen
are now known also from the New-England fauna north of
Cape Cod; and of the remaining twenty-eight, four were
already known from the Straits of Florida, three from Green-
land and Northern Europe, and two from the Mediterranean.
It should be added that two of the species, the Lyrecdus and the
Nephropsis, belong to genera heretofore known only from the
Pacific region, and each represented there by a single species,
while a third species, the Lystosquilla, has its nearest known
ally in a species from the same region.

New Haven, Conn., U. S.A,

Dec. 29, 1880.

On Marine Polyzoa. 147

XV.— Contributions towards a General History of the Marine
Polyzoa. By the Rev. Tuomas Hincxs, B.A., F.R.S.

(Continued from vol. vi. p. 384.]
[Plates VIII., IX., & X.]

IV. FOREIGN MEMBRANIPORINA (second series).
a. With a membranous front wall.

Membranipora coronata, n. sp.

(Pl. X. fig. 1.)

Zoecia lozenge-shaped, contiguous; area occupying the
whole front, with a membranous covering ; margin not much
elevated, except round the oral extremity, where it rises into
a hood-like screen, projecting slightly over the area and hol-
lowed out in front into an arch ; inner surface of the cell-wall
very strongly crenated and granulated; immediately above
each zocecium an immersed avicularium with acute man-
dible, placed transversely. Owcium (?). Zoartum white and
shining.

Loc. Singapore or the Philippines, on coral (Miss Jelly).

The striking features of this pretty species are the crowning
avicularium, the very marked crenation of the border of the
cells, and the glossy whiteness of the whole zoarium.

Membranipora terrifica, n. sp.

(Pl. VIII. fig. 5.)

Zoecia large, somewhat pyriform, arched above, widest in
the middle, narrowing off below the area; area broad below,
slightly contracted towards the top, with amembranouscovering,
occupying about two thirds of the front of the cell ; margin not
much elevated, thin, smooth ; the wall of the cell below the area
dense, uneven, punctured; placed transversely along the
whole of the lower margin of the aperture, and projecting
prominently on the subjacent space, a gigantic avecularium,
with long, narrow, curved beak, the basal portion much ex-
panded, with an angular projection on each side in the line of
the hinge ; mandible (probably) slender and setiform.

Loc. Straits of Magellan, on LEschara flabellaris, Busk
(Miss Gatty).

Membranipora rubida, n. sp.
(Pl. VIII. fig. 6.)

Zoecia somewhat pyritorm, arched and expanded above,

below the area narrowing rather abruptly downwards; area

148 Rey. T. Hincks’s Contributions towards

suborbicular, the covering wholly membranous, occupying
about three fourths of the front of the cell; margin much raised
round the sides and upper portion of the cell, thin, smooth,
two spines on each side of the orifice, the foremost pair very
tall and stout; zocecium prolonged slightly below the area,
and on this portion is situated an aviculartum borne on the
summit of a stout and rather tall peduncle, from the lower
part of which two spines often project, mandible acute, di-
rected downwards; sometimes replaced by a linguiform
aviculariuin, slightly pedunculate, placed transversely. Zo-
arium of a reddish-brown colour.

Loc. Australia, on stone (Miss Gatty).

The prolongation of the cell below the area is often small
and inconspicuous ; but its position is indicated by the
stalked avicularium which is always placed upon it. The
peduncle of this appendage, which is of remarkable length,
seems to consist of two parts—a short tubular base, which
frequently bears two spinous processes, and is permanently
attached to the cell, and a much longer cylindrical stem, on
which the avicularium is supported; the latter is easily
detached, and seems to be jointed in some way or other to the
fixed basal portion. The structure is interesting, as showing
a modification in the direction of the higher articulate forms.

Membranipora bicolor, n. sp.

(PI. LX. fig. 1.)

Zoacia oblong, narrow, alternate, very regularly disposed
in lines, the whole front filled in by a membranous wall, at
the very top of which is the opercular valve; margin thin
and smooth; the zocecia in each line separated by elongate
spaces, usually rather less than the cell in length, which are
covered in by a white calcareous roofing, terminating at one
extremity in an arch, with a somewhat thickened rim, which
incloses the orifice of the cell below, and at the other more or
less hollowed out, the depression extending to the base of the
cell above. No spines or avicularia.

Loc. West Australia, spreading over weed (Miss Jelly).

The elongate calcareous boxes interposed between the cells
in this species might naturally be taken for ocecia ; but they
are closed in at the end by a calcareous wall, in which there
seems to be no opening beyond some minute perforations.
They have probably, therefore, some other significance ; but
what it may be I am unable at present to determine. The
zocecia are really of a slender, elongate-oval shape, though
they sometimes appear quadrangular. The membranous
front wall extends to the top of the hollow or depression in

a General History of the Marine Polyzoa. 149

the neighbouring interspace, and lies quite on a level with the
rim of the margins.

Membranipora bellula, n. sp.
(Pl. VIII. figs. 4, 4a, 40.)

Zoecia pyriform, rounded and expanded above, and narrow-
ing off to the base; area occupying about half the length of
the cell, wholly filled in with membrane, subelliptical, broad
below and narrowing very slightly upwards to the top, where
the semicircular orifice is placed, flanked on each side by two
tall erect spines ; on the lower margin a single, much-branched
spine, which spreads over the aperture, forming an antler-like
operculum ; sometimes a very long corneous spine, springing
from a raised socket, a little below the inferior margin ;
portion of the cell below the area, which is sometimes a good
deal elongated, smooth and shining, and covered with nume-
rous delicate spinules. Owcia none.

Var. a (bicornis). With two opercular spines on the lower
margin, of small size and slightly branched, placed one on
each side of a short, sharply pointed central mucro rising from
a prominent boss; a single spine only on each side of the
orifice ; no spinules or horny appendages; surface smooth,
white, and very polished.

Var. 8 (multicornis). Opercular spines 3-5, placed closely
together, their numerous dichotomous branchlets combining
to form a beautiful protective shield, which extends to the
base of the oral valve.

Loc. Australia, normal and var. multicornis; Ceylon, var.
bicornis; Madagascar (Miss Jelly); St. Vincent, Cape-Verd
Islands (Miss Gatty). M. bellula always occurs creeping
over weed, and frequently runs out into narrow strap-like
segments.

This is an exquisite species, which seems to be far from
uncommon in various parts of the world; and it is difficult to
understand how it is that it has remained so long undescribed.
I cannot recollect, however, to have met with any published
account of it, although it has been known to collectors under
a manuscript name. It is a species which varies much in
appearance, the changes being chiefly due to the presence or
absence of the spinous appendages, and especially to the modi-
fication of the opercular spine. ‘The principal varieties have
already been noticed. In some cases the tall corneous spine
rising from a distinct socket, which is so characteristic of JZ.
ptlosa (from which the present form is probably derived),
makes its appearance; in others the zoarium bristles with
immense numbers of slender spinules ; in others, again, it has

150 Rev. T. Hincks’s Contributions towards

neither seta nor spinule. In a curious form from Madagascar
the edges of the narrow segments into which the zoarium
divides are fringed by very tall and slender sete, frequently
placed in pairs, whilst there is also a profusion of the suboral
appendages. ‘I'his form presents a very marked contrast to the
extremely simple and elegant variety (bicornis) from Ceylon.
The same variability in the spinous armature is characteristic
of M. pilosa.

6. With a calcareous lamina.

Membranipora patula, n. sp.

(Pl. IX. fig. 4.)

Zoecia short, narrowed above and broadly expanded below,
the upper extremity of the cell much raised, the lower de-
pressed; margin well raised, narrow, sharp, minutely granu-
lated; aperture arched above, the lower margin slightly
curved outwards, occupying fully three fourths of the length of
the area, the lower fourth filled in by a strongly granu-
lated, calcareous lamina, which is continued for a short dis-
tance up each side; on the upper margin four very stout
cylindrical spines, two towards each side, which are articu-
lated by corneous joints; projecting from the centre of the
back of the cell, some way below the margin, an avicularium
with pointed mandible, directed straight outwards. Occtwm(?).

Loc. Calitornia (Miss Jelly).

Membranipora setigera, n. sp.

(Pl. VILL. fig. 3.)

Zoecia large, ovate ; area occupying the whole front of the
cell, the lower two thirds covered in by a shining calcareous
lamina, minutely pitted over; aperture arched above, lower
margin straight, closed by a rather stout membranous wall, at
the upper extremity of which is the orifice; margin not mucb
raised, granulated; a row of 6-8 tall spines surrounding the
upper extremity of the area. Avicularia none. Occtum (?).

Loc. Australia, investing Serpula (Miss Gatty).

This species belongs to the same section of the genus as
our British MZ. Rosselit and M. trifolium. Its spines are a
conspicuous character, thezoarium literally bristling with them.
The surface is flat and somewhat glistening.

Membranipora spinosa, Quoy & Gaimard.

Flustra spinosa, Q. & G., Voy. de l’Astrolabe.
Membranipora ciliata, MacGillivray, Trans. Roy. Soc. Victoria, 1868.
Membranipora spinosa, Busk, Polyzoa of Kerguelen Island.

Busk identifies a form from Kerguelen Island with the

a General History of the Marine Polyzoa. 151

Flustra spinosa of Quoy & Gaimard ; and from the figure which
he gives it would seem to be the same as the JZ. ciliata
of MacGillivray, an Australian species. If he is correct in
his identification, the latter name must give place to that of
Quoy and Gaimard.

The species has occurred in the following localities :—Ker-
guelen Island (Jr. Haton) ; Australia (MacGillivray); Ara-
bian Sea, between Bombay and Aden, lat. about 15° N., long.
about 65° E. (W. Oates).

Another Membranipora spinosa has been described by
D’Orbigny (Voy. dans ?Amér. Mérid. vol. v. 4e partie),
which bears a close resemblance to MW. spinifera, Johnston,
but is apparently destitute of avicularia. It is furnished with
about 10 spines on each side of the cell.

Membranipora permunita, n. sp.

(PL X. fig. 2.)

Zoecia arched above, expanding very slightly towards the
centre, and then narrowing off more or less to the base, which
is subtruncate ; area occupying the whole of the front of the
cell, the lower two thirds filled in by a strong, thickly-
granulated, calcareous lamina; aperture arched above, lower
margin straight, higher than broad, margin scarcely elevated,
very finely beaded; scattered amongst the zocecia elongate,
narrow-oval cells, the lower part of which is occupied by an
avicularium, depressed at the base, the beak much raised,
turned obliquely to one side, somewhat curved and pointed;
mandible slender, edged on each side by a horny expansion ;
upper portion of avicularian cell hollow and open. Oecta
rounded, closely united to the lamina of the cell above, with a
raised rib round the front, inclosing a minutely granulated
space.

Loc. Off Curtis Island, Bass’s Straits, common on shell
(Capt. W. H. Cawne Warren).

This species occurs in a very interesting collection of
Polyzoa made by Capt. Warren, of the ship ‘ Bedfordshire,’
and presented by him to the Liverpool Free Museum. The
committee of the Museum, at the instance of its very able
and energetic curator, Mr. Moore, have entrusted the collec-
tion to me for examination; and I hope to describe and
figure a number of new forms from it in subsequent papers.

M. permunita is interesting as being one of the few recent
species belonging to the present section of the genus which
are furnished with an avicularium of the elongate type placed
on a well-developed cell-area. A very similar appendage

152 Rev. T. Hincks’s Contributions towards

occurs on M. curvirostris, mihi; and it is not uncommon
amongst the species with a membranous front wall.

Membranipora (Caleschara) denticulata, MacGillivray *.
(PI-VIIL tig. 2.)

Zoarium foliaceous, with the cells in two layers placed back
to back, or incrusting. Zoacta arched above, widening about
the middle, and contracted below ; margin smooth, sometimes
traversed by a brown line, inner side of the cell-wall
granular; area occupying the whole front of the cell, the
lower one third filled in by a granulated calcareous plate ; a
transparent membranous wall extending over the entire area,
including the calcareous plate, the oral valve being placed at
the very top of it; from the centre of the upper edge of the
Jamina rises a broad calcareous process (also granulated), which
extends to about one third the length of the aperture from the
top, where it sends off two lateral branches to the wall of the
cell, forming in this way a foramen on each side, the inner
edges of which are denticulate; the upper margin of the
process is slightly thickened, and shuts off a semicircular
space above, corresponding with the operculum in the true
front wall; at the bottom of each cell one or sometimes two
rather large smooth nodules. Oactum wide, little projecting,
incorporated with the cell above, both the ovicelligerous cell
and the one above it of unusual size (MacG.).

Loc. Victoria (MacGillivray): off Curtis Island, Bass’s
Straits, on shell, forming a brown subcircular patch (Capt.
Cawne Warren).

MacGillivray places this species among the Hscharide
(Busk), simply, it would seem, on the ground of its erect
habit. It has, in truth, no real affinity with this family as
constituted by Busk. ‘The depressed area, the elevated
margins, and the membranous front wall show that its place
is amongst the Membraniporide. Nor is there any sufficient
ground, in my judgment, for referring it to anew genus. The
peculiarity on which MacGillivray founds his Caleschara
(“front calcareous, except a small part anteriorly, which is
membranous”’) is, I believe, quite insignificant. I venture
to think that he has misinterpreted the structure of the
zocecium, probably owing to the imperfect condition of the
specimens which came under his notice. The “ front” of his
description is not the true front wall of the cell, but merely a
calcareous upgrowth from the edge of the lamina (strictly

* “Prodromus of the Zoology of Victoria,’ decade v., by Fred. M‘Coy,
F.R.S.; ‘ Polyzoa,’ by P. H. MacGillivray, p. 46, pl. xlviii. fig. 8.

a General History of the Marine Polyzoa. 153

comparable with the “serrated denticle,” similarly placed in
Membranipora (Biflustra) delicatula, Busk); and the mem-
branous portion at the upper extremity is only occasional,
and merely denotes imperfect development. That the true
upper wall of the zowcium is the membrane which closes in
the whole of the area is evident from the course of develop-
ment and from the fact that it bears the oral valve. In the
younger zocecia the laminar process is either wholly wanting or
very imperfectly developed, whilst the membranous wall,
furnished with the semicircular orifice for the egress of the
polypide, occupies the whole of the opening at a considerable
distance above the lamina.

The real peculiarity of this form is that the membrane
incloses the granular plate and its process; but this, how-
ever curious, is hardly a generic character. The same thing
occurs in a less degree in M/. nitens, mihi. As to the habit
of growth, MacGillivray’s figure represents a small erect and
foliated specimen; the one from Bass’s Straits is wholly
erustaceous. Another which [ have examined grows round a
stem of seaweed, and the free edges meeting on one side of
it come together and unite ; and in any further growth at this
point there would be a bilaminate structure, and the zoarium
would become erect and detached; but it would be none the
less a Membranipora. The large nodules at the base of the
cells, which were present in the specimen I have figured,
materially change the general appearance of the species.

Membranipora cervicornis, Busk*.

(Pl. VILL fig. 1, and Pl. X. fig. 3.)

Zoecia oval; margin much raised round the upper part of
the cell, forming a very thin wall, which also extends for
some distance down the sides; area occupying the whole of
the front, about a third of it filled in by a smooth and shining
calcareous lamina, which is carried up for some distance on

* There has been some doubt whether the M. cervicornis, Busk (Cat.
pt. 1, pl. c. fig. 3), is identical with the form described by MacGillivray
under this name. Busk’s figure does not show the detail of the zocecium
very clearly; but the branching spines, as he represents them, are cer-
tainly different from the similar appendages as given by MacGillivray.
They are massive and spreading, and bend in over the area, the branches
“meeting and inosculating ;” whereas in the other form they are erect
and comparatively slender, and show no tendency to unite across the cell.
The colour also of Busk’s species is said to be “ purplish ;” that of the
Av’ .ralian species white or brownish. Amongst Capt. Warren’s dredg-
ings, however, from Bass’s Straits, | have met with specimens undoubtedly
referable to MacGillivray’s species, in which the spines are somewhat
more massive, and occasionally meet and (apparently) unite across the
cell; they are also of a deep purplish colour.

154 Rev. T. Hincks’s Contributions towards

each side; aperture flattened above, narrowing downward,
rounded at the lower extremity (very much in the form of a
heraldic shield), surrounded by a slightly thickened rim; at
the top of the cell four spines, placed two on each side, the
foremost pair stout, suberect, and branched, like a stag’s horn,
the upper tall, slender, and slightly forked ; between them a
raised aviculardum with pointed mandible, placed transversely
on the margin of the cell, or projecting straight outwards
from the back; frequently a large raised aviculariwm at the
bottom of the cell. Owctum very shallow, galeriform, smooth,
the oral surface much sloped, so as to expose the opening; a
raised line arching across the front a short distance above the
opening, inclosing a narrow subhyaline belt; an avicularium
on the summit, placed transversely ; two spines in front of the
ovicell, and two at the sides (Plate VIII. fig. 1). Zoartum
white or brownish, or of a rather deep purplish colour.

Var. a. Oaciwm much deeper (less shallow), almost sub-
quadrate, the oral surface not sloped; a raised rib in front
inclosing a subtriangular space; one or two avicularia at the
back (Pl. X. fig. 3).

Loc. Victoria (MacGillivray) ; var. a, off Curtis Island,
Bass’s Straits (Capt. Cawne Warren).

I have thought it desirable to give a detailed description of
this species, as MacGillivray has contented himself with a
very brief diagnosis. Busk’s account of his M. cervicornis is
almost equally brief; and between the two there is some
difficulty in deciding with any certainty as to the identity or
otherwise of the two forms.

The differences in the ocecium are striking and curious ;
but they can only be regarded as varietal. The spines are
articulated to a fixed tubular base, and are easily detached ;
in their absence it is somewhat difficult at first sight to recog-
nize the species.

Note on Membranipora transversa, Hincks.

When I described this form (‘ Annals,’ July 1880) I was
not aware that Mr. Hutton had been before me. I had not
then seen his paper in the ‘ Proceedings of the Royal Society
of Tasmania’ for 1877 (published in 1878), in which he has
characterized it as M. cincta. Of course the name transversa
must be cancelled; and I can only hope that it may drop out
of sight and give no further trouble.

In a paper presented to the Royal Society of Victoria early
in 1880 Mr. MacGillivray has given a fuller account of the
same species, and proposes to refer it to a new genus, which
he names Diplopora, and of which the distinctive characters

a General History of the Marine Polyzoa. 155

seem to be that the zocecium is divided into two parts, and.
that ‘‘a narrow transverse portion ”’ of the front cell-wall, “a
little distance behind the mouth and in front of the elevated
part,” is deficient in calcareous matter and entirely membra-
nous. On reexamining my specimens I find that a membra-
nous wall closes in the whole of the aperture, bearing the oral
valve at the upper extremity, and extending almost to the top
of the elevated portion of the cell. Beneath the oral valve is
an elliptical orifice with calcareous margin filled in with mem-
brane and having a circular opening in the centre; from the
edge of this inner orifice a calcareous wall passes down to a
fissure extending transversely across the cell, and probably
marking the termination of the true zocecium. Below the
fissure is the wall of the elevated part of the cell, which is a
strong box. ‘Towards the base of this wall a tubular process
projects into the fissure, probably forming a communication
between the box and it. The precise significance of this
structure can only be determined by an examination of living
specimens ; but it seems to form a good basis for a new generic
group.

One curious peculiarity of this species should be noted.
The colonies, which always seem to encircle the stems of
certain algee, commence with a (transverse) row of elongated,
narrow, quadrangular cells, having the front entirely closed
in with membrane, destitute of orifice, and of all the charac-
teristic structure of the adult; this row is followed by a
second, in which the cells resemble generally those in the
first, but are much shorter; and from these the normal zocecia
originate.

Family Microporide.
Genus VINCULARIA (part), Defrance.

Vincularia abyssicola, Smitt.

(Pl. X. fig. 4.)

This form I had figured from a specimen incrusting a small
fragment of coral, as (probably) a new species of Setosella ;
and only ascertained subsequently that it was identical with
Vincularia abyssicola of Smitt. I mention this to show how
essentially Membraniporidan the zocecial character of this
generic type is; in its incrusting state it is impossible to
distinguish the present species from Setosella. Whether its
peculiar habit of growth in the adult state (the zocecia are
arranged so as to form erect, cylindrical stems like those of
Cellaria, but unjointed) entitles it to generic rank is a ques-
tion to which different answers may be given ; but we indicate

156 Rey. T. Hincks’s Contributions towards

its true natural affinities (and this is the important point) by
ranking it in the family of the Microporide.

Vincularia ornata, Busk, and V. neozelanica, Busk, are
true Membraniporide.

I have engraved the figure of V. abyssicola, as it shows a
finer development of the remarkable vibracula than Smitt’s.
These appendages exhibit a very interesting structure, being
edged for a considerable portion of their length along both
sides by a rather broad membranous expansion.

Loc. Off Cojima, Cuba, 450 fathoms, on Retepora ; Florida,
68 fathoms, on Nullipora (Pourtales) ; on coral from Singa-
pore or the Philippines (Miss Jelly).

V. FOREIGN CHEILOSTOMATA. (Miscellaneous.)
Family Epicaulidiide.
EPICAULIDIUM, n. gen.

Gen. char.—Zoarium calcareous, composed of a creeping
base and erect stems, made up of internodes linked together at
their extremities by corneous joints, on which the zocecia are
borne in companies. Zowcia erect, clavate, with a small,
oblique, subterminal orifice, several united together longitu-
dinally, so as to form a cluster; the clusters opposite, free,
except at the base, where they are attached by corneous joints
to the internodes.

Epicaulidium pulchrum, n. sp.
(Pl. X. fig. 5.)

Stem composed of jointed internodes of about equal length,
which are white, expanding gradually from the base upwards
to a point a short distance below the top, where there is a
slight protuberance on each side, surmounted by a circular
orifice, from which the corneous joint supporting the cluster
of cells originates; above the projections the internode nar-
rows and continues cylindrical to the top; a number of small
tubules immersed in the cells, which show as disks on the
surface and give it a speckled appearance; no branching.
Zoecia in triplets, united through their whole length, the
central one compressed, narrow, pointed below, slightly wider
above, orifice oval, oblique, with a thin slightly raised margin,
facing towards the base of the stem (downwards) ; two lateral
cells subclavate, expanded above, narrowed and pointed at the
base, orifice as in central cell, except that there is a small
spine in the centre of the upper margin ; surface smooth and
shining; the lateral cells attached by the dorsal surface to
the sides of the central, orifice facing sideways, with a slight

a General History of the Marine Polyzoa. 157

turn upwards ; the triplets also speckled, but less strongly and
constantly than the stem; form of the triplets subcordate.
Oecta (?).

Loc. Jamaica, creeping over an alga (Miss Jelly).

Amongst the taller stems occur others consisting of a very
short and slender internode attached by a corneous joint to
the creeping base, and bearing on its summit a single triplet.
In these cases growth seems to proceed no further. The
primary internode of the ordinary stem is jointed to the creep-
ing fibre, and is sometimes normal and sometimes altogether
destitute of cells.

Family Bicellariide.
Dracuoris, Busk.
Diachoris bilaminata, n. sp.

(Pl. VIII. figs. 7, 7a).

Zoartum (probably) erect, composed of two layers of cells
placed back to back ; connecting tubes six, very short. Zowcia
large, elongate, boat-shaped, suberect, placed close together
and overlapping considerably ; margin running out into a short
spinous process on each side of the orifice ; aperture occupying
the whole front; orifice terminal; oral valve arched above, with
a straight lower margin ; at a short distance below the top on
one side an articulated avicularium (often wanting), slender,
rather compressed, the beak long and flat above, bent slightly
and abruptly at the extremity; mandible very slender and
sharply pointed. Oecva (?).

Loc. New Zealand (Miss Jelly).

This diagnosis is founded on a fragment; andI can there-
fore give no account of the size or mode of growth. The
zocecia have a strongly marked character, and differ widely
from those of any form with which I am acquainted. The
layers are closely united, and constitute a very compact bilami-
nate zoarium. A striking point is the degree in which the
zocecia overlap one another, each cell originating a good way
down on the dorsal surface of the one below it.

The affinity between Diachoris and Beania and Bugula is
of the closest kind; between the present genus and the last
named there is indeed but a single point of difference that is
at all constant, the disjunct condition of the cells ; and this can
hardly be regarded as specially significant*.

The following species of Diachoris have been described :—
D. Crotali, Busk, Bass’s Straits; D. magellanica, Busk (=D.

* I quite agree with Mr. Waters that “the genus Diachoris can only
be looked upon as a provisional one” (“Bryozoa of Bay of Naples,”
‘ Annals,’ Feb. 1879, p. 120).

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. vii. 12

158 Rey. T. Hincks’s Contributions towards

Busket, Heller), Straits of Magellan, New Zealand, Mediter-
ranean; D. inermis, Busk, New Zealand, Straits of Magellan ;
D. costata, Busk, Kerguelen Island, Australia; D. spini-
gera, Australia; D. hirtissima, Heller (= Chaunosia hirtis-
sima, Busk), Adriatic, Cape of Good Hope ; D. armata, Heller,
Adriatic; D. patellaria, Moll (=D. simplex, Heller, and
Mollia patellaria, Smitt—generically distinct), Adriatic; D.
Buskiana, Hutton, New Zealand.

Family Myriozoide (part), Smitt.
SCHIZOPORELLA, Hincks.

Schizoporella argentea, n. sp.

(Pl. LX. figs. 6, 6 a.)

Zoecia ovate, irregularly disposed, convex, strongly sutured,
separated by inconspicuous lines, very distinctly and beauti-
fully granulated over the entire surface, punctured round the
margin, greyish white, lustrous ; orifice suborbicular, produced
below into a pointed sinus; peristome not raised; along one
side of it a large mound-like elevation, rising to a point above,
on the inner face of which is an erect avicularium, with acute
mandible directed upwards ; on the opposite side, just beyond
the sinus, a short spinous process; on the upper margin two
or three spines; in many cases the oral avicularium, instead
of being erect and close upon the margin, is turned downwards
and outwards, is much elongated, and stretches down about
half the length of the cell. Oacta rounded, thickly granu-
lated and punctured. Zoarium of very delicate texture,
greyish white, silvery.

Loc. Africa, on coral (Miss Jelly)

Schizoporella linearis, Hassall, form guincuncialis.

(Pl. IX. fig. 3.)

Zoecia ovate, occasionally lozenge-shaped, moderately
convex, separated by lines, quincuncially arranged ; surface
bright and silvery, thickly punctured ; orifice suborbicular,
with a shallow pointed sinus on the lower margin, a ridge-like
callosity placed longitudinally immediately below the sinus ;
at each side of the orifice, usually almost close to the top of
the cell, a mound-like rising, bearing a small avicularium ;
mandible acute, generally directed upwards. Occtwm (?).

Loc. Ceylon (Miss Jelly).

In general appearance this variety is very unlike the well-
known S. linearis. Its zocecia exhibit none of the depres-
sion of surface and definite linear arrangement which are so
characteristic of the normal form; they are ovate, convex,

a General History of the Marine Polyzoa. 159

and quincuncially disposed. But, on the other hand, the
zocecium agrees with that of the normal form in the form of
the orifice, and in having a small, raised, and pointed avicu-
larium on each side of it. These appendages, indeed, are
placed somewhat higher up than is usual (more so, indeed,
than is shown in my figure) ; but in this species there 1s so
much variability in their position that this cannot be regarded
as a character of any importance. The present form must, I
think, be ranked as one more modification of the linearis type.
I have figured another specimen of this species (Plate IX.
fig. 2), which illustrates still further the variability in the
position of the avicularia.

Family Escharid# (part), Smitt.
Smirtia, Hincks.

Smittia nitida, Verrill.
(Pl. IX. figs. 5, 5a.)

Zoecia subquadrangular (very irregular in shape), disposed
in linear series, separated by raised lines, slightly convex,
areolated round the margin, or simply punctured, the surface
very bright and lustrous, of a delicate white colour, covered
with large polished granules; orifice suborbicular, somewhat
flattened below; the peristome raised above and (especially)
at the sides, where it rises into prominent points, not elevated
in front; on the lower margin three denticles, two lateral and
small, and one larger in the centre ; on each side of the orifice
(or on one side only) a subspatulate avicularium (narrow at
top, and expanding towards the extremity) raised on a small
mound ; sometimes replaced by a gigantic curved avicula-
rium, stretching down two thirds of the length of the cell.
Oecium rounded, thickly punctured in front, often invested
round the base by a thick granular band; usually an avicu-
lariuam with pointed mandible at the back; peristome con-
tinued as an arch across the front of the ocecium.

Loc. North America (Verrill); Africa, on coral (Miss Jelly).

Drawings of this species were prepared before I was aware
that it had been figured by Prof. Verrill from North-American
specimens. I have engraved them, as they show a remark-
able modification of the avicularium not noticed by Verrill.

A detailed diagnosis has been added, no description accom-
panying his figure.

ASPIDOSTOMA, n. gen.

Gen. char.—Zoecia with a calcareous front wall, destitute
of raised margins ; orifice arched above, straight below, pro-
%

160 Rev. T. Hincks’s Contributions towards

tected in front by a broad shield-like plate, which is continued
downwards for some distance within the cell; attached to the
inner surface of the plate, on a level with the margin of the
orifice, a semicircular membrano-calcareous (?) frame, into
which the oral valve fits; wall of the cell elevated behind the
orifice into a broad hood-like expansion, which covers it in
and forms an arched secondary orifice. Zoarium (in the only
known species) erect and bilaminate.

Aspidostoma crassum, 0. sp.

(Pl. X. figs. 6, 6 a.)

Zoarium erect, compressed, thick, contracted towards the
base, and widening upwards, of a reddish-brown colour. Zo-
ecia disposed in two layers, placed back to back, massive and
thick-walled, quincuncial, very broad and rounded above,
narrowing off downwards (pyriform), truncate at the bottom,
divided by very deep sutures; surface dense, roughened ;
back of the cell elevated and forming a hood over the orifice,
with an arched opening in front, the margin of the hood rising
into two prominent pointed processes, between which there is
a narrow cleft; orifice arched above, straight below, screened
by a broad plate, with a thickened and everted edge, which
conceals it and stretches across a great part of the arched
opening ; margin of the plate continuous with the wall of the
hood, and forming with it on each side a loop-shaped opening ;
front of the cell somewhat flattened below the orifice and
sloping down towards it; in the centre of this portion a raised
elongate callosity; leaning against the side of many of the
cells, a little below the upper extremity, an aviculartum, with
a very short, broad, subtriangular mandible directed upwards.
Oecium elongate, much depressed, shield-like, granulated.

Loc. Dredged between Patagonia and the Falkland Islands
(Capt. Cawne Warren).

This very curious form is remarkable for the thickness
and solidity of the zoarium and the massive character of the
zocecia. Young cells are less strongly calcified, and the hood
is of much more slender make than in the adult, and does not
project so far in advance of the orifice. It is always at this
stage destitute of the marginal processes which give so
peculiar a character to the adult zoarium*. In the old cells
calcification is carried to a great extent, the upper extremity
becomes very tumid, and the wall rises down the sides into a
kind of mound, which partially closes in the depressed area
below the mouth. ‘The curious structure of the orifice will

* The figures do not show the very prominent and striking character
of the hood, and its two marginal processes,

a General History of the Marine Polyzoa. 161

be best understood by referring to the figure. The lamina or
plate which protects it is hollowed out in front. This plate
passes down for a considerable distance into the interior of
the cell; immediately within it is placed the semicircular
frame on which the oral valve works, which fits close on to
the inner surface of the lamina. The flattened, shield-like
ovicell is another striking feature.

The structure of the zocecium in this species is so remark-
able that I cannot hesitate to refer it to a new genus. Busk,
in his ‘ Catalogue,’ describes an Eschara (EL. gigantea), from
South Patagonia, which bears some slight general resem-
blance to the present species; but neither the diagnosis nor
the figure represents the essential peculiarities of A. crassum.

EXPLANATION OF THE PLATES.
PuateE VIII.

Fig. 1. Membranipora cervicornis, MacGillivray, to show the structure
of the zowcium. The forked spines omitted, except in the case
of a single cell, and only the fixed tubular base represented.

Fig. 2. Membranipora (Caleschara) denticulata, MacGillivray. In this

figure the membranous wall, which closes in the entire front of
the cell, is omitted, so as to display the calcareous lamina and
the offset from its upper margin, which together form an inner
covering over a considerable portion of the area. The semi-
circular oral valve at the top of the area must be understood to
belong to the absent membranous front wall.

. Membranipora setigera, n. sp.

. Membranipora bellula (normal form), n.sp. 4a. Ditto, var. b:-

corns. 46. Ditto, var. maulticorms.

. Membranipora terrifica, n. sp.

. Membranipora rubida, un. sp.

. Diachoris bilaminata, n. sp. 7a. Zocecium with avicularium.

SI OD Ot He CO

PLATE IX.

. Membranipora bicolor, n. sp.
. Schizoporella linearis, Hassall. Variety with avicularia at the

top of the cell and on each side of the ocecium.

. Schizoporella linearis, var. quincuncialis.

. Membranipora patula, u. sp.

. Smittia mitida, Verrill. [This figure represents a very irregular
group of cells.) 5a. Zocecium with ovicell.

. Schizoporella argentea, n. sp. 6a. Single zocecium.

PuatTeE X.

Membranipora coronata, 0. sp.

Membranipora permumnita, 0. sp.
. Membranipora cervicornis, MacGillivray, var. 3a. Ocecium.

Vincwlaria abyssicola, Smitt. From an incrusting colony.

. Epicaulidium pulchrum, n.sp. 5 a, A single triplet of cells.

. Aspidostoma crassum, n. sp. Showing a group of cells from the
younger and older portions of the colony. 6a. Fragment of the

zoarium, nat. size.

ee
: SSDS Is
jor) Ot CO noe

y
SSSS se
> Ov G98

162 Dr. Wallich on the Origin of the

XVI.—Note on a Central-Asiatic Field-Mouse (Mus
arianus). By W. T. BuanrorD, F.R.S. &e.

I AM indebted to Mr. Oldfield Thomas for calling my atten-
tion to the fact that a Japanese species of Mus was named
M. erythronotus by Temminck in 1850.

In the ‘Annals’ for 1875 I proposed the same name,
M. erythronotus, for a mouse of which I obtained specimens
at Kohrud, between Isfahan and Teheran, in Persia. A
species apparently identical with the Persian mouse was
collected by the late Dr. Stoliczka in Wakhdn, a province on
the Upper Oxus belonging to Afghanistan, and at Kashgar,
in Eastern Turkestan; and the same form has since been
found by Major Biddulph and Dr. Scully at Gilgit in the
Upper Indus valley.

It is by no means certain that this form may not pass into
the eastern races of Mus sylvaticus ; and it requires comparison
with Mus sylvaticus, var. major, of Radde; but as it appears
to be a well-marked type, with a wide distribution in Central
Asia, and as the name Mus erythronotus cannot be retained
for it, in consequence of the prior use of the same specific
denomination by Temminck, I propose to change the name to
Mus arianus—from Ariana, one of the ancient names for
Persia and the neighbouring countries to the eastward.

The following synonymy furnishes, I believe, all the
necessary references :—

Mus arianus.

Mus erythronotus, W. Blanford, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 4, vol. xvi.
p- 811 (1875); Northern Persia, ii. p. 54, pl. v. fig. 8 (1876);
Scientific Results Second Yarkand Mission, Mamm. p. 54 (1879);
J. A. 8. B. 1879, vol. xlviii. pt. 2, p. 97 (nec Mus erythronotus,
Temm. Fauna Japonica, Mamm. p. 50, 1850).

Mus sylvaticus, var. W. Blanford, ie A.S. B. 1875, xliv. pt. 2, p. 108
(nec Linn.).

XVII.—On the Origin and Formation of the Flints of the
Upper or White Chalk; with Observations upon Prof.
Sollas’s Paper in‘ The Annals and Magazine of Natural
ee for December 1880. By Surgeon-Major WaLLIcH,

[Plate XI.]

As Mr. Sollas has seen fit to make the second part of his
memoir “ On the Flint Nodules of the Trimmingham Chalk”

Flints of the Upper or White Chalk. 163

a medium for indulging in a number of unwarranted comments
(for they cannot be called criticisms) upon my paper “ On the
Physical History of the Cretaceous Flints” (published in
the ‘ Quarterly Journal of the Geological Society,’ vol. xxxvi.
No. 141, Feb. 1880)*, I shall first reply to his strictures, and
then avail myself of the opportunity to furnish some additional
facts and arguments in support of my views, which want of
space debarred me from bringing forward in the paper just
referred to.

That Mr. Sollas or any other professed geologist should have
hesitated to accept my explanation as to the mode of formation
of the Flints, and should freely canvass my facts as well as
my conclusions, was not only perfectly legitimate, but no more
than I expected when giving utterance to an hypothesis both
novel and opposed, in some most important particulars, to all
preconceived ideas concerning a difficult and avowedly un-
solved geological problem. But I likewise expected, from a
writer whose previous researches on kindred subjects (so far
as [ was acquainted with them) had yielded me both pleasure
and instruction, at least a precise and impartial recital of such
of my statements and conclusions as he felt called upon to
impugn—together with some better results than a laboured
and, as I venture to think, futile attempt to improve upon the
well-known doctrine that ‘the flints are due to the replace-
ment of carbonate of lime by silica”? Tf.

Speaking generally, Mr. Sollas’s paper contributes very
little that can be considered original to our knowledge on the
flint question—unless it be the interesting fact that the silica
of the Trimmingham flints may, in part, have been derived
from spicules belonging to, but now missing from, certain
fossilized sponge-remains in the Trimmingham Chalk. For,
although he devotes a considerable space in his paper to the
chemistry of the subject, it is obvious that he has derived his
inspiration, on almost every material point relating to the pro-
duction of fint, from the splendid researches of Graham, to
which, in common with myself, he appears to be indebted for
whatever information he possesses regarding the colloidal
properties and combinations of silicic acid and colloidal sub-
stances in generalf. Yet he offers no explanation of the cha-

* This paper was read before the Geological Society in December 1879.
+ See paper by Prof. Rupert Jones, F.R.S. &e., “On Quartz, Flint,
and other forms of Silica” (Proc. Geol. Assoc. vol. iv. no. 7, Apr. 1876,
. 447).
t at. Sollas mentions Mr. Graham’s name only in relation to “ the
fact,” if it be one, “ that silicic acid has the property of actually combining
with such substances as albumen and gelatin to form with them silicate
of albumen and silicate of gelatin” (loc. cit. p. 452).

164 Dr. Wallich on the Origin of the

racteristic forms assumed by the flint nodules that may not
be found in every geological textbook ; and upon the most
difficult and puzzling question of all (namely, the cause of
the stratification of the flints), although he shows that he
regards it as part and parcel of the Flint question, by just once
(at p. 441) confessing it presents ‘a difficulty,” from first
to last he remains significantly silent.

I may observe, in reference to the last-mentioned fact, that
I should have been content to discuss Mr. Sollas’s theory of
the formation of flint so far as it goes, and to leave entirely
out of sight those points on which it would appear that he has
been unable to arrive at any conclusion whatever, had he not
indulged in such unjustifiable observations as the following :—
“The last question which remains for discussion is the origin
of the various external forms assumed by flint. A good deal
of misconception appears to have arisen on the subject through
a too exclusive attention to one particular form of flint arbi-
trarily selected as a type of all others. For this (generally the
irregular nodular form) a theory is framed which is then made
to account for the rest. Thus, when Dr. Bowerbank attempted
to show that flints are silicified horny sponges, he accounted
for the flint-veins of the chalk by supposing them to be
horny sponges which had grown over the sides of an open
fissure at the cretaceous sea-bottom ; and Dr. Wallich, after
giving an explanation of flint nodules and layers, speaks
of the veins as formed by a ‘sluggish overflow’ of silica-
saturated protoplasm ‘ into fissures in the chalk.” There does
not appear much to choose between these rival explanations of
the veins; both are attempts to square a preconceived hypo-
thesis with an obnoxious fact”’ (loc. cit. p. 450).

Mr. Sollas is doubtless aware that Dr. Bowerbank ean no
longer answer for himself. He has, however, associated my
name with that of a universally respected and known scientific
thinker and writer, whose researches on the Sponges alone
ought to have protected him from an imputation which, applied
as it has been to myself as well as to Dr. Bowerbank, I can
only describe as being wholly unfounded.

Mr. Sollas has taken care not to state at what page the
words he here quotes from my paper are to be found. I will
supply the omission. The seven words in question consti-
tute the sole allusion to the flint-veins made by me, from
beginning to end of my paper. The context, now furnished,
will show that the formation of the veins was not what I was
speaking about, but the ‘‘ homogeneousness” of the colloid
material contained in the fissures. In my paper I offered no

Flints of the Upper or White Chalk. 165

other opinion whatever on the veins, for reasons which I con-
sidered sufficient—the allusions to sluggish overflows into
the fissures of the chalk being made solely with a view
to point out that, had they been filled with an aqueous
solution, the fissures would not only have been lined with
silica, but the walls of the fissure would, to a considerable
depth, have become silicified through the absorbent power of
the chalk. This view [ still regard as valid, and as appli-
cable to the tabular layers of chalk also, The following is
the sentence from which Mr. Sollas has detached and quoted
(as I shall show he has done in other instances) an incom-
plete passage, in order that he might impugn it :—“ But that
the colloidal ¢diosyncrasy of silica performed a much more
important function in the phenomena connected with the flints
than has heretofore been supposed, appears to me to be in-
dicated by the evidence of the almost perfect incorporation of
the organic silica with a colloid material, the unique ameebi-
form nodulation of the flints, and dts homogeneousness, whether
occurring in nodules, in continuous sheets parallel to the strati-
fication, or as sluggish overflows into fissures in the chalk”
(loc. cit. p. 89).

Again, at p. 451 of his paper Mr. Sollas says :—‘ In
attempting to find an explanation for the form of these flints
we may consider the following suppositions :—(i) The form
may have been determined by the presence of animal matter
(protoplasm, Wallich), or (11) of the products of its decompo-
sition,’ &e. . . . ‘ The first explanation may best be stated in
Dr. Wallich’s own words. Thus, speaking of the irregular
nodules, he says :—‘ those characteristic amabiform outlines
which, according to my hypothesis, are dependent on the
presence of, and the combination of the silica with, the accu-
mulation of nearly pure protoplasm still sufficiently recent to
have resisted admixture with calcareous or other matter’ (Joc.
cit. p. 79). As I have already shown in the earlier part of
this paper that flints originate as silicified chalk, we need not
spend time on a formal confutation of Dr. Wallich’s hypothesis ;
but when Dr. Wallich remarks that ‘ the various conditions
that present themselves from the earliest elimination of the
silica from the sea-water to the period when it becomes finally
consolidated, have never, that I am aware, been consecutively
followed out’ (/oc. cit. p. 89), I would take the liberty to refer
him to a paper of my own, printed in abstract in the Quart.
Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. xxix. p. 76 (1873), where the steps are
perhaps as consecutively followed out as in Dr. Wallich’s paper
itself. As my paper has never been published in full, I shall

166 Dr. Wallich on the Origin of the

make no apology for giving here a rather lengthy extract from
it” (Mr. Sollas’s paper, ‘ Annals,’ Dec. 1880, p. 452).

Both the above extracts from my paper are so incorrectly
given, and mutilated by the omission of the context, as to
materially alter their purport, at the very time that
Mr. Sollas informs his readers that “ THE FIRST EXPLANATION
may best be given in Dr. Wallich’s own words,” and prefaces
his first quotation by saying that I was “‘ speaking of the trre-
gulur nodules,” in order to make it appear that I was then
describing some part of my hypothesis. I was neither
describing any part of my hypothesis, offering an explanation
of any supposition, nor directly or indirectly making any allusion
to the question of the nodules. I had been impugning a
statement by Sir Charles Lyell, made under a misapprehension
of certain facts which I was relating concerning the very
insignificant part played by the Diatomacee in supplying the
silica of the flints, and was repeating generally what I had
been at great pains in proving, for the first time, by detailed
evidence, that “the comparatively bulky siliceous framework
and spicule-system of the deep-sea vitreous sponges must
constitute the main source of supply of the material for the
flints.” Speaking of th7s, I continued as follows :—‘ Indeed,
it is far from improbable that the true flints are produced
solely in the areas occupied by the sponge-beds, the flints
becoming (elsewhere) more cherty and DEVOID of those
characteristic amebiform outlines which, according to my
hypothesis, are dependent” &c. (see my paper, p. 79).
Therefore, to cite this passage as an “ explanation” of my
hypothesis, more particularly as it was not described by
Mr. Sollas either before or afterwards, was a mere abuse of
words, if not of facts!

In the second of the above extracts Mr. Sollas pursues the
same course of destroying the purport of the passage by sup-
pressing the context. Such a method of supplying the
epsissima verba of a writer might, in skilful hands, be so
applied as to warrant the impression that the best hypothesis
that ever was constructed was not worth the ink it was
written with. In the present case, so finely had Mr. Sollas
drawn the line as to deprive the sentence he quotes of a
definitely expressed limitation, by omitting the word “ But,”
with which it commences.

The following is the paragraph from which the extract is
taken:— That the predisposition of silica, itself in reality
a colloid, to form colloidal combinations with albuminous and
other materials was known long before deep-sea exploration

Flints of the Upper or White Chalk. 167

was dreamt of, is a well-known historical fact ; it has been
alluded to by most of the writers who have attempted an
explanation of the mode of formation of the flints. But the
various conditions that present themselves, from the earliest
elimination of the silica from the sea-water to the period
when it becomes finally consolidated, have never, that I
am aware, been consecutively followed out”. (see my paper,
9).

x It aa be seen from this that I had distinctly shown, in
the previous part of the paragraph from which the quotation
is made, that I laid no claim to originality in reference to the
abstract chemical questions concerned on the subject of colloids
and notably of silica. Yet, incredible as it may appear, the
four next pages of Mr. Sollas’s paper, which are taken up
with the said “lengthy extract,” contain not a single obser-
vation that is not wholly connected with the chemical and
molecular changes that take place in the formation of flint
nodules, and the infiltration with silica of certain shells from
the Blackdown Greensand beds, which has no direct bearing
whatever on the questions now before us. Indeed the con-
cluding paragraph of the extract proves this; for in it the
writer says:—‘ Thus the crystalline state of flint nodules
offers us no evidence for or against our theory of the for-
mation of these fossils. This theory may be summed up
under two heads :—(1) combination of silicic acid with
animal matter of various kinds—a chemical fact; and (2)
concentration of the silica from the silicate of animal matter
thus formed, by the extrication of the organic part of the com-
pound. This ts a pure assumption, but one which agrees
very well with other well-known facts in chemistry ’’ (loc. cit.
p- 456).

Again, speaking of the irregular forms of the flint nodules,
Mr. Sollas observes, at p. 459 of his paper:—“ These, by
their fantastic flowing outlines, are responsible for much of
the theorizing which can only regard flint as a silicification of
organic matter. Thus, Dr. Wallich repeatedly lays stress on
‘the uniqueameebiform nodulation of the flints,’ though one may
remark that one of the characteristic features of an amcebiform
outline is that it seldom remains the same two minutes to-

ether; and this cannot be said of flints, although, as Dr.
Wallich speaks in another place of the flints showing ‘ signs
of the specific contractility of colloid silica,’ one might infer that
he does not regard this character as absent. A flint moving
by means of its pseudopodia would be an interesting object ;
but perhaps the distinguished writer merely alludes to the

168 Dr. Wallich on the Origin of the

excessive shrinkage which colloid silica undergoes in passing
from the pectous to the solid state; and certainly, to one who
has experimented with colloid silica, the wonder on Dr. Wal-
lich’s hypothesis would be, not that the flints show signs of
shrinkage, but that they do not present them more markedly.
The time for conclusions based on superficial resemblances is
now gone by; we no longer regard ‘dendrites’ as fossils on
account of their moss-like form, nor profess to be ‘ able to tell
an honest man by the smell’ ”’ (Mr. Sollas’s paper, p. 459).

This extraordinary composition may, or may not, have been
written in a wholly serious spirit. It has appeared, however,
in a journal occupying a foremost rank in the scientific
literature of our time, and is therefore calculated to engender
an idea that it embodies a legitimate criticism upon views cor-
rectly ascribed to me. ‘This is, in itself, amore than sufficient
reason why it should be seriously answered, and why some
other personal observations made by Mr. Sollas in the same
journal, in regard to my writings, should receive distinct refu-
tation at my hands.

Since Mr. Sollas has become so zealous an advocate for
preciseness of expression on the part of a non-professional
naturalist as to take exception at the use of the word amebi-
form—which he alleges, but incorrectly, was “ repeatedly ”
employed in my paper,—how comes it, I would ask, that, in
the very same paragraph that contains his criticism, he should
himself have described, in language of his own selection, and,
it is to be assumed, conforming in all respects with his en-
lightened views, “the irregular and fantastic FLOWING outlines
of the flint-nodules”’ as being “ responsible for much of the
theorizing”’’ he refers to; my name being pointedly associated
with this observation? And how comes it that, in the
‘Annals’ for December last (p. 38), he should, when speak-
ing of the ForM of these nodules, have thus expressed
himself :—“ In form they vary greatly, some being flabellate,
some irregularly conical, others consist of a somewhat ellip-
soidal body on a short stalk, while many are irregular and
AMORPHOUS”’?

The word ameebiform, though a hybrid and but little re-
moved from the Latin and Greek jargon which day by day
threatens to drive plain English out of our scientific termino-
logy, is undoubtedly expressive of the unique kind of outline
and nodulation I desired to picture. There is no English
equivalent for Ameba, and consequently none for amebiform.
Hence no other word could have adequately’ conveyed my
meaning. It was accordingly used by me; and I stand by it.

Flints of the Upper or White Chalk. 169

Before passing on from this portion of my subject, I beg
leave to say that the tone of Mr. Sollas’s remarks, and more
articularly of the last-quoted paragraph of his paper, would
bee been answered only by one general expression of repro-
bation on my part, but for the way in which he has attempted
to make the personalities and other matters I complain of serve
the purpose of depreciating my opinions, and has thus left me
no alternative but to enter fully into the facts. ae
Mr. Sollas opened his paper by citing the opinion of
Ehrenberg and Sir Charles Lyell (which he says “is sup-
ported by Dr. Wallich”’ and others) that the silica of the flints
“has been derived from siliceous organisms, either collected
into distinct layers or scattered through some other deposit,
like the siliceous remains now found dispersed in the Atlantic
ooze.” A glance at p. 265 of Sir Charles Lyell’s latest work,
‘The Student’s Elements of Geology,’ will nevertheless show
that such was not the opinion entertained in 1871 by that
illustrious geologist. I can answer for myself, moreover, that
no opinion of the kind has ever been entertained or expressed
by myself, either elsewhere or in my paper on the Chalk
flints. Referring to the analogy that has been drawn between
the Atlantic mud and the chalk, and the inference which he
alleges has been based on this analogy, “that siliceous
organisms were at one time present in the chalk, just as they
now are in the ooze,”’ Mr. Sollas states that he will at once
“ proceed to make this inference independent of analogy, by
showing that it is really nothing less than a statement of fact”
(loc. cit. p. 438). And this he immediately claims to have
done on evidence afforded by the Trimmingham flints, which
goes “ straight to the point,’ but which I venture to affirm
leaves the inference as thoroughly dependent on analogy as
ever it was—the only change in the situation being that,
whereas I and other writers on the subject avowedly drew our
analogy from analyses of chalk taken from the middle of a
chalk-stratum, he drew his, not, as he pledged himself to do,
- from the Trimmingham Fiints, but from chalk adherent to
the crevices of the flint-nodules, and separated from them by
washing and subsequent treatment with hydrochloric acid.
It is true he does not confine himself in this matter only to
the evidence afforded by the Trimmingham flints, but says his
conclusions are supported by what he has observed at the
Niagara chert-beds, the Carboniferous beds of Scotland and
North Wales, and also in other English strata. But at
p- 441 he says, in reference to “a difficulty” lhe has encoun-
tered :—‘“‘ This is to be found in the restriction of the flints to

170 Dr. Wallich on the Origin of the

definite layers in the chalk, the chalk above and below
being free both from them and from sponge-spicules.
It is difficult to see, in the first place, how a shallow sea came
to consist of a strong solution of silica, and still more so to
understand how it came to vary ina rhythmical fashion, some-
times being concentrated enough to lead to the formation of
flints, and again pure enough to leave the intervening chalk
almost absolutely devoid of silica.” His “statement of fact,”
as derived from the occurrence of great numbers of sponge-
spicules adherent to the nodules, goes for nothing therefore,
in so far as the present question is concerned.

But Mr. Sollas claims to have obtained proof of another
kind, in the presence in limestone-rocks of minute quartz-
erystals and chalcedonized shells, and occasionally “numerous
grains of silica with a radiate crystalline structure ’’—and
notably in the mountain-limestone of Caldon Low, in which
were found a large number of crystals, which he rapturously
describes as being “ six-sided prisms terminated by six-sided
pyramids, the usual form of rock-crystal,” and immortalizes by
adding that it may “ be accepted as a fact that in the moun-
tain-limestone these beautiful crystals abound.” A great
many more details are furnished, relating to the microscopic
measurements of these crystals, their being “ beautiful polari-
scopic objects,” &c., all of which information is no doubt
excellent in its way, as showing that indubitable, minute, and
perfectly-formed rock-crystals have “somehow” been pro-
duced from silica in aqueous solution; but in this, as in the
previous case, not a single new or additional fact is brought
forward which can in any wise connect the silica of the crystals
with the silica of sponge-spicules, or furnish a pretext for
assuming that they may not, with just as much probability,
have been formed from the silica always held in solution in
sea-water, and which is said to be derived principally from
the comminuted siliceous débris of felspathic rocks brought
down to the sea by rivers*. Therefore, until this connect-
ing-link between the Trimmingham flints and the spicules
found on the chalk adherent to them (but only mechanically)
can be positively affirmed, and between ‘‘ calcitized siliceous
sponges and the deposited silica,” which, we are told, ‘is
generally to be found somewhere not far off,” Mr. Sollas must
not be surprised at my regarding these mere “ inferences ”’ of
his—probable, no doubt, but still mere inferences—with even

* See ‘Student's Elements of Geology,’ by Sir Charles Lyell, 1871,
p. 265.

Flints of the Upper or White Chalk. 171

less reverence than he regards the inference he could not deny
was based, at all events, on a due amount of analogical
reasoning.

But this raises the very important question, whether the
Trimmingham chalk and flints can, for the purposes of the
present inquiry, with any propriety be ranked in the same cate-
gory as the typical chalk-strata, which have as certainly been
deposited at abyssal depths in the ocean as the Trimmingham
strata have been deposited in comparatively shallow water.
On this point I do not propose to offer an independent opinion,
but shall content myself with citing the opinions of experienced
geologists, and amongst others of Mr. Sollas himself.

Referring, in the first section of his paper, published in the
‘Annals’ for November 1879 (which was really a treatise
upon the Trimmingham flint-spicules and nodules), to the
Sponges which furnished the still-existing spicules, he says
these ‘lived on a sea-floor probably somewhere between 100
and 400 fathoms deep.”’ In the later (7. e. December) portion
of his paper bearing the same title, after noting the fact that
“currents have had some influence’ in causing an addition
to the proper spicular complement “of the Trimmingham
forms from Sponges of other kinds,” he again admits “ the
flints”’ in this locality “were not formed at any abyssal
depth,” but at from “100 to 400 fathoms, giving a pressure
of from 20 to 80 atmospheres,” by which he considers the
solution of the spicules in sea-water might have been
aided*,

Now, according to the authorities on the subject about to
be cited, it will be seen that the average depth at which the
ancient Cretaceous mud was deposited is so vastly in excess
even of the maximum depth indicated for the Trimmingham
deposit, that the conditions under which animal life existed in
the two regions do not admit of comparison. In the one
region the water immediately overlying the sea-bed must have
been in a state of practically perfect quiescence ; in the other
(as collateral evidence, to be presently produced, will show),
the water immediately overlying the sea-bed must have been
in a state of constant and perhaps even powerful movement,
owing to tidal and other currents. In the one region, sponge-
life (the now admitted chief source of the silica from which the
chalk-flints were formed) was in all probability developed, as
it is known to be in our own day, to an enormous extent ;
and with it, of course, the dense protoplasmic environment
which forms an organic constituent of the deep-sea sponges,

* Loc, cit. pp. 442, 444.

172 Dr. Wallich on the Origin of the

and is, as I stated in my former paper, as indispensable
a factor in the production of the flints, as they now present
themselves in the Upper Chalk, as the silica itself which is
derived from the sponge-spicules. In the other region
sponge-life did, no doubt, occur to a certain and, possibly,
considerable extent. But the condition of aqueous movement
at the sea-bed during the deposition of the Trimmingham
beds must there have constituted an insuperable obstacle (as it
undoubtedly is to this day, at depths no greater than those
determined for the Trimmingham beds) to the development of
both the sponges and their protoplasmic nidus in sufficient
abundance to lead to the formation of the typical black flint,
which, according to my hypothesis, is as distinct in its mode
of formation from the cherty varieties as the chert is distinct
in its mode of formation from the chalk. Accordingly, the
element of depth becomes a material factor in our present
investigation.

Professor Prestwich, when referring to ‘‘ Submarine Tempe-
ratures”’ *, in his Address delivered in 1871 at the Anniversary
Meeting of the Geological Society, observed :—“ From these
considerations the question arises whether the deep sea in
which the Chalk was deposited may not also have been a sea
shut out from direct communication with the Arctic seas ”’ (doe.
cit. p. 39). . . . “ I think, therefore, that the hypothesis with
regard to the continuity of that sea-bed (the Post-cretaceous
Atlantic) from the period of the chalk to the present is one of
high probability” (ebid. p. 41). And again :—“ The Chalk,
attaining as it does a thickness of 1000 to 1500 feet, was
always looked upon by geologists as the deposit of a very deep
sea” (ibid. p.46). Mr. Whitaker, in his excellent ‘ Guide to
the Geology of London’ (The Geological Survey of England
and Wales : 1875), says :—“ By its fossils the Chalk is proved
to be the deposit of a deep sea—a deposit of much the same
character as that now forming in the mid-Atlantic, and which,
like the Chalk, is largely made up of the remains of microscopic
Foraminifera” (op. ci#. p. 19). And, lastly (though many
additional authorities to the same effect might be cited), Pro-
fessor Martin Duncan, during the discussion which followed
the reading at the Geological Society of Mr. Sollas’s own paper
“On the Markings in the Chalk of the Yorkshire Wolds,”

* See the elaborate and admirable memoir entitled “Tables of the
Temperatures of the Sea at different depths, reduced and collated from
the various observations made between 1749 and 1868, with maps and
sections. By Joseph Prestwich, M.A., F.R.S., &c.,’ Phil. Trans, Roy.
Soe. vol. 165, pt. 2, 1874.

Flints of the Upper or White Chalk. 173

observed that “no reef-building corals are occupants of the
deep sea, on which there is little doubt the Chalk was depo-
sited ” (Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. 1875, p. 419)—an _ authori-
tative statement which it is somewhat unfortunate Mr. Sollas
should have overlooked, inasmuch as it might possibly have
saved him from drawing a very misleading parallel between
the flints of the Trimmingham and those of really typical
Upper-Chalk strata.

On the other hand, we have it on the authority of an
observer, whose opportunities of arriving at a correct estimate
of the mean depths at which the modern deep-sea calcareous
deposits are being formed have never been equalled, that
there can be no doubt whatever that we have, forming at the
bottom of the present ocean, a vast sheet of rock, which very
closely resembles chalk;” and “ there can be little doubt that the
old chaik was produced in the same manner and under closely
similar circumstances” (‘The Depths of the Sea,’ 1872,
p- 470).

But another, and perhaps the most material, fact in relation
to the Trimmingham beds remains to be noticed. It is one
on which I lay very great emphasis, as proving that a large
proportion of the spicules (on which Mr. Sollas has based the
whole of his superstructure of argument in relation to his
hypothesis of the flint-formation as a whole) have, in all pro-
bability, been both drifted to and fro on the sea-bed and subject
to very powerful disturbing agencies, and accessions from other
more or less littoral localities, since the period when the asso-
ciated Cretaceous deposit was formed. ‘The fact referred to
is described in a letter from Mr. Clement Reid, of H.M. Geo-
logical Survey of England and Wales, which was published
in the ‘Geological Magazine,’ Dec. 2, vol. vii. p. 238. Mr.
Reid, after remarking on another explanation that had been
suggested, says :—‘ My difficulties in accepting the view that
the contortions were formed by the dead weight of masses let
down from above are, firstly, that I cannot find a single case
where uncontorted beds have been deposited over the contorted
one, though at first sight many sections have that appearance ;
and, secondly, that no weight we can imagine possible could
drive up the solid chalk at Trimmingham in a ridge three
quarters of a mile long from N.W. to 8.E., and apparently
about 250 yards wide, this disturbance, it must be remembered,
affecting not only the chalk, but 200 feet of overlying clays and
sands.’’ Any commentary on such evidence is, I submit,
unnecessary ; for, to quote a favourite expression of Mr,
Sollas’s, ‘‘ these facts speak for themselves.”

But, strange to relate, Mr. Sollas arrives at the conclusion
Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. vii. 13

174 Dr. Wallich on the Origin of the

that ‘the once existing spicules are absent from the Trim-
mingham deposit—not because they have been washed away,
but dissolved ; for they are invariably absent in fossil sponges
and stratified deposits. Neither Zittel nor 1”’ (he says) ‘* have
seen a trace of them; and my observations on the compara-
tive readiness with which they undergo solution in—CAUSTIC
POTASH, serve to explain their absence”?! (loc. cit. p. 442).

If these are not “inferences,” they are something more,
namely pure assumptions—the first an improbable assump-
tion, the second worse than improbable, since every school-
boy knows nowadays what the action of “caustic potash” is
on silica, and that caustic potash is certainly not one of the
ingredients which chemical analysts have heretofore detected
in oceanic waters. It is therefore “a self-evident truth” that
the solution of the Trimmingham sponge-spicules on the sea-
bed could not, under any known conditions, have been due to
the substance referred to, even were it possible for the alkali
to exist in sea-water in the form of hydrate. Besides there
is no other substance in sea-water which possesses even an
approximate solvent energy upon silica. “he chemical fact”
referred to (loc. cit. p. 456) cannot, therefore, under the most
strained interpretation, be regarded as “serving to explain,”
or being connected with, ‘‘ the absence of the spicules” from
the Trimmingham deposit. Nor, coupling it with what has
been previously advanced, can it be regarded otherwise than
as demolishing Mr. Sollas’s claim to having made a demon-
strated fact occupy the place either of analogy or inference.
And, going yet a step further, if we take the whole of the facts
that have up to this point been recorded, I venture to think it
has been indisputably proved that no parallel can be drawn,
for the purposes of the present inquiry, between the Trim-
mingham Chalk with its flints and the White or Upper Chalk
with its flints, or even the typical calcareous deposits of the
modern Atlantic sea-bed. Should this conclusion be correct,
it follows, as a natural consequence, that the whole of the
arguments and hypotheses Mr. Sollas has, with so much con-
fidence, based solely on evidence supplied by a shallow-water
cretaceous deposit like that of Trimmingham, subject as it
must have been to disturbing tidal and current-influences
during the period of its deposition, and to still more violent
and cataclysmal agencies afterwards, must be looked upon as
untenable.

I will now proceed to consider two other important ques-
tions which have a direct bearing on the flint-formation. The
first is:—Does the ordinary theory of replacement of carbo-
nate of lime by silica, which has been so ably discussed by

Flints of the Upper or White Chalk. 175
Prof. Rupert Jones and others, account for all the phenomena ?
The second :—Is flint, the true black or typical flint of the
Upper or White Chalk, a crystalline, or an amorphous and, to
a certain extent, colloid body ?

It has already been stated that, according to Mr. Sollas,
“flints originate as silictfied chalk” (loc, cit. p. 452). “It
would appear (he says) that the simple deposition of silex is
impossible in the Chalk ; the first STAGE of deposition in this
deposit is always that of replacement (ibid. p. 451).” And
again :—“ Briefly to sum up, a deposit of sponge-spicules
accumulated in the chalk ooze*, and in the presence of sea-water
under pressure entered into solution. Replacement of the cal-
careous material of the ooze then ensued, small shells, and many
large ones too, being converted into silex ; and s¢liceous chalk,
not flint, was the result. he chambers of the Foraminifera and
the interstices of the chalk were now filled up by a simple depo-
sition of silica, and the siliceous chalk became converted
into black flint, an incompletely silicified layer of chalk remain-
ing as the white layer of the surface” (ibid. p. 449).

It will, I think, be admitted that it is no easy matter to
divine, from this extraordinary description, what the distine-
tion is which the author desires to convey between Ais version
of the replacement-theory, that “ flint originates as silicified
chalk,” and the generally accepted view, that “the flints are
due to the replacement of carbonate of lime by silica”’—apart
from the fact that the former is an unnecessarily complicated
mode of expressing the latter, which, as it stands, is both plain
and to the point. But it will be observed that Mr. Sollas
divides the process into two distinct parts, which he dignifies
by the name of “ stages,” without in any wise intimating what
is to be gained by this division. The first stage (he tells us)
commenced with the solution of the sponge-spicules in sea-
water under pressure, and ended when the calcareous ooze,
with some small shells and many large ones too, became con-
verted into silex, through the replacement of carbonate of

* This is an assumption, since no accumulation of spicules “in the
ooze” at all sufficient to account for the flint-formation has as yet been
recorded by any deep-sea observer. . I have seen nothing in the North
Atlantic that could meet the requirements of the case. I was the first,
however, to point out and furnish valid reasons for concluding that the
substance called “Bathybius,’ which from the first I suspected to be no
independent living organism, is merely the effete residuum of deep-sea
organic life and the protoplasmic nidus of the deep-sea vitreous sponges,
whose existence, in inconceivably vast numbers, over the calcareous areas
of the sea-bed, had been conclusively demonstrated during the cruises of
the ‘ Porcupine’ and ‘ Challenger.’ (See my paper “ On the Cretaceous
Flints,” pp. 74-77.)

13%

176 Dr. Wallich on the Origin of the

lime by silica—szliceous chalk, but not flint, being the result ;
whilst the second stage commenced with the filling-up of the
chambers of the Foraminifera and the cnterstices of the chalk
by a simple deposition of silex, and ended when the siliceous
chalk became converted into black flint, an dncompletely
silicified layer of chalk remaining as the white layer of its
surface.

The replacement-theory as taught by Prof. Rupert Jones*
is undoubtedly applicable to the flints, so far as it goes. Mr.
Sollas’s version robs it of this attribute. For how and why
the replacement by silica, admitted to have extended, during
the first stage, to the ooze and some small and many large
shells, should not, without let or hindrance, have, at the same
time, entered the chambers of the Foraminifera, which, though
small, present no peculiarity of structure that could interfere
with the penetration into their chambers of the “simple”
siliceous solution—how or why this solution should have
reached the calcareous particles of the ooze and certain
shells without gaining access to them through the ¢nter-
stices existing amongst the oozy particles themselves, and
should not in the first instead of the second stage have
silicified these interstices—and, above all, how or why the
siliceous solution, which, from the commencement of the first
to the final completion of the second stage, must necessarily
have gained access to the interior of the mass of ooze by per-
meating its boundary-walls, should have failed throughout to
silicify these, and should have left them in the shape of an
“incompletely silicified layer of chalk remaining as the white
layer of its surface,” are problems far too subtle for ordinary
understandings to grapple with, although Mr. Sollas appears.
to have long ago solved them to his own satisfaction, as the
following remark, at p. 452 of his paper, somewhat personally
attests :—

‘¢ As I have already shown, in an earlier part of this paper,
that flints originate as silicified chalk, we need not spend time
on a formal confutation of Dr. Wallich’s hypothesis ”’!

These details may appear wearisome, and, could they be
taken apart from Mr. Sollas’s conclusions, might with advan-
tage be ignored. They become important, however, when

* Prof. Rupert Jones qualifies the theory by adding :—“ As this mineral
(silica) rarely succeeds calcite as a true pseudomorph, it is only the amor-
hous, or detrital, carbonate of lime of the organisms constituting the
feaestonp that has been replaced by silica (as flint &c.), and not the
crystallized material of Echinodermatal spines &c...... the guards of
Belemnites, nor the shells of Inoceramus, Ostrea, Terebratula, &c.” (loc.
eit. ante, p. 447).

Flints of the Upper or White Chalk. 177

viewed in connexion with the fact that they rendered it neces-
sary for me to show on what grounds I reject those conclusions ;
and I mean from henceforth in this paper to discuss only the
replacement theory of Prof. Rupert Jones, although compelled
to dissent?from it to the extent of maintaining that it performs
no part whatever in the production of the true or black flint of
the Upper Chalk, which, apart from its émbedded pseudomorphs
of Foraminifera and other organisms, and their comminuted
débris, I regard as having, from first to last, passed through
the following stages :—first, in the state of inorganic, and pro-
bably some organic, silica held in solution in sea-water under
the special conditions prevailing at the deep-sea bed; then,
in the shape of sponge-skeletons and spicules*; next, of
silica in its gelatinous and perfectly colloidal condition; and,
finally, in the form of the flints.

In short, every imbedded pseudomorph, without exception,
consists not of pure but of impure flint; in other words, it
becomes cherty, and ought to be in the strictest sense regarded
as an “dncluston.” Moreover the whole of these pseudo-
morphs included in, but not forming part and parcel of, the
pure flint (of course omitting the large foreign bodies, such as
Echinoderm and other shells, which so frequently form a
‘nucleus, around or within which the colloidal silica has col-
lected), if consolidated into compact masses, would rarely, if
ever, occupy a space that would not be insignificant in com-
parison with the bulk of the remaining mass of pure flint in
which they had been imprisoned. In their case replacement
of carbonate of lime by silica must undoubtedly have taken
place, precisely as it takes place when large masses of shell,
as, for example of Jnoceramus, have been accidentally en-
trapped in the still plastic and viscid colloid. But inasmuch
as it would be a palpable error to regard such foreign bodies as
integral portions of the flinty matrix, even though occurring in
the highest stage of silicification, so long as there is the slightest
trace of the opalescence resulting from the combination of the
silicic acid with a mere remnant of the calcareous or fibrous
tissues, so it would be a palpable error to regard the minute
organisms which are almost invariably imprisoned in the flint,
like insects in amber, as constituting integral portions of the -
imprisoning material. Or, per contra, if these are regarded as

* For the purposes of the present inquiry, I have deemed it inexpedient
to include the Polycystina, and other minute siliceous-shelled structures,
the silica of which, though undoubtedly contributing their quota to
the general volume of the flints, exists in such a comparatively small
proportion as not to deserve mention in discussing the general question
of the flint-formation.

178 Dr. Wallich on the Origin of the

integral portions of the flint structure, so must the cherty rind
or crust of the nodular flints, and the white outer coating of
the tabular layers, both of which are due merely to the
accidental entanglement in the still viscid colloidal mass of
silica of minute calcareous organisms and their debris, “ the
imperfectly silicified layer of chalk remaining as the white layer
of its surface,” as it is very properly described by Sollas, be
also thus regarded—a conclusion that would obviously be
absurd.

Were the replacement theory applicable except in the case
of the cherty varieties, there would be no such thing as pure
flint ; but we should have in lieu of it a composite mass, not
homogeneous and, at times, almost translucent, but a substance
identical in every respect with the cherty core that occasionally
occupies what was, in the nascent state of the nodule, a portion
of calcareous mud around which the colloidal mass of silica and
protoplasm combined had closed in so as to form an internal
chamber or cavity, the outer surface of the never absolutely
silicified contents passing transitionally, though sometimes
somewhat rapidly, from perfectly pronounced chert to perfectly
pronounced flint.

It is true that Mr. Sollas seems to have such unlimited faith
in the silicifying powers of his hypothesis that he sees no
difficulty in supposing that ‘ concentration of the silica”’ from
the “silicate of animal matter,” formed by the combination
of silicic acid with animal matter of various kinds, may take
place by the extrication of the organic part of the compound ;”’
though he admits that this supposition is a ‘ pure assump-
tion which agrees very well with other well known facts in
chemistry” (doc. cit. p. 456). At page 454 he says, “ In all
these and similar cases the silica, concentrated by the diss7-
pation of the animal matter, which seemed in the first place to
imprison it from solution, might remain in the crystalloid or
the colloid state; at this distance of time we cannot determine.”
But even this extreme and ambiguously expressed view of the
potentialities of colloid matter would hardly be tenable in these
days, as explaining the only practicable way in which the an-
nihilation—for it must be that or nothing—of the basal organic
- substance could be brought about which enters into the con-
stitution of every shell and spicule, and which contains one
elementary body that is certainly not an ingredient of pure
flint, and could be got rid of only by entering into chemical union
with another of the released elements to form carbonic acid.
How comes it, then, that the constituent elements of the basal
organic matter of the Foraminiferal and other calcareous, and,
indeed, of all siliceous-shelled organisms, including the sponges

Flints of the Upper or White Chalk. 179

themselves (whether we bury our heads and call it spzculin*,
or glairine{t, or acanthine{, or even Bathybine§), if all
absolutely ‘ dissipated,” or “ extricated,” should leave any
pseudomorphic forms behind at all? If pseudomorphs, the
pseudomorph must represent something that has been re-

laced. But under the extraordinary conditions assumed by
Mr. Sollas they can represent nothing—a logical situation
from which I shall certainly not attempt to dislodge them, for
most obvious reasons.

I may here mention another of the reasons which induce
me to reject the replacement theory as applicable to the true
flint. Itis the fact that, were no powerful restraining influ-
ence at work on the sea-bed wherever the calcareous deposits
occur, such as arises out of the nearly absolute insolubility in
sea-water of sponge and Foraminiferal protoplasm, and of the
now gelatinous and colloid silica in combination with it, instead
of well-defined strata of chalk alternating with nodular and
tabular layers of flint, the stratum of the one substance never
encroaching upon or becoming deeply fused into the stratum
of the other so as to render it doubtful where chalk entirely
ends and silica begins (evidence being in this wise furnished
of their insulation from each other being dependent on some
chemical or molecular agency present in the one which is
absent in the other), the replacement process would have had
no definite limits, and must have been exerted indetermi-
nately. ‘This would have resulted in the production, in lieu
of stratified chalk with intercalated and conformable layers of
flint, of siliceous limestone, either with or without concre-
tionary masses of chert distributed through it, probably with-
_ out any regard to regularity. And, lastly, we should certainly
not meet with nodular flints bearing unmistakable evidence of
a highly colloidal origin. Nay, it is perhaps not going too
far to say that, in such a case, the entire mass of organic rock
known as chalk would, through the replacement of the whole
of its carbonate of lime by silica, which had penetrated in a
state of very dilute aqueous solution into every nook and

‘® Prof. Sollas’s paper, p. 445.

+ Alexis Julien, in ditto, p. 457.

t ‘The Atlantic, by Sir Wyville Thomson, vol. i. p. 340.

§ G. C. Wallich, supra. I would repeat here what I stated in a
footnote at p. 73 of my paper on the Flints, that I used the word “ proto-
plasm” only because it is less specialized than either sarcode or albumen.
It will be time enough to give it a distinctive name, as applied to
enveloping albuminoid substance of the sponges or the basal organic
substance of their siliceous parts, when we really know in what the
distinction between the various guises under which protoplasm appears
shall be more precisely determined than it has hitherto been.

180 Dr. Wallich on the Origin of the

cranny, have become converted into one stupendous pseudo-
morphic mass of compact silicified limestone.

It must not be imagined, however, that the views now so
confidently advocated are based on mere assumption unsup-
ported by a fair amount of relevant evidence—as relevant
perhaps as any evidence can be that relates to natural opera-
tions that may in times past have been, or may even now be,
carried on at abyssal depths in the ocean*. I have from time
to time, during a long-continued study of the flint question,
seen specimens of limestone thickly studded with fossil dia-
toms, not one of which, even when examined under a micro-
scopic power amply sufficient to exhibit any loss of substance
or form, exhibited the least trace of having undergone solu-
tion; the calcareous matrix of the limestone, crystalline and
apparently deposited from solution, enclosed the diatom-valves,
which remained as distinct from each other, although in the
closest mechanical contact, as it was possible for them to be.
It is, doubtless, both possible and probable that some of the
more delicate of these structures may have undergone com-
plete solution ; for, as pointed out by me nearly twenty years
ago, the Acanthometre, a remarkable and very beautiful group
of siliceous organisms inhabiting only the surface-waters of
the open ocean, often in immense numbers, are never found in
recent or fossil oceanic deposits. ‘This I showed to be the
result of the unusually large admixture of basal protoplasm
with silica, of which their spines are composed, and which
imparts to them a very distinct optical character, causing them,
in virtue of this excess of colloidal matter, invariably to dis-
solve away in sea-water before their remains can sink down
to the bottom. Some diatoms likewise present this character ; .
and accordingly these may, if they formerly existed, have
vanished from the limestone under notice. But, as already
stated, the whole of those still visible remain perfectly intact,
and, when seen in delicately cut sections, retain their characters
so perfectly as to enable their marine origin to be positively
determined.

As bearing directly on this question, I will here quote
from my ‘ North-Atlantic Sea-bed,’ published in 1862, with
a view to show that even at that early date I had given the
subject some careful consideration, though all my conclu-

* It is almost needless to point out that, in all questions relating to the
conditions and changes taking place at the bottom of the ocean, assump-
tion and hypothesis must, for many a day to come, occupy the place of
demonstrated facts. Hypotheses are the advanced guard of knowledge,
and, if properly equipped and cautiously sent forth, minimize the risks of
fallacy when exploring an unknown region in science.

Flints of the Upper or White Chalk. 181

sions may not bave been strictly accurate :—“ It is probable
that the saline and mineral substances present in sea-water
exercise a much more marked effect on the formation of the
organic deposits of the deeper zones of the ocean than has been
admitted under the ‘antibiotic’ view so often referred to.
From the nature of the difficulties by which the inquiry is
surrounded, not only is the chief portion of our knowledge
regarding the deep-sea bed rather of a theoretigal than a prac-
tical kind, but unfortunately it must long continue to be so.
It is therefore doubly expedient to test this knowledge by
the light of every fact that science or accident may throw in
Our way. /s. si). If we examine the siliceous concretions, our
perplexities increase rather than diminish ; for whilst remains
of siliceous-shelled organisms are to be met with in them, it is
very remarkable that they do not belong to the family of
siliceous-shelled Rhizopods that next to the Foraminifera are
most largely represented at the bed of the ocean, namely the
Polycystina; and there ts no authenticated example up to the
present period of a Polycystine shell having been detected in a
flint. FHrom the nature of the hydrosilicates, we could hardly
expect to find the forms of siliceous organisms preserved ; hence
it is possible that the mineral atoms of the Polycystina have
become merged as it were into the substance of the masses.
But since we constantly detect siliceous spicules of sponges,
which have not yielded to disintegration though similarly
formed, it is difficult to reconcile the apparent anomaly. If
we regard the concretions as principally made up of sponge-
spicules, the case is but little altered ; for the pseudomorphs of
the calcareous shells of the Foraminifera are plentiful in their
substance, and indicate that the conditions under which they
were formed and silicified were such as might have been
shared by the testaceous Rhizopods generally” (op. cit.
pp. 120, 121). “ Again, in those marine deposits in which
the Diatomacee are sufficiently abundant and well marked to
indicate that they had lived in the immediate locality, it may
be taken for granted either that the water was shallow or that
the deposit was formed along a coast-line, s¢nce no Diatomacee
live at greater depths than trom 400 to 500 fathoms. In the
deep-sea beds where Diatomacez occur, the characters of the
species, their variety, and their limited numbers, at once show
they had been drifted from distant shallows, or were free
floating surface forms which had subsided to the bottom after
death. Whilst as yet we have no positive proof that the
Polycystina live at extreme depths, it is a very significant
circumstance that the large assemblages of these organisms
hitherto met with in such a recent state as to indicate vitality

182 Dr. Wallich on the Origin of the

occur in deep water, and that the forms taken alive at the
immediate surface of the ocean in some latitudes are sufficiently
distinct to prove that the same species do not occur at the
surface and at the bottom without undergoing marked modifi-
cation. On the other hand, there is reason to believe that
some of the siliceous organisms met with in a living condition
at the surface of the open ocean cannot live at any great
depth, and that, from some peculiarity in molecular constitution,
the siliceous portion of their structure yields to the solvent
power of the water. Thus the Acanthometrina, a small group
of organisms with siliceous frameworks of extreme symmetry
and of such characteristic shape as to be readily distinguish-
able, occur in tolerable profusion in tropical and subtropical
latitudes ; but, strange to say, not a trace of thetr siliceous re-
mains ts to be found either in recent or fossil oceanic deposits”
(ibid. pp. 126, 127).

I have still in my possession unmounted and mounted mate-
rial obtained by me in 1857 from the surface of the Indian
Ocean, and Southern and Mid-Atlantic Ocean, containing
specimens, in considerable numbers, of Acanthometre, Poly-
cystina, Dictyochide, Diatomace, and Spherozoide — the
mounted specimens in Canada balsam, the crude material in
dilute alcohol. In both cases, the Acanthometrw, and some of
the very delicate oceanic Diatomace, with the thin-shelled
Spherozoide, were the first to show signs of solution, about
ten years after they were obtained. In twenty years most of
these had vanished as visible structures, but the fluffy resi-
duum of their sarcodic bodies remained. Now some of the
more solidly built forms are beginning to yield, and probably
will do so in the course of a few scores of years, which, it is
almost needless to say, is but a moment in comparison with
the periods involved in any of the great chemical or molecular
changes brought about in Nature. But, surely, no fact could
be more clearly indicative of the potency residing in proto-
plasm than the one just furnished, these minute siliceous struc-
tures having, undoubtedly, given way under the powerful
colloidal properties of what was once their own body-sub-
stance.

What, then, do these facts prove ? First and foremost, they
prove, by the presence of forms belonging to genera which
invariably live along coast-lines*, and possessing stalk or
cushion-like processes whereby they anchor themselves to rocks
or shells, or algee at the bottom of the sea, that the deposit
in which their remains occur could not have been formed at
any great distance from land, and that they were, in all pro-

* At depths probably never exceeding 50 or 60 fathoms.

Flints of the Upper or White Chalk. 183

bability, drifted by tidal or other currents into those areas in
which they became finally accumulated. This, coupled with
the almost entire absence of sponge-spicules, tends moreover
to prove that there were no siliceous sponges in those areas,
and, consequently, that the only substance which would have
ensured their solution, namely sponge or Foraminiferal pro-
toplasm (for in like manner no Foraminifera are observable
in the limestone), was entirely wanting. Hence their im-
munity from destruction and perfect preservation in the
limestone.

Of the existence of pure Diatomacean deposits at much
greater depths in the ocean and at vastly greater distances
from land than those just named, there is, as every biologist
knows, abundant evidence—for example, in the antarctic
regions, where they were discovered by Sir Joseph Hooker in
1843, and thirty years later by the naturalists on board the
‘Challenger.’ I have now before me sections of a Norwegian
limestone literally crowded with marine diatoms of the kind
already described, which are also in the same perfect state of
preservation,—the inference I draw from these facts being
that the unaltered condition of the organisms under notice
is due to the very limited power of sea-water at mode-
rate depths, and consequently under moderate pressure, even
when aided by abundant products of animal and vegetable
decomposition, to reduce silica to a colloidal state; and, con-
versely, that the superabundance, over the deep-sea calcareous
areas, of siliceous sponges and their concomitant protoplasmic
investment furnishes us with a highly probable and satisfac-
tory explanation why flint-formation has taken place under
one determinate set of conditions and has failed entirely to
take place where these conditions are absent.

Reasons have already been given by me for regarding the
simple deposition of silica from an aqueous solution, whether
in the condition of flint which Mr. Sollas describes as “ erys-
talline,’ or of pure rock-crystal, as furnishing no parallel
whatever to the process of the true chalk-flint formation as it
occurs in the chalk strata, in which I contend there is no
deposition of silica in the ordinary acceptation of the term, but
a still more simple process of solidification of two gelatinous
colloids ‘ more or less rich” (to quote an expression of Mr.
Graham’s) ‘‘in combined water as at first produced,” but
which gradually part with their ‘“‘ combined water” to the
surrounding medium, under the dialyzing action of their own
gelatinous substance, and become more and more consolidated
‘until the period arrives when they have lost the whole of their
“hydration,” and then “ appear as a colloidal glassy hyalite”’

184 Dr. Wallich on the Origin of the

(in other words, as typical flint): see an invlauable paper by
Mr. Graham, “‘ On the Colloidal Properties of Silicic Acid and
other Colloidal Substances,” Proc. Roy. Soc. for June 2,
1864, p. 335, where nearly the whole of the changes and
processes I have described, although not with relation to deep-
sea siliceous deposits, will be found most lucidly set forth.

Mr. Sollas alludes throughout his paper, with one exception
to be hereafter mentioned, to the flints as being composed of
“crystalline silica.” This expression strikes me as being so
remarkable that I must quote some of the passages in which
it occurs. Thus, at p. 445, “ The silica of the sponge-skele-
tons occurs in conjunction (or probably in combination) with an
organic basis known as spiculin ; on solution it is liberated
from the spiculin, and exists in a colloid state, whence it
readily passes into the pectous condition, and subsequently
becomes hyaline; it is, moreover, probable that, under condi-
tions not yet investigated, a solution of colloid silica may give
rise directly to silica in a crystalline form.” Again, at
p- 455, alluding to the silicified Blackdown shells, he says :—
“The crystalline silica, which the percolating water carries in
solution, passes through the shell, and in some cases, under
favourable conditions, crystallizes out in long fine prisms.”
At p. 456:—“ Thus the crystalline state of the flint nodules
offers us no evidence for or against the theory of the formation
of these [the Blackdown] fossils.” And “‘ from this process of
reasoning we conclude that colloidal silica has the power of
changing, in course of time, into a static or crystalline condi-
tion.” And, lastly, reverting to p. 445, from which the first
of these extracts was taken, we find the “ crystalline” view
thus emphasized :—‘‘ If it be objected that in this expanded
explanation fact and conjecture are mixed together, I to some
extent admit it, but at the same time remark that there is no
conjecture in the statement that the silica which passes into
solution is very different from the silica which has passed
out of solution. The one may be conveniently called
organic, and the other mineral silica; the properties of the
two are strikingly different ; and the process which has really
happened has been a solution of organic silica and a deposi-
tion of mineral silica, not a solution and deposition of the
same kind of silica.” ‘The last truisms are quoted only be-
cause, as the entire passage stands, the term “ mneral
silica” would seem from the context to be a convertible term
for ‘ crystalline silica.”

On the other hand, I subscribe to the opinion which, if I
mistake not, is very generally entertained by chemists, that
the flints are neither perfectly pure, nor, under any circum-

Flints of the Upper or White Chalk. 185

stances, a truly crystalline form of silica—silica being of
course the principal but not the sole constituent of the black
flint met with in the chalk, which is a compound substance
consisting of a purely flinty matrix, within which varying
numbers of the disintegrated remains of minute calcareous
and siliceous organisms may almost invariably be detected on
careful examination. ‘Thus, in Phillips’s ‘ Elementary Intro-
duction to Mineralogy,’ the following, according to Klaproth,
are the constituents of flint—“98 per cent. of silica, with
minute proportions of oxide of iron, lime, alumina, and
water.”

It may also be here stated with advantage that, according
to Graham, silicic acid or silica becomes more and more
insoluble the purer or more free from combined water it be-
comes. Hence the gelatinous compound formed by the ready
and intimate combination of organic silica with, and also
within, a mass of protoplasm, which ts already an insoluble
colloid, is to all intents and purposes no longer either soluble
or miscible with water; whilst on the question of crystal-
lization Mr. Graham says, “I may add that no solution,
weak or strong, of silicic acid in water has shown any dispo-
sition to deposit crystals, but ALWAYS appears, on drying, as a
colloidal glassy hyalite. The formation of quartz crystals at
a low temperature, of so frequent occurrence in nature, re-
mains a mystery” (Graham, loc. cit. p. 335).

It is of the utmost importance to bear these last-named
characteristics of silica constantly in mind, as upon them de-
pends the preeminent tendency of this substance to enter into
colloidal combination with any albuminoid substance, such as
animal protoplasm. Qn the other hand, it is equally impor-
tant to bear in mind that silica, the moment it has assumed its
gelatinous state, although holding in combination a certain
portion of water, zs practically insoluble in water. Hence its
inherent tendency, when combined directly with protoplasm,
not to imbibe more water, but to part with all but the infini-
tesimally minute trace that remains in combination with it up
to the period when it is exposed to atmospheric agencies on
dry land—this expulsion of its combined water being the
result partly of dialytic action, as already mentioned, and
partly of its idiosyncratic tendency to contract (Graham, loc.
cit. p. 336) more and more upon itself, and thus favour the
expulsion of all but the last residuary quantity, before final
and complete consolidation into flint*. ‘This consolidation is

* I have seen an interesting fact stated (but where, Iam at this mo-
ment unable to remember), that flint-workers always find the flint softer
and more easy to cut away in flakes immediately after it is extracted

186 Dr. Wallich on the Origin of the

also shown by Graham (Joc. cit. p. 337) to be greatly assisted
by the presence of alkaline salts and more particularly of
carbonate of lime.

According to Mr. Sollas’s statement already referred to,
silicic acid forms, with albumen and gelatin, chemical com-
pounds, silicate of albumen, and silicate of gelatin (ante,
p- 163, note), and Mr. Sollas reasons upon it as if it were an
indisputable fact. It may be so; but, until I have some sub-
stantial proofs of the fact, I confess I shall continue disin-
clined to believe that any chemical compound, such as silicic
acid, or protoplasm, can be broken up into its elements by
simple mechanical means, such as solution or diffusion. Thus
glycerine and water may be mixed in any quantities without
losing their chemical identity. So may two gelatinous and
colloidal substances, as in the case of silicic acid and proto-
plasm, as soon after the death of the parent organism as the
purely material forces step into the field to cause a combina-
tion of the silica, which had, én the first instance only, yielded
so far, but no further, to the guast-chemical action by which
silicic acid, in the presence of a powerful colloid, exchanged
one unstable condition in which it can exist without chemical
disruption, for another unstable condition in which it can also
do so.

On these grounds I contend that the union of these two
substances is a purely mechanical combination or intermix-
ture, whereby they become amalgamated, as it were, ¢nto an
organic alloy, capable of retaining just sufficient “ combined
water’’ not to interfere, in the least degree, with their mutual
insolubility in the surrounding water. Organic silica, or, in
other words, s¢licic hydrate, in the presence of protoplasm only,
passes into its gelatinous phase as soon as the preservative
action of the diving organism ceases with its death. ‘‘ Decom-
position ” at the sea-bed, in the presence of the various saline
preservative substances contained in sea-water, the low tem-
perature prevailing, and the stupendous pressure (which, in all
probability, prevents any gaseous body from existing, save in
its fluid condition), must necessarily be an extremely slow
process. In the combined state of colloidal silica and proto-
plasm their insolubility helps still further to protect them from
decomposition by excluding substances which might otherwise
enter into chemical combination with them. They constitute
an independent regnum in regno, the permanence of which is
interfered with only by the inherent and powerful tendency of

from the chalk rock. This would appear to be in some way related to
its retaining its permanent minute residuary quantity of water only until
its exposure to the aetion of the atmosphere.

Flints of the Upper or White Chalk. 187

the combined mass of colloidal silicic acid and protoplasm to
contract upon itself, and thus to bring about, by slow and sure
degrees, the separation of its combined water. But it is not
until the transition is actually imminent, from the plastic con-
dition of the still nascent flint nodule to the final consolidated
state when the nodule may be regarded as complete, that the
minute residuum of water, enabled under the enormous pres-
sure to retain a portion of pure silica in solution, yields, for
the first time since it formed a component portion of the sili-
ceous mass, to purely chemical forces, and thus, by dialytic
action, escapes in its elementary form from its long imprison-
ment. It is during the entire period, dating from the death
of the parent organisms that furnish the silica and protoplasm,
up to that at which the final consolidation takes place, that the
innate tendency to the assumption, by the continually con-
tracting mass, of the peculiar external forms which so signally
characterize the flint nodules, exercises a determining effect
upon them—this effect being in all probability at its maximum
of energy in the early stages of the masses, and at its miniémum
in their latest stages, but never absent or materially inter-
rupted in the quiescent solitudes of the ocean. It shall be
shown hereafter that dead and effete albuminoid matter, as well
as living, evinces this tendency to assume what I have termed,
in the absence of a preferable word, amebiform outlines.

The varying number and contiguity of the flint nodules in
different strata of chalk, and in different parts of the same
chalk-beds, prove that these variations are due to varying
extent, bulk, and rapidity of growth of the sponge-fields and
their enveloping nidus of protoplasm, both the siliceous and
the albuminoid portions of these organisms being contributories
to the flint-formation. Did the nodular flints really originate,
as alleged by Mr. Sollas, in silicified chalk—if by this expres-
sion we are to understand that a siliceous solution derived
from the solvent action of sea-water on the spicules, aided by
a partial admixture with the products of decayed organisms,
“yeplaced the calcareous material of the ooze,.. . that siliceous
chalk (not flint) was the result, . . . and, subsequently, this
siliceous chalk became converted into black flint, an incom-
pletely silicified layer of chalk remaining as the white layer of
its surface””—it is very difficult, if not impossible, to conceive
why or how such flint assumed, under any ulterior conditions
short of re-solution and combination with a plentiful supply of
colloid matter, the amcebiform outlines I have so often alluded
to. The replacement of carbonate of lime—whether in sponge-
cavities, shells, the tests of Foraminifera, or masses of calcareous
ooze—has never, that I am aware, been found coupled with

188 Dr. Wallich on the Origin of the

change of form. On the contrary, we have in almost every
pseudomorph, whether consisting of carbonate of lime after
silica, or silica after carbonate of lime, or an admixture of both
carbonate of lime and silica, a well-defined retention of the
general outline of the object, although extending only to the
ghostly remnant of the organic basal matter to which reference
is made.

The necessary evidence is, I submit, therefore complete, of
the black flint* not being the product, in any sense, of the
replacement of one mineral substance by another, but the
direct resultant of the gradual transition of its silica from
a gelatinous to the “ pectous”’ condition, during which the
last removable vestige of its “‘ hydration” is expelled and the
production of “ the hard stony mass of vitreous substance”
called flint is consummated.

As these remarks apply more or less to the entire flint-
formation, including the cherty varieties, I hereto append a
few short passages from Mr. Graham's paper on silicic acid, to
which I have already been so deeply indebted for guidance in
the present inquiry, as I should of course wish to give the
whole weight of that illustrious physicist’s scientific authority
to the statements that have been put forward on the subject.
Having done so, I shall consider my case concluded, so far as
the mode of production of the flints is concerned.

“ A dominating quality of colloids,’ Mr. Graham wrote,
“is the tendency of their particles to adhere, aggregate, and
contract. This idio-attraction is obvious in the gradual
thickening of the liquid, and, when it advances, leads to
pectization. In the jelly itself the specific contraction in
question, or syneresis, still proceeds, causing separation of
water, with the division into a coagulum and serum, and
ending in the production of the hard stony mass of vitreous
substance, which may be anhydrous, or nearly so, when the
water is allowed to escape by evaporation. . . . Bearing in
mind that the colloidal phasis of matter is the result of
a peculiar attraction and aggregation of molecules, never
entirely absent from matter, but greatly more developed
in some substances than in others, it is not surprising that
colloidal substances spread on all sides into the liquid and
solid conditions. . . . It is unnecessary to return here to the
ready pectization of liquid silicic acid by alkaline salts,
including some of very sparing solubility (such as carbonate
of lime), beyond stating that the presence of carbonate of lime

* Throughout my paper I have spoken of the black funt and the

typical flint of the upper or white chalk, only because the characters I
wish to account for are most strikingly seen in it.

Flints of the Upper or White Chatk. 189

in water was observed to be incompatible with the coexistence
of soluble silicic acid, till the proportion of the latter was
reduced to nearly 1 in 10,000” (loc. cit. anted, pp. 336, 337).

Of course, between the most highly developed cherty form
of flint and that in which is an admixture of foreign particles,
of whatever kind these may be, there is an almost infinite
gradation, depending, as ] have in a former page pointed out,
on the replacement, now taking effect for the first time, of
carbonate of lime by silica. In order to understand by what
very simple means this result is brought about, I will endea-
vour to illustrate it by the diagrams in the Plate accompanying
this paper, representing four of the most common forms in
which the typical nodular flints are met with in the Chalk, all
peculiarities as regards external form being of course dis-
pensed with as irrelevant to the present inquiry. For this
reason each of the four nodules is supposed to have been more
or less spherical (a condition, by the way, in which they are
not unfrequently met with), and to have been split in half, so
as to exhibit the flat and broken surface of one of the hemi-
spheres.

In figure 1 we have a solid mass of typical black flint, sur-
rounded exteriorly by a whitish crust or layer, the thickness of
which is immaterial, inasmuch as it depends almost entirely on
the degree of comminution and purity of the deposit in the spot
at which it was formed. ‘The portion which is now a mass
of the typical black flint (marked B in all the figures) con-
sisted originally of an accumulation of effete sponge-spicules
and network, which, immediately after the death of the parent
sponge to which they belonged, became loosely distributed
within the substance of the also effete investing protoplasmic
nidus *. Here they would be retained, more or less free

* “Hiffete ” is not meant to denote a state of decomposition in the common
acceptation of the word, inasmuch as every known fact tends to show that
no such process takes place at profound depths in the ocean. Disintegra-
tion (7. e. tumbling to pieces) may, and no doubt does, take place, either
in obedience to mechanical, chemical, or molecular forces, under the ope-
ration of which dead organic matter is enabled to enter into new combi-
nations. This distinction is more important than it at first sight appears to
be, since there is reason to believe that in such an elementary substance as
sponge-protoplasm, and likewise in the examples known to every algologist,
in which the development of a prctoplasmic nidus or “ thallus” is often so
enormous in comparison with the dimensions and apparent capabilities of
secretion of the organisms producing it, that it is extremely difficult to
understand by what subtle or simple function (if it be indeed simple) such
a massive adjunct can be produced and maintained for lengthened periods.
The singularly rapid disruption of this adjunct, following upon the death
of the organism of which it formed a part, furnishes one of the most in-
structive and significant commentaries we could desire upon the complete

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. vii. 14

190 Dr. Wallich on the Origin of the

from contact with sea-water, owing to the insolubility and
coherence of the protoplasm, and would in due time yield to
the powerful solvent influence of this substance (an influence
which is at its maximum when exerted between substances
that are colloidal), and eventually, by parting with their
hydration in obedience to the law which governs these bodies,
as their state of pectization became more perfect, would become
consolidated into black flint.

Wherein, then, does the external whitish layer or crust of
the nodule, and which also forms a crust or coating over the
surface of the tabular layers of flint, differ in its mode of
formation from that I have just been describing—namely, of
the central mass of black flint? The explanation, I contend,
is both simple and conclusive. At this stage of the forma-
tion of the nodular mass (not in point of time, but of material)
replacement of the carbonate of lime by silica, rarely, if ever,
a complete process *, comes into operation. An examination
of sections of nodules embracing both a portion of the true flint,
and of its outer investing crust of chert will show that the transi-~
tion from pure flint to well-pronounced chert is a gradual one,
so gradual, indeed, that it would often be difficult, were not a
difference of colour apparent, to recognize it, except by the im-
pairment of the vitreous character, conchoidal fracture, and
translucence which distinguish the flint from the crust of chert.
Seen, however, as a section under the microscope, it is always
visible. On the outer aspect of the cherty crust, on the other
hand, there is no gradation observable either as regards colour
or texture; for, although in nearly every nodular mass a
certain quantity of unmetamorphosed chalk is closely adherent
to it externally, a very little trouble will show that not a
trace of siliceous percolation has extended beyond the peri-

dependence of organic matter for its continuance, as living matter, upon
the unknown quantity we call life. A mere breath destroys the link
that binds together the animate and inanimate ; and, as if eager to regain
the sway they once enjoyed, when life “was not,” the material forces
of nature set about their normal task of disintegrating and recon-
structing the elements which had for a time so successfully set them at
defiance. If we extend this conception (and there is no reasonable
ground for saying we have no warrant for so doing) to the stupendous
development of sponge-life at the bed of the ocean, we shall not expe-
rience difficulty in comprehending how the silica and the protoplasm of
the sponge, which respected each other’s rights so long as the vital force
presided over them, should, under the now unrestrained action of their
powerful combining tendencies, interact upon each other in the way
that has here been indicated.

* Mr. Sollas (at p. 449 of his paper) speaks of the white outer crust of
the flints as ‘an incompletely silicified layer of chalk.”

Flints of the Upper or White Chalk. 191

phery of the cherty wall, the adhesion of the cretaceous
particles being due solely to their having become imbedded
here and there, while the flinty mass was yet in an unconso-
lidated state, into little pits or cavities formed by the pressure
of the cretaceous particles themselves, or into other equally
accidental irregularities of the surface of the nascent nodule.
The adherence of any. portion of chalk to the nodule is a mere
mechanical adherence arising out of the grip thus secured.

Now, according to the replacement theory, the entire mass
of black flint was at one time a mass of calcareous ooze,
which, becoming impregnated with a fluid aqueous solution
of silica, became gradually silicified. Had this really taken
place, one of two things must have happened: either the re-
‘placement of the calcareous material must have begun from
some central point or points, by the admission of the siliceous
solution into the centre of the mass through some channels
which communicated with the surrounding medium—in which
case a period must have arrived at which the external layer
of the mass undergoing silicification must also have come
under the influence of the replacing siliceous fluid and have
in its turn become completely converted into black flint, the
replacement thus extending radially from the centre of the
mass to its periphery ; or the replacement must have taken
place from without and extended centrewards. It will be
obvious, however, that under the latter supposition the outer
coating must of necessity have been the first portion of the
mass to be converted into flint. But it is almost needless to
observe that in neither case is the theory of replacement
borne out, inasmuch as in the first-named case the outer
coating must sometimes, at least, have been converted into
black flint—a condition in which it is never found; and in
the second case, the silicification having begun from the peri-
phery towards the centre, nodules must occasionally have
been met with in which a coating of black flint (not possess-
ing a cherty external layer) surrounded the yet unmetamor-
phosed central caleareous mass—another condition in which
we never find it unless under the wholly exceptional circum-
stances where the nodule has, after separation from its chalky
matrix, undergone attrition.

In the early nascent state of each nodule no chemical
replacement of mineral for mineral has taken place on either
side—the extensions of the colloidal siliceous jelly, and the
intervening masses of calcareous deposit interlacing mechani-
cally, and changing their relative boundaries only in obedi-
ence to the slow contraction going on in the colloidal mass
towards its own centre or a centre or point d’apput consisting

192 Dr. Wallich on the Origin of the

of some shell or other foreign substance that happened to
come in the way and became thus accidentally enveloped
either partially or wholly. According to Mr. Graham, “a
dominating quality of colloids is the tendency of their particles
to adhere, aggregate, and contract. In the jelly itself the spe-
cific contraction or syneresis still proceeds, causing separation
of water with a division into a clot and serum, and ending tn
the production of a hard stony mass of vitreous structure”
(Graham, “ On Silicie Acid and other Colloids,” Proc. Roy.
Soe. vol. xi. no. 65, June 1864, p. 336).

Here, then, is the key to my hypothesis, and, as I conceive,
proof that the characteristic features, including the stratifica-
tion and nodulation of the flints, are due to the inherent
properties of the double colloid formed by the intense dispo-
sition of the colloidal protoplasm to enter into mechanical
union (as in the case of glycerine and water) with the organic
silica of the sponge-spicules and network—this tendency
dating, however, only from the period when they ceased to be
integral portions of a living structure and had already become
only its residuary substances.

Having now explained, but still too cursorily to admit of
my producing all the evidence that could be adduced in sup-
port of my view, the processes whereby the nodules and tabular
layers of flint and the cherty varieties are formed, from the
earliest to the latest stage of their nascent condition, it remains
for me to connect these with my hypothesis in such a manner
as to show :—firstly, the adequacy of the hypothesis to
account not for one, or two, but for all the distinguishing
features of the flint-formation as it now presents itself in
the Chalk; and, secondly, in what respects the replace-
ment and other theories that have been proposed must be
considered faulty and insufficient to account for any thing
more than the formation at the bed of the ocean of an impure
flint, and the silicification of certain calcareous-shelled creatures
which are entombed in the chalk and flit. I cannot secure
this end more readily and, under existing circumstances, more
appropriately than by quoting such portions of my former
paper as bear onmy hypothesis. But tor the reasons assigned
I should, of course, have been content to append reterences to
the pages in question.

Referring to the insufficiency of the hypothesis previously
offered in explanation of the Ilint-formation, I asked :—

“¢ Whence, then, did all the silica come? Why is it almost
invariably found existing in layers parallel to the stratitica-
tion of the Chalk? And what has really been its history,
from first to last ?

Flints of the Upper or White Chalk. 193

* Tt is to these questions that I hope, on the present occa-
sion, to be able to furnish such answers as shall, at all events,
form the groundwork of a good working hypothesis, and one
capable of further elaboration as time and opportunity permit.
Meanwhile I may be allowed to state that the conclusions
arrived at by me have their origin in the assumption that, in
the nearly total elimination of the organic silica from the
organic carbonate of lime, in the almost constant aggregation
of the colloid silica around some foreign body, in the ultimate
consolidation of the colloid material into nodular masses or
more or less continuous sheets, in the stratification of these
masses and sheets, and, collaterally, in the perfectly preserved
state of many of the Cretaceous fossils, are to be discerned the
successive stages of a metamorphic action, whereby the pro-
toplasmic matter and silica present on the sea-bed, after having
first passed through an organie phase capable of resisting dis-
integration and decay, became once more amenable to those
purely material forces in obedience to which they entered upon
their new and secondary phase as I lints *.

“But even yet the chain of metamorphic action must have
remained incomplete but for the manifest connexion which I
was fortunately enabled, in 1860, to trace out between each
of the successive stages referred to and a condition of things
at the sea-bed then for the first time noticed—namely, that the
entire mass of animal life there present is confined to the
immediate surface-layer of the muddy deposit, alternating
periods being thereby established, during which one of the
two predominant animal types (Foraminifera and Sponges)
gradually overwhelms and crushes out the other over indefinite
local areas, the strata of chalk in the one case, and the inter-
calated flint-beds in the other, being the issue of these contests.

“Should it be asked, Why, then, do we find so striking a
lithological difference between the Chalk and the Atlantic
mud? the answer is, because our specimens of the mud repre-
sent only the constituent materials forthcoming at a depth of
a few inches beneath the surface, where, if my hypothesis be
correct, there must needs be accumulated nearly the whole of
the silica. Whereas, were it possible to obtain specimens,
say, from a depth of even a few feet, we should find that all,
save the small residuary portion detected by analysis in the
Chalk, had in like manner been eliminated from the mud.”

* “Much valuable information ‘on Quartz and other Forms of Silica’

will be found in a paper bearing this title, from the pen of Prof. Kupert
Jones, F.R.S. Unfortunately [ was unable to avail myself of it, being
unaware of its existence until the present communication had been laid
before the Geological Society.”

194 Dr. Wallich on the Oriyin of the

“‘ A very important fact has to be here noticed in relation
to the siliceous materials which are supposed to be normally
and uniformly distributed throughout the substance of the
calcareous mud at the period of its deposition on the sea-bed.
In order to understand the full significance of this fact, it is
indispensable to recollect that, whereas the carbonate of lime
of the effete Globigerine and other foraminiferous shells is to
a certain extent redissolved in the water charged with an
excess of carbonic acid, and the amount thus abstracted is too
insignificant to produce any material diminution in the mass
of the calcareous deposit, nearly the whole of the organic, and
probably a not inconsiderable proportion of the inorganic
silica which has been found present in some specimens of the
Atlantic mud, is dissolved under the conditions that prevail.
For, whereas the calcareous matter is furnished partly from
the débris of Foraminifera which pass their existence only at
the bottom of the ocean, and partly from such as live at the
surface and subside to the bottom only when dead, the whole
of the silea-secreting organisms, with the solitary exception of
the sponges, subside to the bottom only after death. 'The result
is, that the whole of the organic silica, the moment it reaches
the bottom, comes into contact with the protoplasmic layer
and is retained by it. Hence the quantity present in every
sample of mud obtained (as all our samples hitherto have been)
by a mere dip into the superficial stratum of a few inches in
depth, does not fairly represent the percentage of silica contained
and supposed to be equally distributed in the substrata, but
only the accumulated amount of that substance which has been
getting accessions for an indefinite period from the superincum-
bent waters.

‘“Tn the case of the sponges that occur in such numbers on
every square yard of the calcareous mud, and live more or
less imbedded in the soft and luxuriantly developed nidus of
their own protoplasm, the result described must necessarily
take place in a still more signal degree, since every spicule,
and every particle of their siliceous débris, is not only formed
but accumulated within this protoplasmic environment.
Therefore, instead of there being from 25 to 35 per cent. of
silica, soluble and insoluble, in the calcareous mud, at a depth,
say, of eighteen or twenty-four inches below the surface there
is in all probability not more than is to be met with in an
average specimen of white chalk.

“Tf we follow out to its legitimate issue a continuance of
such conditions as have been here described, it is obvious
that a period must arrive when the protoplasmic masses
(which, owing to their inferior specifie gravity, always occupy

Flints of the Upper or White Chalk. 195

this position in relation to the calcareous mud, upon which
they may be said to float so as to form an intermediate stratum
between them and the superincumbent water) will become,
if not supersaturated with silica, at all events so highly
charged with it in a now colloid state more and more closely
approaching coagulation, as eventually to asphyxiate, so to
speak, the very organisms which have produced them.

‘“‘Tf we turn to the less prominent, because negative, con-
ditions that prevail at the sea-bed, we shall perceive that they
are of a kind specially favourable for securing uniformity of
results, both as regards the time occupied in their completion
and the nature of the changes which are effected by them.
Thus we know that the abyssal waters closely bordering on
the sea-bed itself are, in the majority of cases, in a state so
nearly approaching perfect quiescence, that no current of
sufficient energy exists to divert from their downward course
particles of matter so light and feathery as to have taken
probably many weeks, if not months, to sink down from the
surface of the sea to their final resting-place at the bottom.
On the other hand, there is nothing as yet known that could
lead to the inference that the periods required for the depo-
sition and consolidation of each succeeding stratum of chalk,
and its accompanying stratum of flints, bear any proportion to
those gradual and more rarely recurring secular changes in
the direction of the great oceanic currents which (to repeat
Sir Charles Lyell’s words) favour at one time in the same
area a supply of calcareous, and at another of siliceous matter ;
whilst, as a natural consequence, the prevailing uniformity of
the physical conditions must inevitably engender a corre-
sponding uniformity and simultaneousness in the development,
growth, and final death and decay of the various lower forms
of life that are under its inflnence. If this be true, we might
expect that over large areas of the calcareous sea-bed a very
preponderating number of the sponges would, almost simul-
taneously, spring into existence from the germs or gemmules
left by a preceding generation, and as simultaneously multiply
and die, to be succeeded in turn by another generation, and
soon. We are thus furnished with an auxiliary, though (as
1 shall presently show) by no means the most important,
factor in determining the simultaneous production of the flint
nodules and sheets over extended horizontal areas.”

“‘The stratification of the flints is due to the fact, already
touched upon in a previous page, that nearly the whole of the
silex derived from the Sponges on the one hand, and the
continual subsidence of minute dead siliceous organisms on
the other, is retained in the general protoplasmic layer, which

196 Dr. Wallich on the Origin of the

I have shown maintains its position on the immediate surface
of the calcareous deposit, and gradually dissolves the silex.
This layer, in virtue of its inferior specific gravity, rises with
every increase in the thickness of the deposit, until at last
the supersaturation of the protoplasmic masses with silex takes
place, and the first step towards the consolidation into flint
is accomplished—the continuity of sponge-life, and of the
various other forms which tenant the calcareous areas, being
secured through the oozy spaces which separate the sponge-
beds, and thus admit of both adult and larval forms having
free access to the overlying stratum of water. -

“‘ That the predisposition of silica, itself in reality a colloid,
to form colloidal combinations with albuminous and other
materials was known long before deep-sea exploration was
dreamt of, is a well-known historical fact ; it has been alluded
to by most of the writers who have attempted an explanation
of the mode of formation of the flints. But the various con-
ditions that present themselves, from the earliest elimination
of the silica from the sea-water to the period when it becomes
finally consolidated, have never, that I am aware, been con-
secutively followed out.

“ But that the colloidal diosyncrasy of silica performed a
much more important function in the phenomena connected
with the flints than has heretofore been supposed, appears to
me to be indicated by the evidence of the almost perfect
incorporation of the organic silica with a colloid material, the
unique Amebiform nodulation of the flints, and its homogene-
ousness, whether occurring in nodules, in continuous sheets
parallel to the stratification, or as sluggish overflows into
fissures in the Chalk. But for a very highly developed
colloidal condition of the materials, these peculiarities could
not, I conceive, have presented themselves so uniformly
throughout the formation. From a mere aqueous solution
the deposit of silica would have exhibited totally different
characters: there would have been a general infiltration into
the substance of the chalk, the particles of which would thereby
have been cemented together, so as to form a siliceous lime-
stone; the various minute organic forms in which the silica
showed itself, though, no doubt, capable of solution to a
limited extent in water charged more or less highly with
carbonic acid, and aided perhaps by the stupendous pressure,
would have occasionally left more pronounced traces of their
original structure than is observable in the body of the flints ;
probably all the fossils would have been either infiltrated with
silica, or a substitution of that substance would have taken
place even more frequently than we find it ; there would have

Flints of the Upper or White Chalk. 197

been no signs of the specific contractility pertaining to
colloidal silicic acid; the resulting siliceous mineral, instead
of appearing, when not rendered cherty by insoluble matter,
as ‘a colloidal glassy hyalite, would have presented itself
either as compact quartz, or possibly as an alkaline silicate ;
and, lastly, there would have been wanting the evidence of
the greater portion of the siliceous material having been, as it
were, continuously waylaid and absorbed, as it descended
from the surface of the ocean, into the colloidal protoplasmic
mass resting upon the immediate upper surface of the calca-
reous deposit.

“Tn conclusion, I beg to express a hope that, although the
length already attained by the present communication has
debarred me from bringing forward a number of important
facts and observations which would have materially strength-
ened my arguments, considering the complex nature of the
inquiry and the special difficulties belonging to it, the follow-
ing conclusions have, on the whole, been fairly sustained :—
1. That the silica of the flints is derived mainly from the
sponge-beds and sponge-fields which exist in immense pro-
fusion over the areas occupied by the Globigerine or calcareous
‘ooze. 2. That the deep-sea sponges, with their environ-
ment of protoplasmic matter, constitute by far the most
important and essential factors in the production and stratifi-
cation of the flints. 3. That, whereas nearly the whole of
the carbonate of lime, derived partly from Foraminifera and
other organisms that have lived and died at the bottom, and
partly from such as have subsided to the bottom only after
death, goes to build up the calcareous stratum, nearly the
whole of the silica, whether derived from the deep-sea sponges
or from surface Protozoa, goes to form the flints. 4. That
the sponges are the only really important contributors to the
flint-formation that live and die at the sea-bed. 5. That the
flints are just as much an organic product as the Chalk itself.
6. That the stratification of the flint is the immediate result
of all sessile Protozoan life being confined to the superficial
layer of the muddy deposits. 7. That the substance which
received the name of ‘Bathybius,’ and was declared to be an
independent living Moneron, is, in reality, sponge-protoplasm.
8. That no valid Uithological distinction exists between the
Chalk and the calcareous mud of the Atlantic ; and pro tanto,
therefore, the calcareous mud may be, and in all probability
is, ‘a continuation of the Chalk formation.’ ”

The history of Bathybius is too well known to the scientific
world to need resuscitation in this place. Suffice it, therefore, to
say that Sir Wyville Thomson and Dr. Carpenter found what

198 Dr. Wallich on the Origin of the

they conceived to be vast masses of it in dredging in the
North Atlantic, at the same time that they discovered vast
numbers of vitreous sponges whose root-fibres and spicules
were densely mixed up with it “like hairs in mortar.” The
deep-sea explorations on board the ‘Challenger’ confirmed
the existence over other areas of the ocean besides the North
Atlantic, where they had first been found, of like vast accu-
mulations of sponges. On this all but conclusive evidence I
ventured to assume that Bathybius, though not an independent
living thing, was not altogether a myth, but veritable sponge-
protoplasm. I refer to the circumstance now solely in
explanation of my having appended to this paper a figure
(Pl. XI. fig. 5) of the so-called Bathybius (copied from
Hiickel’s figure, a representation of which is to be found in
Sir W. Thomson’s ‘ Depths of the Sea,’ p. 412), with a view
to show what I mean by an ameebiform outline. It must be
recollected, however, that, owing to the nature of the conditions
to which a little viscid mass of the kind has unavoidably to
be subjected when examined in the microscope, an undue
amount of flattening-out must take place. It had evidently
taken place in the specimen from which Haeckel’s drawing
was taken. Hence, as a perfectly typical specimen of an
Ameba-like form, it might certamly be surpassed. But it
has this extraordinary merit—that it 1s not a figure of Ameba,
but, according to my interpretation, of sponge-protoplasm diself,
which, for the purposes of the present inquiry, is infinitely
more to the purpose than the best figure of an Ameba could
possibly have been. At all events any one looking at it who
is also familiar with the appearances exhibited by Ameba
will, at a glance, recognize the identity in character, and have
no difficulty in perceiving that, but for the abnormal flattening-
out of the mass by compression just referred to, no more
conclusive testimony could have been furnished of the tendency
of an organic colloid, and notably of the material itself which
is so largely concerned, according to my hypothesis, in the
production and determination of the unique but nevertheless
undefinable type of irregular form of the flint nodules, to
assume the forms in question.

I would add that I have never said or written, because I
have never so believed, that the /iving sponge-protoplasm has
any thing to do with the flint-formation. It stands in the
same direct relation to the living parent sponges as the pro-
toplasmic investment of a group of Botryllidz, adherent to a
mass of rock, does to these organisms; or the gelatinous
thallus, often of great comparative bulk, which surrounds
some of the freshwater protophytes. It is only after the

Flints of the Upper or White Chalk. 199

death of the sponge that the spicules, already resting within
the protoplasmic mass, combine with it and pass through the
phase which has already been described by me in a previous
portion of this paper, and was pointed out at p. 72 of my
former paper in the extract which will be found anéé, p. 192.
It only remains for me to mention that the “‘ Coccoliths ”” which
form so prominent a feature in Hiickel’s figure have, in reality,
no connexion whatever with the protoplasmic mass in which
they rest. This I maintained in a paper on the nature of the
so-called “ Bathybius” (Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist., Nov. 1875,
p- 825). Nd doubt Coccoliths, subsiding in the shape of
disjecta membra of the parent Coccospheres from the surface-
waters of the ocean which they inhabit, are constantly
showered down in certain regions upon the sponge-fields on
the sea-bed below. And when this 1s the case they no doubt
ultimately undergo silicification by replacement, just as the
Foraminifera do. But in all probability their extremely
minute size and delicate structure, when so silicified, alone
prevent us from detecting their spectral pseudomorphs in the
flints, except when silicified outside, or, I should rather say,
not imbedded directly within the substance, but within a
cavity of the siliceous jelly. It is in this wise that they
remain perfect in the flint-cavities along with the also free
Foraminifera and other included objects.

Having stated, in a former part of these observations
(p. 193), that the strict limitation of all sessile animal life
present at the sea-bed to the immediate surface-layer of the
muddy deposit, which is an invariable characteristic of the
calcareous and probably all abyssal areas where living Protozoa
are to be found, supplies the key to the whole of the unique
phenomena observable in the flint formation, I will now
endeavour to furnish an ideal picture of the condition under
which the periodical formation of the strata of flint takes
place. ‘The Potstones of the Norwich Chalk appear to me to
furnish a supplementary clue to the solution of this problem in
spite of the still undetermined question whether they are the
fossil remains of some Titanic sponge, like the Ventriculites.
Fortunately it is sufficient to know that they were gigantic vitre-
ous sponges, and must have grown one after another, each out
of the inverted bosom of its immediate predecessor and parent.
In this manner, and in this manner only, does it seem possible
to explain their forming columnar assemblages, the height of
each column, as seen in such faces of the chalk as are exposed
to view, approaching 30 feet, each individual in each columnar
series being about 5 feet in height. Hence they traverse
several successive strata of chalk, passing directly through the

200 Dr. Wallich on the Origin of the

interstratified flint-layers, and showing neither symptoms of
exhaustion nor diminution of size at any part of their upward
range.

The inference I would draw from these facts is that,
whereas the living portion of each individual sponge was
restricted to one plane, and that plane was determined by,
and theretore followed, each rise in the level of the surrounding
deposit, the growth being due to simple repetitive divisions of
parts, and not to a process of reproduction, until the maximum
height and perhaps maximum age attainable by each indivi-
dual had been arrived at, the death of the parént Titan was
synchronous with and perhaps dependent on the intervention
of a true reproductive process, whereby a successor was pro-
duced, who was destined to pass through a similar cycle of
existence. We may assume also that the enormous size of
each individual, as compared with the other sponges and
forms of animal life that passed their lives on the same sea-
bed, would enable it to rear its head high enough above the
general level, when occasion demanded, to enable it to con-
tinue its existence uninterruptedly while the organisms around
were perishing.

The stratification of the flints in layers of nodules and
tabular masses may, I conceive, be similarly accounted for.
Starting with the facts that the calcareous areas of the ocean
(which are the representatives of those in which the ancient
chalk was deposited) consist of vast expanses of this deposit,
iterrupted only by sponge-fields and sponge-beds (the one
living and flourishing in the intervals from which it had
either gradually expelled or yielded up its ground to the
other) , what must have occurred, and be still occurring, over
the calcareous sea-bed? As the sponges encroached (in virtue
of their undoubtedly more rapid growth *) on the domains
of the Foraminifera, the latter would, here and there, be
overwhelmed by the protoplasmic masses and simply asphyx-
iated. The sponges would, in turn, encroach on each other,

* Prof. Martin Duncan says, with reference to the slow rate at which
deep-sea deposits are formed :—“ With reference to the great thickness
of deep-sea deposits, I have satisfied myself, from late researches, that
the rate of deposition is exceedingly slow. Thus an electric cable was
laid down in the Globigerina-ooze region; and six years after a consider-
able coral-growth had taken place on it. Some of the living calices were
close above the cables ; and therefore the deposit had been infinitesimal in
that time. Again, there are slow-growing Echinoderms, Corals, and Spon-
gida in place in many chalk series; and it is evident that the foramini-
feral and sedimentary deposit was infinitely slower than their growth”
(Anniversary Address Geol. Soc. London, 1877, by Prof. Martin Duncan,
M.B., F.R.S., p. 44).

Flints of the Upper or White Chalk. 201

and eventually crush out and destroy some of their own
kind—their siliceous remains, no longer restrained by vital
forces, thenceforward becoming subject to material forces,
and, as suggested in a previous portion of this paper, entering
into colloidal combination with the protoplasm by which
they were surrounded. Meanwhile Foraminiferal life would
continue to multiply in all the vacant spaces. Small patches
and masses of the ooze would be enveloped by masses of
protoplasm ; living organisms of various kinds would be
similarly entrapped and entombed by the closing around and
over them of the protoplasmic masses; and meanwhile a
never-ceasing rain of minute calcareous- and siliceous-shelled
organisms from the surface of the ocean would fall down
upon the sea-bed, the protoplasmic and colloidal aggregations
receiving their share, and allowing these foreign bodies to
sink into their substance and become the bases of the future
pseudomorphs of the flint.

But whilst the Foraminifera, as they died off, would leave
their remains on the spots where they died, and thus assist in-
finitesimally, but continuously, in building up the cretaceous
deposit, each new brood being born, living, and dying on the
surface of the sea-bed, and the races*being kept up by those
occupying the vacant spaces, the sponges as they died off
would not leave their remains on the sea-bed itself, but those
remains would be one after the other absorbed by and form
part of the colloidal masses of protoplasm and silica clinging
together, and floating, as it were, on the immediate surface
of the sea-bed. This tendency of the colloidal masses of
silica “to adhere, aggregate, and contract,” their viscidity,
immiscibility with the water, and the extreme difficulty with
which they could be made to sink at all into the substance
of the ooze, would enable them continuously to maintain a
position immediately resting upon the subjacent deposit ; and
in this wise they would accumulate, and, by perpetual acces-
sions of siliceous remains from without, gradually become
saturated with silica.

But even yet certain conditions would have to be fulfilled
before any thing like simultaneous molecular or chemical
action could take place over vast areas so as to produce the
stratification of the resultant siliceous masses.

Owing to the perfect stillness prevailing at the sea-bed, the
total absence of currents, the nearly constant uniformity of
temperature, and the perfect uniformity and constancy of all
the other conditions prevailing there, together with the im-
mense periods concerned in the deposition of the strata, there
is every probability that the growth of the entire series of

202 Dr. Wallich on the Origin of the

sponges occupying the area in which they flourish in the
highest degree, owing to the uniformity of all the above con-
ditions, would proceed part passu. It would follow, there-
fore, as a natural consequence, that the time requisite for the
growth and arrival at maturity of the whole series would, in
like manner, become uniform. The uniformity, moreover, of
the supply of food, inseparable from the nature of the case—
nay, the physical necessity that in a vast fluid medium like
the ocean diffusion would take place with unerring unifor-
mity of all the inorganic and organic substances on which
nutrition depends—would assist, if not actually enforce, a rate
of growth uniform in the groups distributed over the same
areas. And thus the various groups would necessarily arrive
simultaneously at that stage of their being when their asphyx-
iation by the supercharging of their protoplasmic masses with
silica would end their career.

If we reflect, moreover, that we are dealing with conditions
that must have been equally real and effective ever since the
period when the earliest flint-producing deposits began to be
formed at all, we can hardly doubt that the law which governs
the growth of the spgnges at the bottom of the deep sea
must have caused thefa to complete their first cycle in the
history of the fiint-bearing chalk within a certain cosmic
period, and that, owing to the uniformity of the conditions
which have ever since prevailed, there must have been an
approximate uniformity in the completion of each cycle since
that period.

As the result of these operations, extensive areas of the cal-
careous sea-bed would, after a certain period, be simultaneously
covered with protoplasm supersaturated with silica in its
gelatinous condition, and a constant coalescence and tearing
asunder of portions of the masses would take place, owing
partly to their inherent contractility and diminution in volume
through the expulsion of their combined water. Judging
from what is known of the time necessary to bring about the
change in silica from the gelatinous to the nearly perfectly
anhydrous state, when it may be said to become finally conso-
lidated into a hard, stony mass, it is not improbable that the
process would not be a very protracted one, even when con-
ducted on the vast scale referred to—a fact, if it be one, which
would materially decrease the possibility of the extinction of
the minute forms of life that build up the calcareous deposits.
They would perpetuate their species in the intervals unoccu-
pied by the nascent flint-masses, and gradually entomb them.
On the other hand, the sponges would perpetuate their species
by gemmules distributed over the general surface of the sea-

Flints of the Upper or White Chalk. 203

bed, which would settle and develop wherever there were
vacant areas and favourable conditions. In those tracts
where the sponge-fields were altogether predominant, the
dense colloidal areas, viscid and coherent enough to pre-
vent their flowing out laterally, would become consolidated
into tabular sheets, more or less unbroken, inasmuch as their
contractility would exert itself chiefly in decreasing their
thickness, as the expulsion of the Combined water would go
on uninterruptedly over their entire surfaces. On the other
hand, in those tracts in which Sponge and Foraminiferal
life had been split up into small contiguous patches, or the
sponges occupied only sparsely scattered plots, the nodular
flints would form, and be correspondingly distributed through
the calcareous bed. It is here that the powerful contractile
power resident in the colloidal masses would exert itself most
freely on all sides, every little irregularity of surface caused
by living or dead animal structures &c. tending still further
to break up the masses, which, during their tearing asunder,
would assume the amediform outlines which have been so often
referred to by me as specially characteristic of animal proto-
plasm or albumen, and which may, to a certain extent, be seen
when fresh albumen is mixed with cold water and gently
shaken up, and then allowed tosettle. That protoplasm—the
protoplasm of the deep-sea sponges—does veritably assume
these forms is an indisputable fact, attested by Hackel and
Sir Wyville Thomson. I had myself once seen this material
off the south-east coast of Greenland, in a sounding taken at a
depth of nearly a couple of thousand fathoms, in which I found
the minute sponge which Mr. Perceval Wright named after
me. But I had not any idea at the time, or until many
years afterwards, what the extraordinary glairy substance
pervading the mud really was; and consequently I threw
away the only chance I have had of seeing it in its perfectly
recent stage.

It is a remarkable circumstance that, throughout the long
cruise of the ‘ Chalienger,’ nothing whatever should have been
discovered which might throw some light on the formation of
the flints at the sea-bottom. Constant mention has been
made of the immense abundance, in certain regions, of
sponges; but I am not aware that any dead shell of a mol-
lusk or echinoderm was found in the dredgings, the interior of
which was filled up with colloid silica, or silica in an already
consolidated state. One would have thought that, amongst
the almost countless number of shells landed on the deck of
the ship, whether from calcareous or siliceous bottoms, some
trace of incipient fossilization or flint-formation must have

204 On the Origin of the Flints of the Upper Chalk.

turned up. But, on carefully considering the matter, it be-
comes obvious that the chances are a million to one, comparing
human with cosmical periods, against the ‘ Challenger’ dredge
“coming across any portion of the ocean in which that special
stage in the flint-formation had been reached, when the con-
solidation of the pectous silica was just commencing, or just
being completed. In all such operations of nature, we are
too apt to forget that, whilst time and money are said to be
almost convertible terms in human affairs, both time and
money are unknown at the bottom of the sea, except when
man has been either foolish or unfortunate enough to leave
there all that remains to him of these good things.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XI.

Figures 1 to 4 are diagrammatic representations of nodular masses of
black flint from the Upper or White Chalk (as seen in section), and are
intended to illustrate the mode of formation of the flint, its outer in-
vesting layer of chert, and other points referred to below.

Fig. 1 represents the section of a spherical nodule of solid black flint
enveloped in its white or greyish-coloured outer layer of chert.

Fig. 2 represents the section of a similar spherical nodule, in which the
central portion of a mass of calcareous and possibly some sili-
ceous débris had been surrounded by the colloidal mass of pro-
toplasm and silica, the contraction of which upon itself had
been so great as to compress into a closely compacted mass the
contained materials, these having been converted into chert by
the incomplete replacement of their carbonate of lime by silica.

Fig. 3. A similar section to the last, in which, however, the included
material was insufficient to occupy the whole cavity, the vacant
portions having in all probability been occupied originally by
water.

Fig. 4. A similar section to no. 2, having in the middle of its central
cherty mass a drusy cavity lined with crystals of pure quartz.

Fig. 5 is a facsimile of the figure given by Sir Wyville Thomson (at
p; 412 of his ‘ Depths of the Sea’) of “Bathybius,’ as taken from

rof. Hiickel’s original drawing of a specimen examined by

him under the microscope, in a supposed living condition. This
figure is introduced here, not because I have ever believed in
the existence of Bathybius as an independent structure, but
because I regard the substance to which that name was given
as simple sponge-protoplasm, in order to show that even in the
dead state of this substance it is capable of exhibiting amebi-
form outlines when subjected to gentle pressure.

Miscellaneous. 205

BIBLIOGRAPHICAL NOTICE.

A Monograph of the Silurian Fossils of the Girvan District in Ayr-
shire. By H. A. Nicnotson, M.D. &c., and R. Ernermer, Jun.,
Esq., F.G.S., &e. Fasciculus III. 8vo. London and Edinburgh :
Blackwood & Son, 1880.

Tus part completes the first volume of a first-rate paleontological

work, the result of enthusiastic labour on the part of the authors,

who are fully conversant with their subject. Supplemental matter

(derived mainly from new collections made in Ayrshire, and partly

from further knowledge acquired in the progress of the work) forms

a large part of this Fasciculus, namely the chapters on some of the

fossil Protozoa, Coelenterata (tabulate corals), and Crustacea, from

Girvan. Some Annelidan remains, and several so-called ‘* Worm-

tracks,” or trails and marks due to Crustaceans, Mollusks, and other

animals besides Worms (as the authors now recognize them), are
treated of ; and various Echinoderms (Asteroidea and Crinoidea) are
carefully described. These fossils are well illustrated in nine plates.

The printing, paper, and plates are good. A careful index for the

volume is appended; and altogether the authors may well be proud

of their elegant and useful volume.

MISCELLANEOUS.

On the Huistence of a Reptile of the Ophidian Type in the Beds with

Ostrea columba, of the Charente. By M. H. E. Savvaen.
Tue Ophidian type, the maximum development of which is at the
present epoch, seemed to make its first appearance at the base of
the Tertiary, in the genera Palwophis and Paleryx, discovered by
Owen in the London Clay. fossil snakes, however, were known
only by a few rare species found at Sheppey, in the phosphorites of
Quercy, and in the Miocene of Sansan. Gervais had figured (but
without giving it a name) the vertebra of an Ophidian derived from
the sandstones which, at the island of Aix, are above the Creta-
ceous lignitiferous clays. M. Trémaux de Rochebrune, bas since
collected vertebree which enable us to assert the presence of the
serpent type as long ago as the Cenomanian epoch, in the Caren-
tonian stage, the sands with Ostrea columba of the forest of Bas-
seau in the Charente.

These vertebrae, which belong to the middle region of the body,
are 0°018 metre high and 0°014 metre long, and indicate an
animal of about 3 metres. The length is equal to the breadth at
the level of the costal apophysis ; so that the vertebra is strong and
thickset. The articular condyle is supported by a very short neck ;
the articular cavity is circular, such as we find in the Boedonians.,
The neural canal is narrow, as in the Crotalians ; and its section is
triangular. ‘The anterior face is broad, the diapophysis and zygo-
sphene projecting but little. As in the Typhlopians, the parapo-
physis is reduced to a feeble tubercle, which joins with the diapo-
physis by a prominent line ; the zygapophysis is inclined downwards,
backwards, and inwards. The Boas and Pythons have the tubercle
for the insertion of the rib placed very near the anterior margin of

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. vii. 15

206 Miscellancous.

the centrum; this is also the case with the Cretaceous serpent.
When we examine the vertebre from above, the costal tubercle
appears immediately outside of and a little behind the diapophysis,
reminding us of what is seen in Acrochordus. The process of the
neural spine is united to the diapophysis by a slightly excavated
line. The neurapophysis is robust, and the neural spine broad,
tolerably high, and flattened at its upper margin, which must have
given attachment to a powerful ligament ; this neural spine occupies
the greater part of the length of the centrum, as in the Crotalians.
The inferior surface of the centrum is flattened, which recalls the
vertebra of the Amphisbzenians ; we may also recognize the absence
of any hypapophysial tubercle, as in the Typhlopians, which, as is
well known, form the passage from the Ophidians to the Saurians.
The Cretaceous serpent, at present the most ancient known
Ophidian, presents such manifold analogies that it is not possible
to refer it to one rather than another of the great divisions accepted
for existing snakes ; it indicates the existence as early as the
Cenomanian epoch of a peculiar genus, which we propose to name
Simoliophis, giving the species the denomination S. Rochebruni, from
the name of the zealous naturalist to whom the discovery of this
interesting type is due.-—Comptes Rendus. Oct. 18, 1880, p. 671.

On some Arctic Holothurida.
By MM. D. C. Dantntissrn and J. Koren.

Among the Holothurida obtained by the Norwegian aretic expe-
dition of 1878, the authors notice some new forms, and indicate
certain points in the synonymy of previously described species. One
of the former is described as the type of a new genus under the
name of Kolga hyalina, the generic name being derived from that of
one of the daughters of the goddess of the sea in the old northern
mythology. The genus belongs to Théel’s family Elpidide, and is
characterized as follows :—

Genus Korea, g. n.

Body bilateral. A buccal disk, furnished with ten tentacles,
turned towards the ventral surface. Anal aperture on the dorsal
surface (near the posterior extremity). On the anterior part of the
back a projecting collar, furnished with papilla. Just in front of
this (and usually concealed by it) are two apertures, one for the
generative organs, the other for the stone-canal. Feet on both
sides of the body and around its posterior extremity. Sexes sepa-
rate. No intestinal appendages (lungs).

Kolga hyalina, sp. n.

Body 50 millims. long, 15-20 high, and 12-15 broad. Back very
convex; on the collar six transversely arranged papillae, of which
the two middlemost are the longest. Sixteen long, thick, almost
retractile feet, five on each side and six around the posterior end.
ae of the body diaphanous, Tentacles five-lobed, each lobe
trifid.

Hab. Station 295, 71° 59’ N. lat., 11° 40’ E. long., at a depth of
1110 fathoms, temperature —1°3 C.,in Biloculina-ooze; Station 303,

Miscellaneous. 207

75° 12' N. lat., 3° 2’ E. long., at a depth of 1200 fathoms, tempe-
rature —1°6 C., in brown mud. Feeds chiefly upon Diatoms and
Foraminifera, swallowing the fine mud in which these creatures
live in extraordinary abundance. The skin is transparent with a
whitish tinge, so that in places where it is compressed it appears
quite white. The five-lobed leaf of the tentacles, especially the part
fringed with spicules, is deep orange-yellow. Buccal disk orange-
yellow, with a darker, nearly brown ring round the mouth.

Myriotrochus Rinkit, Steenstrup*.

This species. has been described under the same name by Litkent,
Stimpsont, Selenka§, and Semper||; but Théel’s Myriotrochus
Rinkii, from Nova ZemblaG, is regarded by MM. Koren and
Danielssen as identical with Chirodota brevis, Huxley **, of which
Oligotrochus vitreus, M. Sarstt, is also a synonym.

ACANTHOTROCHUS, g. n.

Body cylindrical, apodal, rounded at the posterior extremity.
Sexes separate; no intestinal appendages (organs of respiration).
Skin furnished with two kinds of differently formed calcareous
wheels. The one kind has winged radii, and teeth issuing from
the inner margin of the periphery ; the other kind of wheel is more
than twice as large, and has also winged radii ; but from the outer
margin of the periphery there spring long teeth turned inwards.
Twelve digitate tentacles, which can be concealed in the body.

Acanthotrochus mirabilis, sp. n.

Body 10-12 millims. long, cylindrical, widened and rounded off
at the hinder extremity. Mouth and anal aperture central. Skin
transparent, beset throughout with two different kinds of wheels.
Those of one kind are stalked, small, furnished usually with eleven
radii, and from the inner margin of the periphery spring generally
two triangular teeth between each two radii. The larger wheels
have usually 8-11 radii; and from the outer margin of the peri-
phery spring long pointed teeth, equal in number to the radii.
Twelve tentacles, furnished with three divided digitate leaves. Five
longitudinal muscles. Skin in the living animal perfectly trans-
parent, with fine glistening points, which under the lens are found
to be calcareous wheels. The margins of the tentacles brownish.

Hab. Station 283, 73° 47’ N. lat., 14° 21' E. long., in 767
fathoms, temperature —1°4 C., Biloculina-ooze; Station 295 (see
Kolga hyalina) ; Station 312, 74° 54’ N. lat., 14° 53’ E. long., in
658 fathoms, temperature —1°2 C., brown and green mud.

* Vidensk. Meddel. naturh. Foren, Kjob. 1851, pp. 55-60.

+ Ibid. 1857, p. 21.

Berens Marine Invert. Arct. Exp., Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phil. 1863,

§ Zeitschr. f. wiss. Zool. xvii. (1867) p. 367.

|| Reisen im Archip. der Phil., Holothuria, i. p. 24 (1867).

4] Appendix to Sutherland’s ‘ Journal of a Voyage to Baftin’s Bay,’ &e.,
vol. ii. p. 221 (1852).

** Note sur quelques Holothuries des Mers de la Nouvelle Zemble
(Upsal, 1877).

tt Vidensk. Selsk, Forhandl. 1865, p. 200, and in ‘ Fauna littoralis Nor-
vegiz,’ Heft 3, p. 49.

208 Miscellaneous.

Molpadia borealis, M. Sars, with which M. violacea, Studer, is
probably identical, is referred by the authors to their genus 7'ro-
chostoma, as also Huplodactyla arctica, Marenzeller. Allied to these
is a new genus with two new species. ;

ANKYRODERMA, g. 0D.

Body cylindrical. Anterior end transversely cut off. Buccal
disk furnished with fifteen tubular processes, alternating with fifteen
- oblong depressions, in which there are fifteen papilliform tentacles.
The posterior extremity produced into a tail-lke process. Cloacal
aperture surrounded by five papillae. Skin furnished with perfo-
rated papille, together with singular calcareous bodies consisting of
five to six spatulate calcareous rods arranged in a stellate form, from
the centre of which rises a calcareous anchor. No feet. Two
intestinal appendages.

Ankyroderma Jeffreysii, sp. 0.

Body elongated, cylindrical. Caudiform process long. Tenta-
cles extremely small, furnished with three papille, of which the
middle one is the largest. Genital papilla large, prominent. Cal-
careous bodies in the skin of three forms,—anchors attached to
spatuliform calcareous rods, perforated calcareous plates with crowns,
and oval claret-coloured bodies, placed in groups. The colour of
the skin in the living animal is greenish with a violet tinge from
the scattered red points, or sometimes dark violet. The anterior
end of the body has a white pentagonal ring, within which is the
white buccal disk with white tentacles. The genital papilla in
part yellowish white, in part full yellow; caudiform prolongation
white.

Hab. Station 260, Porsangerfjord in 127 fathoms, temperature
3°-5C., and 261 Tanafjord in 127 fathoms, temperature 2°8 C., on
a muddy bottom; Station 262, Tanafjord in 148 fathoms, tempe-
rature 1°-9 C., ooze; Station 372, 97° 59’ N. lat., 5° 40’ E. long.,
in 459 fathoms, temperature —1° C., on bluish-grey mud.

Ankyroderma affine, sp. 1.

Body cylindrical. The caudiform process shorter than in the
preceding. Tentacles extremely small, with three papille. Genital
papilla not prominent. On the surface of the skin tolerably regular
rows of anchors attached to spatuliform calcareous rods. Among
these are some peculiar calcareous branches, from the common
starting-point (central point) of which there rises either a three-
knobbed crown or a long calcareous spicule, or some exceedingly
variously formed perforated calcareous plates with crowns; and in
the deeper layer of the “skin a great quantity of colourless more or
less rounded bodies consisting of a conglomerate of calcareous
prisms. Skin greenish ; buccal disk and caudal point white.

Hab. Station 290, 72° 27' N. lat., 20°51’ E. long.,in 191 fathoms,
temperature 3°5 C., sandy clay.

The genus Trochostoma, Dan. & Kor., includes 7. Thomsonii,
D. & K., with no cloaca; and with cloaca 7’. boreale, M. Sars, 7.
arcticum, Marenz., and 7’. (Molp.) ooliticum, Pourt.— Nyt Magazin
fiir Naturv. Bd. xxv. pp. 83-140, pls. i—vi.

THE ANNALS

AND

MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY.

[FIFTH SERIES. }

No. 39. MARCH 1881.

XVITI.— On some new or little-known Infusoria.
By C. MeRESCHKOWSKY.

[Plate XII]

In this article it is my intention to describe some new species
of Infusoria that I have observed in the different seas that I
have chanced to visit. There are two species from the White
Sea, three others from the Black Sea, and two observed in
the Bay of Naples. It is especially with the view of en-
riching our knowledge of the geographical distribution of the
Infusoria that I publish these notes ; it is also with this object
that I undertake a revision of certain genera, such as Trochilia
and Aczneta, so far as the marine species are concerned.
Although want of time did not allow me to acquire more
than a superficial knowledge of the Infusorial fauna of the
Black Sea, I nevertheless see with satisfaction all the conclu-
sions at which I arrived in my “ Studien iiber Protozoa des
nordlichen Russlands”” more and more confirmed, as I have
just shown in a recent note upon the Infusoria of the Black
Sea*. There are already ten marine species, all more or less
frequent in the Black Sea, that | have never met with in the
White Sea; and there is not a single freshwater species ob-

* “Matériaux pour la faune des Infusoires de la Mer Noire,” Travaux
de la Société des Naturalistes 4 St. Pétersbourg, 1880.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. vii. 16

210), M. C. Mereschkowsky on some

served in the Crimea or in the Caucasus that has not also
been observed by mein the Arctic regions of Northern Russia.
Thus the law that the marine Infusoria of different seas differ
much more than the freshwater Infusoria of different coun-
tries finds a new confirmation in the Infusorial fauna of the
Black Sea.

All the other laws of the geographical distribution of the
Infusoria established by me in the memoir above mentioned
are likewise daily finding fresh confirmations; and I believe
there is little change to be expected in this respect when the
distribution of this class of organisms shall be studied with
the same zeal and attention that is devoted to other classes.

I will now pass to the description of the new species.

Cothurnia pontica. (Pl. XII. figs. 4-6.)

Diagn. Concha superficie undulata insidet pediculo brevi ;
urceiformis, duobus rostris munita. Animal insidet pediculo
triangulari, intus excavato.

Loc. Black Sea, Crimea, Livadia.

Descr. This is one of the prettiest species that I have ever
seen of this genus, the forms of which are so numerous. The
carapace has a very graceful pitcher-shape with the edges
slightly turned out, and with two sides of the margin more
elevated than the rest, which especially aids to give an elegant
appearance to the whole animal. ‘The surface of the carapace
is not even, but covered with four or five not very strongly
marked circular elevations. The carapace has scarcely any
pedicle ; it might therefore be placed among the sessile species;
the little that can be taken for a peduncle is only the attenu-
ated part of the base of the carapace, enclosing the peduncle
of the animal itself, asis well shown in the figure (fig. 5).
The peduncle of the animal is formed by an inferior small
pad, which is perfectly solid, and a conical peduncle with its
widest part turned upwards, where it is attached to the
animal. This peduncle is not solid like the pad which serves
as its base, but furnished with a cavity of the same conical
form as the peduncle itself.

As to the animal, I have only seen its remains, already in a
state of putrefaction. The carapace was attached to a Flori-
dean Alga, apparently belonging to the genus Ceramium,
which I found upon the shore of the Black Sea near Talta.
The total length of the animal, or, more properly of the
carapace, 1s 0°0171 millim., its breath is 0°007 millim.

Cothurnia socialis, A. Gruber. (Pl. XII. fig. 3.)
Loc. White Sea, Solowetzk Islands, at a depth of 2 metres.

new or little-known Infusoria. 211

Descr. I have waited so long with the description of this
species, which I found in the White Sea in 1879, that it has
at last been described by M. A. Gruber, not long since, under
the name of Cothurnia socialis. And I do not regret it; for I
should never have described the species.with all the details
given by M. Gruber; and, further, it would never have re-
ceived from me the specific name “ socialis,” as I only came
across it in St. Petersburg among Bryozoa preserved in
alcohol, and I have only seen a single solitary individual,
whilst the German zoologist has seen it in the living state
and in great numbers. I have no doubt, however, on
comparing my individual with the figures given by M. Gruber,
that they belong to the same species. All the characteristic
details of the species are present, except perhaps the coloration,
which in the individual observed by me is not yellow, it is
entirely colourless ; but, as I have just remarked, the animal
that I have observed is solitary, and therefore still very
young, and it may very well be that the absence of colour is
due simply to the youth of the animal. I would also call
attention to the extreme regularity of its form.

The specimen that I have examined was attached to a
Bryozoan by means of a rather long, slender, solid peduncle,
slightly inflated at its base. The carapace, which is about
the same length as the peduncle, is of an ovoid form, with a
small conical process at the lower part, and with a funnel-
shaped neck at the upper part. ‘The carapace bears four very
strongly marked circular striz or grooves, dividing it into five
parts or segments. The body of the animal is placed upon a
small peduncle, which is only the continuation, in the interior
of the carapace, of the exterior peduncle.

The following are some measurements of this marine
species, which, apparently, is characteristic of the northern
seas ; for it is only in these that it has been found, by two
observers :—

millim
Ihength of the carapace: 5.5.25 sa00< ve eens 0-084
Maximum: brea Gthigi aig ceas Bo sence voxel rernt 0:035
icenoth of the peduncle: esac. abi. caine se olay 0-054

Tintinnus mediterraneus, sp. n.

(Pl. XII. figs. 1, 2.)

Diagn. Concha urceoli inflati forma, paulo longior quam
latior, collo brevi lato, 4-5 striis annulatis. 7
Loc. Mediterranean Sea, Black Sea, Crimea, and Bay of
Naples.
Descr. The carapace of the animal, which is all that I have
16%

212 M. C. Mereschkowsky on some

had the opportunity of examining, is in the form of a wide,
somewhat inflated vase, rounded or terminating in a point at
the bottom, thus forming, as we shall see, two distinct varie-
ties. At the upper part it narrows suddenly, forming a wide
but not very long neck, the margins of which are not turned
out. In the variety that I have observed in the Black Sea,
the neck is a little narrower relatively to the total width of
the carapace (PI. XII. fig. 2), which causes the neck to be more
accentuated; while in the other variety, from the Bay of
Naples, the neck is almost as wide as the carapace (Pl. XII.
fig. 1), as may be seen by comparing the two figures here
given.

The neck and the upper part of the carapace itself are
adorned with slight rings, which are nothing but circular
elevations or thickenings of the chitinous substance of the
carapace. These circular strie are four or five in number ;
and their arrangement is slightly different in the two varieties
of the species that I have observed. In one of them, that
from the Black Sea (fig. 2), the neck is ornamented with
three rings, while the actual body of the carapace has only
two; in the Neapolitan variety, on the contrary, there is
only a single ring upon the neck, the others being placed upon
the first third of the carapace itself (fig. 1). But the principal
difference which distinguishes the two varieties is the form of
the bottom of the carapace. Whilst in the specimen that I
observed in the Black Sea the bottom is regularly rounded
(fig. 2), that of the Neapolitan variety presents at the pos-
terior extremity a rather long and regularly conical point.
We should thus have two local varieties :—

1. Var. pontica, with the bottom of the carapace rounded.
Loc. Black Sea, Crimea, Livadia.

2. Var. neapolitana, with the bottom terminating in a point.
Loc. Bay of Naples.

This species, which is very easily distinguished by its form
from all the other known species, is a marine species charac-
terizing the fauna of the whole Mediterranean. It does not
appear to be very rare; for I have found it in two different
localities, namely the Black Sea and the Bay of Naples,
although under somewhat different forms in the two places.
Unfortunately I did not once happen to meet with the living
animal; I have never seen more than the carapace.

The following are some measurements of this species (var.
pontica):—

millim
Total length of the carapace ..........ss0... 0-016
Maximumibreadthe 31.2 meysr ee aortic rem cistn kis 0:018

Length of the neck jhe wick hie elec. sinks soe 0-002

new or little-known Infusoria. 213

Trochilia marina, sp.n. (PI. XII. figs. 7-9.)

Diagn. Corpus ovale, in vertice paululum coangustatum,
inferiore parte corrotundatum, dorsi superficie levi.

Loc. Black Sea, Crimea, Livadia.

Descr. The slightly compressed body is regularly oval,
except the anterior part, which is a little constricted and trun-
cated; the rounded posterior part is furnished with a large
aud broad movable spine, excavated internally, and directed
from right to left. The dorsal surface is more convex than
the ventral, which is furnished with a space covered with
cilia; this space is only half as wide as the body itself, and
is of a slightly arcuated triangular form. On the dorsal surface
there are two grooves, which run the whole length of the
body, one on the right, the other on the left side, thus dividing
the whole dorsal surface into three equal parts (Pl. XII. fig. 8).
The single contractile vacuole is situated on the back, a little
towards the left side. The oval nucleus is rather large, and
situated on the right side. The mouth, with its bacilli, is
very visible (Pl. XII. fig. 9).

This species, which is very well characterized by the form
of the body, is not rare in the Black Sea, where I have often
found it among the seaweeds covering the stones of the shore
of the Crimea, near Livadia.

The genus Tvrochilia, first established by Dujardin, was
exceptionally characterized by Stein by this peculiarity, that.
the cilia are not merely placed at the margins of the body,
but occupy a larger or smaller portion of the ventral sur-
face. The species hitherto known are a marine species
(Trochilia sigmoides*) found by Dujardin in the Mediter-
ranean, and two freshwater species, Zrochilia palustris, de-
scribed by Stein}, and 7. polonica, described by Wrzesniow-
skit. Besides these three species and the fourth which I
have just described, I think [ may refer to the same genus
another marine form from the Norwegian coast, described by
Claparéde and Lachmann§, in their ‘ Etudes sur les Infu-
soires et les Rhizopodes,’ under the name of Mgyria oliva.
As we may conclude from the excellent figure given of it by
Claparéde and Lachmann, this form must undoubtedly belong
to the genus Zrochilia, the greater part of the ventral surface

* Dujardin, Hist. Nat. des Infusoires.

+ Stein, Organismus, Abth. i. p. 118, Taf. ii. figs. 28, 30.

{ Wrzesniowski, “ Beobachtungen tiber Infusorien aus der Umgebung
von Warschau,” Zeitschr. fiir wiss. Zool. Bd. xx. p. 485, Taf. xxiii. fig. 37.

§ Claparéde and Lachmann, ‘ Etudes sur les Infusoires et les Rhizo-
podes,’ p. 289, pl. xv. figs. 14, 15.

214 M. C. Mereschkowsky on some

being covered with cilia. It seems very strange that such an
eminent student of the Infusoria as M. Stein did not direct
attention to this form, and that in general he has not mentioned
the work of Claparéde and Lachmann in treating of the family
Ervilina. I propose, therefore, to call the Infusorian in ques-
tion Trochilia oliva. As for the Trochilia polonica, Wrzesn.,
found by M. Wrzesniowski in the fresh waters of Poland, that
species has very little to distinguish it from 7. palustris,
Stein.

With regard to the fifth species, which I have just de-
scribed under the name of Trochilia marina, it is very distinct
from all the other known species. It most nearly approaches
Trochilia oliva, from which it is distinguished by the general
form of the body, the two dorsal grooves, and the absence of
the black pigment spot at the anterior part, which is so
characteristic of 7. oliva.

At present, therefore, we shall have five species of the
genus Trochilia, three marine and two freshwater. Of the
first three species, one (Z. ol’va) inhabits the northern seas,
and the other two (7. stgmoides and T. marina) the seas of
the south of Europe. Length of the animal 0-033 millim.

Acineta livadiana, sp. n.

(Pt XT fe710;)

Diagn. Concha ovalis, superiore parte, qua intus flectitur
atque cum corpore conjungitur, truncata; pediculus tenuis,
cylindricus, paulo quam corpus longior, scapo centrali.

Loc. Black Sea, Livadia, surface.

Descr. The carapace of the animal is regularly oval, except
at the superior exteremity, where it is suddenly truncated,
and furnished with a wide orifice, through which the suckers
are seen to pass. ‘The margins of the orifice bend in towards
the interior of the carapace, and are produced there tc some
distance, forming a short interior tube. It is at the margin of
this interior tube, and only at this margin, that the body of
the animal is attached; in all other parts it remains freely
suspended in the cavity of the carapace, occupying more than
half its space. The body is almost regularly round, with its
contours undulated and changing continually, these contours
thus demonstrating the constant amceboid movement of the
living animal. The protoplasm is strongly granular, which
renders it rather opaque and at the same time makes it im-
possible to see the nucleus; but, on the other hand, a con-
tractile vesicle situated in the ectosarcode is easily distin-
guished. The suckers, terminated by a knob, are not longer
than the diameter of the body; they are about twenty-five in

new or little-known Infusoria. 215

number, and arranged at the summit of the body in a single
broad bundle.

The pedicle, which supports the body with its carapace, is
not much longer than the carapace itself. It is cylindrical,
slender, of uniform breadth, and furnished with a central axis
composed of a material different from that of the surface, and
apparently less dense. There is no enlargement of the
pedicle either at the spot where it joins the carapace or where
it is attached to the plant on which I observed the animal.
It terminates suddenly, without forming a disk to facilitate
fixation, such as is observed in nearly all the other species.

As to the systematic position of Acineta livadiana, it cannot
be confounded with any other known marine species. The
oval general form with the posterior part rounded is a very
rare phenomenon among the Acinete, which, in general, have
a more or less conical form. ‘There are only Actneta cothurnia,
Clap. & Lachm., and <Acineta compressa, Clap. & Lachm.,
which have also an oval form and the bottom of their cara-
pace rounded; but it is not possible to confound the species
that I have just described with A. cothurnia, the latter having
the carapace at its upper part terminated obliquely; and still
less with A. compressa, which, as indicated by its name, has
a strongly compressed form and the two corners truncated,
which is not the case in Acineta livadiana.

The following are some measurements of the present
species :—

millim
Rength of the carapace, 22 .0)t)sa. csc os ees 0:0256
Maximum breadth of the carapace ........ 0:0192
Ihength of the peduncle ........ 0.000000 00520
Breadth of the peduncle... 5.0... cces6 «- 00012

The individual observed by me was attached to a branch of
Ceramium floating on the surface of the Black Sea near

Livadia (Talta).

Acineta Saitfule, Mereschk. 1877*.
(BUS foe Tt)

In a memoir published in Russian on the Protozoa of the
north of Russia I described a new marine species of Acineta
obtained from the White Sea. I will here give a translation
of the description and a copy of the figure, taken from my
Russian memoir.

The carapace is elongated, regularly conical, and not at all
compressed ; its form resembles that of a reversed sugar-loaf,

* Studies on the Protozoa of Northern Russia,” p. 69, pl. ii. fig. 11,
in Travaux de la Soc. des Naturalistes a St. Pétersh., 1877.

216 M. C. Mereschkowsky on some

the length of which is two or three times its greatest breadth.
The carapace is borne upon a peduncle three times its length,
of a cylindrical form, thi, and of equal thickness throughout.
This peduncle is inserted into the carapace without causing
any constriction at the point of union, as is the case, for
example, in Acineta patula; itis straight in the normal state*,
and hollow, the cavity of the peduncle being continued insen-
sibly into that of the conical carapace without interruption.
Close to the margin of the aperture of the carapace the walls
of the latter are recurved suddenly inwards, and thus form a
second carapace, situated in the interior of the first, and only
united with the latter at the margin of the aperture. The
second, or interior carapace occupies more than one third of the
outer carapace, sometimes even one half of it, and is charac-
terized by its rounded bottom and slightly turned-out margins.
What further characterizes this species is a system of trans-
verse circular striz covering the whole surface of the exterior
conical carapace ; but as these striz are extremely fine, they
are only visible when a high magnifying-power is employed.

I have only seen the elongated oval body of Acineta Sai-
jule adhering to the margins of the carapace and freely sus-
pended in the second carapace ; but, as I have only observed
this species when preserved in alcohol, it may be that the
body of the living animal adheres to the whole surface of the
inner carapace, which would thus perhaps not be easy to
observe. A part of the body, in the form of a regular hemi-
sphere, issues from the aperture of the carapace; and the
whole of this part bears suckers (shortened by the action of
alcohol), arranged regularly over the spherical surface. The
small oval nucleus is situated in the middle, but nearer to the
free half of the body. ‘The protoplasm is, as usual, filled with
fatty granules, and presents a slight yellowish coloration ; the
carapace and the peduncle are absolutely colourless.

The following measurements of this species have all been
taken from individuals preserved in alcohol :—

millim
Fuenpth ‘or the carapace... ivs.4 cece omen ceun 0-068
Maximum breadgthy se) /si.ise okie eset sel agees 0:027
Length of the whole animal, including the
WEGUMELS:, 4 bitoni s|a eles gtellele ip eae 0-135
Breadth of the peduncle... s/s jae08 eee 0:0021

Loc. White Sea:—1. Bay of Onega, near the town of
Rem, at a depth of 5 fathoms, on a muddy bottom, on the

* The figure represents a curved peduncle; but this form is due to
artificial compression, rendered permanent by the action of alcohol.

new or little-known Infusoria. 217

5th July, 1876; at this spot I met with it in great abun-
dance attached to the Hydroid Leptoscyphus Grigoriewt,
Mereschk. 2. The shore of Terski, in 66° 58’ N. lat. and
41° 20' E. long., at a depth of 16 fathoms, on a bottom of
gravel and shells.

Acineta Saifule is a good species, easily distinguishable
from all other known marine species. To show better the
affinities of this species and the characters which distinguish
it from the others, however, I am under the necessity of giving
a short revision of all the marine species belonging to the
genus Acineta. With those that I have just described there
are in all ten of them, as follows :—

1. Acineta tuberosa, Ehr.
2. A. patula, Clap. & Lachm.
3. A. cucullus, Clap. & Lachm.
4. A. cothurnia, Clap. & Lachm.*
5. A. compressa, Clap. & Lachm.
6. A. divisa, Fraipont f.
7. A. crenata, Fraip.t
8. A. vorticelloides, Fraip.§
9. A. livadiana, Mereschk.

10. A. Saitfule, Mereschk.

Of these ten species we have four (Acineta patula, cucullus,
compressa, and Saitfule) which characterize the northern
seas, such as the White Sea and the seas of the Norwegian
coast. One species (A. livadiana) is characteristic of the
southern seas (Black Sea). The other species are in part
peculiar to the seas of the middle of Europe, in part more or
less cosmopolitan (A. tuberosa). In comparing Acineta Sai-
fule with the other marine species it is necessary in the first
place to exclude all the species with the bottom rounded, such
as A. cothurnia, Clap. & Lachm., A. compressa, C.& L., and
A. livadiana, Mereschk. ; then among the rest, all having the
conical form of the carapace, there can be no question about
the following species—A. tuberosa, Ehr., and A. compressa, as
having the body strongly compressed, A. cothurnia, C. & L.,
and A. cucullus, C. & L., the former having the margin
divided into angular lobes, after the fashion of Acineta mysta-

* Etudes sur les Infusoires et les Rhizopodes, p. 588; and Stein, Infus.
p. 224, pl. iii. fig. 36.

+ Recherches sur les Acinétiens de la céte d’Ostende, 1878, p. 25,
pl. ii. fig. 1, &e.

{ Fraipont, /. c. p. 89, pl. vi. figs. 1-11.

§ Fraipont, /. c. p. 92, pl. vi. figs. 12-17.

218 M. C. Mereschkowsky on some

cina, and the latter having it strongly emarginate on one side
(besides the suckers in two bundles). Nor can Acineta Sai-
Jule be confounded with A. patula, on account of the diffe-
rence in the form of the carapace, and the extreme fineness of
the part of the peduncle where it unites with the carapace.
The same difference of form distinguishes my species from
Acineta vorticelloides, Fraip., with a very open and, “so to
speak, rudimentary ”’*, carapace. Lastly, a crenulation upon
the lateral surfaces and the irregularly-cut free margins
of the carapace of <Acineta crenata, Fraip., prevent its
being confounded with our species. There only remains,
therefore, Acineta divisa, Fraip., with which my species has
the greatest analogy, as may be seen from the description
given of it by Fraipont. The following, however, are the
differences that may be found between the two species. In
the first place, the general form of the body in A. Satfule is
usually much elongated, which is the case only exceptionally
in A. divisa, the carapace of which is generally very wide open,
approaching rather in form that of A. patula. ‘Then the surface
ot Acineta Saifule is always ornamented with transverse
strie, which is never the case in A. divisa. Lastly, the inte-
rior cup, the bottom of the second carapace, is much deeper
in my species than in Fraipont’s, which is in relation to the
more elongated general form of the carapace in Acineta
Saifule.

To sum up, it may possibly be that we have to do here
only with varieties of a single species, which would thus have
to bear the name of Acineta Saifule, as having been given
earlier than the othername. But until we have more detailed
observations I feel compelled to retain the two separate species.

Anisonema quadricostatum, sp. 0.

(Pl. XIL. fig. 12.)

Diagn. Body oval, strongly depressed, and furnished on
the dorsal surface with four ribs.

Loc. Bay of Naples, Sorrento.

Descr. The oval body is characterized by its strong depres-
sion; the cuticle, which covers the whole body, is very firm,
and in the dorsal part it forms at the surface four longitudinal
elevations, four ribs, slightly spirally curved. The mouth,
which is widely open in the form of a vertical fissure, is
very visible on the ventral surface, from which originate two
flagella, one of which, trained along behind, attains two and
a half times the length of the body.

* Fraipont, l. c. p. 92.

new or little-known Infusoria. 219

This species, which I have met with only once, at Sorrento,
among the seaweeds on the shore, is very well characterized
by its flat form, and especially by its four dorsal costa, cha-
racters which prevent its being confounded with the other
known species.

Ureeolus Alenizint, Mereschk. 1877.
(Pl. XII. fig. 13.)

In my Russian memoir, already mentioned, on the Pro-
tozoa of the north of Russia, which appeared in 1877*, I
described a new genus of Infusoria belonging to the order
Flagellata, which I called Urceolus, and met with in the
White Sea. A year later, in 1878, appeared M. Stein’s book
on the Flagellata, under the title of ‘Der Organismus der
Infusionsthiere,’ Abth. ui., in which he figures (pl. xxi.
figs. 42-48) an organism which he describes in the explana-
tion of the plates as a new form, giving it the generic name
of Phialonema. On comparing the Phialonema cyclostoma,
Stein, with my Urceolus Alenizini, I saw in a moment that
the former was only a new species belonging to my genus
Urceolus, established in 1877.

The genus Urceolus is characterized by the presence of a
neck of greater or less length, with a wide aperture at its ex-
tremity, leading into a rather deep conical canal, at the bottom
of which is situated the buccal orifice ; it is also at the bottom
of this canal, a little to one side, that the single flagellum
originates. The genus has two species :—

1. Urceolus Alenizint, Mereschk. 1877.—Surface of the
body smooth, without strize ; neck cylindrical, with the mar-
a abruptly truncated and not turned out. Loc. White
nea.

2. Urceolus cyclostomus (Stein), Mereschk. 1878.—Sur-
face of the body furnished with spiral strie; neck obliquely
truncated, and with the margin turned out. Loc. ?

It is not right to regard, as I formerly did}, the aperture
at the extremity of the neck, and through which the flagellum
issues, as the buccal aperture, this latter being placed much
more in the interior of the animal, at the bottom of the conical
fossa situated in the interior of the neck.

* In the Travaux de la Soc. des Naturalistes de St. Pétersb. vol. viii.
+ C. Mereschkowski, ‘Studien tiber Protozoen des nordlichen Russ-
lands,” Archiv fiir mikr. Anat. Bd. xvi. 1879, p. 188.

220 Mr. C. Spence Bate on Synaxes.

XIX.—On Synaxes, a new Genus of Crustacea.
By C. Spence Bate, F.R.S. &e.

[Plate XIV. ]

Genus SYNAXES*.

Carapace anteriorly produced between the eyes to a flat-
pointed rostrum. Eyes lodged in distinct orbits. First pair
of antenne situated beneath the second, slender, terminating
in two short flagella; second situated outside and above the
first pair, and terminating in a long and rigid flagellum,
having the first two joints of the peduncle fused with the
cephalon, and only three joints free. Pereiopoda monodactyle,
first pair largest, posterior pairsmallest, not chelate in thefemale.
Branchie are trichobranchiate, having the podobranchial
plumes attached to long mastibranchial plates (flabella).
Pleopoda attached to the first somite of the pleon small and
single-branched; those attached to the others are biramose,
having the inner branch three-jointed and cylindrical, the
outer foliaceous. The rhipidura (tail-fan) is broad and
foliaceous, anterior portion of each plate calcareous, the pos-
terior part membranous.

Synaxes hybridica.

The carapace is slightly depressed. The anterior margin is
produced to a rostral poimt im the dorsal median line, and on
the outer side of the eyes to nearly as far as the rostral point,
forming a decided orbit in which the eyes are situated.

The pleon is as broad as the carapace ; and small ale on the
first somite laterally protrude and overlap the posterior margin
of the carapace laterally.

A slight but continuous line of elevation or carina traverses
the median line of the second and three following somites, but
is wanting on the first and sixth. The coxal plates are per-
fectly fused with their respective somites, and the rhipidura
is foliaceous and well developed.

The eyes are small, placed on short peduncles, and distant.

The first pair of antenne: have the peduncle long and the
flagella short ; the second pair of antennz have only three free
joints to the peduncle, and no scaphocerite (or free scale), the
two basal joints being closely fused with the metopus (or
face); and the phymacerite (or tubercular opening to the green
gland) is situated laterally, at the side of and close to the oral
aperture.

* guvakis, combination.

Mr. C. Spence Bate on Synaxes. 221

The mandible is strong, and carries a small two-jointed
synaphipod (or appendage).

All the pereiopoda are simple, terminating in short dactyh.
The first pair is the largest, and is tolerably robust; the fol-
lowing gradually decrease in succession until the last, which
is more than proportionally smaller than the preceding. ‘The
first pair of pleopoda is small and single-branched; all the
others are biramose. The four following slightly diminish
in size, the inner branch being biarticulate and slender, the
other being uniarticulate and foliaceous. The sixth or poste-
rior pair, which forms the outer plates of the rhipidura (tail-fan),
consists of a short basal joint and two foliaceous branches ;
and the telson is broad and foliaceous, having more than half
its length membranous and flexible. Length about 3 inches.

Hab. West Indies.

The carapace is about half the length of the animal.
It is subcylindrical, being dorsally slightly flattened, so
that an angular ridge traverses the sides from the anterior
extremity of the outer angle of the orbit to the posterior
margin of the carapace. ‘lhe anterior margin is projected,
between the eyes to an acute angle, and outside the same
organs to about half the length of the central rostral projec-
tion, between which the orbit exists as a deep and more than
semicircular excavation, the limits of which are defined by a
small inner and outer protuberance. ‘The margin of the orbit
is fringed with an even row of small bead-like tubercles, which
at the centre is divided by a small crevice or notch. The pos-
terior margin is dorsally excavated, being posteriorly produced
at the sides and depressed especially laterally, and is edged
with a fringe of short hairs, and separated from the rest of the
carapace by an even line or fissure.

The carapace has the surface evenly covered with small
granular projections, a prominent few of which form a longi-
tudinal line, commencing at the anterior point of the frontal
margin between the eyes and terminating near the centre of the
stomachal region. ‘Ihose on the dorsal surface, when closely
examined, are connected on the anterior sidewith three or four
small punctures, through which small hairs are presumed to
pass, from the circumstance of their being seen to remain on
the anterior and lateral portions.

The pleon is similarly punctated, but more sparingly ; and
all the punctures point posteriorly.

The first somite is scarcely as broad as the carapace, and
has on each side a small anteriorly directed aliform process
that overlaps the posterior margin and retains the carapace in
its position.

222 Mr. C. Spence Bate on Synaxes.

The second somite dorsally underlies and laterally overlies
the first somite with a small flat projecting process, at the base
of the upper part of which is the articulation on which the
somite moves. In the central dorsal line is a narrow eleva-
tion or ridge, which is low and smooth and repeated on the
three following somites. Laterally the coxal plates are fused
with the somite very perfectly; and each successive somite
articulates with the preceding by a small cup-like process,
which receives the extremity of a small rounded tubercle that
is situated in a notch in the posterior margin of the preceding
somite.

The sixth somite is smaller than the others, and dorsally
smooth, and supports laterally and posteriorly an appendage
with two foliaceous branches.

The telson is anteriorly calcareous, and posteriorly folia-
ceous.

The eyes are small, and appended to the extremity of short
peduncles that are laterally connected with the ophthalmic
nerve through a long narrow foramen formed by the under
surface of the rostral projection impinging against the upper
surface of the first and second joints of the second antenne,
which is produced so far inwards and outwards as to meet on
each side in a sharp process near the median line, close under
the apex of the rostral projection.

The first pair of antenne, in consequence of the formation
of the basal joint of the second pair, is forced downwards,
and, when viewed in a lateral or frontal direction the first
pair of antenne, is seen beneath the second pair. It is three-
jointed and slender; the first joint is long and slight, the
second and third are subequal and about half the length of the
first, terminating in two small flagella that are not longer than
the third joint.

The second pair of antenne has the first and second
joints solidly fused with the metopus (face) or ventral surface
of the cephalon, so that three joints only are free. The basal
joints are so closely fused together that it is impossible to de-
termine their limits, beyond the fact of the position of the
phymacerite. The third joint is broad and excavated on the
inner and lower side to allow space for the first pair of an-
tennz, which the second pair partially overrides. The fourth
or penultimate joint is broad and short; and the ultimate
is about the same length, and with a short obtuse spine
on the outer distal angle. This last carries a stiff and strong
multiarticulate flagellum, each articulus of which is fringed
with small bristle-like hairs.

The mandible is robust, smooth on the incisive margin,

Mr. C. Spence Bate on Synaxes. 223

excepting for a single notch on one side and a corresponding
tooth on the opposite, and furnished with a three-jointed
synaphipod, the terminal joint of which is covered with nume-
rous hairs.

The posterior oral appendages, as far as I am enabled to
determine them without injury to the unique and dried speci-
men at my disposal, appear to approximate those of Pali-
nurus in the possession of multiarticulate terminations to the
outer branches.

The gnathopoda are flat and broad; the first pair has the
dactylus absent, and generally resembles that of Palinurus.
The second has the three terminal joints much narrower than the
preceding, the margins of which are thickly furred with hairs.

The first pair of pereiopoda is stout and strong, the meros
being the widest joint of the whole; the dactylus sharp-
pointed, unguiculate and slightly curved ; the propodos is stout
and slightly narrower at the dactyloid than at the carpal
extremity. The carpus is triangular and slightly shorter than
the propodos; the meros is broad and long; the ischium and
basis are short, fused into one triangular joint; and the coxa
is strong and short. The three succeeding pairs of pereiopoda
are more slender, but formed on the same type as the preceding,
each successively decreasing in proportion; and the posterior
pair is still smaller and more than proportionally slenderer than
the others.

The first pair of pleopoda is subcentrally attached to the
somite, and consists of a small, slender, unbranched appen-
dage. ‘The second and three following pairs are attached to
the inner wall of the coxal plate and are biramose, the inner
branch being two-jointed, slender, and cylindrical; the outer
is single and foliaceous. The posterior pairs gradually de-
crease in size. The sixth pair of pleopoda is biramose and
foliaceous, the anterior portion being hard and calcareous,
terminating in small sharp teeth on the outer margin and
central ridge, posterior to which the membranous portion is
longitudinally ribbed and flexile.

The telson is broad at the base and rounded at the extremity ;
the anterior division is calcareous, and armed with two minute
points equilaterally distant from the margins and centre, but
the posterior division is membranous and flexile.

It has been to me a matter of curious interest to observe
how in the history of classification every zoologist of note
has, previously to the anatomy and development of the sepa-
rate genera being well understood, associated the two very

dissimilar looking animals of Jbaccus and Palinurus in one
family.

224 Mr. C. Spence Bate on Synaxes.

It must have been based almost, if not absolutely, on the
uniformly simple character of the pereiopoda, or walking-feet,
although Milne-Edwards supported it by the character of the
branchial appendages ; but the condition of depression that
he assigns to the Macrouwres cutrassés is scarcely in accordance
with the cylindrical form of Palinurus. But this advanced
carcinologist has separated them into distinct tribes (sub-
families), based on the very distinct form of their antenne ;
while Leach classed them in one family, which corresponds
with Macroures cuirassés of Edwards, except that he included
the geuus Porcellana as well as Galathea; while Edwards
includes Galathea and the Eryonide, which latter family was
not known to Leach, and only to Edwards in a fossil con-
dition.

The union of these very distinct generic forms, in some parts
so wholly unlike, clearly demonstrates that the conclusions
that have been arrived at were based on a hypothetical rather
than on a clear appreciation of the structure and development
of the several genera.

If we take the carapace of the two forms and place them
side by side, without any of the appendages attached, we
shall at once see how very distinct that of Jbaccus and all the
Scyllaride is from that of the Palinuride, even when we
take them from Arctus, the nearest approximating genus of the
two families. :;

In the Scyllaride the eyes are implanted in two distinct
and perfect orbits that are almost complete in their circular
circumference ; and these are situated far apart, in some genera
(as Scyllarus) as far as the limits of the carapace will admit.

In the Palinuride there is no orbit, and the peduncular
structure, whether calcareous, as in Palinurus, or membra-
nous, as in Panulirus, lies in front of the anterior margin of
the carapace, and the eye-peduncles are connected with each
other at their base.

The dorsal surface of the first antennal somite in Lbaccus
and all the Scyllaride is projected in front, and locked by a
pair of dovetailed processes into the anterior margin of the
carapace; and the first pair of antenna is articulated at the
anterior margin of this somite.

In the Palinuride the first antennal somite does not appear
in connexion with the anterior margin of the carapace, but is
developed as a large and conspicuous structure in advance of
the eyes, and at its anterior extremity the first pair of an-
tenne is articulated.

The second pair of antenne resemble each other in the two
separate families in their connexion with the body of the

Mr. C. Spence Bate on Synaxes. 225

animal. The first joints are completely fused together and
with the somites to which they are attached; and there is
nothing to distinguish them from the metopus or frontal sur-
face of the anterior somites, except the presence of the phy-
macerite, or tubercular opening to the green gland. Three
are all that are apparent as freely articulating joints belonging
to the peduncle of this pair of antenne. The terminal joint
that in the Scyllaride exists as a broad, flat, and scale-like
plate, homologizes with the long multiarticulate flagellum of
the same antenne in Palinuride.

The oral organs in the separate families are very distinct ;
but the individuality lessens in the appendages as they recede
from the mouth. The gnathopoda are in several of the
genera only specifically distinct. The pereiopoda or walking-
legs are typically the same even to the development of a
small chela at the extremity of the last pair in the females.

The carapace is bolted down by a strong tubercle attached
to the sides of the last somite of the pereion (peredocleis*) , both
in the Palinuride and the Scyllaride ; and in each there is a
small aliform process that overlaps the posterior margin of the
carapace (pleocleis +) attached to the first somite of the pleon,
but which is less important in the Palinuride than in the
Scyllaride. All the somites of the pleon, inclusive of the
telson, are generically alike ; but the pleopoda or appendages
vary.

th the Palinuride the first pair is absent, and all the others,
except that which goes to form the tail-fan, consist of a single
round and foliaceous plate in the male, whereas in the female
the second pair (Plate XIV. fig. 6,¢) has two foliaceous,
ovate, disk-like plates, the imner being attached to a two-
jointed pedicle ; the third pair (r) consists of an inner three-
jointed biramose branch, and an outer, ovate, foliaceous
plate; the two following are on the type of the third pair.
In the Scyllaride the first is present in both male and female,
and is biramose, but foliaceous in the female and styliform in
the male (fig. 5, »). The four succeeding are biramose, one
branch being cylindrical and three-jointed, the other single-
jointed and foliaceous, being varied a little in both sexes;
but the whole are distinguishable from those of the Pali-
nuride.

The species which I have just described under the name of
Synaxes hybridica appears to be a combination of the two
families—an intermediate form that connects the two very
dissimilar groups, and shows the way in which they approxi-
mate the more normal types of the Macrura.

* kXels, bolt, and pereion. tT kXels, bolt, and pleon.
Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. vii. 17

226 Mr. C. Spence Bate on Synaxes.

The eyes are those of the Scyllaride; the second pair of
antennz are those of the Palinuride. The legs are common
to both forms, and the carapace belongs to neither. The frontal
region resembles neither; and the posterior resembles both, as
also does the pleon, whereas the plecpoda are modelled on
the type of those of the Scyllaride, and the tail-fan is that of
both.

The first thing that strikes the observation is the rostri-~
form advancement of the frontal margin, as being very diffe-
rent from that of either Scydlarus or Palinurus. In Panulirus
the frontal margin in the median line does not advance
beyond that of the eyes; but in Palinurus marinus there is a
small triangular prominence that projects above the ophthal-
mic somite in the median line. In Palinurus Lalandii this
prominence is still further produced, and is so far advanced
that it reaches beyond the ophthalmic somite, which it covers,
and, dipping down, meets the inner portion of the ventral
surface of the third somite, and so forms an imperfect orbit *.
In Synazes the rostral prominence is so far advanced that it
reaches to the extremity of the third or first free joint of the
second pair of antennee, beneath which the anterior and inner
angle of the second joint of the second pair of antenna is
visible, and is seen to articulate with the inner and posterior
angle of the next joint.

Laterally, on the outside of the orbit, the frontal margin is
produced considerably in advance of the line of the organs of
vision, and is longitudinally folded at an cbtuse angle beneath
the ventral surface. ‘This antero-lateral development of the
carapace (which I do not remember to exist anywhere so pro-
minently, except in Polycheles and its generic allies) produces
in the frontal margin of the carapace an orbit that is almost as
deep as that of Scyllarus. The posterior margin of the cara-
pace is not free as in the Astacide, but firmly secured in its
position by an osseous tubercle (perecoclezs) attached to the last
somite of the pereion, and lodged in a corresponding closely-
fitting hollow on the underside of the carapace, so that it cannot
be raised as we see that some Crustacea have the power of
doing. The anterior somite of the pleon overlaps laterally, by
means of small wing-like processes (p/eocleis), the posterior
margin of the carapace. ‘This is a feature strongly pronounced
in the Scyllaride and in Polycheles and its allies; it also
exists to some extent in the Palinuride, but to a less efficient
degree.

The ventral surface of the pereion in our female specimen

* Tam much inclined to think that P. Lalandw of Edwards must gene-
rically be separated from both Panulirus and Palinurus.

Mr. C. Spence Bate on Synaxes. 227

is broad and flat; and all the legs have the second and third
joints fused into one—a feature common to the Palinuride and
Scyllaride, but not to be found in any other form of the Ma-
crura.

The last or fifth pair of pereiopoda is very much smaller
than either of the preceding pairs ; but it terminates in a simple
dactylus, whereas in the Scyllaridx and the Palinuride, and
in some of the genera allied to Polycheles, the female has the
posterior pair terminating in a minute chela—a feature that is
common to the Anomurous Crustacea, but not to be found in -‘
the Astacide: or Homaride, and separates them from those
that possess this character.

In Synaxes the pleon has a longitudinal central ridge or
line of elevation—a feature common to many of the Scyllaride,
but seldom seen in the Palinuride, although lines of demarca-
tion without elevation are apparent in the Palinurus marinus
of our seas. It becomes a prominent feature in the Eryonide,
but is never seen in the Astacidee or Homaride.

The pleopoda are developed very similarly to those which
exist in the Scyllaride, and are distinguishable from those of
any other form among the Macrura, especially in the female,
where one, the inner (or true representative of the leg), is
three-jointed and cylindrical, and the outer is a simple folia-
ceous plate. In the Palinuride in the male there is only the
outer leaf-like plate, the inner ramus being absent. In the
females the second pair consists of two foliaceous plates, the
third and following of one foliaceous plate and a subcylin-
drical biramose branch. The appendage which belongs to
the anterior somite is well developed in the Scyllaride, is
reduced to a small cylindrical rod in Synawxes, and is absent
in the Palinuride.

The position among the Macrura that the present species
occupies is very near to Palinurus; and its departure appears
to approximate more or less closely the genera that go to
make up the family of the Scyllaride. The first distinguishing
feature is the advanced rostriform projection between the
eyes, of which we have no representative in either of the
known families, although in some species a small incipient
process appears to exist, as in Palinurus marinus. But this
feature in Synazes brings the form of the carapace into close
resemblance with that ot the Astacidea, from which it may be
distinguished by its being secured at the posterior margin. The
breadth of the ventral surface of the pereion, the form of the
pereiopoda and antenne are all peculiar to the Palinuride,
whereas those of the pereiopoda and the pleopoda are essen-
tially features of the Scyllaride. It would thus appear that the

228 Mr. A. G. Butler on the

specimen assumes a hybrid appearance. All the anterior
appendages except the eyes are those of Palinurus; the eyes
and the posterior appendages are those of Scyllarus, while the
intermediate appendages are common to both. It does not be-
long to any genus of the Palinuride ; and it does not belong to
any in Scyllaride: it either unites the two outlying families
into one, or it is the type of a form distinct from either. My
own inclination is to bring the three into one family ; but our
want of knowledge of the character of the brephalus of Synases,
whether it be that of Phyllosoma, as are those of the other
two forms, in each of which are several very distinct and well-
defined genera, makes it more prudent for the present to group
it in a distinct subfamily in the same tribe as the other two,
thus :—

SYNAXIDEA.
Synaxide.

Scyllarina. Synaxina. Palinurina.

The dried condition of the specimen at my disposal has
enabled me only slightly to examine the branchial apparatus ;
but from what I have seen I think it may be tabulated by the
same formula as that of Palinurus and Scyllarus.

The specimen has been kindly lent to me for examination
by Dr. Carte, and belongs to the Natural-History Museum
under his care in Dublin. It was taken in the West Indies
by Commodore Sir F. M‘Clintock ; but the depth and precise
locality are not recorded.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XIV.

Fig. 1. Synaxes hybridica. Dorsal aspect.

Fig. 2. S. hybridica. Ventral aspect.

Fig. 3. S. hybridica. Lateral aspect of cephalon (eye removed).

Fig. 4. q, second pair of pleopoda (Synazes, female).

Fig. 5. p, first pair of pleopoda (Arctus, male) ; g, second pair of pleo-
poda (Arctus, female) ; 7, third pair of pleopoda (Arctus, female).

Fig. 6. g, second pair of pleopoda (Palinurus, female); 7, third pair of

pleopoda (Palinurus, female).

XX.—On the first Part of a Memoir by Mons. Charles Ober-

thiir on the Lepidoptera of the Isle of Askold. By Arruur
G. Butier, F.L.S8., F.Z.8., &.

In the last livraison of his ‘ Etudes d’Entomologie’ (some
preliminary diagnoses for which were kindly forwarded to me
by the author late in 1880) M. Oberthiir gives an account of

Lepidoptera of the Isle of Askold. 229

a collection of Lepidoptera received by him from the Isle of
Askold, Mantchooria.

Whilst lepidopterists are much indebted to M. Oberthiir for
the numerous careful figures which illustrate this memoir, it
must be a cause for regret to all who study it that equal care
has not been taken to avoid the multiplication of'synonyms.

Monsieur Oberthiir is, I feel sure, too genuine a naturalist
to be hurt at the correction of any errors which may have
crept into his publications; and as the Lepidoptera of China and
Japan have, for years past, been my special study, I feel
called upon, in the interests of science, to review a paper
bearing so intimate a relation as this does to the entomolo-
gical resources of those countries.

It seems to me that when an entomologist is ready not
merely to distinguish every geographical race as a species,
but to give a distinct name to every admitted variety or sport,
he ought, for the sake of consistency, if for no better reason,
to adopt all genera founded upon well-defined structural cha-
racters. ‘This, however, M. Oberthiir has not done, as will be
at once seen by the following revised list of his supposed new
species.

The advantage of numerous genera is (it seems to me) to
enable a naturalist who does not possess in a large measure
the gift of order which would enable him to group allied forms
by their external facies, to associate them by the more scien-
tific mode of examining and comparing their structural pecu-
liarities.

The following is a list of the Heterocera in M. Oberthiir’s
memoir, with corrections of their specific and generic names
where required :—

Sphingide.

Smerinthus askoldensis, Oberth. Belongs to the group of
genera near Proserpinus, although in some of its characters it
more nearly resembles Pergesa. It has no connexion what-
ever with the Smerinthine.

Smerinthus Jankowskii, Oberth. Near to Triptogon dyras
from Ceylon.

Sphinx Davidis, Oberth. A species of the genus Hyloicus.

The three species of Sphingide will therefore all stand,
although in different genera from those to which they are
referred.

Zygenide.
Procris psychina, Oberth.

230 Mr. A. G. Butler on the

Lithosiide.

Lithosia gigantea, Oberth. Referable to the genus Collita
of Moore. ;

Calligenia askoldensis, Oberth. Near to Miltochrista mini-
ata, if distirfct.

Arctiide.

Spilosoma Derriesit, Oberth. =S. punctarium, Cram.

Spilosoma Jankowski, Oberth. Near to Spilarctia lac-
teata of India.

Of S. seriato-punctata, Motsch., which he figures under the
name of S. striatopunctata, M. Oberthiir describes specimens
as having more or less rose-colour over the secondaries. As
we have both sexes with barely a trace of rose-colour both
from Yokohama and Tokei, I strongly suspect that these ex-
amples with rose-coloured secondaries are referable to my
Spilarctia rosacea. The basal black costal dash is charac-
teristic of a group of allied species ; but its existence on oppo-
site sexes of two otherwise dissimilar forms is very apt to
mislead collectors, who naturally jump to the conclusion that
they have discovered the male and female of one species.

Liparide.

Dasychira virginea, Oberth.

Dasychira olga, Oberth.

Dasychira acronycta, Oberth. ‘Two species are here con-
founded, the male being that sex of D. lunulata, Butl.; the
female, which is new, may retain the name. We have both
of these species from Japan in both sexes; and a mere glance
at the two males or females side by side would convince the
most prejudiced of their entire distinctness: the male of D.
acronycta is considerably smaller than the female; and the
female of D. dunulata is in like manner considerably larger
than its own male.

Leucoma piperita, Oberth. A species of Ariaxa, which we
have recently received from Tokei, Japan.

Lasiocampide.

Pyrosis eximia, Oberth. Near to Podalia dorsimacula,
Walk.

Odonestis askoldensis, Oberth. Described as a dark variety
of O. potatoria; but the latter species varies to any extent in
this respect ; the colouring, however, appears to resemble that
of O. albomaculata, a common Japanese species which cer-
tainly is (as M. Oberthiir suggests) distinct from O. potatoria.

Lepidoptera of the Isle of Askold. 231

Odonestis unicolor, Oberth. Described as a red variation of
O. excellens, Butl.

Trisula andreas, Oberth. = Phalera flavescens, Bremer.

This species is a Notodont, although referred by M. Ober-
thiir to the Lasiocampide, next to what he calls “ Bombyx!”
neustria; the genus 7rzsula, on the other hand, is a broad-
winged Liparid having the larva of a Lymantria. P. flaves-
cens 1s a common Japanese species.

Saturnia Jankowskit, Oberth. Referable to the genus
Rhodia.

Euphranor ceca, Oberth. A form quite new to me.

Pseudopsyche Dembowskii, Oberth. A species of Panisa

near circumdata.

Limacodide.

Limacodes castaneus, Oberth. = Phrixolepia sericea, Butl.
M. Oberthiir admits this synonym in the note at the end of

his description; but he nevertheless retains his own name.
Limacodes dentatus, Oberth.

GEOMETRITES.

Nyssiodes olgaria, Oberth. According to Dr. Staudinger
(so M. Oberthiir tells us), thisis probably the Biston lefuarvus
of Erschoff. If thisis so, surely it is unwise to run the risk of
adding to the synonymy by proposing another name for it.
We have this species from Yokohama, sent by Mr. Pryer.

Boarmia stipitaria, Oberth. Very near to B. consortarva.

Boarmia piperitarva, Oberth.

Boarmia Dembowskiaria, Oberth. This species, in my
opinion, does not belong to the Boarmiide; the character of
its markings is rather that of /¢donia. It could in no case be
referred to Boarmia, if its antenne are so slender as repre-
sented. The B. mandshuraria of Bremer appears to me to be
a Melanippe allied to my B. abravaria.

Boarmia amphidasyaria, Oberth. 'This is a Hemerophila.

Phorodesma Jankowskiaria, Mill.

Phorodesma amenaria, Oberth. This is a Comibena.

Nemoria amphitritaria, Oberth. This is a Thalera.

Acidalia unio, Oberth. Is not this a Corycia?

Phastane griseo-limbata, Oberth. = Nematocampa straminea,
Butl.

According to M. Oberthiir his “‘ Diagnoses”’ were pub-
lished in August 1879, and consequently take priority of my
paper published in the ‘ Annals’ for November and December
1879.

232 Mr. A. G. Butler on the

Rhyparia askoldinaria, Oberth. Since it is not advisable
to use the same generic name twice over in different groups
of the Heterocerous Lepidoptera, I proposed the name Icterodes
for this genus (see Ill. Typ. Lep. Het. ii. Index, p. ix, and
pl. xxxvil. fig. 9), a fact which M. Oberthiir seems entirely to
have overlooked.

Melanippe luctuosaria, Oberth.

Anticlea Taczanowskiaria, Oberth. Common at Tokei,
Japan.

M. Oberthiirrefers my Acidalia unisterpis to Camptogramma,
by which alteration he certainly does not improve matters. The
species is somewhat variable, and is doubtless identical with
Moore’s A. plurilinearia; it certainly is allied to A. moni-
“iata, and is neither allied to, nor does it in the least resemble,
any species of Camptogramma.

Eucosmia Hedemannaria, Oberth. =Scotosia certata of
Europe, which we have also from Japan. M. Oberthiir says
that the common transverse line is noticeably more undulated ;
this, however, is an individual difference existing only between
the single example in M. Oberthiir’s possession and his speci-
mens of S. certata.

Cidaria corussaria, Oberth. =probably C. russata, var., of
Europe. ‘There are few species more variable than this, one
of the least extraordinary of its modifications being the entire
absence of lines or bands from the secondaries. We have
specimens very similar to that figured by M. Oberthiir both
from Japan and North America.

Cidaria venulata, Oberth. Near to C. umbrosaria and
C. relata.

Cidaria fabrefactaria, Oberth. =C. corylata of Europe.

Cidaria askoldaria, Oberth. =C. jameza, Butl., 2.

Of this species we have hitherto only received one male, and
M. Oberthiir one female; the differences between the two are
only precisely what exist between the sexes of other species.

Cidaria ludovicaria, Oberth.

It is a pity that M. Oberthiir did not form a new genus for
this species, for Abraxas junctilineata, A. plurilineata, &c. ;
they are not true Zerenide, yet look quite out of place in
Cidaria, from which they differ in their shorter palpi, some-
what different venation, and utterly dissimilar coloration.
M. Oberthiir, however, seems to consider it a hindrance to
study to group allied forms together under distinctive names :
if this be not the case, it is incomprehensible why he should
almost invariably refer his new species to the magazine genera
of the older authors.

Lepidoptera of the Isle of Askold. 233

Cidaria achatinellaria, Oberth. = C. achatinaria, var.

According to the author this only differs from the European
species in its better-defined markings and redder colouring—
differences such as occur between individuals of the same
Species in most genera of Lepidoptera.

Notodontide.

Dicranura askolda, Oberth. =D. felina, Butl.

It is strange that, in this instance, M. Oberthiir has not
even referred to my species; his figure agrees exactly with
some specimens from Japan, differing from my type only in its
paler colouring, due, I have no doubt, partly to starving in the
larval condition, and partly to rubbing. The species fre-
quently attains a much greater size.

Harpyia Taczanowskit, Oberth. Probably a Thiacidas, but
most certainly not a Harpyia (compare with H. verbasct of
Europe).

Uropus Branickit, Oberth. A Phalera of the P. sigmata
group.

Notodonta lineata, Oberth.

We have a specimen of this species from Tokei, Japan.

Notodonta Jankowskii, Oberth. Very close to Peridea
dromedarius.

Notodonta Dembowskii, Oberth. Apparently another
Peridea.

Notodonta monetaria, Oberth. A LPertdea close to P.
trepida.

Notodonta bombycina, Oberth. This species does not ap-
pear to me to belong to the Notodontide ; it may be a Lima-
codid, a Lasiocampid, or possibly even a Liparid. With-
out seeing the insect I could not positively refer it to its
true family ; but its aspect is less that of a Notodontid than
of any of the others. In pattern it is more like many of the
Noctuites.

Drymonia biloba, Oberth. Seems allied to Colocasia coryli,
Linn.

Drymonia velutina, Oberth. Appears to be an Ochro-
stigma.

Drymonia lichen, Oberth. Referable to Walker’s genus
Cascera.

Notodonta plebeia, Oberth.

Trabala splendida, Oberth. Congeneric with Nadata.

I am responsible for this generic error, having been misled
by Walker’s careless assignment of N. nivedceps to his genus
Trabala. A reference to Abbot’s ‘Insects of Georgia,’ ii.
pl. Ixxxii., will convince M. Oberthiir that the proper loca-

234 Mr. A. G. Butler on the

tion for N. splendida, cristata, and niveiceps is with Nadata
gibbosa. The convergence or divergence of the lines on the
primaries seems to be an inconstant character in this group.

Prilodontis plusiotis, Oberth. Not a Ptilodontis (= Ptero-
stoma).

This species has the aspect of Celeta, a genus near to
Spatalia; but M. Oberthiir figures it with filiform antenne, a
most abnormal character for a male Notodont. Surely this is
an artist’s error ?

Lophopteryx Ladislat, Oberth.

NOcTUITES.

Cymatophora argenteopicta, Oberth. Near to C. plumbea,
Butl.

Cymatophora ampliata, Oberth. (nec Butl.). = C. or var. of
Europe ?

M. Oberthiir’s criticism of the lithographic drawing of this
species, being based upon the supposition that he possessed
my species, falls to the ground. The species recognized by
Walker as C. ocularis, Linn., but by Dr. Staudinger as C.
octogesima, seems to me to be referable to Asphalia, not to
Cymatophora; nevertheless it will perhaps be best to give the
name of C. éntensa to the Japanese species of this name, and
’ thus save all confusion.

Dichonia goliath, Oberth. Apparently an Agriopis, in
which case it should be placed in the Arctide near to Diph-
tera. Thetype of Moma, Hiibn. (a genus of Notodontide) is
M. ludifica, not orion.

Leptina macroptera, Oberth. = Cyana decipiens, Butl.

It seems that my specific name was well chosen, since
M. Oberthiir has been deceived by the mere pattern of the
primaries into placing it with the North-American Noctuites
of the genus Leptina. Itis a true Lithosiid, and agrees in all
its structural characters with C. detrita.

Apatela Jankowskti, Oberth.

M. Oberthiir says that the nearest European species to this
is Apatela strigosa; but as strigosa is the type of Hyboma, it
follows that, if allied, A. Jankowskit cannot be an Apatela.
It is more like Leptina.

Leucania inanis, Oberth.

Lhizogramma aurilegula, Oberth.

J think it doubtful whether H. petrorhiza can be separated
generically from ELucalimia (EL. gnaphalit) ; but if so, it might
be placed with my L. saga of Japan, to which M. Oberthiir’s
species seems also to be allied. I find that L. petrificata

Lepidoptera of the Isle of Askold. 235
(type of Lithophane) differs generically from EL. saga, which

I provisionally referred to the same genus.

Apamea askoldis, Oberth. Like A. ophiogramma in
pattern.

Miana arcta, Oberth. (nec Lederer). =Raphia fasciata,
var. ?

Ledeyrer’s species is a true Mana, so far as I can judge by
his figure.

Miana parietum, Oberth. Probably = Raphia fasciata, Butl.

This figure by M. Oberthiir does not represent the white
fringes to the tegule and whitish metathorax of L. fasciata ;
but it does not appear to be very exact, the markings seem
blurred.

Caradrina albosignata, Oberth. =Radinacra, sp. close to
fi. lineosa, Moore.

We have Moore’s species from Tokei, which renders the
distinctness of C. albosignata a little doubtful; still, if the
slight differences noticeable in M. Oberthiir’s figure are true
to nature, the species will stand.

Caradrina ceca, Oberth. Described as a variety of the
preceding. We have a specimen of this moth from Tokei.

Agrotis autumnalis, Oberth.

Noctua stupens, Oberth. = Ochropleura near O. musiva of
Europe.

We have this species from Tokei; it is of little more
than half the bulk of O. stuwpenda; the name given is so near
to mine in sound that it is a pity it was used.

Noctua hysgina, Oberth. = Graphiphora lubentia, Butl.

Teniocampa aurarie, Oberth. = Semiophora, sp.
Dianthecia admiranda, Oberth. Near to Epia echit of
Europe.

Phlogophora pallens, Oberth. = Phlogophora periculosa ?,
Guén. (faded).

M. Oberthiir says that this is without doubt the species
which I figured under the name of P. beatrix. If M. Oberthiir
had no doubt about this, why did he (knowing my description
was published probably before his specimens were caught) take
the trouble to rename it. If M. Oberthiir’s figure is a good
one, P. pallens is, without doubt, not my P. beatriz; it is
smaller, of a different shape, altogether paler and duller, and
the belt across the primaries is of a very different form. It
agrees exactly with a pale specimen of P. periculosa in our
collection ; and this I believe it to be.

Aplecta askolda, Oberth. Described as a variety of Hurots
nebulosa.

E. imbrifera differs from FL. nebulosa much in the same way.

236 On the Lepidoptera of the Isle of Askold.

Hadena Jankowskii, Oberth. =Apamea gemina, var.,
Hiibn.

Nobody who knows the extreme variability of this species
can regard M. Oberthiir’s form as a distinct species ; we have
European examples rather larger than his figure and agreeing
with it in pattern.

Hadena kosakka, Oberth. Near to H. atriplicis, but with
the white spot of the primaries formed as in H. auriplena
(Hurois ? auriplena, Wlk.).

Telesilla malachites, Oberth. =Canna, sp. close to C.
pulchripicta.

Acontia variegata, Oberth. Apparently an Anarta (A.
myrtilli group.)

Acontia flavomaculata, Oberth. Somewhat like “ Hrastria”
rubicunda, Wlk., but probably congeneric with the preceding
species,

Erastria nemorum, Oberth. Near to E. fuscula, which is
common in Japan.

Erastria costimacula, Oberth.

Erastria mandschuriana, Oberth. Belongs to the Lima-
codidee.

We have this beautiful little moth from Tokei ; its colora-
tion and the slenderness of its abdomen must have been the
only characters which suggested to M. Oberthiir that it be-
longed to the Acontiide ; its short, curled, pectinated antenne
(misrepresented by M. Oberthiir’s artist), and the scattered
shining scales all over the primaries, as also the banding of
these wings beyond the middle, should have guided him to
the natural family of the species. I would propose to call this
genus Mimerastria, from the somewhat vague resemblance
which the species bears to H. candidula, and which has thus
misled M. Oberthiir.

Plusia nadeja, Oberth. = Plusia zosima, var., Hibn.

In the British Museum from Japan ; it attains a consider-
ably greater size than the figure, which is very poor: the
discal lineand outer border of the secondaries are wholly omitted
by the artist; and the brown patches on the primaries are too
pale. If the Japanese form be regarded by M. Oberthiir as
distinct (as possibly it may be), I will not deprive him of the
pleasure of naming it.

Plusia esmeralda, Oberth. =Plusia moneta, var., Linn.
(teste M. Oberthir).

Plusta locuples, Oberth. = Plusia ornatissima, Walker.

This Plusta is fairly common in Japan.

Amphipyra obscura, Oberth. =Amphipyra pyramidea,
L. (teste Oberth.).

Prof. H. Fol on the Family Tintinnodea. 237

Catocala obscurata, Oberth. = C. unicuba, Walk.
I see that M. Oberthiir has united the genera Chrysort-
thrum and Bolina! After this nothing will surprise me ; for I

do not think two genera of Noctuites less alike could easily
be found.

Capnodes Jankowski, Oberth.

Madopa flavomacula, Oberth.

Thus finishes M. Oberthiir’s first part of his Memoir on
Lepidoptera of the Island of Askold. It is sincerely to be
hoped that his next will be an improvement upon it, as it is
impossible to overestimate the injury, through waste of time,
which is occasioned to workers by the publication of duplicate
names for the same species—a fault which, of all men, I had
believed my friend M. Oberthiir one of the most anxious to
avoid.

XXI.—Contribution to the Knowledge of the Family Tin-
tinnodea. By HERMANN FOL, Professor in the University
of Geneva*,

[Plate XVII. figs. 1-6. ]

THROUGHOUT the still imperfectly known class of the Infusoria
there is perhaps no group of which the structure, classification,
and synonymy are so obscure as those of the family of the Z’%n-
tinnt. This is because most authors have thrown pell-mell
into this family very diverse forms, characterized so insufhi-
ciently that one does not know what to make of such proble-
matical types. Or, again, we have seen authors who only knew
a small number of forms belonging to a different group, take
these forms as the type of the family, and, upon this erroneous
basis, upset the diagnosis of the latter.

But, before seeking to establish the zoological position of
our Infusoria, it will be well to cast a glance at the organiza-
tion of the forms that I have observed, so as to be able to
compare my results with those of other authors.

The Tintinnodea are very abundant in the roads of Ville-
franche, but all belong to a few species which I shall describe
hereafter. ‘These species, moreover, will be divided into three
distinct genera, taking as the basis of the classification the
form of the test. Nevertheless the structure of the animals
presents a remarkable uniformity.

* Translated by W. S. Dallas, F.L.S., from the ‘ Bibliothéque Univer-
selle : Archives des Sciences Physiques et Naturelles, 3° période, tome v.

pp: 5-24, January 15, 1881. The writings of previous authors are

referred to by numbers, which are explained in a bibliographical list at
the end of the memoir.

238 Prof. H. Fol on the Family Tintinnodea.
The body (Pl. XVII. figs. 2 and 4) is, in general terms,

conical, terminated above by a broad disk, and produced below
into a contractile appendage which is longer or shorter accord-
ing to the species. Hnergetic as are the contractions of this
sort of peduncle, it nevertheless does not present that trans-
verse striation, recalling the texture of the striped muscles,
which characterizes the peduncle of the Vorticelle. Claparéde
and Lachmann (VII. p. 195) have clearly recognized this fact,
which helps to establish the distinction between the Tintinnt
and the Vortzcelle. Stein has observed that, when the animal
detaches itself from its test, the peduncle enters into the body
and becomes confounded with it—a proof that it consists of
sarcode with no special differentiation.

The superior discoidal extremity or peristome, when the
animal is in a state of perfect extension, 1s placed a little
obliquely with relation to the aperture of the test. This posi-
tion, and the long cilia which garnish it, give it a great re-
semblance to the disk of the Vorticelle. Nevertheless this
similitude is only apparent, as Claparéde and Lachmann
have well remarked. In fact, the mouth, instead of being
placed at the outer margin of the disk, as in the Vorticelle,
is situated in its interior, and often even near its centre. The
disk itself, instead of being flat or slightly convex, as is the
case in the Vorticellina, is hollowed out like a saucer; and
the vibratile cilia, instead of forming a single row round the
margin of the disk, are implanted in great numbers and in
several lines over the greater part of the surface.

The arrangement of these vibratile cilia is exceedingly
curious and interesting, and deserves to fix our attention the
more because it has not been described by any of the authors
who have busied themselves with the Tintinnc.

The whole margin of the disk is occupied by long and strong
motor cilia, which strike the water vigorously and give the
animal an exceedingly rapid rectilinear movement of transla-
tion. All authors speak of this unruly natation, and of the
rapidity with which the animal traverses the field of the ob-
jective, and they make it an excuse for any thing that may
be imperfect in their descriptions.

I have spoken of a rectilinear movement. It is thus, in
fact, that the animals habitually swim; but they can readily
deviate from the direct line when they have to avoid an ob-
stacle. Moreover the animal is constantly turning upon itself
during its progress, which is therefore comparable to that of a
rifle-ball.

As soon as these great motor cilia commence their action,
they present the so-called phenomenon of rotation in a high

Prof. H. Fol on the Family Tintinnodea. 239

degree. The undulation is propagated from right to left, the
observer being supposed to be placed in the axis of the animal ;
so that one would imagine he saw a toothed wheel turning in
the direction indicated (Pl. XVII. figs. 2, 8, and 4). Are
these cilia implanted upon a single circular or spiral line, as
Stein supposes? or do they form a broken line? 'To solve
this question we may begin by examining the arrangement of
the other cilia which garnish the upper surface of the disk.

These cilia are arranged in parallel lines, all curved in the
same direction (fig. 3) and running from the margin of
the disk, or peristome, towards the mouth. In one species I
have counted twenty-four of these rows. ‘The mouth occu-
pying an excentric position, the rows which start from the
margin nearest to that aperture are of course much shorter
than those which start from the more distant margin (see
figs. 2 and 3); the others are of intermediate length. There
are, however, only a few lines of cilia that actually reach the
entrance of the mouth; and these are precisely the shortest
ones. The others stop so as to leave the central part of the
disk naked (fig. 3).

All the rows of which I have just been speaking are formed
of thick, short, slightly recurved cilia, scarcely attenuated at
their free extremity, and only beating for moments. Their
length decreases regularly from the margin of the peristome,
which bears the thickest and longest, to the inner extremity
of the row, which is formed of much shorter and more slender
cilia (see figs. 2 and 3). The shortest rows, which occupy the
buccal margin, are also those the cilia of which are shortest on
the average.

Let us now return to the motor cilia, to ascertain what
relation they may present to the cilia of the disk. And, in
the first place, if we carefully examine the margin of the
peristome from the upper surface, leaving out of consideration
the cilia with which it is furnished, we shall notice that this
margin is not simply rounded, but rather denticulated. The
teeth resemble those of an ordinary saw; that is to say, each
tooth is bounded by two lines, one of which is very long and
nearly a tangent to the circumference, while the other is short
and nearly follows the direction of a radius. It is unnecessary
to say that all the teeth are turned in the same direction.
Now this direction is precisely that towards which the rows
of short thick cilia deviate ; and each of the rows corresponds
to one of the denticulations of the margin, in such a manner
that it terminates at the base of the longer side of the denti-
culation, or that which forms a tangent to the margin of the

disk.

DAG) OR roh EF ollon whe Punky Pintinsotlen!

This arrangement once understood, it is easy to ascertain
that the large motor cilia are implanted upon the longer margin
of each denticulation. Hence they do not form a continuous
circular or spiral line, but a broken line, the segments of
which are only simple continuations of the rows of short cilia.
In other words, all the cilia, whatever they may be, which —
garnish the disk are implanted in accordance with about
twenty parallel spiral lines. Hach row commences tangen-
tially to the margin of the disk by a certain number of motor
cilia, then curves towards the centre, bearing thick short cilia,
gradually diminishing from the periphery towards the centre.

The entrance to the mouth meets the surface of the disk
obliquely, the pharynx being directed towards the left, at the
same time gradually contracting (figs. 2 and 3). By looking
at the animal in profile (fig. 2) it is easy to see that the
pharynx is lodged in a pouch-like lateral projection of the
body of the Infusorian. This projection is more strongly
marked in certain species, and becomes very striking in
meagre individuals when placed exactly in profile (fig. 2).
We then see that a certain number of the rows of cilia of the
disk (those, no doubt, which start from the margin of the
peristome nearest to the mouth) descend into the pharynx, and
there form a series of nearly straight parallel lines composed
of extremely fine cilia.

The actual margin of the mouth is furnished with tolerably
stout and long cilia which beat energetically; but I have
not succeeded in ascertaining precisely what relation may exist
between these cilia and those which I have just described in
detail. All the rest of the surface of the body of the species
that I have observed was smooth; at least it is hardly pro-
bable that cilia, however fine they might be, could have
escaped my observation had they actually existed.

The description that I have just given may seem long.
This is because the difficulty of observation is extreme, be-
cause the eye must be aided by reasoning, in order to succeed
in understanding an arrangement so complex and so novel in
science, and because I determined to follow in my exposition
the same order as in my researches, so as to facilitate the
verification of my results.

Claparéde and Lachmann (VII. p. 192) indicate as the
general character of the Tintinnodea that these animals are
ciliated on their whole periphery, and that the peristome bears
vigorous cirri, forming several concentric rows. We have
just seen that the general ciliary covering is deficient in many
species, and that the cilia of the peristome present an arrange-
ment very different from that indicated by the above authors.

Prof. H. Fol on the Lamily Tintinnodea. 241

Stein (who is above all preoccupied by the relationship which
he supposes to exist between the Zintinni and the Vorticelle)
declares that the peristome bears cilia only at its margin—
namely, a single row, which descends into the mouth, and in
this way represents a dextrogyrous spiral. I am quite ready
to believe that Stein had before him an Infusorian thus organ-
ized, since he tells us so; but this animal certainly was not
a Tintinnus, and probably belonged to some group allied to
the Vorticelle. Another marine form, observed without test,
but which this author rightly or wrongly regards as the legi-
timate proprietor of certain empty tests found in the produce
of the same gathering—another form, I say, is described as
bearing on the margin of the peristome an outer row of long
cilia, and a single inner row of cilia only half the length. It
is difficult to judge whether the author had to do with a Tin-
tennus of which he has given only an imperfect description,
or with some quite different genus of Infusoria. In any case
Stein’s observations were less fortunate than those of Clapa-
réde and Lachmann, to whom the German writer addressed
criticisms as severe as they are undeserved.

If we carefully examine the surface of the disk in the
neighbourhood of the mouth, we observe there a slight cres-
centiform projection, which rises above the side on which the
margin of the orifice forms an acute angle (see fig. 3).
Are we to compare this projection, with its scarcely indicated
outlines, to the part that Stein describes in his so-called
Tintinnt under the name of “ forehead,” and compares to
the disk of the Vorticelle? I cannot tell; but it is certain
that the slight swelling in our Z%ntinni has no relation, near
or distant, with the disk of the Vorticellina.

The nucleus of our Tintinni is very difficult to see. It can
hardly be discerned except in famished individuals. More-
over [have not paid much attention to this organ, since it is
at present demonstrated that the form, the structure, and the
number of the cytoblasts varies infinitely more in the different
periods of the existence of a single individual than it differs
from one species, or even genus, to another. Hence I have
some difficulty in understanding how Stein can so much blame
Claparéde and Lachmann for not having described the nucleus
in the forms observed by them. Whenever I have thought I
could see a nucleus it has appeared to me to be situated near
the peristome, in the upper part of the body, and to present
an oval form (Pl. XVII. fig. 4). Sometimes I have thought
that I could distinguish a contractile vacuole in the inferior
region of the body (fig. 4). But how is one to arrive at cer-
tainty with animals which swim and turn upon themselves

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. vit. 18

242 Prof. H. Fol on the Family Tintinnodea.

with such rapidity, and only stop when they contract into a
shapeless mass ?

The test of our animals is composed of a hard slightly
elastic material, which, however, breaks when the pressure 1s
slightly increased. This substance resists acids even when
tolerably concentrated, and presents no evolution of gas;
therefore it is not an earthy carbonate. It burns away en-
tirely at a dull red heat; hence it is not silica. It resists for
a long time the action even of tolerably concentrated alkalies ;
consequently it is not a horny substance. There remains
only chitine, to which we are led by the method of exclusion.

Leaving the description of the different forms observed
until we come to speak of the genera and species, I shall only
remark that the test generally presents two distinct layers,
which, however, to all appearance, are of the same chemical
composition. All the tests hitherto observed by various
authors and by myself may be referred to three types which
seem at the first glance very distinctly marked—namely,
smooth tests, tests garnished with adherent foreign particles,
and latticed tests. However, there are species which esta-
blish the transition between the smooth tests and the tests
with adherent particles ; and on the other hand, among the
latticed tests, that which I have had the opportunity of ob-
serving was continuous, and only hollowed out by a number
of small cavities on its outer surface. It was not perforated,
which approximates it to certain smooth tests presenting
patterns on their outer surface.

Notwithstanding all my researches, I have not succeeded in
observing the reproduction of these animals. On the other
hand, I have very frequently observed the initial act of the
sexual reproduction of Infusoria, namely conjugation. It is
well known that the Infusoria, after arriving at a certain point
in their cycle of development, unite two and two and become
more or less intimately amalgamated. The nuclei of the two
copulated individuals also become amalgamated, and appear
to exchange a part of their substance. After this act, which
in its essential features corresponds to the fecundation of the
Metazoa, the two individuals separate, and each of them re-
produces by a phenomenon of total or partial scissiparity.

In the Z%nitnn7 the presence of the test is not an obstacle
to conjugation. The individuals do not quit their tests in
order to unite; they amalgamate by the margin of the peri-
stome. ‘The point of union is absolutely constant; it is situ-
ated in the vicinity of the mouth, but a little to the left of the
latter, in such a way that two individuals in conjugation
always form a perfectly symmetrical figure (Pl. XVII. fig. 3).

Prof. H. Fol on the Family Tintinnodea. 243

The union is tolerably extensive and very intimate, and lasts
for several hours. During this time the copulated individuals
cannot withdraw into their tests; they are condemned to re-
main in the state of extension; and although their natation is
almost as rapid as that of the isolated individuals, this circum-
stance is none the less favourable to the study of the arrange-
ment of the vibratile cilia of the disk. I believe that without
these copulated individuals L should never have succeeded
completely in unravelling the question of the mode of implan-
tation of the cilia of the peristome.

Systematic Part.—The genus 7%ntinnus was established, if
I am not mistaken, by Otto Friedrich Miiller (L.). But
under this name that author included a whole miscellaneous
group of diverse forms described in a very unsatisfactory
manner. Schrank (II.) and afterwards Ehrenberg (IIL.)
circumscribed the genus, and took as its type (and this is im-
portant to note) a marine form, T’ntinnus inquilinus, Schrank,
to which Ehrenberg added a second (also marine) species,
Tintinnus subulatus, Khrenb.

Dujardin (IV.), again, confounded the Z%ntinn¢ with ano-
ther and very different genus, namely the Vaginicole, and
grouped together animals some of them free, others sessile,
and which had no real relationship. Neither this author nor
his predecessors give us descriptions which enable us to dis-
tinguish with certainty the animals of which they speak, or
especially to form any idea of their organization. It is only
by means of the figures they give (which, moreover, are very
rough) that we have been able subsequently to ascertain the
species named by them.

laparéde and Lachmann (VII.) are the first authors who
have given us any precise knowledge as to the structure of
these Infusoria. They very justly take as the types the
marine species described by Ehrenberg, and group round
these first species a whole series of allied forms. They very
well describe the form of the body, and the form and structure
of the peduncle ; they point out with perfect justice the impor-
tant fact that the Tintinnodea have nothing comparable to the
disk of the Vortzcelle, and that the vibratile cilia form several
rows round the peristome. Where the disk of the Vorticelle
is situated, there is here only “‘a concave depression, the
bottom of which goes rising towards the peristome, and
becomes confounded with it.” Claparéde and Lachmann
ascribe to all the Tintinnodea a ciliary coat covering the
whole body of the animal. ‘This assertion is too general ; for
there are species, indubitably belonging to this group, of which
the body is absolutely smooth. Our authors describe fifteen

iss

244 Prof. H. Fol on the Family Tintinnodea.

new species, all of which they refer to the genus Tintinnus,
at the same time remarking that the structure of the tests
would allow the establishment of a series of generic divisions.
In fact among the species which they describe there are some
which havea gelatinous test, others an agglutinant test, others
a test with small cavities on the surface, and, lastly, others
with a delicate smooth test.

On the other hand Ehrenberg (VI.) separated from the
Tintinni properly so called another genus, including three
species and characterized by a test perforated like a trellis or
grate. ‘This genus received the name of Dictyocysta, Ehr.

- So far all went well. The structure and history of the
Tintinnodea were imperfectly known, it is true; but at least
there were included under this name only forms the relation-
ship of which was real and the characters of which were
ascertained in their principal features. Then came Stein
(VIII.), who, by an incredible confusion, introduced disorder
into the whole characteristic of the group. In fact this natu-
ralist found in the fresh waters an Infusorian with a very
elongate test, sometimes free, sometimes fixed ; this Infuso-
rian has only a single spiral row of cilia on the peristome, a
row which terminates in the pharynx. The surface sur-
rounded by the peristome is smooth, and can be elevated and
depressed like the piston of a pump. What does our author
conclude from this? That this Infusorian belongs to some
genus allied to the Vorticelle but essentially different from
the Tintinni? By no means! Stein concludes that he has
before him the true type of the genus Tintinnus, the relation-
ship of which he establishes in consequence, throwing doubt
upon at least a part of the results of Claparéde and Lachmann.
Not being acquainted with the Tintinnus fluviatilis, | cannot
pass any judgment upon the accuracy of Stein’s description ;
I must accept it such as it is; and then it is evident to me
that the German author has seen an animal very different
from that which serves as type for the family, an animal
which has no interest for us here, since it lies outside the
scope of the present memoir. ‘The conclusions which Stein
draws from it, as to the characters of the genus Tintinnus, lead
to error.

I specify still further. ‘The authors who preceded Claparéde
and Lachmann made no observations upon the arrangement
of the cilia surrounding the peristome. Claparéde and Lach-
mann recognize that Zintinnus inquilinus, the type of the
genus, bears several rows of cilia around a hollow peristome ;
and they give this character not only to the genus Tintinnus,
but also to the family Tintinnodea. Our genus is and must

Prof. H. Fol on the Family 'Tintinnodea. 245

remain so characterized ; but we cannot place in it, as Stein
has tried to do, forms of which the peristome presents totally
different characters.

It is true that Stein observed a marine form which he refers
to Tintinnus inquilinus, with the body destitute of small
vibratile cilia, and, further, nearly the same organization as
his Tintinnus fluviatilis. As the peristome is not described
in detail, and in the complete absence of figures of any kind,
it is difficult to judge of the real position of this T%ntinnus
inquilinus. Lastly, a third species, of which Stein proposes
to form a genus Tintinnopsis, was ciliated over the whole
surface of the body, and presented at the peristome two rows
of vibratile cilia—an outer row composed of very long cilia,
and an inner row of cilia one half shorter; the test was
garnished with agglutinated grains. However, it is as well
to note that Stein only observed individuals deprived of their
tests ; he refers them, it is true, to some empty tests found in
the produce of the same gathering ; but the reader may enter-
tain some doubt as to the correctness of this collocation.

Lastly, Hiickel ([X.) describes and figures various forms
observed at Lanzarote and Messina. ‘The author declares
that the vivacity of these animals prevented his ascertaining
all the features of their organization, Nevertheless he makes
known a series of very curious and interesting facts. All the
forms observed’ by our author are referred to two genera,
namely the genus Dictyocysta of Ehrenberg, with a perforated
test, and a new genus, Codonella.

The Dictyocyste are represented as having a conical body,
contracting regularly to the point of attachment, which is at
the apex of the test, and with two rows of cilia on the peri-
stome—an outer row of stout and long cilia, and an inner row
of stout short cilia. Fortunately the description and the
figure precisely belong to one of the species (Dictyocysta
cassis) that I have had the opportunity of observing; the
errors and deficiencies of Hiickel’s description cannot there-
fore serve to form a fictitious type, as so often happens. Dic-
tyocysta cassis is not gradually attenuated towards its point of
attachment, but presents a peduncle quite distinct from the
body. The cilia of the peristome are not in two rows, but
form a series of parallel spiroid lines, as I have described
above. The large cilia of the margin of the peristome are
much more numerous and shorter than Hickel figures them;
and, finally, the test is not perforated, but only hollowed out
in pits on its outer surface. It is true that these pits are so
strongly marked and so deep that it seems at first sight like
an open trellis, and very particular attention is necessary to

246 Prof. H. Fol on the Family Tintinnodea.

recognize the continuous inner lamina which closes the aper-
tures of the trellis.

The three other species of Dictyocysta described by Hiickel
have the test pierced with much larger apertures; and it
seems to me difficult to believe that a continuous wall could
have escaped observation had it existed. Provisionally there-
fore we shall consider these species as answering to the
character given by Ehrenberg for the whole genus, whilst
Dictyocysta cassis must be placed elsewhere. On comparing
the figure of Dictyocysta mitra, Hickel, with the drawing
given by J. Miiller of the species named D. elegans by
Ehrenberg, it seems to me that these two tests are identical ;
D, mitra, Hiickel, will therefore be only a synonym.

The other forms observed by Hiickel are referred to a new
genus (Codonella), characterized by the presence on the
peristome of a membrane in the form of a dentate collar,
bearing about twenty appendages like little shreds, each of
which is united to one of the teeth of the collar by a filiform
part. Beyond this membrane there is a circular row of long
motor cilia, twenty in number. ‘Three species were observed,
one of which had the body covered with little cilia, while the
other two species have the body smooth. ‘The test presents
protuberances and regular strie, and is covered in part with
agglutinated siliceous particles. Hiickel supposes that the
_forms described by Claparéde and Lachmann, of which the
tests resemble those of his Codonellw, belong in reality to that
genus. This appears to me very doubtful; for I have myselt
observed a species of 'Tintinnodean (Pl. X VIL. fig. 5) of which
the test much resembles that of Codonella campanella, Hick.,
and which, by the arrangement of the cilia of the peristome,
proves to be a true Tintinnodean, and not a Codonella.

Hiackel at once raises the two genera Dictyocysta and Codo-
nella into two families distinct trom the 'Tintinnodea: this is
a rapid mode of doing business ; and I believe that his family
Dictyocystida in particular has no right to exist. As to that
of the Codonellida, it may subsist, at any rate until the struc-
ture of the Codonelle is better known.

I propose the following classification, which has no preten-
tion to be any thing more than a provisional arrangement.

Family Tintinnodea, Clap. & Lachm.

Test in the form of a little bell, free. Animal conical,
retractile, attached to the test by a retractile peduncle without
strie or distinct layers. Periphery of the body garnished
with very fine vibratile cilia, or completely smooth. Supe-

Prof. H. Fol on the Family Tintinnodea. 247

rior extremity truncate, constituting a discoidal peristome,
hollowed out like a saucer, garnished with motor cilia at the
margin, and with short cilia towards the interior. Cilia of
the peristome all arranged in accordance with about twenty
curved lines, starting from the interior of the disk to become
tangents to the margin of the peristome. Mouth large,
excentrical; pharynx furnished with cilia by the prolongation
of some of the rows of cilia of the disk. Nucleus situated in
the anterior part of the body; contractile vesicle towards the
middle of the body; anus near the point of insertion of the
peduncle. Conjugation and internal formation of embryos
observed in various species.

Genus 1. TrnTINNUS, Schrank.

Test smooth, firm, chitinous, transparent, free from foreign
bodies.

Tintinnus ampulla, sp. n.

(Pl. XVII. figs. 1-3.)

Test ovoid, terminated posteriorly by a slight projection in
the form of a point, widely open above, where a widened,
funnel-like portion is superposed upon the ovoid part. The
widened portion composed of two zones, of which the superior
is more turned out than the inferior one. At the boundary
between the two zones, on the inner surface, there is a slight
circular projection notched into the likeness of an arcade.
Lines of cilia on the peristome to the number of twenty-four.
Body smooth. Length of the test 0°087 millim. ; diameter at
the entrance 0:081 millim.

This species is the commonest of those that I have met with
at Villefranche-sur-Mer. I have seen hundreds of it in the
produce of my fishings.

Tintinnus spiralis, n. sp.

(Pl. XVIL. fig. 4.)

Test greatly elongated, pointed, drawn out; the posterior
third nearly cylindrical over a certain extent, very narrow,
terminated by an acute point; the anterior two thirds in the
form of an elongated cone, slightly inflated ; near the orifice a
thickening in the form of a cushion projecting outwardly.
Test composed of two very distinct layers, presenting at the
surface some faintly-marked and somewhat irregular striae,
generally parallel, oblique to the axis of the test, and describing
very elongated dextrogyrous spirals; small points arranged
in spiral lines parallel to the strie, and alternating with them.

248 Prof. H. Fol on the Family Tintinnodea.

The cushion that surrounds the orifice is formed solely by the
outer layer.

Animal short; peduncle much elongated, attached at a
considerable distance from the apex of the test, or even pre-
senting two points of attachment. Lines of cilia on the peri-
stome to the number of about twenty ; body smooth.

Length of the test 0-4 millim.; diameter of the orifice
0:09 millim.

I have met with only a small number of specimens of this
delicate species at Villefranche.

Our genus, characterized as above, will in all probability
include :— Tintinnus inguilinus, Schrank; T.obliquus, Clap. &
Lachm.; 7. amphora, C. & L.; T. acuminatus, C. & L.; T.
Steenstrupit, C. & L.; T. quadrilineatus, C. &L.; T.subulatus,
Ehr.; 7. cinctus, C. & L.; and 7. urnula, C. & L.

Perhaps it will be necessary to establish a special generic
division for the species with a gelatinous sheath, such as
Tintinnus mucicola, &e.

Genus 2. CoNIOCYLIS, g. n.

Test with more or less marked transverse strie, impreg-
nated, especially in parts, with foreign mineral particles
agelutinated and stuck upon its outer surface; posterior
extremity generally drawn out.

Coniocylis campanula.

Tintinnus campanula (Ehr.), Clap. & Lachm.
(Pl. XVII. fig. 5.)

This species occurred repeatedly at Villefranche, but always
only a very few specimens. The cilia of the peristome
appeared to me to be arranged as in the other Tintinnodea.

Length of the test 0°14 millim.; width at the entrance
0:218 millim.*

It is in this genus that we must place Tintinnus helix,
Clap. & Lachm., T. annulatus, C. & L., T. ventricosus, C. &
L., and probably Stein’s Tintinnopsis.

Genus 3. CYTTAROCYLIS, g. n.

Test continuous, but excavated at its outer surface by a
quantity of deeper or shallower pits, often pretty regular and
capable of giving the test the aspect of a trellis; posterior
extremity generally pointed, frequently more or less turned to
one side.

* [From the figure these measurements appear to have been reyersed.—
Eps. |

Prof. H. Fol on the Family Tintinnodea. 249

Cyttarocylis cassis.

Dictyocysta cassis, Hickel.
(Pl. XVII. fig. 6.)

Test excavated at the surface with deep pits formed only
by a delicate membrane, irregular, at least twice as large in
the neighbourhood of the orifice as in the region of the apex ;
conical, suddenly widened out near the aperture.

Animal conical, attached by a peduncle to the apex of the
test ; peristome bearing twenty rows of cilia. Surtace of the
body smooth.

Length of the test 0°117 millim.; width at the orifice
0°078 millim.

It is in this genus, no doubt, that Tintinnus denticulatus
and 7. Hhrenbergit, C. & L., will have to be placed.

Wereserve the name of Dictyocysta for the species in which
the test is really perforated and reduced to a sort of open cage,
such as Dictyocysta elegans, Khr., D. mitra, Hick., D. lepida,
Khr., D. acuminata, Ehr., D. templum, Hick., and D. tiara,
Hick.

As to Tintinnus fluviatilis, Stein, I have already expressed
the opinion that it is not a Tintinnodean at all. The family
Codonellide is differentiated by the small shreds of the margin
of the peristome, although the tests very closely resemble those
of the genus Coniocylis.

The relationship of our family is sufficiently indicated by
the peculiar structure that I have described. It is clear that
their relationship to the Vorticellina of which Stein speaks
has no existence, and that our Infusoria differ still more from
the Vorticelle and Stentors than these do from each other. I
shall not discuss the question whether the Tintinnodea should
enter into the order Peritricha; for that order seems so little
in accordance with nature that it can hardly be maintained.
Stein himself seeks in vain to find a character common to all the
families of which he composes this heterogeneous order. The
definition that he endeavours to give of it degenerates into a
casuistical statement in which the characters of all the families
are enumerated, making the profound differences which separate
them still more striking. If, notwithstanding, our author
finds “an incontestable air of relationship”? in all these
creatures, this is an affair of sentiment; and this sentiment we
are perfectly free not to share in.

250 M. F. @’A. Furtado on Viquesnelia atlantica.

BIBLIOGRAPHIC INDEX.

I. O. F. Miller, Prodromus Zool. Dan. 1776.
II. Schrank, Fauna Boica, 1803.
III. Ehrenberg, Die Infusionsthierchen, 1838.
IV. Ehrenberg, Monatsb. Berl. Akad. 1840.
V. Dujardin, Infusoires, 1841.
VI. Ehrenberg, Monatsb. Berl. Akad. 1844.
VII. Claparéde et Lachmann, Etudes sur les Infusoires et les Rhizopodes,
1858.
VIII. Stein, Der Organismus der Infusorien, 1859-67.
IX. Hackel, “‘ Ueber einige pelagische Infusorien,” Jenaische Zeitschrift,
1873.

XXII.— On Viquesnelia atlantica, Morelet d&: Drouet.
By Francisco D’ARRUDA FurRTADO *.

[Plate XIII. ]

TuE history of the genus Viyuesnelva is sufficiently well known,
but may usefully be repeated here. It was founded by
Deshayes, upon some fragmentary Roumelian fossilst. D’Ar-
chiac discovered another fossil representative of the genus in
the Pyreneesf. The only surviving species known are one
native to India (V. Dussumier7, Fischer $) and a second found
in the Azores; the latter is the subject of the present paper.
I have not been able to obtain Fischer’s memoir on the
Indian species; but the absence of any description of the
animal in various conchological manuals, which at the same
time make mention of the species, leads me to suppose that
the detailed structure of Viquesnelia has not hitherto been

* Translated, with notes, by Prof. L. C. Miall.

+ [Note sur un nouveau genre de Limacien fossile,” par M. Deshayes,
Journal de Conchyliologie, 2° sér. tom. i. p. 283, pl. vii. figs. 14-17
(1856). The fossils in question (V. lenticularis, Desh.) were obtained by
M. Viquesnel from rocks believed to be of the age of the Nummulitic
Limestone, at Balouk-Keni, near Feredjik, Roumelia.—M. ]

¢ [Im a footnote to the paper cited above, Deshayes remarks that
D’Archiac had found a Viquesnelia-stratum in the lower part of the
Nummulitic deposit of the Pyrenees. This is apparently the authority
for the statement in the text.—M. |

§ [“ Addition a la Note sur le Genre Viquesnelia,” Journ. de Conchy-
liologie, 2° sér. tom. i. p. 290. In this short memorandum Fischer ex-
plains that some shells of Limacide obtained at Mahé by Dussumier are
preserved in the Museum at Paris, and. that Valenciennes had attached
to them a label bearing the name Clypeicella Dussumiert. The species is
now included in Viguesnelia.—M. }

M. F. dA. Furtado on Viquesnelia atlantica. 251

made known*. ‘The satisfaction with which I announce new
results is qualified by the unpleasant necessity of criticising
somewhat harshly the previous researches of Morelet and
Drouet on the same subject. It is much to be regretted that
these two naturalists, skilled observers and careful writers on
other subjects, should have passed by the internal structure of
an animal which is, to use their own language, ‘‘ sans contre-
dit le plus curieux de tous les mollusques Acoréens”’f.

MM. Morelet and Drouet examined the animal of V. atlan-
tica without dissection. M. Morelet says :—‘‘ Malheureuse-
ment, dans le cours du voyage, le petit nombre de spécimens
que nous avions recueillis s’est égaré, en sorte que je ne puis
rien ajouter & la description des formes extérieures que j’al
donnée plus haut.” Only the shell M. Morelet, like a true
conchologist, took care not to lose; and this he describes
minutely ; the animal itself, though we are told that the speci-
mens were lost on the voyage, is drawn by Lackerbauer as
if from nature (‘ad nat.’’)!

The descriptions of MM. Morelet{ and Drouet§ differ nota-
bly, which is the more to be wondered at, as these authors
conjointly founded the species, and as the memoir of M.
Drouet, though later in the date of its publication, was based
upon no additional materials: no second visit to the islands had
been made; and the specimens collected during the first visit
had, as we are told, been lost. M. Drouet’s description comes
nearest to nature; the figure is inaccurate and sketchy.
Generic and specific <iescriptions based upon dissections are
now offered to zoologists.

Fam. Limacide, Gray.

Gen. VIQUESNELIA, Desh.

Mantle large, submedian. Tac! much compressed. Lespi-
ratory ortfice on the right side, towards the hinder end of the
mantle. Caudal mucus-gland absent. Mandible without
ridges or teeth, its free edge forming a reentrant right angle.
Radula very complicated. Reproductive orifice below and a

* (Stabile (Moll. terr. du Piémont, p. 121) has proposed to remove
V. atlantica to a new genus Plutonia, and this without any knowledge of
the anatomy of the animal.—M. |

+ | V. atlantica is noticed as the most remarkable Gasteropod of the
Azores in Dr. H. B. Tristram’s observations on the Terrestrial Mollusks
of the Azores, contributed to F, D. ©. Godman’s ‘ Natural History of the
Azores,’ p. 107, London, 1870.—M. |

{ [L’Histoire naturelle des Acores, suivie d’une description des Mol-
lusques terrestres de cet Archipel: Paris, 1860.—M. }

§ [Elémens de la Faune Agoréenne: 1861.—M.]

252 M. F. d@’A. Furtado on Viquesnelia atlantica.

little behind the right upper tentacle. Capreolus? Flagel-
lum absent. Dart-sac absent. Accessory glands represented
by a glandular layer surrounding the vagina. Spermatheca
present. Shed? rudimentary, concealed within the mantle,
oval, depressed, with a rudimentary spire.

Viquesnelia atlantica, Mor. & Dr.

Viquesnelia atlantica, Mor. & Dr., Hist. Nat. des Acores, 1860, p. 189,
pl. i. fig. 1.

ANIMAL 25 millims. (1 inch) long, 3 millims. (4 inch)
wide, elongate, compressed behind, narrowed towards the
middle behind the mantle, tuberculo-rugose, chocolate-
coloured to a greater or less degree in different individuals.
Manile entire, defining by its posterior border the posterior
two fifths of the body, and almost as long as the tail when
the animal is fully extended, rounded in front, gibbous over
the shell (the place of which is indicated by a reddish patch),
finely shagreened, in some individuals with large blotches of
bluish colour. Neck about one fifth of the total length, thick,
rounded, slightly curved longitudinally, narrowed in front,
not exceeded by the foot, with large tubercles and two longi-
tudinal furrows which extend to the bases of the tentacles ;
external to these grooves are two rows of large quadrilateral
oblong tubercles; colour dull reddish, deeper on the sides, where
it agrees with the ground-colour of the animal, brighter and
pinkish above, with large yellow blotches along the upper
part of each side. Locomotor surface narrow, parallel-sided,
with two grooves, of a general bistre or sepia-colour, with
minute dark spots, glistening. Jacl much compressed, tole-
rably elevated, with oblique grooves intersecting so as to
form polygonal lozenge-shaped or hexagonal areas which are
raised and resemble plates; each plate has very many black
shining elevations, which, when examined by a powerful lens,
are seen to be small hemispheres sharply defined and
resembling the eyes of a spider. At times the animal, when
beginning to creep, raises the tail considerably in a peculiar
way. Zentacles—the upper ones wide apart at the base,
strongly divergent, two thirds the length of the neck, cylin-
drical but insensibly tapering, with a shagreen-like surface,
deeply coloured, nearly opaque; terminal tubercles incon-
spicuous, obliquely truncate above; eyes very inconspicuous,
black ; the lower tentacles one quarter the length of the supe-
rior, brighter-coloured, much less divergent. Head with
anterior surface subvertical, rounded, furnished with large
tubercles.

M. F. d’A. Furtado on Viquesnelia atlantica. 253

DIGESTIVE SysTEM.—Buccal pouch very long (as long as
the stomach), pyriform-elongate, muscular layer well defined.
Mouth hardly conspicuous, resembling when closed the letter
T rather than the letter ¥Y. Mandible with a cutting-edge
forming a (reentrant) right angle, the attached border uni-
formly convex, translucent, yellowish, lateral tips sharp, with
no ridges or teeth, but with visible lines of growth. Tongue
strong, pointed, deeply concave, its sheath very prominent,
straight, club-like, inclined downwards. Fadula of strong
conical or slightly depressed teeth in fifty transverse rows,
each with about thirty teeth, forming chevrons which point
backwards. Csophagus about one third of the length of
the stomach, gradually increasing in diameter backwards.
Stomach curved, fusiform, twice as wide as the cesophagus,
yellow, very pale in some individuals, with whitish longitu-
dinal lines, which indicate internal rugosities. Intestine form-
ing about half the length of the alimentary canal, equal in
diameter to the cesophagus, whitish and partly transparent ;
its course simple, describing a letter N, nearly all of which
lies in one transverse plane. Salivary glands largely deve-
loped, lying upon the anterior fourth of the stomach, quite
separate from each other, white, lobed. LZdver very large,
bilobed, the larger lobe to the left, the anterior end curved
round the central part of the stomach, the posterior end curved
round the hermaphrodite gland; the smaller lobe applied to
the hinder part of the intestine, sending a process into each
bend, the posterior extremity lying along the rectum. The
lobulation of the liver is conspicuous upon its lower surface ;
the colour uniform, bright and essentially composed of
yellow and pink. ‘The liver adheres strongly to the base of
the stomach, and to the first part of the intestine.

REPRODUCTIVE System.— Hermaphrodite gland very large,
pyriform, of from five to six lobes, each of which consists of
from ten to fifteen lobules ; colour milky. The gland lies in
the concavity formed by the curved posterior extremity of the
larger lobe of the liver, and is partly enclosed by the small lobe.
It adheres slightly to the liver, but is entirely free in some
individuals. Duct of hermaphrodite gland large, twice as long
as the gland, more or less sinuous, of uniform diameter.
Albuminiparous gland unequally bilobed, convex posteriorly,
excavated in front and receiving the duct of the hermaphrodite
gland, subdivided into irregular lobules, position transverse.
Oviduct—prostatic portion wide, sinuous, white, translucent,
the dilated part remote from the albuminiparous gland, origin
from gland not términal ; infraprostatic portion much curved,
constituting nearly half the oviduct. Spermatheca spherical,

254 M. F. @’A. Furtado on Viquesnelia atlantica.

attached to the anterior end of the uterus, its canal attached
(externally) to the oviduct. Vestibule as long as the oviduct
(neglecting the convolutions of the latter), variously curved
or reduplicate. Penis short, depressed, situate in the middle
of the vestibule, bifid, of a delicate yellow-pink colour; vas
deferens entering the anterior lobe*.

SHELL.—I have nothing to add to M. Morelet’s description,
which is as follows :—“'T. ancyliformis, oblonga, planata,
rugosiuscula, longitudinaliter costulata, fulvescens; spira
brevis, lateralis, postica, apice albido.”’

Note—I have not found Viquesnelia atlantica in the
gardens of Ponta Delgarda, where it was discovered by MM.
Morelet and Drouet. The specimens upon which this memoir
is founded were caught on Oct. 81, 1880, on the mountains
near 7 Cidades, near the aqueducts of Muro do Carvaéo and
Muro das 9 Janellas, on stones and overturned masses of
Sphagnum. Specimens collected in the same neighbourhood
in the month of May had the albuminiparous gland so slightly
developed that it was necessary, in order to complete the
study of the reproductive organs, to wait for the breeding-
season; in May the spermatheca was so small as to escape
observation.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XIII.
Viquesnelia atlantica,

Figs. 1, 2. Animal (nat. size).
Fig. 3. Occasional attitude when beginning to creep.
Fig. 4, Tail-end (magnified).

* (It will be seen from M. Furtado’s description that Viguesneha is
similar in anatomical structure to Zimax and the allied genera. The
mandible connects it with Vitrina, Hyalina, and Limax; and it would go
with those genera into Mérch’s “ Oxygnatha” (‘maxilla levis, acie
simplici”). It can hardly be doubted, however, that too much stress
has been laid upon characters taken from the mandible. This is inci-
dentally shown by M. Furtado in a paper entitled “ Indagagées sobre
a complicacio das Maxillas da alguns Helices naturalisados nos Acores”
(Lisbon, 1880), in which he shows that in Azorean examples of Helix
pisana, lactea, and aspersa the mandible is singularly variable and often
differs conspicuously from Moquin-Tandon’s description of the same organ
in European specimens of what are believed to be the same species. ‘The
lingual ribbon seems to connect Viguesnelia with Testacella, to which it is
otherwise only remotely allied. It is hardly possible at present to discuss
the exact place of Vitrina and Viquesnelia in the long chain of genera and
subgenera which intervenes between Limax and Hehx, though they seem
to approach the first genus rather than the second. Much anatomical
research is required to define these forms and discover their mutual rela-
tions; and M. Furtado’s paper is a welcome addition to the materials
already collected.—M. ]

Mr. S. H. Scudder on Devonian Insects. 255

Fig. 5. Median part of radula (magnified).

Fig. 6. Lateral part of radula.

Fig. 7. Marginal part of radula.

Fig. 8. Mandible (magnified). :

Fig. 9. Reproductive organs. hg, hermaphrodite gland; e, its efferent
duct; alb, albuminiferous gland; od, oviduct (prostatic por-
tion); od', oviduct (infraprostatic portion) ; sp, spermatheca;
vd, vas deferens ; pe, penis; v, vestibule.

Figs. 10, 11. Shell (magnified).

XXUI.— Relation of Devonian Insects to Later and Existing
Types. By SAMuEL H. ScuppER*.

Ir only remains to sum up the results of this reexamination
of the Devonian insects, and especially to discuss their rela-
tion to later or now existing types. This may best be done
by a separate consideration of the following points :—

1. There is nothing in the structure of these earliest-known
insects to interfere with a former conclusion + that the general
type of wing-structure has remained unaltered from the earliest
times. 'Lhree of these six insects (Gerephemera, Homothetus,
and Yenoneura) have been shown to possess a very peculiar
neuration, dissimilar to both Carboniferous and modern
types. As will also be shown under the tenth head, the dis-
similarity of structure of all the Devonian insects is much
greater than would be anticipated; yet all the features of
neuration can be brought into perfect harmony with the
system laid down by Heer.

2. These earliest insects were Hexapods, and, as far as the
record goes, preceded in time both Arachnids and Myriopods.
This is shown only by the wings, which in all known insects
belong only to Hexapods, and in the nature of things prove
the earlier apparition of that group. This, however, is so
improbable on any hypothesis, that we must conclude the
record to be defective.

3. They were all lower Heterometabola. As wings are the
only parts preserved, we cannot tell from the remains them-
selves whether they belong to sucking or to biting insects ;
for, as was shown in the essay already referred to, this point
must be considered undetermined concerning many of the
older insects until more complete remains are discovered.

* From the ‘ American Journal of Science,’ Feb. 1881.

This summary of results is the conclusion of a memoir by Mr. Scud-
der “On the Devonian Insects of New Brunswick,” published in the
‘ Anniversary Memoirs of the Boston Society of Natural History,’ 1880.

+ “The Early Types of Insects,” Mem. Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist. iii. p. 21.

256 Mr. S. H. Scudder on the Relation of

They are all allied or belong to the Neuroptera, using the
word in its widest sense. At least two of the genera (Plate-
phemera and Gerephemera) must be considered as having a
closer relationship to Pseudoneuroptera than to Neuroptera
ae and as having indeed no special affinity to the true

europtera other than is found in Paleodictyoptera. Two
others (Lithentomum and Xenoneura), on the contrary, are
plainly more nearly related to the true Neuroptera than to the
Pseudoneuroptera, and also show no special affinity to true
Neuroptera other than is found in Palxodictyoptera. <A fifth
(Homothetus), which has comparatively little in common with
the Paleodictyoptera, is perhaps more nearly related to the
true Neuroptera than to the Pseudoneuroptera, although its
pseudoneuropterous characters are of a striking nature. Of
the sixth (Dyscritus) the remains are far too imperfect to judge
clearly ; but the choice lies rather with the Pseudoneuroptera
or with Homothetus. 'The Devonian insects are then about
equally divided in structural features between Neuroptera
proper and Pseudoneuroptera; and none exhibit any special
orthopterous, hemipterous, or coleopterous characteristics.

4, Nearly all are synthetic types of a comparatively narrow
range. ‘This has been stated in substance in the preceding
paragraph, but may receive additional illustration here. Thus
Platephemera may be looked upon as an Ephemerid with an
odonate reticulation ; LHomothetus might be designated as a
Sialid with an odonate structure of the main branch of the
scapular vein; and under each of the species will be found
detailed accounts of any combination of the characters which
it possesses.

5. Nearly all bear marks of affinity to the Carboniferous
Paleodictyoptera, either in the reticulated surface of the wing,
its longitudinal neuration, or both. But besides this there are
some, such as Gerephemera and Xenoneura, in which the
resemblance is marked. Most of the species, however, even
including the two mentioned, show palzodictyopterous charac-
ters only on what might be called the neurupterous side; and
their divergence from the Carboniferous Paleodictyoptera is
so great that they can scarcely be placed directly with the mass
of Paleozoic insects, where we find a very common type of
wing-structure, into which the neuration of Devonian insects
only partially fits. For

6. On the other hand, they are often of more and not less
complicated structure than most Paleodictyoptera. This is
true of the three genera mentioned above with peculiar neu-
ration, but not necessarily of the others; and it is especially
true when they are compared with the genus Dictyonewra and

Devonian Insects to Later and Existing Types. 257

its immediate allies. There are other Paleodictyoptera in the
Carboniferous period with more complicated neuration than
Dictyoneura; but these three Devonian insects apparently
surpass them, as well as very nearly all other Carboniferous
insects. Furthermore,

7. With the exception of the general statement under the
fifth head, they bear little special relation to Carboniferous
forms, having a distinct facies of their own. This is very
striking ; it would certainly not be possible to collect six wings
in one locality in the Carboniferous rocks which would not
prove, by their affinity with those already known, the Carbo-
niferous age of the deposit. Yet we find in this Devonian
locality not a single one of Paleoblattarie, or any thing
resembling them; and more than half the known insects of
the Carboniferous period belong to that type. The next most
prevailing Carboniferous type is Dictyoneura and its near
allies, with their reticulated wings. Gerephemera only of all
the Devonian insects shows any real and close affinity with
them; and even here the details of the wing-structure, as
shown above, are very different. The apical half of the wing
of Xenoneura (as I have supposed it to be formed) also bears
a striking resemblance to the Dictyoneuran wing; but the
base (which is preserved, and where the more important
features lie) is totally different. ‘The only other wing which
shows particular resemblance to any Carboniferous form (we
must omit Dyscritus from this consideration, as being too im-
perfect to be of any value) is Platephemera, where we find a
certain general resemblance to Hphemerites Riickerti, Gein.,
and Acridites priscus, Andr.; but this is simply in the form of
the wing and the general course of the nervules; when we
examine the details of the neuration more closely, we find it
altogether different, and the reticulation of the wing polygo-
nal, and not quadrate asin the Carboniferous types*. In
this respect, indeed, Platephemera differs not only from all
modern Ephemeridx, but also from those of other geological
periods +. Another prevailing Carboniferous type, the ‘Ter-
mitina, is altogether absent from the Devonian. Half a dozen
wings, therefore, from rocks known to be either Devonian or
Carboniferous would probably establish their age.

* Dr. H. B. Geinitz has kindly reexamined Ephemerites Riickerti at
my request, and states that the reticulation is in general tetragonal, but
that at the extreme outer margin the cells appear in a few places to be
elliptical five- or six-sided.

+ The Dictyoneure and their allies, as may be inferred, are considered
as belonging to the Paleeodictyoptera, although their ephemeridan affini-
ties are not disregarded.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. vii. 19

’

258 Mr. S. H. Scudder on the Relation of

8. The Devonian insects were of great size, had membranous
wings, and were probably aquatic in early life. ‘The last state-
ment is simply inferred from the fact that all the modern types
most nearly allied to them are now aquatic. As to the first,
some statements have already been made; their expanse of
wing probably varied from 40 to 175 millims., and averaged
107 millims. Xenonewra was much smaller than any of the
others, its expanse not exceeding 4 centims., while the pro-
bable expanse of all the rest was generally more than a deci-
metre, only Homothetus falling below this figure. Indeed, if
Xenoneura be omitted, the average expanse of wing was
121 millims., an expanse which might well be compared to
that of the Auschnide, the largest, as a group, of living
Odonata. There is no trace of coriaceous structure in any of
the wings; nor in any are there thickened and approximate
nervules—one stage of the approach to a coriaceous texture.

9. Some of the Devonian insects are plainly precursors of
existing forms, while others seem to have left no trace. The
best examples of the former are Platephemera, an aberrant
form of an existing family, and Homothetus, which, while
totally different in the combination of its characters from any
thing known among living or fossil insects, is the only Palao-
zoic insect possessing that peculiar arrangement of veins found
at the base of the wings of the Odonata, typified by the arcu-
lus, a structure previously known only as early as the Jurassic.
Examples of the latter are Gerephemera, which has a multi-
plicity of simple parallel veins next the costal margin of the
wing, such as no other insect, ancient or modern, is known to
possess, and Xenonewra, where the relationship of the interno-
median branches to each other and to the rest of the wing is
altogether abnormal. If, too, the concentric ridges, formerly
interpreted by me as possibly representing a stridulating organ,
should eventually be proved an actual part of the wing, we
should have here a structure which has never since been
repeated even in any modified form.

10. They show a remarkable variety of structure, indicating
an abundance of insect life at that epoch. This is the more
noticeable from their belonging to a single type of forms, as
stated under the seventh head, where we have seen that their
neuration does not accord with the commoner type of wing-
structure found in Paleozoic insects*. These six wings
exhibit a diversity of neuration quite as great as is found
among the ‘hundred or more species of the Carboniferous
epoch: in some, such as Platephemera, the structure is very
simple ; in others, like Homothetus and Xenoneura, it is some-

* Cf. Mem. Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist. iii. 19, note 1.

Devonian Insects to Later and Existing Types. 259

what complicated: some of the wings, as Platephemera and
Gerephemera, are reticulated; the others possess only trans-
verse cross veins, more or less distinct and direct. No two
wings can be referred to the same family, unless Dyscritus
belongs with Homothetus—a point which cannot be determined,
from the great imperfection of the former. This compels us
to admit the strong probability of an abundant insect-fauna
at that epoch. Although many Paleozoic localities can boast
a greater diversity of insect types if we look upon their general
structure as developed in after ages, not one in the world has
produced wings exhibiting in themselves a wider diversity of
neuration; for the neuration of the Paleodictyoptera is not
more essentially distinct from that of the Patzoblattariz or of
the ancient Termitina than that of Platephemera or Gerephe-
mera on the one hand is from that of Homothetus or Xenoneura
on the other. Unconsciously, perhaps, we allow our knowledge
of existing types and their past history to modify our appre-
ciation of distinctions between ancient forms. For while we
can plainly see in the Paleoblattariz the progenitors of living
insects of one order, and in other ancient types the ancestors
of living representatives of another order, were we unfamiliar
with the divergence of these orders in modern times, we
should not think of separating ordinarily their ancestors of
the Carboniferous epoch. It may easily be seen, then, how
it is possible to find in these Devonian insects (all Neuroptera
or neuropterous Palzodictyoptera) a diversity of wing-struc-
ture greater than is found in the Carboniferous representatives
of the modern Neuroptera, Orthoptera, and Hemiptera.

11. The Devonian insects also differ remarkably from all
other known types, ancient or modern; and some of them
appear to be even more complicated than their nearest living
allies. With the exception of Platephemera, not one of them
can be referred to any family of insects previously known,
living or fossil; and even Platephemera, as shown above,
differs strikingly from all other members of the family in
which it is placed, both in general neuration and in reticula-
tion, to a greater degree even than the most aberrant genera
of that family do from the normal type. This same genus is
also more complicated in wing-structure than its modern
allies; the reticulation of the wing in certain structurally-
defined areas is polygonal and tolerably regular, instead of
being simply quadrate, while the intercalated veins are all
connected at their base, instead of being free. Xenoneura
also, as compared with modern Sialina, shows what should
perhaps be deemed a higher (or at least a later) type of struc-
ture, in the amalgamation of the externo-median and scapular

19s

260 Mr. S. H. Scudder on Devonian Insects.

veins for a long distance from the base, and in the peculiar
structure and lateral attachments of the interno-median veins ;
in the minuter and feebler cross venation, however, it has an
opposite character.

12. We appear, therefore, to be no nearer the beginning of
things in the Devonian epoch than in the Carboniferous, so far
as either greater unity or simplicity of structure is concerned ;
and these earlier forms cannot be used to any better advan-
tage than the Carboniferous types in support of any special
theory of the origin of insects. All such theories have re-
quired some Zoéa, Leptus, Campodea, or other simple wing-
less form as the foundation-point ; and this ancestral form,
according to Hiickel at least, must be looked for above the
Silurian rocks. Yet we have in the Devonian no traces
whatever of such forms, but, on the contrary, as far down as
the middle of this period, winged insects with rather highly
differentiated structure, which, taken together, can be consi-
dered lower than the mass of the Upper Carboniferous insects
only by the absence of the very few Hemiptera and Coleo-
ptera which the latter can boast. Remove those few insects
from consideration (or simply leave out of mind their future
development to very distinct types), and the Middle Devonian
insects would not suffer in the comparison with those of the
Upper Carboniferous, either in complication or in diversity of
_ structure. Furthermore, they show no sort of approach
toward either of the lower wingless forms hypothetically
looked upon as the ancestors of tracheate Articulata.

13. Finally, while there are some forms which to some degree
bear out expectations based on the general derivative hypothesis
of structural development, there are quite as many which are
altogether unexpected, and cannot be explained by that theory
without involving suppositions for which no facts can at present
be adduced. Palephemera and G'erephemera are unquestionably
insects of a very low organization related to the existing may-
flies, which are well known to be of inferior structure as com-
pared with other living insects; these may-flies are indeed
among the most degraded of the suborder to which they
belong, itself one of the very lowest suborders. Dyscritus too
may be of similar degradation, although its resemblance to
Homothetus leaves it altogether uncertain, But no one of
these exhibits any inferiority of structure when compared
with its nearest allies in the later Carboniferous rocks; and
they are all higher than some which might be named; while
of the remaining species it can be confidently asserted that
they are higher in structure than most of the Carboniferous
types, and exhibit syntheses of character differing from theirs.

Dr. Wallich on Siliceous Sponge-growth. 261

It is quite as if we were on two distinct lines of descent when
we study the Devonian and the Carboniferous insects: they
have little in common; and each its peculiar comprehensive
types. Judging from this point of view, it would be impos-
sible to say that the Devonian insects showed either a broader
synthesis or a ruder type than the Carboniferous. This, of
course, may be, and in all probability is, because our know-
ledge of the Carboniferous insects is in comparison so much
more extensive; but, judging simply by the facts at hand,
it appears that the Carboniferous insects carry us back both
to the more simple and to the more generalized forms. We
have nothing in the Devonian so simple as Huephemerites,
nothing so comprehensive as Hugereon, nothing at once so
simple and comprehensive as Dictyoneura. On the derivative
hypothesis we must presume, from our present knowledge of
Devonian insects :—that the Paleodictyoptera of the Carboni-
ferous are already, in that epoch, an old and persistent em-
bryonic type (as the living Ephemeride may be considered
today, on a narrower but more lengthened scale); that some
other insects of Carboniferous times, together with most of
those of the Devonian, descended from a common stock in the
Lower Devonian or Silurian period; and that the union of
these with the Palewodictyoptera was even further removed
from us in time, carrying back the origin of winged insects
to a far remoter antiquity than has ever been ascribed to them,
and necessitating a faith in the derivative hypothesis which
a study of the records preserved in the rocks could never alone
afford ; for no evidence can be adduced in its favour based
only on such investigations. The profound voids in our
knowledge of the earliest history of insects, to which allusion
was made at the close of my paper “On the Karly Types of
Insects,” are thus shown to be even greater and more obscure
than had been presumed. But I should hesitate to close this
summary without expressing the conviction that some such
earlier unknown comprehensive types as are indicated above
did exist and should be sought.

XXIV.—On Siliceous Sponge-growth in the Cretaceous Ocean,
By Surgeon-Major Watticu, M.D.

A Few days after the publication of the ‘Annals’ for
February, | obtained a sight of Mr. G. J. Hinde’s very in-
teresting little work on Fossil Sponge-spicules found in the

262 Dr. Wallich on Siliceous Sponge-growth.

Interior of a single Flintstone from Horstead in Norfolk,
which had just previously been published at Munich.

In his concluding remarks the author, while referring to
my paper on the chalk flints (Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc., Feb.
1880), expresses the opinion that “the contents of the flint
from Horstead, and of those from the North of Ireland, prove ”
what I only “ assumed, namely that in its original condition
the cretaceous ooze was, like that of the Atlantic deep-sea
mud, filled with the spicular skeletons of sponges . . . . the
contents of both the Irish and Horstead flints showing that
the sponge-spicules are as much intermingled with Foramini-
fera and other calcareous organisms as in the Atlantic ooze,
and that therefore both these animal types flourished con-
temporaneously ” (op. cit. pp. 80, 81).

Without in any wise detracting from the value of the con-
current testimony thus furnished as to the great exuberance
and variety of the sponge-life which existed at the bottom of
the ancient cretaceous sea-bed, the Horstead nodule, per se,
would increase rather than diminish the force of the objec-
tions that have been raised by some writers to any analogy
between the mineral composition of the ancient and the recent
calcareous deposits. From a cursory remark made at the
close of Mr. Hinde’s observation, he appears ready to admit
that the mass of the material in the flint-cavity under notice
could not have presented its unconsolidated character had it,
at the time of its inclusion, formed part of the deposit at any
depth below the immediate surface-layer of the sea-bed. This
is precisely what I have maintained and explained, in the
only way it seems possible to explain it, by showing how the
whole of the siliceous matter was continuously eliminated as
the deposit was being formed, and was retained in a compa-
ratively thin colloidal stratum that constituted, as it were, a
floating layer overlying and resting upon large areas of the
calcareous sea-bed.

It is obvious, therefore, that without probing the deposits to
a much greater depth below their surface than we are likely
ever to succeed in doing, the analogy that exists between the
constituents of the ancient and recent calcareous deposits must
continue to be based on assumption. Mr. Hinde’s observa-
tions tend only to enhance the necessity of this assumption.
They do not in the least degree assist us in “ proving,” as
claimed, that “in its original condition the cretaceous ooze
was, like that of the Atlantic deep-sea mud, filled with the
spicular skeletons of sponges.” Indeed, it would be well to
bear constantly in mind that, so far as all the evidence goes
that has heretofore been obtained, there is no warrant for

Mr. H. J. Carter on Spongilla cinerea. 263

Mr. Hinde’s conclusion that the Atlantic deep-sea mud ¢s
filled (as he seems to think) with these spicular skeletons
except at its immediate surface. Hence the evidence furnished
by the Horstead flint proves rather that, were it not for the
special agency of the colloidal protoplasm and the conditions I
have elsewhere fully described, the Horstead Chalk, in common
with the rest of the Upper Chalk strata, must still have re-
tained within its substance the silica which, under the pre-
vailing conditions, entered into the formation of the stratified
flints.

Mr. Hinde seems to have imagined that I disputed the con-
temporaneous existence of Sponges and Foraminifera. A
reperusal of my first paper on the subject, and a glance at
pp. 200-202 of my paper in the ‘ Annals’ for Feb. 1881,
will, I think, satisfy him that, so far from this being the case,
the contemporaneous development of both these animal types
constitutes an essential element in my hypothesis of the flint
formation.

XXV.—On Spongilla cinerea.
By H. J. Carter, F.R.S. &e.

HAVING omitted to insert a description of Spongilla cinerea in
my compilation of the “ History and Classification of the
known Species of Spongilla,” in the last number of the
‘Annals,’ p. 88, after S. cerebellata, Bk., it is herewith
supplied.
Spongilla cinerea, Carter.
Spongilla cinerea, Carter, No. 12, p. 82, pl. iii. fig. 5; No. 20, p. 30,
pl. xxxviii. fig. 19.

Flat, spreading ; surface slightly convex, presenting gentle
eminences and depressions. Colour cinereous ; texture com-
pact, fine, friable. Skeleton-spicule curved, fusiform, gra-
dually sharp-pointed, minutely spined. Statoblast globular ;
aperture infundibular ; crust thick, white, composed of micro-
cell substance charged with minute acerate spicules, which
are curved, cylindrical, abruptly sharp-pointed, and coarsely
spined throughout, arranged more or less tangentially, inter-
crossing.

Loc. Bombay.

Obs. The chief characters of this species are its cinereous
colour and fine texture; its elementary parts are the
smallest of any species that I have yet examined.

264 Mr. KE. J. Miers on Anomorhynchus

XXVI.—Further Note on Anomorhynchts (or Colossendeis)
Smithii. By Epwarp J. Mrsrs, F.L.S., F.Z.8.

I Am indebted to the Rev. A. M. Norman for reference to a
Pycnogonid described by Prof. G. O. Sars under the name of
Colossendets augusta in ‘ Archiv f. Mathematik og Natur-
videnskab,’ andet Bd., tredie Hefte p. 368 (1877), which I
unfortunately overlooked, as no reference is made to the species,
either in the ‘ Zoological Record’ or the German “ Bericht”
in the ‘ Archiv f. Naturgeschichte’ for 1877-78, but whose
close affinity to Anomorhynchus Smithii was evident on a
comparison of Prof. Sars’s description with the types of the
species from Franz-Josef Land. A second species, Colossen-
deis proboscidea (Sabine) = Colossendeis borealis, Jarzynsky,
is referred to; but neither the page of Jarzynsky’s descrip-
tions nor any diagnosis of the genus is added.

In reply to an inquiry addressed to Prof. Sars on this sub-
ject, I learn that the genus Colossendets was described by
Jarzynsky in a memoir entitled “ Preemissus catalogus Pyc-
nogonidarum inventarum in mari glaciali ad oras Lapponiz
rossices et in Mari Albo anno 1869 et 1870.” This memoir
forms part of a preliminary list of the Echinodermata, De-
capoda, Amphipoda, and Pycnogonida of the White Sea and
Russian Lapland, of which a “ separate copy’? was commu-
nicated to Prof. Sars by its author. It bears date 1870, but
has never been mentioned by the English or German recorders
of carcinological literature, although its existence is adverted
to by Dr. Liitken in his record of the literature of Echino-
dermata in 1872, by whom the title is not cited. No copy of
it is in the British Museum; nor is it to be found in the
library of either the Royal, Linnean, or Zoological Society.

Prof. Sars further informs me that his copy of this paper is
without any indication of its place of publication. He believes
this to have been in some one of the Russian periodicals ; but I
have been unable to find it in any towhich I haveaccess. He
has, however, obligingly appended to his letter a copy of Jar-
zynsky’s original descriptions, which leave no doubt that our
species 18 congeneric with the types of the Russian naturalist.
It, therefore, evidence be forthcoming of the regular publi-
cation of the memoir of Jarzynsky, the name Anomorhynchus
will yield, on account of its later publication, to Colossendeis*.

Prof. Sars, in his “ Prodromus” in the Norwegian perio-
dical above referred to, regards Jarzynsky’s type (Colossendeis
borealis) as identical with Phoxichilus proboscideus, a species

* Prof. Sars believes that the genus Colossendeis is itself identical with
Rhopalorhynchus of Wood-Mason—an opinion from which I must respect-
fully differ, in view of the widely-separated habitats of the types and of
the distinctions mentioned in my paper.

(or Colossendeis) Smith. 265

long ago described by Sabine (Appendix Capt. Parry’s
Voyage, p. exxvi), and Anomorhynchus Smithii (as I learn
from his letter) as also referable to the same species. Sabine’s
species was unfortunately never figured; but I may note that
our specimens differ from his descriptions in being destitute
of eyes and without any distinct transverse line on the first
segment of the body, and from that of Jarzynsky in having
the first pair of appendages 9- (not 10-) jointed ; nor do the
words of the latter author—“ Pedes (tenues) tarso longissimo
(manu multo longiore) ; appendix caudata longissima cylin-
drica, extrema parte incrassata ”’—apply to our types. Inother
particulars his description is fairly applicable to A. Smithit.

From Colossendeis augusta, Sars, our species is apparently
distinguished by the form of the rostrum, the relatively
longer postabdomen, shorter conical oculigerous tubercle, and
pertectly distinct claws of the accessory legs.

Sabine’s original types of Phoxichilus proboscideus were
found at ebb-tide on the shores of the North Georgian or Parry
Islands, the type specimens of Colossendeis borealis near the
shores of Russian Lapland (“ad oras Lapponiz rossice ex-
adverso insulis Gabriliensibus ad semi-insule piscatorie,
maxima profunditate maris 120-250 org.”). A single speci-
men is referred to by Prof. Sars as having been obtained in
the cold area west ot the Norwegian coast in lat. 62° 415 N.,
long. 1° 48! K., at a depth of 412 fathoms, by the Norwegian
expedition in 1876 (¢. ¢. pp. 837-368). Colossendets augusta
was obtained by the same expedition in lat. 63° 102 N., long.
4° 59'6 E., in 417 fathoms.

The examination of a larger series of specimens is needed to
show whether the species above mentioned are all of them dis-
tinct; in the meantime, to avoid future confusion in the synony-
ma, I have thought it desirable to call attention to the memoir
of the Russian naturalist, which has (excusably) been over-
looked by nearly all the recorders of zoological literature*,

* Since this note has been in type, I have received from Dr. P. P. C.
Hoek a paper containing an account of the Pycnogonids dredged during
the cruises of the ‘ Willem Barents,’ in the years 1878-79, reprinted from
the ‘Niederl. Archiv f. Zool.’ Supplementb. i. (1881). In this paper a
species is figured under the name of Colossendeis proboscideus, Sabine,
with which, notwithstanding some slight differences, I must regard Ano-
morhynchus Smithii as very probably identical. The genus Colossendeis
is not described by Dr. Hoek; but the memoir of Jarzynsky is cited as
having been published in the ‘ Annales de la Société des Naturalistes de
St. Pétersbourg,’ 1870, a publication 1 have never seen. Weare informed
in Dr. Hoek’s memoir that four female examples of C. proboscideus were
recently collected by Mr. Murray of Edinburgh in lat. 60° 3’ N., between
the north of Scotland and the Fardes; also numerous forms of the same
genus inhabit southern latitudes (as shown by the rich materials collected
by the ‘ Challenger’ expedition), from all of which C. proboscideus is dis-
tinguished by its “ highly concentrated” body.

266 Geological Society.

PROCEEDINGS OF LEARNED SOCIETIES.
GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY.

November 3, 1880.—Robert Etheridge, Esq., F.R.S.,
President, in the Chair.

The following communications were read :—

1. **Note on the Occurrence of Remains of Recent Plants in
Brown Iron-ore.” By J. Arthur Phillips, Esq., F.G.S.

The fossilizing ironstone described by the author occurs at Rio
Tinto, in the province of Huelva, Spain, in close proximity to the
celebrated copper-mines of that name, where it forms a thick hori-
zontal capping of a hill known as the Mésa de los Pinos. In this
iron-ore Mr. Carruthers has identified the following vegetable
remains :—Leaves and acorns of Quercus ilex, Linn.; leaves and
seed of a two-leaved species of Pinus, most probably Pinus pinea,
Linn.; the cone of Hqwisetum arvense, Linn.; and a small branch
of a species of Hrica. There is also a well-marked leaf of a Dico-
tyledonous plant not yet identified. A great portion of many of
the specimens consists of a thick growth of moss ; but it is impos-
sible to say what the species are. The whole is permeated with
minute branching roots, showing that the vegetation was formed as
a great mass, the oak- and pine-leaves having been probably carried
or blown into it. ‘The plants are evidently all of the same species
as are still found growing in Spain.

The author attributes this deposit of ironstone to the decomposi-
tion, partly by organic agency, of ferruginous salts, derived from the
oxidation of iron pyrites, which flowed into a marsh or shallow
lagoon. Subsequently to this the valleys of the Rio Agrio and
Rio Tinto were eroded, leaving the Mésa de los Pinos with its thick
capping of iron-ore.

The very recent character of this deposit is evident from the
fossils it contains; but the erosion of the valleys certainly took
place before the Roman occupation of the district. This is satis-
factorily shown not only by the position of various remains of that
date, but also by the fact that the Roman grave-stones, which are
still remaining in the locality, are made of this ironstone.

2. “Notes on the Locality of some Fossils found in the Carboni-
ferous Rocks at T’ang Shan, situated, in a N.N.E. direction, about
120 miles from Tientsin, in the province of Chih Li, China.”
By James W. Carrall, Esq., F.G.S. With a Note by Wm. Carruthers,
Esq., F.R.S., F.G.S.

The author described the locality from which he obtained some
plant-remains of apparently Carboniferous age, and stated that
mining-operations had been carried on by a Chinese company in the
district since the year 1878. Several seams of coal occur, varying
in thickness from 11 inches to 6 feet. Mr. Carruthers stated in a
note that the specimens submitted to him belong to a species of

Geological Society. 267

Annularia, probably A. longifolia, Brongn., abundant in the British
Coal-measures, and found both on the Continent and in North
America.

December 1, 1880.—Robert Etheridge, Esq., F.R.S.,
President, in the Chair.

The following communication was read :—

“Qn Remains of a small Lizard from the Neocomian Rocks
of Comén, near Trieste, preserved in the Geological Museum of
the University of Vienna.” By Prof. H. G. Seeley, F.R.S., F.G.S.

The author mentioned that Prof. Kornhuber had described, under
the name of Hydrosaurus lesinensis, the remains of a Lizard from
the Neocomian rocks of the island of Lesina, off the coast of Dal-
matia. The University Museum at Vienna contains a slab from a
neighbouring locality, showing the hinder part of the skeleton of ano-
ther Lizard, which had been lent to the author for the purpose of
description by Prof. Siiss. The specimen includes twelve dorsal and
sixty-five caudal vertebre ; but the tail is incomplete. The sacral
vertebrae are concealed, and the pelvis is imperfectly seen. Both
hind limbs are fairly well preserved. The author described the
distinctions which he considered to separate this animal from Korn-
huber’s species, consisting chiefly in the form and proportion of the
dorsal vertebr, which, instead of having the neural spine high and
square as in Hydroswurus, have it depressed and produced both
anteriorly and posteriorly—in the length and slenderness of the
ilium ; in the single-headed eharacter of the ribs—and in the form
and structure of the segments of the limbs, which appear to possess
four tarsal and three metatarsal bones and five digits. The author
proposed to name this Lizard Adriosaurus Suessit.

December 15, 1880.—J. W. Hulke, Esq., F.R.S., V.P.G.S.,
in the Chair.

The following communication was read :—

“Ona new Species of Trigonia from the Purbeck Beds of the
Vale of Wardour.” By R. Etheridge, Esq., F.R.S., President. With
a Note on the Stratigraphical Position of the Fossil, by the Rev. W.
R. Andrews.

In this paper the author described a species of T’rigonia discovered
by the Rev. W. R. Andrews in the ‘* Cinder-bed” of the Middle
Purbeck series in the Vale of Wardour. ‘The specimens were found
in the railway-cutting one mile west of Dinton station. The shell
was referred to d’Orbigny’s section “ Glabrae” of the genus T’rigonia,
and named Z'rigonia densinoda. In its ornamentation it closely
resembles 7’. tenuitexta, Lyc., of the Portland Oolite, but is more
depressed and lengthened posteriorly, and destitute of the ante-
carinal space which occurs in all known Jurassic “Glabre.” The
escutcheon is remarkably large, and possesses transverse rug,
as in the Neocomian “ Quadrate.” The author regarded the species

268 B ibliographical Notices.

as a transition form connecting the two groups of Trigonie above
mentioned. The description of the new species was accompanied
by a note on the Purbeck strata of the Vale of Wardour by the
Rey. W. R. Andrews.

BIBLIOGRAPHICAL NOTICES.

Fossil Sponge-Spicules from the Upper Chalk, found in the Interior
of a Single Flintstone from Horstcad Norfolk. By Guorex
Jennrnes Hrypz, F.G.8. With five Plates. 8vo. Munich, 1880.

Unper this title appears Mr. (now Dr.) Hinde’s “ Inaugural Dis-
sertation” for the degree of ‘* Dr. of Philosophy ” in the University
of Munich, published at Munich in the month of November 1880.
For this he very wisely took some fossil sponge-spicules obtained from
Horstead for comparison with those which Prof. Zittel has collected
in the Paleontological Museum of Munich, and thus met with the dis-
interested generosity of one whose love for his profession goes hand
in hand with his great ability for practising it.

With such aid it is no wonder that he should have produced a
“ Dissertation” alike honourable to himself and to those by whom
he has been assisted, viz. Prof. Zittel and Herr Conrad Schwager,
respectively superintendent and assistant in the Paleontological
Museum at Munich—the former having assisted by his extensive
knowledge and liberality, and the latter, among other things, by his
aptitude in drawing with the camera lucida.

The ‘ Dissertation ” is illustrated by five plates, containing 165
figures, which, “as far as possible,” have been drawn to the scale
of ‘*20 diameters,” in order that “their relative dimensions”
might be appreciated; while the measurements have been given in
parts of a metre, that they may be most generally useful.

Commencing with a description of the kind of Upper-Chalk Flint
in whose interior the sponge-spicules were found, viz. “a potstone
or paramoudra,” about a foot in diameter, with the mouth closed
by extension of the flint,—the contents generally are enume-
rated ; after which the structure and mineral composition of the
fossil sponge-spicules are noticed in particular, ending with the
following commendable enunciation, viz. :—‘ In several instances
the correspondence in form and size of the spicules is so close to
that of sponges already determined, that no doubt can arise of their
belonging to the same species. Under these circumstances I have
arranged these spicules under the different genera with which they
seemed to have the closest relationship; andin only a few excep-
tional cases, in which the peculiar form or dimensions of the spicule
' rendered it highly probable that it belonged to some hitherto un-
recognized sponge, have I ventured to give a name to it, to facilitate
reference in the future” (p. 18).

Following the systematic arrangement which is given by Prof.
Zittel in his “‘ Beitrige zur Systematik der fossilen Spongien ” (see
‘ Annals,’ 1879, vol. iii. p. 304), Mr. Hinde begins his descriptions

Bibliographical Notices. 269

in detail with Zittel’s ‘“‘ Monactinellide ”—that is, sponges which
consist only of “ spicules which possess a single unbranched interior
canal,” which, so long as the monactinellid has a peculiar feature,
answers very well for identification; but when the spicule is a
simple acerate—that is, linear, more or less curved (for if looked
at in a favourable direction it is seldom otherwise), fusiform, gradu-
ally sharp-pointed, and smooth, as in pl. i. figs. 1-3,—the power of
the term continues for the spicule, but ends for that of distinction
ef species; for this form is perhaps of all the most common, and
extends to totally different families. Mr. Hinde has evidently ex-
perienced this difficulty.

Again, the ‘Tetractinellide” of Marshall, characterized by
spicules with ‘ four arms or rays, one usually much longer than the
ethers, radiating from a centre” (p. 24), might do for the Pachy-
tragida (Carter), but no other sponges. Sothe ‘ Siliceous Globules ”
(p. 38) may belong to Placospongia melobesioides, Gray, whose
skeleton-spicules are pin-like, with the points outwards, thus,
with other concomitants, allying itself to the Suberitida (Carter).
The ‘“ Quadrifid Spicules of Pachastrella” are less open to difficulty
in this respect ; while the fully formed spicules of Zittel’s ‘“‘ Mega-
morina” and ‘ Tetracladina” (Lithistina), and those of the order
* Hexactinellide (O. Schmidt),” are self-evident, both recent and
fossil, as well as the incomplete ones of the former (pl. iv. figs. 24-34),
which we now know to be only a transitionary state of the disk to the
ulterior development of the Lithistid spicule. Here it is that Prof.
Zittel, by his sagacity, success, and indefatigable labours both at
home and in the field, has so enriched the Paleontological Museum
of Munich—which, together with his numerous discoveries, quite
marks an epoch in the early history of the Spongida; while the
exquisite beauty of the fossil remains he has collected, once seen
and begun to be studied, is so fascinating as to recall to mind the
saying “ Vestigia nulla retrorsum.”

Lastly, Mr. Hinde alludes to the destruction of the spicule, ob-
serving that “the peculiar form of the perforations (in the fossil
spicule) shows that they have been produced by the action of
some living organism,” but different from that of Duncan’s Pale-
achlya perforans.

Having gone through all the sponge-spicules of the ‘“* paramoudra”
both descriptively and comparatively, not only with reference to the
recent but the fossil sponge-spicules also, that have been made known,
Mr. Hinde adds a most interesting “Summary” of his results,
which must be read in extenso to be properly appreciated; nor can
we fail to notice in the “ Postscript” that desire to which we
alluded in the beginning, viz. not to create new genera or species
before making himself acquainted with what has already been pub-
lished on both fossil and recent sponges.

Finally, we would observe that, with such principles and oppor-
tunities, under the able and willing guidance of Prof. Zittel, it is
hardly necessary to add that Mr. Hinde’s “ Inaugural Dissertation ”
tells us most satisfactorily the state of sponge-development at the
time the Upper Chalk was deposited.

270 Bibliographical Notices.

Fossil Foraminifera of the Carboniferous Limestone.

1. The Spirally-coiled Foraminifera of the Carboniferous Limestone
of Russia. By Vatertan von MoxzeEr, Professor at the Mining
Institute. [Die spiralgewundenen Foraminiferen des russischen
Kohlenkalks.| Mémoires de 0 Acad. Impér. des Sci. de St.-Péters-
bourg, 7° série, vol. xxv. no. 9, 1878. 4to. 148 pages, with 15
lithographic plates and 6 woodcuts.

2. The Foraminifera of the Carboniferous Limestone of Russia. By
VALERIAN VON Mouter, Professor at the Mining Institute. [Die
Foraminiferen des russischen Kohlenkalks.| Mémoires de V Acad.
Impér. des Sci, de St.-Pétersbourg, 7° sér. vol. xxvii. no. 5, 1879.
Ato. 132 pages, with 7 lithographic plates and 30 woodcuts.

Tur great Carboniferous Limestone has long been known to contain,
and indeed in places to consist of, Foraminifera, often of relatively
large size. Fischer de Waldheim indicated the Musulina, which Car-
penter rightly removed in classification from the Imperforata to the
Perforata group, and which H. B. Brady further elucidated and now
refers to the Rotaline series. Ehrenberg illustrated several allied
forms (Borelis &c.), which Parker and Jones (treating of his ‘ Mikro-
zeologie’) interpreted and put into a regular series. He figured
also other Foraminifera associated with the former. John Phillips
long ago pointed out the leading Endothyra, of which genus nume-
1ous representatives are now known from H. B. Brady’s researches.
Rouillier, Vosinsky, and d’Eichwald added some of these and other
forms ; and Brady has not only interpreted these, but angmented
the list with numerous highly important and well-systematized
genera andspecies. All this fauna, excepting Fusulina, he describes
and figures (44 species in 14 genera) in his ‘Monograph of the
Carboniferous and Permian Foraminifera,” Paleontogr. Soc., 1876.

In Professor Valerian von Moller’s two memoirs before us we
have some of the same or very similar forms (occurring in Russia),
together with the Fusuline (in 4 genera with 14 species), treated of
as 14 genera with 41 species.

These two elegant monographs are illustrated with numerous
well-drawn, though sometimes bold and somewhat diagrammatic
figures, altogether making twenty-two quarto plates, of the very
interesting Foraminifera found in the Carboniferous Limestone of
Russia, and, in most cases, of other countries also. Numerous clear
woodcut diagrams, moreover, illustrate the text. The descriptive
portions of these monographs bear evidence as well to great acumen
and industry (indeed, energy and enthusiasm) on the part of the
author, as to much friendly help and sympathy from his scientific
colleagues and friends. The result has been a revision of what has
been done in elucidation of this particular branch of paleontology
among the Rhizopoda obtained from one of the latest of those which
geologists term “primary” or “ paleozoic” strata. This revision,
however, has been ruled by views differing considerably from those
of the observers who have preceded Prof. von Moller in this parti-
cular line of research. Examining with close attention the intimate

Bibliographical Notices. 201

structure and the external form of the minute shells he has had to
do with, our author has been led to determine and note the geome-
trical relationship and exact measurements of spirals and chambers,
and has made angles and proportions of greater importance in the
specific characters of the organisms than his predecessors thought
of doing. Had there been but few of the spiral (helicostegian)
forms, and but few of those with alternating (enallostegian) cham-
bers, some definite limits of size, form, and structure would have
been far more easily recognized as of permanent occurrence among
Foraminifera than are usually found to obtain. The gradations,
however, in amount of angularity with the alternating chambers
are even more insensible than those in the relative size and the
setting-on of chambers, and in the modifications of septal aperture,
in any series of Foraminifera. The nature of the dorsal spire,
whether simple and either ‘‘ concho-spiral ” or “ logarithmic-spiral,”
or compound and combining both kinds, is of importance in Von
Moller’s differentiations ; and s0 also are the characters of the form
and shell-structure. In this last feature, however, the discrepancies
between his observations and those of H. B. Brady on apparently
similar shells are so very great that, unless sheli-structure varied
with regional conditions, doubt must exist as to whether the author
and his artists have quite mastered the intimate structure of the
shells in every detail ; for they have as much omitted the sandiness
usually present in Hndothyra &c. as Messrs. Brady and Hollick’s
drawings omit the large pores so numerous and regular in the
Russian figures. H. B. Brady intimates (Monograph, Pal. Soc.,
p. 83) that Endothyra may essentially have a porous test, and that
his specimens may have been modified by infiltration; but the
absence of the true “ arenaceous ” condition in the Russian drawings
is remarkable.

Von Moller makes more of the real Nummuline character of
Nummulina antiquior than Brady seems to allow (Monogr. p. 148).
The Fusuline are conveniently made into several species. One set
is divided off (Fusulinella) as having an Imperforate instead of Per-
forate shell. ‘“ Bradyina” isa “ porous” form collated with Lituola
Benneana as a synonym; but we have not seen it in the British
collections, and in appearance and structure it differs from the
Lituola quoted. ‘ Cribrospira” would be a Lituola were its shell-
structure sandy, instead of being porous like an immature Val-
vulina.

Among the non-spiral Foraminifera of the Russian Carboniferous
series, Von Moller makes his genus “* Cribrostomum”’ the most com-
prehensive, with eight species, differentiated by the angle at which
the chambers are superimposed, as far as it can be calculated by
the production of the probable planes beyond the side walls, thus
giving the readings for the “species” in degrees. Taking other
characters, however, into consideration, Brady had already treated
the same or similar forms as Textularians, referring them to Clima-
cammina, Bigenerina patula, and true Textularie. Indeed, as with
other groups of Teatularie having their own peculiar facies, there

272 Miscellaneous.

are both the special Clavuline modification (Climacammina antiqua)
in the Carboniferous group and the Bigenerine (B. patula); and it
seems uncalled for to thus break up and commingle, on mathema-
tical or geometrical principles, what seems to be a good and well-
defined generic Foraminiferal series. One or two varieties of Haplo-
phragmium also seem to be mixed in with “ Cribrostomum.” This,
moreover, is a bad generic name, being founded on a feature present
in several accepted genera of Foraminifera.

The topographical and general geological distribution of the
forms described, as well as their special and relative abundance, are
carefully treated of, and are shown in elaborate tables, by Prof. von
Moller, who has hereby done some good service to the palaon-
tology of Russia. T.R. J.

Aid to the Identification of Insects. Edited by Cuartzs Owen
Warernovuse. Lithographs by Epwry Wuson. London: EH. W.
Janson.

We learn from the prospectus that the intention of the Editor of this
work is to give “a series of hand-coloured lithographic drawings of
insects of all orders” not previously figured—to be issued in monthly
parts, each containing eight or nine small quarto plates. Three parts
are now before us, illustrating five of the orders. That Mr. C. O.
Waterhouse is the editor is a sufficient guarantee for the accuracy of
the work. Mr. Wilson, the artist, is doing his part in a manner that
leaves little to be desired; and the colouring is very carefully at-
tended to. Such a work should do for entomology what the ‘ Bota-
nical Magazine’ has done for botany; and it is to be hoped it will
receive sufficient support to induce the spirited publisher to con-
tinue the work beyond the twelve parts announced to complete a
volume, which will contain “ asystematic index, together with such
remarks on the insects as may appear absolutely necessary.”

Among the insects figured, attention may be called to :—Woso-
derma cordicolle, an East-African beetle belonging to a remarkable
group otherwise confined to America ; Latheticus oryzc, a small beetle
recently found in rice in Caleutta and Arabia, and now imported into
England ; Myrmecosis Saundersii, a curious mimetic form, belonging
to the Hemiptera; and the beautiful little Homalus nanus, one of
the ruby-tailed flies (Chrysidide) from the Jonian Islands.

MISCELLANEOUS.

On the Starfishes dredged in the deeper Regions of the Gulf of
Mexico and the West-Indian Sea by the American ship ‘Blake.’
By M. E. Perrier.

In 1878 the number of species of Starfishes known from the region
explored was twenty-seven ; the collections of the ‘ Blake’ bring the
number of species to seventy, of which forty-three were unknown,
while a considerable number must constitute new generic types.
Most of the genera discovered by the ‘ Challenger’ expedition are

Miscellaneous. 273

represented in the collections obtained in the West-Indian Sea,
such as Zoroaster, Korethraster, and the curious genus Pedicellaster,
Sars—Zorouster by two species already described by the author,
Korethraster by a species distinguished by the membrane which
unites its dorsal spines, and indicating a remarkable passage towards
Pteraster, Pedicellaster by a species remarkable for the arrangement
of its skeleton. These new species are named by the author
Korethraster palmatus and Pedicellaster Pourtalest.

Besides the new genus Hymenodiscus, already described by
M. Perrier, he finds several others which present intermediate
characters between different groups of Echinodermata. Goniopecten
in the structure of the skeleton seems to belong to the Goniasteride;
but its pointed ambulacral tubes and the form of the teeth exactly
resemble those of Astropecten. Of this type the author distinguishes
four species. The Ladiasteres, brought up from a depth of 1800
metres, are large five-rayed starfish, with tufts of spines like those
of Solaster, marginal plates like the Goniasteride, and ventral plates
arranged in series as in some Asterinide. The Ctenasteres, which
are still larger (nearly 0-3 metre in diameter) and come from a
depth of 3500 metres, have six arms, resemble gigantic Ctenodisca
destitute of ventral scales, and thus approach the Hchinasteride.
The Marginasteres, on the contrary, are small pentagonal Starfishes,
which would be taken for Asterine if they had not marginal plates
like those of the Goniasteride.

Archaster, common in all the great depths of the Atlantic, occurred
peculiarly abundantly. The author refers to seven species, one of
which, A. mirabilis, of very variable form, is represented by several
hundred specimens. The Goniasteride are represented by eleven
species, all new, among which are several belonging to the genus
Dorigona, Gray. The new genus Anthenoides is intermediate be-
tween Anthenea, with large pedicellariz and a naked skin, and
Pentagonaster, with small pedicellarize and a granular skin.

Several new forms of pedicellariz occur. Pentagonaster ternalis
has them with three branches. The Lurdie present two, three, and
even four branches ; but the most remarkable are those of Archaster
mirabilis. Two ossicles are placed opposite each other like two
parentheses, and each of them has a comb of spines, forming a very
complex prehensile organ. The author considers that this example
leaves no doubt as to the homology of the pedicellariz with the spines
or calcareous granules of the skeleton in Echinodermata. He says
that there is a remarkable concordance between the number of
tentacles, the structure of the mouth, and the form of the pedicel-
lari, which would seem to indicate the division of the Asteriade
into two distinct great families. From his new researches it results
that there is an agreement between the structure of the mouth and
the number of rows of ambulacral tubes, an agreement rendered
necessary by the relations with the mouth of the skeleton that
separates these tubes; but the general structure of the skeleton and
the form of the pedicellarize do not accord with these data, and
must be regarded as furnishing more general characters.—Comptes
Rendus, January 10, 1881, p. 59.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. vii. 20-

274. Miscellaneous.

On the Guliga of Borneo. By A. Harr Evererr.

The Guliga, more commonly known as Bezoar, forms a recog-
nized article of export from the Rejang and Bintulu rivers in the
Sarawak territory. These concretions are chiefly obtained from a
red monkey (a species of Semnopithecus), which seems to be very
abundant in the interior districts of Borneo. A more valuable
Guliga, called the ‘‘ Guliga Landak,” is obtained from the porcupine ;
but it is comparatively rare. The Sepoys stationed at Sibu Fort
in the Rejang formerly exported considerable numbers of these
calculi to Hindustan, where, in addition to their supposed efficacy
as an antidote for the poison of snakes and other venomous crea-
tures, they appear to be applied, either alone or in combination
with other medicines, to the treatment of fevers, asthmatic com-
plaints, general debility, &c. A few years ago, however, these men
ceased to send any but the Guliga Landak, since their hakims had
informed them that the concretions obtained from the monkeys had
come to be considered of very doubtful, if any, value from a medi-
cinal point of view.

The usual test for a good Guliga is to place a little chunam
on the hand, and to rub the Guliga against it, when, if it be genuine,
the lime becomes tinged with yellow. Imitations are by no means
rare; and on one occasion that came to my own knowledge some
Bakatans succeeded in deceiving the Chinamen, who trade in these
articles, by carefully moulding some fine light clay into the form
of a Bezoar, and then rubbing it well all over with a genuine one.
The extreme lightness of a real Guliga and the lime test, however,
are generally sufficient to expose a counterfeit Bezoar. The
Sepoys and Malays apply various imaginary tests. Thus they
assert that if a true Guliga be clasped in the closed fist, the bitter
taste of the concretion will be plainly susceptible to the tongue
when applied to the back of the hand, and even above the elbow
if the Guliga be a good “ Landak ;” and a Sepoy once assured me
that having accidentally broken one of the latter, he immediately
was sensible of a bitter taste in his mouth.

Accounts vary very much among the natives as to the exact
position in which the Guligas are found—some saying they may
occur in any part of the body, others that they occur only in the
stomach and intestines, whilst I have heard others declare that
they have taken them from the head and even the hand! Bezoar-
stones are sold by weight, the gold scale being used ; and the value
varies according to quality and to the scarcity or abundance of the
commodity at the time of sale. The ordinary prices paid at Rejang
a few years ago were from $1.50 to $2 per amas for common
stones, and from $2.50 to $4 per amas for Guliga Landak. I have
seen one of the latter which was valued at $100. It was about
the size of an average Tangier orange, and was perfectly sphe-
rical. The surface, where not artificially abraded, was smooth,
shining, bronze-brown, studded with numerous irregularly-shaped

Miscellaneous. para

fragments of dark rich brown standing out slightly above the
general mass of the calculus. These fragments, in size and appear-
ance, bore a close resemblance to the crystals in a coarse-grained
porphyritic rock.

The common monkey-bezoars vary much in colour and shape.
I have seen them of the size of large filberts, curiously convoluted
and cordate in shape, with a smooth, shining surface of a pale
olive-green hue. Mr. A. R. Houghton once showed me one which
was an inch anda half long, and shaped like an Indian club. It was
of a dirty greenish colour, perfectly smooth and cylindrical ; and it
had become aggregated around a portion of a sumpitan dart, which
appears to have penetrated the animal’s stomach, and, being broken
off short, subsequently served as the nucleus for the formation of
a cajculus. The same gentleman had in his possession two Landak
stones, one of which bore a close resemblance to a block in shape,
and was of a bright green colour; and the second was of a rich
chocolate-brown, and could best be likened in form to a constable’s
staff. One porcupine-stone, which was opened, was found to be a
mere shell full of small brown shavings like shred tobacco.

The part of the island which produces these stones in greatest
abundance seems to be, by a coincidence of native reports, the dis-
trict about the upper waters of the Balungan (Batang Kayan). The
story is, that the head waters of this river are cut off from its lower
course by an extensive tract of hills beneath which the river disap-
pears, a report by no means unlikely if the country be, as is pro-
bable, limestone. The people of the district have no communica-
tion with the lower course of the river, and are thus without any
supply of salt. In lieu of this necessary they make use of the
waters of certain springs, which must be saline mineral springs,
and which the Kayans call “ Sungan.” These springs are also fre-
quented by troops of the red monkeys before mentioned ; and the
Bezoars are most constantly formed in the stomachs of these animals,
‘through their drinking the saline water.” The hunters lie in
wait about such springs; and, so runs the report, on the animals
coming down to drink, they are able to guess with tolerable cer-
tainty, from external signs, which of the monkeys will afford the
Guliga; and they forthwith shoot such with their sumpitans. Ihave
this account, curious in more ways than one, from several quite inde-
pendent sources.

In concluding these brief notes, I may remark that the wide-
spread idea of the medicinal virtue of these concretions would lead
us to suppose that there is some foundation for their reputation.—
Journal of the Straits Branch of the Royal Asiatic Society, 1880,
p- 56.

On the Histology of the Pedicellaric and of the Muscles of Echinus
sphera, Forbes. By MM. P. Guppes and F. E. Bepparp.

Although our knowledge of the general form and of the calcareous
parts of the pedicellarie of the Sea-Urchins is now nearly com-

276 Miscellaneous.

plete, thanks to the researches of O. F. Miller, Valentin, Perrier,
A. Agassiz, Wyville Thomson, and several other naturalists, the
information furnished by authors as to the histology of the soft
parts of these organs is not equally exact. In the hope of giving
more precision to the ideas on this subject, we have studied in
detail the pedicellarize of the large Urchin, Lchinus sphera, Forbes ;
and we will describe in a few words the principal results of the
investigation.

On the ophiocephalous pedicellaria of Valentin the three adductor
muscles, arranged in the form of a triangle, are attached, as is well
known, to the calcareous apophyses of the three valves; but the
fibres which unite the head of the pedicellaria to the club of the
stem are not inserted upon calcareous parts, but terminate in an
extremely remarkable fashion. Most of them are bent suddenly
upon themselves before arriving at the level of the calcareous parts,
and thus form a series of loops or meshes.

Two bundles only are prolonged further, interlace with the semi-
circular arcs of the valves, and terminate freely in a small tuft of
meshes in the middle of the muscular triangle.

Quite distinct and separate from these bent fibres, alternating
with them, and external to the calcareous parts, we find three parts
of a still more curious structure. These are a sort of grilles or
gratings, formed of fibres repeatedly bent, composing a series of
meshes. ‘These organs are not attacked by dilute acetic acid ; they
have the aspect of elastic tissue; and it seems probable that they
function as antagonists of the adductor muscles, and serve to open
the valves, somewhat like the ligament of an acephalous mollusk.

The tridactyle and gemmiform pedicellariz contain these grilles ;
but they are very difficult to find, in consequence of their extreme
delicacy. The fibres of the stem are not bent upon themselves, but
attach themselves directly to the calcareous parts.

The head of the gemmiform pedicellaria is an extremely compli-
cated organ. There is a gland outside of. each valve ; it is covered
with two layers of muscular fibres and with a cylinder epithelium.
These pedicellariz are perhaps organs of urtication, for their calca-
reous Valves terminate in a needle-point; or they may be organs
for the secretion of mucus, as Mr. Sladen thinks, who has recently
described the histology of this kind of pedicellaria-in Spheerechinus
granularis (Lam.)*.

At the commencement of histological researches the observations
upon the structure of the muscles of the Echinodermata were
always completely contradictory. Wagner, Siebold, and Johannes
Miiller described these muscles as being unstriped; Valentin, on
the contrary, maintained that the muscles of the lantern and of the
spines of the Urchin are striped; and De Quatrefages saw a stria-
tion upon the longitudinal muscles of Synapta. Baur contradicted
these observations, whilst Leydig described a longitudinal and
transverse striation in Hchinus and Holothuria. Finally, in the last

* Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist., August 1880.

Miscellaneous. rar he

memoir on this subject, that of L. Frédéricq*, on the muscles of
the lantern of Echinus sphera, their striation is again denied. How
are we to explain this utter confusion ?

By treating the muscles of the Urchin with different reagents
and making a considerable number of preparations we have seen all
the phenomena described by these authors. Frequently the adduc-
tor muscles of the valves of the pedicellarie are distinctly striped ;
frequently also they do not show the least trace of striation. The
same fact may be observed with the muscles of the lantern ; for we
have preparations which contain the simple fibres of Wagner and
Frédéricq side by side with others of which the striation is as evi-
dent as in Valentin’s drawings. Moreover by passing along a
single fibre we very frequently find all possible gradations between
the most distinct striation and its complete absence.

Our colleague, Mr. Haycraft, has just proposed a new theory upon
the structure of the voluntary muscles. In his view the fibrils are
not simple cylinders, but they are slightly constricted at small
intervals; and he asserts that their striation does not indicate a
histological differentiation, but is simply an optical phenomenon
produced by the unequal refraction that the light undergoes in
traversing the fibril.

Without wishing to pronounce an opinion upon this theory from
a general point of view, and without affirming that the striation of
the muscles of the Echinodermata is due to the same cause as that
of the muscles of the higher animals, we are convinced that the
irregularity of the striation in the Echinus may be explained in the
same way.

The fibres of the lantern show constrictions in perfect correspon-
dence with the transverse striz: ; when these constrictions follow one
another very rapidly the strize also approach each other ; and when
they become more widely separated the strize show the same irregu-
larity. Lastly the strie and the constrictions disappear together.

It is probable, as has already been suspected, that the striation
stands in some relation to the state of contraction of the muscles ;
but we hope to make fresh observations before pronouncing an opinion
upon this question.—Comptes Rendus, February 7, 1881, p. 308.

On the Formation of the Blastoderm in the Araneida.
By M. A. Sapatrer.

The mode of formation of the blastoderm in the Araneida has
given rise only to a small number of publications, the data and
conclusions of which are contradictory. The phenomenon presents
two distinct phases: the first terminates in converting the egg into
a meroblastic ovum with multiple cicatriculz ; the second includes
the discoidal segmentation of each of the cicatricule, so as to form
a simple and continuous layer of blastodermic cells.

* Aych. de Zool. Expér. 1877.
+ Proc. Royal Soc., February 1881.

278 Miscellaneous.

The ovum, examined two or three hours after deposition, consists
of a network of granular protoplasm, in the meshes of which are
contained the spheres of the deutoplasm. The surface of the ovum
is covered by a continuous layer of protoplasm, a layer the exist-
ence of which Ludwig has erroneously denied, and which he has
confounded with the chorion covered with projecting granules.
This layer divides very clearly into germinative areas, as was first
described by Balbiani; and, notwithstanding the contrary asser-
tions of Ludwig and Barrois, I have been able to grasp the mode
of formation of this division, and to ascertain that it has a signifi-
cance different from that ascribed to it by Balbiani. It is due to
the transference of the protoplasm from the interior to the surface
of the ovum. MHyaline protoplasm gushes forth in the intervals of
the vitelline spheres of the surface, and divides the granular layer.
This phenomenon has no particular influence upon the formation of
the blastodermic cells. It is the result of a centrifugal tendency of
the protoplasm, which governs the first phases of development in the
Araneida.

A few hours after this division there appear at the surface of the
ovum at first large, diffused, deep spots, and soon afterwards dark
stellate figures, described by Balbiani, and surrounded by the bril-
liant rosettes of Ludwig. The dark stellate forms are true salient
disks of granular protoplasm, having a large pale nucleus in their
centre. Sections made at this moment show that the disks issue from
trains or dissepiments of the same nature, which separate and englobe
the neighbouring vitelline spheres.

In ova taken before the formation of the rosettes of the surface I
have never ascertained the existence of the cylinders of deutoplasm,
or “Deutoplasmasiulen” of Ludwig, in the interior of the ovum
itself; and I do not think that we can adopt the opinions of that
author as to the mode of segmentation of the ovum by the succes-
sive splitting of the central rosettes. What is really the case is that
the protoplasm grouped around the nuclei moves from the interior
towards the surface, drawing more and more towards it the proto-
plasm of the dissepiments, and producing first of all diffused spots,
which become resolved into dark superficial rosettes.

From the examination of sections it appears :—1. That the granu-
lar protoplasm, at first diffused pretty uniformly in the form of a
network between the spheres of deutoplasm, bears more and more
towards the periphery of the ovum, at the same time concentrating

. around a small number of nuclei. 2. That the masses of proto-
plasm appear at the surface in the form of dark lenticular masses or
disks, from which issue rays of the same substance, which separate
the surrounding vitelline spheres and envelop them in the form of
partitions. It is to the thickness of the interposed dark septa, and
very probably also to the centripetal contraction of these septa, that
these vitellne spheres owe the very strongly-marked appearance of
their contours and the elongation of their axis towards the centre of
the dark disk, conditions which produce the phenomenon of the
brilliant rosettes of Ludwig. But these rosettes can only exist at

Miscellaneous. 279

the surface of the ovum, and when the dark masses and the dissepi-
ments haye attained a sufficient concentration. The central rosettes,
or large rosettes of Ludwig, are purely imaginary phenomena,
assumed (rather than observed) in accordance with an illegitimate
analogy between the phenomena witnessed at the surface of the
oyum and those which are supposed to take place in its depths.

To sum up, the protoplasm, in the Araneida, moves from the

centre towards the periphery, where it makes its appearance in the
form of disks or cones of ejection, surrounded by the spheres of the
rosette, which may be compared to cones of elevation. There is
eruption through a chimney, which subdivides towards the centre of
the ovum. By this means the oyum is transformed into a mero-
blastic ovum with multiple cicatricule. This is the end of the first
phase.
: During the second phase the regular meroblastic segmentation of
the cicatricule takes place. The nuclei divide, and with them the
dark stellate forms, and the rosettes of Ludwig. In this way is
produced a second generation of stars and rosettes. As this goes on
the granules and the protoplasm of the germinative areas are at-
tracted by the dark disks, which finally absorb them entirely. In
the third generation the brilliant rosettes cease to be visible, which
is due to the disappearance of the thick dissepiments of protoplasm
and their absorption into the dark disks.

The protoplasm of the surface continues segmenting, and finally
forms a single layer of flattened polygonal cells. This is the blasto- ~
derm, which covers the whole surface of the ovum.

In none of the species that [have studied have I found the central
cavity or blastoccele, any more than the. radial orientation of the
vitelline masses, such as are described and figured by Ludwig.

From these observations it results that the ovum of the Spider
presents an intermediate type between the ova with general super-
ficial segmentation of the Crustacea, such as Peneus, and the ova
with regular discoidal segmentation, such as those of certain fishes ;
that is to say, it has a blastulation intermediate between periblastu-
lation and discoblastulation. It greatly approaches the ova of
Chelifer (Metschnikoff), Tetranychus (Claparéde), and of insects (Bo-
bretzky). Thus is plainly manifested from the outset the affinity of
the Araneida with other groups of Arachnida and with the insects.

My observations have been made upon the ova of Pholcus opili-
onides, Epeira diadema, Epeira fasciata, Agelena labyrinthica, Latro-
dectus malmignatha, and some small undetermined species.— Comptes
Rendus, January 24, 1881, p. 200.

Acineta dibdalteria, a new Species of Marine Infusorian from the
Gulf of Genoa. By Dr. Conran Parona.

When seeking Protista at Sestri Levante(Riviera di Genova) and
in the sea-water that I had brought home with me for subsequent
study, I found last September a new Acinetine, which struck me by
its very peculiar characters, and especially by the suckers, which are
not borne by a trunk and are not ramified.

280 Miscellaneous.

I ascertained at once that I had to do with a form of the genus
Acineta. We find this Acineta solitary and attached by means of a
slender peduncle to the various Algze ; and it is tolerably abundant.
The test, protoplasm, and nucleus did not greatly engage my atten-
tion ; but the suckers are very remarkable: in fact, instead of being
of a certain number, collected into bundles and arranged symmetri-
cally on one side and the other of the body, or distributed over the
whole of the free surface of the protoplasm corresponding to the
aperture of the test, they are only two in number, placed opposite
one another. Whilst in the other Acinete these sucking-tentacles
are slender, more or less long, and usually rigid, in this they are
flexible in all directions and very mobile, so that we see them move
and twist about continually.

In accordance with these remarkable characters, which I have not
met with in any Acineta hitherto described, I think I may establish,
if not a new genus (so as not to complicate further the divisions of
this group), at least certainly a new species, under the name of

Acineta dibdalteria, sp. nov.

Diagnosis. Test in the form of a wine-glass ; peduncle slender ;
tentacles of a single kind; protoplasm granular, more transparent
at the periphery ; contractile vesicle large ; nucleus in the shape of
a horse-shoe, and placed towards the lower part of the protoplasmic
mass. Only two tentacles, which are at the same time suctorial
and prehensile, movable in all directions; peduncle straight,
slender, of uniform diameter, and only a little widened towards the
base to attach itself more firmly to the plant which bears it.

Dimensions.

millim.
Transverse diameter of the test (maximum)........ 0:06
Vertical diameter of the test .......0.05..sse0805 0-05
Weng thot themedunele gs sc cpisbionss'> set bess iachties 0:03
resutlvot the peduncle a2). sie reci. crs os os tne ane 0-01
Meneth Of the SUCKERS «cre sare sepe gs oie ta clea c we taers 0:04

From these characters it seems to me that this form cannot be
confounded with its congeners. In fact, if we run over the figures
of those which are at present known, we shall see that none of
them approaches the species just described. In reality there is no
Acineta that presents tentacles reduced to two only.

We have here a very remarkable example of anatomical and func-
tional retrogression. The organs having been reduced, the functions
have been concentrated. The differentiation of the suctorial and pre-
hensile tentacles having ceased or being absent, the two correlative
functions have been compelled to combine in the same organ, which,
in its turn, in order the better to perform its now multiple part,
has been obliged to modify and adapt itself. We have evidence
that this must have taken place when we find that whilst in the
other Acinete the tentacles are usually rigid and motionless, in
the present case, as we have already said, they are flexible and
movable in all directions.—Bibliotheque Unwerselle ; Archives des
Sci. Phys. et Nat., February 15, 1881, p. 181.

THE ANNALS

AND

MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY.

[FIFTH SERIES. ]

No. 40. APRIL 1881.

XXVII.— Contributions to the Study of the British Paleozoic
Crinotds.—No. I. On Allagecrinus, the Representative of a
new Eamily from the Carboniferous Limestone Series of
Scotland. By P. HerBert CARPENTER, M.A., Assistant
Master at Eton College, and R. ErneripGr, Jun., of the
Museum of Natural History.

[Plates XV. & XVI.]

1. Introduction.

WE have for many years been in the habit of meeting
with a very small and peculiar Crinoid in almost every
collection of Scotch Carboniferous-Limestone fossils ex-
amined by us, in which attention has been paid to the remains
of the more minute organisms that inhabited the old Car-
boniferous seas.

The systematic position of our fossils. will be best discussed
at the conclusion of this paper, after we have described the
remarkable combination of characters which they present.
We believe them to represent the type of a new genus, for
which we propose the name Allagecrinus*, on account of its

* adXayn, change.
Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol, vii. 21

282 Messrs. P. H. Carpenter and R. Etheridge, Jun.,

singularly protean nature. We cannot even refer it to any
known family of Crinoidea, although in many respects it
approaches the Haplocrinide very closely.

The sources from which our material is derived are two.
The ample and fine collection of Dr. J. S. Hunter, of Braid-
wood by Carluke, has supplied us with two well-preserved
examples of the calyx. In the second place, we have been
permitted to use a very large series of specimens, showing
all stages of growth, from the collection of the Geological
Survey of Scotland. The examples in question were collected
and washed from shale by Mr. James Bennie; and we are
indebted to the kindness of Prof. A. Geikie, LL.D., F.R.S.,
for the loan of them.

In the descriptions which follow we have united under the
one name a series of forms possessing up to a certain point in
their organization the same general structure, but beyond this
differmg in minor degrees, which we were at first sight in-
clined to look upon as probably of specific value. The finding
of a regular gradation, however, between the extreme forms of
the series has led us to reconsider this view; and we now
think the additional points of structure referred to may be
looked upon simply as an advance from a less to a more com-
plex condition in the same form.

2. Description of the Genus and Species.

Genus ALLAGECRINUS, Ether, & Carp. (gen. nov.).

Gen. char. Calyx pyriform or cylindro-conical, composed
of five basals and five unequal radials, one to four of which,
or sometimes none, may be axillary. An oral pyramid of
five closely fitting valves, and of very variable height, is pre-
sent in the young, but is. probably wanting in the adult.
Arms composed of elongated joints, sometimes forking twice.
Stem short and vermiform, of low rounded joints; canal
circular ; terminal faces slightly granular.

Obs. Although the various individuals figured on Plates XV.
& XVI. differ from one another to a very considerable ex-
tent, both in size and form, we have been led to the con-
clusion that they are really all referable to one species and
represent various stages in its development. The most ad-
vanced, and probably fully grown, stage is shown in Pl. XV.
figs. 1, 2, and 6. These are the only three tolerably complete
specimens of the adult that we have met with, and were all
found at the same locality. Fig. 2 represents that which is
most fully developed and also the best preserved of the three.

on British Paleozoic Crinotds. 283

A projection of the calyx and the arm-bases in connexion with
it is shown in fig. 3 of the same Plate.

There are only two rows of plates in the calyx, which is
cylindro-conical in form, expanding slightly from below up-
wards. The basals form a complete ring and a very shallow
pentagonal cup, but little higher at the angles than at the
sides ; the sutures are nearly if not quite invisible as a general
rule. Fig. 4 (Pl. XV.) represents the interior of this cup
as seen from above. The five radials which rest upon it are
elongated pieces with subparallel lateral margins, increasing
slightly from below upwards both in width and in convexity.
They vary considerably in size, some of them being axillary
and bearing two arms, while others are narrower and have
only one articular facet on the upper surface (Pl. XV. figs. 2,a,
2,5). In two specimens (Pl. XV. figs. 1-3) four of the radial
plates are wide and axillary, so that the number of (primary)
arms must have been nine. In the third specimen, however
(Pl. XV. fig. 6), only three of the radials are axillary, corre-
sponding to eight primary arms ; while the two adjacent ones,
which bear but one arm each, are unequal in size (Pl. XV.
fig. 6,6). The articular facets for the attachment of the arms
are large and distinct (Pl. XV. fig. 6, a & 4), and nearly hori-
zontal in position, so as to give a projecting lip-like appear-
ance to the upper and outer edges of the radials. They have
the same general form in all three specimens, although a
certain amount of variation is perceptible. The dorsal fossa
for the elastic ligament is narrow and crescentic, and lacks the
central pit, which is often so very distinct in other Crinoids.
Above it is the transverse articular ridge expanding around
the opening of the central canal, which is unusually large.
On the upper side of the ridge are large fosse for the arti-
cular ligaments, which vary somewhat in shape in the diffe-
rent specimens. The muscular fosse, in the few cases in
which they are discernible, are small and at a lower level than
the ligamental fossew, from which they are separated by
ridges.

Two of the specimens have the lowest joints of the arms
preserved. ‘They are small and irregularly cuboidal, with
nearly circular distal faces (Pl. XV. figs. 2&6). In the
best specimen the second and third brachials of three arms
are also preserved (Pl. XV. figs. 2,3). Hach joint has an
almost cylindrical shaft, with slightly expanded ends. Where
the first radial is axillary, the second brachial is not much
longer than wide; but in the second brachial of the azygos
arm the length is more than twice the width. This may,
however, be merely an accidental difference; for the three

21%

284 Messrs. P. H. Carpenter and R. Etheridge, Jun.,

third brachials vary considerably in size. Neither of these
is an axillary ; but their terminal faces are almost transverse
to their longer axes, and seem to have been syzygial rather
than articular. No traces either of vertical or transverse
ridges are visible.

In none of the specimens is there any indication of an anal
aperture.

The interior of the calyx between the radials is occupied by
matrix; but there are no signs of its having been roofed over
by a closed dome or vault of any kind. Had such a structure
existed within the circle of radial plates, it would assuredly
have been preserved in the original of fig. 2, together with
the ring of first brachials. It 1s possible, however, as we
shall point out later on, that the mouth was surrounded by a
circle of oral plates, disconnected from the calyx like those of
the recent Rhizocrinus and [yocrinus.

The column is short, and when tolerably entire has a ver-
miform appearance (Pl. XV. figs. 2, a, 6,&7, a). It is
composed of small, low, rounded joints fitting closely toge-
ther. Hach segment is biconcave, with a thickened margin,
and the centre a little raised around the small circular canal,
where the surface is also minutely frosted or granulated
CPV aie.) 2

The surface of the plates is minutely pitted.

The three specimens we have now described are from one
locality, together with another in a much broken condition,
and several fragments of other individuals. None similar
have been met with elsewhere.

Other localities, on the contrary, have yielded a very large
number of small specimens, the general appearance of which
is so like that of the preceding examples that we have been
led to regard them as the younger stages of the same, or of a
closely allied species. They are all characterized by the
presence of an oral pyramid, the relative size of which is
greater the smaller the specimen. The various figures on
Pl. XVI. and figs. 7, a, 6 of Pl. XV. represent a number of
these specimens of various sizes and at various stages of
development. Great as is the contrast between the originals of
figs. Land 2 (Pl. XVI.) and those of the corresponding figures
on Pl. XV., there are so many intermediate stages which pass
gradually into one another that we are unable to regard the
series as comprising more than one species.

We may commence the study of this interesting develop-
mental series with the smallest and least advanced forms,

such as are shown in figs. 1-3 (Pl. XVI.). The youngest

on British Paleozoic Crinotds. _ 285

condition we have met with is shown in fig. 2 (Pl. XVI).
The calyx is covered by a round dome of oral plates, the
height of which relatively to that of the radial plates is
greater than in any other specimen we have seen. Its base
is very nearly as wide as the summit of the radial pentagon,
which is thus almost entirely concealed. At the centre of the
upper edge of each radial is a minute opening, which pene-
trates beneath the dome; but no arm-facet corresponding to
this opening is visible. The oral plates are so closely united
that there is no trace of the sutures between them, though
there are five faint grooves on the upper surface of the dome,
which indicate their median lines. In older specimens, figs. 4,
7, 8, 10 (Pl. XVI.), these grooves are sometimes very marked.
In this youngest individual the calyx is tolerably symmetrical,
no one part being further developed than another. The same
is the case in some older individuals, as is shown in figs. 5
and 7 (Pl. XVI). On the other hand, specimens are not
uncommon with some of the radials more developed than
others. The youngest stage in this condition that we have met
with is shown in fig. 1 (Pl. XVI.). The oral plates in this
specimen are relatively lower, but cover the radials more com-
pletely than in the original of fig. 2, and their median grooves
are much more distinct. Three of the radials have rudimen-
tary arm-facets ; but on the other two there is scarcely any
more indication of these structures than in the specimen re-
presented by fig. 2 (Pl. XVI).

' A larger and more advanced individual in the same condi-
tion is shown in fig. 3 (Pl. XVI). The dome of oral plates
is remarkably flat ; and three of the radials have minute semi-
circular arm-facets, which are much less distinctly visible in
the two remaining radials.

The next stage, in which the arm-facets are equally deve-
loped on all the radial plates, is exhibited in figs. 4-7
(Pl. XVI.). The calyx, which varies considerably in form,
is surmounted by a low rosette-like dome, composed of the
five very closely ankylosed orals. Each of these plates is
triangular in shape and excavated rather deeply along its
median line. At the centre of the dome they are in close
contact laterally, so that no opening is visible; but their basal
angles are more or less truncated, leaving a superficial gap
between every pair of plates, which corresponds in position
with the articular facet on the subjacent radial. The interior
of this gap, however, is filled up by the deeper portions of the
oral plates, which thus bridge over the semicircular notch on
the upper surface of the facet. The latter consists of nothing

286 Messrs. P. H. Carpenter and R. Etheridge, Jun.,

more than a thickened semicircular rim, which is thus con-
verted into the opening of a tunnel that leads inwards beneath
the dome.

These notches on the upper surface of the radial plates are
the central ends of the grooves which are excavated in the
upper surface of the arm-joints, and were called the arm-
grooves by Miiller. They are often, although incorrectly,
spoken of as the ambulacral grooves. Above and partly con-
tained in these grooves were the vascular and generative
tubes of the arms, and above all these the true ambulacral or
food-grooves, which may or may not have been protected by
special plates, as in Cyathocrinus and many other fossil and
recent Crinoids. All these structures entered the calyx on
their way to join their respective’ circumoral centres through
the openings at the edge of the vault between the radials and
the orals. ‘These openings are of course the representatives
of the ambulacral openings round the edge of the vault of
Actinocrinus ; but there is no trace in Allagecrinus of any
such separation of the soft parts by plates as we find in the
former genus. In both cases the cceliac canal, which was
lodged in the lowest portion of the arm-groove, is continued
directly downwards into the visceral cavity. It was sepa-
rated in Actinocrinus from the water-vessel and food-groove
by the subambulacral plates, which form the floor of the
ambulacral tunnels beneath the vault; but'there is no trace
of these in Allagecrinus.

In none of these small specimens is there any trace of an_

anal opening, either directly piercing an oral plate, or at the
margin of the dome, between the orals and the radials. The
central end of one or more of the former may be marked by
faint tubercles (figs. 5 and 7, Pl. XVI.) ; but we cannot sug-
gest any explanation of these. In the specimen shown in
fig. 6 the central portion of the dome has been removed, and
only the bases of the triangular oral plates are visible.
» Except in the characters of the stem, and in the general
aspect of the basals and radials, these small specimens differ
so much from the larger ones previously described that it
would seem only natural to place them in entirely different
families, characterized respectively by the presence or absence
of an oral pyramid, Fortunately, however, we have met
with a few specimens that show us such a gradual transition
between the two groups that we have been compelled to place
them together under one specific name.

These intermediate forms, which are represented in Pl. XV.
fig. 7, and Pl. XVI. figs. 8-10, while agreeing in certain
general characters, seem to have developed along different

on British Paleozoic Crinoids. 287

lines. The radial plates are better developed relatively to
the orals than in the younger forms. Hence when the
calices are viewed from above they are seen to be only very
incompletely covered by the dome and project considerably
beyond its circumference, while distinct facets for a true
articulation with the first arm-joints begin to make their ap-
pearance (Pl. XVI. figs. 9, 10). These are least marked in
the specimen shown in fig. 8 (Pl. XVI.). In one or two
cases the facet is something more than a mere thickened rim
to the arm-groove, and shows traces both of a central canal
and of a dorsal fossa for the elastic ligament. ‘The chief cha-
racter indicating the advanced condition of this specimen is
the inequality in the size of its radial plates, one of which is
axillary and has two arm-facets, which are not yet completely
developed. In the individual shown in fig. 10 (Pl. XVI),
on the other hand, all the radials have well-developed arti-
cular facets, which are pierced by the openings of the central
canals ; but though the radials are unequal in size, none of
them is an axillary. The great reduction of the relative size
of the orals in this specimen is especially noteworthy. In two
other specimens, which also have much-reduced orals, there is
a remarkable inequality in the development of the arm-facets.
Thus, in the original of fig. 9 (Pl. XVI.) three of the radials
have well-marked articular surfaces for the first arm-joints,
while that of the fourth is very imperfect, and that of the
fifth altogether undeveloped, no trace even of an arm-opening
being visible. Fig. 7 (Pl. XV.) shows a similar irregularity.
The orals are relatively very small, and two of the radials
have distinct articular facets, whilst two others have small
cuboidal brachials still in contact with them. The fifth
radial, however, bears a very small and rudimentary brachial,
which is shown on the right of fig. 7, a.

The originals of fig. 6, Pl. XV., and figs. 1 and 2, Pl. XVI,
differ very considerably in size. Apart from that, the chief
point of difference is the presence of oral plates in the latter
and not in the former. It does not seem to us a very im-
probable supposition that during the growth of the smaller
specimen to the size of the larger its orals would come to be
of such small relative size (as they do in the development of
Comatula) as to be altogether lost in the fossil state, even if
they persisted during adult life.

The large and small forms agree in so many points, espe-
cially the inequality in size of the radials, and the fact that
some of them may be axillary, that we do not see our way
to separating them specifically. It must be remembered that
these little fossils occur at various localities. Even the larger

288 Messrs. P. H. Carpenter and R. Etheridge, Jun.,

and more fully developed forms are at a very low stage of
organization * as compared with most other Crinoids ; so that
it 1s natural to suppose they would present a considerable
amount of variability, both local and general.

Although it may be thought that the variations we have
described exceed the widest limits allowable on these grounds,
we prefer rather to ask for an extension in this direction than
to multiply species in a manner which appears both artificial
and unnecessary.

When all the above facts are taken into consideration, it
seems to us hardly possible to doubt that the specimens we
have described represent various stages in the development of
a Paleozoic Crinoid. In the smallest examples there is a
relatively large oral pyramid, and the uniformly sized radial
plates were not perforated by a central canal. The axial
cords lay at the bottom of grooves in their upper surfaces,
just as in the young Pentacrinoid larva of Comatula (with
closed oral pyramid) and in the mature stages of many Paleo-
crinoids. Next we find specimens in which there are distinct
canals developed for the axial cords, and the articular facets
of the radials gradually come to exhibit their characteristic
markings. At the same time the sizes of the different radials
become more or less unequal, and the orals relatively less
prominent, though still resting directly on the radials.

Lastly, in the best-developed examples the radials have
strongly marked articular facets—some of them (never all)
being axillary and bearing two arms, while the orals have
entirely disappeared as an integral part of the calyx. In fact,
one would scarcely expect to find them retaining their em-
bryonic condition of a closed pyramid on the top of a calyx,
the radials of which had reached such a high state of deve-
lopment.

The very complete fusion of the orals in the specimens
represented in figs. 8-10 (Pl. XVI.) appears to show that they
remained united until a comparatively late stage, and so
closed in the tentacular vestibule, in the floor of which was
the opening of the mouth.

* Beyrich has pointed out (Crinoideen des Muschelkalks, pp. 43, 44)
that in young individuals of Encrinus the sutures between the basals are
invisible, though those between the radials are distinct enough. This is
the case in nearly all our specimens of Adlagecrinus, both young and old.
It may also happen in the young Lncrinus that one of two arms on
the same axillary may remain rudimentary, while the other develops
first. The inequality in size of the radials in Allagecrinus and of the
arms which they bear is even a lower condition than that noticed by

Beyrich in the young Encrinus. There is no similar stage in the young
of recent Crinoids, in which all the radial plates are equal from the first,

on British Paleozoic Crinoids. 289

The entire absence of orals from the three largest specimens
does not necessarily prove that they were not present during
life. We imagine that in the subsequent stages to those
represented in fig. 7 on Pl. XV. and figs. 8-10 on Pl. XVL.,
the orals were relatively carried inwards, away from the radials,
and separated from them by perisome (just as they are in the
Pentacrinoid larva of Comatu/a) when the arms began to
appear above the radials. Whether the orals ever separated
so as to open the mouth to the exterior, and whether the ring
of perisome forming the ventral disk between them and the
radials was naked, as in Fhizocrinus, or plated, as in Hyo-
crinus, must of course remain undecided. The absence of
any distinct anal system in the calyx of the large specimens
indicates that the anus was situated in a ventral disk, which,
if plated at all, can only have been but lightly so, as in the
Ichthyocrinide. It is true we have no proof that there were
any orals at all in the older specimens; but, judging from the
relative sizes and development of the largest examples with
oral plates, and the smallest without, we think it scarcely
likely that they were entirely unrepresented in the adult. It
is obvious that, if they were united to the radials by perisome,
whether plated or bare, they would be readily lost under con-
ditions that would have had no destructive effect on younger
specimens, in which there was a closer union between the two
rings of plates.

Lastly, we may say a few words about the ornament and
size of the specimens. In the larger individuals, although
visible, the pitted structure is not so decidedly apparent as in
many of the smaller and younger ones. For instance take
figs. 3a and 10a (Pl. XVI.), as compared with figs. 1 a, 2a,
and 26 (Pl. XV.). In the former it absolutely amounts to
ornamentation.

The diameter of the full-grown calyx varies from about
3 millims. to 5 millims.

3. On the Relations of the Species.

Three or four years ago, when our acquaintance with AJ/a-
gecrinus was in a much less advanced state than at present,
specimens were forwarded to Prof. L. G. de Koninck of
Liége, for his opinion as to their identity. He very kindly
referred one of the present writers to the description and
figure of the Poteriocrinus isacobus, 'T. and 'T. Austin *, as
coming nearest in general appearance to the specimens in
question. ‘The identity of our little Scotch fossils with this

* Mon. Recent and Foss. Crinoidea, p. 74, t. 8. f. 4,a & 3.

290 Messrs. P. H. Carpenter and R. Etheridge, Jun.,

species not being so clear as could be desired, Major Austin,
F.G.S., was communicated with for further details of P.
isacobus than are contained in the description given by him-
self and his son. Major Austin very kindly replied that his
specimens had unfortunately been mislaid. We are therefore
unable to institute a close and detailed comparison between
P. isacobus and our Allagecrinus. We propose to call the
latter A. Austini?, Ether. & Carp., as aslight tribute of respect
to Major Austin in connexion with his work on the Carbo-
niferous Crinoidea.

According to Messrs. Austin, “ the dorso-central and periso-
mic plates (of P. ‘sacobus) appear to agree in number with the
typical species” of Poteriocrinus. If this be the case, P.
isacobus is not in the least related to Ad/agecrinus. But in the
figure of it given by the Messrs. Austin there is no indica-
tion whatever of the presence of two rows of plates below the
radials*. We believe the plates which are represented as
forming the greater part of the calyx to be the radials, and
the ring upon which they rest to consist of five closely united
basals, as in our specimens. Above these radials the Messrs.
Austin’s figure is incomplete: but one portion of it appears to
represent the end of a short first brachial which has been dis-
placed ; and upon this there seems to have been an elongated
axillary brachial, each face of which bore a similarly elon-
gated axillary that supported two arms. Hence there were
probably twenty arms.

Mr. Percy Sladen has proposed to establish a new genus,
Dactylocrinust, for the fossils described by Miller and the
Messrs. Austin respectively under the name Poterdocrinus
tenuis. He takes that figured by Messrs. Austin as the type
of his new genus, and calls it D. loreus; while the Poterco-
crinus tenuis, Miller, becomes the Dactylocrinus tenuis of
Sladen, who thus continues :—‘ The P. tsacobus of Messrs.
Austin seems identical with the present species. In any case
it is very much nearer than the fossil figured by them as P.
tenuis.” We regret that we are unable to accept this view of

* The “first series of perisomic plates” of Messrs. Austin are those
which one of us has proposed to call “ under-basals.” This name has
been adopted by Messrs. Wachsmuth and Springer and by Prof. Zittel.
The ‘second series of perisomic plates” are the “ parabasals ” or “ sub-
radials” of the old nomenclature, and the “ basals” of the more rational
modern one. ‘The dorso-central plate described in Potertocrinus by
Messrs. Austin is not recognized by other authors as occurring in this
genus at all.

+ “On the genus Poteriocrinus and Allied Forms,” Proceedings of the
Geological and Polytechnic Society of the West Riding of Yorkshire,
1877, pp. 245-247.

on British Paleozoic Crinotds. 291

Mr. Sladen’s. Whether the P. tenuis, Austin, is identical
with P. tenuis, Miller, does not concern us now; but under-
basals are represented in the type-figures of both authors ;
while in the Messrs. Austin’s figure of P. dsacobus there is no
trace of these plates, and the statement as to their presence is
avery guarded one. Jor the same reason we cannot follow
Messrs. Wachsmuth and Springer* in referring P. isacobus,
Austin, to the sectional group Scaphiocrinus, Hall. We be-
lieve its calyx to be a simple one, consisting of a monocyclic
base supporting five large radials, just as in our own fossil
(Allagecrinus) ; and we are disposed to regard the two types
as congeneric, but as specifically distinct from one another.
In A. Austinid some (1 to 4) of the radiais may be axillary,
bearing arms directly without the intervention of any second
or third radials. These arms may have divided (but there is
no evidence of their having done so) before the fourth joint
above the radials. In A. csacobus, on the other hand, there
seem to have been but five primary arms, which forked on the
third and then again on the fourth joints above the radials.
Without a personal examination of the Messrs. Austin’s ori-
ginal specimen we are naturally unable to say much about it ;
but we venture to think we are correct in referring it to a
type which is much more closely allied to Allagecrinus than
to Poteriocrinus, Dactylocrinus, or Scaphiocrinus.

4, Position of Allagecrinus with respect to other Families of
Crinoidea.

If we are right in believing that the various forms figured
in Pls. XV. and XVI. are merely different stages in the deve-
lopment of one singularly protean species, Allagecrinus must
be regarded as a type of singular interest; for although it is
a Paleozoic Crinoid, the most advanced individuals are entirely
devoid of those characters which are supposed to be specially
distinctive of the Tessellata. According to Miiller’s defini-
tion of the “ Crinoidea articulata,” Allagecrinus is as much
an articulate Crinoid as Pentacrinus. On the other hand, the
younger specimens are truly “ tessellate,” and they retain
the peculiarities which are supposed to be eminently charac-
teristic of the Tessellata until they are considerably larger
and more strongly built than the largest Comatula-larve in
the “ tessellate ”’ stage.

Were we dealing with these specimens only, Allagecrinus

* Revision of the Paleocrinoidea, part i. p. 113, extracted from the
‘Proceedings of the Philadelphia Academy of Natural Sciences,’ Noy. 4,
1879.

292 Messrs. P. H. Carpenter and R. Etheridge, Jun.,

would find its place without difficulty in the family of the
Haplocrinide, the special character of which is the presence
of a dome of oral plates. But we can find no family, either in
the Tessellate or in the Articulate division of the excellent
classification of Prof. Zittel*, to which we can refer the
larger specimens of Allagecrinus. We therefore propose to
institute for its reception the family Allagecrinide, with a
definition essentially the same as that already given for the
renus. The inequality of size of the radials, owing to some
of them being axillary, is a character which sharply distin-
guishes Allagecrinus from the Encrinide, Apiocrinide, and
Pentacrinide, and, in fact, from all the ‘ Articulata,” to which
division of the Miillerian classification it clearly belongs. It
is, however, one of the Paleozoic Crinoids, and, like most
members of that group, retains several embryonic features.
Hence it adds one more to the many proofs which we have
already of the unsatisfactory nature of Miiller’s definitions of
the Articulata and ‘Tessellata.

5. Locality and Horizon.

Allagecrinus Austinit appears to be dispersed generally
throughout the shales and some of the limestones of the Scotch
Carboniferous system. We are acquainted with its distri-
bution in the east of Scotland much better than in the west.
The following may be taken as typical localities :—

No. 16 Mine, Addiewell, near Bathgate, in the decomposed
No. 1 main, or Hurlet Limestone; Howood, near Johnston,
in shale above the Hurlet Limestone; Cateraig Shore, near
Dunbar, and Burlage Quarry, near Dunbar, in shale above
the Skateraw Limestone ; Carlops Quarry, near Carlops, in
shale above the Carlops Limestone; Roscobie, near Dunterm-
line, in shale above the limestone developed there. The
foregoing horizons are all in the Lower Carboniferous Lime-
stone group.

6. On the Divisions of the Crinoidea. Articulata and Tessel-
lata ; Paleocrinoidea and Stomatocrinoidea ; Regularia
and Irreqularia.

Although Miiller’s terms Articulata and Tessellata are
practically meaningless as regards the Crinoids, they have
nevertheless come. to be looked upon as representing two very
distinct sections of the order, viz. the Mesozoic, Tertiary, and
Recent types on the one hand, and the Paleozoic types on
the other. We think, however, that the time has come

* Handb. d. Palaontol. Bd. i, pp. 642-346.

on British Paleozoic Crinodds. 293

when they may be fitly replaced by other names which are
less misleading in their character.

According to Miiller’s original definition *, the articulate
Crinoids are those in which the radii are free down to the
base of the calyx. They do not meet laterally; but the in-
tervals between them are filled by perisome continuous with
that of the ventral surface of the disk, and either bare or
plated. lLiitken has pointed out} that, according to this
definition, the Mesozoic Apiocrinus and Cruettardicrinus can-
not be included among the Articulata. In the former the
second and third radials are united with their fellows all round
the calyx by interradial plates, while in the latter the rays are
united as far as the second arm-joints, either directly or by
interradial plates. The same is the case in many recent
Comatule. On the other hand the rays of the Paleozoic
Zaxocrinus were just as free as those of Pentacrinus ; and this
genus entirely corresponds to Miiller’s definition of the Arti-
culata. The same may be said of other so-called “ tessellate
Paleoerinoids.”

An attempt has also been made to separate the Mesozoic
Articulata from the Paleozoic Tessellata on the ground that
the successive radial plates of the latter are only suturally
united, while in the former group they articulate upon one
another. Here again, however, Guettardicrinus and Apto-
crinus are tessellate though not Paleozoic Crinoids. Further,
in many of the Paleocrinoids the distal faces of the first or
second radials are true articular surfaces in which the fossa
for the insertion of muscles and ligaments are much more
distinctly marked than in the corresponding joints of many
Apiocrinide, or even of recent Pentacrinide.

In spite of Liitken’s well-grounded attack upon the
Miillerian classification, it has recently been entirely adopted
by Prof. Zittel{ on the ground that it “ liefert vortrefflich
abgegrentzte natiirliche Gruppen.” We cannot understand,
however, how Cyathocrinus, Poteriocrinus, Platycrinus, and
Myrtillocrinus can find places in a group a leading charac-
teristic of which is that the plates of the calyx are “‘ unbeweg-
lich durch einfache Nahte verbunden.” It is obvious from
the context that vertical and not horizontal union is meant.
The latter occurs in all Crinoids as far as the first radials,

* “Ueber den Bau des Pentacrinus caput-Meduse,’ Abhandl. d. Ber-
lin. Akad. 1843, p. 25 (of separate copy).

+ “Om Vestindiens Pentacriner med nogle Bemaerkninger om Pen-
tacriner og Sdlilier i Almindelighed,” Videnskabelige Meddelelser fra den
naturhistoriske Forening i Kjobenhayn, 1864, no. 13-16, pp. 220 seg.

{ Op. cit. pp. 842 and 345,

294 Messrs. P. H. Carpenter and R. Etheridge, Jun.,

and a good deal further in many types; while sutural union
in a vertical direction is not exclusively confined to the Pale-
ozoic Crinoids, though it is certainly more common among
them than among the younger forms. But at the same time
there were several genera (and those by no means the least
common) in which the second radials were not only free from
their fellows, but articulated to the first radials, in precisely
the same manner as the corresponding joints of a Pentacrinus
or Comatula.

Other genera, however, are characterized by a peculiarity
which is only met with among the Palzocrinoidea, viz. the
absence of any distinct articular surface on the distal faces of
the first radials, which are not perforated by canals for the
axial cords of the rays. The presence of these canals is
mentioned by Zittel among the characters of the Mesozoic and
younger Crinoids; but their absence is not distinctive of the
Paleocrinoids, as they exist in Platycrinus and in all the
forms with true articular facets on the first radials.

There are several Paleeozoic types, however, in which the
second radials were in contact with the first by semicircular
or horseshoe-shaped surfaces, with or without notches for the
reception of the axial cords at the bottom of the concavity.
This, though a permanent condition in some Paleocrinoids,
is a transitory one in the young Comatula, and, as seen above,
in the young Allagecrinus; and as none of the Neocrinoidea
(if we may so call them), with the doubtful exception of
Comaster, Goldfuss *, retains this peculiarity when mature, it
is, as far as it goes, a good general character for separating
the younger from the older Crinoids.

Another and a better distinction between them is one on
which considerable stress has been recently laid by Messrs.
Wachsmuth and Springer }, who believe that the mouth was
internal in most Paleozoic Crinoids, if not in all of them;
while it is external and suprategminal in the recent forms, for
which they propose the general term Stomatocrinoidea.

That the mouth was internal in the Actinocrinide we have,
of course, not the smallest doubt; but we would point out
that the “ vault”’ of this family, closing in the mouth and all
the covered ambulacra of the body, is a very different struc-
ture from the six “ apical dome-plates ” of the Cyathocrinide
and Ichthyocrinide, which merely close the peristome and
leave the plated ambulacra as much external as those of any

* Linnean Society’s Journal, Zoology, vol. xiii. pp. 454-456.

+ Op. cit. pp. 6, 30. See also “ Notes on the Internal and External
Structure of Paleozoic Crinoids,” by Charles Wachsmuth (‘ American
Journal of Science and Arts,’ 1877, vol. xiv. pp. 117-127 and 181-190),

on British Paleozoic Crinotds. 295

recent Crinoid. We see no reason to believe that the plates
bordering these ambulacra were not movable during life, like
the similar ones on the ambulacra of the arms, so that the
food-grooves were completely open to the exterior. In fact
Wachsmuth * admits that “this might possibly have been
the case in Cyathocrinus towensis ; but I even doubt it here,
as the corresponding plates in other closely-related species,
though arranged upon the same fundamental plan, present
rather an aspect of true vault-pieces.”” Whatever may have
been the case in the Cyathocrinide, we believe that the ventral
disk of the Ichthyocrinide, which was composed of “ a more
or less soft or scaly integument yielding to motion in the body
and arms,” was essentially like that of a recent Crinoid with
movable plates bordering the ambulacra and an irregular
pavement in the interradial areas. We cannot therefore
regard all the Paleocrinoids as having been withont external
food-grooves, as 1s supposed by Wachsmuth and Springer ;
and we think it also quite possible that the apical dome-plates
of the Cyathocrinide and Ichthyocrinide were movable during
life, so that the mouth was open to the exterior. Hence we
do not attach quite so much importance to these two charac-
ters as do Wachsmuth and Springer. But we regard the
presence of the apical dome-plates or of a true vault, and not
the condition of the mouth and food-grooves, as an important
distinction between the older and the younger Crinoids. It
is certainly a more constant one than the absence of axial
canals in the radials, though not altogether universal.
Probably the most constant difference between the Paleo-
zoic and the younger Crinoids is one to which we do not think
attention has yet been drawn. In almost all the- Mesozoic
and recent Crinoids the calyx is perfectly regular and sym-
metrical all round t. There are five equal and similar basals,
upon which rest five equal and similar radiais; and each of
these is in close lateral union with its immediate neighbours
without the intervention of any interradial pieces at all f.
Should there be any interradials in the calyx, as between
adjacent second or third radials, they are not limited to any
special side of the calyx, but are equally distributed all round
it, as in Cluettardicrinus and Apiocrinus. Lastly, if the rays
divide, it is always the third radial that is the axillary joint.

* Paleozoic Crinoids, p. 184.

+ The distortion of the calyx in the Eugeniacrinidee may be left out
of consideration for the present.

{ The partial freedom of the first radials from one another in Bathy-
crinus and Pentacrinus subangularis does not affect the question under
discussion, owing to the absence of interradials in these genera.

296 Messrs. P. H. Carpenter and R. Etheridge, Jun.,

Now in the Paleozoic Crinoids the symmetry of the calyx
is always disturbed by the presence of an anal or azygos side.
This may be indicated simply by the presence of an anal
opening, which notches one of the oral plates, as in Phimo-
crinus, Haplocrinus, &e., or by the presence of a single anal
plate, as in Belemnocrinus, which in other respects has such
a close resemblance to the recent Rhizocrinus, or more com-
monly by the fact that one of the basals and two of the
radials differ from their fellows in size and shape so as to
give room for the system of anal plates which separates two
of the rays, or in some similar manner.

Even in cases where the radials are closely united all round
and the general contour of the calyx is perfectly regular, a
want of symmetry is indicated by the inequality in the
numbers of basal and radial plates. This is the case, for
example, in Hucalyptocrinus, which has five radials but only
four basals.

Lastly, in those Paleozoic Crinoids which have divided
rays the position of the axillary joint is by no means so fixed
as in the younger types. The rays may fork on the first
radial, as in Allagecrinus ; or the axillary may be as many as
six joints beyond it, as in Potertocrinus radiatus, or in any
intermediate position.

Taking all the above facts into consideration, we are-in-
clined to think that the Palzocrinoids do constitute a group
that is distinguished from the more modern types by an
assemblage of very definite characters, perhaps the most con-
stant of which is the distinction between the perfectly sym-
metrical calyx of the Mesozoic and recent forms, and the more
or less irregular one of the Paleocrinoids. We suggest
therefore that the two groups should be distinguished as the
Paleocrinoidea (Wachsmuth) and Neocrinoidea (nob.), or as
hregularia and Regularia. The old terms Articulata and
Tessellata are meaningless, as we have shown above, while
the name “Stomatocrinoidea,” proposed by Wachsmuth, is
long and cumbersome; and we are by no means sure that
some of the Paleocrinoids did not have an external oral
opening.

Whatever name be adopted for the Paleozoic Crinoids, they
are of the highest interest morphologically, owing to their
presenting so many embryonic characters. These may be
briefly summarized as follows :—

1. The great development of the orals, which sometimes
form a closed pyramid.

2. The frequent presence of a more or less perfect vault

on British Paleozoic Crinoids. 297

(in the absence of a closed oral pyramid), which covers in
either the whole of the ventral side or only the peristome.

3. The want of symmetry, indicated by the presence between
two rays of one or more special “ anal plates.”

4. The great development of the calyx as compared with
that of the arms.

5. The frequent absence of a distinct articulation between
the first and second radials, and of axial canals within the
joints of the rays and arms.

EXPLANATION OF THE PLATES.
PLATE XV.
Adult specimens.

Fig. 1. Nine-armed calyx with two brachials. Carlops Quarry, near
Peebles. a, side view, showing the small radial, which bears
one arm only; 4, view of the calyx from above, showing the
articular faces of the radials.

Fig. 2. Calyx and lower brachials of another nine-armed example, the
most complete yet found. Carlops Quarry. qaand 3, side views,
the former showing the single one-armed radial plate ; c, ventral
aspect of the same specimen, showing the second and third bra-
chials or arm-joints of three arms.

Fig. 3. Projection of the calyx and lower brachials of the original of
fig. 2.

Fig. 4. The basal cup as seen from above; the sutures are quite oblite-

rated. Carlops Quarry.

Fig. 5. Terminal face of a stem-joint, showing rim-like margin, small
canal, and central granulation. Carlops Quarry.

Fig. 6, Calyx with only three axillary radials and one of the first bra-
chials still preserved. Carlops Quarry. a, ventral aspect of the
calyx; 6, side view, showing the two adjacent simple radials
and one first brachial.

Intermediate specimen.

Fig. 7. Calyx and upper stem-joints of an irregular example, with small
orals and unequally-developed radials. Near Carluke. a, from
the side; 6, from above; the radial on the right bears a very
rudimentary brachial.

N.B.—The figures represent the specimens as magnified nine times,

PuaTE XVI.
Young specimens,

Fig. 1. Calyx of a very young individual, with unequally-developed
radials and depressed oral pyramid. Catcraig, near Dunbar.
x 25. a, from the side; 6, from above.

Fig. 2. Calyx of another very young specimen, with a large dome of oral
plates and very small arm-openings. Whitebaulks, near Lin-
lithgow. x 25. a, from the side; 6, from above.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. vii. 22

298 On a new Longicorn Beetle from Java.

Fig. 3. Calyx of a somewhat older example, with a depressed oral pyra-
mid; three of the radials have distinct arm-facets. No. 16 Mine,
Addiewell. x 25. a, from the side; 6, from above.

Fig. 4. Calyx of a more advanced individual, with a higher and deeply-
grooved oral pyramid and more marked arm-facets. Catcraig,
near Dunbar. X 28.

Fig. 5. Calyx of a similar specimen, with equally developed radials and a
single oral tubercle ; the five grooves separating the orals are well
shown. Burlage Quarry, near Dunbar. x 23.

Fig. 6. Calyx of a similar example, in which the centre of the oral pyra-
mid has been broken away, leaving a rounded hiatus; portions
of the grooves again visible.

Fig. 7. Calyx of a larger specimen, with a low deeply-grooved oral pyra-
mid and large arm-openings. Catcraig, near Dunbar. xX 24.
a, from the side; 6, from above.

Fig. 8. Three views of the calyx of a still more advanced individual, with
unequally developed radials and a relatively small oral pyramid.
Burlage Quarry, near Dunbar. x 26. a, from the side, showing
a small radial; 6, from the side, showing the large axillary
radial ; c, from above, showing the reduced condition of the orals.

Fig. 9. Calyx of a specimen in which three radials have distinct articular
facets, whilst another has no facet, even of the simplest kind,
and there is only an imperfect one on the fifth. _Howood, near
Johnstone. xX 24. a, from the side; 0, from above.

Fig. 10. Calyx of a much pitted specimen, with a small and low oral
pyramid and well-marked articular facets on all the radials.
Carlops Quarry, near Carlops. Xx 25. a, from the side; 6, from
above.

XXVIUI.—Deseription of a new Longicorn Beetle from Java.
By W. L. Distant.

Tus fine Coleopteron was represented by a single example
only in an entomological collection made by my friend
Baron A. von Hiigel in the neighbourhood of Kederi, Java.
Mr: C. O. Waterhouse of the British Museum, to whom I ex-
hibited it, and who kindly took some trouble with me in ascer-
taining it be an undescribed form, is desirous of figuring the
same in his illustrated work, ‘ Aid to the Identification of
Insects,’ and has requested me to describe it forthwith.

Pachyteria Hiigeli, n. sp.

Glabrate; cyaneous ; head, first to seventh joints of antenna,
a little less than basal half of elytra, and legs ochraceous ; four
apical joints of antennz dull black; eyes cyaneous and gla-
brate. Lateral margins of body beneath faintly clothed with
greyish pubescence.

The head has a distinct, central, longitudinal incision on the

Mr. F. P. Pascoe on new Neotropical Curculionide. 299

vertex, with the base above somewhat faintly obscured with
cyaneous. Thorax wider than the head ; lateral margins sub-
ampliated, rounded, and transversely sulcate ; base and apex
constricted and transversely sulcate; disk finely and obscurely
punctate, with a faint central raised longitudinal line. Scutel-
lum finely punctate, with a central longitudinal impression.
Elytra obscurely punctate, with eight fine longitudinal strie—
two subsutural, four on disk, and two near margins; these
striz are most distinct on the basal ochraceous portion, and
become more evanescent and obscure towards apex. Proster-
num transversely striate and very sparingly punctate ; meta-
sternum coarsely punctate.

Long. 42 millims.

This species is allied to P. bicolor, Parry, but differs by the
much more rounded sides of the thorax, the legs entirely
ochraceous, ce.

XXIX.—New Neotropical Curculionide.—Part V.
By Francis P. Pascor, F.L.S. &e.

LEPTOPIN®. CRYPTORHYNCHIN#.
Rhigus vespertilio. Conotrachelus eximius.
Cydianirus ornatus. Cyphorhynchus rugosus.
Dacnirus, n. g. scapulatus.
—— flexuosus. Hdesius, n. g.
obesus.
HyLopin. Barisses, n. 2.

rufipennis.

H id ors
larger Analcis fasciatus

— circumductus.

striatus.
ERIRHININZA.
c PYROPINZE.
Ochetina, n. ¢. 5 cr
uniformis. yropus pusillus,
CHOLINE CALANDRIN2.

Dionychus conciliatus. Ithaura nitida.

Rhigus vespertilio.
kt. oblongus, compressus, dense griseo-squamosus, utrinque vitta
umbrina irregulari notatus; prothorace angusto, tuberculo late-
rali instructo ; elytris singulatim tuberculatis, apicibus productis.
Long. 7 lin.

Hab. Brazil.

Oblong, compressed posteriorly, almost wholly covered with
greyish scales, the prothorax and elytra with an irregular
umber-brown stripe on each side; rostrum very broadly
dilated at the tip, three grooves in front and a curved deeper

one on each side; antenne scaly and setose; scape rather
22%

300 Mr. F. P. Pascoe on new Neotropical Curculionide.

long; second joint of the funicle a little longer than the first,
the next four turbinate, the last longer than any of the pre-
ceding four; club elliptic; prothorax narrowed, longer than
broad, the disk unequal, the sides deeply corrugated and
having an obtuse tubercle just before the middle, ocular lobes
very prominent; scutellum raised, small, rounded; elytra
much compressed posteriorly, abruptly declivous at the apex,
above the slight preapical callus a stout conical tubercle, a
smaller one on each side of the disk nearer the shoulder, the
latter prolonged into a horizontal conical tubercle ; body be-
neath and legs with closely placed scales of grey speckled with
brown.

A very distinct species; an example in the British Museum
bears Dupont’s catalogue name here adopted.

Cydianirus ornatus.

C. late ovatus, squamulis flavis sat dense vestitus, supra nigro-
maculatus ; prothorace integro, leviter punctato; elytris brevius-
culis, subtiliter striato-punctatis. Long. 43 lin.

Hab. Brazil.

Broadly ovate, almost wholly covered with rather closely
set yellow scales, above with black spots; head convex in
front, black posteriorly ; rostrum triangularly flattened an-
teriorly ; antennee with yellow scales at the base, gradually
greyish and pilose towards the tip; funicle with the second
joint nearly twice as long as the first; club elongate, slender,
fusiform ; prothorax transverse, slightly contracted at the
base, rounded at the sides, four black spots on the disk and
one on each side; scutellum oblong; elytra rather short,
much broader at the base than the prothorax, striate-punctate,
punctures masked by the scales, each elytron with thirteen
round very distinct black spots; body beneath and legs closely
covered with pale yellow and saffron-coloured scales ; first
abdominal suture straight.

This species, of which I have only seen the one example
in my own collection, bears a striking resemblance to the
Madagascar Stigmatrachelus ornatus, but differs entirely in
the rostrum, antenne, &c.

DACNIRUS.

Antenne scapo brevissimo. Prothorax lobis ocularibus obsoletis.
Cetera ut in Rhigo.

The sole exponent of this genus at present has a very diffe-
rent aspect from any thing in Rhzgus or in Cydianirus ; but to
the latter it might perhaps have been referred but for the

Mr. F. P. Pascoe on new Neotropical Curculionide. 301

strongly mucronate anterior tibie, which furnish the princi-
pal, if not the only, character differentiating these two genera.
The scape does not extend beyond the short, almost transverse,
portion of the scrobe.

Dacnirus flexuosus.

D. oblongus, flavo-squamosus, prothorace scutelloque fusco-brun-
neis, illo confertim granulato-punctato; elytris leviter striato-
punctatis, plagis duabus sinuatis transversim notatis. Long.
32 lin,

Hab. Brazil.

Oblong, mostly covered with sulphur-yellow scales ; head
in front scaleless, brown, closely punctured ; rostrum slightly
compressed, strongly curved anteriorly and broadly grooved,
densely covered with yellow scales; antenne with setulose
scales at the base ; first joint of the funicle short, second twice
as long; club elongate, ovate; prothorax about equal in
length and breadth, scaleless, chocolate-brown, coarsely and
closely granulate-punctate, the sides rounded; scutellum
oblong, brown; elytra at the base nearly twice as broad as
the prothorax, the shoulders slightly prominent, narrowed at
the apex, striate-punctate, two brown, very irregular, flexuous
or sinuate transverse patches at equal distances from each
other and from the base and apex, but not extending to the
outer margin; metasternum rather short; first abdominal
suture curved.

I owe my specimen of this species to Mr. Fry, who has
taken it near Rio.

HYPNIDEUS.

Rostrum breve, crassum ; scrobes oblique, antemediane. Antenne
breviuscule ; clava a funiculo sat distincta. Oculi laterales,
ovati, infra subacuminati. Prothorax basi rectus. Hlytra de-
missa, humeris obliquis, ad latera tuberculo instructa. Femora
valida, dente parvo instructa; tibiw sulcate, intus bisinuate;
tarsi normales ; wngues connati, Abdomen sutura prima arcuata.

Allied to Sternuchus, but differentiated by the depressed
elytra not rising above the level of the prothorax. The club
of the antennz is also clearly marked off from the last joint
of the funicle. One of my specimens is labelled Clinorhynchus
hetlipoides, Jek.

Hypnideus circumductus.

H. subellipticus, niger, vitta lata dorsali utrinque (postice ad
suturam ducta) et plaga apicali albo-squamosis ornatus, Long.
6 lin.

Hab. Paya.

302 Mr. F. P. Pascoe on new Neotropical Curculionidae.

Subelliptic or somewhat ovate, glossy black, a broad stripe
of white scales beginning behind the eye and continued on
the back on each side of the prothorax and elytra to near the
preapical callus, joining its fellow at the sutura, at the apex a
patch of white scales; head and basal half of the rostrum
coarsely punctured ; antenne pitchy, first joint of the funicle
as long as the three next together, the terminal joints slightly
setulose, club densely tomentose ; prothorax slightly broader
at the base than long, the apex tubular, the sides rounded,
closely punctured, an oblong cavity behind the apex; scutel-
lum subcordate; elytra broadest behind the base, abruptly
declivous behind, coarsely seriate-punctate, the intervals
transversely ridged, preapical callus not prominent, apex of
each elytron rounded; body beneath and legs with small
scattered setule.

OCHETINA.

Rostrum gracile, arcuatum; scrobes premediane, subrecte. An-
tenne tenues; funiculus sexarticulatus. Oculc reniformes,
transyersi, grosse granulati. Prothorax transversus, basi rotun-
datus. Scutellum invisum. EHlytra breviuscula, humeris promi-
nulis. Abdomen segmentis tertio quartoque brevissimis, segmento
secundo ad latera angulo producto. /¢mora subclavata, mutica ;
tibie perparum arcuate, intus sulcate, apice mucronate; tarsi
elongati, lineares, articulo penultimo integro ; wngues liberi.

In its linear tarsi this genus agrees with Bagous; but its
long slender rostrum and entire propectus will at once diffe-
rentiate it. The peculiar structure of the tibisee (grooved for
the reception of the tarsi in repose) is probably unique in this
family.

Ochetina uniformis.
O. ovata, fusca, squamositate grisea fere omnino tecta; rostro cas-
taneo, denudato. Long. 27 lin.

Hab. Amazon (Ega?).

Ovate, dark brown, almost everywhere covered with a
greyish squamosity or crust; rostrum chestnut, shining,
much longer than the prothorax and well curved; antenne
ferruginous; two basal joints of the funicle longer than the
rest together, the first shorter and stouter than the second ; club
elliptical ; prothorax rounded at the sides and very slightly
at the base, irregularly punctured; scutellum not apparent ;
elytra a little broader than the prothorax, striate-punctate,
the apex narrowly rounded; tibie with a broad groove,
clothed with short hairs, passing to the inner margin, and
receiving the tarsi in repose; sterna and abdomen rather
remotely punctured.

Mr. F. P. Pascoe on new Neotropical Curculionide. 303

Dionychus conciliatus.
D. oblongo-obovatus, niger, supra griseo-squamosus ; elytris singu-
latim lineis quinque elevatis, nitide nigris, denudatis, aliis qua-
tuor leviter granulatis instructis. Long. 8 ln,

Hab. Brazil.

Oblong-obovate, black, with pale greyish scales; rostrum
as long as the prothorax, carinate, and closely punctured
throughout; antenne pitchy, setulose; first joimt of the
funicle as long as the three following together; prothorax
slightly broader than long, finely granulate, the intervals
covered with minute greyish scales ; scutellum slightly trans-
verse, convex, finely punctured ; elytra gradually narrowing
from the base, each with five lines, smooth, glossy black,
densely scaly between, but with a finely granulated line par-
tially dividing the scaly portion; body beneath and legs fur-
nished with greyish setul, on the latter more dispersed.

Alhed to D. parallelogrammus, but differing principally in
the elytra, which have, including the outer margin, only
five raised lines on each instead of ten; the granulated lines,
confined to the basal half of the elytra, may be considered
the representatives of the uniform lines present in the former
species.

Conotrachelus eximius.

C. ovatus, nitide fuscus, supra lineis annulisque silaceo-squamosis
ornatus; elytris modice convexis, sat fortiter striato-punctatis ;
femoribus (basi apiceque nigris exceptis) luteis. Long. 4 lin.

Hab. Sarayacu, Macas.

Ovate, dark glossy brown, with very distinct lines and
rings of silaceous scales; rostrum much longer than the pro-
thorax, curved, with two punctured grooves on each side;
scrobes commencing at about three fourths from the base ;
antennee ferruginous; funicle with the three basal joints
elongate, second longest, the rest turbinate; club ovate, dis-
tinctly four-jointed ; eyes nearly meeting beneath; prothorax
narrowed anteriorly, the sides of the posterior half parallel,
irregularly and closely punctured, a looped line posteriorly
prolonged into a single one on each side; scutellum oblong,
elevated ; elytra nearly twice as broad as the prothorax at
the base, seriate-punctate, punctures rather coarse, an irre-
‘ular ring on each shoulder, another close to the apex, between
the two and behind the middle a slightly flexuous linear band ;
mesosternum elevated, triangular; second abdominal segment
only a little longer than the third or fourth, suture separating
it from the first slightly arched; legs elongate; femora glossy

304 Mr. F. P. Pascoe on new Neotropical Curculionide.

luteous yellow, base and apex black ; tibie and tarsi blackish,
with a dull luteous tint.

A very distinct species, in its coloration resembling some
of the Hilipoda from the same locality. In any future dis-
memberment of this group it would probably be found to be

congeneric with C. corallifer.

Cyphorhynchus rugosus.

C. ovatus, fuscus, squamositate grisea adspersus, supra tubercu~
latus : prothorace elytrisque basi linea brevi obliqua alba ornatis,
illo apice valde producto. Long. 34 lin.

Hab. Eiga.

Ovate, dark brown, with a sparse greyish squamosity ;
rostrum much shorter than the prothorax, constricted at the
base, at first compressed, but becoming broader to the tip ;
prothorax very irregular, a narrow slightly emarginate lobe
projecting beyond the head, its centre carinate, the disk with
two approximate mamilliform tubercles in the middle; scu-
tellum oblong; elytra subcordiform, much broader at the base
than the prothorax, shoulders oblique, rather abruptly decli-
vous posteriorly, the back and sides with tubercles varying
in size, the largest much compressed, the intervals with
coarsely-impressed punctures, at the base, on each side of the
scutellum, a short oblique line of white scales continuous with
a duller line crossing the posterior angle of the prothorax, the
apex with a round yellowish-white spot on each side; meso-
sternum moderately elevated ; abdomen dark brown, opaque ;
tibia much compressed.

Cyphorhynchus was a genus originally propounded by
Schonherr, but which he afterwards merged into Conotrache-
lus, from which, in my opinion, it essentially differs in its
deformed or misshapen rostrum. C. squalidus, Boh., and
C. singularis, Gyll., are evidently strangers to the genus.

Cyphorhynchus scapulatus.

C. oblongo-ovatus, fuscus, squamositate obscura adspersus, supra
minus tuberculatus; prothorace apice elevato, vix producto;
elytris ad humeros linea arcuata albido-squamosa-notatis. Long.
34 lin.

Hab. Para.

Oblong-oval, dark brown, with a sparse dull squamosity ;
rostrum compressed throughout, irregularly carinate ; antenne
pale ferruginous; prothorax narrow, closely punctured, the
apex elevated and slightly emarginate above, somewhat de-
pressed or hollowed anteriorly, two conical approximate

Mr. F. P. Pascoe on new Neotropical Curculionide. 305

tubercles in the middle; scutellum ovate; elytra much
broader than the prothorax at the base, the sides subparallel,
shoulders shortly rounded, a line of white scales at the base,
curving round the shoulders, and nearly meeting its fellow
at the suture behind the scutellum, tubercles fewer and
smaller, with punctures in the intervals; body beneath dark
brown; mesosternum elevated and prominent; tibizee mode-
rately compressed.

Differs from the preceding in the prothorax not prolonged
at the apex, the oblong elytra, and the more slender and
less compressed tibiee.

EDESIUS.

Rostrum validum, basi subito arcuatum; scrobes infra rostrum cito
desinentes. Oculi laterales. Prothorax paryus, lobis ocularibus
apiceque productis, basi bisinuatus. H/ytra ampla, in medio ele-
vata, lateribus carinatis. Pectus profunde canaliculatum. Oowve
anticee basi contigus. Mesosternum depressum; femora infra
dentata ; tibie arcuate, apice uncinate ; wngues apice fissiles.

This genus would probably be referable to Conotrachelus
if it did not constitute, as Lacordaire has observed, “ not one
but many genera.” Schénherr gives as its type C. diaconitus,
and as one of its characters, a “‘ long, linear, and often fili-
form ”’ rostrum, only the base of which can be received in the
pectoral canal, which is bounded behind by the anterior coxe.
In this genus, owing to its comparative shortness and the
depressed mesosternum, the rostrum can be retained to its
full extent. The species described below has, at the first
glance, much the appearance of Cionus thapsus.

Edesius obesus.

E. breviter ovatus, squamositate albida griseo-varia indutus, supra
ineequalis, tuberculatus. Long. 33 lin.

Hab. Para.

Shortly ovate, covered with a whitish squamosity, varied or
clouded with greyish, above irregular and tuberculate; ros-
trum ferruginous, with a carina on its lower third, scrobes
commencing near the apex; antenne pale ferruginous, the
two basal joints of the funicle equal and elongate, the rest
shortly obconic ; club ovate, distinctly jointed ; eyes in repose
covered by the ocular lobes; prothorax transversely conic,
gibbous in the middle, hollowed out at the sides and base;
scutellum oblong, elevated ; elytra twice as broad at the base
as the prothorax, very convex, shoulders prominent, apex
rounded, indistinctly subseriate-punctate, the third interstice
with three tubercles, the middle one greatly elevated and lon-

306 Mr. F. P. Pascoe on new Neotropical Curculionide.

gitudinally compressed, the fifth interstice with three smaller
tubercles, two of which are basal, the side with a carina
extending from the shoulder to near the apex; sterna and
legs closely covered with greyish scales; abdomen black,
with scattered punctures, each bearing a scale.

BARISSES.

Rostrum breve, validum; serobes oblique, infra rostrum cito desi-
nentes. Qculi majusculi, rotundati, fortiter granulati. An-
tenne median ; funiculus septemarticulatus. Prothorax trans-
versus, lobis ocularibus prominulis. Scutellum majusculum.
Elytra breviuscula, convexa. ima pectoralis inter coxas inter-
medias terminata, apice elevata. Abdomen segmentis tribus
intermediis equalibus, sutura prima recta. Femora sublinearia,
subtus sulcata et dente armata; tbi@ compresse, extus recte
carinate, apice mucronate ; wngues liberi.

The short rostrum, round eyes, large scutellum, sulcated
femora, and tibia with a straight carina or shortly-produced
ridge along the outer margin, are characters which will at
once distinguish this genus from Pseudomus, to which, how-

ever, it cannot be considered a very close ally.

Barisses rufipennis.

B. breviter ovatus, castaneus, elytris valde convexis, rufescentibus.

Long. 33 lin.

Hab, Parana.

Shortly ovate, chestnut-brown, the elytra rufescent (or,
under a strong lens, inclining to ferrugimous), with sparse
ale silaceous hairs; rostrum shorter than the head, much
stouter towards the apex, broad and very slightly convex in
front, and sparingly punctured; antenne pale ferruginous,
two basal joints of the funicle equal in length, the last closely
attached to the club; eyes approximate; prothorax shortly
conic, slightly rounded at the sides, deeply pitted with oblong,
mostly coalescing punctures, the intervals forming narrow,
longitudinal, short, glossy ridges; scutellum round; elytra
oblong-cordate, much broader than the prothorax, and very
convex, deeply striate-punctate, the interstices glossy and
somewhat rugose ; body beneath and legs glossy yellowish
ferruginous, with approximate punctures, each bearing a pale
silaceous hair, the punctures on the legs more elongate.

Analcis fasciatus.

A. sat anguste ellipticus, nitide niger, fasctis fulvo-squamosis orna-
tus; prothorace latitudine longitudini equali; elytris seriatim
punctatis. Long. 2 lin.

Hab. Amazon (Kga ?).

Mr. F. P. Pascoe on new Neotropical Curculionide. 307

Rather narrowly elliptical, glossy black, banded with ful-
vous scales ; rostrum shorter than the head, stout, punctured ;
antenne ferruginous, funicle short and stout, club small; pro-
thorax not longer than broad, obsoletely punctured, band
before the middle of transversely-set scales bounded on each
side by a stripe, curved downwards, of similar scales; scutel-
lum moderately large; elytra broader at the base, normally
convex, serlate-punctate, punctures small and remote, on each
elytron four bands (not meeting at the suture), the basal not
extending beyond the shoulders; body beneath and legs
punctured, each puncture bearing a small white scale.

Analcis has hitherto been confined to North America.
Dr. Leconte records seven species ; but he adopts Say’s name
of Tyloderma (it has no such character) in strict conformity
(much to the detriment of science) with those who insist upon
an absolute rule of priority. Schénherr’s name Analcis was
published in 1837, and has been in use ever since; Say’s
name appeared in 1831, in what work is not mentioned.

Analcis striatus.

A, anguste ellipticus, ereus, squamulis elongatis albis parcissime
adspersus ; prothorace latitudine longiore ; elytris fortiter striatis.
Long. 23 lin.
flab. Minas Geraes.

Narrow elliptic, brassy brown, nearly scaleless; rostrum
not longer than the head, finely punctured ; antenne ferrugi-
nous, second and third joints of the funicle nearly equal in
length, the first longer than either ; club broadly ovate ; pro-
thorax longer than broad, obsoletely punctured; scutellum
triangular ; elytra rather elongate, strongly striate-punctate,
the punctures large and quadrangular; metasternum and first
abdominal segment coarsely punctured ; legs pitchy.

The absence of squamose bands and the striated elytra will
at once distinguish this species.

Pyropus pusillus.

P. breviter ovatus, glaber, cyaneus, nitidus, antennis piceis; scu-
tello subtriangulari, nigro. Long. 1 lin.

Hab. Jamaica.

Shortly ovate, smooth, blue or inclining to violet, shining ;
antenne pitchy. Allied to P. sapphirinus, but differs in its
much smaller size, wholly blue colour (except the antenne),
prothorax comparatively more strongly punctured, and shorter
scutellum.

Gyllenhal, in his description of the species, the only one

308 Mr. H. J. Carter on the Kunker Formation

then known, says “ Scutellum nullum ;”’ but in characterizing
the genus he rightly says ‘‘ Scutellum minutum, punctiforme.”

Ithaura nitida.

I, oblongo-elliptica, vix depressa, silaceo-brunnea, nitida; rostro
cum capite inter oculos carinato et rude punctato. Long. 33 lin.

Hab, Parana.

Oblong elliptic, scarcely depressed, glossy yellowish brown ;
rostrum shorter than the prothorax, a central carina at its
base, commencing between the eyes, with three rows of coarse
punctures on each side; antennz short and stout, slightly
pubescent ; prothorax longer than broad, abruptly constricted
at the apex, remotely and rather finely punctured; scutellum
small, somewhat transverse, rounded ; elytra delicately striate,
the striz marked with coarse oblong punctures, the alternate
interstices raised posteriorly ; tibiee short, seriately setulose ;
tarsi very small.

The type species of this genus is figured and described in
the ‘Journal of the Linnean Society,’ vol. xi. pl. vi. fig. 2,
pp. 215, 216. It is a longer and proportionally narrower
insect than this species, differently sculptured, and with a
rather dull varnished appearance. The genus is allied to
Aphyoda, another singular form, and both approximating to
the group of which our too well-known Calandra granaria
is an example; but the head deeply constricted behind the
eyes, and the small portion which lies between them, seem
alone to warrant their separation as a group apart.

Of some of the species described in these papers coloured
figures will be given in Mr. C. Waterhouse’s ‘ Aid to the
Identification of Insects.’

XXX.—On the Kunker Formation of the Alluvium in India
compared with the Flint Formation tn the Chalk of Eng-
land. By H. J. Carrer, F.R.S. &c.

Preruars De la Beche and Elie de Beaumont were the first
to insist more especially on the necessity of studying the pre-
sent to interpret the past in geology—thus avoiding all theory
and speculation in establishing facts which, if pursued truth-
fully, offer great attraction to the scientific mind, but, if other-
wise, cannot fail to do the opposite.

Under such views I venture to compare the formation of
the nodular and so-called “sheet” kunker of India with

of the Alluvium in India. 309
that of flints and chert in the Upper Chalk and Greensand

of England respectively—bearing in mind that the former is
in alluvial deposits and calcareous, and that the latter are
parts of the Cretaceous system and siliceous.

Among the “ Post-tertiary and Recent Formations” of
India mentioned in Medlicott and Blanford’s ‘ Manual of the
Geology of India,’ 1879 (vol. i. p. 371), it is stated :—that kun-
ker is ‘‘concretionary carbonate of lime,” most commonly
presenting itself “‘in nodules of an irregular shape from half
an inch to three or four inches in diameter,” as well as in
“thick beds, in the alluvium,” ... . “ often filling cracks
in the latter and the older rocks” beneath (p. 381); that “ at
Bombay the alluvial deposits consist of blue and yellowish-
brown clay,” of which the former “ contains small grains
and nodules of kunker,” while the latter ‘ abounds with it
in large masses”’ (p. 424) ; and, lastly, that the regur, or black
soil of India generally, which is argillaceous, usually, when
more than about 6 to 10 feet deep, passing downwards into
brown clay, also ‘‘abounds in kunker”’ (p. 431).

The late Captain Newbold observes of the regur, that
“from Courtney to Yailbenchi, four miles, the plain continues
as before, covered with a substratum of regur, or black
cotton-soil of India, to a depth of 1 to 18 feet, in many places
resting immediately on gneiss and granite, in others on an
intervening bed of calcareous deposit somewhat resembling
the travertin of Italy, though more nodular, and called by the
natives ‘kunker.’ It is burnt by them for lime. Like rows
of flints in chalk it is seen also in the lower layers of the
regur often with sharp projecting spicule of carbonate of
lime, which would have been broken off had the nodules been
drift-pebbles.” (‘ Notes, principally Geological, on the Tract
between Bellary and Bijapore,’ by Captain Newbold, F.R.S.
&e., Madras Army. Reprinted in Carter’s ‘ Geological
Papers on Western India,’ 1857, p. 308.)

In the same compilation, under the head of “ Kunker,” in
the index (p. 780), will be found references to all that had
been stated of kunker up to that time, viz. 1857; while at
pp. 159 and 700 are my own accounts respectively of the
kunker formation as it occurs at Bombay and over India
generally. ‘They are as follows :—“ There is a feature of this
clay (‘Geology of the Island of Bombay,’ 1850), however,
which is very remarkable, viz. the kunker formation. This,
which consists of concretionary limestone, occurs massive or
scattered throughout the clay in small isolated portions. In
its massive state it is found in large boulders or in continuous
tracts, reposing on the freshwater strata or igneous rocks

310 Mr. H. J. Carter on the Kunker Formation

beneath, and in this state is compact and cavernous, enclosing
portions of the clay in its cavities &c. in which it has been
formed; or as a conglomerate with sandy or gravelly detritus
from the igneous rocks, and the remains of small shells, assi-
milating it to the sandy beaches [littoral concrete]. Those
portions which are scattered throughout the clay are more or
less round, like Septaria; very uniform in structure, and
some so pure that they wholly dissolve in nitric acid. They
are generally of a blue colour, but sometimes quite white and
identical with chalk. Like Septaria, also, they are irregular
and almost invariably envelope the remains of some organic
matter, such as pieces of reed, wood, the remnants of crab-
shells, &c., which are very frequently removed, and leave
nothing but their moulds in the centre of the concretions.
This substance also accumulates in the interior of shells and
almost always fills the cavities of pholadine tubes which have
been formed in the clay. It does not always, however, enve-
lope organic remains, but may be seen appended to them in a
globular form—to the pincher of a crab-claw, for instance.
Occasionally it may be seen, in a vertical section of the clay,
in the state of a number of isolated particles or concretionary
nuclei round a piece of wood, as if in process of forming a
nodule, not by successive layers, but by the increase of sub-
stance round different centres.”

As much the same statement is given in my ‘ Summary of
the Geology of India’ (1858), I need not repeat it here, nor
add more than that the surface of the regur generally is over-
spread with the nodules of kunker which have been weathered
out of it, and that, in a great many parts of the Southern
Mahratta country (according to Lieut. Aytoun, Geol. Papers,
op. cit. p. 889), it occurs continuously at the bottom of the
regur, in the form of a conglomerate, which he terms “ sheet
kunker.”’

Although remnants of organic matter in the kunker do not
appear to have become fossilized generally, yet Captain W.
T. Nicholls, formerly of the 24th Regiment, Madras Native
Infantry, who was a very good and accurate observer, states
with reference to some on the black soil, which he discovered
in Central India near Narrainpoor, about 17 miles south-east
of Saugor, as follows, viz. :—“‘ I found fossils in three spots
on the surface of the regur soil. At the first spot, fragments
of dicotyledonous wood with a fragment of palm, one frag-
ment of fossil bone, and a fossil ? palm-seed, converted into
tuffaceous lime [kunker]. At the second spot, fragments of
large bones strewed on the surface of the black regur soil, and
one or two fragments of fossil wood, together with irregular

of the Alluvium in India. 311

flat pieces of tuffaceous limestone loose on the surface. These
bones are silicified.” . . . “The third spot is about 150 yards
from the last; and here I found dicotyledonous wood only.
. . . They lie on the black regur soil; and I see nowhere
else that they could have come from but out of it” (Geol.
Papers, op. cit. p. 766). It would therefore appear that, in
some parts, the organic remains of the regur have become
transformed into kunker, which, under the circumstances,
does not appear extraordinary.

Thus we have the kunker lying in loose nodules on the
surface, occurring in seams like flints ; appended to or enclosing
organic remains, or in the form of layers embodying hetero-
geneous material ; sometimes transforming the organic remains
of the regur into its own substance. Hence, if we were to
substitute the terms “ flint”? and “chert” for the nodular
and so-called “sheet”? kunker, the description would apply
equally well, mutatis mutandis, to the Upper Chalk and
Greensand.

Now, as regards the flints and chert, I happen to be living
on the New Red Sandstone (at Budleigh-Salterton, Devon)
where the surface is covered generally with the silicified
débris of the Upper Chalk and Greensand which once over-
lay it in their integrity ; and I observe that, together with other
fossils, there are a great number of sponges, especially belong-
ing to the Lithistina (Prof. Zittel’s “ Megamorina” and “ 'Te-
tracladina”’). Taking one of these I find :—l1st, that a flint
may be appended to it; 2ndly, that the flint may enclose it;
drdly, that the flint may have so extended into it as to oblite-
rate all trace of the structure of the Lithistid; 4thly, that a
mould only of the Lithistid structure may remain ¢n the in-
truding flint ; further, that in most cases the flint is homo-
geneous and nodular, while, on the other hand, the fragments
of chert are heterogeneously composed and tabular—indica-
ting that the former was more exclusively concretionary than
the latter. On the surface of some enclosed specimens of
Lithistina that I have knocked out from flint, the stelliform
discoid stage in the development of the lithistid spicule re-
mains on the surface, showing that nothing more than the
thin, circular, discoid one had disappeared, which is a com-
mon occurrence even among recent specimens.

Apart, however, from the siliceous material which we call
“flint,” there may be a simple silicification of a calcareous
shell, which would be a facsimile of the original form. Or, as
J have shown in the sponge-spicules from the Carboniferous
Limestone near Glasgow in Scotland, and Sligo in Ireland,
respectively, the original material of the organic remains may

312 M. A. Milne-Edwards on the Carcinological

undergo more than one change: thus as these spicules are
now composed of chalcedony and yet present the rhombohedral
excavations of calcite on their surface, they must previously
have been carbonate of lime; and we know from their forms
that they were originally siliceous spicules.

Under what circumstances these alterations take place, or
how they may occur, or why the mineral should be changed,
must be a matter of conjecture; but that they do occur we
have evidence in the case just mentioned and in the formation
of all mineral pseudomorphs; so that, if the mould of a Lithis-
tid in flint, such as I have mentioned, were filled up with
calcite and the flint subsequently removed, the original struc-
ture, instead of being siliceous, would be calcareous, or it
might be pyritic, and so on. In two parcels of powder which
came from the interior of two separate flints from Walling-
ford, Berkshire, the Coccoliths, which abound in both, are all
silicified in one, and all calcareous in the other.

Where the siliceous material of which the flints and chert
are composed came from I do not pretend to say, any more
than the calcareous material which formed the kunker, espe-
cially the latter, seeing that out of eight analyses the quantity
of lime only amounts to a mean of about nine parts ina
thousand taken from the regur in eight different places, the
lowest quantity of which, in three of the instances, did not
reach two parts (Medlicott and Blanford, op. cit. vol. 1.
p- 430).

It may, however, be fairly inferred that the purer material
will be found in the nodular forms, both of flint and kunker,
and the less pure in the tabular forms, viz. the sheet kunker
and the chert respectively.

Thus have I endeavoured to correlate that which may be
said to be going on at the present day with what has taken
place in ages past—not that such concretionary formations are
confined to kunker and flint, for all geologists know that such
have been taking place in the stratified deposits from the be-
ginning ; but to comprehend all, so far as we are able, is best
accomplished by studying what is taking place at the present
moment for comparison with what has taken place heretofore,
since this kind of induction is the least exposed to error.

XXXI.—General Considerations upon the Carcinological
Fauna of great Depths in the Caribbean Sea and Gulf of
Mexico. By ALPHONSE MILNE-Epwarps*.

THE progress which submarine investigations have caused

* Translated from the ‘Comptes Rendus,’ February 21, 1881.

Fauna of the Caribbean Sea ke. 313

zoology to make exceeds any thing that could have been hoped
for; and almost every day new facts are added to those already
known. Those seas which had been best explored, and with
regard to which naturalists thought there was nothing more
to be learnt, have furnished unexpected discoveries when those
zones which the fishermen do. not usually reach came to be
investigated.

I have already had occasion to call the attention of the
Academy to the results obtained last summer on board the
‘Travailleur’ off the northern coast of Spain; and I dwelt
especially upon the difference that exists between the animal
population of the great depths and that of the surface or of
the shores. When we compare their representatives it is as
though we had before us two distinct faunas belonging neither
to the same time nor to the same climate. The importance
of this fact cannot escape any one; and geologists, in the
determination of the age of a formation, must take it seriously
into account. In fact, at the present day, in the same seas,
there are in course of formation deposits, as to the contempo-
raneity of which there can be no doubt, and which contain the
remains of perfectly dissimilar creatures. The animals of the
littoral deposits belong to types of higher organization ; those
of the deeper deposits have a more ancient character: some of
the latter present incontestable affinities with the fossils of
the Secondary epoch ; others resemble the larval condition of
certain existing species.

The investigations which I have lately made of the Crus-
tacea of the Caribbean Sea and Gulf of Mexico have furnished
interesting results; and 1 think it worth while to say a few
words about them. ‘The materials I have had at my disposal
were abundant and varied ; for Mr. Alexander Agassiz had the
kindness to send me for determination all the Crustacea col-
lected by the expeditions of the U.S. navy during the years
1877, 1878, and 1879. A special ship, the ‘ Blake,’ was
fitted out for the performance of deep dredgings; and the
harvests collected by her have proved most fruitful. I have
now completed the examination of all the Brachyurous Deca-
pods, of the Anomura, and the Cuirassed Macrura; I have
described them in the Bulletin of the Museum of Comparative
Zoology at Harvard College* ; and now, treating the question
from another point of view, I shall confine myself here to the
indication of the general results at which I have arrived.

The number of species collected is much greater than would
have been supposed from what was known of this part of the

* “Etudes préliminaires sur les Crustacés,” par A. Milne-Edwards
(1° partie), Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. Hary. Coll. tome viii. no. 1.

Ann. & Mag. N. IMist. Ser. 5. Vol. vii. 23

314 M. A. Milne-Edwards on the Carcinological

fauna; for the groups just enumerated it amounts to 214, of
which 153 are new to science. Forty of these species differed
too much from the forms previously known to take their place
in existing genera, and I have been compelled to regard them
as the types of new generic divisions. ‘This variety of species
is the more remarkable when we consider that fifty years ago
the existence in these same regions of scarcely a score of
Crustacea had been indicated.

Certain groups, supposed to be foreign to the American
seas, are, on the contrary, extraordinarily abundant at these
great depths. Such is the family Galatheide, of which I
have recognized forty-one species of very varied forms, and
which I have had to distribute into eight different genera.
Some of these have representatives in nearly all seas, such as
Galathea and Munida*. The others have never been met
with elsewhere. Among these I may indicate the Galacanthe,
the carapace of which is armed above and on the sides with
large sabre-shaped spines ; the G'alathodes, of which the eyes
are very small, with imperfect corneola; the Orophorhyncht,
in which the eye-peduncles are greatly reduced, spinous, and
capable of concealing themselves in part beneath the rostrum ;
the Hlasmonoti, with a carapace destitute of teeth or spines ;
the Diptychi, im which the abdomen is twice folded upon
itself and concealed beneath the sternum; and, lastly, the
Ptychogastres, which greatly resemble the preceding, but have
the legs of unusual length.

The true Crabs, or Brachyurous Decapods, do not inhabit
the very great depths of the Caribbean Sea. They abound
on the shores; numerous species, but generally of small size,
are found down to 500 metres below the surface ; beyond this
they seem to disappear. Nevertheless at 800 metres a crab
with a square carapace, which I have described under the
name of Bathyplax, was captured, representing in these seas
the Gonoplax of our shores; but its eyes are atrophied and
destitute of corneola, its orbits are rudimentary, and it is blind.
On the other hand, the Anomurous and Macrurous Crustacea
swarm at great depths. Down to 3500 metres there have
been found representatives of the genus Willemoesia, those
singular Macrura which almost exactly reproduce the forms
of the Eryonide of the Jurassic period, but are blind, while
the eyes of the above fossil Crustaceans appear to have
attained their ordinary development. From a bottom of more
than 4000 metres the dredge brought up some Galatheide
of very remarkable forms, which I have placed in the new
genus Galathodes. ;

* T have described two species of Galathea and eleven of Munida.

Fauna of the Caribbean Sea &e. 315

What is especially astonishing is the infinite variety of
zoological forms, which often renders it almost impossible to
apply the classifications which have hitherto been regarded as
most firmly established. In fact, transition types abound, and
we find numerous intermediate forms between groups that we
were accustomed to consider very distinct. Of this I will
give some examples.

The family Paguride, or the Hermit-Crabs, arranged by
zoologists of most authority in the group Anomura, hitherto
included only species which, although very numerous, were
all very similar to each other, and without any direct con-
nexion with the Macrura. The American dredgings have
furnished unexpected forms, which unite the Hermit-Crabs
with the Thalassinide. Such is Pylocheles Agassizii, the
abdomen of which, instead of being soft and unsymmetrical
like that of the Pagur?, is composed of firm regular rings and
terminated by a symmetrical fin. This Crustacean lives in
holes, the entrance of which it closes with its claws, which,
when they are united by their inner margin, constitute a very
perfect operculum. The Mixtopaguri differ less from the
Paguri ; for their abdomen, which is more developed on the
right than on the left side, is divided into seven distinct and
movable joints, the first five of which are imperfectly cal-
ecified, while the last are large and hardened. In the Ostra-
conoti the carapace is entirely coriaceous, and the abdomen so
reduced that the female, to hold her eggs, makes use of the legs
of the fourth pair, the penultimate joint of which, widened into
a palette, forms a sort of tloor underneath the packet of eggs.
The Catapaguri establish a passage between the preceding
and the Spiropagurt: their abdomen is still very small, but
twisted and lodged in little shells, the dimensions of which
contrast strongly with the size of the carapace and legs, which
remain outside. In some of these Crustaceans we also
observe curious adaptations to a special mode of life. Thus
Hupagurus discoidalis, inhabiting the tubular shell of the
Dentalia, makes use of one of its chele as a circular oper-
culum perfectly moulded to the orifice of the dwelling which
it has to close. The Xylopaguri also merit our attention :
they have never been found except in holes hollowed in frag-
ments of wood; and whether it be a reed, a rush, or some
branch, these cavities are always open at both ends; and the
animal does not introduce itself backwards, as the ordinary
Paguri do, but penetrates into its lodging directly. When
there the chele always make their appearance at one of the
orifices, the other being closed by the extremity of the abdo-
men, converted into an opercular buckler.

316 On the Carcinological Fauna of the Caribbean Sea ce.

The family Dromiide, hitherto so distinct from the Homo-
lide, is now united therewith by the genus Homolodromia,
the legs of which also resemble those of Dorippe. The Acan-
thodromie are intermediate between the Dromie and the
Dynomene; they have the buccal pieces, the eyes, and the
antenne of the former, and the ambulatory feet of the second.
The Dicranodromie have the carapace narrower than that of
the ordinary Dromie; its form resembles that of certain
fossil Crustaceans of the secondary formations, of which the
genus Ogydromites has been formed; the legs are very long,
like those of the Homole. In Homolopsis also the body is
more rounded and narrower than that of the last-named Crus-
tacea ; and in this respect they approach the Dromiide ; but
their eyes are nearly atrophied. The Homole are represented
by two species, one of which appears to me to differ in no
respect from H. spinifrons, hitherto found only in the Medi-
terranean. ‘This is a fresh example of the immense geogra-
phical distribution attained by certain animals of the great
depths. Cymopolia, of which one species also inhabits the
Mediterranean, possesses eight in the Caribbean Sea. Some
of them approximate to Dorzppe by the intermediation of Cy-
clodorippe and Cymonomus ; and these last-mentioned crusta-
ceans, which are perfectly blind, have, on the other hand, close
affinities with the Hthuse. The genus Lthusa, supposed to
be confined to the Mediterranean, must also be recorded among
those of the American seas; among the Crustacea from the
Florida reefs I have recognized a species and described it
under the name of £. americana, only differmg from #. mas-
carone by characters of but little importance.

The examples just cited suffice to give an idea of the
interest attaching to the study of the animals from great
depths. ‘These bathymetrical researches are only commencing ;
and when we compare the small extent over which the dredge
has been dragged with the immense spaces which have never
been touched, when we reflect upon the manifold causes
which render the retreats of certain animals still inaccessible
to our means of investigation, we cannot avoid the conviction
that the results obtained are only a very small part of those
in reserve for us in the future. Hence we cannot too forcibly
direct the attention of scientific men in all countries to the
utility of coordinating their efforts and undertaking methodi-
cal investigations in the seas to which they have the most
easy access.

Our zoological groupings now present so many gaps that
it is impossible to understand the general .plan which has
presided over the grouping of living creatures. Paleonto-

On Hawatian Nocturnal Lepidoptera. 317

logical discoveries on the one hand, and on the other those
which are promised to us by submarine explorations, will
gradually fill up these gaps, and perhaps one day enable natu-
ralists to grasp the relations which exist between the different
animals.

Our country has not remained indifferent to these researches ;
the Academy at its last meeting heard the interesting details
given by M. de Lacaze-Duthiers upon the organization of his
laboratory at Roscoff and the work that has been accom-
plished there. For my own part I am happy to be able to
announce that the expedition accomplished last year in the Bay
of Biscay by the ‘Travailleur’ will not be the last of its kind,
and that this summer the same ship will undertake a series of
dredgings in the Mediterranean, of which I shall have the
honour to give you an account.

XXXII.—On a Collection of Nocturnal Lepidoptera from the
Hawaiian Islands. By Artuur G. Butter, F.L.S.,
F.Z.8., &e.

THE collection of which the following is an account consists
of eighty specimens forwarded to me last year by the Rev.
Thomas Blackburn. It is particularly interesting as being
to a large extent composed of Micro-Lepidoptera, of which we
have hitherto received very few species from the Hawaiian

Islands.
Sphingide.
1. Deilephila calida, sp. n.

General size, form, and pattern of D. euphorbie, but the
primaries coloured as in D. biguttata of Madagascar, and the
secondaries differing from all species of the genus in their
dark outer border ; on the under surface the general coloration
is bright brick-red. Primaries above smoky grey; a broad
dark olive-brown belt across the base, three unequal subcostal
spots, and a tapering discal belt of the usual form and also of
a dark olive-brown colour; a narrow transverse fasciole
forking from the inner margin of the discal belt to the costa;
below this fork the belt is edged internally by a golden
ochreous line ; outer borders of a dark and slightly purplish-
grey colour, decidedly darker than the central area of the
wing; fringe with a slender whitish basal line: secondaries
black, With narrow diffused sooty-grey border, scarcely paler

318 Mr. A. G. Butler on Nocturnal Lepidoptera

than the ground-colour; a slightly irregular vermilion-red
belt (a little narrower towards the costa) just beyond the
middle of the wing; no trace of any white spot at the anal
angle; costal border paler than the ground-colour; fringe
white towards the anal angle, rose-coloured along the abdo-
minal margin: body above dark olivaceous; the head,
shoulders, and tegule bordered with sulphur-yellow ; antenne
black, tipped with snow-white, ferruginous internally: abdo-
men with lateral white and black basal markings, nearly as
in D. euphorbie, but narrower; three last segments bordered
at the sides behind by narrow transverse cream-coloured
spots; lateral margins dull rose-coloured. Wings below brick-
red, crossed beyond the middle by two subparallel curved
black lines (abbreviated in the secondaries); outer border
rosy brown, with zigzag inner edge; discoidal area of prima-
ries blackish, partly obscured towards the base by dull rosy
hairs: body below pale rosy ferruginous; legs and palpi pale
greyish brown, the base of the palpi and anterior tarsi
whitish. Expanse of wings 2 inches 10 lines.

One specimen of this very distinct species was sent in a
separate box. Mr. Blackburn gives the following description
of the larva :—

“Larva. Pale green (belly whitish), sparingly dusted with
white; dorsal and spiracular lines whitish, but rather obscure ;
first segment (7. e. the one behind the head) obscurely suffused
with red; spiracles pink, with a crimson centre; head and
legs green; claspers green, tipped with crimson ; horn short
and warty, black above, red beneath; head small; second
and third segments behind the head much distended.

‘¢ Another individual was as follows :—Greenish grey, with
a sooty appearance, sparingly sprinkled with rather large
white spots; underside green; dorsal line yellow, very con-
spicuous; spiracular line white; spiracles yellow, with the
centre dull orange; subspiracular line whitish, but very
indistinct, excepting on last segment, where it forms a con-
spicuous white line on either side, converging to the horn.
There is a general tendency in this form of the larva to a
mauve-coloured suffusion in various parts of the body, which
is very conspicuous when the larva is about half-grown.

“he two forms of larva described produced identical
moths, though, I think, different sexes.

“‘T have taken it on several different plants (none of them
known to me by name) in different mountain localities in
Oahu. The imago flies by day in hot sunshine about flowers,
and is also attracted by light in the evening.”

Mr. Blackburn has also forwarded the following descrip-

from the Hawavian Islands. 319

tion of the larva of another hawk-moth, which I named in a »
previous paper Protoparce Blackburnit :—

“Description of full-grown larva. Green or ashy grey, more
or less sprinkled with white; spiracular line white, emitting
upwards and backwards (¢. e. so that they slant upwards in a
backward direction) seven white stripes, the first of which is
on the fourth segment (not counting the head as a segment),
the last on the tenth; on the eleventh segment is a small
white stripe bent backwards over the spiracle, being much
smaller than the white lines on the other segments; head
with two well-defined black longitudinal lines, and clouded
with black laterally; spiracles black, surrounded with a
bright blue ring; horn long, shining black, bent backwards ;
claspers of the ground-colour. In the ashy grey larve the
whole dorsal surface is sprinkled with white; the segment
behind the head is shining black, bordered with white ; the
last claspers and space round the anus are shining black (at
least partially) ; and the legs are blackish at base, becoming
red towards apex. In the green larve only a few segments
near the head are sprinkled with white, and the segment next
behind the head, the last claspers and the space round the
anus are olivaceous rather than black; the legs, too, are
more conspicuously red.

“Weeds on a very common weed growing about 2 feet
high, also on a shrub growing some 6 feet high, neither of
which is known to me by name.”

Larentiide.

2. Scotosia corticea, sp. n. (No. 116).

Bronzy brown: wings mottled all over with dark slaty
grey, most distinctly on the primaries, where the mottling
forms transverse striations ; a rather broad central belt, formed
of two stripes of a dark slaty-grey colour and the space
between them, which is slightly paler; the outer stripe den-
tate-sinuate externally, both stripes inarched towards the
costa of primaries; a discal stripe limiting the external
border, parallel to the central belt, almost obsolete on the
secondaries: primaries with traces of a curved slaty-grey
stripe at basal fourth, and with the external border densely
mottled with this colour: body greyish. Under surface paler
than above, the wings very slightly striated with grey, ex-
cepting towards apex of primaries; an oval discocellular grey
spot on each wing, largest on the primaries, the costal margin
ot these wings straw-yellow, mottled with black: body below

320 Mr. A. G. Butler on Nocturnal Lepidoptera

whitish ; venter transversely banded with grey ; anus yellow-
ish. Eixpanse of wings 1 inch 6 lines.

One specimen, in which the left primary is dwarfed; it has
somewhat the aspect of a Hubolia, as noticed by Mr. Black-
burn, but seems to agree better with Scotosta. Mr. Black-
burn says:—‘I captured two of this, at an elevation of
about 4000 feet, on Haleakala, Maui, May 1880. ‘The one sent
was just out of pupa when taken; one side did not expand
properly.”

3. Eupithecia monticolens, sp. n. (No. 117).

Very closely allied to L. bilineolata from New Zealand, but
darker, and with slightly less angular bands. Sordid shining
greyish white: wingscrossed by numerous subparallel undulated
grey and brown lines, the interspaces between some of which
are filled in with grey, so as to form fairly well-defined bands ;
the banding of the primaries is as follows :—two basal irregular
bands, followed by a line; then comes the central belt, bounded
on each side by a band and traversed by two lines; at the end
of the cell is a transverse black spot on a scarcely perceptible
diffused reddish shade; immediately beyond the central belt
is a band of almost pure white, traversed by a single line; a
submarginal slightly brownish band, the inner line of which
is black ; outer border grey ; the veins varied with black and
white, so as to form little black longitudinal dashes upon the
dark bands: secondaries with a whitish band across the disk
as in the primaries, but with no distinct dark bands, excepting
on each side of the whitish one upon the abdominal area:
body varied with grey ; the abdomen crossed by two subbasal
and one subanal black band; between these bands is also a
dorsal series of four black dots. Primaries below greyish
white; the discocellulars and the veins just beyond the cell
black ; apical area broadly bronzy, crossed by two curved
ill-detined greyish stripes, and with the border of the same
colour; these markings, however, entirely disappear in
certain lights: secondaries sordid creamy white; a curved
band just beyond the cell, formed entirely by a series of black
longitudinal dashes on the veins; a marginal series of black
dots: body below white; legs partly black above. Expanse
of wings 10-11 lines.

Two specimens. “Not very rare about 4000 feet up
Haleakala, Maui; I took it also at the summit of the moun--
tain, 10,000 feet above the sea” (7. B.).

from the Hawatian Islands. 321

Noctuidae.
4, Spelotis crinigera, sp. n. (No. 11).

Colour of primaries and thorax similar to S. ravida, and
exhibiting the same slight variations of tint from brownish to
slaty grey, always as sericeous and sometimes more so than
in that species; the markings on the primaries agree with
those of S. pyrophila, excepting that they are black, with
scarcely perceptibly paler borders: secondaries only differing
from S. pyrophila in having the yellow line at the base of the
fringe sharply defined and limited externally by an interrupted
dusky line; abdomen greyish brown, the male with a very
large anal tuft of long stramineous hair. Under surface
shining white in the male, greyish in the female, with the
discoidal area of primaries greyish in both sexes; internal
area shining brassy opaline: a slightly dentate-sinuate discal
grey stripe, abbreviated on the primaries: body below sandy
yellowish in the male, sordid white in the female, dusky in
front behind the palpi ; tarsi blackish, with pale bands at the
joints. Expanse of wings 1 inch 8 lines to 2 inches 3 lines.

Four specimens, in both sexes; Mr. Blackburn says of them,
“T believe it to be identical with the Agrotis referred to in
your papers in EK. M. M. vol. xv. p. 269, and vol. xvii. p. 7,
which was too much broken to be named, also with the insect
described by you as Spelotis lucicolens. How the number
‘12’ (unless it be a misprint) got placed against the latter I
cannot conjecture, for the number ‘12’ is marked off from my
note-book as non-existent, having been applied to a single
worn specimen of a Leucania, which further study satisfied
me was only dislocata, Walker.” In this supposition
Mr. Blackburn is partly correct; that is to say, this is the
supposed “Agrotis;” but it differs from my ‘ Spelotis luci-
colens,”’ which (with ‘S. cremata’’) must be referred to
Agrotis, in the simple instead of pectinated antenne of the
male: the species which must now stand as Agrotis lucicolens,
although it possesses the general coloration and pattern of
Spelotis, is represented by a male specimen having strongly
pectinated antenne, as in A. crassa of Europe, to which it is
probably most nearly allied. A. cremata also has the an-
tenne of the male exactly as in typical Agrotis, notwith-
standing its Spelotis-like pattern.

The specimen of A. lucicolens still has the No. “12”
attached to it; so that it seems probable that this number
when detached from the Leucanta was accidentally transferred
to the Agrotis. Of Spelotis crinigera Mr. Blackburn says

322 Mr. A. G. Butler on Nocturnal Lepidoptera

further :—“ This insect is extremely common all over the
Hawaiian archipelago, as I have found out since I penned the
note from which you give extract calling it rare. I should
say it is periodical in occurrence. I have taken it at all
seasons of the year; but sometimes hardly a specimen is to
be seen for months, then it swarms suddenly. At a place
called Kawaihae, on the island Hawaii, in February 1879, I
observed it literally in thousands round a lighthouse, evidently
attracted by the lamps. The unset specimen (type of the male)
was taken there; the largest specimen (type of the female) is
from Maui, the other two from Honolulu. It does not usually
occur much above sea-level, and does not thrust itself into
notice much unless looked for about or soon after dusk, so is
easily passed over.”

With regard to Agrotis (“Spelotis”’) cremata, Mr. Black-
burn says, “‘I think there is a mistake somewhere in the
mention of Oahu as a locality for this species. I am only
conscious of having had three specimens altogether, two of
which I sent you in separate consignments. ‘They were all
bred from pupx obtained in September 1876 in the Maui
sand-hills. If I wrote No. 10 against any insect with Oahu”
as its locality it was a slip of the pen; nor do I even think it
decidedly probable that the species occurs on Oahu, as that
island has no region of sand-hills; and, moreover, Maui seems
to contain many other species peculiar to it, many more, so
far as my experience goes, than any other of the islands.”

Apameide.

5. Apamea chersotoides, sp. n.

dg. Allied to A. wnanimis, but with the coloration of a
Graphiphora. Primaries shining laky brown, mottled with
testaceous towards the base and along the costal border ; costal
margin spotted regularly with black; basal area crossed by
oblique interrupted slightly zigzag black lines, which appear
to be continuous with the first two pairs of black costal spots ;
four ill-defined, reversed, oblique, dentate-sinuated black lines,
the first, third, and fourth attached to minute whitish points ;
the first line (which runs from the “ orbicular”’ to the inner
margin) very indistinct, the last line limiting the external
border, which is dusky; a discal series of black dots; an
obligue subapical costal black dash; a marginal series of
small lunate black spots, followed by a testaceous marginal
line; base of fringe dark brown, remainder of fringe red-
brown; orbicular and reniform spots whitish, with black-

from the Hawatian Islands. 323

speckled centres: secondaries grey, the veins and a diffused
outer border fuliginous brown; costal border whitish, shining,
with brassy reflections ; fringe cream-coloured, traversed by a
brown line; thorax laky brown, the collar crossed by scarcely
perceptibly darker lines; abdomen grey, becoming brown
towards the anus, and fringed on each side with lake-brown
hair; anal tuft orange. Wings below sericeous whitish, with
the borders pale rosy testaceous, speckled with black; black
discocellular spots; a dusky angulated discal line; external
border greyish ; a marginal series of lunate black dots; fringe
with a pale yellowish basal line: primaries with the discoidal
area greyish; fringe reddish: secondaries with the fringe
crossed by a grey line and tipped with white: body below
dull rose-colour; venter with lateral black dots. LExpanse of
wings 1 inch 3 lines.

?. Darker than the male, the markings more distinct, the
black lines across the basal area distinct and continuous with
the costal spots, the discal series of black dots attached to
whitish dots, and therefore having the appearance of an extra
discal line; abdomen dark greyish brown. Otherwise as in
the male. Expanse of wings 1 inch 4 lines.

A pair in good condition. “Various localities on Maui,

April and May 1880.”

6. Apamea cinctipennis, sp. n. (No. 140).

Aspect of Chersotis, but with the border of the primaries
almost as pale as in Apamea limbata. Primaries above
shining laky brown, mottled all over, excepting upon the outer
border, with black ; outer border pale dead golden or sandy
brown, slightly speckled with black; a marginal series of black
lunate spots; costa, disk, and basal area mottled with pale
testaceous ; a zigzag black-bordered pale testaceous stripe at
basal third, and a curved series of internally black-bordered
testaceous spots across the disk; discoidal cell blackish, the
ordinary spots slaty grey, edged with black ; the outer margin
of the reniform spot angulated and whitish ; fringe pale tes-
taceous and laky brown in alternate lines: secondaries
shining grey, with dusky diffused outer border; fringe pale
testaceous, intersected by a dusky line; thorax slaty grey,
varied with brown; abdomen shining grey, with ochreous
anal tuft. Under surface whitish grey, shining: wings with
black-speckled sandy-tinted borders; discocellular and mar-
ginal black spots; venter ochreous, with lateral series of black
spots. Expanse of wings 1 inch 8 lines.

One specimen. I can find no reference to the No. (“ 140”’)
in Mr. Blackburn’s notes, and therefore am ignorant as to
the exact locality for this species.

324 Mr. A. G. Butler on Nocturnal Lepidoptera

Heliothide.

7. Heliothis armigera (Nos. 141 and 154).
Noctua armigera, Hubner, Noct. pl. 79. fig, 870 (1805-24).

A pair. The male (No. 141) is a faintly-marked variety
exactly resembling H. incarnata on the upper surface, except-
ing that the fringe is not rosy; the female, on the other hand,
is a rather dark specimen, nearly approaching the form found
in New Zealand and named Heliothis conferta by Walker,
with which it may be conspecific; as, however, the difference
between H. armigera and H. conferta is apparently only one
of colour, it is very doubtful whether the latter is more than
a variety of the former. Of the male Mr. Blackburn says :—
““T took three specimens flying at flowers, at an elevation of
about 2000 feet, on Haleakala, Maui, in May 1880; the
specimens are all identical in size and markings &c., save
that one (which I retain) has the marginal dark band of the
hind wings narrower than the other two.” Of the female he
says:—‘‘ I took the specimen sent at a lamp in Honolulu,
attracted by the light ; a second, which I retain, occurred to
me in company with * * No, 141.”

Hypenide.

8. LHypena obsoleta (No. 14).
Hypena obsoleta, Butler, Ent. Month. Mag. xiv. p. 47 (1877).

Two specimens, one of which is an interesting variety,
having the central belt of the primaries bordered (narrowly
internally and broadly externally) with pale stramineous.
Mr. Blackburn still considers the species to be conspecific with
H. insignis ; but at present I have not sufficient evidence
before me to unite them, the variety now sent not being inter-
mediate. The following is what Mr. Blackburn says :—‘“ I
feel compelled, however presumptuous it may seem in one
who does not profess to be a specialist in Lepidoptera, to hesi-
tate much in regarding obsoleta and insignis as distinct. The
species (or group of species) occurs all over the Hawaiian
archipelago : I have specimens from Hawaii, Maui, and Oahu ;
I have seen it in my own garden and at an elevation of
4000 feet. Among twenty specimens which I have set, there
are only two that cannot be said to differ enter se; and they
are of the form ‘znsignis.’ Two extreme forms I possess
are :—the one sooty black, with faint indications of the lines
which border the dark area in ‘insiynis;’ the other sooty
black, with the same lines sulphur-yellow. Another specimen

From the Hawartian Islands. 325

is pale grey, with the same lines nearly black ; another dark
fuscous, with a still darker cloud representing the dark area
of insignis, but extending further before it reaches the costa.
The hind wings vary through all shades from pale ashy to
nearly black. Classified by locality, I can detect no differ-
ence, except that the specimens from the south of Hawaii
generally have darker hind wings.”

The preceding note certainly seems to show that H. obsoleta
is extremely variable; and yet the observation that the two
specimens which agree are referable to “H. insignis’’ seems
to show that the gradation from one form to the other is not
perfect, and therefore that we may have here, as in the British
butterflies of the genus Pieris, nearly allied species widely
distributed and occurring constantly together, which never-
theless are distinct; nothing but breeding can satisfactorily
decide the point, unless a pertect gradation can be shown; and
even this is not always conclusive. In all probability the
larva would be found abundantly on nettles.

9. Hypenodes altivolans, var. simplex (No. 65).
Scoparia altivolans, Butler, E. M. M. xvii. p. 9 (1880).

Primaries above bronzy brown, shining; a dusky-edged
zigzag clay-coloured stripe across the basal third, followed
within the cell by a short oblique black dash ; a second arched
clay-coloured stripe with dusky inner edge across the external
third, followed by an irregular abbreviated stripe of the same
colours; a submarginal lunulate white line breaking up into
small annular or ocellus-like spots towards the inner margin ;
a marginal series of black impressed dots followed by an inter-
rupted pale line at the base of the fringe ; secondaries shining
pale grey ; thorax bronzy brown, abdomen greyish brown.
Under surface uniformly grey. Hxpanse of wings 94 lines.

Var. Primaries above darker than in the type, the clay-
coloured stripes only indicated by their dusky margins, ex-
cepting towards the inner margin, also more irregular; thorax
darker ; otherwise similar. ixpanse of wings 8 lines.

Three specimens. ‘“ It occurs all over the Hawaiian archi-
pelago ; but I have not observed it to be common” (7. B.).

Hercynide.

10. Boreophila minuscula, sp. n. (No. 134).

Leaden grey above ; primaries with the basal third dusky,
crossed by an acutely angulated black line, and limited exter-
nally by an angular black stripe tollowed by a white stripe; two

326 Mr. A. G. Butler on Nocturnal Lepidoptera

angulated black-edged ochreous stripes representing the central
belt ; a diffused white costal spot immediately beyond the outer
stripe; an irregularly falciform snow-white discal line; a
marginal series of black dots; fringe whitish, spotted with
blackish and intersected by a black line; secondaries very
slightly greenish in tint as compared with the primaries, with
a slender whitish submarginal line followed by a slender black
marginal line; fringe whitish, intersected by a grey line ; palpi,
head, and thorax dusky. Under surface dark shining leaden
grey; wings with whitish submarginal and blackish mar-
ginal lines; fringe as above; primaries with white internal
border : pectus and under surface of legs white; tarsi above
blackish, banded with white. Expanse of wings 63 lines.
One specimen, taken “ at light at an elevation of about

4000 feet on Haleakala, Maui.”
11. Aporodes? micacea, sp. n. (No. 118).

Primaries above shining slaty grey, shot with purple and
clouded with black; a creamy whitish irregular subbasal
band, densely irrorated, excepting along its borders, with
black scales ; orbicular and reniform spots well-defined, black,
varied with clay-colour; a very irregular dentate-sinuate
black discal line partly bordered externally with white and
golden orchreous, a large cuneiform costal ochreous patch
beyond the discal line, spotted, upon the costal border, with
black ; outer and inner borders irrorated with ochreous; two
marginal alternated series of black spots, and between the
spots of the outer series snow-white dots; fringe intersected
by two black lines and spotted externally with ochreous: se-
condaries greyish brown, with bronzy reflections ; costal border
silvery whitish towards the base; fringe whitish, spotted with
blackish and intersected by two lines of the same colour:
body black, with the thorax and anterior abdominal segments
spotted with rosy cupreous, posterior segments altogether of
this colour; the anterior segments also have snow-white pos-
terior margins. Wings below cupreous, shining, with an
alternately black and white marginal line and silky white
fringe ; primaries shot with pale greyish blue, so that in
certain lights the whole tint of these wings is entirely altered ;
costal border red, spotted with black from the end of the cell ;
orbicular and reniform spots large and black ; discal line of the
upper surface indicated but indistinct ; secondaries reddish all
over and irrorated with black ; the interno-median area and a
streak through the cell snow-white, speckled with black, ex-
cepting on the veins, which remain reddish ; a discal series
of white-bordered black spots; three black spots in the cell,

from the Hawaiian Islands. SOT

and one at the inferior extremity of the cell; pectus shining
silvery white; legs dull red, banded with black and white ;
venter white towards the base, but red towards the anal ex-
tremity. Expanse of wings 11 lines.

Two specimens of this beautiful little species. According
to Mr. Blackburn it is ‘common, at an elevation of about
4000 feet, on Haleakala, Maui; generally flying over ferns.”

I am extremely doubtful as to the affinities of this species.
Although in structure it seems to agree with Aporodes, it has
much the aspect of a Noctuid allied to Acantholipes; the dis-
tinct orbicular and reniform spots and the highly coloured
under surface are by no means characteristic of typical Her-
cynide.

Margarodide.

12. Margaronia glauculalis (No. 114).
Margarodes glauculalis, Guénée, Delt. et Pyral. p. 806. n. 325 (1854).

““'The specimen sent was brought to me dead; and I could
do nothing with it but gum it on a card. After an interval of
nearly two years I procured a second specimen in fine condi-
tion at light. The specimens are so absolutely identical that
you will not hesitate to treat the somewhat unsightly one I
send as a type. Both were taken in Honolulu.”—T. B.

The species is very widely distributed, being found also in
Java and Sumatra. It ought to be common, if one may judge
by the abundance of some of the allied species.

Botidide.
13. Anemosa aurora, sp. n. (No. 143).

Allied to “ Scopula” daiclesalis of Walker*, but much
smaller: primaries above bright rose-colour, with a slight
lilac reflection ; the ordinary lines very indistinct but ochra-
ceous ; fringe golden ochreous tipped with whitish : secon-
daries shining golden ochreous, paler towards the abdominal
border, whitish on the costal border, slightly greyish at apex ;
a marginal series of minute black dots between the veins;
fringe tipped with white : body dark ochraceous, the thorax and
posterior segments of the abdomen washed with lake-red ;
margins of abdomen silvery. Wings below cream-colour, with
golden reflections: primaries with whitish internal border ;
costal margin rose-colour; an oblique annular oval marking
representing the reniform spot and a diffused arched line be-

* The genus Anemosa differs from Scopwa in its considerably longer
palpi and acute primaries,

328 Mr. A. G. Butler on Nocturnal Lepidoptera

yond the cell grey; secondaries with a marginal series of
black dots: body below sericeous white; palpi red at the
sides. Expanse of wings 8} lines.

One specimen in good condition. I can find no reference
to the number, and therefore cannot record its exact locality.

14. Mecyna ennychioides, sp. n. (No. 135).

Dark fuliginous brown: wings with shining slaty-grey
reflections ; a marginal series of black dots; fringe tipped
with white; primaries with the usual markings characteristic
of Botys, black, as follows :—a black dot before the middle of
the cell, the orbicular and reniform spots represented in out-
line; a bisinuate abbreviated line from the orbicular spot to
the inner margin, and the usual alternately angulated (or
castellated) discal line from costa to inner margin; apical
half of costal margin black, spotted with testaceous : seconda-
ries with white costa: body blackish, the abdomen with a
bluish gloss. Under surface, excepting that it is altogether
less red, is almost identical in pattern with Aporodes ? micacea.
Expanse of wings 103 lines.

One specimen, taken at light, at an elevation of about
4000 feet, on Haleakala, Maui.

The extraordinary resemblance which this species bears to
Aporodes? micacea on the under surface makes me doubt,
notwithstanding its many structural differences, whether it is
not the male of that species; yet on the upper surface the
pattern and colouring are very different ; the form of the pri-
maries, the length and form of the palpi, and the length of
the tibiz and tarsi are altogether dissimilar.

15. Mecyna nigrescens, sp. n. (No. 136).

Primaries above dark brown, clouded in the centre with pale
buff, which colour fills the intervals between the discoidal
spots; all the markings similar to those of the preceding
species, excepting that the orbicular and reniform spots are
dark brown with black margins, that there are two additional
black spots close to the base, that the two transverse lines are
bordered with pale buff and white, that there is a whitish ne-
bula near the apex and a white oblique stripe from the discal
line to the outer margin, that the marginal black dots are
bordered with white and the fringe is spotted with pale buff :
secondaries shining fuliginous brown, with the basal half of
the costal border white ; two black spots in the cell, fringe
spotted with white: thorax pale buff, speckled with black; abdo-
men black, with white hind margins tothe segments. Primaries ~
below grey, with silvery white mternal border; costal border

from the Hawatian Islands. 329

cream-coloured, spotted with black beyond the middle; dis-
coidal spots large and black; an indication of the discal line
of the upper surface ; outer border and fringe nearly as above,
but greyer and more sericeous: secondaries greyish white,
with two black spots in the cell and one at the inferior ex-
tremity ; a discal series of black dots; a submarginal dentate-
sinuate grey line; a marginal series of black dots; a white
apical spot; fringe spotted with grey: body below white ;
venter with lateral series of black dots. Expanse of wings
8 lines.

One specimen, “ flying among low plants at an elevation of
about 4000 feet on Haleakala.”

16. Mecyna exigua (No. 133).
Mecyna exigua, Butler, Ent. Month. Mag. xv. p. 271 (1879).

One specimen, without head; it is probably the female of
my species; and differs in the diffusion of the white edges of
the black lines across the primaries ; so that these wings might
be described as greyish white, dusky at the base and crossed
in the middle by a broad irregular blackish belt ; a subapical
costal spot and the outer border blackish; a marginal series
of black dots, limited internally by a zigzag submarginal white
line; fringe grey, traversed’ by a brown line and tipped with
brown. LExpanse of wings 10 lines.

No exact locality is given. ‘‘ April-May.”

17. Mecyna virescens, sp. n. (No. 139).
Allied to MM. polygonalis of Europe and M. deprivalis of

New Zealand ; same size and pattern above: primaries above
olive-green ; costal margin dark orange; an indistinct angu-
lated oblique darker line just before the basal third ; orbicular
and reniform spots small and dusky ; a large black spot just
below the inferior angle of the cell, and two or three black
dots in a straight line between it and the inner margin; an
arched series of five black dots beyond the cell; a marginal
series of black points; fringe of inner margin sienna-red ;
fringe of outer margin grey in the centre, sienna-red at base
and tips: secondaries dull cupreous brown, with a black border
as in the allied species, fringe golden cupreous, traversed by a
central grey line: thorax olive-green, abdomen pale sandy
brown. Primaries below with the costal border and apex
reddish orange ; subapical area broadly dull rose-colour ; dis-
coidal area grey ; disk towards external angle tlesh-coloured ;
internal border white ; a whitish-buff basal spot and an indis-
tinct rosy subcostal streak in the cell, interrupted by blackish
orbicular and reniform spots: secondaries pale sandy yellow,

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. vii.

330 Mr. A. G. Butler on Nocturnal Lepidoptera

washed with rose-red, especially on costal and external areas ;
a greyish outer border: fringe of all the wings cream- coloured,
traversed by a grey stripe: body below cream-coloured,
femora and tibiae reddish. Expanse of wings 1 inch 2 lines.

One specimen. This is the first Mecyna of the typical
group received from the Hawaiian islands. Mr. Blackburn
says of it, “I send a specimen (one of two) bred from larvee
found feeding on a tree unknown to me by name, but appa-
rently a species of Acacia, which I have not seen growing
elsewhere than in damp ravines at an elevation of 4000 to
5000 feet on Haleakala, Maui. A third specimen I took
flying by day in the same locality; it is larger, exp. al.
38 millims., ground-colour of front wings as bright yellow as
the cilia of hind wing in the specimen sent, otherwise identical ;
probably the other sex. The other bred specimen is identical
with the one sent.

“The following is a description of the larva :—Shining
black, sparingly furnished with long grey-white hairs ; head
and underside dirty grey; spiracular line bright orange-colour ;
three pairs of legs (on three segments next behind head), and
five pairs of claspers, all dirty semitransparent grey. Forms a
pupa in a silken cocoon.”

The entirely different character of the under surface readily
distinguishes this species from its allies.

Scopariide.
18. Scoparia hawatensis, sp. n. (No. 83).

Closely allied to S. exhibitalis of Australia and S. letalis
of Europe: primaries above grey, densely speckled with black,
crossed near the base by an angulated cream-coloured belt,
broadly bordered and sparsely speckled with black; a has-
tate black spot in the cell; end of the cell filled by a milk-
white spot; a black rhomboidal spot just beyond the cell, a
black spot partly surrounded by white scales below the dis-
coidal hastate spot; external third densely irrorated with
milk-white scales, which form two ill-defined stripes, the inner
one zigzag and discal, the outer one submarginal; two sub-
apical costal spots, a nearly marginal confluent series of un-
equal spots, and a large spot on the inner margin near the
external angle black; a marginal chain-like series of small
elliptical white spots, bounded externally by a slender black
line; fringe sericeous sordid white, tipped with grey and
traversed near the base by a black line: secondaries sericeous
sordid white like tarnished silver, fringe with greyish outer
half and a grey subbasal line: thorax black, spotted with

from the Hawatian Islands. 331

cream-colour ; abdomen silvery white, anal tuft testaceous ;
tarsi black above, banded with white. Under surface uniformly
silvery white. Expanse of wings 8 lines.

Two specimens. Mauna Kea, Hawaii; elevation about

7000 feet.
19. Scoparia jucunda, sp. n. (No. 82).

Allied to the preceding, but with somewhat the aspect of
Tinea nigralbella; primaries above sericeous white, with a very
slight bluish tinge, adorned with black markings as follows
—a dentate sinuate band close to the base, an irregular patch
across the cell interrupted transversely by two spots of the
ground-colour and terminating below the median vein in a
curved line, which runs along nearly a fourth of the inner
margin, an oblique streak beyond the cell and a zigzag mark-
ing (which may, in some specimens, be continuous with the
latter) at external angle, an apical patch interrupted by two
oblique stripes of the ground-colour and a marginal series of
dots; secondaries shining sordid white; head and thorax
white, slightly bluish ; abdomen shining pale brown, with tes-
taceous anal tuft. Under surface sordid silvery white. Ex-
panse of wings 83 lines.

One specimen. Mauna Kea, Hawaii; elevation about

7000 feet.

Var. formosa (No. 130).

Much more heavily marked than the preceding, the black
markings on the primaries being broad and intense in colour-
ing, the patch across the cell altered in shape so as almost to
resemble the Greek ©, the outer extremity uniting with the
oblique streak beyond the cell; shoulders and back of collar
black. Hxpanse of wings 9 lines.

One specimen. Found “ occasionally on trunks of trees, at
an elevation of about 4000 feet on Haleakala, Maui.”

This can at most be no more than a local modification of
the preceding (S. jucunda); it, however, reminds one rather
of Psecadia pusilla than of Tinea nigralbella.

20. Scoparta frigida, sp. n. (Nos. 67 and 81).

Nearly allied to S. rakaiensis of New Zealand, but much
smaller, with slightly different pattern on the primaries and no
broad border to the secondaries: primaries above shining
brownish grey irrorated with white; an acutely angulated black-
edged white line across the basal third; three white-edged
abbreviated longitudinal black lines at the base; several
scattered black spots in the cell, the largest of these being

24*

332 On Nocturnal Lepidoptera from the Hawaiian Islands.

placed longitudinally within the inferior angle of the cell; a
bidentate trisinuate white discal stripe partly bordered exter-
nally with black, the central arch or sinus uniting with the
middle of a bisinuated submarginal white stripe; a nearly
marginal series of black spots, followed by a black-edged
marginal white line; fringe with the base and a slender line
just beyond the middle grey: secondaries shining bronzy
whitish, with a grey line close to the margin; fringe white,
with the base anda slender line grey: thorax white varied
with brown; abdomen bronzy whitish. Under surface silvery
whitish. Expanse of wings 9} to 10 lines.

Two specimens, of which one was “taken flying at an
elevation of about 4000 feet on Haleakala, Maui,” and the
other at ‘‘ Mauna Kea, Hawaii; elevation about 7000 feet.”

21. Scoparia coarctata (No. 102).
Eudorea coarctata, Zeller, Linn. Ent. p. 308. 14 (1846).
One specimen. No exact locality given.

22. Scoparia venosa, sp. n. (No. 84).

Primaries above black with white veins ; a white marginal
line followed by a black line at the base of the fringe ; tips of
fringe grey: secondaries pale shining brown, with a white
marginal line followed by a blackish line at the base of the
fringe, which is white tipped with grey: head and thorax
black, spotted with white; abdomen pale shining brown.
Wings below pale shining brown, with marginal line and
fringe as above: body below silvery white. Expanse of
wings 94 lines.

Two specimens. ‘f Mauna Loa, Hawaii; elevation about
4000 feet ; occurred very near the active volcanic crater.”

Phycidz.
23. Ephestia humeralis, sp. n. (No. 111).

Allied to E. elutella; general coloration similar, but the
pattern quite different: primaries above shining silvery grey,
with the basal half of the costal border snow-white; fringe
white: secondaries greyish white, shining; veins and mar-
ginal lines grey; fringe snow-white, traversed near the base
by a slender grey line: body above silvery grey. Primaries
below grey, shining; secondaries and body below silvery
white. Expanse of wings 82 lines.

One specimen. ‘ Mountainous places on Oahu and Hawaii.
I have taken only two specimens.” —T. B.

Mr. J. Wood-Mason on Parantirrhcea Marshalli. 333

24, Ephestia albosparsa, sp. n. (No. 80).

Allied to Z. semirufa, very similar in general pattern: prima-
ries above shining leaden grey, irrorated with white; an ob-
lique white stripe at basal third, immediately followed by a
broad externally angulated leaden-grey band; a faint indi-
cation of a reniform spot, owing to the less densely congregated
white scales at the end of the cell; a regular white stripe with
leaden-grey internal border parallel to and near the outer
margin: secondaries shining brownish white (like slightly
tarnished silver), with snow-white fringe traversed near the
base by a slender grey line: thorax grey; abdomen silvery
whitish. Primaries below shining greyish brown; secondaries
as above, excepting that they are whiter: body below silvery
white. Expanse of wings 83 to 93 lines.

Two specimens. ‘ Various localities on Hawaii.”

[ To be continued. ]

XX XIII.—Deseription of Parantirrhoea Marshalli, the Type
of anew Genus and Species of Rhopalocerous Lepidoptera
from South India. By J. Woov-Mason, Deputy Super-

intendent, Indian Museum, Calcutta.

Family Nymphalide.
Subfamily Sarrrmwz.

PARANTIRRHGA *, gen. nov.

3. Anterior wings triangular ; anterior margin moderately
and regularly arched; apical angle acute; outer margin
almost straight, being only just perceptibly convex; inner angle
rounded ; inner margin sinuous, being lobed at the base much
as in the males of Clerome and 4imona, genera of Morphine ;
subcostal vein 4-branched, the first branch given off before
and the second beyond the end of the discoidal cell, the first,
second, and third coalescing successively and _ respectively
with the costal vein, the first and the second and all three in
turn becoming free and running off at a tangent, like the
costal vein, to the anterior margin, the fourth being perfectly
free from its origin and running to the apical angle; posterior
discocellular veinlet long, very slightly concave outwards,
almost straight, intermediate one not quite half the length of

* From rapa, by the side of, and Antirrhaa, generic name.

334 Mr. J. Wood-Mason on Parantirrhoea Marshalli.

the posterior, anterior one rudimentary ; submedian vein
sinuous, short, terminating in the wing-membrane near the
inner margin at about the level of the junction of the basal
and second fourth of the length of that margin, being, in fact,
hardly more developed than is the internal vein of the Papilio-
nine as compared with that of many Heterocerous Lepido-
ptera; the first median veinlet directed straight outwards and
backwards, out of its normal course, to the inner angle, and
supplying the place of the rudimentary submedian. On turn-
ing to the underside it is seen that a narrow rounded lobe of
the functional sutural area, about six times as long as it is broad,
is folded back upon the under surface, to which it is firmly
adherent ; this lobe occupies the middle two fourths of the
length of the inner margin, and is thickly clothed on its
surface and fringed at its free edge with firmly attached, long,
and somewhat raised modified scales, rendered conspicuous by
their rich dark brown colour and satiny lustre ; the outline of
this turned-up lobe is marked out on the upperside by a cur-
vilinear groove.

Posterior wings tailed, subquadrate, with four distinct
margins, viz. a strongly and irregularly-arched anterior
margin, nearly straight external and posterior margins, and an
inner or abdominal margin, marked out by the obtuse-angled
apex, the tail, and the well-rounded anal angle; with a black
oval sexual mark, divided by the submedian vein, near the
anal angle ; costal vein short and straight, terminating before,
and the first branch of the subcostal, which originates close

A. Right anterior wing, from the underside, nat. size, to show the whole
venation and the inflected lobe of the inner margin. B. Anterior portion
of the same, much enlarged, to show the relations of the veins to one
another: a, costal vein; 1, 2, 3, 4, terminations of the four branches of
the subcostal vein. C. Right posterior wing, from the underside, nat.
size.

to the base of its vein, ending beyond the middle of the length
of the anterior margin, the second branch being given off

Mr. J. Wood-Mason on Parantirrhcea Marshalli. 335

before the middle of the discoidal cell and extending into the
apical angle; “discoidal” vein in the same straight or slightly
curved line with the subcostal; discocellular vemlet sinuous ;
the third median veinlet produced to a conspicuous tail.

Antenne fine and distinctly clubbed.

Female unknown.

No Asiatic genus of Satyrine presents us with any approach
to the remarkable arrangement of the two hindermost veins of
the anterior wings described above ; but in the South-Ameri-
can genus Antirrhea we meet with identically the same
arrangement, the first median veinlet in the males of A. archea
and its congeners running back to the inner angle, and the
submedian vein ending a considerable distance short of that
angle, though not nearly so far short of it as in the Indian
form, for which I propose the above name, in allusion to these
remarkable points of resemblance, reserving all further com-
parisons and comment until I shall be in possession of
specimens of the South-American forms.

The species of the genus Llymnias alone exhibit the same
disposition of the three anterior veins of the posterior wings.

Parantirrhea Marshalli, n. sp.

3. Wings above dark fuscous, suffused with rich deep
violet.

Anterior wings with an outwardly and forwardly arched
subcrescentic pale violet or mauve band, commencing beyond
the middle of the wings at the costal vein, terminating at the
inner angle, and crossed obliquely by a series of three small
white spots disposed in a straight line parallel to the outer
margin, and placed upon folds of as many consecutive cells,
the last being between the two anterior median veinlets.

Posterior wings relatively longer-tailed than in JMelanitis
ismene (Cramer), with the membranous parts of the divergent
tails almost wholly formed by the produced wing-membrane
ot the interspace between the second and third median vein-
lets, a very narrow anterior membranous edging only being
contributed by the interspace next in front, and with rather
more than the basal two thirds of their length in front of the
discoidal and subcostal veins ochreous.

Wings below ochreous, obscurely striated with a deeper
shade of the same colour, and marked with a submarginal
series of inconspicuous brown specks, the probable rudiments
of ocelli.

Length of anterior wing 1:16 inch, whence expanse=
2°4 inches. ;

The female will in all probability prove to differ from the

336 Geological Society.

male not only in the absence of the sexual spot on the poste-
rior wings, but also in having the inner margin of the anterior
wings straight and neither lobed at the base nor turned up in
the middle, and the first median veinlet and the submedian
vein of the same wings normally arranged and developed and
directed respectively to the outer margin and to the imner
angle, after the manner usual amongst butterflies.

Hab. 'Trevandrum, Travancore, South India. Described
from four specimens of the male—one (the type) recently pur-
chased by the Indian Museum, and three the property of
Capt. G. F. L. Marshall, R.E., to whom I am indebted not
only for the opportunity of describing this interesting insect,
but also for permission to dissect one of the specimens in his
collection.

PROCEEDINGS OF LEARNED SOCIETIES.
GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY.
January 19, 1881.—Robert Etheridge, Esq., F.R.S.,
President, in the Chair.
The following communications were read :—

1. “ Further Notes on the Family Diastoporide, Busk.” By G. R.
Vine, Esq. Communicated by Prof. P. Martin Duncan, M.B. Lond.,
F.R.S., F.G.S8.

In continuing his review of the family of the Diastoporide, the
author stated that upon the question of the classification of the
Polyzoa he is inclined to accept the views recently published by the
Rev. T. Hincks, in preference to the earlier ones enunciated by
Prof. Busk. He now described the forms found in the Lias
and QOolite, including Diastopora stromatoporides, Vine (=liassica,
Quenst.), D. ventricosa, Vine, D. oolitica, Vine, D. cricopora, Vine.

The author then proceded to argue against the inclusion of the
foliaceous forms in the genus Diastopora, and concluded by giving
a definition of the genus as now limited by himself.

2. “Further Notes on the Carboniferous Fenestellide.” By G.
W. Shrubsole, Esq., F.G.S.

The author pointed out the discrepancies in the descriptions
given by Lonsdale, Phillips, M°Coy, and King of the genus Fenes-
tella as represented in the Silurian, Devonian, Carboniferous, and
Permian formations respectively. He then proposed a new defini-
tion of his own, and described the following species—/. plebeia,
M°Coy, F. membranacea, Phil., F. nodulosa, Phil., F. polyporata, Phil.,
F. crassa, M°Coy, F. halkinensis, sp. nov.; and in conclusion he
pointed out that the few species to which he has reduced the Car-
boniferous Fenestelle find their representatives in the North-Ameri-

can continent, only one really new form, 7. Norwoodiana, having
been described there.

Geological Society. — 337

February 2, 1881.—Robert Etheridge, Esq., F.R.S.,
President, in the Chair.

The following communications were read :—

1. “On the Coralliferous Series of Sind, and its Connexion with
the last Upheaval of the Himalayas.” By Prof. P. Martin Duncan,
M.B. Lond., F.RB.S., F.G.S.

This communication is the result of the author’s study and de-
scription of the fossil corals of Sind, undertaken at the request of
the Geological Survey of India. The history of the researches in
the geology of the Tertiary deposits of Western Sind was noticed in
relation to a statement made some years since by the author and
Mr. H. M. Jenkins, F.G.8., that there was more than one Tertiary
series there, in opposition to both D’Archiac and Haime.

After a brief description of the geology of the Khirthar and
Laki ranges of hills, which were called Hala Mountains by the
French geologists, the succession of the stratigraphical series demon-
strated by the Survey under Blanford and Fedden was given, and the
author proceeded to discuss the peculiarities of the six coral faunas
of the area, and to argue upon the conditions which prevailed during
their existence. A transitional fauna, neither Cretaceous nor Eocene,
underlies a trap; to the trap succeeds a great development of Num-
mulitic beds, the Ranikot series, containing corals, some of which
are gigantic representatives of Kuropean Nummulitic forms. <A third
fauna, the Khirthar, succeeds, and a fourth, Khirthar-Nari, which
was a reef-building one; and a fifth, the Nari, is included in the
Oligocene age. An important Miocene coralliferous series (the Gaj)
is on the top of all. These faunas above the trap are Nummulitic,
Oligocene, and Miocene in age; and in the first two, European forms
which are confined to definite horizons are scattered indefinitely in
a vertical range of many thousands of feet. The corals grew in
shallow seas ; but most of them were not massive limestone-builders,
but there were occasional fringing reefs, or rather banks of com-
pound forms, which assisted in the development of limestones. Many
genera of corals which elsewhere are massive, are pedunculate in
Sind; and the number of species of the family Fungide is consider-
able. There are also alliances with the Eocene coral fauna of the
West Indies.

The depth of the coralliferous series and the intercalated unfossi-
liferous sandstones &c. is, according to the Survey, 14,000 feet,
without counting an estimated 6000 feet of unfossiliferous strata m
one particular group. The subsidence has therefore been vast, but
not always continuous.

After noticing the numbers of genera and species in this grand
series of coral faunas and the remarkable distinctness of each, the
author proceeded to discuss the second part of his subject. When
President of the Society, he had stated, in his Anniversary Address
for 1878, that he was not convinced of the truth of the theory of
the Geological Survey of India regarding the Pliocene age of the last
Himalayan upheaval. The considerations arising from the position

338 Dublin Microscapicel Club.

of a vast thickness of sedimentary deposits overlying the Gaj or
marine Miocene, and containing Amphicyon, Mastodon, Dinotherium,
and many Artiodactyles of the supposed pig-like ruminant group,
lead to the belief that the author was not justified in opposing the
theory enunciated by Lyddeker and the Directors of the Survey.
The position of these Manchhar strata on the flanks of the mountain-
system of Sind was compared with that of the sub-Himalayan
deposits. The faunas were compared, and the Sewalik deposits, the
equivalents of the Upper Manchhar series of Sind, were pronounced to
be of Pliocene age. They were formed before and during the great
upheaval of the Himalayas, and in some places are covered with
glacial deposits.

A comparison was instituted between these ossiferous strata and
the beds of Eppelsheim and Pikermi; and the author discussed the
question relating to the age of terrestrial accumulations overlying
marine deposits.

2. “On two new Crinoids from the Upper Chalk of Southern
Sweden.” By P. H: Carpenter, Esq., M.A. Communicated by
Prof. P. Martin Duncan, M.B. Lond., F.K.S., F.G.S.

Stem-joints of a Crinoid resembling those of Bowrgueticrinus have
long been known in the Plinerkalk of Streben (Elbe); but on the
discovery of the calyx it was found to differ considerably from that
genus. It was then referred to the genus Antedon by Prof. Geinitz.
Stems also resembling Bourgueticrinus have been found in the Upper
Chalk of Képinge (8. Sweden); and a calyx resembling that de-
scribed by Prot, Geinitz has also been found. Prof. Lundgren
kindly intrusted this to the author for description.

For these two fossils he considers not only a new genus but also
a new family required. He proposes for the former the name
Mesocrinus, as the characters of its calyx ally it to the Penta-
crinide. The author describes the characteristics of the genus
Mesocrinus, and of the species MW. suedica (the Swedish species),
and its differences from M. Fischert (from Streben), and discusses
the relationships of the genus, which combines the characters of a
Pentacrinus-calyx with a Bourgueticrinus-stem.

A new species of Comatula (Antedon impressa) from the Igna-
herga Limestone of Scania was also described, and its systematic
position discussed.

DUBLIN MICROSCOPICAL CLUB.
January 15, 1880.

Nostoc paradoxum, Welw.—Prof. E. Perceval Wright, in exhibit-
ing a minute portion of Nostoc paradowum, Welw., said that he had
been able, through the kindness of Mr. Carruthers, to forward morsels
of four so-called Nostocs from Dr. Welwitsch’s collection to Dr. Bor-
net, who was engaged in working out the species of this group, and
that he had found that No. 19, from ‘ Mossamedes, at an elevation

Dublin Microscopical Club. 339

of 1000 feet ” (1859), was Glwotrichia natans, Thuret. No. 20, “ WV.
paradoxum,” might perhaps be a distinct thing; but the specimen
found “ad muscos dense cespitosos, juxta rivulos pr. Pedra Souague
in ipso Presidio, 1857,” was both sterile and young; and if Dr.
Bornet had found such in France he would not have hesitated to
refer it to Nostoc ellipsosporum. No. 21, “hab. ad rupes vulcani
prope Cabondo, tempore pluvio, Feb. 1857,” was no doubt Nostoc
commune; and to this species might also be referred No. 22, found
‘ad rupes.”

Cystoliths in Leaves of Gymnostachum and Fittonia.—Mr. Green-
wood Pim showed sections of the leaves of Gymnostachum and Fit-
tonia, in which were remarkable cystoliths, hitherto unrecorded
from these genera, although met with in other allied Acanthacee.
These bodies were rounded oblong in shape, slightly tubercular, and
apparently destitute of any suspensor (as in Ficus elastica), and of
cellulose basis, as dilute nitric acid dissolved them almost entirely,
leaving a scarcely perceptible residuum. They were much larger
than the cells of the parenchyma of the leaf, in which they occupy
intercellular spaces. There appeared but little, if any, specific dis-
tinction between the leaves of Gymnostachum Verschaffeltti and Fit-
tonia argyroneura, the two species exhibited. Subsequent exami-
nation of some half dozen of the forms of Acanthaceze showed very
similar bodies in all but one genus, Aphelandra. The other genera
in which Mr. Pim observed these were Justicia, Thyrsacanthus, and
Adhatoda, those of the last named being longer and more clavate
than in the other forms.

Dr. Zimmermann’s Preparations of Fungi.—Dr. M‘Nab showed
some examples of Dr. Zimmermann’s preparations of minute fungi,
remarkable for the skill arrived at and success attained in presery-
ing these delicate objects.

Cosmarium isthmochondrum, Nordst., new to Ireland.—Mr. Archer
showed Cosmarium isthmochondrum, Nordst., from Connemara, new
to Ireland. This was, in unison with Nordstedt’s experience in
Sweden, found in company with another rare species, Cosmarium
quinarium, Lundell ; and, if carelessly viewed, the two species might
be confounded, as Nordstedt remarks. But they are very distinct
things ; indeed, once their differences are grasped, they could readily
be distinguished, even under the lowest power. The conspicuous
and rather large and prominent papilla immediately over the isthmus
on each front surface of each semicell is a marked feature of the form
in question (Cosmarium isthmochondrum), and one very readily seen.
There could be no doubt that both the forms entirely agree with
those of Sweden. They are both very rare in Ireland. As yet C.
quinarium has not turned up in the east; it extremely sparingly
presents itself in Westmeath ; but now and again in spots a somewhat
copious gathering may be made in Connemara; it is more rare in
the south-west.

340 Dublin Microscopical Club.

February 19, 1880.

A Verticillium on Polyporus versicolor.—Mr. Pim showed a
species of Verticilliwm which grew in great quantities on decaying
Polyporus versicolor on stumps in a cold fernery at Monkstown. As
he could not satisfactorily determine the species, he sent specimens
to the Rey. J. E. Vize, who said he believed it to be Polyactis vera.
Mr. Pim, however, thought it rather a true Verticilliwm, most
probably V. epimyces, B. Br.

Structure of Siphon of Mya arenaria.—Prof. H. W. Mackintosh
exhibited two sections of the siphon of the common Lamellibranch
Mya arenaria, one being median, the other distal. Both showed a
large amount of muscular tissue, the circular fibres being few in the
median, but well marked in the distal part. The septum between
the two tubes was composed of a band of connective tissue, which
at each end radiated out and formed a network, enclosing in its
meshes the bundles of muscle. At each extremity of the septum
were placed a large blood-vessel with a nerve on each side. The
external surface was composed of a layer of epithelium containing
large masses of black pigment-cells corresponding to the periostra-
cum; outside this was a layer of gelatinous substance presenting a
stratified appearance, most probably consisting of mucus. The distal
section showed that the siphonal tentacles began as processes of the
walls of the tubes, which became longer as the orifice was ap-
proached. Their first beginnings could be detected some distance
down in the tube. Both Rutherford’s carmine and Ranvier’s picro-
carmine had been used; but the former gave the better results.

Sections of Calculi—Mr. B. Wills Richardson exhibited two
sections of calculi: one was an excellent specimen of oxalate-
of-lime calculus, and probably had its source in the kidney; the
other was one of several passed at intervals, and evidently came
from the prostate, the symptoms pointing to that origin. The sec-
tions were made by Mr. Baker of London. The longest diameter
of the oxalate-of-lime calculus was 1 inch, and of the phosphate-of-
lime 53; inch.

Staurastrum brasiliense, Lundell, new to Ireland.—Mr. Archer
presented examples from Connemara (two only, all he had
seen) of that noble form, Staurastrwm brasiliense, Lundell, non
Nordstedt. Lundell, in the text, gives expression to the supposi-
tion that this fine species, as regards the arrangement of the endo-
chrome, presented a state intermediate between the central and
parietal mode, or rather, as it were, uniting those two types. Mr.
Archer had satisfied himself, on getting a good end view of a quite
fresh example, that such is not the case, as the endochrome radiates
in double plates from the centre towards the angles—in a word,
agreeing with the type presented by the majority of Stawrastra, and
not at all with the parietal arrangement, such as occurs in S. tum-
dum &ce. Mr. Archer could hardly acquiesce in the opinion that

Dublin Microscopical Club. 341

Nordstedt’s Brazilian species could be truly the same as the Swedish
and Irish one, which were precisely identical; the former is smaller,
and cannot be at allso noble an object. At first glance so fine a thing
is most striking ; and when first noticed, Mr. Archer, attracted by the
three conspicuous spines at the angle, was momentarily under the
impression that he had encountered S. Royanum in Ireland, itself a
large and fine species, but still a good deal smaller than S. brasiliense ;
but a second glance showed the mistake, and S. Royanuwm still re-
mains undetected out of Glencoe, in Scotland; nor did a search there
on the occasion of a visit in the autumn of 1880 redisclose it.

April 16, 1880.
Pandorea Traversit, J. Ag—Prof. E. Perceval Wright showed a

preparation of Pandorea Traversii, J. Ag. species, for which he
was indebted for specimens to Prof. J. G. Agardh. It seems to
show some interesting points of resemblance between the structures
long since described to the Club in the young growing fronds of

Griffithsia setacea by Dr. Wright.

The “puncta” distributed over the smooth cell-walls of Desmidiese
are really pits or depressions, not thickenings or points different in
tint from the rest of the membrane. —Mr. Archer brought under
notice some empty cell-walls of Cosmarium pyramidatum and some
other Desmidiev, in order to draw attention to the ‘“ puncta” or
dots covering the superficies, with a view to show that these puncta
are really depressions or pits, not either mere darker, or brighter, or
thicker points of the wall or membrane. Whether these depressions
might not sometimes represent tubules passing right through, he
would leave in abeyance. ‘That they really indicate hollows or pits
is, in minute forms very “ finely punctate,’ somewhat difficult of
verification ; but on looking over a series of the “ smooth” forms,
as the puncta become more and more “ coarse” the fact seems very
readily made out, until in such large forms as the larger Huastra
they appear, especially on the inflated prominences, decided minute
cup-like hollows. It may be, indeed, that these pits may present
the appearance of having become filled with some more solid sub-
stance, like a kind of excretion through such openings, giving some
forms a pseudogranulate aspect. May it be possible that the radi-
ating lines noticeable in the enveloping mucous investment of many
of such forms stand in direct connexion with these “ puncta”? and
may such lines represent tubules carried on through such mucous
coat? Forth from these radiating lines or striz in the mucus, which
naturally stand vertically to the superficies of the cell-membrane, it
is that ‘* Bacterium-like” (to be no more precise) bodies may some-
times (though the occasions are rare) be seen to issue, and all the
more readily on application of some pressure on the covering-glass,
and then slowly totter off—a fact that probably has not been gene-
rally noticed. The nature of the puncta and markings in general
on the Diatoms has often been the subject of dispute; but no one
seems to have paid much attention to test what the nature of the

342 Dublin Microscopical Club.

puncta in the Desmids is, which was Mr. Archer’s apology for bring-
ing forward the subject on the present occasion.

Advantages of Double Staining with Logwood and Eosin.—Dr. R.
J. Harvey showed an ordinary typical specimen of epithelium as
illustrative of the advantage to be derived in some cases by double
staining with logwood and eosin. The staining by the logwood
was confined for the most part to the connective-tissue elements,
which were of a rich blue-purple, whilst the epithelium was stained
a most brilliant rose-red by the eosin. The epitheliomatous nests
made thus a most striking contrast with the surrounding sarcoma-
tous structure.

May 20, 1880.

Trachelomonas bulla, T'. volvocina, and a new very hispid form.
—Mr. Archer showed living examples of a few Flagellata be-
longing to Yrachelomonas—T. bulla, T. volvocina, as well as a
very hispid and ornate form, probably a new species. This was a
large form, the spines fore and aft long and numerous ; neck rather
long, and margined by a few rather long spines; the body egg-
shaped, and bordered by a number of shorter spines; internal
colour vivid green ; eye-speck brilliant; motion fidgety, but active.
This is probably the prettiest and most ornate of the pretty forms
appertaining here, and might stand as Z’rachelomonas acanthophora,
n. Sp.

Ramularia cryptostegie, n. sp., Pim.—Mr. Greenwood Pim
showed Ramularia cryptostegie, Pim. This form, according to
Dr. Cooke, who examined the specimen, is a new species, and is
described under the above name in the current number of ‘ Gre-
villea.’ The threads are more developed than in the other species
of the genus; spores large, oblong, and very numerous, with one to
three very delicate septa. The plant grew on seeds of a Cryptostegia,
sown in a small pot in Mr. Pim’s stove at Monkstown. Mr. Pim
also drew attention to the fact that he had been able, by the use of
alcohol and glycerine jelly, to mount Moulds more satisfactorily than
by using other methods previously tried. Doubtless it was in this
way that the exquisite preparations by Dr. Zimmermann, shown by
Dr. M‘Nab at a previous meeting of the Club, were mounted.

Structure of Arms of Rossia macrosoma.—Prof. H. W. Mackin-
tosh exhibited a transverse section of one of the arms of the Cepha-
lopod Rossia macrosoma, which showed a large central nerve
occupying the axis of what appeared like a canal, the rest of the
cavity of which was filled with a crystalline substance, probably
sodium chloride ; outside this was a well-marked layer of connective
tissue, sending out bands between the bundles of longitudinal
muscles which formed the bulk of the intermediate part of the arm.
These bands again united to form a second sheath, external to which
was another stratum of muscle, both longitudinal and circular, with
nerve-branches through it. This stratum graduated insensibly into
the many-layered integument. There were bands of circular

Dublin Microscopical Club. 343

muscle in the inner sheath of connective tissue ; but no vessels could
be observed.

Problematical Vegetable Growths.—Dr. E. Perceval Wright exhi-
bited two forms of vegetable growth which had made their appear-
ance in bottles of salt water in which Bryopsis plumosa had been
kept growing over the winter. One of them was evidently a fungal
form, giving rise to immense masses of hyphe, with at intervals
large groups of conidia; this form chiefly grew under the water.
The other, apparently a chlorophyllaceous form, was to,be met with
just con the margins of the water, and growing up towards the cork,
in air. It was marvellously polymorphic in the outline of its cells,
which, at one time connected to form irregular filaments, at another
Separate, differed so much in shape from one another as to make
it a matter of difficulty to find half a dozen alike. There did not
seem to be any organic connexion between the two. Small morsels
of the hyphe, when placed on a morsel of orange, fructified, and were
apparently to be referred to Mucor mucedo; but the specimen got
spoilt before this point could be authoritatively decided. The green
alge continued to grow, forming little fluffy tufts.

Zygospores of Xanthidium Robinsonianum, Archer, exhibited for
the second season.—Mr. Crowe presented zygospores of Xanthidiwm
Robinsonianum, Archer, quite bearing out, when fully developed,
their characters of last year. These examples were taken at the
same locality in co. Kildare.

Staining of Spinal Cord of Bullock—Mr. B. Wills Richard-
son exhibited a cross section from the lumbar portion of the
spinal cord of a bullock, stained in three colours, viz. carmine,
picric yellow, and lilac. By daylight the three tints were very
distinct ; but by ordinary paraffin lamplight the picric yellow and
the lilac could scarcely be seen. However, by placing a piece of
blue glass beneath the slide, the picric yellow could then be distin-
guished. The section was mounted in Klein’s damar solution.

Aniline Blue and Logwood Staining.—Dr. Harvey showed two
specimens illustrative of a new method of staining with aniline blue-
black and logwood. The blue-black is dissolved in 4-per-cent. solu-
tion of alum, and mixed with the ordinary aqueous solution of log-
wood chips in about the proportion of three toone. ‘The first prepa-
ration was a specimen of the interauricular system from the heart
of a frog, showing the pneumogastric nerves and intrinsic ganglia in
situ. It was mounted in glycerine. The second was a transverse
section of the lumbar portion of the spinal cord of a child. It was
mounted in damar. Dr. Harvey stated that he had got much better
results by the use of this method than by the use of either dye
separately.

Cosmarium Wittrockii, Lundell, new to Ireland (probably new
to Britain).—Mr. Archer exhibited, for the first time noticed in
Ireland, he believed in Britain, Cosmariwm Wittrockii, Lundell,

a minute but pretty little species that might easily enough be over-
looked.

344 Bibliographical Notices.

BIBLIOGRAPHICAL NOTICES.

A History of the Birds of Ceylon.
By Captain W. Vincent Lucer, R.A. London, 1880. to.

Tris work, of which the first part was issued in November 1878, has
been completed by the publication of part 3, in September 1880. It
consists of nearly 1300 closely printed pages in 4to, and is illus-
trated by 34 coloured plates, a map, and several woodcuts. All the
leisure time which the author could spare from his military duties
during a residence of eight years and a half in Ceylon, and the in-
cessant labour of three other years after his return to England,
were devoted to its preparation.

Yet, voluminous as the work is, it includes accounts of 371
species only of the fauna of Ceylon ; and it is therefore evident that
the author had a great deal to say upon his subject, and that in its
treatment he relied rather on his eye and pen than on the skill of
his artist. In fact, the book bears on every page the stamp of being
written by a man who combined the method of the systematic
student with the experience of the field-naturalist. The author’s
object was not only to produce a scientific account of the birds of
the island, but to write it in sucha manner as to render its contents
acceptable to the educated class of the inhabitants, and to inspire
them with a taste for the study of birds. In both respects he has
succeeded so well that, without hesitation, we can commend the
work as a pattern to all faunistic workers. The plates belong to
the best productions of M. Keulemans, and represent the species
peculiar to the island.

As regards the arrangement of the text, the article on each bird
is composed of six parts, viz. synonymy, description, observations,
geographical distribution, habits, and nidification. The descrip-
tions go considerably beyond the limits of a diagnosis, yet are as
concise and generalized as the variations of plumage of the species
will admit. The “ observations” are given chiefly for the benefit of
the local student, and furnish collateral information as to continental
specimens of the same species, or as to other species representing
the Ceylonese types in India or elsewhere. The geographical dis-
tribution is worked out in a very elaborate manner, and must have
cost the author immense labour, on account of the number of works
which he had to consult critically. The distribution within the
island, the habits, and nidification are based chiefly upon the author’s
own observations. Only, owing to the difficulty of observing the
birds on their nests, and of obtaining reliable information, he has
had to avail himself of the assistance gathered from A. Hume’s
works on Indian oology, though he obtained many original
notes from a valued correspondent, Mr. Parker. As regards that
incubus of every ornithological work, the synonymy, the author,
very properly, has limited his references to the most important pub-
lications, paying particular attention to those which contain local
information on the occurrence of a species in Ceylon. For the
author found Ceylonese ornithology not an entirely uncultivated

Bibliographical Notices. 345

field of the Indian fauna. Besides Blyth, whose labours now possess
rather an historical interest, Mr. Layard and Mr. Holdsworth had made
most important contributions to our knowledge of the birds of the
island—the former adding not less than 110 species to the lists
previously published, and supplying valuable information on their
habits, in a paper which he contributed to the pages of this journal
nearly thirty years ago; whilst the latter supplemented Layard’s
list by 24 species, thus bringing the total number of Ceylonese
birds to 326, in a carefully edited paper which appeared in 1872 in
the ‘Proceedings of the Zoological Society.’ As mentioned in the
beginning of this notice, Captain Legge enumerates 371 species; of
these, two Finches are known to have been introduced, and
eighteen other species rest upon doubtful evidence*. Forty-seven
species prove to be peculiar to the island, as are also the two genera
or subgenera Elaphrornis and Sturnornis. The majority of these
species are nearly allied to hill-forms of the continent of India and
Malayasia; and two crested Eagles of the genus Spizaétus, with the
peculiar species of Flycatchers, Bulbuls, and Babbling Thrushes,
represent closely allied forms inhabiting the Himalayas and Nil-
gherries. The author considers that the avifauna of Ceylon, taken
as a whole, is very closely allied to that of the southern portion of
the peninsula of India—a conclusion which fully agrees with our
present knowledge of the Reptilian fauna. He further points out
that in the hill-regions of the countries where the rainfall is similar,
the near affinity of the species is remarkable. The low-lying por-
tions in the north of the island possess a similar avifauna to that of
the Carnatic, and from that direction receive a cloud of migrants in
the cvol season.

Although the fauna of an island which, like Ceylon, is in close
proximity to a continent does not possess that intense interest
which attaches to that of oceanic islands, it is nevertheless of the
highest importance to Biology that the fauna of a district with such
defined limits should be worked out completely and in detail, in
order to enable the students of future generations to perceive and
appreciate those changes which, as we know, are constantly taking
place in the distribution, habits, and characteristics of the species.
Therefore the importance of this work is to be measured not only
by its value to the specialist of the present day, but no less so by the
help it offers with respect to those wide biological questions, the
solution of which depends on conscientious and accurate records like
those contained in the present work.

A Monograph of the Free and Semi-parasitic Copepoda of the British
Islands. By Grorar Srewarpson Brapy, M.D., F.L.S. 3 vols.
8vo. London, Ray Society, 1878-1880.

It is, perhaps, hardly necessary in these pages to say any thing in
general praise of the Ray Society or of the admirable series of

* One of these, Schenicola platyura deserves to be included in the number
of Ceylonese species, as a specimen in the British Museum is of undoubted
authenticity, and its claim to this fauna is at least as strong as that of Neophron
ginginianus.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. vii. 25

346 Bibliographical Notices.

works that it has produced. Since its establishment in 1844,
British naturalists, and especially zoologists, have had to thank the
Ray Society for so many splendid monographs, that its activity
must be familiar to every one; and we can only regret that an
organization which has effected so much should appear to be lan-
euishing for want of well-merited support. The last publication of
the Society, the title of which stands at the head of this notice,
fully maintains the high reputation which has been gained by former
productions, and will be welcome to many workers.

Some thirty years ago, in the time of its early youth and vigour,
the Ray Society published a ‘ Natural History of the British Ento-
mostraca,’ by the late Dr. William Baird, a work which embodied
all that was known at the time of the Entomostracan Crustacea
inhabiting these islands. At that date, however, comparatively
little attention had been paid to these denizens of our shores and
fresh waters; and, indeed, the information given by Dr. Baird was,
to a very great extent, accumulated by his own personal labours.
With his book as a guide the investigation of the Entomostraca
became a much easier matter than before, and the number of students
who paid some attention to them naturally increased. At the same
time dredging-operations were more systematically carried on; and
new materials were thus constantly being brought to light, increas-
ing enormously the number of known forms which might fairly be
regarded as British.

Moreover the zoologists of other countries have not been idle;
and, in fact, they have done more in the way of describing new
generic and specific types than those of Britain; so that the literature
of the Entomostraca has of late years been greatly increased, espe-
cially at the hands of Scandinavian naturalists. In the work now
under consideration Dr. Brady describes the British genera and
species of the order Copepoda as limited by Baird—that is to say,
the free and semi-parasitic forms, leaving out of consideration the
truly parasitic types regarded by many recent zoologists as
Copepods, with which, indeed, they are directly affiliated by their
developmental history.

Some notion of the progress that has been made in the study of
these little creatures may be formed from a mere comparative state-
ment of numbers. Baird, writing thirty years ago, recognized only
13 species of Copepoda; Dr. Brady in his present work describes
151. Itis true that a certain proportion of this addition may be
due to the recognition of specific diversity where unity was formerly
supposed to prevail, as is strikingly shown in the case of the genus
Cyclops, in which, while Baird admits only the single species C.
quadricornis, Dr. Brady describes 14 species; but it must be
chiefly ascribed to the discovery of new forms, especially among the
inhabitants of the sea and brackish waters.

In his treatment of his subject Dr. Brady adopts the division of the
Copepoda into three great sections, as proposed by Thorell ,—namely:
Gnathostoma, with a pair of mandibles and three pairs of maxille ;
Peecilostoma, with no mandibles, but with from one to three pairs
of maxilla; and Siphonostoma, with a siphonate mouth usually

Bibliographical Notices. d47

including the mandibles, and either destitute of maxille, or fur-
nished with such organs up to three pairs. This arrangement has
been rejected by Claus; and the structure of the mouth in the
second group does really appear to be so exceedingly obscure as to
. render it somewhat problematical. Dr. Brady, however, discusses
the question at some length (vol. iii. pp. 27-29), and gives his
reasons for adhering to 'Thorell’s classification. The name Sipho-
nostoma seems to be unhappily chosen for the third division, as it
was applied to a different nearly allied group by Latreille, and
adopted by many later writers, including Dr. Baird. Hence its use
in the above sense can only lead to confusion.

Of course much of the increase in the number of species above
referred to is due to the minute analysis of characters which has
come into yogue within the last twenty or thirty years ; and owing
to the same cause the number of genera recognized has been aug-
mented to the fullest possible extent. The 151 species described
are referred to no fewer than 67 genera; and, making every allow-
ance for the fact that many of these genera undoubtedly include
other species not belonging to the British fauna, we may, without
criminal scepticism, feel doubtful whether the progress of science is
favoured by such minute subdivision. No doubt there are many cases
in which genera, and even subfamilies and families, must be founded
for the reception of single species; but the excessive splitting-up
of genera and higher groups is the weak point of modern zoology.
Analysis is the one thing needful according to the present zoological
creed ; and as it is far more easily carried out, or rather can be
carried out without the possession of any special fitness for the
task, whilst the attempt at a synthetical view of the classification
of animals calls for certain natural qualifications which every one
does not possess, we may expect to see the analytical method in
natural history flourish exceedingly, especially in the hands of the
rising generation of school-taught professional naturalists.

Returning from this digression, we may say that Dr. Brady’s
book furnishes evidence in every page of the most careful work. A
short outline of the general anatomy and development of the Cope-
poda is given by him in his third volume; and in the introduction
to the first he discusses the general classification of the group, con-
cluding with excellent tabular synopses of the families and genera,
which will prove most useful to the student. The more detailed
characters of the various groups and species are evidently drawn
up with the greatest care; but only the more important synonyms
of the latter are given in the case of those old-established species
which have necessarily been frequently described by previous
authors. The distribution of the species is carefully indicated.
The illustrations consist of an immense number of figures of the
entire animals and of their characteristic parts, occupying no fewer
than 93 plates. These figures, which are nearly all in outline, have
been drawn by the author himself, and admirably put on the stones
by Mr. Hollick. In fact, both as regards the text and the illus-
trations, this is a work of which both the author and the Ray
Society may be justly proud. Although not so showy as some

348 Miscellaneous.

previous publications of the Society, it is a book of sterling value,
and one that will be of the most essential service to the student of
British zoology.

MISCELLANEOUS.

Notes upon the Food of Predaceous Beetles.
By F. M. Wessrer.

Priny thought it nothing to the credit of the philosophers of his
day that while they were disputing about the number of: heroes by
the name of Hercules, and the site of the sepulchre of Bacchus,
they should not have been able to decide whether or not the queen-
bee possessed a sting*.

While the problem of the bee-sting has long been decided, and
heroes by the name of Hercules have ceased to trouble the minds of
men, there are problems of vital importance regarding the habits of
the insects which, during the greater portion of the year, we meet
daily in abundance, that still remain unsolved.

The most important as well as the most abundant of these insects
are the beetles.

While found in almost every conceivable situation, while our
naturalists count the species in their cabinets by thousands, it
would be difficult to point out a single species the food-habits of
which we fully understand, when both the larva and imago state
are taken under consideration.

True, we have a sort of ritual laid down by entomologists, based
upon the fact that certain species have been known to feed upon
certain substances ; but this can no more be considered as proof
that nothing else enters into their natural diet, than does the
meat of which we may partake at dinner prove us to be strictly car-
nivorous, or the bread or fruit, that we are exclusively vegetarians.

An illustration of this double diet of beetles is found in the case
of the European Silpha opaca, Linn., the larva of which has been
known to feed to an injurious extent upon the leaves of the beet
and mangel-wurzel’.

But one of the most fortunate in getting the benefit of our igno-
rance is the family Carabide, to utter a word against which is
almost considered a sacrilege.

But, true to the adage ‘‘ murder will out,” occasionally a species
is found feeding upon vegetation with a voracity that would do
credit toa Chrysomelid. Of these in Europe, besides the Zabrus gibbus
in both stages, some species of Pterostichus, Amara, and Omophron,
and Calathus latus, Westw., are said to injure grain by eating off
the young shoots or destroying the seed.

Two species of Bembidium (lampos and monticola) have been de-
structive to the forests of Upper Austria §.

* Plin? Hist: Natl xincel i.

+ Curtis, ‘Farm Insects,’ p. 388.

{ Report U.S. Agr. Dep. 1868, pp. 79, 80.

§ Deutsche entomologische Zeitschrift, 1879, p. 17.

Miscellaneous. 349

Broscus cephalotes attacks the growing grain; and Aristus bucepha-
lus devours the seeds of grass*.

In our own country the Omophron labiatum, Fab., injures the
shoots of young corn in the Southern States.

Harpalus caliginosus, Fab., is suspected of feeding upon grain
in stack in Maryland, and also of eating timothy seeds from the
headst.

E. T. Dale, of Jasper, Mo., forwarded to the editors of the ‘ Ame-
rican Entomologist’ specimens of an insect found by him feeding
upon the seeds of a plant unknown to him. Upon examination they
proved to be H. caliginosust.

According to Mr. Mather, of Marshalltown, Lowa, the larve of
some species of Harpalus are destructive to his evergreens, he
haying found them eating off the roots§.

The foregoing is a synopsis of all facts relating to the vegetable-
feeding Carabidee, so far as known to the author of this paper. A
number of years ago the writer commenced the study of the food
of beetles, correctly judging, from what was then known, that either
naturalists were in error in their suppositions, or else that innocent
insects were wrongly accused. And he is free to confess his parti-
ality to the former theory as being the most correct. But after
several years of study and observation, I have found to my astonish-
ment not only the species accused but others also of this family
feeding largely upon vegetable substances, both useful and noxious.
Among my earliest observations upon this subject I noted the abun-
dance of Carabidze about the shocks of wheat in a field where a
violent wind-storm had blown down a large number of sheaves,
under which, upon their being replaced, large numbers of Harpalus
caliginosus, pennsylvanicus, and herbivagus, Pterostichus lucublandus,
and Anisodactylus baltimorensis were observed.

The wheat was drawn in and threshed directly from the field:
and a large percentage of the kernels were badly eaten. Previous
to the threshing, in another field, a specimen of H. pennsylvanicus
was captured with a partially eaten grain of wheat in its mandibles.
The eaten grains of the threshed wheat seemed to agree with the
fragments found in the jaws of the beetle ; and as no other destruc-
tive elements were noted, the facts seemed to suggest that the
damage was done by the before-mentioned Carabide. A few days
after, H. pennsylvanicus was found eating the now fully ripe seeds
from a head of upright timothy grass, and was observed to detach
them from the glumes. The same species has since been seen feed-
ing largely upon rag-weed (Ambrosia artemisiefolia, Linn.) during
September, the seeds apparently being the favourite part. A short
time after it was found upon timothy grass, it was observed eating
the seeds of prairie-grass (Panicum crus-galli, L.); and the same day
another individual was found devouring an Jps fasciatus, Oliy., one
of the Nitidulide, thus proving its carnivorous propensities also.

* Westwood’s Introduction, i. p. 61.
+ Report U.S. Agr. Dep. 1868, p. 80.
t Am. Ent. o. s. vol. i. p. 80.

§ Am. Ent. n.s, vol, i. p. 26.

350 Miscellaneous.

H. caliginosus is likewise found eating the seeds of Ambrosiu arte-
maisiefolia.

H. herbivagus feeds largely upon the tender shoots of grass during
March, cutting them off just below the surface; but later it selects the
tender blades and the discoloured parts usually found under boards, &e.

Amara angustata, Say, is feund quite abundantly upon the heads
of June grass (Poa pratensis, L.). But the most voracious Carabid
enemy of this grass is the Anisodactylus sericeus, Harris.

Early in June 1878 vast numbers of these beetles were noted
upon the heads of this grass; in fact, spots several yards in
area were literally covered with them. Atter patient watching
(for they are very timid) the proof was conclusive that the unripe
seeds were what they were after, and not microscopic insects, as
was at first supposed.

The insect is not only cunning, drawing up its legs and dropping
to the ground upon the least disturbance, after the manner of a
Chrysomelid, but also shows considerable ingenuity. It grasps the
lower extremity of the glume tightly in its mandibles, then relax-
ing slightly, passes upward and again tightens its grasp—a series
of movements which finally force the seed, which is now of the
consistency of cream, out at the apex. ‘This it at once proceeds to
devour with an appetite which reminds one quite forcibly of a tramp
who has been obliged to earn his dinner in advance. Later in the
season it is found feeding in the same manner upon the seeds of
Agrostis vulgaris, Witt. Specimens of Anisodactylus baltimorensis,
Say, were observed feeding upon the marrow and fatty matter
clinging to the tibia of some dead animal, probably that of an ox.
Attention is called to this as being in perfect accord with micro-
scopic observations reported by Mr. Forbes upon another specimen
found upon grass a few months later.

Calathus gregarius, Say, may be found abundantly upon the heads
of timothy grass during the early mornings of the beginning of July.
Of the genus Platynus only a single observation has been obtained ;
and this was during the latter part of June of the present year, when
two specimens of P. cupripennis, Say, were seen harassing a half-
grown cricket, which they had already disabled. The carnivorous
habits of beetles are often as difficult to discover as their vegetarian.
Usually they are not at all in favour of public dinners, and, like
beasts or birds of prey, prefer to drag their victims to some secluded
nook to devour them; hence if the observer gets any insight into
this part of their domestic affairs, he must take them by surprise.
In this manner a Staphylinus cinnamopterus, Grav., was surprised
while in the act of devouring an Anomoglossus pusillus, Say, having
first, to guard against its escape, eaten off four of its legs.

In another instance, a Dyschirius globulosus, Say, was observed
to spring upon a small salmon-coloured maggot-like larva, and, after
disabling it, to start off to select a proper place to devour it. After
the lapse of several minutes it returned to drag its victim under a
small clod of dirt and leisurely feast upon it.

After the same manner a Bradycellus rupestris, Say, was surprised
under a stone while eating a small white thread-like worm.

Miscellaneous. 351

Another family of beetles whose hitherto almost untarnished repu-
tation it seems to have fallen to my lot to soil is the Coccinellide.
With the exception of Hpilachna borealis, Fabr., the larva of which
feeds upon the vines of the gourd family*, these insects in our
country have been considered strictly carnivorous, although several
European species are known to deviate from this rule.

This season, specimens of Megilla maculata, Deg., have been taken
while feeding upon the pollen of the dandelion (Taraxacum dens-
leonis) ; and it is not at all improbable that the pollen of other plants
also forms a part of their diet, as they are rather common upon the
blossoms of plants and fruits.

No accurate estimation of the value of the Coleoptera could be
obtained without including the Telephoride. Besides Chaulio-
gnathus pennsylvanicus, Forst., which has been found feeding upon
the larve of the Conotrachelus nenuphar, Hbst. +, and Telephorus
bilineatus, Say, which is such a powerful auxiliary in checking the
ravages of the western locust ¢, Podabrus tomentosus, Say, has been
observed feeding upon the cotton-wood gall-lice, Pemphigus populi-
vene, Fitch, and P. populicaulis, Fitch. These beetles some-
times place themselves at the opening of the gall, occasionally as
many as four together, and catch the mature lice as they attempt an
egress, and sometimes plunge their flat head and thorax into the
eavity and draw forth and devour large and small indiscriminately.
During the latter part of June and the beginning of July these beetles
are very abundant, not only upon trees affected by gall-lice, but upon
other plants also.—Jllinois State Lab. of Nat. Hist., Nov. 1880.

Giant Squd (Architeuthis) abundant in 1875 at the Grand Banks.
By A. E. VERrixe.

From Capt. J. W. Collins, now of the U.S. Fish Commission, I
learn that in October 1875 an unusual number of giant squids
were found floating at the surface, on the Grand Banks, and mostly
entirely dead and more or less mutilated by birds and fishes. In
very few cases they were not quite dead, but entirely disabled.
These were seen chiefly between N. lat. 44° and 44° 30’, and be-
tween W. long. 49° 30’ and 49° 50’. He believes that between
twenty-five and thirty specimens were secured by the fleet .from
Gloucester, Mass., and that as many more were probably obtained
by the vessels from other places. They were cut up and used as
bait for codfish. For this use they are of considerable value to
the fishermen. Captain Collins was at that time in command of the
schooner ‘ Howard,’ which secured five of these giant squids. These
were mostly from 10 to 15 feet long, not including the arms, and
averaged about 18 inches in diameter. The arms were almost
always mutilated. The portion that was left was usually from 3 to
4 feet long, and, at the base, about as large as a man’s thigh.

One specimen, when cut up, was packed into a large hogshead

* Am. Ent. o. s. vol. il. pp. 12 & 373.

t+ Am. Ent. o. s. vol. 1. pp. 35 & 51.
t Report U.S. Ent. Com. vol. i. p. 302.

oon Miscellaneous.

tub, having a capacity of about 75 gallons, which it filled. This tub
was known to hold 700 lbs. of codfish. The gravity of the Archi-
teuthis is probably about the same as that of the fish. This would
indicate more nearly the actual weight of one of these creatures than
any of the mere estimates that have been made, which are usually
much too great. Allowing for the parts of the arms that had
been destroyed, this specimen would, perhaps, have weighed nearly
1000 lbs.

Among the numerous other vessels that were fortunate in secur-
ing this kind of bait, Capt. Collins mentioned the following :—
The schr. ‘Sarah P. Ayer,’ Capt. Oakly, took one or two. The
‘K. R. Nickerson,’ Capt. M‘Donald, secured one that had its arms
and was not entirely dead; so that it was harpooned. Its tentacular
arms were 36 feet long. Theschr.‘ Tragabigzanda, Capt. Mallory,
secured three in one afternoon. These were from 8 to 12 feet long, not
including the arms. These statements are confirmed by other fisher-
men, some of whom state that the ‘* big squids ” were also common,
during the same season, at the ‘* Flemish Cap,”’ a bank situated some
distance north-east from the Grand Banks.

The cause of so great a mortality among these great Cephalopods
can only be conjectured. It may have been due to some disease
epidemic among them, or to an unusual prevalence of deadly para-
sites or other enemies. It is worth while, however, to recall the
fact that these were observed at about the same time, in autumn,
when most of the specimens have been found cast ashore at New-
foundland, in different years. This season may, perhaps, be just
subsequent to their season for reproduction, when they would be
so much weakened as to be more easily overpowered by parasites,
disease, or other unfavourable conditions.—Amer. Journ. Sct., March
1881.

On the Histolysis of the Muscles of the Larva during the Postem-
bryonic Development of the Diptera. By M. H. Vrattanss.

It has long been known that all the muscles of the larva of the
fly disappear at the moment when the insect passes into the pupa
state ; but no observer seems to me to have studied the phenomena
which accompany this disappearance, known under the name of
histolysis. In my investigations upon this subject I have examined
more than 400 sections* made across entire larye and pup of
Musca vomitoria, previously fixed by picric acid, hardened by alcohol,
and coloured with carmine. To arrive at a correct understanding
of the phenomena which characterize the histolysis of muscle, it is
desirable, in the first place, to determine exactly the structure of
the primitive bundle in the larva. Before the latter has become
motionless the primitive bundle, observed in a transverse section,
presents a sarcolemma enclosing the contractile mass, which ex-
hibits the characteristic pattern of Cohnheim’s areas, and,
further, nuclei. Of these, some are situated beneath the sarco-
lemma, the others in the heart of the contractile mass ; it is difficult

* All these sections are preserved,

Miscellaneous. 353

to distinguish a double contour in them ; they are lenticular, pretty
strongly coloured red by carmine, and present in their interior some
darker granules. From the first day of pupal life the primitive
bundles thus constituted begin to disappear, and this according to
two different modes, both of which may be observed in the same
animal. One of these modes is characterized by the excessive
activity and proliferation of the muscular nuclei; the other, on the
contrary, by their degenerescence and death.

1. Disappearance of the Muscle accompanied by Proliferation of the
Nuclei.mIn the bundles which disappear in accordance with this
mode, the sarcolemma has disappeared even before the envelope of
the pupa has acquired its characteristic brown appearance ; the con-
tractile substance has become homogeneous; the nuclei, both those
situated beneath the sarcolemma and those in the midst of the con-
tractile mass, have become spherical, and acquired the property of
being coloured by carmine of a very dark purplish red, which cha-
racterizes them. Such a nucleus soon acquires the value of a
complete cell ; it is surrounded by a layer of protoplasm, which is
itself clothed with an enveloping membrane. In this protoplasm
are seen four or five spherical granules of a bright rose-colour ;
these granules enlarge, and soon attain the size of the nucleus, when
there is produced a mulberry-like mass composed of five or six
grains lodged in a common enyelope. One of these grains, the true
muscular nucleus, is of a purple-red, while the others are bright
rose-colour. The membrane soon disappears, and the purple and
rose-coloured nuclei separate.

This proliferation of the muscular nucleus takes place on the spot ;
and the contractile substance becomes absorbed around it to lodge
these new formations. These light rose-coloured nuclei, the mode
of formation of which we have just seen, multiply in their turn by
a mode analogous to that which gave them birth. In proportion as
the embryonic cells thus produced increase in number the contrac-
tile substance is absorbed. In a section the primitive bundle then
appears constituted as follows:—The contractile substance, which
has become perfectly homogeneous, exhibits a deeply notched sinu-
ous border ; these sinuosities are occupied by the embryonic cells,
due to the proliferation of the muscular nuclei ; and they are deeper
in proportion as this accumulation of embryonic cells is more con-
siderable. The central part of the contractile mass appears pierced
with holes of irregular outline, filled with embryonic cells due to
the proliferation of the intramuscular nuclei.

At a more advanced stage the place that was occupied by the
muscular bundle is indicated only by a mass of embryonic cells in
course of incessant proliferation.

2. Disappearance of the Muscle accompanied by the Degenerescence
and Death of its Nuclei.—After the disappearance of the sarcolemma
the muscular nuclei appear with a very distinct envelope presenting
a double contour; they still retain their lenticular form; their
centre is occupied by a small spherule formed of fine granules, which
are then the only coloured parts of the nucleus. The granules

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. vii. 26

354 Miscellaneous.

which constitute this spherule become fewer and fewer; they seem
to separate from each other ; and finally they disappear ; the nucleus
is then represented only by its envelope, which looks like an empty
shell. While the nucleus is undergoing these transformations the
contractile substance gradually disappears, melting away, so to
speak, and this in so regular a manner that the general form of the
bundle is not altered. The product of this sort of dissolution seems
to be a colourless very finely granular substance, enveloping the
portion of the contractile mass that has not yet disappeared. In
this granular mass we find the muscular nuclei in their place and
in all the degrees of degeneration that I have just indicated.

Thus the muscles of the larva are destroyed at the moment when
the latter passes to the pupa state, and this in two quite different
modes. In the first case the muscular nuclei, becoming active, pro-
liferate and give origin to a whole swarm of embryonic cells; and
these grow and multiply at the expense of the contractile mass,
which seems to disappear before their invasion. In the second case
the muscular nuclei seem to degenerate and die, while the contrac-
tile substance gradually disappears as by a regular solution.—
Comptes Rendus, February 21, 1881, p. 416.

On a new Form of Segmental Organ in the Trematodes.
By M. E. Mack.

The authors who have observed the ciliated organs in connexion
with the vasculo-excretory apparatus of the Trematodes (Thiry,
Biitschli, J. Fraipont) have described them in the species that they
have studied as little ciliated funnels, often unicellular, each bearing
upon a differentiated plate a vibratile flagellum. In studying a
small Distomum from the intestine of Vespertilio murinus we have
ascertained the existence of a very distinct conformation.

The ciliated organ is single. It is a pretty large cup situated in
the median line towards the posterior third of the body, immediately
beneath the transverse vitelloduct. Its diameter is nearly half that
of the ventral disk, which is situated a little above it. Its orifice,
turned towards the ventral surface of the body, is clothed with a
row of long vibratile cilia, which, when they are in movement, give
it the aspect of one of the ciliated wheels of certain Rotifera. From
this ciliated funnel start four vessels. The two superior are directed
upwards, and soon elude observation. The two inferior have a
transverse direction; after a short course they open each into the
corresponding branch of the great terminal cavity of this apparatus.

This Distomum has great analogy with D. ascidia of Van Beneden.
It differs from it, however, in the place occupied by the vitello-
genes. Instead of being in the anterior part of the body, in front
of the second disk, they occupy its posterior part. ‘They are two
ramified glands in the form of an H, situated below the ovary,
against the upper extremity of the two large branches of the excre-
tory vesicle; the transverse vitelloduct passes immediately above
the ciliated organ in question, and presents a pyriform dilatation in
its median part. The intestine is formed by two wide ceca, which

Miscellaneous. . oon

scarcely reach the level of the second disk— Comptes Rendus, Feb-
ruary 21, 1881, p. 420.

On the Circulation and Respiration of the Ophiuride.
By M. N. Aposrorives.

Having had at my disposal numerous living Ophiurans in the
laboratories of Roscoff, the Sorbonne, and Port Vendres, I have
been able to apply to these animals peculiar processes of fine injec-
tion; and these processes have furnished me with novel results,
which I have the honour to communicate to the Academy. My in-
vestigations have been made upon the following species :—Ophiura
teaturata, Lam.; Ophiura albida, Forbes ; Ophiocoma granulata,
jiliformis, and neglecta, Forbes ; and Ophiocoma rosula, Johnst.

1. After a successful injection of the aquiferous system, on dis-
secting the interbrachial space of the madreporic plate, we come
upon a dilated whitish canal, rendered rigid by calcareous plates ;
and on tearing this canal we see, towards the middle, a brownish
inflated mass, the supposed heart of authors, on the side of which
there is a fillet containing the injected material. This fillet is the
sand-canal. This experiment, frequently repeated upon different
species, shows that the sand-canal becomes injected at the same
time as the aquiferous system, and that the supposed heart is inde-
pendent of that system; further, the particles of injected material
found outside the madreporic plate prove that the sand-canal, ex-
tending from the aquiferous ring to that plate, establishes a direct
communication between the aquiferous system and the exterior.

2. “ The heart is the true centre of the circulation .... itis @
plexus of anastomosing vessels which wnites the two rings, oral and
aboral.” It is thus that M. H. Ludwig defines the structure and
function of the heart. With regard to the two rings, at the discovery
of which he arrived by coloration with hematoxyline, he admits that
he knows “neither their contents nor their structure.”

The organ called the heart presents very various structures and
relations. By a careful dissection it is easy to see that it has an
elongated form, and is produced into a rectilinear canal going to
the madreporic plate; an injection, forced into the brown mass
which represents it, immediately fills this prolongation and appears
on the outer surface of the madreporic plate. Its structure, when
studied in a heart taken from a living animal, shows that it is a
gland with a proper excretory canal opening outward, and not an
organ of circulation. On each side of this hitherto misunderstood
gland we see two small fibrous bands, directed laterally towards
the base of the arms ; they become vividly coloured by hematoxyline,
like the analogous bands which sustain the Polian vesicles; but
the liquid injected into the heart never went in their direction.

3. An injection forced between the integument and the digestive
tube (that is to say, into the general cavity) never shows itself ex-
ternally, and never penetrates into the aquiferous system. The
general cavity is therefore entirely closed ; it is formed of a widened
portion surrounding the digestive tube (peristomachal space), which

356 * Miscellaneous.

contracts at its upper part to lodge the ambulacral ring, and sends
a flattened prolongation to the dorsal surface of the arms (dorsal
space). Within the aquiferous ring we find the nervous band form-
ing a complete ring around the cesophagus. ‘To find this we have
to tear a membrane which envelops it and separates it from the
general cavity ; then we see the injection which fills the space situ-
ated beneath it and surrounds the nervous system (perinervous
space). If, now, we make a section of an arm, we find in the lower
part a furrow hollowed out in the discoidal ossicle, and which con-
tains the ambulacral canal and the brachial nerve. This latter,
flattened and bent into a crescent-like form, is in contact with the
canal by its thin margins, and thus bounds a rounded space inde-
pendent of the cavity which surrounds it (radial space). What are
the relations of the perinervous space and of the radial space to the
general cavity? Around each ambulacral canal going to an arm
there is a space hollowed out in the calcareous pieces and connected
with the general cavity ; in the same way, around every nerve issu-
ing from the ring there is a space communicating with the envelope
of the band. Now these two spaces advance to meet each other, at
the same time as the parts which they contain, and unite at the
level of the furrow, thus placing the perinervous space widely in
communication with the general cavity. The two spaces unite into
one, which occupies the whole cavity of the furrow enveloping the
vessel and the nerve (peripheral space), and occupying the circular
interspace between these two organs (radial space). Lastly the
general cavity communicates with the incrusted envelope already
indicated as surrounding the sand-canal and the heart, which was
long regarded as the sand- canal itself (stone-canal of authors).

These observations show that no system of proper canals exists,
but spaces in close connexion with the general cavity.

On observing a living animal from the dorsal side we see its body
swell up and collapse altern ately ; if we turn it over in a liquid con-
taining coloured particles we see a double current around the genital
slits. By injecting a coagulable liquid through one of these slits
we find that the orifice gives access to a large, closed sac, dilated
in its ventral region, contracted towards the back, immersed in the
general cavity, and having on its outer surface the genital utricles.
These sacs, first seen by Ludwig, who suspected their function,
were nevertheless regarded by him as appendages of the generative
organs, and received the name of pouches. Experiment, and espe-
cially the close relations of the sac with the nutritive liquid of the
general cavity, must lead us to consider them true respiratory sacs.

From these facts we regard the circulatory system asformed by the
general cavity and the spaces connected with it; and we think that
the respiratory sacs, by their alternate collapse and dilatation, invite
the blood into the peristomachal cavity and afterwards drive it to
the periphery. This very simple arrangement explains how the
blood, bathing all the organs, respires and is set in motion.—
Comptes Rendus, February 21, 1881, p. 421.

ce ee

—s

THE ANNALS

AND

MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY.
[FIFTH SERIES. ]

No. 41. MAY 1881.

XXXIV.—Seventh Contribution to the Knowledge of the
Fauna of Madagascar*. By Dr. ALBERT GUNTHER, F.R.S.

[Plate XIX. ]

A SMALL collection of reptiles made in the district of Betsileo
contains several very interesting novelties, among them again
a distinct species of Chameleon. The specific variety of this
genus seems to be inexhaustible, and it reminds us in this
respect of Anolis, although, fortunately, the species are dis-
tinguished by more palpable characters.

* The previous contributions are the following :—

1. “Notes on some Mammals from Madagascar,” Proc. Zool. Soc. 1875,

ac
, 2. “Notice of two new Species of Mammals from Madagascar,” Ann.
& Mag. Nat. Hist. 1875, August.

3. “ Descriptions of some new Species of Reptiles from Madagascar,”
bid. 1877, April.

4, “ Description of four new Species of Chameleon from Madagascar,”
Proce. Zool. Soe, 1879, p. 148.

5. “ Description of a new Species of Chameleon from Madagascar,”
Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. 1879, September.

6. “ Description of new Species of Reptiles from Eastern Africa,” zbid.
1880, September.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. vii. 27

358 Dr. A. Giinther on some Reptiles from Madagascar.

Chameleon O’ Shaughnessit, sp. n.

(Pi Xi)

This species is allied to Chameleon Parsonti, from which
and other similarly armed species it differs in the structure of
the skin.

Snout of the adult male produced into two flat compressed
high horns, slightly divergent in front, and covered with
large scutes; the space between them is broad and deeply
concave and covered with rather large shields. Occipital
region flat, slanting from behind forwards, with a rounded
margin behind, and without lateral flaps. A dorsal crest is
indicated by a short row of small pointed tubercles, and ceases
entirely before the middle of the length of the trunk. No
median series of enlarged tubercles on the throat or abdomen.
Skin of the body and tail finely granular, with series of rather
large rounded tubercles; similar more crowded and more
conspicuous tubercles on the throat. Heel without spur or
prominence.

The coloration is now uniform brownish grey, the lower
jaw and throat nearly black, with the tubercles yellowish
white.

I have seen only one specimen of this very distinct species,
from Betsileo ; it isanadult male. It is 153 inches long, the
tail measuring 9 inches.

This species is named in memory of my friend and fellow
labourer Arthur O’Shaughnessy, who had zealously devoted
himself to the study of Lizards, when his useful labours were
interrupted by a premature death (80th Jannary, 1881).

Chameleon brevicornis.

Chameleon brevicorns, Gunther, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1879, p. 148, pl. xii.
fig. A.

Of this species I have now a series of five male specimens
before me, all from Betsileo. The short protuberance of the
snout, from which this species takes its name, grows with age:

Dr. A. Giinther on some Reptiles from Madagascar. 359

in an individual 13 inches long the horn is as long as thediameter
of the orbit, covered with large smooth scales, and concave
above ; it is as long as in the specimen of Chameleon malthe
figured on pl. xu. of the paper quoted. From that species C.
brevicornis 1s readily distinguished by the posterior notch be-
tween the occipital flaps and the large scutes covering these
flaps. In younger specimens the horn is only half or two thirds
of the length of the orbit, or still shorter.

Liophis quinquelineatus, sp. n.

Scales in 21 series. Head short; snout rather pointed ;
eye small, with round pupil. Mostral shield protruding,
extending on to the upper surface of the head; anterior
frontals small, one third the size of the posterior; vertical
rather longer than broad ; occipitals somewhat shorter than
vertical and postfrontals together. Loreal short; one pra-
ocular, not reaching the vertical; two postoculars. Hight
upper labials, the fourth and fifth entering the orbit. Tem-
porals 14+ 2+ 2, the foremost in contact with the lower post-
ocular only. Three lower labials, in contact with the anterior
chin-shields. Ventrals 148; anal divided; subcaudals 46.
Posterior maxillary tooth strong.

Upper parts brown ; a broad margin round the upper jaw
brownish yellow, both colours being divided by a sharply-
defined line. Two narrow dark lines on each side of the body,
and one along the median row of scales on the back. Lower
parts uniform whitish.

Two specimens from Betsileo, Total length 17 inches,
the tail measuring 3 inches.

Pseudoxyrhopus microps, sp. n.

Jan described under the name of Homalocephalus a genus
of Colubrine Snakes from Madagascar which he associated
with the Coronellines. I am inclined to place it with the larger
and more-developed Colubers; and whilst admitting the
Snake described by him as the type of a distinct genus, I am
compelled to change the name, which is preoccupied in Ento-
mology. The character of mixed (simple and paired) sub-
caudals must be set aside in the diagnosis of the genus, as a
second species (described here) possesses paired subcaudals only.

PY hss

360 Mr. G.A. Boulenger on a new Species of Frog.

This second species may be characterized thus :—Scales
in 25 series. Head depressed, flat, rather narrow, like
that of an Oxyrhopus. Snout flat, obtuse. Hye very
small. Rostral shield broad, just reaching the upper surface
of the head; anterior frontals half the size of posterior ;
vertical broad, not much longer than broad; occipitals as long
as vertical and postfrontals together. Loreal elongate; one
preocular, reaching the upper surface of the head, but not
the vertical ; two postoculars. Hight upper labials, the fourth
and fifth entering the orbit. Temporals 1+2+3, the fore-
most in contact with the lower postocular only. Four lower
labials in contact with the anterior chin-shields. Ventrals
228; anal divided; subcaudals more than 50 (tail injured).
Dentition diacrantherian.

Upper parts uniform black, lower whitish.

One specimen from Betsileo. Total length 54 inches, the
tail (restored) measuring 8 inches. Feeds on frogs.

XXXV.—Deseription of a new Species of Frog from Mada-
gascar. By G. A. BoULENGER.

Rana guttulata.

Vomerine teeth in two small groups behind the level of the
hinder edge of the choane. Head depressed; snout short,
rounded ; loreal region concave; interorbital space as broad as
or slightly broader than the upper eyelid; tympanum small,
hidden. Fingers rather short, first not extending as far as
second; toes rather short, united to the tips by a scarcely
emarginate membrane ; tips of fingers and toes dilated into
small disks; subarticular tubercles small; a blunt, oval, inner
metatarsal tubercle. The hind limb being carried forwards
along the body, the tibio-tarsal articulation reaches the eye.
Skin granular above, smooth beneath; a fold from the eye

On Specimens dredged up from the Gulf of Manaar. 361

to the shoulder; a circular flat gland below each thigh, on
its inner side. Dark brown above, minutely dotted with
yellowish. Male without vocal sacs.

From snout to vent 123 millims.

Five specimens from Betsileo.

Though the tips of the fingers and toes are swollen into
small but very distinct disks, the affinities of this species are
not with those of the genera Hylorana and Polypedates of
authors; it should take its place near to Rana Kuhlii and
fh. Liebigit. R. guttulata is the only Madagascar form of
either Rana, Hylorana, or Polypedates which has the tym-
panum hidden.

XXXVI.—Supplementary Report on Specimens dredged up
Jrom the Gulf Manaar, together with others from the Sea in
the Vicinity of the Basse Rocks and from Bass’s Straits
respectively, presented to the Liverpool Free Museum by
Capt. H. Cawne Warren. By H. J. Carter, F.R.S. &e.

[Plate XVIII. }

AFTER my “Report” on the specimens from the Gulf of
Manaar had been published (‘ Annals,’ 1880, vol. v. p. 437),
I received for examination, through my friend Mr. Thomas
H. Higgin, F.L.S., of Liverpool, a few more specimens
dredged up from the Gulf of Manaar, together with some
from the sea in the vicinity of the Basse Rocks off the S.E.
coast of Ceylon, and from Bass’s Straits, between Australia
and ‘Tasmania, respectively, forming the remaining portion of
the same collection presented to the Liverpool Free Museum
by Capt. H. Cawne Warren in 1879 (viz. bearing the register
number -'26.-9:,79)""). ‘3

With reference to the specimens from the Gulf of Manaar,
which were obtained opposite Tuticorin, and those from the
sea in the vicinity of the Basse Roks (all together very few
in number), there is little to be said beyond the fact that they
present the same facies and are of the same kind as those
already noticed (op. et loc. cit.) ; but as they contain a few
new species as well as a repetition of others already mentioned,
it will only be necessary to describe the former here, and give
the rest together in a list at the end of the Report.

Among the new species is a Rotalia which is almost a fac-
simile of F. spiculotesta, but with an arenaceous covering,
which enables me, in the “ Observations,” once more to
state my reasons for regarding Squamularia varians and 8S.

362 Mr. H. J. Carter on Specimens

scopula as not only allied, but as furnishing instances of the
lowest and least complicated forms of the nautiloid test among
the Foraminifera; while the presence of Gypsina melobesiordes,
intercalated with the layers of a Melobesia and plentifully
accompanied by Holocladina pustulifera and Carpenteria
utricularis, together with a variety of sponges and other
minute organisms in small quantities, testifies not only to the
great part which the Foraminifera have taken in the formation
of many of these so-called “ Melobesian nodules,” but to the
number of beings which have lived on and have become over-
grown by the lamine of which they are chiefly composed,
during their progressive formation.

Among the new species of sponges may be mentioned Cliona
Warrent (so designated to commemorate not only the gift of
these valuable specimens, but their having been dredged from
the bottom of the sea also by Capt. Warren), together with
two new species of Discodermida.

Again, with reference to the specimens from Bass’s Straits
referred to me for observation, it may be stated briefly that
they chiefly consist of calcareous Polyzoa, which have over-
grown different kinds of sponges, whose forms they now re-
spectively represent ; for in many instances the sponge may be
seen inside the case formed by the Polyzoon. Indeed it looks
as if these specimens had been dredged from a bed of sponges
which had become invaded, overgrown, and thus more or less
destroyed by a colony of Polyzoa.

Among the sponges, however, there are a few interesting
forms which can easily be recognized as new species ; and these
will be described in their proper places :—viz. two which
appear to belong to the genus Aos, also a Dictyocylindrus
marked by an unusual development in quantity of the echi-
nating spicule, and a specimen of Hchinonema typicum, which,
together with HZ. anchoratum, from other collections, I have for
the first time fully described, having hitherto only mentioned
them by name. ‘There are also several specimens of Dystdea
Kirkii, Bk., an Australian species of my group “ Arenosa”’
among the ‘‘ Psammonemata,” which appears to be exceed-
ingly abundant everywhere on the southern coast of this great
continent, although the Bass’s-Straits specimens in particular
are not very fine; still it has afforded me an opportunity of
going into the whole history of Dystdea, and of giving a full
description of the Australian species from the total number of
specimens of the latter that have come under my obser-
vation. ,

It should be remembered, as stated in the first “ Report,”
that all the specimens are dry.

dredged up from the Gulf of Manaar. 363

Specimens from the Gulf of Manaar and Basse Rocks.
FORAMINIFERA.

Gypsina melobesiordes.

I observe that many of the ‘‘ Melobesian nodules” in the
Gulf of Manaar are chiefly made up of layers of Melobesie
intercalated with Gypsina melobestoides, Holocladina pustuli-
fera, and Carpenteria utricularis ; so that, as before stated, the
Foraminifera are as much engaged in forming them as the
Calcareous Algee. How far they may be built upon by various
kinds of sponges and other organisms afterwards (that is, as
they are progressively enlarged by such lamination) must de-
pend a great deal on accidental circumstances; but there can
be no doubt that, if ever fossilized, they will each contain a
great variety of organic remains. Hence we should not be
surprised at finding nodules in the Chalk similarly constituted
in this respect.

Rotalia arenacea, vn. sp. (Pl. XVIII. fig. 10.)

Test translucent, parasitic, sessile, subcircular, subtrochoid,
flat towards the margin. ‘Trochoid portion formed of a spire
of nautiloid chambers (fig. 10, a), contrasting strongly in its
brown colour, as seen through the test, with the flat part
(fig. 10, 6), which appears to be without chambers and colour-
less. Composed throughout of a heterogeneous mixture of
minute angular grains of quartz mixed with the remains of
microscopic organisms. Size of largest specimen about
1-45th inch in diameter, of which the central half is occupied
by the coloured or nautiloid part mentioned.

Hab. Marine, on hard objects; in company with Rotalia
spiculotesta.

Loc. Gulf of Manaar and Basse Rocks.

Obs. This is almost a facsimile of L. spiculotesta, with
which it is associated; and but that the test of the latter is
formed of calcareous spiculiform bodies produced by the animal
itself, while that of the former is composed of foreign material
(grains of quartz &c.), with which the peculiar spiculiform
bodies of the latter, too, are often mixed, I think there would be
hardly any appreciable difference. It is much more abundant
than LR. spiculotesta, whose shell is somewhat larger, whiter
towards the margin or in the uncoloured portion, and darker
in the centre. The flattened rim, although extremely thin,
still may be chambered.

It is remarkable that 2. concamerata (Williamson, Recent

364 Mr. H. J. Carter on Specimens
Foram. of Great Britain, 1857, p. 52, fig. 104, pl. iv.), which

has a poriferous calcareous test, and, in its parasitic form, is
very common on the root-portion of Laminaria bulbosa here
(Budleigh-Salterton, Devon), is always surrounded by an
accumulation of quartz-sand, apparently taken up by its sar-
codic cuticle, which accumulation often extends so far up as
to cover the summit, and thus conceal the original test, when
it so far very much resembles R. arenacea. Indeed William-
son’s Lt. inflata (op. cit. p. 50, figs. 93, 94, pl. iv.), which was
found on thzs coast, has an arenaceous test; and it may be
that this form, after all, is his 2. concamerata, in which the
arenaceous layer has been retained; while the calcareous one
still presents the nautiloid spire of chambers ¢nside, as in R.
arenacea. Thus, as I have before stated (‘ Annals,’ 1877),
the arenaceous test may be as much perforated as the original
calcareous one, whose pores or perforations may for some time
be seen through it, although, from the heterogeneous character
of the material in every respect, they cannot be so regular or
so distinct. Ihave madea similar statement before regarding
the perforated state of arenaceous tests termed by authors
“imperforate”? (‘ Annals,’ 1877, vol. xix. pp. 204, 205,
pl. xiii. figs. 7f/and 23-29). In short, it seems to me to be
an axiom that every Loraminifer possessing a calcareous, may
have an arenaceous representative test, which also seems to hold
good among the sponges, wherein the same form may at one
time belong to the Psammonemata and at another to the
Rhaphidonemata, &c.; that is, the fibre in the first instance
may be axiated with foreign bodies, and in the second with
bodies (spicules) formed by the sponge itself (‘ Annals,’
1875, vol. xvi. p. 126, Notes Introductory to a Study of the
Spongida).

Here, too, I might allude to Squamularia varians (‘ Annals,’
1870, vol. v. p. 321, pl. v. fig. 1, &c.), which, having appeared
to me to be the ‘ arenaceous representative” of Max
Schultze’s genus, justified this name. All are aware that
Max Schultze in his ‘ Organismus,’ &c., and Dr. Carpenter, in
his ‘ Introduction,’ took the form to which Max Schultze
gave the name “ Squamulina” for the basis of their classifi-
cations, on account of its simplicity; but Max Schultze’s
specimen was smooth, imperforate, and calcareous, as the
original diagnosis points out, viz. :—“‘ Schale einer plancon-
vexen, flachen Linse gleichend, mit der planen Seite festge-
heftet, kalkig, eine einfache, ungetheilte Hohlung einschlies-
send. Hine gréssere Oeffnung auf der convexen Seite; feine
Poren fehlen” (‘Organismus der Polythalamien,’ Foramini-

feren, 1854, p. 56,'Tab. vi. figs. 16, 17). Hence objections

dredged up from the Gulf of Manaar. 365

have been made to my nomenclature; but if I am right in
assuming the “axiom” just mentioned, then S. varians is
as much a Squamulina as the smooth (g/latt) calcareous test
first observed by Max Schultze on the sides of “ the glass”’ at
Ancona. Polymorpha_ silicea, which Max Schultze also
found at this place, and has figured next to his Sguamulina
levis (op. cit. Tab. vi. fig. 10), 1s an arenaceous form of
D’Orbigny’s calcareous Foraminifer, and therefore an in-
stance in point.

Perhaps I may be also pardoned for again introducing
Squamulina scopula (Haliphysema Tumanowiczit, Bk.), which
most observers will not admit to be a species of Squamulina.
Thus Mobius, in his late valuable work on Foraminifera of
the Mauritius (‘ Beitriige zur Meeresfauna der Insel Mauritius
und der Seychellen, mit 14 Tafeln, 1880,’ a copy of which he
kindly sent me), observes at p. 75, ‘‘ Da aber Bowerbank’s
Haliphysema mit Schwammnadeln und diesen dhnlichen
Fremdkérpern besetzt war, so durfte sie dem Schultze’schen
Gattungsbegriff Sqguamulina nicht untergeordnet werden,
sondern sie musste als eine eigene Thiergattung erhalten
bleiben.” But in his arrangement Squamulina scopula
(Haliphysema Tumanowiczti, Bk.) is placed at the com-
mencement (that is, at the bottom of his Foraminifera), under
the heading “ Imperforata ;”’ so that at least it would come
near to Squamulina. Still, from what I have stated about the
perforation of arenaceous tests being, mutatis mutandis, the
same as that of the poriferous calcareous ones, and his figures
of “ Haliphysema Tumanowiczii” (Taf. i. fig. 4) actually
representing an extension of the sarcode in pseudopodiform
filaments from all parts of its arenaceous test, [ am still more
at a loss to conceive how this kind of test generally can be
called ‘ imperforate.”

Admitting, then, for argument that Squamulina scopula
should form a distinct genus under the term “ Haliphysema,”
it may be asked, ‘‘ upon what grounds is this done when its
podal disk so closely represents Squamulina varians that this
part must be considered the test, and the erect development a
prolongation in this form of the oral aperture?” This may
be answered by another question, viz. ‘‘ Was Carpenteria, in
1858, so named from a similar prolongation of zs oral aper-
ture to that of Squamulina scopula, which was not discovered
until 1877 (‘ Annals,’ vol. xx. p. 68)?” Then it is the ¢est,
and not the appendages, which should afford the generic name ;
hence I cannot help thinking that Squamulina varians and
S. scopula, which abound here together on the root of Lami-
naria bulbosa, are, with perhaps a very slight approach to a

366 Mr. H. J. Carter on Specimens

polythalamous interior of the podal part, which is the test in
the latter, generically the same. Otherwise of what calcareous
foraminiferal test is the arenaceous Squamulina scopula the
representative ?

SPONGIDA.
CARNOSA.
Halisarca rubitingens, n. sp. (provisional).

Amorphous, indefinitely spreading and agglomerating to-
gether every thing in its course, at the same time that the
whole is tinged externally by its red colour, appearing in the
form of a thin membrane when stretched across cavities, com-
posed of polygonal divisions (cells) in juxtaposition, filled
with granular contents in which the pigment is situated.
Divisions varying in size under 5-6000ths inch in diameter.

Hab. Marine.

Loc. Gulf of Manaar.

Obs. At first Halisarca rubitingens appears like a Hilden-
brantia; but the absence of distinct cellular structure, no
conceptacles, and its greater thinness are opposed to this view; at
the same time these characters do not satisfy me as to its being
a species of Halisarca ; hence I have named it ‘ provisionally”
(that is, until it has received examination in the living state).

PSAMMONEMATA.

Hircinia clathrata, n. sp.

Skeleton kerataceous, massive, sessile, lobate; lobate por-
tions passing into thick digital processes, subbranched, hollow,
clathrate. ‘Texture stiff, resilient. Colour light brownish
yellow. Surface irregularly clathrous, covered with minute
poimts (conuli). Structure uniformly reticulate, chiefly com-
posed of simple, solid, translucent, amber-coloured fibre, here
and there charged with foreign bodies (quartz-grains and
sponge-spicules), especially towards the surface, where the
“points ”’ are all areniferous; forming an irregularly fissured,
clathrous, thin wall, varying under a quarter of an inch in
thickness, which presents itself under the general form men-
tioned. Size varying from 6 to 12 inches in height and breadth.

Hab. Marine.

Loc. Gulf of Manaar; Red Sea.

Obs. I have never seen to my knowledge any thing but
specimens of the skeleton of this sponge, which, being very
tough and durable, have in all probability been picked off the
beach ; at the same time, if they had been taken alive and

dredged up from the Gulf of Manaar. 367

preserved in spirit with the sarcode present, they would have
so much resembled other species of Mircinia of a like kind
that, after all, we should have to fall back upon the skeleton
for specific differences. Here, however, the clathrous charac-
ter and hollow condition of the mass (for its general form is
only represented by a comparatively thin wall of sponge) are
so striking, together with its great abundance and luxuriant
erowth, if one may judge by the specimens, that it can hardly
fail to be recognized.

There is a similar sponge at the Mauritius; but although
it presents the same clathrous character, it is massive and
solid throughout, with a dark purple-red sarcode; so there is
no confounding the two. But the sarcode of H. clathrata may
have been so coloured, or it might have had a dark dermal
sarcode ; for both the owter part of the Mauritius specimen and
H. clathrata generally are, by ‘washing out,” of the same
colour. So far, then, it is desirable to see these sponges alive,
when, of course, the sarcode is present. Such remarks apply
to specimens of the Hircinida generally. My Mauritius
specimen came to me through Dr. Dickie in 1872, to whom
Col. Pike, U.S. Consul there, had sent it; but in all proba-
bility the hollow species, viz. H. clathrata, is also to be found
in the sea about that island.

RHAPHIDONEMATA.

Family 2. Cavochalinida.
Group 5. TUBULODIGITATA.

Tubulodigitus communis, n. sp.

Rhizomatous at the base, consisting of a mass of short,
bullate, subbranched, more or less laterally united, erect
digital processes, rising from an irregular spreading growth of
a similar kind. Stiff, resilient. Colour purple, becoming
light brown when washed out. Processes tubular; vents
single, terminal. Spicule of one form only, viz. acerate, fusi-
form, gradually sharp-pointed, smooth ; smaller in the axis
than at the circumference of the fibre. Size of specimen
about 9 inches in diameter each way, by 3 inches high.

Hab. Marine.

Loc. Gulf of Manaar.

Obs. In my “ Notes Introductory to a Study of the Spon-
gida” (‘ Annals,’ 1875, vol. xvi. p. 141) this kind of Chalina
has been described; but although the character of the
“‘ Family ” is recorded, I had not time then to give an illus-

368 Mr. H. J. Carter on Specimens

tration of the ‘ Group” at p. 194 (b¢d.), which is herewith
done and named for this purpose. I expect that the species
is common ; but it differs from the group “ Digitata,”’ which is
even perhaps still more common, in the processes being hollow
or tubular instead of solid; that is, the vents of the excretory
system open interiorly into the general tube (“ cloaca,” Bk.),
terminating at the extremity in the former, instead of here and
there, laterally, along the outside of the cylindrical process in
“ Digitata.”

ECHINONEMATA.

Halichondria plumosa, Johnston.

A small patch of the microcioniform variety (see Bower-
bank’s ‘ British Spongiade,’ 1874, vol. ii. pl. xxiv. figs. 7-
13), about three quarters of an inch in diameter.

Loc. Gulf of Manaar.

Obs. In company with Microciona afinis and Hymerhaphia
unispiculum, each about the same size, also Leucortis indica,
Hiickel, a calcareous sponge, and Polytrema cylindrica, growing
together on a Melobesian nodule about 14 inch in diameter,

Hymerhaphia eruca.

Of this sponge only one small specimen was found among
the first set of Melobesian nodules that I examined; but in
these, the second set, it has been found in three or more places
in abundance; so the existence of this remarkable species is
thus established.

Loc. Basse Rocks.

HOLORHAPHIDOTA.

Amorphina megalorhaphis, n. sp.

Massive, irregularly lobed, tender, white. Surface irre-
gular. Structure amorphous, confused; traversed by branches
of the excretory canal systems, which are large and terminate
respectively in scattered vents. Spicule of one kind only, viz.
acerate, curved, fusiform, gradually sharp~pointed, smooth ;
varying in length from 1-128th to 1-23rd inch. Size of
specimens about 14 inch in diameter each way.

Hab. Marine. Growing over Balan? and sea-bottom.

Loc. Basse Rocks.

Obs. This seems to be a variety of the common British
species Halichondria panicea, chiefly differentiated by the size
of its largest spicules, which is double that of the English

dredged up from the Gulf of Manaar. 369

one. The spicules also of the specimens brought home by
the Rev. A. E. Eaton from Kerguelen’s Island, and others
dredged up by H.M.S. ‘Porcupine’ in the Atlantic Ocean,
are much larger than those of the common British species; so
that this variation may extend even to our own shores, while
the single form, great variety in size, and long attenuation
towards the end of the spicule generally characterize the
species everywhere.

Hlalichondria infrequens, n. sp.

(Pl. XVIIL fig. 9, a-d.)

Of this sponge I can only record its spiculation, which
was found to the extent of half an inch on the surface of
Discodermia sinuosa (to be hereafter mentioned). Spicules of
four forms, viz.:—1, skeleton, acerate, curved, fusiform,
obtusely pointed at the ends, thickly microspined throughout
(fig. 9, a); 2, subskeleton (tibiella), cylindrical, straight or
undulatory, inflated at each end, smooth (fig. 9, 6) ; 3, flesh-
spicule, bihamate, simple, contort, large (fig. 9, c); 4, flesh- -
spicule, equianchorate, rather inclined to the “ angulated ”
(Bowerbank) kind (fig. 9, d). No. 1 forms the body struc-
ture; and 2 is chiefly confined to the surface, where the flesh-
spicules are also most numerous.

Hab. Marine.

Loc. Gulf of Manaar.

Obs. 'Vhe chief character here is the thickly microspined
acerate skeleton-spicule, which may perhaps be the represen-
tative of the spined acerate in Halichondria incrustans.

The Tibiella. (Pl. XVIII. fig. 9, 8.)

From time to time, as it becomes evident that a certain
form of spicule is common to many sponges under various
modifications, it is desirable that a generic name should be
given to it, to avoid periphrasis in description ; and thus I
propose “tibiella” for that spicule so common among the
Fibulifera, Halichondrina, and some of the Suberitida, which
has a distant resemblance to the shin-bone, in which the shaft
may be straight or crooked, cylindrical or fusiform, long or
short, thick or thin, with the extremities simply pointed or
obtuse, or inflated and hastate, or inflated and clavate, spined
all over or only at the extreme end. Such are some of the
modifications which may be presented by Dr. Bowerbank’s
“biclavated cylindrical ” spicules (‘British Spongiade,’ vol.i.,
Terminology, p. 231, pl. 1. fig. 19), and by “no. 2” in the
above description of Halichondria infrequens (Pl. XVIII.
fig. 9, b).

370 Mr. H. J. Carter on Specimens

Cliona Warren, n. sp.

(Pl. XVIII. fig. 6, a-d.)

Burrowing under a layer of Melobesia, and coming to the
surface through circular apertures scattered irregularly over
the Melobesian nodule (fig. 6, a). Colour dark brown now.
Apertures 1-16th to 1-8th inch in diameter; the smaller
ones poriferous and filled with a tuft of pin-like spicules held
together by dark brown sarcode, with their points outwards
(fi. 6, b); the larger ones, being vents, are empty and open
(fiz. 6, c). Spicule of one form only, viz. pin-like; head
almost spherical, neck much constricted ; shaft large, fusiform,
thicker than the head, curved, gradually sharp-pointed, the
whole smooth (fig. 6, d), total length 1-51st inch. Size of
nodule about 14 inch in diameter.

Hab. Marine. Burrowing under Melobesia.

Loc. Gulf of Manaar.

Obs. The form of the spicule generally and there being no
others, together with the dark brown sarcode (when dry),
contrasting strongly with the light-coloured Melobesta through
the circular openings, characterizes this species. As regards
the present colour, it does not differ much from that of Cliona
celata when dry, which in its fresh state may be golden or
chrome-yellow.

Suberttes fistulatus.

In the description of this sponge (in the former report) I
have omitted to mention the presence of a minute, simple,
tricurvate flesh-spicule, about 5-6000ths inch long—that 1s,
about half the length of the equianchorate, which anchorate,
again, in its full development, is so much bent as to cause the
middle arms to be closely approximated.

Thoosa socialis.

Having found a good specimen of this species lining the
sponge-eaten cavities of a Melobesian nodule, and stretching
across them in thin films, a bit of the latter was placed in
water under the microscope for examination, when the pecu-
liar spicule characterizing this species (‘ Annals,’ 1880, vol. vi.
pl. v. fig. 23, a) was found to be accompanied by the same
kind of flesh-spicules as those of Alectona Higgint (ibid.
fig. 25, b,c), while the cake-shaped form (fig. 23, 0, c) was
not present.

This at first appeared to me inexplicable ; but on comparing
the characteristic skeleton-spicule of Thoosa socialis (J. c.)
with that of Alectona Higgini (fig. 25, a) it became evident

dredged up from the Gulf of Manaar. 371

that the two are very nearly allied in form; and as no flesh-
spicules were formerly found with Thoosa socialis, it 1s not
improbable that one is but a variety of the other. The scep-
trellum, however, although alike in form, is more than twice
the size of that in Alectona Higgint, while the linear spicule
is not so long. The “ bit of film” examined having had no
direct connexion with the rest of the sponge lining the cavity,
is proof that these sponge-spicules formed part of the spicu-
lation of Thoosa socialis, and were not accidental occurrences.

Stelletta crassicula, n. sp.

Globular, frm. Colour brown-grey. Surface even, areo-
lar, formed by the spreading heads of the bundles of zone-
spicules, through which those of the anchoring-spicules
project, tympanized in the intervals by the dermal sarcode.
Pores in the dermal sarcode. Vents single, scattered here
and there. Internal structure, as usual, hard and tough; the
bundles of zone- and body-spicules extending nearly to the
centre, as they are large and the specimen very small. Spicules
of six forms, viz. four skeleton- and two flesh-spicules.
Skeleton-spicules:—1, zone-spicule trifid, arms spreading
laterally, slightly extending forwards, and recurved, shaft
long and smooth, gradually sharp-pointed, head 1-360th inch
in diameter, shaft 1-9th inch long; 2, body-spicule large,
acerate, curved, fusiform, gradually sharp-pointed, smooth,
1-9th inch long; 3 and 4, anchor and fork, head of largest
anchor about 1-150th inch in diameter, shaft variable, 1-9th
inch long or more. Flesh-spicules :—5, minute acerate, thin,
curved, fusiform, gradually sharp-poimted, smooth, about
1-80th inch long ; 6, stellate, as usual minute, delicate, with
a variable number of straight arms radiating directly from the
centre without nucleus, about 1-3000th inch in diameter.
Nos. 1-4 are in bundles, the anchors and forks projecting a little
beyond the surface, and the flesh-spicules chiefly confined to
the dermal sarcode. Size 4 inch in diameter.

Hab. Marine. On a Melobesian nodule, attached by the
anchoring-spicules.

Loc. Basse Rocks.

Obs. The smallness of this specimen compared with the
large size of its skeleton and anchoring-spiculation, especially
the projecting heads of the anchors, at once characterizes it ;
but when the dermal acerate flesh-spicule is added, the dis-
tinction of the species becomes complete so far, since I do not
know another instance in which the dermal flesh-spicule is
at the same time smooth and so large.

372 Mr. H. J. Carter on Specimens

Discodermia sinuosa, u. sp.

(Pl. XVIII. fic. 1, ah.)

Surface even, discophorous ; disks (fig. 1, a) at first simple,
in juxtaposition, peltate, then foliate, with shallow denticu-
late margin (fig. 1, 0) ; afterwards more deeply notched and
foreshadowing a trifid division, with a tendency in some of
the notches to assume a circular form (fig. 1, c); then the
same more intensified and larger, when, overlapping each
other én situ, the circular notches become converted into aper-
tures, and then more especially present the sinuous lines which
characterize the species (fig. 1, d); finally transmuted imto
branches which, becoming subdivided towards the extremities,
end in filigree expansions (fig. 1, e), which, in the deeper and
fully-developed structure, interlock with their neighbours by
subround tubercles constricted at the neck, which thus form
a grape-like mass (fig. 1, f). Disk at the commencement or
when first recognizable simple, subcircular, with even margin
and short, central, smooth-pointed shaft projecting inwards,
nail-like, from the lower surface, and encircled above by faint,
broken, concentric dines, about 1-300th inch in diameter
(fig. 1, a). Flesh-spicule minute, fusiform, somewhat inflated
in the centre, microspined and slightly curved (fig. 1, g, h),
abundant throughout, but especially over the discophorous or
external layers. Size of largest specimen, which is consider-
ably worn and has been deprived of its disks, about half an
inch in diameter each way; that of the smallest, which is
thin and spreading, hardly more than the discophorous or
outer layers thick.

Hab. Marine. On Melobesian nodules.

Loc. Gulf of Manaar; Basse Rocks.

Obs. The circular notches of the disks separately, and the
sinuous lines which they present when overlapping each other
in situ, are almost identical with what is seen in Kaliapsis
cidaris; but the absence of papillary projections on the sur-
face in the former at once points out the difference.

Discodermia sceptrellifera, n. sp.

(PI. XVIII. fig. 2, a-h.)

Surface even, discophorous. Colour yellow, becoming
reddish brown under the influence of nitric acid. Disk simple,
circular, with even margin, presenting faint, irregular, con-
centric lines; provided with a short, sharp-pointed, smooth
shaft, projecting inwards, nail-like, from its under surface
(fig. 2, a); soon becoming irregular in its outline (fig. 2, 0),
which assumes a trifid division (fig. 2, ¢), still more developed

dredged up from Bass’s Straits. 373

in fig. 2, d; ultimately passing into a four-armed, lithistid
spicule, whose branches, becoming subdivided towards the
extremities, end in filigree expansions (fig. 2, e), which, in
the deeper and fully developed structure, interlock with their
neighbours by a few straggling subround tubercles (fig. 2, f).
Flesh-spicule short, thick, sceptrelliform, coarsely spined
round the centre and at each of the ends (fig. 2, g, h); ex-
tremely abundant throughout, but especially on the surface.
Size of specimen about + inch in all ways.

flab, Marine... On a Melobesian nodule.

Loc. Gulf of Manaar.

Obs. The specimen of this species had become overgrown
with a layer of Melobesta, and would have remained thus
concealed but foran accidental fracture, which, passing through,
caused it to separate into two portions, one of which, having
been boiled in nitric acid, revealed the character of its spicu-
lation all but the circular form of the disk (fig. 2, a), whose
existence, in description and delineation, is thus inferred. The
specimen is not only small but imperfectly developed; so that
Iam not quite certain that fig. 2, f, represents the ultimate
development of the filigree—that is, as it would be in the
deeper structure.

On the same small nulliporiform nodule, which is not more
than an inch in diameter, there is a portion of Discodermia
aspera, which presents a similar yellow colour, one of Coral-
listes verrucosa overgrown by Hymerhaphia eruca, Carpenteria
utricularis, Rotalia spiculotesta, Polytrema miniaceum, &c.,
showing how many different organisms may exist on one
small Melobesian nodule.

Specimens from Bass’s Straits, South Australia.

CARNOSA.

Halisarca bassangustiarum, un. sp. (provisional).

Among the “ dredgings” from Bass’s Straits are two more
or less thin, light, corrugated, even-margined, subcircular
specimens about an inch in diameter each, one of which is
dark purple, almost black, and the other brown in colour.
Both are charged with globular bodies like cells, about 34
6000ths inch in diameter ; but while these are indistinct in one
of them, they are well-defined, spheroidal, and capsular in the
other. How far these specimens may have been brought to
this state by exposure in the waves and on a hot dry beach I
cannot say; but to expect Halisarca after such exposure to

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. vii. 28

374 Mr. H. J. Carter on Specimens

present any of its original features is out of the question. All,
therefore, that I can add is that the “ brown” specimen in a
smaller state appears again attached to Dictyocylindrus reti-
culata (to be described hereafter) from the same locality, and
charged with the same kind of spherical capsular bodies (? ova),
where it so far manifests all the appearance of Halisarca, that
I can hardly doubt that both are dried specimens of one and
the same, for which I propose the name above given. Neither
becomes gelatinous when soaked in water, although when dry
the brown specimen presents here and there the appearance
of dried glue, which the dark specimen does not. I admit
that this description is not satisfactory ; but under the circum-
stances it cannot be otherwise ; at the same time it is desirable
that it should be recorded, to induce future observation.
Loc. Bass’s Straits.

PSAMMONEMATA.
Dysidea Kirkiti, Bk., 1841.

Massive, sessile, more or less contracted at the base, thick,
erect, more or less compressed, simple, lobate ; lobes passing
into mamilliform, digital, or subbranched processes; some-
times digitate and branched, Chalina-like. Texture subfragile.
Colour, when fresh, purplish or grey. Surface even, fibro-
reticulate, with the interstices tympanized by the dermal
sarcode. Vents terminal, large, situated at the ends of the
lobate, mamilliform, or digital processes, which are often in
a line on a serrated crest or ridge. Pores in the dermal sar-
code. Internal structure fibro-reticulate, traversed by channels
of the excretory canal-systems, which terminate in the vents
just mentioned; fibre composed of foreign bodies (quartz-
grains, sponge-spicules entire and fragmentary, &c.) held
together by a minimum of sarcode in the form of crooked
anastomosing threads, whose interstices being also. tympanized
by sarcode, produce a uniformly areolated tissue, which may
be slightly interrupted by a little development in excess of
the vertical over the transverse fibre. Size variable; the
largest specimen I have seen was about 5 inches long, 4 inches
high, and 14 inch thick. .

Hab. Marine. Growing on hard objects, which, if hollow,
frequently have their interior filled with it.

Loc. 'The whole coast of South Australia; Mauritius and
Cape of Good Hope.

Obs. In the year 1840 “ Rupert Kirk, Esq.,” of Sydney,
Australia, sent to Dr. Bowerbank “about fifty species of various
genera of sponges”’ (Trans. Micr. Soc. London, 1841, vol. i.

dredged up from Bass’s Straits. 375

p- 32); and among them Dr. Bowerbank noticed one almost
identical with Dysidea fragilis, Johnston, to which he gave the
name of “Dysidea Kirkii”’ (ibid. p. 63, pl. vi.). This species
in structural composition appeared to Dr. Bowerbank to be, if
any thing, still more arenated than D. fragilis; thus he states,
“in D. fragilis, Johnston, the primary fibres are often as abun-
dantly arenated as those of the Australian species, while the
secondary ones are only partially filled with extraneous
matter; and in this condition they are more or less tubular ”’
(Brit. Spongiade, 1864, vol. i. p. 212). After this, viz. in
1874, Dr. Bowerbank gave some very good representations of
Dysidea fragilis from specimens now in the British Museum,
which I have examined, but, as they appear when dry and
washed out upon our beach (op. cit. vol. i. pl. Lxix.).

Now Col. Montagu, in 1812, who appears to have first
noticed this sponge on the “south coast of Devon,” called it
Spongia friabilis (Wernerian Mem. 1818, vol. 1. p. 114,
pl. xvi. figs. 1, 2), which Johnston, whe states that Mon-
tagu’s account was “read to the Society on the 9th March,
1812” (Hist. Brit. Sponges, 1842, p. 37, footnote), changed
generically to “Dysidea;”’ so that, besides having examined
Dr. Bowerbank’s type specimens now in the British Museum,
1 am living on the coast where Montagu found the original
specimens ; and, so far as the dead and ‘dried form washed
out on the beach” goes, the descriptions and delineations
respectively are accurate; but noé so as regards the appearance
of this sponge while growing 7 situ on the rocks; for there it
is almost identical with the representation of Spongelia in-
crustans given by Schmidt (Spong. Adriat. Meeres, Taf. i.
fig. 7). Schmidt himself has identified Dystdea fragilis with
Spongelia, Nardo (op. cit. 1866, 2nd Suppl. p. 11), but pro-
visionally, because he had only seen one of the “ dried” and
washed-out specimens to which I have alluded. . It seems to
me therefore that Montagu’s Spongia friabilis of 1812 is
Johnston’s Dysidea fragilis of 1842 and Nardo’s Spongelia of
1847, of which the best representation in the free state that I
have seen has been given by Prof. F. E. Schulze of Spongelia
pallescens (Zeitschrift f. wiss. Zoologie, Bd. xxxu. Taf. v.
fig. 2), the slight variation in appearance between Spongelia
pallescens and S. incrustans here being of no consequence.

To return to Dysidea Kirkii, Bk., I cannot see much
difference in structure between it and Dysidea fragilis, both
with and without the sarcode; but in general form, colour,
and perhaps in the form of the points (conul) on the surface
being less prominent, it differs, as will have been seen by the
above description.

28%

376 Mr. H. J. Carter on Specimens

There is, however, a large specimen (? 3 inches in its longest
diameter) in the Bowerbank collection now in the British
Museum labelled ‘ coast of Suffolk, Dr. W. B. Clarke,” in
which these conuli are turned into little round balls that,
touching each other, give the whole surface a granulated
appearance ; in short they are the conu/i thus inflated, which,
again, are the circumferential terminations of the vertical fibre,
that in this species or variety (for which I would suggest
the name of Dysidea granulata) are more than ordinarily
enlarged.

In my classification, this genus forms the type of the group
“ Ayenosa,”’ which is the last of the family “ Hircinida” in
my order “ Psammonemata,’’ and represents the opposite
state to that of the group “ Euspongiosa,” viz. the first of this
order, with respect to the amount of foreign material which
its fibre contains, inasmuch as, while there is hardly a trace
in the Euspongiosa (ex. gr. Spongia officinalis), there isso much
in Dysidea that it is barely removed from sand itself. Thus
Dysidea bears to Spongia officinalis the same kind of relation
that some of the order Holorhaphidota, whose fibre is almost
entirely composed of spicules, bear to the kerataceous fibre of
some of the Rhaphidonemata, in which the spicules are fre-
quently very scanty.

As regards geographical distribution, the very fact of the
genus Dysidea being the first step towards the development
of the Psammonemata, which may be said to culminate in
Spongia officinalis, where the kerataceous element is almost
every thing, and the arenaceous one or that of foreign bodies
almost nd/, it might be fairly assumed that, if any part of the
order more than another is prevalent over the world, it will be
Dysidea= Spongelia, Nardo; at least, this is the case in the
British Isles, as may be seen by reference to Dr. Bowerbank’s
‘ British Spongiadee ’ (vol. il. 1874), where, with the excep-
tion of a few insignificant specimens of his Spongionella pul-
chella (pl. Ixv. figs. 5-8) and Verongia zetlandica (pl. |xx.
figs. 9-11), nothing but the representations of Dysidea fragilis
is given, Yet the whole order appears to exist in the
greatest luxuriance on the south coast of Australia, especially
about the south-west angle, judging from the specimens
(skeletons for the most part) which have been picked up and
sent to England alone, of which the collections in the British
Museum (that is, including those which belonged to the late
Dr. Bowerbank) represent perhaps the finest and most varied
specimens of the greatest number of species brought together
in Europe. Among these are a vast number of specimens of
Dysidea Kirkit in all states, from crumbling fragility, owing

dredged up from Bass’s Straits. 377

to the absence of sarcode destroyed chiefly by the presence of
sea-salt, to comparative firmness, with the dried sarcode still
left about them; and it is from this numerous collection,
together with several belonging to the Liverpool Free Mu-
seum, which were dredged off Curtis Island, in Bass’s Straits,
by Capt. H. Cawne Warren, that the description above given
has been taken. Among the latter is one on the branches of
a specimen of Mopsea (Isis) enerinula, Milne-Edw., to which
I might add another from Algoa Bay on a specimen of Mopsea
gracilis, Milne-Edw., sent me by my friend Dr. Dickie in
1873.

The kind of arenaceous foreign material in Dystdea Kirkit
will of course depend upon that of the locality: viz. if only
arenaceous, it will be chiefly composed of sand-grains ; if
spiculiferous, of sponge-spicules and their fragments, &c.
But there is one element, viz. a little prism of calcite, generally
banded with brown, yellow, or red, singly or in conjunction,
that might puzzle the observer if it were not stated that this
comes from the disintegrated structure of very thin bivalve
shells like Pinna; hence the prismatic form and banded colours.

The ubiquitous parasite Spongiephaga communis also occa-
sionally intests Dysidea Kirkiit. Again Oscillaria spongelia,
Schulze, appears apparently as a commensal in Spongelia
pallescens, wherein Prof. Schulze has found it even in the
embryo, as his published accounts will show (Zeitschrift f.
wiss. Zoologie, Bd. xxxii. Taf. v. fig. 7, &c.), and also
preparations which he kindly sent me. Marshall, too, repre-
sents an Oscillatorian in the ‘‘ syncytium ”’ of his Psammoclema
ramosum = Dysidea ramosa, Hiickel in sched. (#6. Bd. xxxy.
p- 111, Taf. vii. fig. 15). Spongiophaga communis, how-
ever, is a destroyer, and not a commensal. At what period
these parasites enter the sponge may be a matter for specula-
tion, but can hardly be one of certainty, as in Schulze’s case
they were found in the embryo.

All the specimens of Dysidea Kirkit that I have seen have
been dry; but as Dysideais one and the same with Spongelia,
which Prof. Schulze has studied in the Adriatic while fresh,
I cannot do better than refer the student to his paper for all
this part of the subject (Zeitschrift f. wiss. Zoologie, Bd. xxxii.
p- 117 &c. Taf. v.-vu. 1878).

ECHINONEMATA.

Dictyocylindrus reticulatus, n. sp.

(Pl. XVIII. fig. 7, ac.)
Feathery, branched, tufted, stiff. Colour brown. Surface

378 Mr. H. J. Carter on Specimens

rough, composed of lacinulated tufts projecting through the
reticulate structure, which tufts are the ends of the ultimate
branches flattened and divided into penicilliform processes ;
reticulated structure consisting of sarcode echinated with small
spined spicules. Neither the pores nor the vents seen, from
the contracted state of the tissues; but probably the former
in sarcode tympanizing the interstices of the dermal reticula-
tion, and the latter numerous and small, as is usual in the
Echinonemata. Spicules of two kinds, viz.:—1, skeleton-,
acuate, curved, slightly inflated at the large end, gradually
sharp-pointed, smooth, about 1-40th by 1-1500th inch in its
greatest dimensions (fig. 7, a) ; 2, flesh- or echinating spicule,
clavate, without enlarged head, sharp-pointed, spined through-
out, spines recurved from the point backwards, about 1-240th
by 1-2000th inch in its greatest dimensions (fig. 7, 6c). The
skeleton-spicules form the axial structure, appearing setaceously
at the ends of the penicilliform processes; while the flesh-spi-
cules echinate the meshes of the reticular sarcode most profusely.
Size of branches, of which there are two that appear to have
grown with others from the same point on some hard object,
25 inches high by 14 inch broad in the expanded head.

Hab. Marine.

Loc. Bass’s Straits.

Obs. The characteristic feature of this species is its dermal
reticulation, in which the meshes are densely charged with
the echinating spicules, thus presenting a beautiful and equally
characteristic feature of the Hctyonida or first family of the
order. The spiculation is like that of Déictyocylindrus in
general, but not the same in particular, while the general form
is different from that of all hitherto described species.

It is on a part of this specimen that the specimen of Hali-
sarca bassangustiarum to which I have alluded is attached.

While the rough lacinulated surface above noticed is com-
mon to many of the Echinonemata, there are others which
are as equally and uniformly smooth, like that of the following
species :—

Echinonema typicum, n. sp.

Shrubby, cauliculate, more or less compressed bunch-like
or clustral, consisting of a great number of digital, more or
less branched stalks spreading upwards from a contracted
sessile base; more or less covered throughout by a whitish
incrustation ; branches cylindrical, round, or slightly. com-
pressed, more or less subdivided, terminating in obtuse round
ends. Consistence firm, resilient. Colour white, or brown
when the incrustration has been rubbed off. Surface even,

dredged up from Bass’s Straits. 379

covered with the white incrustation mentioned, in which the
vents appear like small pin-holes scattered numerously over
the whole specimen, connected superficially with branched
stelliform grooves, which are the collapsed channels of the
excretory canal-systems to which they respectively belong.
Pores not seen, but, in all probability, in the dermal sarcode
supporting the incrustation. Internal structure tough, fibrous,
kerataceous. Spicules of two kinds, viz. :—1, skeleton-, acuate,
smooth ; 2, flesh- or echinating spicule, clavate, spined ; the
former chiefly confined to the centre of the kerataceous fibre,
and the latter echinating its surface, while both combined
make up the white incrustation with which the surface is
covered. Size variable, under perhaps 18 inches in diameter.

Hab. Marine.

Loc. South and 8.W. coast of Australia.

Obs. This is perhaps the most abundant species on the
south coast of Australia; and my description has been taken
from at least a bushel of specimens, but all dry, and there-
fore only preliminary to that which may one day be made of
this species when in the fresh state or well preserved in abso-
lute alcohol, and studied after the satisfactory manner followed
by Prof. F. E. Schulze of Gratz. (See “Structure and Ar-
rangement of the Soft Parts in Huplectella aspergillum,”

Voyage of H.M.S. ‘Challenger,’ 1880.)

Echinonema anchoratum, n. sp.

Flat, fan-shaped, thin, more or less stipitate. Like the last
species in every thing but form and spiculation, the latter
only differing in the presence of a small naviculiform equi-
anchorate flesh-spicule. Size variable, under 8 inches in
diameter.

Hab. Marine., Common.

Loc. South coast of Australia.

Obs. The presence of the equianchorate, together with the
general form, distinguishes this from the last species; yet I
have seen some specimens with round cylindrical stalks, like
those of L. typicum, also charged with this little navicular
form of equianchorate, which is the same as that of the Micro-
cionina; so its presence or absence, probably, in the Ectyo-
nida does not go for much in specific determination.

I have given descriptions of these two species, not only
because the former is among the specimens dredged by Capt.
Warren, but because I have alluded to this type by name only
in my “‘ Notes Introductory to a Study of the Spongida”’ (‘An-
nals,’ 1875, vol. xvi. p. 195), as promised in the “ third part”

380 Mr. H. J. Carter on Specimens

of this publication, for the illustration of one of the genera, to be
hereafter included in the provisional group “ Pluriformia.”

Acanthella stipitata, n. sp.

(Pl. XVIII. fig. 8.)

Head globular, branched, aculeate, supported on a long
naked stem. Stiff. Colour now brownish green. Surface com-
posed of aculeations which are the ultimate divisions of the
branches, united together by fenestral expansions of sarcode.
Spicule of one form only, viz. acuate, slightly curved or
undulating, abruptly sharp-pointed, smooth, 25 by 3-1800th
inch in its greatest dimensions (fig. 8) ; arranged in bundles
in the branched head so as to project a little beyond the
sarcode; confusedly in the stem, which is hard and com-
pact. Size :—head 2 inches in diameter; stem, up to where
it commences to branch into the head, 2 inches long by
1-6th inch thick, much worn and pointed towards the end,
which has been broken off from its original point of attach-
ment.

Hab. Marine.

Loc. Bass’s Straits.

Obs. This sponge differs very little from Schmidt's Acan-
thella acuta (Spong. Adriat. Meeres, p. 75, Taf. vi. fig. 7),
except in the size of the spicule, which is about five times
smaller than that of the type specimen in the British Museum.

HoOLORHAPHIDOTA.

Latrunculia POT Pere, Nn. sp.

(Pl. XVIIL. fig. 5, a-c.)

Flat, compressed, circular, thin, cake-like or fungiform,
attached on one side by a constricted portion to a mussel-shell;
texture compact, but not gelatinous. Hard. Colour dark
brown-purple. Surface on the upperside, with which the
peduncular portion is connected, ragged, proliferous, much
darker than the (?) underside, which is even; margin thick,
round, smooth, like the dark part generally. Internal structure
compact, densely spiculous. Spicules of two kinds, viz. :—
1, skeleton-, acerate, curved, subcylindrical, gradually sharp-
pointed, smooth, 1-75th by 1-4000th inch in its greatest
diameters (fig. 5, a); 2, flesh-spicule, sceptrelliform, consisting
of a straight shaft spined over each end entirely and discoidly,
and in two separate rings around the shaft on one side the
middle line, the latter often commingled by an irregular dis-
position of the spines, about 1-857th inch long (fig. 5, 4, c).

dredged up from Bass’s Straits. 381

Skeleton-spicules chiefly confined to the body ; flesh-spicules
to the circumference, on the (?) upperside and darker portions,
arranged perpendicularly in juxtaposition, with the spinous
disk of one end outwards. Size of largest specimen (for there
are two) about 14 inch in horizontal diameter and 1-8th inch
thick.

Hab. Marine.

Loc. Bass’s Straits.

Obs. I have already described and illustrated a species of
this kind from the Red Sea (‘ Annals,’ 1879, vol. i. p. 298,
pl. xxvil. figs. 1-4), but with a differently formed sceptrellum
and of a light colour; the form of the skeleton-spicule, how-
ever, is nearly the same—that is, acerate, not acuate like that
of another much larger and light-coloured undescribed species
from the south-western coast of Australia, viz. “ Freemantle,”
that of the species dredged up by H.M.S. ‘ Porcupine’ in the
Atlantic Ocean, and that first named and described by Bocage,
viz. Latrunculia cratera from St. Iago, in all of which
the sceptrellum is differently formed.

In consistence Latrunculia purpurea is very much like
Halichondria suberea, Johnston, = Suberites domuncula, Sdt.,
and in the manner of growth upon the mussel-shell very much
like Halichondria jicus, Johnston.

AXONA.
In 1867 Dr. Gray gave the name of Axos Cliftont to an

unknown sponge whose spicule on/y had been figured by Dr.
Bowerbank im 1864; and in 1873 Dr. Bowerbank described
the sponge itself under the name of Dictyocylindrus dentatus,
without any allusion whatever to Dr. Gray (for reference in
extenso see ‘ Annals,’ 1879, vol. i. pp. 284-285, where the
subject is fully considered and therefore need not be repeated
in detail here). Taking Dr. Gray’s name “ Awos” for the
genus, | have added two new species (op. et loc. cit.), and
now find among Capt. Warren’s dredgings from Bass’s
Straits (for all the species so far come from the south coast of
Australia) two more, which, however, differ so much from the
original one, viz. Awos Cliftoni=Dictyocylindrus dentatus,
Bk., that, if they are found to be still further multiplied, it may
be necessary hereafter to divide them into genera; wherefore
it seems desirable at once to make a group of them under the
name ‘ Axona,” with the following characters :—

AXONA, n. group.
Form variable, surface aculeated ; aculeations consisting of

382 Mr. H. J. Carter on Specimens

a condensation of the skeleton-spicules extended from a general
axis similarly composed, or from the reticulated fibre of a
general areolation. Spicules of two kinds, viz. skeleton- and

flesh-spicules.

Axos anchorata, n. sp.

(Pl. XVIII. fig. 3, a—f)

Cauliform, cylindrical, cactus-like, long, straggling, sessile,
growing from a small root-like expansion on a mussel-shell
(fig. 3) ; sometimes branched ?; bent and twisted upon itself,
snake-like in the specimens, apparently by accident, united
where in contact. Caulis small at the commencement, slightly
increasing afterwards and ? diminishing towards the extremity.
Texture firm, but not hard. Colour now brown. Surface
aculeated throughout with short, conical, or obtuse or termi-
nally inflated processes, supported on reticulate ridges tending
to a longitudinal arrangement ; processes projected from the
points of the intersection of the ridges (fig. 3,a). Vents
numerous, scattered (fig. 3,c). Structure interiorly areolar
throughout, not axiated ; cells of the areolation formed by the
sarcode tympanizing the interstices of the reticulated fibre
(fig. 3,6). Spicules of two kinds, viz. :—1, skeleton-, acerate,
nearly straight, fusiform, gradually sharp-pointed, smooth,
1-85th by 1-2000th inch in its greatest dimensions (fig. 3, d) ;
2, flesh-spicule, very minute, equianchorate, shaft round, much
curved, arms falcate-linear, much spread, the central one almost
in continuation with the curve of the shaft, and the other two at
nearly right angles to it, about 1-1500th inch long (fig. 3,e,f).
Skeleton-spicules arranged longitudinally in the reticulated
fibre and aculeations ; flesh-spicules scattered throughout the
sarcode generally. Length of caulis in the specimen indeter-
minable; diameter near the base about 1-6th inch, further up
1-3rd inch.

Hab. Marine.

Loc. Bass’s Straits, South Australia.

Obs. The cactus-like character of this stem at once points
out its affinity with the genus Azos, although the original
species, viz. Axos Cliftond, is axiated by a condensation of the
skeleton-spicule, like that of Cladorhiza abyssicola, Sars, and
Chondrocladia virgata, Sir Wy. Thomson, from the At-
lantic Qcean, whose position also among the Holorhaphidota
is not yet determined. In general form, when fresh, Awos
anchorata seems to have been something like that species of
Cactus commonly called “creeping cereus” (C. flagelliformis) ;
and so far again it resembles the long stems of Awos Cliftont
(see Dr. Bowerbank’s excellent figure, Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond.

dredged up from Bass’s Straits. 383

1873, pl. xxix.), which, however, branch off in great plurality
from a short thick stipes and are not single and sessile as in Awos
anchorata ; but the specimens from which I have been obliged
to take my description are so imperfect that, although there is
sufficient to establish the species, especially in the peculiar
form of the equianchorate, further observation is necessary for
its completion; and such is the case with the following frag-
ment, which amounts to nothing more than 3 inches of the
stem, with neither root nor termination, but yet again pre-
sents sufficient for specific determination, and may be de-
scribed under the proposed designation of. “ fibulata” as
follows :—
Axos fibulata, n. sp.
(Pl. XVIII. fig. 4, a—c.)

In general form and structure this species appears to have
been the same as the foregoing, differimg only in its spicula-
tion, which consists of two kinds of spicules, viz. :—1, skeleton-,
acerate, curved, fusiform, gradually sharp-pointed, smooth,
1-111th by 1-2400th inch in its greatest dimensions (fig. 4, @) ;
2, flesh-spicule, very minute, simple, bihamate (jibula),
1-2400th inch long (fig. 4, 6, c). Spicules arranged as in the
foregoing species. Size of specimen, including the bends of
its contorted condition, about 4 inches long by + inch in dia-
meter.

Hab. Marine.

Loc. Bass’s Straits, South Australia.

Obs. This, as before stated, is a very poor specimen and
requires even still more observation to complete its description
than that of A. anchorata, especially as the bihamate is simple
and therefore does not afford the peculiar character of the
equianchorate in A. anchorata.

Following is the supplementary list of Foraminifera and
Spongida obtained from dredgings in the Gulf of Manaar and
the sea in the vicinity of the Basse Rocks, together with one
of the Spongida dredged in Bass’s Straits, South Australia.

Specimens from the Gulf of Manaar and the Basse Rocks
indicated by the abbreviations G. M. and B. R. respec-
tively.

FORAMINIFERA.

Polytrema miniaceum. G. M. Rotalia spiculotesta. G. M. and
cylindricum. G. M.
Carpenteria utricularis. G. M. arenacea, n. sp. G. M. and
Gypsina melobesioides. G, M. BYR:

Holocladina pustulifera. G. M.

384 On Specimens from the Gulfof Manaar and Bass’s Straits.

SPONGIDA.

Ord. i. Carnosa.

Halisarca rubitingens, n. sp. prov.
G. M. and B. R.

Chondrilla nucula. G. M.

Ord. ii. PsAMMONEMATA.

Hircinia fusca. G. M. and B. R.

Hircinia clathrata, n. sp. G. M.

Ord. iv. RHAPHIDONEMATA.

Tubulodigitus communis. G. M.

Oceanapia (Desmacidon, Bh.) Jef-

freysii. Australian variety, viz.
without bihamates. B. R.

Ord. y. EcHrmvonEMATA.

Microciona atrosanguinea. G. M.
afinis. G. M.
quinqueradiata. G. M.
fascispiculifera. G. M.

Hymerhaphia eruca.
seine

G. M. and
G. M. and

—— unispiculum.

Ord. vi. HoLorHAPHIDOTA.

Amorphina megalorhaphis, n. sp.
B. BR.

Esperia serratohamata. G. M.

Hymedesmia stellivarians. G. M.
and B. R.

Cliona Warreni, n. sp. G. M.

Placospongia melobesioides. B. R.

Samus anonymus. G. M.

Thoosa socialis(with flesh-spicules).
G. M.

Geodia ramodigitata. G. M. and
Stelletta euastrum. G, M.
crassicula, n.sp. B. R.
Corallistes verrucosa. G. M.
Discodermia aspera. G. M.
levidiscus. G. M.

sinuosa, n. sp. G. M. and
B. R.

sceptrellifera, n. sp. G. M.

Ord. vill. CALCAREA.

Leucortis indica, Hackel.

Specimens of Spongida from Bass’s Straits.

Halisarca bassangustiarum, n. sp.
(proy.).

Dysidea Kirkii, BA.

Oceanapia (Desmacidon) Jeffreysii.
The Australian variety D. fistu-
losa, Bk.

Echinonema typicum, n. sp.

Dictyocylindrus reticulatus, n. sp.

Halichondria plumosa. Variety.

Acanthella stipitata, n. sp.
Halichondria incrustans.
Spirastrella cunctatrix, Sol.
Latrunculia purpurea, n. sp.
Axos anchorata, n. sp.

fibulata, n. sp.

Tethya lyncurium, ? Cliftoni, Bh.
Leucetta ? primigenia, Hdckel.

Besides the above there are more or less of the remains of
many other species, once fine specimens, but now encased
by calcareous Polyzoa, and more or less destroyed, as before
mentioned.

Mr. L. de Nicéville on Papilio nebulosus, Butler. 385

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XVIII.

N.B. All the spicules are drawn to the scale of 1-12th to 1-1800th
inch, except fig. 9, which is on the scale of 1-24th to 1-6000th inch, and
the “more magnified” flesh-spicules in figs. 1h, 2, 3e, 4 6, and 5 4,
which are on the scale of 1-12th to 1-6000th inch. Figs. 5 and 6 are of
the natural size, and fig. 3, a, 6, enlarged views of the former.

Fig. 1. Discodermia sinuosa, n. sp. a-e, transformation of the disk to the
lithistid form ; f, interlocking of the filigreed extremities in the
fully developed spicule; g, flesh-spicule; A, more magnified
view of the same.

Fig. 2. Discodermia sceptrellifera, n. sp. a-e, transformation of the disk
into the lithistid form ; f, interlocking of the filigreed extremi-
ties in the fully developed spicule; g, flesh-spicule; 4, more
magnified view of the same.

Fig. 3. Axos anchorata, n. sp. (nat. size), growing on a mussel-shell.
a, magnified view of surface; 0, the same of internal structure
in the transverse section; c, vents; d, skeleton-spicule ; e, flesh-
spicule ; 7, the same, more magnified.

Fig. 4. Axos fibulata,n. sp. a, skeleton-spicule; 0, flesh-spicule ; c, the
same, more magnified.

Fig. 5. Latrunculia purpurea, u.sp. a, skeleton-spicule ; 6, flesh-spicule,
a sceptrellum ; c, the same, more magnified.

Fig. 6. Chona Warreni, nu. sp., in situ. a, Melobesian nodule; 0, pore-
head ; ec, vent; d, spicule.

Fig. 7. Dictyocylindrus reticulatus, n. sp. a, skeleton-spicule ; 4, flesh- or
echinating spicule ; ce, the same, more magnified.

Fig. 8. Acanthella styntata, n. sp. Skeleton-spicule.

Fig. 9. Halichondria infrequens, nu. sp. a, skeleton-spicule ; 0}, “ tibiella ”
or subskeleton-spicule; c, flesh-spicule, bihamate; d, flesh-spi-
cule, equianchorate, front and lateral views.

Fxg. 10. Rotalia arenacea, n. sp. a, trochoid portion; 4, flat rim.

XXX VII.—Note on Papilio nebulosus, Butler.
By LIONEL DE NICEVILLE.

In the Ann. & Mag. of Nat. Hist. 5th ser. vol. vii. p. 33.
n. 2, pl. iv. fig. 8, Mr. A. G. Butler describes and figures a
new Lfapilio from Darjiling under the name of nebulosus.
The Indian Museum, Calcutta, has lately had presented to it,
by Capt. G. F. L. Marshall, R.E. (to whom Mr. F. Du Cane
Godman gave one of the specimens which had recently been
purchased by him at Darjiling), a very similar (male) speci-
men. On the upperside it differs from P. nebulosus in the
ground-colour of the whole of the fore wing being dull black,
except that portion of it which is internal to the subbasal
black band present in ordinary Sikkim specimens of P. ant?-
phates, Cramer, and which in my specimen is sap-green in-
stead of cretaceous white. In P. nebulosus there are said to

386 M.C. Robin on the Sexual Differences of Eels.

be two pale belts : in my specimen there are a few grey scales
on the portion of the wing corresponding to the interval be-
tween the first and second subbasal black belts in P. anti-
phates, as also on the interno-median area near the outer
angle. The outer half of the second U-shaped mark, as also
the submarginal band, is sap-green instead of white. The hind
wing as in P. nebulosus. On the underside the fore wing is
marked as in P. nebulosus, ¢. e. differs from the upperside in
having the base, U-shaped markings, and submarginal band
all of a deeper shade of green, and the inner margin, together
with a large portion of the median area behind the third
median nervule (in fact, just that portion of the wing which
is covered by the hind wing when the insect is at rest with its
wings closed over its back), ashy white. Hind wing as in
Sikkim specimens of P. antiphates, except that the area be-
tween the middle and outermost black bands is thickly
clouded, as if the bands bounding it had been “ smudged”
over it, with black scales; and the area beyond the discal
series of rounded black spots is also more or less clouded
with scattered black scales. The specimen therefore differs
considerably from that upon which Butler has founded his
P. nebulosus. In spite, however, of its many points of differ-
ence from P. nebulosus, and still more from P. antiphates, I
am exceedingly averse to calling it a new species, being of
opinion that it is, like the first-named species, only a melanoid
variety of P. antiphates, or possibly rather a reversion to the
primordial type of coloration of the entire antiphates group of
Papiliones.

XXXVIIL— The Male Eels compared with the Females.
By C. Rosrn*.

THE existence of sexual differences in the common eel (Murena
anguilla, L., Anguilla vulgaris, Rafinesque, Rondelet) is open
to no doubt, at whatever period of the year the examination
is made.

With very few exceptions all the eels described under the
varietal name of pimpeneau or pimperneau, from the maritime
pools and marshes (glut-eel of English authorst), with large
prominent eyes, a short flat muzzle, a slender cylindrical body,

ons Translated from the ‘Comptes Rendus,’ February 21,1881, pp. 378-
3.
t+ The broad-nosed eel, Anguilla latirostris, of Yarrell.

M. C. Robin on the Sexual Differences of Eels. 387

with the back black, and the pectoral fins a little larger than
in the river-eels, not exceeding 0°38 or 0°40 metre &c., are
males. Ina lot of Seine eels, having all the ordinary charac-
ters, one 0°45 metre long, like most of the others, was a
male. I have never found males of greater length.

Syrski gives 0°43 metre as the greatest length met with in
the males that he observed.

The abundance of the pempeneauax and their strongly marked
characters may even lead us to say that there are few species
of fishes in which the external sexual characters are so dis-
tinctive of the male in comparison with the female as in the
Eels. Only the male does not quit the shores of the sea,
except at the period of reproduction, to go to the bottom;
whilst the female only goes to the sea, quitting the fresh water,
temporarily and at the same period.

The dissection of eels 0°35 metre long, or thereabout,
shows at the first glance, in all seasons, whether the animal
is male or female. Instead of the well-known characters of
the ovary, a continuous semitransparent ribbon, of a yellowish
colour, folded like a frill, we see in the same place, with the
same relations, the same differences of length to the right and
left, and of diminution of breadth at the posterior extremity,
the testis, a delicate narrow ribbon, more or less rose-coloured,
or of a semitransparent grey tint, rarely whitish. It is formed
of a series of flattened floating lobes, most frequently
2 millims. broad and of twice that length, the greatest thick-
ness of which does not exceed 1 millim. out of the time of
reproduction, with the inner surface convex and the other
flat, the outer or free margin thin, rounded into a quadrant,
the lobes all united at their base only by the deferent canal
&c., and with independent and distinct lobules.

The peritoneal fold which envelops them, as is also the
case with the ovaries, attaches them to the sides of the ver-
tebral column and of the swim-bladder. In females of the
same size it is a continuous ribbon, a centimetre or more in
width, of a yellowish white colour, more or less opaque or
semitransparent, that we find interposed in the same manner
between the abdominal viscera and the corresponding portion
of the ventral wall.

These differences between the male and female eel, percep-
tible at the first glance, are sufficient to enable them to be
recognized; but it is necessary to ascertain them from the
moment when there are males different from the pimpeneau,
that is to say, having the external characters of the small or
middle-sized females. These differences, moreover, are greater
than those which exist between the ovary and the testis of the

388 M.C. Robin on the Sexual Differences of Eels.

Murene* and of various other fishes; they may even be
compared with those which exist between the testes and the
ovaries in the Batrachia and Birds.

But these external sexual differences are only sufficient
because they correspond to structural dissimilarities existing
between the constituent elements of the internal organs, ful-
filling the physiological function of male on the one. hand,
of female on the other, and this in spite of morphological,
embryogenic homologies and of connexions which approxi-
mate the ovary to the testis. ‘This is what histology shows
incontestably.

The want of this determination of the minute structure of
these organs has caused people not to give to the external
characters (those of the pimpeneau, for example) the impor-
tance they possess as belonging here to the male, elsewhere
to the female, with the body more swelled and not so black,
the head more produced, the eye smaller, &c. This gap has
even prevented some anatomists from taking count of the
external differences which, at all seasons, exist between the
ovary and the testis, the differences of structure of which are
also always perceptible under the microscope.

On the one hand, at any period of the year, the ovary
shows its ovules, more or less developed, but like those of all
other osseous fishes, and its loose cellular tissue, which may be
reduced to a minimum towards the period of oviposition, or,
on the contrary, become in part cellulo-adipose subsequently ;
the ovary also always shows the narrow projections or thick-
enings of the surfaces of its lobes, parallel to each other, re-
sembling folds running from the adherent to the free margin,
and passing the latter in the form of small blunt denticu-
lations.

On the other hand, the lobulate testis, of firmer consistence,
with a close cellular texture, without adipose cells, traversed
throughout its whole extent by seminiferous or testicular tubes,
or cylinders, which are flexuous, twisted, terminated cecally
at both ends, at least out of the breeding-season—that is to say,
falling into the type of canaliculate testes, such as that of the
carps.

The contents of these tubes, which answer to what are called
spermatic capsules in the case of other fishes, render the testis
opalescent whitish grey, instead of the reddish-grey tint which
is usual when its vessels are congested, a fact connected with
the absence of ovules more or less rich in yellowish oily drops.
These contents render the male organ more or less white, and

* See C. Robin “Sur le cceur caudal des Anguilles,” Journ. Anat.
Physiol. 1880, p. 597.

M. C. Robin on the Sexual Differences of Hels. 389

make it pass into the state of méJé at the time of the produc-
tion of spermatozoids.

Out of the period of reproduction the seminiferous tubes are
0:08-0:09 millim. in thickness, cylindrical, twisted in various
directions, and ramified once or twice. Some of them
anastomose with their nearest neighbours. ‘Their extre-
mities are closed, rounded, with or without a slight inflation.
For the most part one of the extremities is situated close to
the surface of the organ, which is covered with a delicate
peritoneal tunic. None of them is particularly directed towards
the deferent canal, and none opens into the latter.

The flexuosities of the tubes, their volume, and their struc-
ture give to the tissue of the organ the characteristic arrange-
ment and the aspect usually observed in the testicular tissue of
the higher Vertebrata. It is only by an enormous dilatation
at the breeding-season that we can imagine that these canali-
culi arrive at the state of seminal capsules.

These tubes are immersed in a dense web of cellular tissue,
without adipose vesicles, and of a thickness between the tubes
about half that of the latter. The ramifications of the
vessels coming from the base of the lobes run along by the
tubes and form around each of their extremities, rounded at
the surface of the organ, a circular mesh 0°08 millim. in
breadth ;_ these altogether constitute an abundant network.
The examination of the entire lobe, before making thin sec-
tions, might lead one to suppose that these meshes circum-
scribe so many closed vesicles or seminal capsules, whilst we
have to do enly with the extremities of the seminiparous
canaliculi.

By the assistance of Dr. Hermann, preparator of the course
of histology of the Faculty of Medicine, I have been able to
ascertain that these tubes are composed of a delicate proper
wall (0-001 millim.), which is transparent and homogeneous,
folds readily, and is strongly adherent to the exterior tissue.
Their inner surface is uniformly lined with a single series of
regularly prismatic epithelial cells, with their outer surface or
base polygonal, which separate easily from the wall and are
attenuated at their inner extremity. ‘They bound, in the direc-
tion of the axis of the tube, a narrow canal, which is often
apparently closed, in consequence of the contiguity of these ex-
tremities of the bounding-cells. The latter, which are finely
granular, contain a comparatively large hyaline nucleus with-
out granules, with a brilliant yellow nucleolus. The cells
which are immediately contiguous are broken by separation,
giving to the preparing fluid an opaline or lactescent appear-
ance; floating in it are their shining yellowish granules and

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. vii. 29

390 M.C. Robin on the Sexual Differences of Eels.

their nuclei, which are set free, and may or may not become
slightly irregular.

A deferent canal, about 1 millim. wide, with delicate walls,
runs along the adherent inner or dorsal margin of each testis
from one end to the other. These unite in a single cavity or
seminal vesicle at the level of the cloaca. ‘The seminal vesicle
opens into the urethra by the genital pore, and by the urethra
almost immediately into the cloaca. The wall of this spermi-
duct is at the utmost + millim. in thickness. It is composed
of an inner layer of longitudinal, and an outer one of circular
fibres ; both of these, at the base of the lobes and a little upon
their outer surface, entangle their bundles with those of the
envelope of the male organ. These layers are formed of
cellular tissue evidently mixed with smooth muscular fibres.

A single series of small polyhedric epithelial cells lines the
inner surface of the deferent canal. Adherent to the inner
border of all the delicate testicular lobules, it is thus lodged
within the peritoneal fold attaching the testis to the swimming-
bladder and the upper part of the abdominal walls.

As will be seen, with regard to the determination of the
male sex of the Hels, we had to compare the well-known
female generative organs with their homologues in the nume-
rous individuals or groups of individuals which have external
characters somewhat different from those of the most widely-
distributed of these fishes.

The absence of ova in the one set, their presence at all times
in the others, 75 to 7%; millim. in diameter, so easily ascer-
tained, might have furnished a demonstration,,seven without
the comparison of the structure of the organ without ovules
with the testis of other fishes.

These comparisons ought certainly to have been made
before any investigation tending to prove the existence of an
exceptional hermaphroditism, or indeed before imagining,
without any previous study of the evolution of the ovary, that
the organ described as the testis is only an ovary which has
not arrived at its complete development.

The testicular structure in the organ of certain eels which
is the homologue of the ovary of the others being incontest-
able, all that has been said, even within the last few years, of
this hermaphroditism, and of the resemblance in this parti-
cular between the Hels and the Serranidee, need no longer be
discussed.

We may add that in the Murene (M. helena, L.) the gene-
rative organs constitute no exception to what they are in other
osseous fishes. The males of the Congers, or rather the place
of their ordinary sojourn, alone remain to be discovered.

M. C. Robin on the Sexual Differences of Eels. 391

The sex being ascertained, the general facts regarding the
reproduction of these Apodal fishes follows therefrom; and
these facts do not differ from what they are in nearly all other
fishes, the Salmons in particular. Only the propagative
migration of the Hels taking place from the fresh waters to
the sea, the mode in which oviposition is effected, the fecun-
dation and hatching of the ova, are still unknown. The
Salmons, behaving in a directly opposite fashion, we have
been able, so far as they are concerned, to study and utilize
all these physiological peculiarities.

The same causes have hitherto prevented our seeing the
testes of the Hels as they are at their arrival at the state of
milt, and observing their spermatozoids, notwithstanding the
abundance of the males (or pimpeneaux). But the period of
the descent of the females towards the sea (November) shows
that it is im November and December that they ought to be
studied. These, however, are the only two months during
which I have as yet been unable to observe them. I have
ascertained that in October there are as yet no fecundating
elements, and that in January there are no longer any. In
the Landes and other parts of the south no doubt, the ascent
of the young fish taking place as early as the second half of
December, instead of m March, as in the Channel, these
investigations will have to be made as early as September or
October. As to the return of the females from the sea to the
fresh waters, this cannot be denied; in fact I have received
from M. Dufourcet some female eels of the variety sardias,
taken in January and February in the Adour at about
4() kiloms. from the sea, one half of which had the stomach
filled with examples of Eunice sanguinea and Doris, which
are exclusively marine invertebrates.

Except as regards the minute structural determination and
the truly testicular nature of the organ homologous with the
ovaries, the preceding anatomical data are not new. The
want of this determination and of the observation of the sper-
matozoids is probably what has led to their not having hitherto
been taken into consideration as they deserve to be.

Duvernoy (Cuvier, Anatomie Comparée, ed. 2, 1846,
tome vil. p. 117) describes the ruftle-like type of the testis of
the Lampreys and Hels, with the free margin festooned in
lobules, shorter to the right than to the left, like the ovaries,
&e. He adds:—“ At the breeding-season we perceive in it
an innumerable quantity of granulations or small spermatic
capsules, the rounded form of which has often led to their
being confounded with the ovules, at least in the Hels, in
which, in reality, these capsules are of nearly the same size as

29*

392 Mr. A. G. Butler on Nocturnal Lepidoptera

the ovules; but the latter are distinguished by their oval
form.” The ovules are spherical, and not oval; but the other
facts are fundamentally correct. It is also in error that Du-
vernoy adds (p. 183) :—‘‘ The Eels and the Lampreys have
no deferent canal, any more than an oviduct. Like the ova,
their semen ruptures the capsules in which it has collected,
and diffuses itself in the abdominal cavity, whence it is ex-
pelled in the same way as the ova.” But he correctly
describes the place of opening of the peritoneal canal, the
ureters, Ke.

Valenciennes thought that the external characters regarded
as serving to establish specific division among the common
Hels might be due to difference of sex, and that, for example,
the pimpeneau (glut-eel of the English) was the male of the
plat-bec (grig-eel of the English). Nevertheless he did not
venture to assert that such was the case (Dict. d’Hist. Nat.
1867, tome i. p. 548).

Syrski (Sitzungsb. Akad. Wiss. zu Wien, Bd. lxxix. 1874)
has described and figured the homologies between the flat-
tened lobulated testes of the Hels and their ovaries, the absence
of ovules in the former coexisting with their presence in the
latter. He particularly made known the deferent canal and
its cloacal opening, but without determining the characteristic
testicular structure of the lobules.

Lastly, Dareste (‘Comptes Rendus,’ 1875, tome Ixxxi.
p- 159) fully confirmed these observations upon the pimper-
neaux as regards the external anatomical character of the
male organ. Among the pimperneaux he notices some female
individuals. The Indian Anguilla marmorata also furnished
him with males.

XXXIX.—On a Collection of Nocturnal Lepidoptera from
the Hawatian Islands. By Artuur G. Butter, F.L.S.,
F.Z.8., &e.

[Continued from p. 333. ]
Tortricide.

CHILOIDES, gen. nov.
Peedisce affine genus; differt autem palpis longioribus infra bene
ciliatis, ciliis antice productis ; capite piloso. Ale postice ramis
secundo et tertio medianis bene separatis, petiolo nullo.

‘This genus has the form and general aspect of Pedisca,
with which it seems to agree in the neuration of the prima-

From the Hawaiian Islands. 393

ries ; the neuration of the secondaries, however, differs in the
separate emission of the second and third median branches ;
the head is clothed above with long coarse hair, much longer
than in Pedisca; and the palpi are longer, more depressed,
and with the second joint clothed below with a long projecting
fringe of hair; the antenne are normal. I have failed to
discover any described genus answering to these characters.

25. Chiloides straminea, sp. n. (No. 101).

General coloration of a Chilo ; somewhat similar to Pedisca
albidulana: primaries stramineous with brown veins ; costal
margin dotted with black ; subcostal area crossed by numerous
abbreviated fine oblique black lines and dots ; submedian area
speckled with black dots, the most prominent of which form
a little group below the end of the cell, and two oblique series
of three each, the first at basal third, and the second just be-
yond the external third; a submarginal series of fine black
points: secondaries shining silvery grey, fringe slightly stra-
mineous, white towards the anal angle, with a slender sub-
basal testaceous line: body stramineous. Primaries below
shining blackish brown, with pale buff costal border minutely
and sparsely speckled with black ; external border slightly
stramineous, black-speckled ; fringe stramineous, with a sub-
basal brownish line: secondaries shining creamy white,
fringe as above: body pale creamy buff. LExpanse of wings
9 lines.

One specimen. ‘ Occurs on salt marshes near Honolulu.”

Mr. Blackburn has sent a specimen (No. 95) of a species
which Iam unable to identify. It was taken “ flying near
the active crater of Mauna Loa, Hawaii; elevation 4000 feet.”
Whether this fact has any connexion with its condition I
cannot, of course, say ; but its abdomen is wanting, and the
wings, if they ever possessed a pattern, have certainly lost it.

26. Proteopteryx Blackburnii, sp. n. (No. 132).

Primaries above ash-grey, clouded with cupreous brown ;
costal area crossed by numerous parallel regular oblique
brown stripes ; a broad angulated band close to the base and
a second just beyond it, only indicated by the usual oblique
stripes above the median vein, but below this vein strongly
defined externally by broad brown stripes; a cupreous oblique
band from the middle of the costa to the external angle ; this
band is abruptly elbowed, widened, and mottled with black
from the middle to the imner (or dorsal) margin ; apex black,
crossed on the costal border by a triangular white spot divided

394 Mr. A. G. Butler on Nocturnal Lepidoptera

by a slender transverse black line; two submarginal white
dots close to the apex ; disk between the apical patch and the
elbowed band filled by a large semicircular silvery patch en- —
closing a grey 5-shaped spot crossed by black and cupreous
lines; fringe traversed by parallel dark grey lines: secondaries
greyish brown with cupreous reflections; fringe silver-grey,
traversed near the base by a dark grey stripe: head and thorax
whitish ; abdomen dark grey. Primaries below fuliginous
brown with cupreous reflections, costal margin from just before
the middle spotted with white; fringe traversed, at the base
and in the middle, by two slender whitish lines: secondaries
shining silvery white, the apical half mottled with grey and
with slight cupreous reflections ; costal border crossed by ab-
breviated blackish striae: body below shining creamy white.
Expanse of wings 53 lines.

Var. (No. 131).

The basal bands on the primaries decidedly blacker, the
second band well defined and solid throughout; the area im-
mediately beyond this band white, forming a well-defined
quadrate spot at the centre of the inner (dorsal) border ; other-
wise similar. Expanse of wings 5 lines.

Two specimens. ‘ Flying about low plants at Makawao,
Maui.”

Lord Walsingham kindly identified this for me as a second
species of his genus; it comes nearest to the variety of P.
emarginana figured at pl. lxxvi. fig. 3, of the “ North-Ameri-
ean Tortricide ” (Ill. Typ. Lep. Het. iv.). His Lordship
has also referred the two following species to their genera.

27. Steganoptycha foetorivorans, sp. n. (No. 66).

Primaries above with the costal half, excepting the margin,
slaty grey, inner or dorsal half, including the external area
and fringe, silvery white ; costal margin silvery white, spotted
with black, some of these black spots elongated into oblique
lines; a short longitudinal dash close to the base ; an oblique
abbreviated band at basal fourth and a second just beyond the
middle, united at their inferior extremities by a cross band,
blackish brown ; a black spot and a diffused brown spot close
to the external angle; three longitudinal, discal, minute black
dashes in a curved series; apex transversely striated with
black; fringe externally irorated with grey: secondaries
shining fuliginous brown, with a pale line at the base of the
fringe : body pale brown, collar and tegule darker; abdomen
with slight cupreous reflections. Wings below fuliginous
brown with cupreous reflections, internal borders white with

from the Hawatian Islands. 895

cupreous reflections; body below silvery white. Txpanse of
wings 6 lines.

Two specimens. “Occasionally taken by beating; also
bred from a larva spinning together leaves of a tree unknown
to me by name. ‘The tree in question superficially resembles
box; but the leaves are somewhat larger, and have a strong,
rather unpleasant scent. Mountains of Oahu.”—T. B.

28. Phoxopterts rufipennis, sp.n. (No. 109).

Primaries above rusty orange, blotched with ferruginous
red and transversely striated with plumbaginous grey; costal
margin white, crossed by numerous parallel oblique dark
ferruginous striae, behind and below which are parallel plum-
baginous strie ; a short black dash placed longitudinally just
before the middle of the interno-median area ; a transverse
sprinkling of black scales between the two last grey strie upon
the disk; fringe grey, blotched and tipped with rose-red, and
with a pale basal line: secondaries fuliginous brown, with
slight violet reflections ; fringe whity brown towards the apex,
but grey towards the anal angle, and with a black subbasal
line: head and thorax ferruginous red; abdomen blackish,
ferruginous at the base. Wings below greyish brown, shot
with purple: primaries with the costal margin dotted with
stramineous ; outer margin slenderly white; a very slender
blackish marginal line; fringe dark greyish brown, tipped
with red-brown, and with a white basal line; apex dark red-
brown: secondaries shining grey, whitish at apex, and with
a brown subbasal line. Body below cream-coloured ; palpi
and anterior legs above orange. Hxpanse of wings 44 lines.

One specimen. ‘“ Beaten from the ‘Koa’ tree singly on
two or three occasions. In specimens not absolutely fresh
the white markings on the wings are obscure, approximating
to the ground-colour. Taken on Oahu.”—T. DB.

Tineide.
29. Blabophanes longella (No. 68).

Tinea longella, Walker, Cat. Lep. Het. xxviii. p. 479 (1863),

One specimen. Honolulu. ;

The type of this species was from Northern India; and a
second example from South Africa was recently recognized by
Lord Walsingham among specimens of Micro- Lepidoptera,
taken by Mr. Gooch, and now forming part of the collection
of the South-African Museum. ‘The only difference between

these specimens (apart from size) is in the colour of the head,
which in the African specimen is distinctly orange-yellow,

396 Mr. A. G. Butler on Nocturnal Lepidoptera

in the Indian one pale yellow, and in the Hawaiian one
(which is also slightly smaller than the two others) nearly pure
white.

B. longella is nearly allied to B. monachelia of Europe, but
unquestionably distinct.

30. Blabophanes rusticella (No. 110).
Tinea rusticella, Hiibner, Samml. eur. Schmett. v. fig. 335 (1827).
One specimen. Honolulu.

31. Blabophanes obumbrata, sp. n. (No. 71).

Primaries above black-brown, with cupreous reflections ; a
large patch of greenish testaceous occupying nearly the whole
of the basal two thirds excepting at the borders of the wing,
and enclosing four black spots in a rhomboidal form—one large,
hastate, and within the discoidal cell, the second smaller,
triangular, at the end of the cell, the two others small and
oval upon the interno-median area; outer border narrowly
whity brown, speckled with blackish ; fringe grey, pale brown
at the base: secondaries grey, with cupreous reflections : body
testaceous; head and thorax mottled with black. Under sur-
face fuliginous brown, shining, with slight cupreous reflec-
tions; primaries shot with purple. Hxpanse of wings
74 lines.

One specimen. ‘ Occasionally taken in Honolulu.”

Gelechiide.
32. Depressaria usitata, sp. n. (No. 69).

Primaries above dark shining fuliginous brown ; a fusiform
black spot at the base, a rounded spot at the middle, and a
transverse spot at the end of the cell; a slender whitish or
pale line at the base of the fringe, followed by a darker line :
secondaries silvery grey, with slight cupreous reflections ;
fringe traversed by a dusky line and with dusky tips: thorax
above shining fuligious brown; abdomen, greyish brown,
with cupreous reflections. Under surface pale shining silvery
brown ; costal borders and external border of primaries testa-
ceous mottled with grey. Hxpanse of wings I inch.

Two specimens, probably from Honolulu; but the exact
habitat is not given. Mr. Blackburn says, “I have a single
specimen (? ¢) with the antenne thicker than in those sent,
and obscurely pectinated, as in one of the specimens of 73.”
This species seems to be most nearly allied to D. badiella.

jrom the Hawatian Islands. 397

33. Depressaria gigas, sp. n. (No. 119).

Primaries above shining fuliginous brown*, irrorated with
black, especially upon the borders; a paler diffused transverse
discal band, not reaching the costal or dorsal margins, limiting
the external border; an irregular black spot beyond the
middle of the cell, and an irregular transverse black bilobed
spot on the discocellulars : secondaries paler than the prima-
ries, with a narrow diffused testaceous border spotted with
blackish at the extremities of the veins: thorax dark fuli-
ginous brown; antennz grey ; palpi testaceous, black-speckled,
with black terminal joint; abdomen whity brown, banded
with blackish. Primaries below shining fuliginous brown;
the apical half of costal border, the outer border, and external
margin of the fringe irrorated with whity brown: secondaries
whity brown, densely irrorated with fuliginous brown, except-
ing on the abdominal border, most densely towards the costal
margin ; a marginal series of blackish spots as above: body
below creamy testaceous or pale buff, the legs more or less
irrorated with black scales, venter with lateral series of black
spots. Expanse of wings 1 inch 11 lines.

One specimen. “ Three specimens taken; one was at
sugar, the other two at light; all at about 4000 feet up Halea-
kala, Maui.”

This enormous species seems to belong to the same group
as the preceding one; it perfectly agrees with Depressaria in
all details of structure, notwithstanding its greatly superior
Size.

The three following species agree in general character with
Walker’s genus Chezala, which (notwithstanding that its
affinity to Depressarva is noticed in the description) stands near
the end of the family in Walker’s Catalogue. The only struc-
tural difference which I have detected between this genus and
Depressaria is in the shghtly different branching of the median
nervules of the secondaries, the second and third nervules
being emitted from a short footstalk instead of from the inferior
extremity of the cell. This character however, does not,
appear to be constant ; and to insist upon it would separate
some of the unquestionably most nearly allied species, inclu-
ding those which, in pattern, correspond with Walker’s type.

34. Depressaria indecora, sp. n. (No. 128).

Apparently nearest to D. libanotidella, but with wider
secondaries: primaries above testaceous irrorated with white,

* Seen under a lens it is really yellowish clay-colour, but densely
speckled with black.

398 Mr. A. G. Butler on Nocturnal Lepidoptera

and speckled here and there with black, especially along the
inner or dorsal margin; costal border regularly spotted with
black from the middle to the apex, and forming a continuous
series, with six or seven spots on the outer margin ; an oblique
irregular black basicostal dash ; a group of black spots across
the discoidal cell, just beyond its centre; a black transverse
spot at the end of the cell, a subconfluent angulated series of
longitudinal black dashes immediately beyond the cell, and a
second series of distinct black dashes halfway between the
latter and the outer margin; fringe pale, with grey tips and
blackish spots in continuation of the black marginal spots :
secondaries brownish grey ; fringe pale testaceous, with the
tips and a subbasal line dark grey, a slender white basal line:
thorax testaceous, speckled with black ; abdomen dark grey,
with the hind margins of the segments and anus golden buff.
Under surface sericeous grey: wings with blackish-spotted
yellowish fringes, but appearing glossy grey in certain lighits ;
primaries with black-spotted testaceous costal border : secon-
daries paler than the primaries, having a silvery aspect:
body below silvery, like the secondaries ; legs dark brown
above and banded with whitish, below whitish. Expanse of
wings 112 to 123 lines.

“At an elevation of 4000 feet on Haleakala, Maui. Gene-
rally started off rotten trunks and stumps of trees. ‘Two
specimens.” —T7. B.

35. Depressaria lactea, sp. n. (No. 129).

Primaries above cream-coloured, more or less densely
speckled with testaceous on the borders, and with black mark-
ings, nearly as in the preceding species ; base occupied by an
irregular black stripe ; a S-shaped black marking across the
cell and a 7-shaped black marking at the end of the cell; an
ill-defined arched series of subconfluent dusky dashes imme-
diately beyond the cell, followed by an arched subconfluent
series of longitudinal blackish dashes ; apical half of costal
margin and external margin regularly spotted with black ;
fringe white, indistinctly spotted with grey: secondaries
silvery white, speckled with grey, especially on the disk,
where the greyish irroration forms a broad belt ; a slender
interrupted subbasal line on the fringe, which is also spotted
with grey: head and thorax cream-colour ; antenne and ter-
minal joint of palpi blackish; abdomen silvery. Primaries
below cream-coloured, mottled with grey, excepting on the
costal and internal borders; marginal black spots rather less
sharply defined than above, but quite distinct: secondaries
shining silvery white, costal border with creamy yellowish

fen the Hawatian Islands. 399

reflections; fringe as above: pectus and legs cream-coloured,
the latter banded with brown above ; venter pure white. Ex-
panse of wings 1 inch 4 lines.

“Tn company with No. 128. I bred a specimen of each of
them from pup found (not together) in rotten wood.” One
specimen.

Notwithstanding the similarity of pattern and habit between
this and the preceding species, D. ¢ndecora possesses the true
neuration of Depressaria, and D. lactea that of the arbitrary
group Chezala. The following also agrees with the latter
group.

36. Depressaria argentea, sp. n. (No. 100).

Silvery white: primaries irrorated with grey; markings
almost exactly as in D. ¢ndecora ; an oblique basicostal black
dash; base of dorsal margin grey; a black dot in the cell and
an angular >»-shaped group of spots below it; a bilobed black
transverse spot at the end of the cell; two arched discal bands
formed of more or less confluent grey dashes; apical half of
costal margin and outer margin spotted with black: secon-
daries with grey spots on the fringe: female with the terminal
segments of the abdomen banded with grey. Primaries below
yellowish (like pale gold), the marginal black spots as above;
secondaries with slightly yellowish costal area, otherwise
white: body below white; legs banded above with greyish.
Expanse of wings 7-11 lines.

A pair of this pretty little species. Mr. Blackburn says
that it was taken on the “ mountains near Honolulu.”

37. Parasia sedata (No. 86).
@. Gelechia sedata, Butler, Cist. Ent. ii. p. 560. n. 88 (1880)

The male of this species, which agrees better (both in
structure and pattern) with Parasia than with Gelechia. It
was taken “ flying on the sea-shore at Kawaiahe, Hawaii.”

HYPOSMOCHOMA, gen. nov.

Holcocere affine genus. Alze posticee vena mediana triramosa, ramis
autem omnibus bene separatis, petiolo haud emissis; fasciculo
setarum magno basali; ciliis marginis externi longissimis; palpis
perlongis, arcuatis, a latere emissis; capite lanuginoso ; antennis
longis, crassis ; pedibus longis, robustis, tibiis valide spinosis.
The principal differences between this genus and Holcocera

seem to consist in the branching of the median vein of the

secondaries, the second and third branches being emitted sepa-
rately instead of from a footstalk 5 and in the large fascicle of

400 Mr. A. G. Butler on Nocturnal Lepidoptera

bristles emitted from the base of these wings (presumably a
scent-fan), which, when closed, extends along the costal
border to some distance beyond the end of the cell, but when
opened extends obliquely backwards across the secondaries,
and forwards across the under surface of the primaries: the
frons appears (judging from the description by Clemens) to
be narrower than in Lolcocera ; but in other respects the two
genera seen to be much alike*.

Hyposmochoma has somewhat the aspect of Butalis, excepting
for its singularly placed palpi, which are emitted almost as far
apart as in my New-Zealand genus Boocara.

38. Hyposmochoma Blackburnit, sp. n. (No. 123).

g. Primaries dark sepia-brown, the second and third
sixths of the costal half densely sprinkled with cream-coloured
scales, forming a large oblong patch, sharply defined and
oblique at its basal extremity, but diffused externally ; rather
beyond the middle of this pale patch is a short longitudinal
black subcostal spot; a few scattered creamy or pale testa-
ceous scales on the basal area; a patch of white and pale
scales on the dorsal margin near the external angle ; a trans-
verse subapical white belt, notched internally, angulated and
expanded upwards along the outer margin externally, and
enclosing one or two marginal black spots; a central longitu-
dinal, slightly branched, black streak almost from the base to
the white belt ; apex black, crossed by two transverse spots
of whitish scales; costal fringe immediately opposite to the
commencement of the subapical belt pale golden or shining
whity brown ; fringe of outer margin of the same colour, but
tipped and traversed by grey lines, and with two or three
black spots upon the inner line : secondaries grey, with bronzy
reflections and bronze-brown fringe; the pencil of hairs or
bristles stramineous: thorax black, the head and fringes of
the tegule pale bronzy brown ; palpi with silvery inner mar-
gin: abdomen dark greyish brown. Wings below shining
plumbaginous grey, with slight cupreous reflections, fringes
paler than above: body below pale metallic golden; legs
brown above, the tarsi black, banded with cream-colour, tibial
spines cream-colour. Expanse of wings 9 lines.

One specimen. ‘Occurring at about 4000 feet above sea
on Haleakala, Maui; various localities. I think it is con-
nected with dead wood.”

* T again have to thank Lord Walsingham for referring me to the de-
scription of Holcocera; without this reference I should have been much
puzzled as to the affinities of this singular insect.

Jrom the Hawaiian Islands. 401

Genus CHRESTOTES (= Safra, Walk.).

Walker founded a genus under the name of Safra upon a
species of Crambid from Shanghai (Cat. Lep. Het. xxvii.
p- 195, 1863) ; he subsequently gave the same name to one
of the genera ‘of. Gelechiides (Cat. Lep. Het. xxix. p. 785,
1864) ; the latter therefore requires a fresh denomination.

39. Chrestotes dryas, sp. n. (No. 70).

Primaries above pinky clay-coloured, mottled all over with
grey; these mottlings are most regular “along the borders, but
are evidently not arranged on any plan, as they do not corre-
spond on the opposite wings; fringe whity brown, irrorated
and obscurely spotted with grey : “secondaries silver, with a
tarnished appearance ; fringe pale testaceous : thorax reddish
clay-coloured ; abdomen ‘ereyish brown. Under surface
bronzy brown, shining: secondaries greyish towards the anal
angle; body pale. LKxpanse of wings 94 lines.

One specimen. Honolulu.

Te 2.

EvpERIssvs, gen. nov. (Fig. 1, hind wing.)

Tarude affine genus. Alis angustis elongatis, venis parallelis: ale
anticee margine costali modice arcuato, ciliis longulis; vena costali
perlonga; vena subcostali triramosa, ramo primo ven medio
emisso, secundo et tertio apud angulum cellule anticum emissis ;
vena superiore radiali furca terminali instructa ; vena inferiore
radiali simplici ; vena mediana triramosa, ramis secundo et tertio
approximatis: posticee margine costali paululum concavyo, ciliis
apud apicem plicatis, venis omnibus bene separatis, ramis duobus
subcostalibus paululum divergentibus ; vena mediana supra late
ciliata, ciliis regularibus rigidis, penicillum elongatum ruga abdo-
minali emissum partim obtegentibus et inhibentibus ; ciliis ordi-
nariis longulis ; capite lato leviter cristato, antennis longis modice
pectinatis, palpis perlongis arcuatis; pedibus robustis, posticis
perlongis, tibiis supra setosis, infra insequaliter quadrispinosis.

402 Mr. A. G. Butler on Nocturnal Lepidoptera

This extraordinary form comes nearer to Taruda of Walker
than to any other genus: it doubtless belongs to the group of
genera allied to Cryptolechia; the singular development of
bristles from the median vein of the secondaries, in order to
hold down a long hair-pencil which proceeds from the mar-
ginal abdominal furrow, is one of the most singular contri-
vances which I ever observed in a Lepidopterous insect.

40. Huperissus cristatus, sp. n. (No. 72).

Primaries above pale shining bronze-brown, with a black
spot at the end of the cell, a grey dot near the middle of the
cell, one or two (very indistinct) near the base, and one about
the middle of the interno-median area: secondaries silvery
grey, with the cilia from the median vein and the pencil from
the abdominal fold bright ochreous; marginal fringe pale
brown, spotted obscurely with grey at the base: head clay-
brown; thorax silvery ; abdomen pale buff; basal joint of
antenne blackish, remainder of antenne and palpi cream-
coloured. Under surface shining silvery, metallic; legs and
base of venter pale buff. Expanse of wings 114 lines.

One specimen. Mountains near Honolulu.

ST@BERHINUS, gen. nov. (Fig. 2, palpus.)

Urbare affine genus, Ypsolopho* simile, differt autem palpis maris
permagnis crassis, scopis terminalibus expansis, feminz palpis
simplicibus longulis porrectis ; antennis crassis.

The development of the male palpi in this genus is con-
siderably greater than in the little South-American genus to
which Walker has given the name of Urbara; this organ
curves upwards far above the head in Steberhinus, and is
broadly fringed at the back, so as to present the appearance
of a hearth-broom fF.

Al. Steberhinus testaceus, sp. n. (No. 73).

Primaries above pale testaceous; six dark brown spots
arranged in pairs, two at the base, two just beyond the basal
third, the fifth (which is largest) just below the end of the
cell, and the sixth in an oblique line with it on the dorsal
margin; two or three widely-separated brown costal spots
and an arched series close to the outer margin; a slender
brown marginal line, and a paler line near the base of the

* Y. verbascellus especially.

+ The development is quite different from that in Anaphora, being

quite slender and only emitting divergent bristles from the back of the
last joint.

from the Hawaiian Islands. 403

fringe, beyond which it (the fringe) is almost pure white:
secondaries silvery white, with faint cupreous reflections; an
indistinct marginal testaceous line: body testaceous; palpi
with the terminal bristles dark brown; abdomen silvery at
the base. Primaries below greyish testaceous, with a narrow
buff-coloured border ; fringe silvery : secondaries with greyish
testaceous costal area, otherwise as above : body below shining
golden buff. Expanse of wings 6 lines.
A pair. Honolulu.

Argyresthiide.
42. Argyresthia zebrina, sp. n. (No. 74).

Primaries above stramineous ; two black spots placed ob-
liquely near the base on the costal and dorsal margins, two
larger spots at about the basal third, almost uniting in the
centre into an oblique band; an oblique i irregular abbreviated.
band across the end of the cell, divided by a longitudinal
line of the ground-colour at its inferior extremity, and beyond
this four submarginal black dots ; a broad oblique black sub-
apical band, divided by a slender line of the ground-colour
close to its outer edge; fringe white at apex, but interrupted
by a large black spot confluent with the subapical band, and
emitting a short curved line outwards and downwards close to
the edge of the fringe: secondaries silvery white, slightly
tinted with stramineous towards the apex: body ochraceous,
frons black. Under surface shining grey: primaries with
cupreous reflections. Hxpanse of wings 4 lines.

One specimen. Honolulu.

43. Argyresthia? aurisquamosa, sp. n. (No. 42).

Primaries coarsely scaled; brown, changing to purple in
the light, and with the scales beyond the middle metallic
golden in the centre; an irregular sulphur-yellow spot at
about the centre of the dorsal margin, and a cuneiform sub-
apical costal spot sulphur-yellow, changing in the light to
brassy gold; fringe pale bronzy brown: secondaries bronzy
brown, with the basicostal area and outer margin metallic
silver; fringe very long and bronzy brown: thorax dark
brown, shot with purple and spotted with gold; frons, palpi,
and antenne bright pearly opaline; abdomen greyish brown ;
legs whitish; tarsi obscurely banded with grey. Wings
below bronzy brown: secondaries paler than primaries ; body
shining whity brown. Hxpanse of wings 5 lines.

One imperfect specimen. I have taken the description

404 Mr. A. G. Butler on Nocturnal Lepidoptera

from two specimens previously sent. ‘Occurs in neigh-
bourhood of Honolulu.”

Gracilariide.

44, Gracilaria inana, sp. n. (No. 112).

Allied to G. rufipennella. Primaries above pale brown,
densely irrorated with darker brown, general coloration pale
smoky brown; in certain lights a faint pink reflection; a
blackish dot in the middle, and a second at the end of the cell ;
a line of dark brown scales from the second spot to the costa,
and thence along the margin to apex; four ill-defined dark
brown marginal dots between the apex and the first median
branch ; fringe whity brown, with cream-coloured basal line
and a subbasal series of darker brown flecks: secondaries
with the basal third silvery white, the remainder pale shining
brown ; fringe whity brown, with cream-coloured basal line:
head and prothorax pale brown; frons white, vertex of head
and basal joint of antenne buff, remainder of antenne grey ;
meso- and metathorax and abdomen pearly grey, anal tuft
shining stramineous; legs above brownish, indistinctly banded
with grey. Wings below shining bronze-brown: body
whitish, tinted with yellow towards the anus. Expanse of
wings 64 lines.

One specimen. Honolulu.

45. Gracilaria auripennis, sp. n. (No. 121).

Primaries above golden ochraceous, with orange fringe:
secondaries smoky black: head and palpi opaline; antenne
above black, banded with white, below cream-coloured; thorax
ochraceous; abdomen black. Primaries below shining fuli-
ginous brown, with bright ochreous costal margin and fringe:
secondaries silvery, with brown fringe: body below and legs
brilliant pearly white. Expanse of wings 6 lines.

One specimen, “beaten from ‘Koa’ trees (a species of

Acacia I believe) on Haleakala, Maui” (7. B.).

Elachistide.

46. Laverna abjecta, sp. n. (No. 48).

Allied to JZ. conturbatella. Primaries dark fuliginous
brown; a whitish spot at the base; an angulated cream-
coloured band across the basal fourth; a rather wide bluish-
white streak along the dorsal margin from the angle of the
subbasal band to the external angle of the wing; the inner

from the Hawaiian Islands. 405

edge of this streak is bisinuate, with a cream-coloured spot at
the point between the sinuations ; apical fourth densely irro-
rated with bluish white, with the exception of a spot at apex
and a hastate spot on the outer margin; costal fringe and
basal half of external fringe olive-brown, spotted with white,
outer half cream-colour, tipped with grey : secondaries silvery
grey, with the fringe pale brown at the base: head brown ;
palpi black and white; antenne black; pro- and mesothorax
black; metathorax and abdomen pale brown. Primaries
below pale bronze-brown, with golden costal border ; fringe
crossed by a whitish stripe: secondaries silvery whitish, with
brownish costal border and fringe: body below pearly
whitish. Expanse of wings 7} lines.

One specimen, which came ina former collection, but which
I now venture for the first time to describe.

47. Laverna corvina, sp. n. (No. 122).

Primaries above sericeous jet-black; an oblique cream-
coloured band at basal fourth continuous with an internally
bisinuated streak of the same colour, which extends along the
dorsal margin to the external angle, and then emits a rather
yellower abbreviated band upwards close to the outer margin ;
a cream-coloured costal spot at apical fourth ; fringe smoky
black : secondaries silvery grey, with smoky-brown fringe; a
jet-black pencil of hairs from the base of the costa: head dark
green and golden; palpi blue-black, the joints tipped with
whitish ; antennz black ; collar golden ; pro- and mesothorax
black ; metathorax testaceous ; abdomen prismatic grey ; legs
black, banded with opaline white. Wings below shining
grey ; fringe brownish ; pectus bright silvery ; posterior legs
below and venter bright golden opaline. Expanse of wings
7 lines.

Two specimens, “ beaten from ‘Koa’ trees on Haleakala,

Maui.”
48. Laverna domicolens, sp. n. (No. 124).

Primaries above brownish grey, with slight pinky reflec-
tions; an irregular almost \\~~-shaped black-brown band
from the base of costa, through the centre of the wing, to the
apical third of costa; a black costal spot opposite to the centre
of this band; three blackish costal dots towards apex ; exter-
nal angle suffused with brown; fringe whitish beyond the
centre: secondaries metallic silvery, with pale bronze-brown
fringe: body on both surfaces pearly white; tibia and tarsi
banded with black. Wings below shining silvery, the pri-

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. vii. 30

406 My. A. G. Butler on Nocturnal Lepidoptera

maries appearing tarnished towards the apex and on the fringe.
Expanse of wings 6 lines.

Two specimens, “occurring at Makawao, Maui; about
2000 feet above sea, in a house.”

49. Laverna parda, sp. n. (No. 125).

Primaries above slaty grey, irrorated with black ; the base,
a streak along the dorsal margin, a streak across the cell, a
spot on the costa near apex, and a spot at external angle
densely sprinkled with white scales ; a black spot at the base,
two in the cell, a rather large one closing the cell, and two
below the cell; fringe and the whole of the secondaries sooty
grey: thorax black, spotted with ochreous; frons cream-
coloured ; abdomen grey, with pale margins to the segments ;
lees above black, banded with white, below white. Wings
below shining plumbaginous grey, with dull grey cilia: body
below silvery white. HExpanse of wings 6 lines.

Var. (No. 127).

Smaller; the primaries much more generally irrorated with
white, so that the black spots stand out more prominently ;
the secondaries plumbaginous instead of sooty grey, and with
brown cilia; body paler; the head greyish white or creamy
yellowish, with white frons and almost wholly white palpi;
the black colouring of the upper surface of the legs variable
(in the paler specimen reduced to a series of spots). Expanse
of wings 53 lines.

Three specimens, the typical one taken ‘on Haleakala,
about 4000 feet above sea; apparently connected with dead
wood.” The two others “at light, Makawao, Maui.”

One of the specimens taken at Makawao is exactly inter-
mediate, excepting in size, between the two other specimens
sent by Mr. Blackburn; and as the arrangement of the most
stable character (that is, of the black spots on the primaries)
is the same in all three, I cannot think that we have here
more than a variation to deal with.

50. Chrysoclista tigrina, sp. n. (No. 120).

Primaries above golden orange; basicostal area dusky ;
discoidal cell black, crossed near the middle by two oblique
lines of the ground-colour, and only separated by a third
oblique line from a little curved black stria at the end of the
cell; an oblique blackish costal streak above the end of the
cell, immediately followed by a similar white streak; an
almost fusiform apical costal black patch, partly crossed by

Srom the Hawaiian Islands. 407

two silvery-white tufts of scales, and bounded externally at
apex by a third; a broad silvery-white longitudinal median
stripe from the base almost to the end of the cell; base of
dorsal border dusky; five confluent black dots along the
outer margin, the fourth bounded internally by a white dot ;
apical half of fringe golden orange, longitudinally striped
with white, the dorsal half smoky brown; two longitudinal
black dashes close to the external angle: secondaries silvery
grey, with fuligimous brown fringes: head, thorax, and palpi
pearly white ; abdomen blackish. Wings below silvery grey,
with slight bronzy reflections; apical half of fringe of pri-
maries orange, remainder of fringe brown: body below white.
Expanse of wings 5 lines.
One specimen, ‘“ beaten from ‘Koa’ trees on Haleakala.”

51. Chrysoclista? haleakale, sp. n. (No. 126).

Primaries above black, sericeous, with slight purplish re-
flections ; a few golden-orange scales at the middle of the
costal border, aud a large spot of this colour above the end of
the cell; a broad orange longitudinal stripe running along the
median vein from the base to the end of the cell; a spot at
external angle; cilia orange at apex: secondaries smoky
black, with slight pinky reflections, the cilia dull: head and
thorax orange; frons golden opaline; abdomen slaty grey,
with fiery cupreous reflections. Wings below smoky brown,
shining, with bronzy reflections; primaries with silvery inner
border: body below shining metallic silvery, the tibize and
tarsi blackish above. Hxpanse of wings 6 lines.

Two specimens. ‘On Haleakala, in company with
Laverna parda.”

Pterophoride.
52. Platyptilia repletalis (No. 96).
Platyptilus repletalis, Walker, Cat. Lep. Het. xxx. p. 931. n. 16 (1864),
One specimen. “ Mauna Loa, Hawaii, elevation about
4000 frat.”
wr,
ee ‘mblyptilia cosmodactyla, var. (No. 137).

Alu, .ta cosmodactyla, Hiibner, Samml. eur. Schmett. 5, figs. 35, 36
(1827).

‘ One specimen. ‘Not rare at light; also by beating, at
an elevation of about 2000 feet, on Haleakala, Maui.”
30*

408 Mr. C. O. Waterhouse on new Longicorn Coleoptera.

54. Aciptilia hawaiiensis, sp. n. (No. 138).

Wings above sericeous whity or sandy brown: primaries
paler than the secondaries, but with dark brown costal border ;
a black dot just above the commencement of the cleft between
the lobes; anterior lobe fuliginous brown, crossed near its
base by an oblique white band, and towards the apex by two
obliquely-placed white dots ; fringe at apex white ; posterior
lobe fuligmous brown externally ; fringe spotted here and
there with white, that of the inner margin with a black dot
near the commencement of the cleft, and black spotted with
white towards the external angle: secondaries with greyish
cilia; a black spot at the second third of the abdominal
fringe: metathorax, base of abdomen, and hind margins of
the segments white; legs banded above and below with
white. Wings below darker than above: body below white.
Expanse of wings 6 lines.

Two specimens. ‘Common on the sea-shore at Uoluolu,

Manat?’ (7. B.),

XL.— Descriptions of two new Longicorn Coleoptera and
a new Genus of Dynastide. By CHartes O. WaTER-
HOUSE.

Lamiide.

Megacriodes Forbesii, n. sp.

Niger, nitidus, pube subtilissima cinerea indutus; thoracis disco
macula oculata crocea ornato; elytris basi et sub humeros crebre
granulosis, plagis sex albis ornatis.

Long. 22 lin.

Near to M. Saundersi’, Pascoe (Trans. Ent. Soe. 3rd ser. =
p- 272, 1866); but , judging from the figure (pl. xii. fig. 1), 1
is a more robust species. It differs chiefly i in having the the
of the elytra and all the humeral region thickly studded with
shining granules. ‘The scutellum is yellow. Each elytron
has three patches of white pubescence (which were do htless
yellow when the insect was alive)—the first and secon¢ ad
asin M. Saundersii, but very irregular in form; t.
very elongate, and as if formed of “the two apical spots of
M. Saundersii. The underside is clothed with yellowish-
grey pile, with a broad stripe along the side from behind the
eye to the apical segment of the abdomen ; this stripe is part

Mr. C. O. Waterhouse on new Longicorn Coleoptera. 409

yellow and part white; it was probably yellow when the
specimen was alive.

Hab. Lampong, Sumatra (H. O. Forbes). B.M.

Pamenesperus Dobret, n. sp.

Niger, velutinus, griseo variegatus ; antennarum articulo tertio basi
apiceque testaceo, articulis sex apicalibus flavis.
Long. 8 lin.

Near P. voluptuosus, Th. (Arch. Ent. i. pl. vi. fig. 6), but
with the lateral angle of the thorax much nearer the base.
Antenne with the base and apex of the third joint and the
extreme base of the fourth pale ; half the fifth and all the sixth
to tenth joints yellow; the eleventh is yellow, except at the
extreme apex. Head black; the face, a central line, a patch
behind, and a dot above each eye pale grey. Thorax black,
with a line along the anterior margin, another at the base, an
irregular line over the lateral spine, and a A-shaped mark on
the disk grey. lytra at the base a trifle broader than the
thorax, with obtuse but prominent shoulders, black, with a
transverse grey band at the base; this descends a little at the
suture, dentate along its basal line; at the middle there is a
grey line which, commencing on the margin, extends to the
middle of the elytron, where it ascends a little, and then turns
at right angles towards the suture, where it again descends
for some distance and is united to another band, which leads
back to the original point on the margin. At some distance
from the apex there is an oblique grey band which nearly
reaches the suture and then descends to the apex, emitting a
small branch about halfway to the apex; there is also a grey
spot on the margin close to the apex. The underside and legs
are grey, dotted with black.

Hab. Gaboon. B.M.

I have only seen one specimen of this elegant species. I
have named it after its captor, the late Robert B. Dobree, Esq.

Dynastide.

BRACHYSIDERUS, n. gen.

General form and characters of Antedon. Thorax in the
male evenly convex and without tubercle or horn. Ocular
canthus with its anterior angle directed forward into a short
sharp tooth. Horn on the clypeus a little longer than the
head, thick, horizontal, dilated at the apex, which is emargi-
nate, the angles acute and turned slightly upwards. Legs
much: more robust and more flattened than in Antedon,

410 On a new Species of Dryops from Pekin.

smooth; the anterior tibize broad, with three strong acute
teeth near the apex ; the claw-joint of their tarsi considerably
enlarged, with a strong tooth about the middle; one claw
much larger than the other, suddenly bent before the middle,
with a strong acute tooth at the base. Intermediate and
posterior tarsi with the basal joint short and produced on the
outer side into a long acute spine. Body above and below
smooth and without pubescence.

This genus should be placed between Antedon and Mitra-
cephalus, ,differing from both in the absence of horn on the
thorax.

Brachysiderus quadrimaculatus, n. sp.

Piceus, nitidus; thoracis lateribus flavescentibus macula picea
notatis, elytris testaceis, punctulatis, sutura maculisque quatuor
piceis. <.

Long. cornu excl. 14 lin., lat. 8 lin.

Head pitchy black, nearly impunctate; the horn deeply
excavated at the base. Thorax convex, very much rounded
at the sides, very thickly, finely, and delicately punctured, the
posterior angles obtusely rounded. LElytra a little broader
than the thorax, smoky’ testaceous, not very thickly punc-
tured; the suture broadly and the margins very narrowly
pitchy ; each elytron has a pitchy black spot on the shoulder
and another near the apex.

Hab, Amazons.

This species will be figured in the sixth part of my ‘ Aid to
the Identification of Insects.’

XLI.—Description of a new Species of the Coleopterous
Genus Dryops from Pekin (Family Parnide). By
CHARLES O. WATERHOUSE.

Dryops sericatus, n. sp.

D. substriato affinis et similis, magis tamen elongatus; thorace
postice paulo angustato, lateribus marginatis fere rectis, ad angu-
los anticos solum arcuatis.

Long. 3 lin.

This species has the colour and appearance of D. substriatus,
but is much more elongate and relatively narrower. ‘The
most striking difference is in the form of the thorax: this is
very little transverse, distinctly narrowed posteriorly, much
narrower at the base than the elytra, moderately convex on

Mr. J. Wood-Mason on a new Species of Cetoniide. 411

the disk ; the anterior angles are moderately prominent and
acute ; the sides are distinctly margined, broadly so in front,
as if impressed above the anterior angles; rectilinear, except
near the anterior angles, where they are gently arcuate. The
elytra are less convex, rather more straight at the sides; the
striz are scarcely so well marked ; and the punctuation of the
interstices is finer. The legs are very long, pitchy.

Hab. Pekin. B.M.

XLIT.—Description of a new Cornuted Species of Cetoniidee
from North-eastern India. By J. Woop-Mason, Deputy
Superintendent, Indian Museum, Calcutta.

[Plate XVII. figs. A, B, C.]

Mycteristes microphyllus, n. sp.

3. Slender. Above obscure bronzy, with dull greenish
reflections, and sparsely clothed with minute whity brown
appressed squamiform sete; legs and under surface more
brilliant and redder bronzy, without green reflections, but with
a similar clothing of sete, which are longer and denser on the
thorax ; exposed outer ends of abdominal terga densel
clothed with whity brown setiform scales ; tarsi black. Cly-
peus concave, with its anterior angles pointed, produced, and
somewhat divergent; its front margin armed with a short and
broad-stalked small subcrescentic process, which is slightly
transversely concave behind and correspondingly convex in
front. ‘The crown of the head produced horizontally over
the clypeus into a short, truncated, triangular, lamellar pro-
cess, divided at its extremity into two rounded points by a
median notch. Pronotum unarmed. Mesosternal process
very short, porrected in front, not produced downwards beyond
the level of the sternum. Abdomen grooved along the middle
below. Fore tibiz externally tridentate ; four posterior ones
bidentate, as in M. rhinophyllus.

Length from extremity of cephalic horn to end of abdomen
19 millims.; breadth across bases of conjoined elytra 7°75
millims.

While I was in England on furlough in 1877-78, Mr. E.
W. Janson showed me an insect which I at once recognized
as the female ; it differs from the male in having the clypeus,
asin M. rhinophyllus, simple, but, as far as I recollect, in no

other point of any moment.

412 Bibliographical Notice.

From the Javan MV. rhinophyllus the present species differs
in the small amount of sexual differentiation it has undergone
(the pronotum being hornless, and the colour and general
form the same in both sexes, and the azygous horn on the
front of the clypeus in the male being short and inconspicu-
ous), in having the mesosternal process directed forwards
instead of downwards, in colour, in its slenderer form, and
probably also in the crown of the head in the male being pro-
duced into a bilobed horizontal plate-like process overhanging
the clypeus.

Hab. The specimen was presented to me several years ago
by my friend and colleague Mr. Geoftrey Nevile, who had
received it from Mr. W. Robert, of the Topographical Survey
of India, by whom it was captured in the Naga hills, one of
the hill-ranges of North-eastern India.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XVII. Fies. A-C.

Fig. A. Mycteristes microphyllus, nat. size.

Fig. B. Upper view of the head, enlarged.

Fig. C. Outline of the extremity of the clypeus, viewed from below; drawn
to scale under a Ross’s 35-inch.

BIBLIOGRAPHICAL NOTICE.

Manual of the New-Zealand Coleoptera. By Capt. Tuomas Brown.
Published by command. Wellington: James Hughes. 1880.

A srout volume of 640 pages on the beetles of New Zealand, pub-
lished at the expense of the local government, marks an era in the
scientific history of the colonies. If we except Ceylon, no other
British possession has shown itself so far above ‘the miserable
theory of money on the ledger being the primary rule for empires,
or for any higher entity than city-owls and their mice-catching.”
Capt. Broun has laboured under immense difticulties. With few
books and no opportunity of comparing his ‘‘new species,” he has
given very fair descriptions (beyond, indeed, the European average)
of such as he believes to be undescribed. The author, moreover,
living in the island of Kawau, had not even an opportunity of re-
vising the proof-sheets of his work, although this has been ably
done for him; and, as might be expected, he has not been able to
satisfy himself as to the generic location of many of his species, nor
has he always been fortunate in the names he has applied to them.
We are sorry Dr. Hector, who appears to have seen the work
through the press, did not suggest to Capt. Broun to change them.
The plan of the writer has been to give the original descriptions
of various authors; and these are generally supplemented by re-

Royal Institution of Great Britain. 413

marks of his own; but, as he has omitted the usual quotation com-
mas, it requires some care to distinguish between them.

From the list given at the beginning we find that 1141 species
are described. ‘To those who have been in New Zealand, and noted
the apparent scarcity of animal life (mosquitoes excepted), this
must appear to be a very large number. Many, however, are only
known at present from one or, at most, two or three specimens ;
and some will perhaps be found to be merely varieties. As usual
in island faunas, Curculionide are the most numerous ; they number
207 species ; then follow Longicorns 182, and Carabidee with 135.
Buprestide have only 2 species, Scarabeeidee 29; and all the Phyto-
phagous families do not yield more than 36: these three groups are
in marked contrast with the numerous species of the Australian
fauna. The comparatively small families of Pselaphide and Coly-
didee are represented by 44 and 49 respectively.

There is very little in its beetle-fauna to connect New Zealand
with Australia, and still less with any neighbouring land. Prof.
Huxley considers these islands to form a distinct zoological pro-
vince: they are certainly peculiar in the fragmentary character of
their productions; but they have no endemic groups larger than
genera, and few of these are very remarkable. Captain Broun’s
list contains 355 genera; of these, 93 are represented in England,
while the otherwise exclusively Australian genera are nearly con-
fined to Leperina, Adelium, Amarygmus, Tanychilus, Rhadinosomus,
Pachyura, and Euthyrhinus. With regard to the other orders of
insects it is perhaps hazardous to say that they are not represented
in such large numbers; still there is reason to believe that the
Coleoptera exceed all the rest together. It is to be hoped that this
useful work will be followed by others completing the insect-fauna.

PROCEEDINGS OF LEARNED SOCIETIES.
ROYAL INSTITUTION OF GREAT BRITAIN.

February 4, 1881.—Thomas Boycott, M.D., F.L.S., Vice-President,
in the Chair.

“On the Origin of Colonial Organisms.” By Dr. ANDREW Witson,
F.R.S.E. &e.

Every animal develops, directly or indirectly, from an “ ovum” or
egg; and the plant springs, directly or indirectly, from the germ or
seed. One chief difference between low and high forms of life con-
sists in the fact that the development of the former ceases at a stage
when the development of the latter has barely begun. The Gire-
garina is a microscopic speck of protoplasm living parasitically
within the bodies of earthworms and other Articulated animals,
When development takes place the body becomes oval, develops a
wall or cyst, and the internal protoplasm breaks up into small

414 Royal Institution of Great Britain.

spindle-shaped masses. The body then ruptures, and the small seg-
ments escape, each to become a Gregarina, without further change,
save the development of a nucleus. Each Gregarina at first appears
as a single animal or persona, which converts itself by segmentation
into an aggregation of such beings. There is thus a temporary de-
velopment of a compound or colonial state. Similarly the Amebe
(which are low Protozoa, living in stagnant water and infusions,
and moving, as do the white corpuscles of our blood, by emitting
pseudopodia, or processes of their protoplasmic substance), when
undergoing development, exhibit segmentation or internal division
of their substance, and thus exhibit a compound state as a transi-
tory feature of their reproductive phases.

It is noteworthy that in developing from the eggs the embryos of
all higher animals exhibit a like process of segmentation or division,
as a preliminary phase of their reproduction. There are also forms -
of Protozoa (Myxodictywm) which are truly ‘ colonial” as adults,
and which consist of masses of protoplasm aggregated together to
form compound organisms. The Foraminifera are likewise “ colo-
nial ;” since the shells of these minute Protozoa exhibit, as a rule,
a division into chambers, each occupied by a distinct protoplasmic
unit, organically connected to its neighbours, from which it was pro-
duced by budding.

The Volvox globator, formerly known as the “ Globe animalcule,”
but now ascertained to be a free-swimming lower plant, 1s composed
of distinct units, each provided with two cilia, and resembling a
Chlamydomonas. Volvowis, in fact, a colony of monads. A Sponge
is a compound or “ colonial” organism, in that it consists of an
ageregation of protoplasmic units, some of which resemble Amebe in
nature, whilst others resemble Chlamydomonads. The protoplasmic
units of a sponge-colony are, asarule, united together by a common
skeleton they have helped to elaborate. Each sponge grows from an
egg, the process of reproduction by “‘ budding” being also represented
in the group. Two Spongille, or common freshwater sponges, will
unite if placed in contact, or may separate spontaneously. The
sponge arising from an egg, like a higher animal, thus exhibits seg-
mentation and segregation of its parts and comes to retain this segre-
gate and colonial nature as a permanent feature of the race.

The Hydre of the freshwater pools, lead us to a type of animals
nearly related to the sponges. ach is a tubular animal which may
be artificially divided, and which throws off gemme or buds naturally,
Each Hydra-bud grows into the exact likeness of its parent, and
ultimately detaches itself from the parent body.

The zoophytes are simply Hydrew which have budded, but whose
buds remain permanent to form a veritable tree, whose growth is ever
increasing, and through whose branches a continual store of nutri-
ment is continually circulating. Many zoophytes produce eggs
which simply and directly develop into the compound adults by
budding. Others develop eggs through the media of jelly-fish or
medusoid buds, which break away from the parent tree and live an
independent existence in the sea. In some zoophytes there may be

Royal Institution of Great Britain. 415

seven different kinds of units in the colony, all referable, however, to
one type.

A Flustra, or ‘‘ sea-mat,’’ grows upon shells, and resembles a piece
of pale brown seaweed. Each organism is an animal colony; butits
units, which may number several thousands in one organism, are not
structurally connected together like those of the zoophytes, but are
contained each in a separate cell,

The Yeniada, or tapeworms, consist each of a linear series of
similar “joints.” Each “joint” is in reality comparable to the
unit of zoophyte or “* sea-mat ;” for it is essentially a distinct mem-
ber of a colony, and possesses a complete set of generative and
other organs, and is produced from the head and neck by budding.
According to Hiickel, starfishes and sea-urchins are each compound
or “colonial” animals, Structurally, it is provable that each ray
of a starfish corresponds with worm-structure in broad details. The
Nais and other freshwater worms produce young forms by a new
head being budded out amongst their joints. There is here seen a
tendency to become doubly ‘colonial ;” inasmuch as the single
worm is typically a “colonial” animal, and the new head-develop-
ment causes this compound body to detach a new colony,

Amongst insects, the Aphides, or plant-lice, produce by veritable
‘‘ budding” new generations, and the queen-bee does not fertilize
those eggs which are destined to become “ drone” bees. Thus the
homology of an egg with a “bud” appears demonstrable.

It is the business of philosophy to correlate and arrange facts to
form a harmonious and scientific system, The philosophy of biology
leads us firstly to define an “individual” structurally as a being
whose parts and organs are so closely and intimately connected, that
separation of even a limited structural area means disintegration of
the individual asa whole. Physiologically, an “ individual” animal
or plant is the total development of a single egg or seed. As the
whole zoophyte, sea-mat, and tapeworm arise each from a single
egg, each, im toto, is an “ individual.” The separate units of each are
named ‘‘zodids.” A new personality does not enter into the life-
cycle of any animal or plant until a new egg or seed has been pro-
duced. Even in the case of the Hydra, although the buds become
detached and, to all appearance, are each as truly an “ individual”
as their parent, they possess nevertheless no true personality, They
are merely units or zodids of a colony ; they were produced by bud-
ding, and as such are not “individuals” but parts of an “ indivi-
dual.” If we assumed that the buds of a zoophyte or tapeworm
were “individuals,” we might with equal correctness speak of the
joints of a lobster or worm as “individuals” likewise. Even in
human structure itself there are to be seen traces of a fundamentally
“colonial” nature. The tissues of the highest animals are but ag-
gregations of cells. As such, they have a semi-independent consti-
tution; and there are certain protoplasmic cells (e. g. the white or
amceboid corpuscules of the blood) which roam independently at
will through the body, and possess powers of movement exactly
resembling those of the Ameba and its kind.

416 Royal Institution of Great Britain.

A progressive tendency, according to the theory of evolution, marks
the organic series. The conversion of the “colony” into the ‘in-
dividual ” (in other words, the concentration of originally separate
and independent ‘“ units” or “ zodids”) is the chief developmental
cause of the differences between high and low organisms. ‘he pri-
mitive condition of all organisms is the “ colonial” condition. Egg-
segmentation (or, in Protozoa, body-division) is universal in the
animal world; and cell-multiplication begins the development of
plant-life likewise. Arrest of development at an early stage dis-
tributes the separate units thus formed (as in Gregarina); arrest at
a later stage gives us the sponge colony (a series of similar aggre-
gated cells), or the tapeworm colony (a collection of essentially
similar ‘‘ joints”). Physiologically, the higher organism devotes
less time to pure reproduction and becomes more explicitly busied
with individual interests. Hence the increased concentration of
energy which results in the formation of the highest “ individuals,”
that yet retain, in the “colonial” and cellular structure of their
tissues, the evidence of an originally compound nature.

In the plant world, such “ individualization ” is seen as a secon-
dary tendency in the close aggregation of flowers in Composite,
and in the transformation of uniform composites (e. g. thistle) into
individualized forms (e. g. daisy) through such intermediate steps as
the centauries.

The conclusions of our study of ‘ colonial” organisms are as
follows :—1. The original condition of organisms is colonial: the
universal segmentation of the egg is a proof of this inference; and
the development of new forms by this so-called process in low forms
like Gregarine &c. supports this conclusion. 2. The lower we pro-
ceed in the scale of being, the more marked is the tendency to form
“colonial” organisms. 3. Arrest of development, by causing an
organism to cease progressing at a segregated stage, will tend to
produce a ‘‘compound” and “ colonial” constitution. 4. The plant
world is “colonial” in its highest types. Plant-development has
not proceeded towards any marked increase of “ individuality” over
the colonial nature of lower forms. <A tree is in many respects as
markedly “ colonial” as a Volvox. 65. The highest animals exhibit
lingering traces of an originally ‘‘ colonial” nature in their histo-
logical composition. 6. The tendency of life-development is towards
concentration, and the conversion of the “colony” into the true
“ individual.” ;

It is suggested by way of final inference, and by way of incursion
into a biological by-path, that the theory and idea of an originally
‘* colonial” constitution may explain the existence in man and higher
animals generally of those tribal and family associations which mark
the upper strata of existence. The semi-independent action of many
parts of the higher brain, for instance, receives an explanatory hint,
as to causation, from the idea of an originally independent and
colonial constitution.

Dublin Microscopical Olub. 417

DUBLIN MICROSCOPICAL CLUB.
June 24, 1880.

Two probably distinct forms of Penicillium.—Mr. Pim showed
two forms of Penicillium perhaps specifically distinct, one with the
chain of spores repeatedly branched, the other presenting only four
or five quite simple chains. They were the extreme forms, on either
side, of which P. glaucum may be looked upon as the mean. The
compound form occurred on a decaying Agaric, and the simple one
on dead flowers of Euphorbia jacquinieflora.

Trichodectes subrostratus.—This louse from a cat was shown by
Dr. W. M. A. Wright. Two of the specimens of this species (which
had not hitherto been found in Ireland) corresponded with the
description given by Denny ; the third had a bituberculate apex to its
rostrum, and so answered more closely to the species described by
Burmeister.

Two rotund, granulate Staurastra, one referred to St. turgescens, De
Notaris, and another ( probably undescribed) superficially resembling but
essentially distinct, and with distinct zygospores.— Mr. Archerexhibited
the zygospore of a Staurastrwm which, as regards the parent form
itself, seems to come very near that which he for the present identifies
as St. turgescens, De Notaris ; and to a casual observation indeed they
might seem identical. The form attributed to De Notaris 1s more
plump and rounded—seemingly in itself an inadequate difference on
which to found a species ; but yet this seemed to carry with it internal
differences in the mode of arrangement of the contents. In the form of
which the zygospore was shown on the present occasion the mode of
arrangement of the contents in the parent form was strictly that of a
typical Staurastrum, or that most common in the genus—that is to
say, the contents forming pairs of chlorophyll plates radiating from
the central axis of each semicell towards the angles. This might
probably be called the medio-laminar arrangement, or, better, the
elasmo-mesenteric arrangement (that by far the most common in
Desmidiex), in contradistinction to the mode prevailing in certain
other species, where the chlorophyll lies in variously disposed and
specifically more or less characteristic plates on the interior of the
outer wall, which might be called the parieto-laminar arrangement,
or, better, the elasmo-pleurenteric arrangement. Now in the form
identified as St. twrgescens, De Notaris, the mode of arrangement of
the contents is different; for the chlorophyll masses, though radiating
from the centre, do not form double lamin, but irregular rays,
projecting in every direction ; they thus somewhat compare to the con-
figuration of the contents in the joint of a Zygnema, This might be
called the stellate arrangement, or, better, the astro-mesenteric ar-
rangement, and is rare in Desmidiew, but characteristic of the non-
constricted genus Cylindrocystis. But, above all, the form now
shown, however it may externally resemble that of De Notaris, dif-

418 Dublin Microscopical Club.

fered toto ceclo in its zygospore therefrom. In that species, exhibited
to the Club at a former meeting, the zygospore is as yet unique
amongst Desmidiez: in figure it more nearly approaches that of
Cosmarium margaritiferum than any other; but it is compressed,
not orbicular, and, besides, the superficial convexities are broader
and not so elevated, whilst its colour is of an orange or yolk-of-
egg colour, resembling, in fact, that of the spores of Volvow, and
wholly unlike that of any other Desmid. In the Stawrastrum now
shown, however, the orbicular zygospore is beset with slender spines,
slightly dilated at the base, and minutely bi- or trifid at the apex,
and green in colour—in fact, belonging to a widely diffused type of
zygospore. Thus these two forms, however much they may ewter-
nally resemble each other, declare themselves essentially distinct,
and that in a manner sufticiently pronounced.

October 21, 1880.

Loligo magna.—Prof. Mackintosh exhibited a cross section of the
arm of the common Squid. The section showed that the axis
of the arm was occupied by a large nerve, which sends branches to
the pistons of the suckers ; in the sheath surrounding the nerve
were three bloodvessels, the coats of which were very distinct, and
which could be seen in longitudinal sections to send branches into
the substance of the nerve as well as to the surrounding muscular
bundles which composed the greater part of the arm, and were
disposed in various ways. The number of vessels varied from two
to five. Mr. Mackintosh had used both Rutherford’s carmine and
Ranyier’s picrocarmine as staining-fluids ; but the former gave the
best results.

A new form of Potato-disease—Mr. Greenwood Pim exhibited
specimens which had been given to him by Mr. Balfe, of the Royal
Horticutural Society, who had received them from Galway, where the
disease had materially injured the crop. On splitting the stems a
number of small roundish bodies about the size of small peas were found
imbedded in downy mycelium. These, when young, are white, but
turn black as they get older. A section through one of them shows
it to consist of a sclerotioid tissue of condensed mycelium, somewhat
like Ergot, but differing from it considerably. Under present cir-
cumstances, and till some form of fructification is produced, it is not
possible to say to what group of Fungi it is to be referred, as the
old genus, to which it would formerly have been relegated (Sclero-
tium), has been abolished, it having been shown to consist of con-
ditions of various very distinct Fungi. Mr. W. G. Smith, who has
examined specimens, coincides in this view.

Section through Sebaceous Gland of Skin of Negro.—Mr. P.S.
Abraham showed a section through the sebaceous gland of the
skin of a negro. The gland was in the neighbourhood of a tubercle
of leprosy ; and it was uncertain how far its great size or hyper-

Dublin Microscopical Club. 419

trophy was due to this pathological condition. The cells of the
gland were of uncommon size, and showed most clearly the reticular
protoplasm of the nucleus, as well as of the cell-substance; and it
was, indeed, chiefly in illustration of this that the slide was exhibited.
Mr. Abraham had with him some sections through the tail of a
newt, in which the epidermic cells showed the same structures, cor-
roborating the observations of Klein, Fleming, and others, upon
which he made some remarks.

Structure of an abnormal pilose Tumour in the Pharyna.—Mr.
Abraham further showed a section through an abnormal pilose
growth, congenital, in the pharynx of a girl. A white glistening
tumour had been for years observed in the girl’s throat behind the
velum palati. Latterly it increased much in size, and interfered
with swallowing. When excised and examined microscopically it
was found to consist chiefly of adipose and areolar tissue, with a
central nodule of fibro-cellular cartilage, with fibres of striped
muscular tissue passing in various directions ; it was covered with
ordinary skin, possessing a well-marked epidermis with rete Mal-
pighit and corneous layer, numerous hair-follicles and hairs, seba-
ceous and sudoriferous glands. There was in places a considerable
hyperplasia of epidermic cells. Mr. Abraham threw out the sug-
gestion that the pressure of epidermis on the top of the pharynx
might indicate the line of epiblastic invagination by which we know
the pituitary body is formed in the embryonic encephalon.

Green Gland of Palinurus.—Mr. Henry St. John Brooks showed
sections of the green gland of Palinurus vulgaris. The object,
so difficult to obtain, owing to its quick decomposition after death,
had been secured by killing the animal by hemorrhage, when the
gland was dissected out and placed in absolute alcohol.

Metacarpal Bones of the Manus of a ten-day Puppy.—These were
shown in section by Mr. B.C. Windle. The first section, taken about
the middle, besides the normal muscles, tendons, &c., showed an extra
interosseus muscle between the second and third metacarpal bones,
which was interesting as pointing to a probable original symmetry
of the interossei, subsequently lost by the disappearance of one.
The second section, taken from the same puppy at the base of the
first phalanges, showed the bosses of cartilage which would have
developed into the desmoid bones.

Botryosportum diffusum, Corda.—Mr. G. Pim showed Botryo-
sporvum diffusum, Corda. This is one of the most beautiful and
delicate forms amongst the Mucedines, and consists of numerous
slender threads branching occasionally and beset with short ramuli,
each crowned with a globose mass of minute oval spores. The
whole plant is pure white. The specimens shown occurred on dead
stems of Ipomea at Monkstown, co. Dublin, this autumn.

Aspergillus from Membrana tympani.—Mr. B. Wills Richardson

420 Dublin Microscopical Club.

exhibited a scarlet staining of an Aspergillus in fructification that
had been removed from the membrana tympani of a medical friend.

The fungus rapidly developed on the membrane, causing tempo-
rary deafness of the corresponding ear. The specimen, which was
mounted in Farrant’s solution, showed a well-marked mycelium
and two fruit-bearing hyphe, each having a sporangium in a more
or less mature condition.

In D. B. St. John Roosa’s treatise on diseases of the ear (p. 138)
there may be seen an illustration of Aspergillus flavescens in fructi-
fication that more nearly resembles the specimen exhibited than any
of the representations of Aspergillus which he had seen.

Anabena living in Botrydiwm.—Dr. E. Perceval Wright exhi-
bited a specimen (for which he was indebted to his friend Dr. E.
Bornet) of Botrydiwm granulatum from Montmorency, which had
been the subject of a paper by Dr. M. L. Marchand in the ‘ Bul-
letin’ of the Botanical Society of France (28th November, 1879).
It is now well known that many plants belonging to the group of
the Nostocs without gelatinous cell-walls live within the cells of
other plants: thus they are to be found in <Azolla, Anthoceros,
Blasia, Gunnera, and Lemna; and it was to be expected that they
would equally find themselves at home in the cells of even more
simply organized plants. The instance exhibited was of special
interest ; it had been detected by Dr. Marchand while examining
under the microscope some plants of Botrydiwm, which, instead of
containing the usual mass of granular chlorophyll, seemed filled
with a chain of moniliform filaments. These were composed of
cells, some oblong, with yellowish heterocysts; they did not fill the
entire cavity of the cell, and seemed to adhere to its inner walls.
The Botrydium plants were perfect ; the root-like prolongations, as
well as the rest of the plant, were quite closed; and it is a question
still to be investigated as to how the Anabaena gotin. Dr. Marchand
calls attention to the remarkable figure of Mr. E. Parfitt (‘ Gre-
villea,’ vo]. i. pl. vil. p. 103), im which there can be now little doubt
with the light thrown on them by Dr. Marchand’s discovery, that
there is represented our common Botrydiuwm granulatum with an
endophytic Anabaena, the latter shown in a crushed condition and
somewhat feebly represented ; but the observation of Parfitt is now
seen to be not without a special interest of its own.

November 19, 1880.

Triticum monococcum.—Dr. M‘Nab exhibited sections of the em-
bryo from seeds which had been hardened in absolute alcohol, and
sections cut in three directions of the naturally imbedded embryo.
The structure could be readily made out and a complete demonstra-
tion obtained of the central row of large cells from which the first
vessel originates. This row of cells in the wheat is apparently quite
the same as that figured by Kny in his ‘ Botanische Wandtafeln ’ as
occurring in Secale cereale.

Dublin Microscopical Club. 421

Section of Epididymis of Dog.—Dr. P. 8. Abraham presented a
section through the epididymis of a dog hardened in a 4-per-cent.
solution of chromic acid and stained with logwood, chiefly to show
the relations which exist between a cell and its cilia. The latter
were seen to be prolongations, as it were, of the protoplasmic net-
work, which, arranged longitudinally in the columnar epithelial
cell, makes up its substance. Dr. Abraham made some remarks
on the movement of cilia, and referred to Dr. Klein’s mechanical
explanation.

Problematic Closterium-like “* Semicell,’ its Nature, or its Place in
Nature, uadecided.—Mr. Archer showed an example, about the third
or fourth he had met with, of the empty “ wall” of what appeared,
as regards figure and aspect, to be a Closterium of large size and coarse
build ; but, seeing that he had never found any green contents, or
even the remains of any green contents, and not only so, but that,
previously as now, the example appeared to be only a “half- cell,”
and that (at the broader end or middle of the supposed Closterium-
cell) as it were rudely torn, not seemingly separated at any line of
suture, possibly after all this might even not be a Desmid at all.
Still its curvature and form were those of a Closterium—the wall
thick and red, the ends bluntly rounded (not unlike the contour of
Closterium Ehrenbergii), the “lower” margin curved a little upwards
towards the apex, and the superficies were ornamented by slightly
irregular lines of erect gland-like papille, which, viewed at the
edge, imparted to it a fringe-like aspect ; sometimes a series of these
papilla became for a little space interrupted, and sometimes stopped
short ere reaching the gradually narrowing extremity, as it were
to avoid overcrowding at the apex; the intervals between the lines
of papillee smooth.

Thus this form resembled a good deal that named by Reinsch
Closterium Braunit, which, however, it assuredly was not. That form
is no doubt a true and remarkable Closterium, whereas, as seen, the
present,form remained not a little of a puzzle. In Clostertwm Brauna
the yverrucula composing the longitudinal lines are very closely
posed, so much as at first sight to appear as ordinary striz, which
they are not; whereas in the present form the elongate verrucula
show very appreciable and somewhat irregular intervals as they run
in slightly irregular file. Can this object belong to any animal or
animal’s limb? The determination of the puzzling object now
shown, one way or the other, would be a matter of interest.

An Ancient Sea-weed.—Dr. E. Perceval Wright exhibited sections
of a small morsel of marble from the ‘‘ Calcaire Carbonifére, terrain
primaire,” of Namur, in Belgium, under a j-inch objective, which
clearly showed the cell-svstem of an Alga. This most ancient sea-
weed had been described by M. Munier-Chalmas in 1876 as Litho-
thamnion marmoreum. The wonderful state of preservation of this
fossil plant enabled almost the minutest details of cell-structure to
be seen.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. vii. 31

4.22 Dublin Microscopical Club.

December 16, 1880.

Cross Section of Leech.—Prof. Mackintosh exhibited a cross sec-
tion of the body of the medicinal leech, and called attention to
the system of anastomosing tubes of different sizes to be seen in
the cells of the nephridium. These were very well described by
Bourne, in the July number of the ‘Quarterly Journal of Micro-
seopical Science’ for the current year. Prof. Mackintosh’s results,
which were obtained independently , agree in the main with Bourne’s. |
He was not quite sure, however, that the latter was correct in. his
suppesition (offered with reserve) that there was no communica-
tion between the duct of the nephridium and the tubules; but on
this point he would not speak with certainty until he had studied
the rest of his sections.

Olpidium Giriffithsiv, n. s., Perceval Wright.—Prof. E. Perceval
Wright exhibited a number of mountings showing the various
stages in the life- history of a new species of Olpidium to be
called Olpidium Griffithsie, found by him in the as yet unopened
fructification of Griffithsia setacea. Led astray by appearances,
even though on his guard at the time, Dr. Wright had once, some
time ago, showed these as antheridia; but the antheridia of
Griffithsia have been shown by Thuret to be of the ordinary type ;
and an investigation of these growths for a few days this September,
at Dinard, revealed their true nature, the first hint of which had
been given to him by Dr. Bornet. Specimens were met with
of a fine green, as well as of a pink, colour; and full details were
promised.

Human Spinal Cord.—Mr. P. 8, Abraham showed a section of
human spinal cord taken from the cervical region, near to the
medulla oblongata. ‘The point of interest in the specimen was
that in two instances the processes of the large cells of the
anterior cornua of the grey matter seemed to anastomose with pro-
cesses from other cells, an arrangement not generally figured in
histological works.—Mr. E. G. Hull likewise showed sections of
spinal cord. :

Sections of the Killiney Granite, showing minute Crystals of Apatite,
shown by Prof. Hull—These appear as long, slender, colourless
prisms traversing the quartz of the granite, and in cross section
apparently show a polygonal form; but being exceedingly minute,
it was difficult to determine whether or not they were hexagonal.
They were visible with a one-fourth objective and No. 1 eye-
piece, but with a one-fifth objective were very well defined. Prof.
Hartley, F.C.S., had previously tested the specimens from which
the slides were made for phosphate of lime, and found it present in
very minute quantities in the silica, corresponding to the smallness
of the prisms shown in the slides.—Dr. Frazer stated that he had
obtained a crystal of apatite from the granite of Kalliney, but that
their occurrence is very rare.

Miscellaneous. 423

Yew Algal Form appertaining to Stigonema.—Mr. Archer showed
a form appertaining to the genus Stigonema, which seemed worthy
to stand as a distinct species. This form grew free in water (not
attached like other species), and formed short stout filaments,
mostly rather regularly cylindrical, but occasionally, though rarely,
presenting enlargements along their length, lending a torulose aspect.
Unlike Stigonema mamillosum, this had not lateral branches for the
giving off of propagative eells; but in place of these almost every
example was furnished, mostly at each end, sometimes at one only,
with a prolongation, often of considerable length, similar to (but
usually much longer than) the lateral branches of S. mamellosum,
These prolongations could be seen filled with larger-sized “cells”
than those of the main filament and in single file; but mostly
these tubular prolongations were already emptied. Thus the pre-
sent examples looked not unlike, as it were, a Stigonema in the
middle, becoming suddenly transformed at either end into a Siro-
siphon—an interpretation, however, which could hardly be enter-
tained as the correct one; these ought rather to be regarded as
analogous to the branches of S. mamillosum, lateral in that species,
here terminal. Consequently the distinction into a basal and
apical extremity must be regarded in this form as obliterated,
being, so to speak, a form with two apices and no basal extremity.
A branching seemed rarely to take place. One example, indeed,
presented two short branches, each terminating in one of the
described Sirosiphon-like continuations ; the empty terminal pro-
longations thus appeared as tubular hyaline “ tail-like” appendages.
The internal structure of the “* stem” did not appear like that of
S. mamillosum or S, atrovirens (= Ephebe pubescens), the * cells”
being smaller and more lenticular; but it especially differed in
the very regularly posed, nearly equidistant, centrally located and
lenticularly shaped (not orbicular) heterocysts. This form might
possibly stand as Stigonema amphiacrogenum.

MISCELLANEOUS.
On the Organs of Taste in the Osseous Fishes. By M. E. Jourpan.

F. E. Scuurzz, in two memoirs published in 1862 and 1867,
described the cyathiform bodies of the barbel and of the tadpole of
Pelobates fuscus, and found in them a structure analogous to that of
the corpuscles described by Lovén and Schwalbe in the tongue of
the Mammalia. He was thus led to assign to the cyathiform cor-
puscles of fishes functions identical with those of the gustatory
bodies of the mammalian tongue.

Our researches upon several fishes, and especially upon the Peri-
stedion cataphractum, or Malarmat, have enabled us to observe some
new facts, which confirm F. E. Schulze’s opinion.

424 Miscellaneous.

The Malarmat presents the remarkable peculiarity of possessing
at thesame time barbels like those of Mullus barbatus, and free rays
identical with those of the Gurnards. The thick cuirass which
covers the body of these fishes seems to justify the development of
these organs of taste and touch and their grouping in different
regions. The barbels of the Malarmat, which are sometimes
arranged in tufts, sometimes isolated, fringe the lower jaw to the
number of ten or twelve; two of them always attain very large
dimensions, and present secondary ramifications. All these barbels
are furnished with cyathiform bodies of no great size and formed
by the union of two sorts of cells: some of these, grouped in the
centre and projecting slightly at the surface of the barbel, are like
fibres furnished with a voluminous nucleus ; the others, arranged at
the periphery, are cylindrical and terminate in a flat surface.
These little organs not only exist on the barbels, but they are also
diffused in great numbers in the mucous membrane that lines the
buccal cavity; they are arranged in rows in the pharynx; and
three or four of them occupy each of the little papille which project
from the rudimentary tongue. They are always seated in the epi-
dermis ; but their structure is difficult to make out, on account of
their small dimensions.

The eyathiform bodies of Mullus barbatus are much more yolu-
minous; hence we have been able to make a more complete inves-
tigation of them. They are like those described by F. HE. Schulze
in the Barbel and the Tench. Each corpuscle is situated in a point of
the epidermis corresponding to a papilla of the dermis ; it is clearly
marked off from the cells which surround it by the dark coloration
which it acquires after the action of osmic acid and by the aspect of
its constituent elements. Each of them is formed of cells belonging
to two types, between which we observe all transitional forms:
some are cylindrical and situated at the periphery; the others,
grouped at the centre of the ovoid body, terminate in a conical pro-
longation, the points of which, generally masked by mucus, appear
less distinctly than in the Malarmat. All these elements are fur-
nished with a voluminous nucleus; and their protoplasm is strongly
coloured by osmium. At the base of each corpuscle we see a small
granular mass, formed by the varicose basal prolongations of the
cells of the ecyathiform bodies: it is in this granular mass that the
cylinder-axes of the nervous fibres disappear; and from it the cells
of the corpuscles emerge. Mullus barbatus possesses ovoid bodies,
identical with those which we have just described, in the mucous
membrane of the tongue and pharynx.

In the Gurnards we have found cyathiform corpuscles upon the
tongue. It is probable that they exist in the buccal mucous mem-
brane of most fishes.

From the facts just indicated we must conclude that, among the
nervous terminations in fishes deseribed by M. Joubert as organs of
touch, we must distinguish those which possess cyathiform bodies
from those which are destitute of them. What functions are we to
attribute to them? From the investigations of F. E. Schulze, F.

Miscellaneous. 425

Todaro, Engelmann, Lovén, and Schwalbe it seems to us difficult
not to regard the cyathiform bodies of fishes as gustatory papille.
Their structure and their situation in the epidermis separate them
completely from the tactile corpuscles, such as we commonly see in
birds and mammals.

The sense of taste thus acquires in fishes an importance which
may appear exaggerated, but which seems to us accounted for by
the nature of the medium in which these animals live. The search
for food in these creatures must be guided especially by sensitive
terminations more particularly destined to the reception of gustatory
emanations; and this explains the distribution of the cyathiform
bodies upon external organs, explorating-apparatus, the situation of
which has deceived observers, but which need no more surprise us
than the existence of well-formed otocysts, far from the head, upon
the last segments of the JMysides.—Comptes Rendus, March 21,
1881, p. 743.

On the Pteroclide. By Moprsr Boepanow.

From anatomical data Elliot (** Study of the Pteroclide, or Family
of the Sand-Grouse ”) arrived at the conclusion that the Pteroclide
should be placed between the Columbee and the Rasores, a position
which had been indicated for them even before Elliot’s work, and
as to the correctness of which the author thinks there can be no doubt.
He regards it, however, as a more rational course not to refer the
Sand-Grouse either to the Columbe or to the Rasores, but to raise
them into a distinct order, as many peculiarities of organization, as
well as the mode of life, separate them sharply from the Rasores.
Thus the form of the wings and feet is by no means gallinaceous ; the
coloration and the mode of life are quite peculiar ; further the eggs
resemble those of the pigeons, but possess a special coloration, and
the layings of the Pteroclidz consist normally of only three eggs,
whilst in the Gallinee they are much more numerous. Finally, in
the Pteroclidze the young after exclusion are covered with a down of
very peculiar coloration, and are not blind, although they are unable
to run about. All these characters, with many others, induce the
author to propose to raise the Pteroclide to the rank of an order,
standing between the Columbe and Rasores, and for which he sug-
’ gests the name Herrrocrira.

Besides the Pteroclide the Thinocoride must be referred to this
order in accordance with the views of C. L. Bonaparte. The agree-
ment between Attagis and Pterocles is so striking that one cannot
understand how the Thinocoridz have been referred to the Gralla-
tores. The two genera just mentioned not only resemble each other
in external characters, in the form of the beak, wings, and feet, in
the plumage, &c., but even in the character of their dwelling-places
they offer a very remarkable agreement. The species of Pterocles
inhabit deserts and are always companions of the camel; the
species of Attagis live on the alpine meadows of the Andes and are
associated with the llamas.

426 Miscellaneous.

Finally the author describes two new species of Pterocles, namely :—
P. Severzowt (=Tetrao caudacutus, Gmel.,=7'. alchata, Gmel.,=
1. chata, Pall.,=Pterocles caspius, Ménétr.) from the Aralo-Caspian
steppes, Turkestan, Transcaucasia, and North Persia; and P. Ellioti
from Abyssinia.—Bull. Acad. Imp. Sc. St. Pétersb. tome xxyii.
pp. 164-168.

Investigation of certain Points in the Anatomy of Sternaspis scutata.
By M. Max. Rrersca*,

The Sternaspis measures about 0°030 metre in length and
0-010 metre in breadth. Its body, which is attenuated anteriorly
in a state of repose, is inflated in front and behind and constricted
in the middle when the animal, in order to move, throws forward
the retractile anterior portion of its body. The latter bears three
rows of sete, which are interrupted upon the dorsal and ventral
lines, and which may be concealed by the invagination of the ante-
rior region of the trunk. ‘The mouth, which is somewhat ventral,
is surmounted in front by a small prominence homologous with the
cephalic lobe, and indicating the place occupied by the cerebroid
ganglia. In the posterior region we observe a ventral shield fringed
with tufts of sete, except at its anterior margin ; above its posterior
margin is placed the somewhat dorsal anus, which is surmounted by
two oval perforated plates garnished with numerous branchial fila-
ments. ‘Towards the anterior third, upon the ventral surface, we
may distinguish two small conical appendages, axially perforated ;
these are the external terminations of the generative organs. There
are also small bundles of sete in the median ventral region of the
body ; but they do not appear beyond this.

The integuments consist of a thick and resistant fibrous layer,
striated parallel to the surface, covered externally by a layer of
hairs, which alone seem to represent the epidermis, and lined inter-
nally with a granular stratum, in which we may sometimes succeed
in detecting nuclei: from this layer, which internally is in contact
with the muscles, a number of more or less undulated filaments
start, traversing the fibrous zone perpendicularly and terminating
in the hairs; chloride of gold, employed as suggested by M. Ranvier,
gives them an intense violet colour, as also to the granular layer,
while the fibrous zone remains nearly colourless. I think we may
regard these filaments as nervous terminations.

Further in we meet with an external layer of transverse mus-
cular fibres, then an inner layer of longitudinal fibres, which are
inserted upon the reentering lines bounding the segments. I shall
confine myself here to indicating further the powerful development
of the retractor muscles, formed principally of two bundles placed
on the sides of the nervous cord, and the fibres of which are im-
planted in front at the base of the anterior sete, and behind upon
the ventral surface of the integuments : these fibres are of unequal

* The author’s examinations of this worm were made on specimens
from off Cape Breton, in the Bay of Biscay, and from the Gulf of Lyons.

Miscellaneous. 427

lengths ; some of them reach the ventral shield. These muscles cause
the invagination of the anterior part of the trunk, the protraction
of which is brought about by the posterior transverse muscles, which,
by contracting, drive forward the fluid of the general cavity.

The digestive canal at first travels from before backwards, bends
round near the perforated plates, returns forward, then turns again
backward to terminate at the anus: it forms numerous convolu-
tions, and is further irregularly twisted spirally with the generative
organs. We may distinguish in it the following regions:—1l, a
wide, short, protractile pharynx, in the form of a bulb, presenting
glandular ridges; 2, amuch narrower and longer cesophagus, which
is analogous in structure to the stomach, but is destitute of the vibra-
tile furrow, and its less developed epithelial layers possess no
granulations ; 3, a stomach considerably-wider than the other parts
of the intestine, and composed of the peritoneum, of a feeble
muscular layer, the scattered fibres of which are partly longitudinal,
partly transverse, and of a greatly developed glandular epithelium
which forms prominent longitudinal ridges in the interior ; at the
commencement of the. stomach originates a vibratile furrow, which
only stops at the terminal part of the intestine; the stomach secretes
a yellowish liquid which gives a green colour with Gmelin’s and a
red colour with Pettenkofer’s reagent; I think it may be regarded
as bile; 4, a recurrent intestine, and, 5, a posterior intestine, which
I distinguish from each other principally because of their general
direction, and to facilitate a more detailed description; their struc-
ture essentially resembles that of the stomach, except the smaller
development of the epithelium, which is here no longer glandular ;
6, a protractile terminal intestine, destitute of the furrow and pre-
senting the structure of the external skin.

The nervous system consists of two cerebroid ganglia, of a wide
collar embracing the pharynx, and of a ventral cord, which widens
considerably behind over the shield, in consequence of a greater
development of its connective elements. On its ventral surface this
cord gives off numerous unpaired nerves, directed downwards and
backwards, which afterwards bifurcate into two symmetrical
branches. I have not yet completely elucidated the question of the
relation of these branches with the granular layer and the nervous
filaments mentioned above.

The branchial filaments, destitute of cilia, have their internal
cavity divided longitudinally by a fibro-muscular partition; the
two elongated sinuses thus formed communicate by a loop at the
free extremity of the filament, and unite to form a single canal near
the point of insertion upon the perforated plate. In the living
animal we see some of these filaments elongated in the water, which
they beat; the red blood contained in them enables the loop formed
by the two sinuses to be recognized; but most of the filaments
are usually retracted and spirally rolled up by the contraction
of the longitudinal muscles which line the two sinuses, and
which drive back the blood to the interior of the body, whilst the
elongation of the branchiz makes it flow into them. At the point

428 Miscellaneous.

of insertion of each filament the perforated plate is traversed by a
short canal lined with an epithelial layer, and afterwards dividing
into several branchial vessels. Between the filaments the plates,
the structure of which is analogous to that of the skin, have nume-
rous hairs. The branchial vessels of the two plates all open into a
wide and very short canal, which opens into the dorsal vessel.

In a future communication I will summarize my observations on
the vascular and generative systems, the segmental organs, and the
embryogeny of this worm.—Comptes Rendus, April11, 1881, p. 926.

The Bears of the Cavern of Lherm. By M. H. Frrmor,

As is well known, the bone-cave of Lherm, in the Ari¢ge, has
furnished numerous remains of animals, including Ursus speleus,
Felis spelea, Hyena spelea, Rhinoceros, Cervus, &e. The most
frequent of these is the first-named species, Ursus spelceus, of which
not less than one hundred crania have been obtained. M. Filhol
remarks that these numerous crania prove the great fixity of cha-
racter of this species, and that Ursus speleus in its most modified
forms has nothing to do with the existing Ursus arctos. M. Marty
has recently found two skulls of bears different from any previously
met with. One of these, a perfect skull, measuring along its lower
surface 35 centim. from the incisive margin to the occipital foramen,
has six teeth behind the canine, as in existing Bears, instead of three
as in Ursus speleus, and the form and proportions of those organs
are as in Ursus arctos. This applies to the other characters of the
skull; and M. Filhol identifies the animal with the living Brown
Bear, which, he considers, cannot have descended from Ursus
speleus, but must have originated in some distant region, perhaps
North America, and gradually advanced to take the place of the
great Cave-Bear in these countries.

The second specimen consists of the anterior parts of a bear’s
head, also differing from those hitherto found in caves. In the
upper jaw it had four teeth behind the canine, and the first pre-
molar was preceded by a free space of 15 millim. Consequently
the face was very short, but at the same time it was remarkably
widened. Its transverse diameter behind the carnassial tooth is
10°3 centim. The anterior nasal aperture measures 64 millim.
across and 51 millim. from front to back. In all other bears the
antero-posterior diameter is the larger. The forehead was de-
pressed and almost horizontally continuous with the nasal bones.
Its elevation above the palatine arch at a point answering to the
postorbital apophyses is only 10-8 centim.; in the Ursus aretos
above mentioned this measurement gives 11-8 centim., and in
Ursus speleus 18°3 centim. The width of the forehead between the
apices of the postorbital apophyses is 13-9 centim., or only a few
millimetres less than in the largest crania of Ursus speleus. These
characters lead M. Filhol to regard this skull as representing a new
species of bear; and he proposes to name it Ursus Gaudryt.

M. Marty has also found in the cavern of Lherm the femur of a
fossil lion 46 centim. long.— Comptes Rendus, April 11, 1881, p. 929.

THE ANNALS

AND

MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY.

[FIFTH SERIES.]

No. 42. JUNE 1881.

XLIUT.— On Paleospinax priscus, Egerton.
By James W. Davis, F.G.S. &e.

[Plate XX.]

I HAVE recently had the good fortune to become possessed of
an example of this rare fish, which serves to elucidate some
characters not shown on the specimens described by Sir P.
Egerton in the xiii. decade of the Memoirs of the Geological
Survey (1872). Whilst proving the correctness of the deduc-
tions drawn by the author, this specimen also exhibits charac-
ters which enable me to correct some inferences drawn from
imperfect evidence.

My specimen is 10 inches in length. The front part of the
head is absent; and probably 2 inches of the caudal extre-
mity is also broken away. The body of the fish included
between these parts is extremely wellrepresented. ‘The fish is
laid on its ventral surface, and exposes the dorsal. There are
two large pectoral fins, two dorsal fins, each having attached
to its anterior portion a bony fin-ray. There is also exposed
one ventral fin, the opposite one being hidden beneath the
body of the fish. The caudal fin is entirely absent. The
vertebree extend from their connexion with the head to the

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol, vii. 32

430 Mr. J. W. Davis on Paleospinax priscus, Egerton.

opposite extremity of the specimen. The whole surface is
covered with minute dermal ossicles or shagreen.

There are seventy-eight vertebre present. The second
dorsal spine is evidently in its natural position with regard to
the vertebre, and is fixed above the fifty-sixth from the head ;
behind there are twenty-two others. The position of the
anterior dorsal spine and fin has been somewhat deranged
during the decay of the fish: the spine has been pressed
away from the fin, and is now separated by an inch and a half,
or the length of ten or twelve vertebre. Its exact position
might be difficult to determine; but a comparison with the re-
cent dog-fish (Acanthias vulgaris) renders its place tolerably
certain. In the dog-fish, as pointed out by Sir P. Egerton,
there are one hundred and eight vertebre. Between the head
and the first dorsal spine there are twenty-five vertebre ; from
the first to the second are included thirty-four ; and beyond the
posterior dorsal spine there are forty-nine vertebre to the ex-
tremity of the tail. The Paleospinaz from the Lias exhibits
a remarkable similarity to the recent fish. In the latter there
are fifty-nine vertebre between the head and the posterior
dorsal spine, whilst in Paleospinax there are fifty-six ; and
from this close relationship it may be inferred with safety that
the anterior dorsal spine was situated above the twenty-third
or twenty-fourth vertebra. It may be further urged that as
there are behind the posterior dorsal spine, in the recent fish,
forty-nine vertebra, there were about the same number in the
fossilone: twenty-two are preserved; and a further complement
of about six or eight and twenty would complete the caudal
portion of the fish. Relative appearances warrant this sup-
position. The total length of the fish, including the portion
of the snout not preserved, would be 13 inches—a consider-
ably smaller example than those described by Sir P. Egerton.

The head is represented by the impression of some bones or
cartilages not sufficiently well preserved’ for identification.
There are two or three teeth similar in form to the figure no. 5,
plate vii. of the decade referred to previously, which indicate
the proximity of the jaws.

The spines were deeply implanted in the flesh of the fish,
and appear to have had a groove along the back for the re-
ception of the fin, though this is only partially evident in my
specimen. The anterior spine was smooth, its upper part
thickly coated with enamel; the middle portion of the spine,
not actually imbedded in the flesh, was enveloped by the
dermal covering of the fish, which was thickly coated with
shagreen. The posterior spine exhibits the same characters,
except that it was finely, but distinctly, covered with longitu-

Mr. J. W. Davis on Paleospinax priscus, Egerton. 431

dinal striations. The small tubercles mentioned by Sir P.
Egerton as besetting the lower portion of the posterior spine
do not appear to be present on my specimen; but the covering
of shagreen presents a similar appearance to the one described
in the decades. The spine attached to the anterior dorsal is
1:1 inch in length and -2 inch wide at the base; it is
slightly curved backwards, gradually contracts in size, and
ends in a fine point. The second spine is similar in form but
larger; it is 1°3 inch in length.

The pectoral fins are very Jarge in proportion to the other
parts of the fish; the anterior margin is at least 2°5 inches in
length. They are thickly covered with shagreen, the tubercles
clustering thickly and of large size along the anterior margin,
and becoming more thinly distributed and of gradually de-
creasing size towards the posterior portion of the fin.

The ventral fins are also covered with tubercles in the same
manner; they are 1-1 inch in length.

The dermal tubercles forming the shagreen are composed of
little plates, highly enamelled, for the most part rhomboidal in
form, in rare instances arranged like flat cubes in a tessellated
pavement, but more generally with the corner towards the tail
raised, as though the little cube were suspended diagonally at
two of the corners transversely to the longitudinal axis of the
body, and the anterior corner depressed, causing the one
towards the caudal portion of the fish to be raised. The raised
portion appears to be somewhat produced in some of the
tubercles ; but in no instance can I find evidence that any
thing approaching a sharp tooth-like structure occurred in any
of the tubercles, such as may be seen in many of the recent
Placoids.

The figures (Pl. XX. figs. 2, 3, 4) show the relative size of
the tubercles in different parts of the fish and also indicate a
slightly different form. The minuteness of these objects may
be inferred from the fact that there are between 30,000 and
40,000 to cover one square inch of the body of the fish.

The fossil Paleospinax presents an instance of a Lias fish
which bears so close a resemblance in general character, and
even toa large extent in minute detail, to the living Acanthias,
that we are almost justified in considering the latter as a de-
scendant of the former. The fossil form was a shorter and
proportionally a thicker fish than the living one. Its
pectoral fins were much larger and better developed. The
vertebral column in the two fishes offers a very close parallel.
In my specimen there are only twenty-two vertebre preserved
behind the posterior dorsal spine; but Sir P. Egerton
mentions a specimen, in the collection of the Earl of Knnis-

32*

432 Prof. E. Ray Lankester on the

killen, consisting of eighty-five vertebra, with a spine situated
above the fortieth from the anterior end, and with conse-
quently forty-five vertebree beyond it; this number would
probably constitute nearly the whole of the caudal extremity,
and is fewer by four only than in its living representative. In
the specimen figured on plate vii. of the decade mentioned
the spine extends above the fifteenth vertebra. In the one
now being described the anterior dorsal spine is over the
eighteenth or nineteenth vertebra; there can be no doubt,
however, that its proper position must have been further back,
because the fin to which it was attached is far behind the
spine. From analogy it would be supposed that the spine
occupied a position halfway between its present situation and
that of the fin; and as this would place the spine above the
twenty-second or twenty-third vertebra from the head, which
is, as already indicated, the point inferred from the comparison
with the recent fish, there remains little doubt that such was
its actual position.

Locality. All the specimens hitherto described, including
the one which is the subject of this paper, are from the Lias
at Lyme Regis.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XX.

Fig.1. Paleospinax priscus, Egerton (nat. size).

Fig. 2. Dermal tubercles or shagreen on ventral fin (x 25).

Fig. 3. Ditto on ventral portion of body behind the ventral fin (x 25).
Fig. 4. Ditto on pectoral fin near the base of the anterior margin ( x 26).

XLIV.—On the originally Bilateral Character of the Renal
Organ of Prosobranchia, and on the Homologies of the Yelk-
sac of Cephalopoda. By K. Ray Lanxesrer, M.A., F.R.S.,
y nope Professor of Zoology in University College,

ondon.

Two recent memoirs on molluscan morphology touch upon
matters which have formed the subject of investigations by
me, and which I have fotmerly discussed in the pages of this
journal. I am therefore anxious to make a few remarks
on the matters in question in the same place as that in which
I first wrote of them.

I. Dr. J. W. Spengel, in a very interesting essay (Zeitschr.
wiss. Zool. vol. xxxy.) entitled ‘‘ Die Geruchsorgane und das
Nervensystem der Mollusken,” refers to a note by me “On
some undescribed Points in the Anatomy of the Limpet (Pa-

Renal Organ of Prosobranchia. 433

tella vulgata) ,” published in the ‘Annals’ nearly fourteen years
ago (vol. xx. 1867, p. 334). The organs which I there re-
cognized as the “ capito-pedal”’ orifices he now proposes to
identify with olfactory organs. With regard to this, I have to
say that I have long been aware that the “ capito-pedal ”
pigmented bodies are not orifices blocked by pigmented excre-
tion, as I at one time supposed; and I have no doubt, from
the nerve-supply to this region, which was clearly figured by
Prof. de Lacaze-Duthiers in vol. i. pl. iv. of his ‘ Archives
de Zoologie expérimentale’ (1872), and is now again figured
by Dr. Spengel, that we have in the capito-pedal pigment-
body a sense-organ, similar in character to the sense-organ
described by Lacaze-Duthiers as existing in aquatic Pulmo-
nate Gasteropoda (also in vol. i. of his Archives, “ Du sys-
teme nerveux des Mollusques Gastéropodes pulmonés aqua-
tiques et d’un nouvel organe d’innervation”’). This last
memoir most unfortunately appears to have escaped Dr.
Spengel’s attention, who endeavours to identify the capito-
pedal sense-organs of Patella with a rudimentary gill, and to
bring under the same denomination the often plicated proble-
matic sense-organs of a number of other Gasteropods.

In discussing these homologies Dr. Spengel is led to ex-
pound his views on the torsion of the visceral mass of the
Prosobranch Gasteropods. His views are chiefly based upon
the fact, first made known by me, of the existence of two
renal organs in Patella. Dr. Jhering, in a memoir on the
morphology of the renal organ of Mollusca (Zeitschr. fiir wiss.
Zoologie, vol. xxix. 1877, p. 605), is the only observer who
has confirmed my description of the existence of two renal
organs in Patella; and he has added similar observations on
Fissurella and Haliotis. Dr. Spengel, in reference to this
matter, cites only the observations of Dr. Jhering, and omits
all reference to the fact that I had discovered the condition of
the renal organs of Patella ten years before that writer,
although Dr. Jhering quotes my observations at full length.
The fact has some importance ; for, as a natural consequence
of my observations, I have, during the period which has elapsed
since they were made, been in the habit of teaching the.
same general views as to the torsion of the visceral mass of
Gasteropoda and its effect upon the symmetry of the organs
as are now advanced by Dr. Spengel (explained by a woodcut
on p. 351 of his paper). This writer, to establish his views,
makes use of the fact first observed by me, but erroneously (and,
I do not doubt, unintentionally) attributes the observation
to Dr. Jhering. Speaking of organs which are paired though
not fully symmetrical in certain of the Prosobranchia, he says

434 Prof. E. Ray Lankester on the

“‘ Dahin gehoren in erster Linie die Kiemen und die Geruchs-
organe, das Herz mit seinem zwei Vorhéfen und endlich nach
den Beobachtungen v. Jherings die Nieren.” Further, he dis-
cusses whether one of the “von v. Jhering beschriebenen
Organe’’ may not be identical with the anal gland of Murex.
I am not of the opinion that it is a reasonable thing to allow
one’s priority in such a matter to be handed by one writer to
another without making any protest. Hence these few lines.

I may add that Dr. Jhering, in his memoir published in
1877, states that he was unable to find an opening leading
from the pericardium into the renal organ as described by me.
During April of this year I have, with the cooperation of
my assistant Mr. A. G. Bourne, examined fresh limpets as
to the pericardial orifice. Its presence can be demonstrated
both by injections which pass from the pericardium, some-
times into the right, sometimes into the left renal sac, and by
dissection. The orifice leads directly into a narrow subanal
tract of the further or right renal sac, and not directly into
the left or small renal sac, which, on account of its proximity,
might have been expected to be the sac in communication with
the pericardium. ‘That the pericardial orifice should open
directly into the large, or right, or infraanal renal organ of
Patella, and not into the small one, is especially remarkable
when we remember that it is the small renal sac which, lying
dorsal and to the left of the rectum (in the primitive uncoiled
condition of the visceral mass the small sac would obviously
enough be to the right, and not to the left, of the rectum),
would seem to correspond with the single renal sac of other
Gasteropods.

Il. Mr. W. K. Brooks has recently given an account, with
figures, of the development of the Squid (‘ Anniversary
Memoirs of the Boston Society of Natural History’), which,
besides quotations from the writings of Kolliker, myself,
and Bobretzky, contains sketches of the well-known surface-
appearances exhibited by living specimens of Loligo at a few
stages of its development. Mr. Brooks, however, is led to
offer some reflections on the homologies of the arms, funnel,
and yelk-sac of the embryo Cephalopod with parts of the adult
Gasteropod. I cannot agree him when he says that he
has “been so fortunate as to fill a gap by finding embryos
which exhibit general molluscan characteristics ;”’ and I can
tind nothing new in his comparison of the embryo Cephalopod
with an embryo Pulmonate, excepting what I regard as erro-
neous. He is mistaken in quoting me as favouring a close
comparison of the shell-gland discovered by me in Gastero-

Yelk-sac of Cephalopoda. 435

pods and Lamellibranchs with the pen-sac of Cephalopoda,
which I showed to originate, like the shell-gland, as an open
invagination. I have been careful to point out reasons for doubt-
ing the exact equivalence of the two structures (“ On the
Development of the Pond-Snail, and on the early Stages of other
Mollusca,” Quart. Journ. Microsc. Sci. vol. xiv. 1874, p. 371).

Further, I cannot agree with Mr. Brooks in the view that
the molluscan foot is necessarily an “ unpaired” organ. It
is truly enough a median organ ; but it has necessarily a right
and a left side, which in many cases tend to develop as two
divergent lobes; and such growths as “ epipodia”’ are only
an expression of this tendency to bilateral development.

Mr. Brooks regards the arms of the Cephalopod and the
funnel as either epipodial or as new and special organs of
Cephalopods, whilst he advocates the view that the yelk-sac
of Cephalopods represents the ‘median unpaired” foot of
Mollusca, which has accordingly no representative in the adult
Cephalopod.

Mr. Balfour, in his ‘Comparative Embryology,’ vol. i.
p- 225, had anticipated Mr. Brooks’s speculation as to the
identity of the Cephalopod’s yelk-sac with the Gasteropod’s
foot. He says:—‘ In Cephalopods the position of the Gas-
teropod foot is occupied by the external yolk-sack. In normal
forms the blastopore closes at the apex of the yolk-sack, and
at the two sides of the yolk-sack the arms grow out. These
considerations seem to point to the conclusion that the normal
Gasteropod foot is represented in the Cephalopod embryo by
the yolk-sack, which has, owing to the immense bulk of food-
yolk present in the ovum, become filled with food-yolk and
enormously dilated.”

I am unable to agree with the interpretation put upon the
facts by Mr. Balfour and Mr. Brooks. I quite admit that
the region in the Cephalopod distended by food-yelk is the
axial region of the foot; that is obvious upon the first obser-
vation of the facts. But it is another thing to maintain that
the projection or outgrowth as such represents the projection
or outgrowth in its entirety known as the foot in Gasteropods.
In my opinion it does not do so, but is a special embryonic
dilatation of the axial region of the foot, and is no more
representative of such an outgrowth as the adult muscular
foot than is the very remarkable contractile sac on the foot of
Limax.

Had Mr. Brooks compared his embryo squid with an
embryo slug, he would, I think, have come nearer to making
out the significance of the latter’s yelk-sac than he has when
comparing it to an embryo of an aquatic Pulmonate.

436 On the Yelk-sac of Cephalopoda.

I was much struck by the remarkable structure and rhyth-
mic pulsation of the sac on the foot of the embryo slug when
I first studied it at Jena in 1871; and in the winter of the same
year, when carrying on researches on the development of the
Cephalopoda at Naples, I made the observation, first of all,
that the wall of the yelk-sac of the embryo squid is rhyth-
mically contractile, and, secondly, that the structure of that
wall and its contractile elements is very closely similar to that
of the contractile sac on the foot of the embryo Limax. I
subjoin outline drawings of an embryo slug and an embryo
squid, to render clear to those not familiar with these objects
the position of the parts under discussion.

Fig. 1. Fig. 2.

Fig. 1. Diagram of an embryo Slug.

Fig. 2. Diagram of anembryo Cephalopod. m, position of mouth; Ft,
foot ; sh, shell ; con, contractile embryonic outgrowth of the pedal region
(yelk-sac in Cephalopod); op, eye; pk, primitive kidney of slug; t,
smaller head-tentacle of slug; Fu, funnel of Cephalopod ; mt, mantle-
flap of Cephalopod.

Tn a paper published in this magazine in February 1873
(“‘ Zoological Observations made at Naples in the winter of
1871-72”) I gave a brief outline of my results as to Cepha-
lopod development, and I there said (p. 84) :—“ An interest-
ing phenomenon is the contractility of the walls of the yelk-sac,
which is observed at a very early period, as soon as the first
rudiments of eyes, ears, and mouth have appeared. A rhythmic
wave of contraction passes continually along the wall of the sac,
at that part immediately in front of the alimentary tube, and
doubtless acts so as to cause a circulation of nutrient material
in the direction of the young embryo. The tissue which
exhibits this contractility is of the same structure (stellate

On the Structure and Affinities of Kuphoberia. 437

cells) as that of the remarkable contractile vesicle observed in
the pulmonate Gasteropoda, and which I have studied in
Limax. It is probable that the two parts are homogenous.”

So far as any comparison between the Cephalopod yelk-sac
and the Gasteropod foot is legitimate, it appears to me that I
had made it in the above passage some years since.

As to the homologies generally of Gasteropod and Cepha-
lopod, I am inclined to agree with Mr. Brooks when he says
“‘we cannot expect any valuable results to follow from the
attempt to compare any part of the body of a Cephalopod
with structures which, like the epipodial folds, are not common
to the Gasteropoda, but somewhat exceptional.” I consider
that a close relationship exists between the siphonal folds of
the Cephalopod and the “ pteropods ” of Pteropoda, and, again,
between the arms of the former and the arms (bearing suckers
in Pneumodermon) of the latter; but there appears to be no
ground for going further when we compare these parts with
those of a Gasteropod than is involved in assigning them all
to “ the foot,” which certainly cannot be given up to the sole
equivalence of the yelk-sac, and is not to be limited, as Mr.
Brooks would have it, to an unpaired median growth. I do
not see the cogency of the arguments put forward by Jhering
for regarding the arms of Pteropods and Cephalopods as
distinct from foot; and assuredly it is necessary absolutely to
reject Grenacher’s notion of their identity with the velum, a
notion with which every morphologist has at one time or other
amused himself; and, lastly, there appears to be no ground
capable of statement for regarding, as Brooks would do, the
siphon (funnel) as a growth peculiar to the Cephalopod. Its
condition in Nautilus alone is sufficient to show that it is a
part of the molluscan foot.

XLV.—The Structure and Affinities of Euphoberia, Meek
and Worthen, a Genus of Carboniferous Myriopoda. By
SAMUEL H. ScuppEr*.

THE genus Huphoberia was established in 1868, for some
remarkable spiny Myviopoda found in the ironstone nodules
of Mazon Creek, in Illinois, and which were first fully de-
seribed and figured in the third volume of the Geological
Report of the Illinois Survey. The only characteristics then
noted, in which they differ from modern types, were the
tapering form of the body and the presence of branching

* From the ‘ American Journal of Science,’ March 1881, pp. 182-186.

438 Mr. S. H. Scudder on the

spines on all the segments in longitudinal rows. An oppor-
tunity of examining a series of these animals from the same
locality, due to the kindness of Messrs. Carr and Worthen,
and especially of studying a fine fragment of Huphoberia
major, M. & W., giving an admirable view of the ventral
plates, proves that the differences between these ancient types
and modern forms are so numerous and important as to
compel us to refer them to a distinct suborder, for which the
name of Archipolypoda is proposed.

One main distinction between the two groups, Diplopoda
(or Chilognatha) and Chilopoda, into which existing Myri-
opoda are generally divided, consists in the relation of the
ventral to the dorsal plates of the various segments of which
the body is composed. In the Chilopoda there is a single
ventral plate, bearing one pair of legs, for every dorsal plate ;
in the Diplopoda, on the contrary, there are two such ventral
plates, each bearing a pair of legs, for every dorsal plate
(with the exception of a few segments at the extremities of
the body). The Diplopoda are universally considered the
lower of the two in their organization ; and it is therefore not
surprising to find that no Chilopoda have been found in rocks
older than the Tertiary series* ; while Myriopods with two
pairs of legs corresponding to each dorsal plate may be found
as far back as the Coal-measures. In such comparisons as
are here instituted, the Chilopoda may therefore be left out
of account.

In modern Diplopoda each segment of the body is almost
entirely composed of the dorsal plate, forming a nearly com-
plete ring ; for it encircles, as a general rule, nine tenths of the
body, leaving small room for the pair of ventral plates. On
the side of the body it is perforated by a minute foramen, the
opening of an odoriferous gland. Usually the ring is nearly
circular ; but occasionally the body is considerably flattened,
and the sides are somewhat expanded into flattened lamine
with a smooth or serrate margin; a few species are provided
with minute hairs, sometimes perched on little papille ; and
the surface of the body, ordinarily smooth or at best wrinkled,
is occasionally beset with roughened tubercles, which may
even form jagged projections. So far as I am aware, no
nearer approach to spines occurs on the dorsal plate than the
serrate edges of the lateral lamin, the roughened tubercles, or
the papilla-mounted hairs.

In the Euphoberie from the Coal-measures a very different
condition of things obtains. The segments of the body

* Geophilus proavus, Germ., from the Jura, is certainly anereid worm, as
stated by Hagen.

Structure and Affinities of Kuphoberia. 439

may be circular, or laterally compressed, or, as in many modern
types, depressed ; but in all the dorsal plate occupies scarcely
more than two thirds of the circuit of the body, or even less,
being opposed by broad ventral plates. This dorsal plate is
not perforated for foramina repugnatoria*, but, as means of
defence, it is armed with two or three huge spines upon either
side: one row (for they occur on all the segments alike) lies
above, near the middle line of the body; another is placed
low down upon the sides, near the lower margin of the dorsal
plate ; and a third row is sometimes found between them.
These spines are sometimes forked at the tip; and they are
(probably) always provided to a greater or less extent with
spinules springing from the base or the stem; sometimes
these are so numerous as to form a whorl of little spines
around the main stem. Usually the main spines are at least
half as long as the diameter of the body ; often they are as
long as the diameter ; and one may readily picture the different
appearance between one of these creatures, perhaps a foot or
more in length, bristling all over with a coarse tangle of
thorny spines, and the smooth galley-worm of the present
day.
tf we pass to the ventral plates we shall find differences of
even greater significance. In modern Diplopoda these plates
are minute; the anterior forms the anterior edge of the seg-
ment, continuous with that of the dorsal plate ; together, how-
ever, they are not so long as the dorsal plate at their side; and
the latter appears partly to encircle the posterior of the ventral
plates by extending inward towards the coxal cavities. The
legs are attached to the posterior edge of each ventral plate ;
and those of opposite sides are so closely crowded together
that they absolutely touch. ‘The stigmata, of which there is
a pair to each ventral plate, are placed at the outer edge,
rather towards the front margin ; and their openings are longi-
tudinal (7. e. they he athwart the segment) ; the coxe of the
legs of the anterior plate are therefore opposite the stigmata
ot the posterior plate. No other organs are found upon the
ventral plates; one might indeed say there was not room for
them. The legs themselves are composed of six simple
cylindrical joints subequal in length, the apical armed with a
single terminal claw; the whole “leg is short, generally not
more than half as long as the diameter of the body.

In the ancient Euphoberice all is very different. The ventral

* This is what would be expected from the presence of spines ; for two
such means of defence should not be looked for in the same animal ; offen-
sive glands are present only in slow-moving or otherwise defenceless
creatures, as in Phasmidz among Orthoptera for example.

440 Mr. 8S. H. Scudder on the

plates occupy the entire ventral surface, perhaps may be said
to extend partly up the sides of the rounded body ; and no part
of the dorsal plate passes behind the posterior ventral plate.
They are together equal in length to any part of the dorsal
plate, the segments of the body being equal in length through-
out; while in modern Diplopoda the upper portion of the
dorsal plate is always considerably longer than the ventral
portion, allowing the creature to coil ventrally without expo-
sing any intersegmental portion of the back devoid of hard
armature: in these ancient forms the animal appears to coil
dorsally as readily as ventrally; at least, when not ex-
tended straight upon the stones in which they are preserved,
they are as frequently found bent upward as downward; and
there is certainly nothing in their structure to prevent such
mobility.

Then the legs, instead of being inserted at the extreme
posterior edge of the plate, are planted almost in its very
centre, and are indeed so large that they occupy nearly its
entire width ; neither are those of opposite sides inserted close
together, but are removed from one another by a space equal
to their own width, giving them ample play. The legs them-
selves differ from those of modern types in having the second
joint as long as the others combined, and the whole leg at
least as long as the diameter of the body, and sometimes nearly
twice as long; moreover they are not cylindrical but com-
pressed and slightly expanded, strengthened also on the flat-
tened surface by longitudinal carine, and in every respect, in
those specimens in which the legs are best preserved, have
the aspect of swimming-organs. No aquatic forms are known
among recent myriopods.

The stigmata, instead of having the position they hold in
modern Diplopoda, where they are necessarily minute, are
very large, situated in the middle of each ventral plate, each
spiracle opposite to and indeed touching the outside of the
coxal cavity of the plate to which it belongs, and running
therefore with and not athwart the plate, ¢. e. across the body.
But in addition to these structures, which make up the sum
of the furniture of the ventral plate in modern Diplopoda, we
find in these ancient myriopods some further interesting
organs, which are so perfectly preserved that no doubt can be
entertained concerning their presence and their adherence to
the ventral plate. ‘The coxal cavities are not circular but oval,
and are situated with the major axis in an oblique line, run-
ning from near the middle line of the body forward and out-
ward: this and the slight posterior insertion of the legs leave
even a wider space between them at the anterior border of the

Structure and Affinities of Euphoberia. 441

plate than at the posterior ; and this place is occupied by a pair
of peculiar organs, situated one on either side of the median line
at the very front edge of every ventral plate. These, I think,
may be supports for branchiz ; they consist of little triangular
cups or craters, projecting outward from the under surface,
through which the branchial appendages protruded. Until
recently no other organs than branchie had been found in
any arthropod, situated within the legs, and repeated on seg-
ment after segment. The only exceptions known are Peri-
patus, a strange creature, allied certainly to the myriopods,
but of lower organization, in which Balfour has found seg-
mental organs (heretofore known only in worms) having their
external openings somewhat similarly situated, and Scolopen-
drella, a minute chilopodous myriopod, in which Ryder has
just described organs which he calls trachez, opening exter-
nally between the legs. But as branchize also occur together
with spiracles in some low-organized insects, and then in
essentially similar relative positions to that in which they are
here found, and as the possession of legs adapted to swim-
ming leads us to presume in these creatures an aquatic or
amphibious life, it would seem as if we might fairly conceive
these crateriform appendages to be branchial supports*, and
conclude that we are dealing with a type of myriopods very
different from any existing forms—suited to an amphibious
life, capable of moving and breathing both on land and in
water. Moreover the assemblage of forms discovered in the
Mazon-Creek beds lends force to this proposition; for the
prevalence of aquatic Crustacea, of fishes, and ferns indi-
cates that the fauna and flora were those of a region abounding
in low and boggy land and pools; and the presence of marsh-
frequenting flying insects does not contradict such a belief.
These, however, are not the only points in which the
ancient forms differed from the recent. We have so far ex-
amined only a typical segment; let us now look at the body
as a whole and at special segments. The modern Diplopoda
are of uniform size throughout, tapering only at the extreme
tips ; while these ancient forms, at least when seen from above,
diminish noticeably in size towards either end, and especially
towards the tail, giving the body a fusiform appearance, its
largest part being in the neighbourhood of the seventh to the
tenth body-segments, which were often two, or even three,
times broader than the hinder extremity, and considerably
broader than the head or the first segment behind it. A single
segment seems to have carried all the appendages related to

* Even if they were segmental organs, they may still have been con-
nected with respiration.

442 Mr. S. O. Ridley on Franz-Joseph-Land

the mouth-parts, while in modern Diplopoda two segments are
required for this purpose: this peculiarity of the fossil is in-
ferred solely but sufficiently from the fact, perhaps even more
remarkable, that every segment of the body (as represented by
the dorsal plates), even those immediately following the single
head segment, is furnished with two ventral plates and bears
two pairs of legs. As is well known, each of the segments im-
mediately following the head-segments in existing Diplopoda
bears only one ventral plate and only a single pair of legs—a
fact correlated with the embryonic growth of these creatures,
since these legs and these only are first developed in the young
diplopod. The mature forms of recent Diplopoda therefore
resemble their own young more than do these Carboniferous
myriopods—a fact which is certainly at variance with the
general accord between ancient types and the embryonic con-
dition of their modern representatives, and one for which we
can offer no explanatory suggestion worth consideration.

Unfortunately the preservation of the appendages of the
head in these Carboniferous forms is not sufficiently good in
any that have yet been found to allow any comparison with
modern types. This is the more to be regretted since these
parts are those on which we depend largely for our judgment
of the relationship of the Myriopoda to other Insecta and to
Crustacea. If they were present and sufficiently well defined,
we may well suppose that they would afford some clue to the
genetic connexion of these great groups.

The structure of the Carboniferous Euphoberie has thus
been shown to differ so much from that of modern Diplopoda
that, as stated at the outset, we seem warranted in placing
them in a group apart from either of the suborders of modern
Myriopoda and of an equivalent taxonomic value.

Cambridge, U.8., January 7, 1881.

XLVI.—Polyzoa, Coelenterata, and Sponges of Franz-Joseph
Land. By Stuart O. Rivtey, B.A., F.L.S., Assistant
in the Zoological Department, British Museum.

[Plate XXI. ]

THE specimens hereto be described were collected by Mr. Grant,
the naturalist accompanying Mr. Leigh Smith in his cruise last
autumn to Franz-Joseph Land and Spitzbergen. They were
presented by the latter gentleman to the British Museum, and
form the first collection from the former locality which has yet

Polyzoa, Coelenterata, and Sponges. 443

been worked out. They were all obtained at one locality, viz.
lat. 79° 55’ N., long. 51° 0’ E., or at about the same latitude as
the extreme south of Wilczek Island, and the same longitude
as Hira harbour, on the south-west coast of Franz-Joseph
Land; the station appears thus to have been at some distance
from land. The depth is not known. Mr. Miers* has
already described the Crustacea and Pycnogonida obtained at
the same time.

I had hoped that a study of the above groups of the fauna of
this newly-discovered coast might lead to some indication of:
the connexions which the land bears to the neighbouring arctic
lands, Greenland, Spitzbergen, or the land west of Smith’s
Sound, or to a possible polar sea.

It is known that a rapid current sets down the straits which
divide the tract known as Franz-Joseph Land from that called
Wilczek Land, and that, probably in consequence of this,
the water here is free from ice at an earlier and a later
time in the year than is usual in such latitudes. This current
may either be due to the remains of that branch of the Gulf-
stream which sweeps up the western shore of Spitzbergen,
and which, if this hypothesis is correct, would pass on north-
wards past a north-western angle of Franz-Joseph Land to
enter the northern end of its great straits; or it may be due to
some polar current derived from an open polar sea. The fact
that the current is coexistent with an unusually open condi-
tion of water speaks for the theory that it is a warm, not a
cold one, such as a polar current would be, while the relations
of the fauna of the coasts which are bathed by this current
appear also to point to the conclusion that its communications
are with the eastern (7. e. the Spitzbergen and Novaia Zemlia),
not the western (7. e. Greenland and Smith’s Sound) divisions
of the polar area, and in consequence do not support the theory
of an open polar sea. To arrive at some idea of the faunistic
relations of this coast, a Table has been added below to show
the relations of its species to those of the other polar tracts.
It is seen at once, even with the small number of species
(twenty-two) here cited, how nearly most of the arctic seas are
related to each other in regard to these branches of the fauna ;
but Smith’s Sound, the main western approach to the Pole,
appears to diverge from Franz-Joseph Land more widely than
any of the other districts (with the exception of Iceland and
East Greenland, from which very few species in all are known),
only four species being at present known common to both—a
conclusion supporting that which was above favoured, in re-

* Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 5, vol. vii. p. 45.

444 Mr. S. O. Ridley on Franz-Joseph-Land

gard to the non-existence of an open polar sea connecting it
with Franz-Joseph Land.

With respect to the zoological aspects of the fauna, we
miss the familiar Spitzbergen Hornera, Membranipora line-
ata, Menipea ternata, &c.; and none of the new forms de-
scribed by Mr. Hincks from the Barents Sea have reappeared
here. The only possibly new species is that described pro-
visionally as a variety of the well-known British and arctic
Mucronella ventricosa. Ccelenterata and Sponges are not
more than represented. However, considering that but one
station was worked, the results may be said to be interesting
as pointing to the existence of a great eastern boreal as dis-
tinguished from a small western polar Polyzoan subdistrict.

POLYZOA.
CHILOSTOMATA.

Menipea arctica, Busk.
Menipea arctica, Busk, Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci. iii. p. 254, pl. i. figs. 4-6,

In great abundance ; no trace of an operculum observed in
any specimen ; so Smitt must, as Busk (Journ. Linn. Soe. xv.
p. 232) implies, have united two species under his Cellu-
laria ternata, forma gracilis. Number of cells in an internode
4or5. <A distinct variety occurs with fwo spines on upper
margin of cell, The cell in which the root-fibre originates is
oval, and from its position, which is usually immediately
above the orifice of a cell, is liable to be taken for an ovicell.
No ovicells observed. Lateral avicularia not uncommon.

On Alcyonidium gelatinosum &c.

Scrupocellaria scabra, Van Beneden.

Cellarina seabra, Van Beneden, Bull. Acad. Roy. Belg. xv. p. 73, pl. i.
igs. 3-6.
erased scabra, Hincks, Hist. Brit. Mar. Pol. p. 48, ph vi
figs. 7-11. 4
Differs in some important points from the form of this
species figured by Hincks, agrees better with Van Beneden’s
North-Sea specimens ; thus the operculum generally covers
the entire aperture of the cell, and, with the exception of a
tilting-up of the upper edge, the surface is flat, not concave.
Two spines are commonly found on the outer edge of the
aperture. Internodes short, consisting of either 2, 3, or 4
cells, exclusive of the median cell of the fureation. The
anterior avicularia occur, as a rule, only below the lowest cell
but one of the internode and the median cell of the furcation.

Polyzoa, Owlenteraia, and Sponges. 445

Vibracular cells and rooting-fibres absent from terminal inter-
nodes.
. Asmall colony, 6 millim. high, on Escharoides Sarsi.

Gemellaria loriculata, Linné.

(Pl. XXI. fig. 1.)

Cellularia loriculata, Pallas, Elench. Zooph. p. 64.
Gemmellaria loriculata, Van Beneden, Recherches Bryoz. p. 33, pl. v.
figs. 1-6.

Has the form depicted in Van Beneden’s figures (/. c.) : the
slight lamina extending across the lower end of the opening, as
there given, but omitted in all other representations which I
have seen, is present here and adds to the beauty of the
species. he cells are long, as in the same figures.

Bugula Murrayana, vax. fruticosa, Packard.

Menipea fruticosa, Packard, Canad. Nat. viii. p. 409, pl. 1. fig. 5.
Bugula Murrayana, vax. fruticosa, Hincks, Hist. Brit. Mar. Pol. p. 93,
pl. xiv. figs. 3, 5.

Some fragments agreeing generally with the best-known
form of this variety, viz. that with 2 to 4 series of cells in its
dichotomously dividing branches. The outer upper angle of
the cells is sharply angular rather than spined; generally a
spine on each side a little below the top, never more than one.
Avicularia of the smaller size only. The cell-characters
pe well with those of Busk’s fig. 1, pl. xii, Journ. Linn.

Oc, XV.

Flustra carbasea, Ellis & Solander.

Flustra carbasea, Ellis & Solander, Hist. Zooph. p. 14, pl. iii. figs. 6, 7.

Eschara papyrea, Pallas?, Elench. Zooph. p. 56.

A few of the cells are decidedly subrhomboidal as seen
from the back of the frond; hence, perhaps, Pallas’s descrip-
tion of the cells in his specimen as being rhombic; for the
description agrees well in its other points, except that of
“ apice superiori truncato,”’ with this species.

fine colony attached to a valve of a bivalve shell.

Flustra securifrons, Pallas.
Eschara securifrons, Pallas, Elench. Zooph. p. 56.
Flustra securifrons, Smitt, Cifv. Akad. Forh. 1867, p. 378, pl. xx.
figs. 6-8.

A fine colony. The branches are decidedly dilated at their
tips. But one ovicell was observed in the whole colony ; SO,
though probably others were present, they are scarce.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. vii. 33

446 Mr. §. O. Ridley on Franz-Joseph-Land

Membrampora Sophie, Busk.
(Pl. XXI. fig. 2.)

ee ers Sophie, Busk ?, Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci. iii. p. 255, pl. i.

ole

I have little doubt that two colonies in this collection, the
one growing inside the lip of a univalve shell, the other on
the base of a specimen of Alcyonidium gelatinosum, belong to
this species; if so, however, Mr. Busk’s figure and those
given by Smitt (Gifv. Akad. Forh. 1867, pl. xx. figs. 24, 25,
27) need supplementing by a more detailed one.

In these specimens the zocecia are large, distinct, with
raised edge, oval, or very commonly smaller at the distal than
at the proximal end; the area has a very slightly projecting
calcareous rim, which is minutely fimbriated. On the edge,
at each side of the mouth, are two pointed avicularia on
short peduncles, the apices projecting upwards and back-
wards. One, two, or three pairs of spines occur below these
avicularia on the edge. The ocecia are remarkable for singu-
lar modifications of form. In the simplest form they are
oval, of medium size, smooth, with the exception of some
strie radiating up and backwards from the mouth; the mouth
is provided with a very slightly upwardly-projecting lip. In
the next stage a longitudinal ridge runs down the surface of
the ocecitum. In the next the rims of the neighbouring cells,
of which the lateral ones touch the ocecium, while the posterior
one is some distance off, surround it like a frame, and become

rominent, and at the same time a horizontal ridge runs across
its surface and joins the two prominent lateral walls; the
upper lip of the mouth at the same time becomes much deve-
loped. Finally the anterior portion of the ocecium, viz. that
enclosed between the lateral rims, the horizontal ridge, and
the lip of the mouth, becomes depressed, so that the whole
space above the cell appears to be occupied by two rectangular
aree, and the ocecium itself has become much less convex
than at first, and is almost entirely disguised by the structures
added to it. The cells radiate regularly from the centre.

Homologies of Parts of the Oecium.—This ocecium is one of
the most complicated in external characters which occur in
the Chilostomata ; and it would be interesting if the morpho-
logical significance of its different parts could be determined.
The occurrence of several of what appear to be stages of its
progressive development in one specimen seems to afford some
opportunity for making deductions on the subject. Probably
the large front depression of the last stage, with its surrounding
raised margin, represents a rudimentary avicularium, as such is

Polyzoa, Coelenterata, and Sponges. 447

the condition by which both zocecia and sessile avicularia first
originate. A similar depression, though without the distinct
raised margins, occurs in a similar position in JZ. Hlemingi,
Busk ; and the avicularium itself of course appears in J/. Dume-
rili and M. unicornis, Fleming. Unfortunately Mr. Hincks,
when describing (Hist. Brit. Mar. Pol. p. civ) the develop-
ment of the ocecial ectocyst, does not give that of the ocecium,
and I know of no other account; hence the homologies of
the different parts of the ocecium can be hardly more than
guessed at. ‘The radiating furrows or ridges which are seen
in some ocecia, and are indicated in one stage of this one, may
perhaps indicate that it is primitively constructed by the
growing together of paired trabecule similar to those which
probably unite to make up the zocecial cell-front in the Chilo-
stomatous forms (see Hincks, /. c. p. 184, on the genus Cribril-
lina, and his description of transverse strie in the primitive
covering of the cell of Mucronella coccinea at the second
developmental stage, p. civ). The ocecium of adult Reteporw
has a median cleft ; and in one species this is represented by
an invagination from the lower edge: this is probably the
remains of an embryonic median cleft, common to all typical
Chilostomata, and represents the ununited edges of the cell,
this stage corresponding to stage 2 of Hincks’s history of the
zocecium of Mucronella coccinea.

The median ridge or galeate process, seen here in one stage,
and also found in M. aurita, Hincks, Micropora coriacea,
Esper, Chorizopora (Lepralia) Brongniarti, Busk, and Stegano-
porella Smitt’, Hincks, perhaps represents the point of union
of the two edges of the ocecium, strengthened by additional
calcareous matter.

Membranipora craticula, Alder.

Membranipora craticula, Alder, Trans. Tyneside Nat. F. Club, ii. p. 144,
pl. x. fig. 3.

Two colonies with the typical characters. ‘The one has the
surface beautifully hyaline ; the other was apparently taken
dead, and is consequently granular and deficient in some of
its parts. The number of spines is, as a rule, 12 to 14.
The bar crossing the surface of the ocecium is well marked ;
and the lateral or median avicularium is also generally present
here, though not invariably. The avicularium below the
cell is often very prominent, owing to the mound on which it
is placed ; this point serves to bring the species still nearer to
M. lineata, Linn., from which it is now to be distinguished
chiefly by the slender characters of shape and nes of the

448 My. 8. O. Ridley on Franz-Joseph-Land

spines; for the numbers of these are as often as not 12 in this
species, which is the maximum number assigned by Hincks
to M. lineata.

Anarthropora monodon, Smitt.
pores Hehe ys Busk, Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci. viii. p, 213, pl. xxix.
8. .
ae icapohe monodon, forma minuscula, Smitt, Gify. Akad. Forh.
1867, Bihang, pp. 7, 64, pl. xxiv. figs. 20-24.

In one of the four colonies which occur in this collection
the cells are subrhomboidal, and have in some cases a small
pore on the raised area above as well as below the mouth.
The rhomboidal shape is not confined to the cells of this
colony. The connexion between the special pore of the
Porinide and the oral sinus of the Myriozoide is instructively
illustrated by examples of some of the younger cells, which
show the gap connecting the infraoral pore with the mouth
not yet closed, and, in fact, represent a Myriozoid stage of a
Porinid cell.

The pores never become converted into avicularia as in
Smitt’s “forma majuscula.”

Myriozoum subgracile, Smitt.
Myriozoum subgracile, D’Orbigny ?, Paléontologie Frangaise, iii. p. 662 ;
Smitt, GEfy. Vet. Forh. 1867, Bihang, pp. 18, 119.

It appears to me that the species described by Packard
(Canad. Nat. viii. p. 411) is rightly assigned to this species,
but that he does wrong in calling attention to the annulate
character of the branches as showing its identity with JJclle-
pora truncata, Fabricius; for this is too slight, in both the
present and all other specimens which I have examined, to
have been noticed by Fabricius, whose description seems to
me to refer to M. coarctatum of Sars. <A portion of a colony
occurs here, presenting the characters usually found in arctic
specimens; the diameter of the branches is a trifle more
than 1 millim.

Myriozoum crustaceum, Smitt.

Myriozoum crustaceum, Smitt, Gify. Vet. Akad. Forh, 1867, Bihang,
pp. 18, 114, pl. xxv. figs. 88-91.

Leteschara crustacea, id. ibid. 1878, p. 20.

Four colonies, one of which has the central part stained
pink, the marginal parts remaining pale yellowish white.
Cancelli very large and evident in the lateral cells, where
they are much extended longitudinally and are larger than
those of Smitt’s figs. 88, 89 ; scarcely developed in those of the

Polyzoa, Coelenterata, and Sponges. 449

centre. Limits of younger cells undefined, those of the older
cells more evident, owing to their greater convexity. Mouth
of cell well represented by Smitt’s figures; in one case the
form was that of fig. 77a on the same plate (Hschara secun-
daria) ; the hinder part is deeply sunk. Lateral avicularia
may be absent or only one to a cell, generally distinct and
elevated on prominences which are distinctly tubular and
more prominent than those of Smitt (fig. 91), who finds them
only in the more calcified cells. Avicularian opening round
or slightly oval. No ocecia present.

One colony occurred on frond of Flustra carbasea, Ell. &
Sol., the others on a univalve shell, &c.

Mr. Hincks (Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. [5] vi. p. 274) refers
this species to ‘Schizoporella plana, Dawson ;”’ but I am un-
able at present to find the description alluded to.

Schizoporella cruenta, Norman.
(Pl. XXI. fig. 4.)

ead violacea, var. cruenta, Busk, Cat. Mus. Brit. ii. p. 69, pl. ex.
pee eruenta, Norman, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. (3) xiii. p. 88.
peeps eruenta, Hincks, Hist. Brit. Mar. Pol. p. 270, pl. xxx.
g. 5.

Two dead colonies, and one very fine colony taken when
mostly alive; the latter measures 23 millim. by 19 millim.
The differences of colour in the different parts of the latter
specimen are striking. In the centre, which had died before
the specimen was taken, it is dirty white; immediately out-
side 1s a zone of cells of a pink colour (not deep red); the
margin is formed by a broadish band of cells of a bright
brown colour, shading into pink towards the centre. The
different forms of the zocecium correspond well with those
given in Hincks’s figure (/.c.); but the oral sinus is well
marked in most, even old cells. The surface thickenings
represented in Busk’s figure do not occur to any thing like
the extent there given; but in the older cells the margin of
the mouth is thick and prominent, and between some of the
cells occur very prominent boundary-lines. Oacia, early
stages of which resemble those cells in Busk’s figure which
have a semicircular supraoral thickening, occur in abundance,
showing all stages of transition, from the large open hood
with slightly projecting rim to the perfect form, which 1s slightly
elevated, circular, subglobose, minutely punctate, and some-
what uneven; they are inconspicuous and readily overlooked.
Traces of the original wide space in the front of the hood are
frequently left in the form of a pointed slit in its lower edge,

450 Mr. 8. O. Ridley on Franz-Joseph-Land

bearing some resemblance to an avicularian hollow. The
brown colour of the margin of the colony is evidently due
to the important part played by the chitinous part of the ecto-
cyst in the young cells, appearing as it does in the wide
fenestre of the front wall of the cell, the margin of the
mouth, &c.

Porella concinna, Busk.

Lepralia concinna, Busk, Cat. Brit. Mus. ii. p. 67, pl. xcix.
Porella levis, Smitt, (Efy. Vet. Forh. 1867, Bihang, pp. 21, 134, 217,
pl. xxvi. figs. 117, 118.

Porella concinna, Hincks, Hist. Brit. Mar. Pol. p. 328, pl. xlvi.

Several colonies. They agree with Busk’s figs. 1, 3, 4, 5,
and the two cited figures of Smitt better than with any others
designed to represent this species. ‘The marginal punctures
are constant. The cells are generally separated by a promi-
nent and undulating line. The inferiorly enlarged peristome
which encloses the avicularium is sometimes almost as pro-
minent as in P. strwma, Hincks (Norman). In some young
cells a semilunar hollow in front of the mouth marks its future
position, showing that it owes its character to the avicularian
chamber which it contains, and which is afterwards perfected
by the extension over this hollow of the surrounding calca-
reous margin, just as the zocecium itself is formed by calcareous
growths from its margin. ‘The avicularian chamber is lable
to become accidentally detached ; and then’ it leaves a round
space below the mouth of the adult cell: this condition
appears to be represented by two of the upper cells of Busk’s
fig. 5 (/.¢.).

A small circular incrusting colony is also referred, but with
doubt, to this species. It has an umbo immediately below
the lower lip, but apparently no avicularium there. The cells
are convex and distinguished from each other by their con-
vexity ; but there is no bounding line. Nospines. The front
of the cell is covered, excepting the base ot the umbo, with
coarse foramina. Cells slightly rhomboid. The intraoral den-
ticle is rectangular. No ocecia. ee

A large spreading colony 24 millim. in extreme diameter is
apparently also referable to this protean species. On one side
the front of the cell is almost entirely occupied either by an
immense and very salient rostrum, in the oral side of which
lies the avicularium, or by a large depressed space, oblong or
semilunar, beneath which the wall of the cell is thin. The
cells with these spaces evidently constitute an earlier stage than
the rostrated cells ; and the rostrum, when it occurs, together
with its contained avicularium, is evidently developed over

Polyzoa, Coelenterata, and Sponges. 451

such a space. At the opposite side of the colony the cells are
flattish, with a central rather minutely tuberculated area; the
sides of the cells are formed by smooth spaces containing a
few coarse perforations ; there is a slight approach to a rostrum
immediately below the mouth. ‘This form is well represented
by the two left-hand cells of Busk’s pl. xcix. fig. 4. A broad
rounded denticle lies within the mouth in all these forms ; the
ocecium is globose, tuberculate, slightly prominent.

Hab. On large univalve shells.

The numerous variations exhibited by this species are, as
Hincks remarks (doc. cit. p. 324), mainly due to superficial
differences ; the form of the mouth, the denticle (except in the
doubtful specimen, in which it is rectangular), the infraoral
avicularian rostrum (or the depressed space representing it),
the marginal punctures maintain the same general characters
throughout. No spines, or traces of them, however, were ob-
served in any cells; but as Hincks only figures them in one
case and Busk not at all, they must be regarded as very rarely
occurring.

The possibility of the presence or absence of avicularia in
different specimens of the same Polyzoan species would be
a striking fact if it were determined to be a real possibility ; it
would, however, be interesting to determine whether, as in
this case, the absent avicularium is not generally represented
by the rudiments of a chamber in the surface on which it
should normally occur. Occlusion of the avicularium by
thickening of the cell-wall must also be allowed for when
it is stated to be absent in any given species.

Mucronella ventricosa, Hassall, var. connectens, n. var.

(PI. XXL. fig. 6.)

Discopora coccinea, forma ventricosa, Smitt?, pars, Céfy. Akad. Forh.
1867, Bihang, p. 172, pl. xxvii. fig. 167 only.

A small colony without ocecia, unless the remarkable pro-
minence figured in fig. 66 is an abnormal ocecial hood. It
agrees neither with M. Peachii, Johust., nor with M. ventricosa,
but has several points which appear to connect the two species.
The cells are large, glistening, and convex, marked with radi-
ating tuberculated lines and a marginal row of perforations ;
they are arranged in regularly radiating series, separated by
deep furrows. ‘The mouth is constant in the possession of six
spines; the denticle is broad, with more or less prominent lateral
points, and is well represented by those given in Smitt’s
figure cited above. ‘There is a considerable space, contain-
ing variously shaped fenestra, in continuation with the mar-

452 Mr. 8. O. Ridley on Franz-Joseph-Land

ginal row of perforations, above the mouth ; one pair of these
fenestree in particular resembles a pair of avicularian frames ;
and if they are avicularia they would appear to connect the
form with W/. coccinea. It appears to have no connexion with
M. simplex, Hincks, of the Barents Sea.

Obs. The form is certainly nearer to M. ventricosa than to
M. Peachii in both its general and more special characters ;
it is to be hoped that more adult specimens may be obtained
to decide the questions raised by its peculiarities.

Escharoides Sarst, Smitt.

Eschara rosacea, Sars, Forh. Vid.-Selsk. Chr. 1862, p. 141.
Escharoides Sarsti, Smitt, GEfv. Akad. Forh. 1867, Bihang, pp. 24, 158,
pl. xxvi. figs. 147-154.

A fine tip of an Escharoid colony, closely resembling that
depicted in Smitt’s fig. 147 (loc. cit.) ; reddish brown in colour.
The mouth is well represented in Smitt’s fig. 150. The
avicularium within the mouth was the only one observed.

CYCLOSTOMATA.

Crista denticulata, Lamarck.
Cellaria denticalata, Lamarck, Anim. s. Vert. (2) ii. p. 182.
Crisia denticulata, Milne-Edwards, Ann. Sc. Nat. (2) ix. p. 201, pl. vii.
fig. 1.

Several small colonies, not exceeding 8 millim. in height.
Fronds broad, from two to four zocecial tubes in the breadth.
Internodes sometimes short; joints between them inconspicu-
ous, often brown-coloured. Openings of cells almost round.

Ocecia numerous; rings surrounding ocecium seldom per-
ceptible; openings of ocecia rare or absent.

Lichenopora verrucaria, Fabricius.

(Pl XE fies 5.)

Madrepora verrucaria, Fabricius, Fauna Greenlandica, p. 430.
Lichenopora verrucaria, Hincks, Hist. Brit. Mar. Pol. p. 478, pl. Ixiv.
figs. 4, 5.

Seven colonies. Lip frequently bidentate. On Flustra car-
basea &e.

Septal Structures in Lichenopora.—in one of the older
colonies the zocecia exhibit a very distinct horizontal dia-
phragm crossing their cavity at various depths; it is perfo-
rated in the centre by a small orifice. This structure is appa-
rently represented, though somewhat indistinctly, by Smitt
(itv. Akad. Férh. 1866, pl. xi. fig.3) ; but the zocecial tubes
which contain it are taken by him for ocecial funnels ; hence his

Polyzoa, Coelenterata, and Sponges. 453

somewhat puzzling statement that eight such funnels exist in
the specimen figured, the normal number being two or three.
These structures probably represent the ‘ diaphragmes trans-
verses ”? of Haime (Mém. Soc. Géol. France, 2° sér. v. p. 210),
the “septa”? of Busk (Crag Polyzoa, p. 122, pl. xix. fig. 6),
Waters (Journ. Roy. Micr. Soc. i. p. 390) shown to occur
in Heteropora, and called “ tabule”’ by Nicholson (Ann. Nat.
Hist. ser. 5, vol. vi. p. 338). The spines of the zocecial tubes
of some Heteropore and of the cancelli of some Lichenopore,
together with the perforated diaphragms which replace the
latter in other species of Lichenopora, are probably all homo-
logous with each other and with the present structures in the
zocecia of L. verrucaria. I have not seen them elsewhere
mentioned as occurring in this genus, and have therefore
thought them worthy of a figure.

Two small specimens have the cancelli and the bases of the
zocecial tubes obscured, apparently by an overgrowth of calca-
reous matter resembling that described by Hincks (loc. cit.
p- 479) as an outgrowth of the ocecium.

Heteropora pelliculata, Waters?
(Pl. XXI. fig. 3.)

Heteropora pelliculata, Waters?, Journ. Roy. Micr. Soc. ii. p. 391, pl. xv.
figs, 1-4, 7.

Two very young colonies of what I have little doubt is
this species, though their extreme youth renders it almost im-
possible to speak with certainty. ‘They consist of dome-shaped,
hemispherical incrusting growths, the one 23, the other4 millim,
in diameter, occurring on a univalve shell.

The surface of the colony, at a point halfway between the
centre and edge, has polygonal zocecial orifices at regular
intervals, each surrounded by a more or less regular circle of
small cancelli, as in fig. 7 6 of Waters’s plate (loc. cit.) ; at the
edge, however, the number of cancelli is much smaller and
they are larger than at the centre: they originate just in the
same way as the zocecia themselves; and the outermost ones
resemble closely the earliest stage of the zocecia in Lichenopora
(Discoporella). At the actual centre the zocecial orifices
themselves are larger than those near the edge; the cancelli
are larger than in the halfway zone.

The genus is already known from New Zealand, Australia,
and the Japanese Seas, and in the fossil state ; its recent distri-
bution is now extended to the Arctic regions. Some of Mr.
Busk’s figures of Heteropora in the ‘Crag Polyzoa’ appear to
represent young colonies of branching forms; but the present

454 Mr. 8. O. Ridley on Franz-Joseph-Land

specimens represent an earlier stage still, and serve to show
by their general appearance how little really separates the
genus from such forms as Lichenopora. If there were not such
good reason to regard them as but a young stage of a branch-
ing form, they would fall naturally into the connecting genus
Heteroporella, Busk.
CTENOSTOMATA.
Alcyonidium gelatinosum, Linné.
Aleyonium gelatinosum, Linné, Syst. (12) p. 1295.
eee gelatinosum, Johnston, Brit. Zooph. (2) i. p. 358, pl. xxviii.
os, 1-3.

Two very distinct forms, the one including seven specimens,
elongated, finger-like, not branching or proliferating, rising
from a very thin pedicel ; a thick firm cortex, which is of dark
colour in strong spirit. The central parenchyma contained
numerous embryos in one of the specimens. ‘The other group
is composed of much narrower stems, generally rounded, but
tending to become palmate, profusely branched; the cortex is
thin and flexible, and the colour a pale brown in strong spirit ;
ten to twelve specimens of this form occurred.

One specimen belonging to the first form appeared to have
lived free and unattached ; and the deeply constricted condition
of another of the same series of specimens appears to indicate
that the distal ends of such colonies may become detached in
life by natural fission.

ANTHOZOA.
Peachia, sp.

This genus appears to be not uncommon in the Arctic seas
(of. Liitken, ‘ Arctic Manual and Instructions’) ; but draw-
ings taken on the spot are required for satisfactory identifica-
tion of the species.

Two specimens in spirit occur in this collection, one
contracted, and the other expanded but injured, each
54 millim. in height. Column cylindrical, height about
the same as breadth, tapering slightly to posterior end, which
is rounded and has an orifice; the margin bears the single
cycle of tentacles; no apertures on surface, but minute
warts (?) in fine longitudinal ridges ; colour dull flesh-tint at

resent. ‘Tentacles apparently in one cycle on margin, few,
short, thick, blunt; of pale tlesh-colour on external, cream-
coloured on oral aspect. Disk flat, cream-coloured. Margin
of mouth thrown into a complicated system of several deeply
separated projecting tentaculoid lobes (conchula) of a decided

Polyzoa, Celenterata, and Sponges. 455

yellow colour. The tentacles and surface of column were ex-
amined for thread-cells, none of which were discovered. In its
coloration and the characters of the conchula this species ap-
pears to be related specially to P. hastata, Gosse.

HYDROZOA.
Sertularella tricuspidata, Alder.

Sertularia tricuspidata, Alder, ‘Trans. Tyneside Nat. F. Club, iii.
p- 111, pl. iv. figs. 1, 2.

Se (gai tricuspidata, Hincks, Brit. Hydr. Zooph. p. 289, pl. xlvii.

eee pieces, representing three or four colonies at least ;
robust, with the exception of one rather thin-walled colony ;
one colony attained a height of 2,5, inches (61 millim.). A
few gonothece occurred, but all wanting their uppermost end.
The time of year (late summer) at which they were collected
evidently accounts for this agreement in the incipient disso-
lution of these bodies, and points to the time at which repro-
ductive activity ceases in this species in this latitude.

SPONGIIDA.
CALCAREA,

Clathrina coriacea, Montagu.
Spongia coriacea, Montagu, Wern. Mem. ii. p. 116.

Grantia coriacea, Johnston, Brit. Spong. p. 183, pl. xxi. fig, 9,

Ascetta coriacea, Hickel, Kalkschwamme, ii. p. 24, pls. iii, & y. fig. 2.

A fragment, apparently torn from a Soleniscus-growth ; the
diameter of the tube must have been about 1°5 millim. Colour
opaque white. ‘The spicules have the somewhat inequiradiate
character which I have recently found in those of a specimen
from South America ; their rays measure respectively *10135
by -0079, :076 by :0079, 076 by ‘0079 millim. average maxi-
mum dimensions, and should therefore be described as
“ sagittal” according to Hiickel’s nomenclature. The diffe-
rence in length between the rays is not so great in some of the
spicules.

Dr. Gray’s genus Clathrina (P.Z. 8. 1867, p. 557) has the
priority of Hickel’s Ascetta, published in 1872.

This widely spread species has already been recorded from
the Arctic regions, viz. by Mr. Carter (‘ Annals,’ ser. 4
vol. xx. p. 38) from Smith’s Sound, and from the European
side of the Pole (Barents Sea) by Von Marenzeller (Denk,
Ak. Wien, xxxv. p. 371).

456 OnFranz-Joseph Land Polyzoa, Coelenterata, & Sponges.

Distribution of Franz-Joseph-Land Polyzoa in the Arctic Area,

4 es
e . Lo | =
ay Bley a!
By | pect | fof t=: SP sta SE:
Ps] qd = Sst gq ——
D $ 5 : {e) ™=| 2 =|
7 oo | 2iaeln Ilys] 2 3
ay Ear N $ = S| te Daalpes
q 3 cB) sl S = 2s % » &
Ol ees | ede sl eh |e Saas 3
Blalsalzinmials |EFla|s
PoLtyzoa CHILOSTOMATA,
Articulata,
Gemellaria loriculata ........ ;
: % Peele ae |e: [ox
Bugula Murrayana, var. fruticosa| , OAL Reet ARR el eel ae =
Se eer aang Sears Ce Pa lime Bene Ue eae ee ae pi ees *
Pp eee et eee evene peee ee ee * e ee ee * *
Inarticulata.
Flustra carbasea......... POM ct hael fase ate hee
ROCHEMZOUR 2 iso sas sis oe ¢ x | *
Membranipora Sophie ........ gia Hl Set il ate Meee See Yosuai ie ae
eraticula ..... ayer a tntskeretecs Se lle it ese aioe ees *
Anarthropora monodon........
Myriozoum crustaceum........) « | # | -. |e | # |e | #
- subgracile ............., Boa ee ae Te I tae: ge tell) gm a fa
Schizoporella cruenta ........ eid eset ots fake rel | ese aliens: Al Noone Maret aise
Porella concinna ........... Richa eae glen ee lll uke iets *
Escharoides Sarsi ............ x | «| «| « | * | x
Mucronella ventricosa, var. con-
MIGCLPTIS) co versye'eieois%01)¢-% AO aA
CyCLOSTOMATA,
Crisia denticulata...... L epiteve
Lichenopora verrucaria......., |e le le |) we eet eo 1 oe ee ie
Heteropora pelliculata? ......
CTENOSTOMATA.
Alcyonidium gelatinosum ....] » | » | * | * | # | ee] ee | ® Pig
Hyprozoa.
Sertularella tricuspidata ..,...|%° | #° | a® | «. | .- Pree | os | we | ad
ANTHOZOA,
IPERGHIG SPs. Gabe ors oss 1055

SPONGUDA.
@lathrina coriaces ceri sessile |ie eee Ih ae | boas

It should be noticed that more than half these species range south-
wards to the British seas.

1 Smitt. 2 Marenzeller and Hincks. * Busk. ‘* Fabricius, Hincks, Nor-
man, and Busk. ° Kirchenpauer. ° Hincks, 7 Marenzeller. * Carter,

Mr. C. O. Waterhouse on Indian Coleoptera. 457

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XXI.

Fig.1. Gemellaria loriculata, zocecium. xX 68 diam.

Fig. 2. Membranipora Sophie, various forms of the occium from one
colony. X about 60 diam.

Fig. 8. Heteropora pelliculata?: a, young colony, from above; 8, same,

from side. X 15 diam.

Fig. 4. Schizoporella cruenta, ocecia, the upper one immature. Xx 40 diam.

Fig. 5, Lichenopora verrucaria, broken zocecia, showing perforated dia-
phragms. X 95 diam.

Fiq. 6. Mucronella ventricosa, var. connectens: a, zocecia; b, zocecium,
showing tooth within lip, and process of doubtful nature above
mouth. xX about 60 diam.

XLVII.—On some Indian Coleoptera, chiefly from Travancore.
By Cuarues O. WATERHOUSE.

Lucanide.

Odontolabis Burmeistert, Hope.

Some very fine examples of this species have just been
received from Travancore. The fully developed male resembles
that figured by Hope (Tr. Ent. Soc. ii. pl. xiii.) ; the figure,
however, does not represent the angle behind the eye as suffi-
ciently prominent. The coloration is constant as in the
figure above referred to, the suture of the elytra being
narrowly lined with black as compared with O. cuvera. The
female examples measure 24 lines ; the black at the suture of
the elytra, instead of being triangular in outline, as in O. cu-
vera, narrows immediately on leaving the base, and continues
parallel-sided for some distance, narrowing again at the apex.

Buprestide.

Catoxantha cuprascens, n. sp.

Obscure cuprea ; thorace crebre punctato, singulis elytris plaga ob-
liqua flava ornatis, apice truncatis; corpore subtus purpureo
olivaceo tincto ; abdomine flavo.

Long. 16 lin.

General form of C. opulenta, Gory, but with narrower
thorax, and quite differently coloured and sculptured. Head
very closely and strongly punctured in front, the vertex with
a longitudinal median carina. Thorax rather flat, moderately
narrowed in front, not very much enlarged at the hind angles ;
strongly punctured, the punctures separated on the disk,

458 Mr. C. O. Waterhouse on Indian Coleoptera.

' crowded at the sides; with a short well-marked impressed
line on each side of the base; the posteriar angles nearly
right angles. Elytra smoother than the thorax, finely and
thickly punctured; each with four narrow raised lines, with
a very oblique oblong yellow patch near the middle.

Hab. Travancore. B.M.

This species is very distinct from all the described species
of the genus, and it should be placed at the end. The fine
carina on the vertex of the head is a peculiarity I have not
met with in any other species.

Prionide.

LoGaus, n. g.

General characters of Priotyrannus. g. Antenne as in
that genus, but with the third joint stouter, less parallel, im-
pressed above, and (as well as the fourth, fifth, and sixth
joints) more shining on the upperside. Mandibles short,
thick ; the left one with a single strong triangular tooth near
the apex ; the right mandible triangularly dilated at the base.
Eyes moderately approximate above. Labial palpi very
short, the apical joint very large and irregularly ovate. The
maxillary palpi moderately long and stout, the apical joint
oblong. Thorax transverse; the anterior angle produced
laterally into a strong acute spine, its anterior border in a
straight line with the anterior margin of the thorax; in the
middle the side is triangularly enlarged and furnished with
a strong acute spine, with a second small spine immediately
above it; behind the middle the side is strongly emarginate,
the posterior angle slightly dentiform. lytra moderately
long, subparallel, a little narrowed towards the apex, the
sutural angle with a small tooth. Legs asin Priotyrannus,
but altogether stouter. Prosternal process parallel, obtuse at
the apex, not narrowed at the apex as in Priotyrannus. Meta-
sternum clothed with dense pile.

Logeus subopacus, n. sp.

Niger, subopacus; thorace confertim subtiliter punctato, plagis
duabus (ad basin conjunctis) nitidis fortiter punctatis; elytris
picescentibus, ad basin laxe subtiliter punctulatis; abdomine pedi-
busque piceis.

Long, 26 lin,

Head very closely and rugosely punctured. Thorax gently
convex on the disk, very slightly impressed in front and on
each side within the posterior angles ; on each side of the disk

Mr. C. O. Waterhouse on Indian Coleoptera. 459

is a shining, triangular, strongly-punctured patch; the two
patches united by a tridentate shining band which borders the
base. On each side there are two spots, which are more
coarsely punctured than the rest of the surface. Hlytra sub-
opaque, with some very delicate punctuation at the base ;
somewhat parallel, compressed laterally below the shoulders,
a little narrowed at the apex, the lateral margins narrowly
reflexed.

Lamiide.

Morimus inequalis, n. sp.

Fulvus, dorsaliter infuscatus, omnino pilosus ; capite postice maculis
quatuor nigris; elytris basi depressis, medio bene convexis, ad
apicem declivis, angustatis, maculis quatuor fusco-velutinis notatis.

Long. 12 lin.

Allied to MZ. morimoides, White (Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist.
1858, u. p. 266, Leprodera), but with the elytra more de-
pressed at the base, much more convex in the middle, more
declivous at the apex. The basal jomt of the antenne has
on the inner side at the base an emargination ; and the upper
angle made by this emargination is slightly prominent in the
form of an obtuse tooth. This character is visible in J
morimotdes, but ina much less marked degree. The anten-
nal tubercles are very prominent. On each side of the neck
are two black spots. ‘The thorax is very roughly sculptured ;
the lateral spine is much stronger, more prominent, but less
acute than in M. lugubris, Fab. The elytra are less promi-
nent at the shoulders than in M. morimoddes, but at the
middle they are more convex and broader; very coarsely
granular, or covered with obtuse tubercles, some of which
range themselves in two short lines at the base near the scu-
tellum ; each elytron has on the disk, some distance from the
base, an irregular, dark, velvety brown spot, and beyond the
middle a second, larger, triangular patch, which touches the
margin but does not reach the suture. The femora and all the
underside of the insect are more or less dotted with black.
The antenne of the male are rather longer than the whole
insect ; in the female they are shorter.

Hab. Southern India, probably Coimbatoor. B.M.

T'wo examples of this species were presented to this Museum

by M. J. Walhouse, Esq.

Morimus plagiatus, n. sp.
Niger, dense griseo-pilosus; antennarum articulo basali ad basin

460 Mr. C. O. Waterhouse on Indian Coleoptera.

tuberculo armato; thorace rugoso; elytris albescentibus, plagis
quatuor nigris velutinis ornatis.
Long. 15-17 lin.

Antenne densely pilose, greyish white; a little longer than
the whole insect, the basal joint nearly reaching to the thoracic
spine, black, with a whitish line above; at the base on the
inner side with a strong conical tubercle. Antennal tubercles
very prominent. Neck with two blackish spots on each side.
Thorax convex, rather strongly granulose, almost rugulose,
the lateral spine strong and acute. LElytra almost white
towards the sides and apex; flattened near the scutellum,
distinctly convex and enlarged behind the middle, sloping
down and narrowed at the apex ; the shoulders are ona lower
level than the scutellar region, rectangular, and dotted with
a few small black tubercles; a few black tubercles are also
ranged in a line at a little distance from the scutellum. Hach
elytron has two large black patches—one at some distance
from the base, commencing under the shoulders and extending
towards the suture; the second, subapical, somewhat trian-
gular, with its base on the margin and its vertex towards
the suture. ‘The legs and all the underside are dotted with
black.

Hab. Travancore. B.M.

I feel somewhat disposed to think that Leprodera mori-
moides, White, and the two species I have described above
should be associated and form a new genus distinct from
Morimus, in which morimotdes at present stands. The cha-
racters would be:—the prominent antennal tubercles, the
antennee of the male not much longer than the whole insect,
the basal joint at the base emarginate within, the upper angle
made by the emargination more or less prominent (scarcely
prominent in morimoides, slightly in inequalis, forming a
conical tubercle in plagiatus) ; the elytra rather narrowed at
the base, with the shoulders depressed and on a lower level
than the scutellar region. As, however, there are some species
of this group of Lamiide with which I am not acquainted,
and which may be intermediate forms, I prefer for the present
leaving these species in Morimus.

Eutenia elegans, nu. sp.

Nigra, velutina, opaca, maculis plurimis pallide flavis ornata; an-
tennis ochraceo annulatis.
Long. 11 lin.

Velvety black, with the followmg very pale yellow (or
sandy-white) markings :—head with a spot on each side of
the vertex, and all the face, except a black spot above the

Mr. C. O. Waterhouse on Indian Coleoptera. 461

clypeus; thorax with a patch on each side; each elytron
with a large transverse patch (touching the side but not the
suture) some distance from the base, from the middle of which
a branch is emitted to the base and is carried over the shoulder ;
asmall spot on the margin at the middle ; a broad transverse
band behind the middle; a spot at the apex; on the underside
there is a small spot on each side of the base of the meta-
sternum and a large triangular spot in its middle; a spot in
the middle and at each side of the basal segment of the abdo-
men, a small spot on each side of the second segment, the
third and fourth segments almost entirely yellow; the apex
of the femora and apex of the tibiw also yellow. The an-
tenne are black, with half the third and half the fourth joints
ochreous yellow ; the fifth, sixth, and seventh joints are yellow,
except at their apex.

The general form of this species is very much that of Ano-
plostetha lactator ; but the lateral spine of the thorax is more
acute, and the thorax is broader at the anterior margin.

Hab. Travancore. B.M.

Hispide.
Estigmena cribricollis, n. sp.

Nigro-fusca, nitida ; thorace fere parallelo, ad basin et latera crebre
punctato, punctis squamis parvis pallidis instructis ; elytris fortiter
lineato-punctatis (punctis latera versus et ad apicem squamis
parvis pallidis instructis), interstitiis alternatis ante apicem paulo
elevatis, corpore subtus piceo.

Long. 73 lin.

Nearly of the same form as E. chinensis, Hope (Col. Man.
lil. p. 175, t. 2. fig. 1), but with the thorax more parallel at
the sides. The antenne are much longer, being twice the
length of the head and thorax together. Vertex of the head
finely punctured. Thorax with the middle of the front part
smooth and shining, but with some very fine delicate punctua-
tion ; on each side of the disk are a few large punctures; the
base and all the sides are closely and very strongly punctured,
each puncture having in its middle a small pale scale ; on each
side of the disk there is an elongate shallow impression. The
alternate interstices of the elytra are slightly and narrowly
raised towards the apex; the sides beyond the eighth line of
punctures are rather strongly and confusedly punctured, as is
also the apical region (but not so strongly); and all the
punctures being furnished with small pale scales, the sides
and apex have a greyish appearance.

Hab. Travancore. B.M.

British Museum,

May 13, 1881.
Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol vii. 34

462 Mr. C. O. Waterhouse on Australian Buprestide.

XLVIII.—On some Buprestidae from Australia.
By Cuares O. WATERHOUSE.

Buprestide.

Chalcotenia vittata, n. sp.

Valde elongata, postice attenuata, nea, supra fere nigra, nitida ;
thorace antice parum angustato, guttis parvis punctulatis viridi-
aureis impresso, disco plaga lanceolata notato; elytriscostis quatuor
perparum elevatis, interstitiis guttarum auratarum seriebus nota-
tis, marginibus vitta lata impressis.

Long. 18-21 lin.

Closely allied to C. ajax, Saund., but much narrower,
more attenuated posteriorly, nearly black above, and with a
golden-green submarginal stripe on the elytra extending from
the shoulder to the apex. ‘The thorax is of the same form
as that of C. ajax, but with the posterior angles not the least
prominent; there is no impression within the posterior
angles, the surface being gently convex, with small dots or
irregular green marks scattered here and there, leaving the
greater part black; in the middle of the disk is a narrow
lanceolate space more or less defined by some green punctured
lines. The elytra are evenly convex, smooth, with the
suture slightly raised; each elytron has four scarcely notice-
able coste, marked out by lines of fine punctures; the first,
second, and third intervals have each a series of small golden-
green more or less elongate marks; in the second inter-
stice there are generally two marks which are larger than the
others; the sutural angle has a very small tooth; and there
are three or four small teeth on the apical margin. ‘The
underside of the insect is green, with golden reflections. The
punctures on the prosternal process have a tendency to form
a line in the middle. The metasternum has a few strong
punctures. The abdomen has numerous impressions filled
with pale yellowish pile, one at the side of each segment being
particularly conspicuous. The male has the fitth segment
deeply triangular, notched at its apex; the sixth segment
has all its apical portion concave and filled with yellowish
pile or cottony substance. The female has the fitth segment
slightly truncate at the extreme apex, with an elongate trian-
gular apical impression, which is filled with yellowish pile ;
the sixth segment is not visible.

Hab. Queensland.

Mr. C. O. Waterhouse on Australian Buprestide. 463

Chalcotenia leta, n. sp.

Enea, subtus viridi-aurea ; thoracis disco nigro-cexruleo laxe punc-
tulato, linea mediana viridi, lateribus rugosis aureis ; elytrorum
sutura apiceque cyaneis, costis fere nigris, interstitiis viridibus,
regione humerali aurata, macula sub humero, altera discoidali
rotundata ante medium, altera elongata obliqua (medio gutta ele-
vata, nitida) ante apicem lete cupreis, impressis ; femoribus anticis
maedio leevibus,

Long. 9-13 lin.

This species is so close to C. australasie, Saund. (Tr. Ent.
Soc. 1872, p. 248, pl. vi. fig. 6), that I formerly considered it a
variety of that species. Having now several specimens, I am
sure that it is distinct. 'The most noticeable character is the
oblique coppery impression near the apex of the elytra, which
is more conspicuous than in C. australasie and cuts off the apex
of the second costa, thus preventing its uniting at its apex with
the first costa; besides this, the third costa is more abbreviated,
a fragment of it, however, appearing before the middle of the
impression. The shoulders are more golden, the coste being
interrupted there. The thorax has the line of demarcation
between the rugose sides and the comparatively smooth disk
more clearly defined. The underside of the insect is less
golden, less densely punctured ; the abdomen has more smooth
space; the inner margin of the metathoracic epipleura is
more or less smooth; but particularly the anterior femora are
smooth or very nearly so in their middle, instead of being
closely punctured all over.

Stigmodera Macfarlani, n. sp.

Thorace purpureo, cupreo micante, lateribus flavis, scutello viridi ;
elytris flavis, ad basin angustissime seneo marginatis, fasciis duabus
latis apiceque cyaneis, corpore subtus viridi flavo ornato.

Long. 15-17 lin.

Near S. Spencez, Gory, but with yellow sides to the thorax ;
of the same form, but with the thorax a trifle more narrowed
in front. Head yellowish green, tinted with coppery, closely
and finely punctured. Thorax distinctly and moderately
closely and evenly punctured ; purple or coppery red (accord-
ing to the position in which it is seen), with the sides broadly
yellow; the extreme base at the sides is bordered with
coppery. Elytra deep yellow, moderately strongly and evenly
punctate-striate ; there isa dark blue spot below the shoulder,
and a transverse band across the suture (this band and the

spot below the shoulder are united in the second oom and
34%

464. Mr. H. J. Elwes on Butterflies from Japan.

form one band); there is a very broad band behind the
middle, with its posterior margin flexuous; and the apex is
also dark blue, the upper margin of the blue colour flexuous ;
the apex is broadly truncated, the truncature flexuous, the
outer angle with a small tooth. The underside is green,
with the flanks of the prothorax, a spot or two on the sterna
and epipleura, a band on the posterior coxe, and a transverse
band in the middle of each abdominal segment yellow. Pro-
sternal process smooth.

Hab. Torres Straits, Murray Island, and Cornwallis Island.

Two examples received from the Rev. J. S. Macfarlane.

Stigmodera viridicincta.
Stigmodera viridicincta, Waterhouse, Tr. Ent. Soc. 1874, p. 545.

Three examples of this species were received with the above
described. They agree in general coloration with the
“ variety” which I described, having the sides of the thorax
deep red; the elytra yellow, with the sides and apex red;
but in addition to the green at the suture and extreme apex
of the elytra there is a transverse spot across the suture rather
behind the middle, one of the specimens having another
green spot on the disk of the elytron, which is really only a
disconnected part of the transverse spot or band across the
suture. This last specimen has also the red at the sides of
the thorax united by a red band near the base; so that the
whole thorax is red, except a large spot in front and the ex-
treme base, which are green.

Stigmodera sexmaculata.
Stigmodera sexmaculata, Saunders, Journ. Linn. Soc. ix. p. 465, pl. ix.
fig, 13.
An example of this species just received has the elytra
entirely deep yellow, except the apex, which is blue. .

British Museum,
May 18th, 1881.

XLIX.—WMr. butler on Butterflies from Japan.
By H. J. Eiwes, F.L.8.

On my return from India my attention was called to a paper
by Mr. Butler in the Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist., Feb. 1881,
p- 132, which seems to call for some reply on my part.

In a paper on the genus Colas by me in Trans. Ent. Soc.
for October 1880, p. 133, I criticised his. determination of

Mr. H. J. Elwes on Butterflies from Japan. 465

some specimens of this genus from Japan, which, though not
then published, were indicated as distinct species in the British-
Museum collection, and have since been described by him.
Mr. Butler seems to think it great presumption on my part
to criticise his determination of species, and hints that my
rash enthusiasm to do some work in a branch of natural history
which is comparatively new to me has led me to write in
haste what I shall repent at leisure.

Now, though I readily agree with him that, in order to
avoid controversy, it would be better that his species should
be examined by an entomologist of longer experience than
myself, I do not at all repent what I have written, though, in
the matter of the Candahar Colias, I must apologize for having
used the word described when I should have said admitted.
The dapsus calami must have been apparent from my quoting
the authorities for the names. The fact is that at the time
my paper was read Mr. Butler’s paper (see P. Z.S. 1880,
p. 403) was not yet published, and I had only seen a proof
of it; but this slip does not alter the case materially, as I
hold that a naturalist who admits species without question
that have been previously described by others as varieties or
aberrations only, as in the case of C. sareptensis and C. pal-
lida, is responsible for their specific value.

To show how far my views of this question coincide with
those of other naturalists, I may cite one recent case in which
Mr. Butler’s work has been tested by others ; and here, at any
rate, it cannot be said that it has been done by inexperi-
enced or hasty workers. Messrs. Godman and Salvin, in
‘ Biologia Centrali-Americana’ (see “ Lepidoptera,” p. 73), in
dealing with those species of the genus Huptychia which occur
within their limits, have carefully examined their unrivalled
collection. ‘The genus ‘having been twice reviewed by Mr.
Butler (see P. Z.S. 1866, p. 459, and Journ. Linn. Soc.
Zool, xiii. 1876, p. 116), must be considered as one in which
his matured views as to specific distinction are shown; and
what is the result? Why, that forty-six supposed species
and two named varieties of Huptychia (for a few of which,
however, Mr. Butler is only partly responsible, though he has
adopted them) are reduced to thirty; and in the case of #.
camerta, Cr., which had been divided into five species, the fol-
lowing remark is made :—‘‘ We find it quite impossible to
follow Mr. Butler and others in their minute subdivision of
this species.” See further on, p. 85, with regard to EL. poly-
phemus*, Many similar cases could no doubt be found if it

* “ After a close examination we are unable to discover any differences
by which to recognize Mr. Butler’s three species as distinct from each
other.”

466 Mr. H. J. Elwes on Butterflies from Japan.

were worth while to search for them; but I do not suppose that
any thing I can say will have the slightest effect in modifying
his views.

But I find that Mr. Butler can be very hard on others who
do not happen to have the same opportunities as himself for
special training and the same facilities for referrmg new and
rare species to their correct genera.

I refer to his remarks in Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist., March
1881, pp. 229 and 237, on M. Oberthiir’s memoir on the
Lepidoptera of Askeld, where, after going through his species
critically, and correcting the nomenclature of most of them
(which corrections will no doubt soon receive further corrections
at the hands of some one else), he says that ‘it is impos-
sible to overestimate the injury through waste of time which
is occasioned to workers by the publication of duplicate names
for the same species.”

In this remark I most heartily concur with him ; and though
T shall not attempt to defend M. Oberthiir from the charge of
adding new synonyms to the list, yet it is, at any rate, easy
to tell at once, by the beautiful figures in his liberally distri-
buted ‘ Etudes,’ what are the species to which his names refer 3
whilst I defy any one, even when descriptions of over a
page length are given, as in the case of Colias Elwest, to tell
with or without figures what such species as that and Colias
pallens really are, unless they see the types.

Since writing my paper I have carefully examined the
species in question at the British Museum, and see no reason
to alter my opinions respecting them—though, in the case of
C. subaurata, I think that the colour of the underside in
selected specimens may be enough to distinguish them. [|
repeat that it is most unlikely that in such a genus—by which
I mean a genus of which most of the species are very
wide-ranging and very variable, developing, under different
conditions of life and in different climates, numerous slight
local varieties and possibly hybrids—it is most unlikely that
four species of one group (namely the hyale group, which,
in the whole of the Nearctie and Palearctic regions, has only
four or five distinct species, from. my point of view) should
exist in Japan alone, or rather in that small part of Japan
from which Mr. Maries’s collection came. I said collections
generally, but find that Mr. Butler includes in his list of
species in this one collection four Colie of this group. I
fully allow that the climatic conditions of the various islands
in Japan are varied and likely to develop numerous varia-.
tions, as is abundantly proved by the plants of Japan ; but
this seems to make my case the stronger. .

Mr. H. J. Elwes on Butterflies from Japan. 467,

It is no doubt very easy to get over the difficulty by saying
that what I call varieties Mr. Butler calls distinct species, and
in some cases, as I have heard, even distinct genera; but I
affirm with confidence that if the butterflies of Europe were
treated by Mr. Butler in the same way as the butterflies of Japan
have been, the number of names, I will not say species, would
be doubled, and perhaps trebled, supposing that he hada large-
enough collection to work upon and no critics *.

If any one with a rich collection of European and North-
Asiatic butterflies will take the trouble to examine the genus
Argynnis closely, and test the validity of such species as A,
vorax, Butl., A. paphiotdes, Butl., A. rabdia, A. pallescens,
Butl., A. locuples, Butl., or to examine some of his new
species of Japanese Papilio with a good series of specimens,
I think it will be found that they do not bear the test much
better than the Coliw; and, considering that some of his
Japanese species have been described from drawings, like
Pararge echinoides, and others from single faded and worn
specimens, like C. pallens, this is not surprising, though I
believe there were sufficient specimens of the Argynnes.

It is quite possible, and even probable, that a more perfect
knowledge of the distribution, seasonal forms, and metamor-
phoses of Japanese insects may prove the distinctness of some
of these species; but I think it is better to wait till there are
at least good reasons for describing them, than to run the
risk of adding more to the already long list of useless and
troublesome synonyms.

I will here take the opportunity of making remarks on
some new species described by Mr. Butler in Ann. & Mag.
Nat. Hist., Jan. 1881, p. 32.

Argynnis gemmata, Butl., is a very distinct and beautiful
species—so much so, that I was astonished to find, when I
compared my specimen at the British Museum last year, and
pointed it out to Mr. Butler, that it had been overlooked
for so many years.

With regard to the localities given, viz. “ Darjeeling (Lid-
derdale) ; between Nepal and Tibet” (Charlton), I must say
a few words. Though more definite than the abominable
expression ‘ Northern India,” which was and stillis so much
in favour among those ignorant of the physical geography of
the Himalayas, or careless of the great importance of definite

* As an instance of what may be accomplished in this direction by a
painstaking and observant naturalist, I would commend to his notice
Jordan’s ‘ Diagnoses Plantarum’ (1864), in which fifty-three species are
described and twenty figured, most, if not all, of which are considered by
other botanists to be varieties of Draba verna.

468 Mr. H. J. Elwes on Butterflies faom Japan.

localities particularly in that part of the world, they are still,
in this case, misleading.

_ Darjiling is the central station and only town in British
Sikkim, and is about twenty miles in a direct line from the
plains, at an elevation of 7000 feet. It is the centre to which
all native collectors bring their specimens for disposal; and in
this way most of the species found in British and Native
Sikkim and the adjoining parts of Bhotan, Tibet, and Nepal,
from the level of the plains up to 18,000 or 19,000 feet, are
or will be labelled ‘ Darjiling” (cf. Proc. Zool. Soc. 1859,
pp: 251-253), though they may come from districts belong-
ing to two perfectly distinct zoological regions including three
subregions—the Mongolian, the Himalo-Chinese, and the
Indian (cf. Elwes on the Geographical Distribution of Asiatic
Birds, in P. Z. 8. 1873, p. 657, and Hodgson, in Journ.
As. Soc. Bengal, 1835). ‘These divisions are most impor-
tant, as, with some knowledge of their characteristics, many
facts in distribution are easily explained which would other-
wise be inexplicable. Dr. Lidderdale, so far as I am aware,
never travelled in the interior of Sikkim, but, except one
season at Buxa in Bhotan, spent his time at Darjiling and
its immediate neighbourhood.

Argynnis gemmata is, with little doubt, a Palearctic form
most nearly allied to A. pales, and is an inhabitant of the
higher, drier regions of the interior of Sikkim, near the Tibet
frontier. Jam nearly sure that I took it myself, in August
1870, near the Yakla Pass, at 13,000 feet elevation; but
the specimen, with many more, was destroyed by damp.
Two years ago I got it again from the late Mr. Mandelli,
collected by a native in the same district; and, though it may
stragele along the Chola range towards British Sikkim, [
doubt its occurring below 10,000 feet. Its occurrence in North-
east Kumaon, for so one must, I suppose, interpret the vague
term ‘ between Nepal and Tibet” (though that term would
equally well apply to native Sikkim if one had any reason to
suppose that Charlton had ever been there), would then be
pertectly natural and even to be expected ; for though, in the
case of birds, plants, and butterflies, the species found in the
middle zone of elevation in Sikkim are mostly either peculiar
or represented in the north-west Himalaya by allied forms,
yet the alpine species are very often identical. The general
terms Tibet and Chinese Tartary, so often given by writers
as localities for species, should not be used if possible. Tibet
is a country of enormous extent, of which only the frontier
in two or three spots has been visited by naturalists, though
Prejvalsky has recently penetrated the north-east for some

Mr. O. Thomas on a new Chinese Mole. 469

distance. Nine times out of ten what is meant by these words
is Ladak—a truly Tibetan province in its physical features,
but politically part of Kashmir.

If, as we may hope, future travellers are able to penetrate
or send native collectors into other parts of Tibet, such as the
Chumbi valley, bordering on Sikkim, or the frontier districts
adjoining Upper Assam, the locality from whence specimens
are brought should always be specified, and the bare term
Himalayas or, still worse, Northern India (which may mean
any thing from Calcutta to Suddya or Kashgar) abolished.

As regards the next species described by Mr. Butler, Papilio
nebulosus, I cannot agree with him, believing it to be merely
an aberration of P. antiphates, as, indeed, he suggests it
may be.

I procured at Darjiling two specimens of this aberration,
neither of which agrees exactly with the other or with Mr.
Butler’s specimen in its markings, though they have both
the same character. The gentleman in whose collection they
were, and who, I believe, got thei in the same season as Dr.
Lidderdale’s specimen, agreed with Mr. Godman and myself
in this determination; and though it certainly appears to
mimic P. euphrates, I think there is every reason to believe it
is not a good species. If, however, it is necessary to breed it
from the egg of P. antiphates in order to prove this, I am
afraid many years will elapse before the matter is cleared up.

L.—Description of a new Species of Mole from China.
By OuprieLp THomas, F.Z.8., British Museum.

THE specimen here described was obtained near Pekin by the
late Mr. Robert Swinhoe during the British expedition to
that place in 1860. Shortly after its arrival in England it was
mentioned by Dr. Gray* as a new species, but was not named
or described. Later it was referred to by Mr. Swinhoet
under the belief that it was identical with a mole obtained
by Pare David in Mongolia, and described by Prof. A. Milne-
Edwards in his ‘ Recherches pour servir 4 |’ Histoire natu-
relle des Mammiftres’ as Scaptochirus moschatus{. I propose
to call the new species, on account of the comparative slender-
ness of its tail,

* P.Z.S. 1861, p. 390.

+ P.Z.S. 1870, pp. 450 and 620. (In the latter place Mr. Swinhoe
quotes the name as Scaptochirus Davidianus, a term which has never been
used by Prof. Milne-Hdwards.)

{ Texte, p. 173, Atl. pl. 17 a.

470 Mr. O. Thomas on a new Chinese Mole.

Talpa leptura.

Fur, as usual, soft and velvety, with slate-coloured bases and
shining coppery tips. Eyes apparently covered by the integu-
ment. ‘Tail short and slender, barely half as long as the skull,
thinly clothed with white hairs. Muzzle broad ; teeth large and
powerful. Dental formula asin 7. leucura, Blyth*, viz. I. 3,
C.1, P.M.2, M.3f. Third upper premolar very strong
and trenchant, twice as large as in 7. leucura. In the lower
jaw the second and third premolars are equal in size, very.
small, pressed closely together, and placed with their long
axes at right angles to the direction of the jaw, thus differing
from 7’, leucura, in which they are placed nearly longitudi-
nally ; the fourth is well developed, about three times the size
of the two preceding it. Molars with numerous well-deve-
loped sharp-pointed cusps.

Dimensions.
inches.
Mean snd Oty (ADO) oi enc oe lacs etn ccscve bs!eio's 5:0
AUG Lr se TENA she atte sd agta Rides Coninin shit ee a ein eee 06
Fore foot, length, with claws ...............- 0:85
= breadth ..... aie oii et eis) ede ee Cees 06
ELIE COO ROME LH «fess ania mole eins wisfelsic buen layed 0:8
POR UMS eMOM ED ary nce oa. Sein 60> rain ainini cela oka le yo ugucindd ops 1:35
oy) ELCUICHL DICKGER S.No ey ee cs se oes bee 0:7
Palatoslensinut its. Soutien ele bie ete Wate piwik 0:57
», breadth, including molars ............. 0:45
iene thot Lower AW. «hae. min jon aie bcenieiniein oc s:uniewe 0:89

With regard to the affinities of this species, it would seem
to be somewhat intermediate between Scaptochirus moschatus
and Talpa leucura, possessing the same dental formula as the
latter, while the shape both of the muzzle and of the teeth in
section is exactly as in the former. The structure of the
teeth of Scaptochirus would, however, appear to be somewhat
different from what is found in Yalpa leptura, as Prof.
Milne-Edwards has kindly informed me that the peculiar
flat character of the molars, described in the ‘ Recherches’
from a single specimen, has been also found in two others

* J.A.S. B. xix. p. 215, pl. iv. fig. 1 (1850).

+ By an unfortunate misprint in the dental formula, the premolars of
Scaptochirus moschatus were described as being 3 or 3, according to the
manner of determining the lower canine; but, as is clearly shown by
the figure and description, these numbers, if the molars be counted as
4, as 1s done by Prof. Milne-Edwards, ought to be } or 3 respectively.
As, however, there appears to be no doubt that the formula for Talpa,
with regard both to the incisors and molars, given by Prof. Owen (Odon-
tography, i. p. 416, 1840) is correct, the true number of premolars pos-
sessed by Scaptochirus will be 3.

Prof. H. J. Detmers on a Pathogenic Schizophyte. 471

which have since been received by the Paris Museum; so that
this character is thus shown to be a constant one. It seems
probable, however, that it will in the end be found unneces-
sary to retain Scaptochirus as a genus distinct from Talpa,
since 7. leptura has so exactly the same broad muzzle and
stout powerful teeth, and the difference in the dental formula
only consists of the absence of one of the two minute teeth
following the canine-like first lower premolar.
The following are the four different dental formule found
among the moles :—
Inc. 3, C.4, P.M. 4, M.3,x2=44. (7. europea, ceca,
mizura*, &e.)
Inc. $f}, C. t, P.M.4, M.2,x2=42. (7. wogura and
insularis.)
Inc. 3, C.4, P.M. 3, M.3,x2=42. (7. leucura and
leptura.)

Inc. 3, C.4, P.M.3, M.3,x2=40. (8. moschatus.)

LI.—Remarks on a Pathogenic Schizophyte t.
By Prof. H. J. Detmers.

WUuEN about two and a half years ago it became my duty to
investigate the prevailing Swine-plague, the so-called Hog-
cholera, I first endeavoured to ascertain the nature and the
cause of that disease, and to accomplish my object made
numerous post-mortem examinations, and paid special atten-
tion to the microscopic examinations of the blood and of the
morbid products and morbid tissues. Although the micro-
scope at my disposal at the beginning of my investigation was
only a small No. viii. Hartnack stand with three Hartnack
and Prazmowski objectives (a 1-inch, a 3-inch, and a }-inch
imm. and correctives), and consequently not a strictly first-
class instrument, and in its performance by no means equal
to the work of a Tolles or a Zeiss, I soon became convinced
that the blood, the morbid products, and the morbid tissues of

* Ginth. P.Z. 8. 1880, p. 441.

+ Prof. Owen (Odont. i. p. 416, footnote) says, “In the T. moogura,
Temm. (lege wogura), the inferior canine is absent.” From the exami-
nation of several specimens of the Japanese mole it appears to me to be
rather the third incisor which is absent, there being no space whatever,
when the jaw is closed, between the hinder edge of the third lower tooth
and the anterior edge of the upper canine; and, moreover, it is not set
in the same line as the first two teeth, as the third incisor is in the other
moles, but is placed somewhat internal to them, just as the canine is in
the common species.

¢ From ‘Science,’ May 7, 1881. Read before the State Microscopical
Society of Illinois, April 8th, 1881,

472 Prof. H. J. Detmers on a Pathogenic Schizophyte.

the diseased and dead animal invariably contained, while fresh
and not tainted by putrefaction, a certain kind of Schizophytes
or Bacteria. The same presented themselves in three diffe-
rent shapes, namely as small globular Bacteria or Micrococet,
as Zodglea-masses or clusters, imbedded in or kept together
by a viscous mass, and as little rods or filaments. I soon
found that all three forms belong to the same organism, and
represent only different stages of development. The first or
globular form predominated in the blood, the second in the
morbid tissues (for instance, in the diseased portions of the
lungs and in the lymphatic glands), and the rods occurred in
greatest numbers in such morbidly changed parts and morbid
products (for instance, in the ulcerous tumours of the intes-
tines) as are accessible to atmospheric air and other external
influences.

The constant occurrence of these Schizophytes soon made
it appear probable that their presence is not merely acciden-
tal, but that very likely the same are connected with, and
characteristic of, the morbid process of the disease. To get
at the facts was one of my principal endeavours. How far
I have succeeded I leave to others to judge.

Careful and repeated macroscopic and microscopic exami-
nations of the tissues, but especially of the lungs (which, by
the way, are always more or less affected by the morbid
process of Swine-plague), soon revealed the fact that the
principal morbid changes are brought about in the following
way :—The finer capillary blood-vessels become obstructed or
plugged, the more fluid portions of the blood exude into the tis-
sues (in the lungs principally, and at first into the lobules, and
then into the interlobular connective tissue); some, and, parti-
cularly in young animals, not seldom a great many, of the
finest capillaries rupture, and innumerable small extravasations
of blood, visible to the naked eye as tiny red spots, are depo-
sited in the tissue. In the skin, subcutaneous tissue, and
intestinal membranes the process is essentially the same; but
to follow it further would lead too far for the present. Let
me therefore mention another fact. While the blood taken
from a vein of a diseased or dead pig invariably contains a
large nwuber of spherical Bacterta or Micrococct, and very
few and usually small Zoéglwa-masses, the diseased parts
of the lungs, and especially the stagnant blood which oozes
out of the capillaries if the diseased parts of the lungs are
cut into small pieces, invariably contain, besides Micrococet,
numerous and large Zodglea-masses, which are most of
them much larger than the blood-corpuscles, and abundantly
large enough to clog the finer capillaries. All this of course
does not prove that the Schizophytes constitute the cause of

Prof. H. J. Detmers on a Pathogenic Schizophyte. 473

the morbid process. I therefore resorted to experiments.
Having found that any inoculation of a healthy pig with the
fresh pulmonary exudations of a diseased or dead animal in-
variably produces the disease in from three to fifteen days, or, on
an average, in six days, I concluded it might be ascertained
in two different ways (in a negative and in a positive way)
whether or not the Schizophytes constitute the cause of the
morbid process. If it were possible to free the Schizophytes
from every thing, and to transfer the same without any
vehicle whatever from one animal to another, for instance,
like a louse or an itch-mite, the question would be very soon
answered. But as that cannot be done, I had to get at the
facts in a more indirect way. I repeatedly charged two ounces
of an innocent fluid, at first pure and fresh milk, then boiled
milk, mutton-broth, afterwards water, and finally albumen,
with one drop of the infectious pulmonary exudation contain-
ing an abundance of Schizophytes. In about three days the
fluids thus charged (which, by the way, were kept at a suit-
able temperature) were found to be swarming with Schizo-
phytes identical in appearance with those found in the pulmo-
nary exudation ; and every inoculation made with these fluids
proved to be effective ; but in most cases the attack produced
was of a comparatively mild type. ‘To go further into par-
ticulars would take too much time; I therefore have to refer
for particulars to my reports to the Commissioners of Agri-
culture. One thing, however, I must state. The fluid
transferred by each inoculation was less than half a drop;
but this half drop contained innumerable Schizophytes, while,
as far as could be ascertained by careful microscopic exami-
nations, nothing else contained in the original exudation had
multiplied. Consequently nobody, unless he believes in the
power of Hahnemannian dilutions, will contradict me and sa

the effect of the inoculations is brought about, not by the Schi-
zophytes, but by an unseen and unknown virus, or chemical
something, the existence of which cannot be proved. I was,
however, not satisfied with these positive results, and concluded
to try also the negative way. Knowing that it is impossible
to separate the Schizophytes from their vehicle, I tried to free
the latter from the Schizophytes, and resorted to filtration.
I filtrated the pulmonary exudations through half a dozen of
the finest filtering-papers obtainable, but found my effort to
be in vain; for the filtrate, although freed from the Zodglea-
masses and rod-shaped Sacteria, yet contained numerous
Micrococcus forms. ‘The filtrate was put in a vial with a
tight-fitting glass stopper; and when examined three days
later it contained a great many rod-shaped Bacteria and com-
paratively few Micrococet. I therefore filtered it again, with

474 Prof. H. J. Detmers on a Pathogenic Schizophyte.

the same result, except that the Micrococcus forms were not
so numerous after the second filtration as after the first. So
I filtered the exudation three or four times, each time through
from four to six filtering-papers, and at intervals of about three
days, till I was finally not able to detect any Mécrococci in
the now limpid filtrate. Inoculations with this filtrate proved
to be ineffective. At another time (in the following winter)
I tried again to free pulmonary exudation from the Schizo-
phytes by means of filtration, but did not succeed. The
filtrate always after each filtration contained numerous Micro-
cocci. Whether in this second attempt I did not hit the right
time for my second and third filtrations (that is, a time at
which most or all of the Mierococed had developed into rod-
shaped Schizophytes or filaments), whether the temperature
was too low (the first successful attempt was made in the
summer) and therefore the development of the Schizophytes
was irregular or retarded, whether my filtering-papers were
not fine enough, or whether all these circumstances combined
made the filtration a failure, I do not know. An inoculation
made with this filtrate proved to be effective ; but the disease
produced was of a very mild character; at any rate the ani-
mal recovered.

If more proof is yet required that the Swine-plague Schizo-
phytes and nothing else constitute the infectious principle of
that disease (and it seems that the above facts, which have
been published more fully in my reports to the Commissioner
of Agriculture, are not deemed sufficient), the following facts,
if not making it absolutely certain, will at any rate, especially
if considered zn toto, to a great extent corroborate the asser-
tion that the Schizophytes have and must have a causal con-
nexion with the morbid process.

1. It has been and can be everywhere observed, where
Swine-plague is prevailing, that the infectious principle floating
in the air is attracted and taken up by sores, wounds, and
even scratches, but does not enter the animal organism through
the whole skin and through perfectly healthy respiratory
mucous membranes.

2. Antiseptics or medicines which are either directly
poisonous to the lower forms of organic life or destructive to
those conditions under which low forms of organic life thrive
and develop, and, among those antiseptics, especially carbolic
acid, iodine, hyposulphite of soda, benzoate of soda, thymol,
&c., have proved to constitute almost sure prophylactics. As
one of the conditions necessary to the development of Swine-
plague Bacteria, it seems that a certain degree of animal
heat has to be regarded. At any rate after and while the

Prof. H. J. Detmers on a Pathogenic Schizophyte. 475

animal heat of a pig is reduced, by a continued treatment with
carbolic acid, from the normal (102° to 104° F.) to an abnor-
mally low temperature (say 96° to 97° F'.), every inoculation
with fresh infectious material has so far proved to remain
ineffective. Further, the various antiseptics which have
proved to be good prophylactics are very dissimilar in their
chemical affinities and actions ; and their prophylactic effect
cannot very well be explained if the infectious principle is
a chemical agency, a virus, or a poison, but is explained if
the same consists in something endowed with life and power
of propagation.

3. If the morbid process, the morbid changes effected, par-
ticularly the exudations and extravasations of blood on the
lungs and in the skin, and the qualitatively unchanged con-
dition of the blood (that is, excepting such changes in its
composition as are evidently the product or necessary. conse-
quence of the morbid changes) are taken into consideration,
it becomes obvious that something which causes obstructions
in the capillary system (embolism) must constitute the cause ;
and nothing whatever able to accomplish that result can be
found, except the colonies or clusters of Schizophytes, the
Zobglea-masses imbedded in a viscous substance, while, on
the other hand, these Zodglwa-masses are never absent in a
case of Swine-plague.

If I am allowed to digress a little, it may be here men-
tioned that I am well aware of the fact that German and
French investigators claim for certain, and it may be for all,
kinds of pathogenic Schizophytes chemical actions or fer-
menting properties ; and undoubtedly many of them, especially
among those belonging to the genus Bacdllus (I mention B.
anthracis) and probably some others, do possess and exercise
such properties and cause fermentation. As to the Swine-
plague Schizophytes, I have not been able to observe any
fermenting effect or chemical action, except such as necessarily
results from depriving the animal organism of certain elements
and material, appropriated by the Schizophytes, and necessary
to their subsistence and propagation. All other morbid
changes appear to be the consequence of the obstruction of
the capillary system by the Zodglaa-masses, and therefore
are the product of a mechanical and not of achemical agency.

4. The adversaries of the so-called “ germ theory” of
disease, well knowing that a perfect separation of the Schizo-
phytes (Micrococet, Bacteria, or Bacilli, as the case may be)
trom their vehicles, the animal tissues and fluids, is impos-
sible, demand absolute proof. If conclusions may be drawn

476 Prof. H. J. Detmers on a Pathogenic Schizophyte.

from analogy between diseases of animals and plants, Prof. T.
J. Burrill*, of the Illinois Industrial University, more
favoured by the nature of the objects of his investigation
(apple-trees, pear-trees, and peach-trees), has furnished evi-
dence, amounting to almost absolute proof, that the so-called
blight of apple-trees and pear-trees and the so-called “yellows”
of peaches are caused by Schizophytes similar in size (but
otherwise not identical) to those which I consider as constitu-
ting the cause and infectious principle of Swine-plague, as will
be seen by consulting the transactions of the meeting of the
American Association for the Advancement of Science in
Boston, 1880.

5. If the infectious principle were a chemical poison or virus,
its action, one would suppose, would under all circumstances
be exactly the same, and the malignancy of the morbid pro-
cess and the time required for its development (the so-called
period of incubation, or, more correctly, stage of colonization)
would not be subject to changes dependent upon the season of
the year, upon the individuality and temperature of the ani-
mal, and upon other yet unknown external influences, as is
undoubtedly the case. An organic poison or virus, one would
suppose, would act somewhat like the virus of a poisonous
snake. In the same localities, in the same places, or the
same yards and pens, and among the same breeds of hogs, in
which the disease was exceedingly malignant in 1878, it was,
as a rule, much milder in 1879, and still milder in 1880. As
such are unmistakable facts, repeatedly and everywhere
observed, it must be concluded that nothing but what is able
to undergo changes, is subject to growth and development, and
acquires vigour and propagates rapidly under favourable, but
is weakened and multiplies slowly under unfavourable cir-
cumstances (in other words, nothing but what is corporeal and
endowed with lite), can constitute the cause.

6. If the cause and infectious principle of Swine-plague
were a chemical poison or virus, one would suppose a cessa-
tion of the morbid process would be impossible, and an animal
would never recover while its organism contains an abundance
of the infectious principle in an effective condition—as is un-
doubtedly the case, because convalescents and animals nearly
recovered frequently communicate the disease, even in a fatal
form, to other healthy pigs; further, the fact that an animal
once recovered possesses but little predisposition for future
infection, or is seldom attacked a second time even if ever so
much exposed, and then only contracts the disease in a com-
paratively mild form, could never be explained. But the whole

* ‘Science,’ vol, i. pp. 162, 191.

Prof. H. J. Detmers on a Pathogenic Schizophyte. 477

presents an entirely different aspect, and admits explanation,
if low and minute forms of organic life, such as the Schizo-
phytes of Swine-plague, which, by developing and multiplying,
finally destroy or exhaust in an animal organism the condl-
tions necessary to future development and propagation, con-
stitute the cause and the infectious principle (cf an article
entitled “ The Destruction of Germs,” in ‘ Popular Science
Monthly,’ communicated in extract in R. Hitchcock’s ‘ Micro-
scopical Journal,’ Nov. 1880).

7. If some part or organ of a pig infected with Swine-
plague happens to be in a state of congestion, such a part in-
variably attracts the infectious principle, and becomes a pro-
minent, if not the principal, seat of the morbid process—a fact
difficult of explanation, unless the infectious principle is some-
thing solid or corporeal.

8. The adversaries of the so-called “germ theory,” as
they are pleased to call it, demand absolute proof of those who
claim that certain infectious diseases owe their origin or exist-
ence and spreading to very minute forms of organic life.
They cannot deny that these forms exist, can be found, and
have been shown; but they forget to show their virus, poison,
fluidum, or chemical something. Does the latter exist only
in their imagination? If the adversaries of the so-called
“germ theory’ demand absolute proof on our side of the
question, let them set a good example and furnish it on their
side, or only produce their virus, fluidum, or whatever it may
be, and we will gracefully acknowledge that we are mistaken
and have laboured in vain.

9. With the very best objectives ever made, and a fair
ability to handle the microscope, I have never been able
to find any thing identical with the Swine-plague Schizophytes
in the blood and tissues of other healthy animals. When
I commenced my investigation, the best objective at my dis-
posal was a very fair 1-9 four-system immersion-lens of
Hartnack and Prazmowski; but I soon found it be insufiicient,
and procured a 1-16 immersion of the same makers. This,
too, after a while, did not give satisfaction, and I received a
1-12 (nominally 1-10) glycerine immersion of R. B. Tolles,
which that renowned maker afterwards exchanged for a du-
plex 1-10 homogeneous immersion. This latter objective
proved to be a very superior lens, and gave me glimpses of
things of which I desired to see a little more—it showed
flagella on Bacillus subtilis, which I had never seen with any
of the other objectives ; and so I thought, with a higher power,
and a still more perfectly corrected lens, if a more perfect cor-
rection could be made, I might be able to see more plainly

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. vii. 35

478 Prof. H. J. Detmers on a Pathogenic Schizophyte.

the distinguishing forms and characteristics of the Swine-
plague Schizophytes, and also learn a little more about their
mode and manner of propagation. I therefore asked Mr. Tolles
to make me a higher-power objective especially adapted to my
work; and he has furnished me a duplex 1-15 homogeneous
immersion objective (in reality a little more than a 1-16),
which is, beyond comparison, the best objective I have ever
seen. It is even superior, in definition and flatness of field, to
a magnificent 1-18 homogeneous immersion objective (in
reality a 1-20) of Carl Zeiss, made to order a month or two
ago.

is to a proper generic place and name of these Swine-
plague Schizophytes, I am at a loss. The best authorities
(Cohn, Klebs, and others) who have attempted a classification
are somewhat undecided themselves, and do not agree where
generic lines ought to be drawn. At any rate the Swine-
plague Schizophytes do not fit into any of the genera proposed.
They are not Bacteria, because the single cells are spherical
and not oblong; they can hardly be considered as Micrococez,
because the same are bispherical in their advanced stage of
development ; and they cannot be classed among the Bacilli
on account of their forming Zodgle@a-masses. I have there-
fore preferred to use, for the present, that name which, with-
out any serious contradiction, is given by modern investigators
to the whole family, Schizophytee or Schizophytes, or the older
name introduced by Nigeli, Schizomycetes.

The Swine-plague Schizophytes present themselves, accor-
ding to their stage of development, in three different forms
andshapes. ‘Their simplest form, it seems, is that of a Micro-
coccus, or of a small globule of about 0°7 or 0°8 microm. (z34¢5
inch) in diameter. It occurs invariably in the blood, the morbid
products, and exudations, &c. of the diseased animals, and is
never absent, but can always be found, though in some cases
in much greater numbers than in others. The second form is
bispherical, the spherical cell having duplicated itself by a
gradual contraction in the middle, while growing endwise.
These bispherical Schizophytes are always more or less nume-
rous, and are motile, or move about, provided the temperature
of their vehicle (lung-exudation or blood-serum, for instance)
isnot too low. Some of them, but probably only those which
are separated from a larger chain, as will presently be ex-
plained, are provided, at any rate at one end, with a flagellum
(a postflagellum), which, however, is so exceedingly fine
that it can be seen only with the very best high-power objec-
tives, like a Tolles 1-15, and the most favourable light obtain-
able, and even then only while the Schizophyte is slowly

Prof. H. J. Detmers on a Pathogenic Schizophyte. 479

moving. I have never yet been able to see it while the
Schizophyte was at rest.

These double Micrococet, or bispherical Schizophytes, soon
undergo further development. ach single cell soon again
contracts in the middle while growing endwise, and at the
same time separates more and more, and becomes partially
independent of its sister cell, with which, however, it remains
connected for some time, even after it has completed its dupli-
cation. Meanwhile the sister cell, too, has become bispherical,
and what a short while ago was a simple bispherical cell, has
become a double bispherical body, resembling a small chain of
four round joints. But the duplication does not stop; each
of the four single cells, within a short time, doubles again ;
and soon quite a little rod or filament will be formed, which,
on close inspection, presents a string or chain of bispherical
cells, loosely connected endwise with each other. Under
moderately high powers (say of 800 or 900 diameters) such a
string represents a slender, rod-shaped moniliform Bacteriwm.
While the single cells, or each half of each bispherical body,
soon develop into double or spherical cells, the connexion be-
tween the latter gradually loosens, so that finally, if the tem-
perature is not too low, and the development a rapid one (I
have frequently observed that the number of bispherical cells
in such a chain becomes doubled in less than five minutes),
the chain breaks up into smaller ones (joints), each consisting
of one or two bispherical Schizophytes, which, in separating
from their neighbours, after some swinging to and fro, spin
or draw out a very slender thread, a flagellum or cilium. But
before all these changes (this rapid duplication) take place,
the spherical Micrococc?, when about to change to bispherical
bodies, form those clusters (Zodglea or Coccoglia masses)
which, being imbedded in, or kept together by, apparently
viscous substance, obstruct the capillaries, and, according to
my observations, constitute the principal and direct cause of
the morbid process. In these Zodglwa-masses the single
Micrococct, it seems, undergo their first metamorphosis, or
change to double bispherical cells ; and this change continues
till portions of the Zodglea-mass separate, or till finally the
Coccoglia breaks and opens, when the bispherical bodies, and
also some yet unchanged spherical Mccrococci, become free.
The former very soon commence their duplication; but as each
new cell or globule soon produces another one and becomes
bispherical, the same cannot be the source of the spherical
bodies or Micrococct. The latter, it appears, have another
origin, as will be presently explained.

In Swine-plague material, such as blood, sogotreream,

480 Prof. H. J. Detmers on a Pathogenic Schizophyte.

lung-exudation, &c., if a day or two old, and sometimes while
yet fresh, Bacteria of a peculiar shape and form make their
appearance. The same are rod-shaped, and a trifle longer
than a bispherical Schizophyte, or two united spherical bodies,
but are not moniliform, and have at one end, or, in compara-
tively rare cases, towards the middle, a bright and light-re-
fracting globule of much more density than the rest of the
Bacterium. his globule is surrounded by a substance or an
envelope of considerably less density, and is therefore less
light-refracting. If that globule is situated at one end of the
Bacterium, as is usually the case, the whole bacterium pre-
sents the shape of a club, because the globule and its envelope
have much more diameter than the rod. Baillroth calls this
form a Helobacter’um, and the globule a resting spore (Dauer-
spore). Such a resting spore, according to Billroth and Cohn,
at any rate if developed by a Bacztllus, is able to resist very
high degrees of heat and cold, and is very prolific, as it disse-
minates a large number of germs, which probably constitute
the source of the globular bacteria or Micrococct. As such
Helobacteria are often found in perfectly fresh blood and exu-
dations &c. (in the exudations most frequently) of hogs
which are affected with or have died of Swine-piague, and are
nearly always seen if the blood and exudations &c. are a few
days old, it appears probable that the same not only constitute
the source of the spherical Bacteria or Micrococct, but also
that their great tenacity of life, or resistibility against adverse
external influences, explains the ability of the infectious prin-
ciple of Swine-plague to remain effective for a whole year, if
protected, by clinging to or being imbedded in a moist and
porous substance, such as an old straw stack &e.

Whether or not Swine-plague Schizophytes are able to
multiply in any other form and manner than stated, I have
not been able to observe. One observation, made already at
the beginning, has foundnewand repeated confirmation, viz.:—
Wherever or as soon as Bacterium termo makes its appearance
in large numbers, the Swine-plague Schizophytes begin
to disappear, and disappear in about the same ratio in which
the former are increasing in numbers. In blood kept in a vial
Swine-plague Schizophytes cannot be found when the blood
begins to exhibit a purplish colour, or when the_blood-
corpuscles begin to decay or become destroyed. Further,
the Swine-plague Schizophytes, although presenting the same
general characteristics when cultivated in fluids foreign to the
animal organism of a hog, show differences in so far as they
present less uniformity in size, and as this development
and multiplication proceed slower and with much less regu-

Geological Society. 481

larity. It seems the cultivated Schizophytes change and de-
velop more slowly, and probably on that account are less vigo-
rous in producing mischief; at any rate, an inoculation with
cultivated Swine-plague Schizophytes, although effective in
producing the disease, is always followed by a comparatively
milder form of Swine-plague than an inoculation with material
directly from the body of a diseased hog.# This, however, does
not involve that every inoculation with cultivated Schizo-
phytes produces under all circumstances a milder form of
Swine-plague than any natural infection; for such is not the
case. ‘The difference may be stated thus :—A natural infec-
tion, or an inoculation with material directly from the body
of a diseased hog, as a rule, produces a malignant and dange-
rous attack, and as an exception a mild form of the disease—
the frequency of the exception depending, it seems, to a great
extent, upon the prevailing character of the plague; while an
inoculation with the cultivated Schizophyte is, as a rule,
followed by a mild attack, and, as an exception, or in rare
cases only, by Swine-plague in its severest form.
Wherever Swine-plague is prevailing in its most malignant
_or fatal form, or, what is essentially the same, wherever for-
mation of ulcerous tumours in the cecum and colon is afrequent
occurrence, where consequently an abundance of Swine-plague
Schizophytes is discharged with the excrements of the dis-
eased animals, there the spreading from animal to animal, and
from herd to herd, is a rapid one; and vice versd, wherever.
the spreading is rapid, there ulcerous tumours in the intestines
are a frequent occurrence. In 1878 the same (the ulcerous
tumours) could be found in about 75 per cent. of all cases that
had a fatal termination, while at present (in Illinois) their
‘occurrence is probably limited to about 5 per cent. of all
cases.

PROCEEDINGS OF LEARNED SOCIETIES.
GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY.

February 23, 1881.—Robert Etheridge, Esq., F.R.S.,
President, in the Chair.

The following communication was read :—

“On Astroconia Granti, a new Lyssakine Hexactinellid from
the Silurian Formation of Canada.” By Prof. W. J. Sollas, M.A.,
F.G.S.

This paper contained a description of a new fossil Hexactinellid
sponge from the Niagara chert beds of Hamilton, Ontario. It is

482 Geological Society.

the second oldest known example of the Lyssakina. Some remarks
were added on the mineral state of the spicules and their association
with chert. The author proposed for it the name of Astroconia
Granti, the former in allusion to the peculiarly spinose character of
the rays of the sexradiate spicules. The ‘anchoring spicules were
described as consisting of a straight shaft with four recurved rays,
each having a small bifid spine near the base on the outer surface.

In the discussion which followed

Prof. Duncan said it was interesting to see the modern Hexacti-
nellids thus foreshadowed. Very lately he had seen one of the
spicular forms described by Prof. Sollas in a form he had just
described. He quite agreed with the author in assigning this form
to the Lyssakine Hexactinellids. There could be no question as to
the solution of sponge-spicules in sea-water, as he had lately seen
evidence in specimens of deep-sea dredgings. The results of Mr.
Maw’s washing promised to be very interesting. He had examined
many, but had not yet found either sponge-spicules or Foraminifera.

Prof. Rupert Jonzs noticed that there are different kinds of
*‘ chert,” and expressed his opinion that Mr. Sollas had well ex-
plained the origin and formation of the spicular strata which he
had described on this and other occasions. He thought that Dr.
Wallich’s hypothesis of the conversion of extensive layers of sponge-
protoplasm into black flint elucidated many, but not all, of the
phenomena connected with the origin of such siliceous strata as flint
and chert. He noticed that sponge-spicules, and numerous other
Microzoa from the Upper Silurian shales of Shropshire, had been
noticed lately by Mr. Smith of Kilwinning.

Dr. Hicks said that it was remarkable that chert was not asso-
ciated with Protospongia, as, on either Dr. Wallich’s or Prof. Sollas’s
view, might have been expected.

Prof. Jupp said that as the solution of siliceous organisms had
been recently doubted, Prof. Sollas’s observations were of additional
interest. He himself fully believed that this solution did take
place; now and then he had found, in examining the residues left
by dissolving chalk in acid, the thickest portions of siliceous spicules
still remaining not quite destroyed in chalk.

Prof. Sotzas replied that he believed a spicule had been described
by Mr. Carter similar to that mentioned by Prof. Dunean. The one
described now by him was, however, much more robust. He had
never been able to find spicules in the Wenlock. He really could
not comprehend what Dr. Wallich’s views really were. That none
of the fossil siliceous spicules which the author had described were
originally calcareous was quite certain. As for Protospongia, it
did not occur in limestone, and bore a very small proportion to the
mass of the bed; and this might account for the absence of the
chert.

Geological Society. 483

March 9, 1881.—Robert Etheridge, Esq., F.R.S.,
President, in the Chair.

The following communications were read :—

1. “ Description of Parts of the Skeleton of an Anomodont Reptile
(Platypodosaurus robustus, Ow.).—Part II. The Pelvis.” By Prof.
Owen, C.B., F.R.S., F.G.S., &c.

In this paper the author described the remains of the pelvis of
Platypodosawrus robustus which have now been relieved from the
matrix, including the sacrum, the right “os innominatum,” and a
great part of the left ium. There are five sacral vertebra, which
the author believes to be the total number in Platypodosaurus.
The neural canal of the last lumbar vertebra is 8 lines in diameter,
and of the first sacral 9 lines, diminishing to 6 lines in the fifth,
and indicating an expansion of the myelon in the sacral region, which
is in accordance with the great development of the hind limbs. The
sacral vertebree increase in width to the third ; the fourth has the
widest centrum. This coalescence of the vertebree justifies the con-
sideration of the mass, as in Mammalia, as one bone or “ sacrum,”
which may be regarded as approaching in shape that of the Mega-
therioid Mammals, although including fewer vertebree. Its length
is 73 inches; its greatest breadth, at the third vertebra, 54 inches.
The ilium forms the anterior and dorsal walls of the acetabulum, the
posterior and postero-ventral walls of which are formed by the ischium
and pubis. The diameter of its outlet is 3 inches, the depth of the
cavity 13 inch; at its bottom is a fossa 14 inch broad. The fora-
men is subcircular, 1 inch in diameter. The ventral wall of the
pelvic outlet is chiefly formed by the pubis; it is a plate of bone
6 inches broad, concave externally, convex towards the pelvic
cavity. The subacetabular border is 7-8 lines thick; it shows no
indication of a pectineal process, or of a prominence for the support
of a marsupial bone. The author remarks that of all examples of
pelvic structure in extinct Reptilia this departs furthest from any
modification known in existing types, and makes the nearest ap-
proach to the Mammalian pelvis. This is shown especially by the
number of sacral vertebra and their breadth, by the breadth of the
iliac bones, and by the extent of confluence of the expanded ischia
and pubes.

2. “On the Order Theriodontia, with a Description of a new
Genus and Species (dlurosaurus felinus, Ow.). By Prof. Owen,
C.B., F.B,S., F.G.8.

The new form of Theriodont reptile described by the author in
this paper under the name of Alurosaurus felinus is represented by
a skull with the lower jaw, obtained by Mr. Thomas Bain from the
Trias of Gough, in the Karoo district of South Africa. The post-
orbital part is broken away. The animal is mononarial; the alve-
olar border of the upper jaw is slightly sinuous, concave above the

484 Geological Society.

incisors, convex above the canines and molars, and then straight to
beneath the orbits. The alveolar border of the mandible is concealed
by the overlapping teeth of the upper jaw; its symphysis is deep,
slanting backward, and destitute of any trace of suture ; the length
of the mandible is 33 inches, which was probably the length of the

at ie 5S 5—5 6—6
skull. The incisors are =, and the molars probably >= or j=, all

more or less laniariform. The length of the exserted crown of the
upper canine is 12 millim.; the root of the left upper canine was
found to be twice this length, extending upwards and backwards,
slightly expanded, and then a little narrowed to the open end of the
pulp-cavity. There is no trace of a successional canine; but the
condition of the pulp-cavity and petrified pulp would seem to indi-
cate renewal of the working part of the canine by continuous
growth. The anthor infers that the animal was monophyodont.
4ilurosaurus was said to be most nearly allied to Lycosaurus; but
its incisor formula is Dasyurine.

With regard to the characters of the Theriodontia the author
remarked that we may now add to those given in his ‘Catalogue
of South African fossil Reptiles,’ that the humerus is perforated
by an entepicondylar foramen, and the dentition monophyodont.

April 27, 1881.—Robert Etheridge, Esq., F.R.S.,
President, in the Chair.

The following communication was read :—

“On Fossil Chilostomatous Bryozoa from the Yarra-Yarra,
Victoria, Australia.” By Arthur William Waters, Esq., F.G.S.

The author gave a descriptive list of seventy-two species of Bryozoa
belonging to the suborder Chilostomata, from a lump of clay obtained
by Mr. Allen from the neighbourhood of the Yarra-Yarra river.
The specimens are fragmentary, but in excellent preservation.
There are eight species of Catenicella, a genus unknown in the
fossil state until quite recently, when Mr. Bracebridge Wilson de-
scribed twelve fossil species, none of which are known living ; two
of the Yarra-Yarra species still live in the Australian seas ; and one
of these also occurs in the Geological Society’s collection from Mount
Gambier. Among the most interesting of all the specimens de-
scribed by the author is a Catenicella consisting of long internodes,
with a double row of cells in each internode. The short-beaded
Catenicelle now living have probably been developed from forms
with long internodes. Microporclla is also well represented by
some interesting forms, which make it necessary to widen the de-
finition of the genus. A very interesting Cel/aria with subglobular
internodes explains the Cretaceous fossil called Eschara aspasia by
d’Orbigny.

Of the Chilostomata found in this deposit thirty-nine are con-
sidered new, although this number may have to be reduced ; nineteen
are now found living ; seven correspond with those from the fossi-
liferous beds of Orakei Bay, New Zealand, described by Stoliczka ;

Bibliographical Notice. 485

and twenty-three are found in the Mount Gambier formation. Of
about thirty Cyclostomatous Bryozoa which occur in this deposit,
at least seven are common to it and Orakei Bay. Besides the
Bryozoa the author has obtained many other organisms from
this clay, and especially a large number of Foraminifera, now
in the hands of Prof. Karrer of Vienna. He estimates the total
number of determinable species belonging to various classes at
over 200.

In treating of his special subjects the author adopts the principles
of classification laid down by Hincks, Smitt, and other recent
writers on living Bryozoa, which he regards as preferable in them-
selves, and also as facilitating the comparison of fossil with recent
forms.

BIBLIOGRAPHICAL NOTICE.

A Memoir on the Echinodermata of the Arctic Sea to the West of
Greenland. By P. Martin Duncan, M.B. (Lond.), F.RS., &c.,
and W. Percy Stapen, F.G.S., F.L.S., &c. With Six Plates.
London: Van Voorst, 1881.

Tue value and importance of a carefully prepared monograph on a
given group of a given zoological province was brought before the
readers of this journal a month or two ago, when their attention
was directed to Capt. Legge’s work on the Birds of Ceylon. We
have again to illustrate this point by a notice of the memoir on a
very different group of animals and from a very different region,
which Prof. Duncan and Mr. Sladen have been able, by the aid of
the government-grant fund, to publish in a very handsome form.
Thirty species of Echinodermata are in all described, and careful
figures of parts, or complete specimens of most of these, are to be
found on the six large plates which make a not unimportant
portion of the volume. All, we are informed, tell the same tale as
to distribution, and speak to the existence of a circumpolar fauna ;
herein they corroborate the results to which all recent investigators
into the details of Arctic distribution have been led, and which, we
may point out, were, so long ago as 1861, well expressed by Sir
Joseph Hooker, when he spoke of the Scandinavian flora as girdling
the globe in the Arctic Circle. When, however, the authors add to
this that there is no extension northwards from more temperate
climates we cannot think that they mean to speak of an arctic
circumpolar as distinguished from a boreal circumpolar region (in
the sense in which these words are used by Prof. Ehlers) ;. for of the
species which they describe no less than nine* have been found
further south than the sixtieth parallel, and seven others have been

* Or ten, if the Ophioglyphu Tenorit of Heller (Adriatic) be, as
Mr. Lyman thinks, synonymous with O. robusta.

486 Bibliographical Notice.

found in our own seas. An arctic area in a zoogeographical sense
must, as Marenzeller has pointed out, embrace all points which
come in contact with the Polar stream.

While on the subject of distribution we cannot but draw attention
to another example of the resemblance between the Arctic and Ant-
arctic faunas. . In his lately published ‘ Preliminary List’ Mr. Lyman
gives as one of the localities for a species described in this mono-
graph (Ophiocten sericeum) the rarely visited Marion Island.

Of the species described one only (Antedon prolixa) is absolutely
new ; but of the rest, one Ophiurid and one Asterid were first de-
scribed by the authors of the present memoir in the pages of this
journal, and from the very material on which their present work is
based ; while the time which has elapsed since their earliest deter-
minations were published have, in both cases, enabled them to re-
consider the generic appellations of the new forms. But, though the
new species are comparatively inconspicuous, it does not by any
means follow that the specimens which the authors have had in their
hands have not required or received especial and careful study. In
the first place, forms which extend over wide areas must exhibit a
not inconsiderable range of variation, and forms widely distributed
must be continually subjected to more or less insufficient descrip-
tions at the hands of naturalists incompletely equipped for the work.
This will become evident to any reader who will examine into
the length and substance of the synonymical lists which Messrs.
Duncan and Sladen have found it necessary to put out; some of
these are so long that they not unnaturally bring before the mind
the question of how far we might or might not be justified in accept-
ing in toto the bibliographical data of our predecessors, With the
abundance of the opportunities which are now afforded to all zoolo-
gists to write as much and at what length they please, it is obvious
that if lists are prepared of every collection which makes its way
into a museum, and if each of the quotations in these lists is to
find its way into a synonymic list, the natural historian of a very
early future will drag a chain of very considerable length ; and the
only possible relief will have to be found in taking the work of his
predecessors not at their worth, but at a very high value.

We have been led by these considerations to institute a close
comparison between one of the lists given by Messrs. Duncan and
Sladen and that given for the same species (Strongylocentrotus dré-
bachiensis) by the naturalist whose fame is so largely associated
with his work on the same group.

Far from finding that the one is the copy of the other, or that the
work which the later writers have undertaken has been one of super-
erogation, we find something like half a score of differences between
them—differences, we must say, which are, as a rule, to the credit
of the later investigators ; though such points as the omission of the
page in the case of Gould, Desor, and Sars are comparatively trivial,
Messrs. Duncan and Sladen’s list has a greater comparative value
from giving the information*, while more serious omissions on the

* Or, in the case of Fabricius, giving it more correctly.

Bibliographical Notice. 487

part of Prof. Alex. Agassiz are to be found in the absence of any
reference to the work of Gmelin, or to the important notice of Brandt
(Midd. Sib. Reise, ii. p. 34), in which there occur the very striking
words—* Sondern auch mit den von Mertens mitgebrachten Indi-
viduen eines Seeigels, worauf der Echinus chlorocentrotus des Prodro-
mus basirt ist, der also kiinftig als Synonym des neglectus zu citiren
sein wurde ;” and which it is of interest to pit against the very
opposite conclusion of Stimpson (a reference to whose ‘ Invertebrates
of Grand Manan’ is likewise omitted by Prof. Agassiz from his
“‘ synonymy ”)—‘* Among these are found several varieties, perhaps
species, which an extended observation only can elucidate.” Nor
do Messrs. Duncan and Sladen follow the American writer in omit-
ting a notice of Forbes’s reference to the species in the Appendix to
‘ Sutherland’s Journey,’ where that gifted naturalist remarks on the
fact that it is found in Pleistocene beds “ associated with a mollus-
cous fauna in many respects comparable with that of the Arctic
seas.”

We could carry this criticism further, but we gladly refrain: the
lesson that it teaches us is not, however, a very satisfactory one ; and
if these things be done in the green tree, what shall be done in the
dry*?

If a naturalist of first-class eminence afford material for such
criticism, we may justly refuse to take on trust the work of those
whose investigations have not attained, whether rightly or wrongly,
the same vogue ; but we feel bound to point out that, for the species
under discussion, the only points open to criticism in Messrs. Duncan
and Sladen’s synonymy are those which we have thrown into the
subjoined footnote. On the other hand, we cannot but regret that
the present authors have thought it right to follow Miller and
Troschel in the use of the term Asteracanthion, against the use of
which Mr. Norman has already spoken in our pages, and that they have
followed M. Perrier in returning to the quasi-specific names of Linck,
whose work we are by no. means behind the authors in regarding
with the deepest respect. By speaking of Astropecten corniculatus
Linck would indeed seem to be using the binominal method ; but it
is to be noted that his very next form is spoken of as A. echinatus
major ; and M. Perrier, by reviving the former of these terms, finds
himself in opposition to every careful nomenclator since the time
of Diiben and Koren, who, in 1844, taught us to know this
common form by Retzius’s specific appellation of crispatus—a term
we would, with deference, ask to be allowed to retain.

We greatly regret that we have been led to devote so much of
our space to the mere question of nomenclature, and most sincerely
wish it might have been otherwise. We have heard of men silenced
by a “magni nominis umbra ;” zoologists will have to be careful

* May we point out to Messrs. Duncan and Sladen that 1840, not
1841, is the date of Gould’s ‘Invertebrates of Massachusetts’ (1st ed.),
that the ‘Forhandlinger’ in which Sars describes 7. pallidus bears
the date of 1872, and that the full account of Prof. Lovén’s invaluable
‘ Etudes’ might well be referred to ?

488 Miscellaneous.

lest, under the chilling shade of synonymy, they lose the power
which they need in all its fulness to help them solve the more im-
portant problems which, from the sides of embryology, anatomy,
and paleontology, are receiving, if not their solution, yet their due
attention.

The influences of “environment” are carefully noted by our
authors, who are led to think that, in some cases at any rate, “ the
exigencies of arctic existence have acted in retarding the progress
of growth-characters and in the maintenance of the youthful or
more simple form.” Again, they direct attention to the variations
which they have observed in the length of the spinelets of the paxille
of O. papposus, pointing out that extreme shortness is probably the
result of abrasion, and consequently depends on the nature of the
locality. ‘*Thus a starfish inhabiting the comparative calms of
deep water would be subject to much less friction than one fre-
quenting a littoral district or amongst pebbly shingle.”

From the point of view of the zoological student we desire, if we
may be allowed, to congratulate the authors on the conclusion of a
work which will be to them a source of pardonable pride, and our-
selves on a monograph which sufficiently proves that there are in
England two naturalists, at any rate, to whom a valuable collection
of Echinodermata may very safely be intrusted for description.

MISCELLANEOUS.

Discovery of a Fossil Bird in the Jurassic of Wyoming.
By O. C. Manrsz.

Tue oldest birds hitherto known from American strata are the
toothed forms (Odontornithes), from the Middle Cretaceous deposits
on the eastern flanks of the Rocky Mountains. In Europe, three
specimens of the genus Archewopteryx have been found in the Juras-
sic, but from other formations no remains of this class have been
brought to light. The writer has made a careful search for fossil
birds in the Jurassic beds of the West, and has been rewarded by
the discovery of various remains, some of. which are sufficiently
characteristic for determination. The most important of these
specimens is described below.

Laopteryx priscus, gen, et sp. nov.

The type specimen of the present species is the posterior portion
of the skull, which indicates a bird rather larger than a blue heron
(Ardea herodias). The brain-case is so broken that its inner sur-
face is disclosed ; and in other respects the skull is distorted ; but it
shows characteristic features. The bones of the skull are pneu-
matic. The occipital condyle is sessile, hemispherical in form, flat-
tened, and slightly grooved above. ‘There is no trace of a posterior
groove. The foramen magnum is nearly circular, and small in pro-

Miscellaneous. 489

portion to the condyle; its plane coincides with that of the occiput,
which is slightly inclined forward. The bones around the foramen
are firmly coossified ; but the supraoccipital has separated somewhat
from the squamosals and parietals. Other sutures are more or less
open. On each side of the condyle, and somewhat below its lower
margin, there is a deep rounded cavity, perforated by a pneumatic
foramen.

The cavity for the reception of the head of the quadrate is oval
in outline ; and its longer axis, if continued backward, would touch
the outer margin of the occipital condyle. This cavity indicates
that the quadrate had an undivided head. The brain-case was com-
paratively small; but the hemispheres were well developed ; they
were separated above by a sharp mesial crest of bone. A low ridge
divided the hemispheres from the optic lobes, which were pro-
minent.

The following measurements indicate the size of the specimen :—

millim.

Width of skull across occiput (approximate).... 24
Transverse diameter of occipital condyle ...... 5)
Worbical diameter oti) srt ttc te tie ec eranarennccrees 4
Wider obitoramen magnum) 0. ...7 Wars nee aces 5
GIO bia ary is cit ye Hoke eiane wieodeae eater wa esters 6
Distance from occipital condyle to top of supra-

TELEFON LEI rete Coe eae cea Ae HP UR MNS AES) 11

In its main features the present specimen resembles the skull of
the Ratitee more than that of any existing birds. Other parts of
the skeleton will doubtless show still stronger reptilian characters.

In the matrix attached to this skull a single tooth was found,
which most resembles the teeth of birds, especially those of Ichthy-
ornis. Itis probablethat Laopteryx possessed teeth and also biconcave
vertebree.

The specimen here described, and others apparently of the same
species, were found in the Upper Jurassic of Wyoming Territory, in
the horizon of the Atlantosaurus-beds.

Yale College, New Haven, March 18, 1881.

Regeneration of lost Parts in the Squid (Loligo Pealei).
By A. E. Verriit.

Ihave observed in this species, as well as in Ommastrephes ille-
cebrosus, numerous instances in which some of the suckers have been
torn off and afterwards reproduced. In such examples new suckers
of various sizes, from those that are very minute up to those that
are but little smaller than the normal ones, can often be found seat-
tered among the latter, on the same individual. It seems to me
possible that some of the specimens having the suckers on the tenta-
cular arms unusually small, may have reproduced all those suckers,
or, still more likely, the entire arm.

I have seen specimens of this species, and also of O. illecebrosus,

490 Miscellaneous.

which, after having lost the tip, or even the distal half of one or
more of the sessile arms, have more or less completely reproduced
the lost parts. In such cases the restored portion is often more
slender and has smaller suckers than the normal arms; and where
the old part joins the new there is often an abrupt change in size.
Probably this difference would wholly disappear after a longer
time.

An unquestionable and most remarkable example of the repro-
duction of several entire arms occurs in a small specimen taken off
Newport, R. I., Aug. 1880. This has the mantle 70 millim. long,
dorsal arms 22 millim., third pair of arms 30 millim. The three
upper pairs of arms are perfectly normal; but both the tentacular
and both the ventral arms have evidently been entirely lost and then
reproduced from the very base. These four arms are now nearly
perfect in form, but are scarcely half their normal size on the left
side, and still smaller on the right side. The left tentacular arm is
only 24 millim. long, and very slender, but it has the normal pro-
portion of club, and the suckers, though well formed, are diminutive,
and those of the two median rows are scarcely larger than the lateral
ones and delicately denticulated. The right tentacular arm is less
than half as long (12 millim.), being of ‘about the same length as
the restored ventral one of the same side; it is also very slender,
and its suckers very minute and soft, in four equal rows. The right
ventral arm is only 14 millim. long, the left one 15 millim. long ;
both are provided with very small but otherwise normal suckers.

In another specimen from Vineyard Sound, a female, with the
mantle about 150 millim. long, one of the tentacular arms had lost
its club; but the wound had healed, and a new club was in process
of formation. This new club is represented by a small tapering
acute process, starting out obliquely from the stump and having a
sigmoid curvature; its inner surface is covered with very minute
suckers. ‘The other arms are normal.

It seems probable that some of the normal European species of
Loligo that have been based on the smaller size of the tentacular
arms or of the suckers are due to similar instances of regeneration
of these parts — Amer. Journ. Sci., April 1881.

Note on Wardichthys cyclosoma, 7raq. By Tuomas Srocx, Natural-
History Department, Museum of Science and Art, Edinburgh *.

A small fish was described and figured by Dr. R. H. Traquair
in the ‘Annals’ for April 1875, vol. xv. p. 262, pl. xvi. figs. 1-5
in a paper entitled “On some Fossil Fishes from the Neigh-
bourhood of Edinburgh.” The description was drawn up from
a single specimen obtained by him from the Wardie Shales about
fifteen years previously. A new genus was established for its
reception under the name of Wardichthys, so called in honour
of Mr. John Ward, F.G.S., of Longton, Staffordshire, a well-

* Read before the Edinburgh Geological Society, April 1881.

Miscellaneous. 491

known collector of fossil fishes, and an author of repute in de-
partments of geology and paleontology, and not with reference
to the locality where it was found. The specific name cyclosoma
was given in allusion to its nearly circularshape. The original speci-
men, though not entire, was very nearly so, being, however, deficient
in the dentition and the tail. This interesting fish has remained
unique until the present time. I am able, however, as a part of the
good fortune which has attended my work upon the Wardie Shales,
to announce the occurrence of a second specimen. It lay high upon
the shore, apparently cast there by a lad. Like the original speci-
men, it occurs in a nodule, of which, however, only a fragment (and
the less important fragment) has been recovered. A careful search
was instituted for the remainder, but without success; and it is to
be feared that the counterpart is irrecoverably lost. That an inter-
val of about twenty years should have elapsed between the occur-
rence of the first and second examples shows that it is a fish of great
rarity. Its rediscovery, however, holds out the hope that other
specimens will be found if the bed (for it appears each time to have
occurred in a particular bed of the Wardie series) be at intervals
carefully searched.

The specimen here noted unfortunately throws very little addi-
tional light upon the structure of the fish. The dentition and the
tail remain, as before, unknown. A portion of the flank with about
ten series of scales is nearly all that has been preserved. The shape
of the scales and their superficial ornament are very well shown in
impression, the latter consisting of the characteristic tuberculation,
which makes this an easily identifiable fish. The weathering action
of the sea has been favourable to the disclosure of these characters,
The configuration and sculpture of the scales are not often so well
seen in fishes preserved in nodules. The chances are, when the nodule
is violently fractured by the hammer and chisel, that the halves sepa-
rate in such a way that only the undersides of the scales are visible.
Sometimes the plane of fracture lies right through the scales; and
it is difficult in such cases to get at their shape or sculpture by the
employment of artificial aids. By the more gradual process of
weathering the nodule almost invariably splits along the plane most
favourable to the display of the superficial characters. The
writer has succeeded in obtaining for his collection several frag-
ments or entire specimens which have been preserved in this way.
Where the weathering has proceeded far enough, as it has done in
several cases, the ornament bas been exquisitely brought out; and
in several large fragments or entire specimens of Rhadinichthys and
Cosmoptychius there is very little left in this respect to desire.
From these natural moulds plaster-casts may be easily obtained.
Other specimens only await the application of acid to bring out
their characters in an equally distinct fashion.

The possession of a plaster cast of the type specimen, due to the
kindness of Dr. Traquair, places the accuracy of the generic identi-
fication beyond a doubt; and though the cast does not show the

492 Miscellaneous.

ornament quite so well as might be desired, the agreement in this
character between my specimen and the original figures and descrip-
tion is such as to make the specific determination also a matter of
certainty.

On the Anatomy of Pyrosoma. By M. L. Jorrr.

Growth of the Colony.—All the observers who have paid attention
to Pyrosoma have remarked that the closed extremity of the colony
is occupied by four ascidiozoids. According to Savigny and Le-
sueur these are the four primitive individuals developed in the egg
itself. As regards Pyrosoma elegans, in which, as stated by Kefer-
stein and Ehlers, the endostyle is on the side of the common orifice,
I cannot say how this may be; but in Pyrosoma giganteum things
are different. Panceri has already remarked that the terminal
ascidiazoids are destitute of those muscular cords which terminate
at the periphery of the common cloacal aperture, and which are
possessed by the primitive ascidiozoids. Moreover, in P. giganteum,
as in P. atlanticum, the endostyle, and consequently the germinative
point, are turned in the direction of the closed extremity. It follows
that an animal placed at a given moment in the immediate vicinity
of that extremity is necessarily separated therefrom some time after-
wards by the three or four buds which it has directly produced, and,
still later, not only by these but by their derivatives.

When we examine the closed extremities of several quite adult
colonies, measuring several centimetres in length, we see that the
four individuals forming the terminal whorl are in one specimen
perfectly adult and beginning to breed, in another young and still
furnished with an elxoblast, elsewhere, again, in the condition of
simple buds, forming part of the stolon, and not yet detached from
the parent. In a word, the terminal whorl of one colony does not
resemble that of another colony of the same age, which would not
be the case if this whorl were the primitive whorl. From these facts
we see that if we desire to find the four primitive individuals, it is
not at the closed extremity that we must seek for them, but at the
open extremity. They are, in fact, incessantly pushed away from
the former by the whole of their progeny.

Nervous System.—On the posterior median line there exists a
nerve which traverses it throughout nearly its whole extent. — It
does not originate directly from the ganglion, but from a train of
cells which seem to prolong the latter backwards, runs above the
base of the languets, and appears to act upon a bundle of muscular
fibres, which, passing behind the cesophagus, traverses the cloaca
skirting the subintestinal peritoneal lamina.

In the four primitive ascidiozoids the two thick lateral posterior
nerves terminate at the two muscular cords which start from the
two sides of the cesophagus and run to the common cloaca. In the
ordinary individuals there only exists one of these muscular cords ;
it is median, and morphologically represents the two cords of the
primitive individuals ; for it receives both the nerves.

Miscellaneous. 493

Colonial Muscular System.—Besides the muscular cords just
mentioned, there exist in the common transparent substance mus-
cular bands which are by no means so well defined, and which
unite the individuals to one another in the longitudinal direction.
Panceri has described their course with considerable exactitude, but
without knowing their origin. These muscular bundles originate
in the transparent substance itself, in which we see them diverging
at certain points; and they seem to be formed at the expense
of the actual cells of this substance modified in a peculiar manner.
The normal constituent cells of the common transparent substance
are stellate.

On the Elceoblast—Salensky has endeavoured to show that the
elezohlast of the Salpw may be the altered representative of the tail
of the Appendicularie and the tadpole-larve of Ascidians. As re-
gards Pyrosoma, this hypothesis is inadmissible. The elzoblast, in
fact, acquires in Pyrosoma the form of a ring surrounding the ger-
minative extremity of the endostyle. It is therefore no longer a
simple organ as in the Salpe. By its form and relations it cannot
represent the tail of the Appendicularie.

Its function appears rather to be physiological. It enlarges so
long as the bud remains attached to the parent, and diminishes from
the moment when separation is effected, until that in which the
young ascidiozoid, being brought into communication with the outer
world, can live on its own account; it then disappears altogether.
I do not think it plays any part, even a subsidiary one, in gemma-
tion. In fact, it has completely disappeared at the period when
gemmation has only just commenced. In all probability it acts as
a reserve for the young animal at the time when its nutrition is
still null or insufficient.

On the Alternation of Generations.—If we desire to bring toge-
ther as much as possible what takes place in the Salpe and what
occurs in Pyrosoma, we must take as equivalent terms, on the one
hand, the agamic Salpa, and, on the other, the Cyathozoid. We
have then, in the two cases, two asexual individuals producing by
gemmation a whole series of individuals which differ from them in
form, are alike, and sexual. The whole difference then lies in the
fact that, while the sexual Salpe cannot bud, the sexual Pyroso-
mata are capable of producing by gemmation other individuals, but
similar to themselves.—Comptes Rendus, April 25, 1881, p. 1018.

Investigation of certain Points in the Anatomy of Sternaspis
scutata.—Second Note*. By M. Max. Rietscu.
* The vascular system of Sternaspis is very complex and interest-
ing; it may be summed up by saying that it includes a dorsal
vessel and a ventral system.
The dorsal vessel follows the stomach, upon which it rests, in all
its contours ; it is much narrower behind than in front of the bran-

* See ‘ Annals,’ May 1881, p. 426.
Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 5. Vol. vii. 36

494 Miscellaneous.

chial anastomosis; this latter portion, which is at first wide,
diminishes gradually to the commencement of the stomach; beyond
this point it floats in the general cavity, but remains parallel to the
cesophagus, to which it is attached by a few branches; finally it
attaches itself to the pharynx, where it divides into numerous
branches, the two principal ones forming a fork.

The ventral vessel has numerous roots at the ventral surface of
the pharynx and the anterior sete; it travels parallel to the ner-
yous cord, to which it sends several branches, and emits numerous
branches to the segmental organs, which will be mentioned further
on; then, towards the middle of the body, it gives origin (1) to a
vessel which follows forward the posterior intestine, (2) to two
other trunks, the most voluminous of which soon divides into three.
Thus are formed the four sexual vessels, upon which the generative
organs originate. Three of them run along different portions of the
stomach, the fourth along the recurrent intestine ; they give origin
to very numerous branches, which divide repeatedly and generally
dichotomously, and finally open into a sinus lodged beneath the
muscular layer of the intestine and against the vibratile furrow.
The latter, in the stomachal region, is diametrically opposite to the
dorsal vessel, which communicates with this longitudinal sinus by a
very complex system of capillary canals, destitute of proper mem-
brane, and placed between the muscular layer and the epithelium.
The whole intestine is thus furnished with avery rich system of
blood-sinuses, communicating with both the dorsal vessel and the
ventral vessel along the pharynx, cesophagus, and stomach, but
having direct connexion with the ventral vessel alone through all
the rest of the intestine ; there are, however, vascular anastomoses
between the different intestinal regions.

Further back the ventral vessel emits numerous symmetrical
branches, which run to the integuments, the posterior sete, and the
terminal intestine ; some of them terminate posteriorly at regular
racemes of ampulle or pyriform bodies with thin walls placed be-
tween the shield and the rectum, and evidently forming a reservoir
for the blood when that fluid is driven backward by the invagina-
tion and contraction of the anterior region of the body. I have
been unable to detect any communication between these racemes
and the branchiz. The circulation seems to me to be due princi-
pally to the general movements of the body.

The generative organs are of the same form in the two sexes.
The external appendages are followed by two oviducts or sperm-
ducts, which run backward towards the median line, where they
unite and at the same time adhere to the ventral vessel ; each of them
is accompanied by a sanguiferous branch, which is given off by this
same ventral vessel, and which only quits them at the skin; from
their point of convergence start the four lobes of the ovary or testis.
These lobes are slowly formed along the four sexual vessels already
mentioned ; they possess each a proper wall, which is directly con-
tinuous with that of the oviducts, and in which the corresponding
sexual vessel is enclosed. The ova originate upon the wall of this

Miscellaneous. 495

vessel, which is turned towards the interior of the ovary, and at the
expense of the epithelial cells forming that wall, to which, at first,
they remain attached by a peduncle; they afterwards become de-
tached, descend along the lobe, and then arrive in the oviducts ;
thus they never fall into the general cavity. The sexual lobes are
of very unequal length in the same animal, and unequally developed
in different individuals according to the age; in Sternaspides of
large size, especially in the males, they present short secondary lobes
along the principal branches of the sexual vessel.

In front of the oviducts and involved in the folds of the ceso-
phagus, there exist two voluminous segmental organs (“ four-
horned organs ” of Miller), of a brown colour, with delicate walls,
irregularly lobed, and each furnished with an excretory canal,
which becomes much narrowed towards the integuments, and opens
outwards by an extremely small pore. The two symmetrical pores
are placed in front of the genitalappendages. I have not yet succeeded
in detecting vibratile funnels in connexion with these organs; they
present an internal epithelium and an external peritoneal layer,
and between the two a rich network of often capillary blood-
sinuses,

Hitherto I have only been able to observe the first phases of the
embryogeny as the result of artificial fecundations. The ova are
about 0°15 millim. in diameter ; within their chorion, which usually
retains a trace of the pedicle, they present a granular vitelline mass
with an eccentric nucleus and a nucleolus; this nucleus disappears
in the mature ova. The spermatozoids are from 0°085 to 0°10 millim.
in length; the head is elongated, and occupies about one sixth of
the entire length. The segmentation is complete; it commences
about five hours after fecundation. Even the first two spheres are
unequal; and the difference becomes rapidly more accentuated be-
tween the small hyaline evolutive cells and the large, dark, granular
nutritive cells ; the former quickly envelop the latter, and thus form
a planula by epibolism. In four-and-twenty hours I found in the
glasses pelagic larvee composed of an ectoderm with small elements,
and an endoderm formed of a few large brownish spheres; they
appear to be destitute of both mouth and anus. These larve are
covered with vibratile cilia, except in the posterior region; at their
cephalic pole they beara plume of longer cilia. But the pelagic life .
hardly lasts longer than from thirty-six to forty hours; the larvee
fall to the bottom of the water, lose their cilia, become elongated,
and assume a vermiform appearance and movements. The evolu-
tion is afterwards very slow in the glasses; at the end of a month
the larve, although considerably more elongated, present a digestive
tube formed of large cells and destitute of mouth and anus; its
cavity is filled with a liquid which bears numerous granules, and
which the movements of the body cause to travel from before back-
ward or vice versd; in the posterior region and on the dorsal (?) surface
we may distinguish a small ectodermal appendage bent into a hook,
which may be the first rudiment of the branchiz.—Comptes Rendus,
May 2, 1881, p. 1066.

496

INDEX to VOL. VII.

ACANTHELLA, new species of, 580.

Acanthostepheia, new species of, 47.

Acanthotrochus, description of the
new genus, 207.

Acineta, new species of, 214, 279.

Aciptilia, new species of, 408.

Adirosaurus Suessii, description of,
267.

fElurosaurus felinus, description of,

Agaricus, new species of, 124.

Allagecrinus, description and struc-
ture of the new genus, 281.

Amathillopsis, new species of, 48.

Amorphina, new species of, 368.

Analcis, new species of, 306.

Anemosa, new species of, 527.

Anisonema, new species of, 218,

Ankyroderma, description of the new
genus, 208.

Anomorhynchus, description of the
new genus, 50, 264,

Apamea, new species of, 322.

Aporodes, new species of, 326.

Apostolidés, N., on the circulation
and respiration of the Ophiuride,
355,

Apsarasa, new species of, 37.

Araneida, on the formation of the
blastoderm in the, 277.

Architeuthis, on the occurrence of,
351.

Argynnis, new species of, 52, 134.

Argyresthia, new species of, 405.

Aspidostoma, characters of the new
genus, 159.

Astroconia Granti, observations on,
481.

Axos, new species of, 582.

Barisses, characters of the new
genus, 506,

Bate, C. S., on Synaxes, 220.

Bears of the cavern of Lherm, on
the, 428.

Beddard, F. E., on the histology of
the Pedicellariz and of the mus-
cles of Echinus sphera, 275.

Berkeley, Rev. M. J., on British
Fungi, 125.

Bird, on a fossil, from the Jurassic,
488.

Blabophanes, new species of, 396.

Blanford, W. T., on Mus arianus, 162.

Bogdanow, M., on the Pteroclide,
425,

Books, new :—Balfour’s Compara-
tive Embryology, 59; Morse’s
Shell-Mounds of Omori, 61; Giin-
ther’s Introduction to the Study
of Fishes, 63; Nicholson and
Etheridge’s Silurian Fossils of the
Girvan district, 205; Hinde’s Fos-
sil Sponge-Spicules from the
Upper Chalk, 268; Moller’s Fos-
sil Foraminifera of the Carbonife-
rous Limestone, 270; Water-
house’s Aid to the Identification
of Insects, 272; Legge’s History
of the Birds of Ceylon, 344;
Brady's Monograph of the British
Copepoda, 345; Duncan and Sla-
den’s Echinodermata of the Arctic
Sea, 485,

Boreophila, new species of, 325,
Boulenger, G, A., on a new species
of Frog from Madagascar, 360.
Brachysiderus, description of the

new genus, 409,

Brandt, E., on the comparative ana-
tomy of the nervous system in the
different orders of Insects, 71.

Broome, C. E., on British Fungi, 1238.

Bryozoa, on fossil Chilostomatous,
484.

Buprestide, new, 457, 462.

Butler, A. G., on new Lepidoptera,
31, 132, 228, 317, 392.

Callichthys fasciatus, on the habits
of, 73.

Camptoloma, new species of, 35.

Carbonnier, M., on the habits of
Callichthys fasciatus, 73.

Carcinological fauna of the Carib-
bean Sea and Gulf of Mexico, on
the, 312.

Carpenter, P. H., on the British
Paleozoic Crinoids, 281; on two
new Crinoids from the Upper
Chalk, 338.

Carter, H. J., on the history and
classification of the known species
of Spongilla, 77; on Spongilla
cinerea, 263; on the Kunker for-
mation of the alluvium in India,

INDEX.

308; on specimens dredged up
from the Gulf of Manaar and from
Bass’s Straits, 361.

Catoxantha, new species of, 457.

Cephalopoda, on the homologies of
the yelk-sac of the, 434.

Cetoniide, on a new cornuted species
of, 411.

Chalcotenia, new species of, 462.

Chameleon, new species of, 358.

Chiloides, characters of the new
genus, 392.

Cholus, new species of, 44,

Chrestotes, new species of, 401.

Chrysoclista, new species of, 406.

Cliona, new species of, 370.

Coccotrichum, new species of, 131.

Celenterata of Franz-Josef Land,
on, 442,

Coleoptera, new, 38, 298, 299, 408,
410, 411, 457, 462; notes upon
the food of predaceous, 548.

Coleotrichus, new species of, 52.

Colias, new species of, 135.

Colonial organisms, on the origin of,
413.

Coniocylis, characters of the new
genus, 248,

Conotrachelus, new species of, 303.
Corals, on some new or imperfectly-
known species of Devonian, 14.

Cothurnia, new species of, 210.

Crinoids, on two new, from the
Upper Chalk, 338.

Crustacea from Franz-Josef Land,
on the, 45; of the Caribbean Sea
and Gulf of Mexico, on the, 312;
new, 220.

Cryptosporium, new species of, 129.

Curculionids, new Neotropical, 38,
299,

Cydianirus, new species of, 300.

Cymus, new species of, 56.

Cyphella, new species of, 129.

Cyphorhynchus, new species of,
304.

Cyttarocylis, characters of the new
genus, 248.

Dacnirus, characters of the new
genus, 300.

Daimio, new species of, 140.

Danielssen, D. C., on some Arctic
Holothurida, 206.

Davis, J. W., on Palzeospinax pris-
cus, 429,

Deilephila, new species of, 317.

Depressaria, new species of, 396.

497

Detmers, Prof., on a pathogenic
Schizophyte, 471.

Diachoris, new species of, 157.

Diastoporide, on the, 336.

Dictyocylindrus, new species of, 377.

Dictyocysta, new species of, 249.

Dionychus, new species of, 303.

Diptera, on the histolysis of the mus-
cles of the larva during the post-
embryonic development of the, 352.

Discodermia, new species of, 372.

Distant, W. L., on a new Longicorn
beetle from Java, 298,

Dredging, results of, off the south
coast of new England, 143,

Dryops, new species of, 410.

Dublin Microscopical Club, proceed-
ings of the, 338, 417.

Duncan, Prof. P. M., on the coralli-
ferous series of Sind, 337.

Dysidea Kirkii, observations on, 374.

Echinonema, new species of, 378.

Kchinus spheera, on the histology of
the pedicellariz and of the muscles
of, 275.

Edesius, characters of the new genus,
305.

Eels, on the male, compared with
the females, 386,

Elwes, H. J., on Japanese Butter-
flies, 464,

Emmeria, characters of the new
genus, 42,

Endophyllum, new species of, 14.

Ephestia, new species of, 332.

Epicaulidium, characters of the new
genus, 156.
Estigmena, new species of, 461,
Etheridge, R., on a new species of
Trigonia from the Purbeck, 267.
Etheridge, R., Jun., on the opercula
(?) of Gasteropoda from the Car-
boniferous limestone, 25; on Alla-
gecrinus, 281,

Euperissus, characters of the new
genus, 401.

Euphoberia, on the structure and
affinities of, 437.

Eupithecia, new species of, 320.

EKutzenia, new species of, 460.

Everett, A. H., on the guliga of
Borneo, 274.

Exorides, characters of the new
genus, 45.

Favosites punctatus, description and
observations on, 19; new species
of, 20.

498 INDEX.

Fenestellide, on the Carboniferous,
336,

Filhol, H., on the bears of the ca-
vern of Lherm, 428.

Fishes, on the changes of form in,
during their growth and develop-
ment, 1, 107; on the organs of
taste in the osseous, 423,

Flints, on the origin and formation
of, 162.

Fol, Prof. H., on the Tintinnodea,
237. ,

Foraminifera, new, from the Gulf of
Manaar, 563.

Fungi, notices of British, 123.

Furtado, F. d’A., on Viquesnelia
atlantica, 250.

Gasteropoda, on some fossil opercula
of, 25.

Gaudry, A., on a highly organized
reptile from the Permian, 69.

Geddes, P., on the histology of the
pedicellariz and of the muscles of
Kchinus sphera, 275.

Geological Society, proceedings of
the, 266, 336, 481.

Germ-theory, observations on the,
475.

Glceosporium, new species of, 129.

Gracilaria, new species of, 404.

Guliga of Borneo, on the, 274.

Giinther, Dr. A., on some new rep-
tiles from Madagascar, 357.

Gymnosporium, new species of,
129.

Halichondria, new species of, 369.

Halisarca, new species of, 866, 375.

Heliothis, new species of, 324.

Hemipagurus,observatiuns on the
new genus, 145.

Hemiptera, new, 52.

Hincks, Rey. T., on marine Polyzoa,
147.

Hircinia, new species of, 366.

Holothurida, on new Arctic, 206.

Hypnideus, characters of the new
genus, 301.

Hyposmochoma, characters of the
new genus, 399.

Infusoria, on new or little-known,
209, 237, 279.

Insects, on the comparative anatomy
of the nervous system in the diffe-
rent orders of, 71; on the relation
of Devonian, to later and existing
types, 255.

Ithura, new species of, 308.

Joliet, L., on the anatomy of Pyro-
soma, 492.

Jourdan, E., on the organs of taste
in the osseous Fishes, 423.

Kolga, description of the new genus,
206.

Koren, J., on some Arctic Holothu-
rida, 206.

Kunker formation of the alluvium
in India, on the, 308.

Lankester, Prof. EK. R., on the bi-
lateral characters of the renal
organ of the Prosobranchia, and
on the homologies of the yelk-sac
of Cephalopoda, 452.

Laopteryx, description of the new
genus, 488.

Lataste, F., on a new genus of Ro-
dents, 71.

Latrunculia, new species of, 380.

Laverna, new species of, 404.

Lepidoptera, new, 31, 64, 182, 317,
333, 392; of the Isle of Askold,
on the, 228; on Japanese, 464.

Leptothyrium, new species of, 129.

Lethe, new species of, 133.

Liophis, new species of, 359.

Logeeus, description of the new
genus, 458,

Loligo Pealei, on the regeneration of
lost parts in, 489.

Liitken, Dr. C. F., on the changes of
form in fishes during their growth
and development, 1, 107.

Macé, E., on a new form of segmen-
tal organ in the Trematodes, 354.

Marsh, O. C., on a fossil bird from
the Jurassic, 488.

Mecyna, new species of, 328.

Megacriodes, new species of, 408.

Megalostylus, new species of, 42.

Membranipora, new species of, 147.

Mereschkowsky, C., on some new or
little-known Infusoria, 209.

Mesocrinus, on the new genus, 338.

Meyenia, characters of the new
genus, 90,

Miers, EK. J., on Crustacea and Pyc-
nogonida from Franz-Josef Land,
45; on Anomorhynchus Smithii,
264.

Milleria, new species of, 35,

Milne-Edwards, A., on the Carcino-
logical fauna of the Caribbean Sea
and Gulf of Mexico, 312.

Monotospora, new species of, 130.

Morimus, new species of, 459,

INDEX.

Mus, new species of, 24, 162.

Mycteristes, new species of, 411.

Myriopoda, on the structure of some
fossil, 437.

Naupactus, new species of, 39.

. Neope, new species of, 133.

Nicéville, L. de, on Papilio nebu-
losus, 585.

Nicholson, Dr. H. A., on some new
species of corals, 14.

Nysius, new species of, 53.

Oberthiir, C., on the Lepidoptera of
the Isle of Askold, 228.

Ochetina, characters of the new
genus, 302,

Opercula (?) of small Gasteropoda
from the Carboniferous limestone,
descriptions of, 25,

Ophiuride, on the circulation and
respiration of the, 555,

Owen, Prof., on the pelvis of Platy-
podosaurus robustus, 483; on a
new genus of the order Therio-
dontia, 483.

Pachypora, new species of, 18.

Pachyteria, new species of, 298.

Pachyuromys, description of the new
genus, 71.

Palzeospinax priscus, observations on,
429,

Pamphila, new species of, 140,

Pandeletius, new species of, 38.

Papilio, new species of, 33, 64,
139; nebulosus, note on, 385.

Parantirrhcea, description of the new
genus, 339.

Parmula, characters of the new
genus, 98.

Parona, Dr. C., on Acineta dibdal-
teria, 279.

Pascoe, F. P., on new Neotropical
Curculionids, 38, 299.

Pedicellarize of Echinus spheera, on
the histology of the, 275.

Penicillium, new species of, 130,

Perrier, E., on the starfishes from the
Gulf of Mexico, 272.

Phanasora, characters of the new
genus, 38.

Phillips, J. A., on the occurrence of
the remains of recent Plants in
brown iron-ore, 266.

Phoxopteris, new species of, 395.

Plants, on some remains of recent,
in brown iron-ore, 266.

Platypodosaurus robustus, on the
pelvis of, 485.

499

Ploiariodes, characters of the new
genus, 59.

Poemenesperus, new species of, 409.

Polyactis, new species of, 131.

Polyzoa, contributions towards a
general history of the marine, 147;
of Franz-Josef Land, on the, 442.

Prosobranchia, on the renal organ of,
432.

Proteopteryx, new species of, 393,

Pseudoxyrhopus, new species of,
359,

Pteroclidee, on the position of the,
425,

Pycnogonida from Franz-Jozef Land,
on the, 49.

Pyropus, new species of, 307,

Pyrosoma, on the anatomy of, 492.

Ramularia, new species of, 130.

Rana, new species of, 360.

Reptile, on a new Permian, 69,

Reptilian Fauna of Madagascar, ad-
ditions to the, 357.

Rhigus, new species of, 299.

Ridley, S. O., on the Polyzoa, Coe-
lenterata, and Sponges of Franz-
Josef Land, 442. F

Rietsch, M., on the anatomy of
Sternaspis scutata, 426, 493.

Robin, C., on the male Eels com-
pared with the female, 386,

Rotalia, new species of, 363.

Royal Institution, proceedings of
the, 413.

Sabatier, H., on the formation of the
blastoderm in the Araneida, 277.
Sauvage, H. E., on the existence of
a reptile of the Ophidian type in
the beds with Ostrea columba, of

the Charente, 205,

Schizophyte, on a pathogenic, 471.

Schizoporella, new species of, 158.

Scoparia, new species of, 330.

Scotosia, new species of, 319,

Scudder, 8. H., on the relation of
Devonian Insects to later and ex-
isting types, 255; on the struc-
ture and affinities of Euphoberia,
457.

Seeley, Prof. H. G., on remains of
a small Lizard from the Neoco-
mian rocks near Trieste, 267.

Shrubsole, G. W., on the Carboni-
ferous Fenestellide, 336.

Simoliophis, observations on the
new genus, 205.

Smith, S. L, on results of recent

500

dredging off the south coast of
New England, 145.

Smittia nitida, observations on, 159.

Sollas, Prof. W. J., on the occurrence
of sponge-spicules in chert, 141;
on Astroconia Granti, 481.

Speelotis, new species of, 521.

Spheria, new species of, 131.

Spolia atlantica, 1, 107.

Sponge-growth, on siliceous, in the
Cretaceous ocean, 26].

Sponge-spicules, on the occurrence
of, in chert, 141.

Spongida from the Gulf of Manaar,
new, 366; of Franz-Josef Land,
on, 442,

Spongilla, on the history and classi-
fication of the known species of,
77, 263.

Starfishes from the Gulf of Mexico,
on the, 272.

Steganoptycha, new species of, 394.

Steletta, new species of, 371.

Stereorachis dominans, description
of, 69.

Sternaspis scutata, on the anatomy
of, 426, 493.

Stigmodera, new species of, 463.

Striatopora, new species of, 17.

Stock, T., on Wardichthys cyclo-
soma, 490.

Stceberhinus, characters of the new
genus, 402.

Synaxes, description of the new
genus, 220,

Swine-plague, on the, 471.

Talpa, new species of, 469,

Thecla, new species of, 34.

Thomas, O., on anew species of Mus,
24; on a new species of Mole, 469.

Tintinnodea, on the structure and
classification of the, 237.

Tintinnus, new species of, 211, 247. '

Trematodes, on a new form of seg-
mental organ in the, 354.

Trigonia, new species of, 267.

Trisuloides, characters of the new
genus, 36.

Trochilia, new species of, 213.

INDEX.

bob

Tubella, characters of the genus, 96.

Tubulodigitus, new species of, 367.

Urceolus, new species of, 219,

Uredo, new species of, 130.

Urocystis prolifera, observations on,
75.

Uruguaya, characters of the new

genus, 100.

Verrili, A. E., on the Giant Squid,
351; on the regeneration of lost
parts in the Squid, 489,

Viallanes, H., on the histolysis of
the muscles of the larva during
the postembryonic development of
the Diptera, 352.

Villot, A., on anew form of Vesicu-
lar Worm, 75.

Vincularia abyssicola, note on, 155,

Vine, G. R., on the Diastoporide,
336.

Viquesnelia atlantica, on the anatomy
of, 250.

Wallich, Dr., on the origin and for-
mation of the Flints of the Upper
Chalk, 162; on siliceous Sponge-
growth in the Cretaceous ocean,
261.

Wardichthys cyclosoma, note on,
490

Waterhouse, C. O., on two new
Longicorn Coleoptera and a new
genus of Dynastide, 408; on a
new species of Dryops, 410; on
Indian Coleoptera, 452; on Aus-
tralian Buprestide, 462.

Waters, A. W., on fossil Chilosto-
matous Bryozoa, 484.

Webster, F. M., on the food of pre-
daceous Beetles, 348.

White, Dr. F. B., on new species of
Hetetopterous Hemiptera, 52.

Wilson, Dr. A., on the origin of co-
lonial organisms, 415,

Wood-Mason, J., on a new species
of Papilio, 64; on Parantirrhcea
Marshalli, 333; on a new species
of Cetoniide, 411.

Ypthima, new species of, 154.

Zygodesmus, new species of, 130.

END OF THE SEVENTH VOLUME.

PRINTED BY TAYLOR AND FRANCIS,
RED LION COURT, FLEET STREET.

Ann & Mag. Nat. Hust. 5. 9.Vob. 4. LUM.

Mintern Bros, imp.

H.A.N. del.

Ann & Mag. Nat. Hist. §.5.Vol.7. PUI.

C.Berjeau, del et lith. Mintern Bro's, imp.

Ann.&.Mag Nat: Hist: 85, Vol. PLIL

G.Jarman sc.

Anru& Mag Net: Hist.S§.5.Vol.7 PLlv.

Edwim Wilson.del et hth

Mintern Bros amp.
NEW ASIATIC BUTTERFLIES

fol

7. PLV-

| bere

O}//

Ann & Mag Nat Hist. S51

}
a

,
ft
it
|
I

}

Ann & Mag. Nat. Hist. S 5 Vol. 7 PLVI

H.1.C del.

Mintern Bros. hth

oe
z .
1

Anrv.& Mag Nat.Hist. S 5 Vol.7.PLVI.

: Edwin Wilson del et hth

Mintern Bros-amp

Anrv.& Mag. Nat. Hust. S32: Var LOWE

Mintern. Bros. hth.

Pee Geaslos | dell

Anru& Meg, Nat. Hist.S 5 Vol.7 PUL.

T.Hincks,.del. Mintern Bros. lth.

Ann & Mag. Nat Mlist. S.5. Vol.7.PUX.

Mintern Bros imp.

T Hincks del,

“.
>

= =

illite 2

G.C.Wallich del.

Ann.&Maq.Nat. sit. §.5.Vol. 7. PUA:

Nirrter-n

.Hist.S.5.Vol.7.PU.X

Ann.dé Mag Nat

(22

ao
oo

sil

so
=

a
=
=e

so
o

‘.

Mintern Bros.imp

Ann. & Maq.Nat.Hust.5.5.Vol.7. Pu. Xl.

Mintern Bros. hth.

Ann. & Mag.Nat.Hist.§. 5. Vol. 7.PUXIV.

4
}

SY I) ees
Uf
i} ae y

me
Uf

if } ( ff
: fail yf

VT
UL

si Spence Bate,del. — Mintern Bros. lith.

Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. 8.5. Vol. 7. PUXV.

C.Berjeau. del et lith.
ALLAGECRINUS AUSTINII. £.& Ge

Mintern Bros ,imp

Ann & Mag. Nat.Hist. 8. 5. Vol. 7.PUXVI,

Mintern Bros, imp.

ALLAGECRINUS AUSTINII. E.& C.

C -Berjeau. del.et

Ani. & Mag. Nat, Hist.S. 5 Vol. 7, PUXVIL

eye
Ly JOO

Mintern Bros imp

i a a PA RRR Tha une” 7 ay >

.
" 5
~
‘
”
~
’
i
is
P,
, 3
4
ae
+)
é . } Fe } Prune:
\, : ea ; ape gos Poa
phan i ¥ ys ie Va |e , me
Whee, A Lee ay fate act eee Ts) on
Kt ‘ er ak f Th
i = ue vee . b U
OP A an wis ne ‘ t i i

Ct AEA RAIA AL AAA

A a keno
SARA ARF

Ann & Mag Nat Hist $5 Vol. 7 Pl. XVIL

NIUAYY
MNS Lit

1 i
ive
ny Marne eee
Ve ny
lige Dt ateencten on Maa
Mow ‘ o
Yt v~
Ny peheing aye 2,
PV UNC ie rs

Eee ey ee Anaassanhanienl

oot

Dannnmnncn( (int

Mantern Bros. ith

ij Ann & Mag. Nat.Hist.S.5. Vol. 7. PLXIX.

Ree
PERNA YG
Edwm Wilson del et hth Mintern Bros. imy

CHAMA LEON® O'SHAUGHNESSII

Ann.&.Mag. Nat. Hist. 5.5. Vol.7 PL.XX.

A95:

oS ax

Hy. Sykes del

Mintern Bros, imp.

; Ann.&. Mag. Nat. Hist. $.5.Vol.7.PL.X.

Mintern Bros, imp

Hy. Sykes del et lith

Ann.& Mag. Nat. 8.5. Vol. 7. PUL. XXL.

Mintern Bros ump

Edwin Wilson del

i,
i

i Tt

. = i

’
A
ae
BN
Dy

¢
-
“*

oe iew

een
E i ' - sania annette

eS ee nies

a oe i eat Seu
Seen pS aki atl Am
eee
re ee
1h le tem A
; mare Pn Ante itor
ee ae
befeng™
leap oft

x -
meompeateenatt
Sst aiitadedes
ne hain HA ate TE B
eala

pate aomecinet tele :
wheter ome

ee enn - 1! Pp a . ara aren >
- oy mare
I A nhl e- ~ - neonates
ee ae ae ae 2 os - aa hi ayn dled
~ : ¥ Pst Ny at AM TON
eh pear atectt ote eat
oe Oe

> ‘ PSY PN OA ~ ’
rnc na 2 “ wre “f ‘ al eee Ps . . : eae

sna tetntne oka R- fails pti or ln Rar - ~ ete Pi a - pene a Astana oh efi
’ ’ . P - etn. Song etre ste et nar . : “ Fe ia

ma nie - a ’ Me ig ro th ese AB NE

E mana ? oa

eR a ge tt td He = ~ ~

— ee ee

oH Speen = 4 aan at
anita oe eet as pat AE Spe ee ay
op react eee tt cron - : vps a
= he
rae >
Prarie Bann ws wee -
en aera ae ae pata NEA Se - ee a er Spee
; tnt * = eae sae
eee aS Peper gee ane
nan a BCP

ee Rae Ae oer e eis yoo of 3 °
Soph wet Oe ~~ - a2 2 ie peerpt at
a a os bs = rs . e sen ee ead

Internet Archive Audio

Featured

Top

Images

Featured

Top

Software

Featured

Top

Books

Featured

Top

Video

Featured

Top

Mobile Apps

Browser Extensions

Archive-It Subscription

Save Page Now

Full text of "The Annals and magazine of natural history; zoology, botany, and geology"

See other formats